Full text of "Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, Incorporated"

See other formats

VOL. 65 PART 1 25 JULY, 1941

TRANSACTIONS OF
THE ROYAL SOCIETY
OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

ADELAIDE

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS
KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE

Price - - One Guinea

Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide,
for transmission by post as a periodical

VOL. 65 — 1941

TRANSACTIONS OF
THE ROYAL SOCIETY
OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

ADELAIDE

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS
KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE

' Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide,
for transmission by post as a periodical

CONTENTS

Oxsrruary—Epwin ASHBY oe we ic a

Bernot, R. M., and VocELsanc, E.: Conaiies Voodbulenies of the Ngadjuri and
Dieri T ribes, South Austraha .. Fe

Menrcer, F. V.: eaeaaberla Pollen in the City “a Adelaide andl Environs

Turner, A. J.: A Revision of the Australian Heliodinidae (Lepidoptera)

Womers.teEy, H.: Rediscovery of one of Canestrini’s Australian Acarids ..

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M.: Some Nematodes from Australian Birds of
Prey i

Evans, J. W.: New Anstealian hee fener :

Womerstey, H.: Revisional Notes on the Australian Suces ol Tenuipalpus Gecoatnn.
Tetranychidae)

Crocker, R. L., and SkKEwEs, er R: The Puncigal Soil anc ‘Geecucu Gepleidonshins
on Yudnapinna Station, North- -west South Australia

Womers.Ley, H., and Sourucott, R. V.: Notes on the Sraaiaiiae Gaara & ee
tralia and New Zealand .. :

Lupsrook, N, H.: Gastropoda tren (he Aeateie Bare ‘Ade iaide. Smith Aveta,
together with a List of some Miscellaneous Fossils from the Bore

Crocker, R. L.: Notes on the Geology and Physiography of South-east Sout ee
tralia, with reference to late Climatic History Z ‘

Love, J. R. B.: Worora Kinship oe ats a = A = ze a
Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M.: Ascaroid Nematodes from Australian Birds ..
Tinpate, N. B., and Noone, 1 Vv. v. Results of the Harvard-Adelaide Universities

Anthropological Expedition, 1938-39, Analysis of an Australian Aboriginal’s
Hoard of Knapped Flint Ee : aE oe :

Prescott, J. A., and Skewes, H. Ry: An Reaiinenien: of some Soils oni Tranieat
Australia wi Pe ie an ms ae :s oe = x me,

Jounston, T. H., and Ancet, L. M.: Life-cycle of the Trematode, Diplostomum
murrayense J. & C es

CHAPMAN, F.: Report on Ene eniflings si eddie now of the FES. “En-
deavour” along the Continental Shelf of the South-east Coast of Australia ..

Cooke, W. T.: The Bromine Content of Some Saline Waters in South Australia

Fin.tayson, H. H.: On Central Australian Mammals, Pt. ii. The Muridae ee

TinpDALE, N. B.: Native Songs of the South-east of South Australia, Pt. ii

CLELAND, J. B., and BLack, J. M.: An Enumeration of the Vascular Plants of Kanpaiis (ero)
Island. Additions and Corrections

Wark, D. C.: The Variability of the Length of ‘the Rainfall, etn, and fe once ie
Influential Rainfall in South Australia ee

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M.: Additional ogee. from Racecar ee S

Ba.owin, J. G., and Crocker, R. L.: The Soils and Vegetation of Portion of Kangaroo
Island, South Australia .. :

Jounston, T. H.: Bathers’ I¢ch (Schistosome demenees in ie Miintiey: Sse South
Australia :

Jounston, T. H., a heey ke Mi: iieirery of the A eraiiees nee
australis n. sp. A

Womers_Ley, H.: The eed ie Garth. rashes (Atma Dene iacae) Se “haiti

Mawson, D.: The Wilpena Pound Formation and underlying Proterozoic Sediments ..

Mawson, D.: Middle Proterozoic Sediments in the Neighbourhood of Copley ..

Mountrorp, C, P.: An Unrecorded Method of Manufacturing Wooden Implements by
Simple Stone Tools ae - 0 F.: ai He be Be

Jounston, T. H., and Ancet, L. ve The Eseuey of Echinostoma revolutum in
South Australia

Womersiry, H.: New Sees of ES aatihis te ina, NDiete Cee dae) trot Peete alia
and New Zealand

STEELE, H. VEveErs: Some Sisemnbnns on sis maak Oui Development isl oaweiais
cruciata Sauss, in the Field

Buiack, J. M.: Additions to the Flora of South Misiratia, No. 40.
BALANCE-SHEET .

List or FELLOWS, ETC.

INDEX

OBITUARY NOTICE

EDWIN ASHBY, 1895-1941

Summary

By the sudden death of Edwin Ashby on 8 January, at his home at Blackwood, South Australia, our
Society has lost one of its oldest members. He was a member of Council from 1900 to 1919 and
Vice-president from 1919 to 1921. He was a Fellow of the Linnean Society of London, and a
Member of the British Ornithologists’ Union.

THE LATE EDWIN

ASHBY

TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY
OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED

OBITUARY NOTICE

EDWIN ASHBY, 1895-1941

By the sudden death of Edwin Ashby on 8 January, at his home at Black-
wood, South Australia, our Society has lost one of its oldest members, He was
a member of Council from 1900 to 1919 and Vice-President from 1919 to 1921,
He was a Fellow of the Linnean Society of London, and a Member of the British
Ornithologists’ Union.

Born at Capel, Surrey, England, in 1861, he was a delicate child, and except
for a short period at a small Friends’ School in Surrey his education was much
interrupted by illness.

His intense interest in most branches of Natural History was acquired from
his father, who frequently took all his seven children for excursions around their
home at Redhill, Surrey, in search of butterflies, plants, ete. On leaving school he
travelled the north of England for his father’s business of tea merchant of Idol
Lane, London. While travelling he again developed pneumonia, and his father
shortly afterwards dying of the same complaint, the family became alarmed; and,
on the doctor’s orders, he was sent on a long sea voyage. He came to Australia on
the ship “Torrens” in 1885, and after visiting all States, as well as New Zealand,
he returned to England in 1888 via America. Having a heavy cold and hay-fever
on his return, he was again ordered to leave before the winter. Thereupon, with
his eldest sister, he came and settled in Adelaide. On his marriage, in 1890, his
sister returned to England.

As a member of the Society of Friends, he attended many conferences in the
different States, and it was during such trips, as well as while inspecting properties
as a land agent, that he was able to get into the scrub and indulge in his study of
bird and plant life. In 1902 he moved to Blackwood. In 1918 he visited America
with his eldest son, who required medica] help, and was thus able to continue his
natural history interests in the neighbourhood of Baltimore. Returning from
America, the rest of his life, except for visits to Tasmania and Victoria, was spent
at Blackwood.

He was an enthusiastic gardener and paid particular attention to the growing
of native shrubs from all States in his garden at Blackwood. Other groups of
interesting exotic plants, such as Cactaceae and various succulents, also claimed
his attention. Being an ardent supporter of Native Reserves, such as Flinders
Chase, he was a prime mover in obtaining the Chauncy’s Line Reserve.

lis published works have been chiefly concerned with the Chitons, and since
Iredale and Hull’s “A Monograph of the Australian Loricates” (Roy. Zool. Soc.,
N.S.W., 1927), which gives a complete bibliography to that date, he has written
the following:

1928 The Rediscovery of Tonicia cuneata Suter and Acanthochites thileniusi
Thiele, together with the description of a new genus and short review of
the New Zealand Acanthochitonidae. Tr. N.Z. Inst., 58, 392-407

1928 Notes on a Collection of Chitons from the Capricorn Group, Queensland.
Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 52, 167-173

Trans. Roy, Soc. S.A,, 65, (1), 25 July 1941

1928 Further Notes on Western Australian Chitons. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,
52, 174-181

1928 Notes on and Additions to Australian Fossil Polyplacophora. Proc. Roy.
Soc. Vict., 41, (2), (n.s.), 220-230

1928 South African Chitons, being a Description of the Polyplacophora repre-
sented in the Turton Collection. Proc. Mal. Soc., 18, (2), 76-93

1929 Contribution to the Fauna of Rottnest Island, No. 2, Polyplacophora.
J. Roy Soc. W. Aust., 15, 47-54

1929 New Zealand Fossil Polyplacophora. Tr. N.Z. Inst., 60, 366-378

1929 Notes on the Fauna of Dirk Hartog Island, Western Australia. No. 1,
Aves; No, 2, Polyplacophora. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 53, 54-66
1929 Taxonomic Value of Characters in the order Polyplacophora. Proc. Mal.
Soc., 18, (4), 159-164
1929 Monograph of the South African Polyplacophora. Annals 5. Afr. Mus.,
30, (1), 1-59
1939 Notes on the Chiton, Dinoplax gigas, with descriptions of the Juvenile and
various varieties. Annals Durban Mus, 3, (4), 77-79
1939 Fossil Chitons from Mornington, Victoria. Proc. Linn. Soc., London,
pl. iti, 186-189
1940 A New Fossil Cryptoplax from the Phocene of S, Aust. Trans. Roy.
Soc. S. Aust., 64, (2)
Jointly with B. C. Cotton.
1929 Notes on Australian Polyplacophora. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 54, 57-58
1934 New species of Chitons from Broome, Western Australian, J. Roy. Soe.
W. Aust., 20, 213-219
1936 South Australian Fossil Chitons. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, (4), 509-512
1937 Descriptions of two New Species of Australian Chitons with additional
Notes and Records. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 41, 145-148
1939 New Fossil Chitons from the Miocene and Pliocene of Victoria. Rec.
S. Aust. Mus., 6, (3), 209-242
His ornithological papers have already been listed in the “Emu” for 1 April,
1941, Botanically, he has not published much, but an important paper, “Review
of the South Australian representatives of the genus Correa, with descriptions
of new species,” appeared in the Proc. Linnean Soc., London, pt, iii, 214-221,

for 1939.

COMPARATIVE VOCABULARIES OF THE
NGADJURI AND DIERI TRIBES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By R. M. BERNDT and T. VOGELSANG

Summary

In this paper vocabularies of the Ngadjuri [‘qad'juri] and Dieri tribes of South Australia are
compared. That of the Ngadjuri was compiled from information obtained at intermittent periods
from Gunaia ['Gunaia] (third child) while on a visit to Adelaide during February to March 1940;
that of the Dieri is by T. Vogelsang who was born in the Dieri country and knows their language.
Gunaia was seventy-seven years of age and is ['Waria] of Tindale (1937, p. 149) and [Nadjli’buna]
of Berndt (1940, p. 456).

COMPARATIVE VOCABULARIES OF THE
NGADJURI AND DIERI TRIBES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By R. M. Bernpt and T. VocEetsanc
[Read 10 April 1941]

In this paper vocabularies of the Ngadjuri [‘nad’juri] and Dieri tribes of
South Australia are compared. That of the Ngadjuri was compiled from
information obtained at intermittent periods from Gunaia [’Gunaia] (third child)
while.on a visit to Adelaide during February to March 1940; that of the Dieri is
by T. Vogelsang who was born in the Dieri country and knows their language.
Gunaia was seventy-seven years of age and is [’Waria] of Tindale (1937, p. 149)
and [Nadjli’buna] of Berndt (1940, p. 456).

Except for a few words by S. Le Brun in KE. M. Curr (1886, 2, p. 140) and by
N. B. Tindale (1937, pp. 149-153), no vocabularies of the Ngadjuri people have
been recorded.

The Ngadjuri language belongs to the “Lakes” or more properly to the
“Eastern Group,” and the construction of words is similar to that of the Wailpi
of the Northern Flinders Ranges. A broad comparison of the two languages
(Ngadjuri and Dier1) shows only a slight similarity,

The following table compares several kinship terms of the Wailpi, Pankala
(Bangala), Ngadjurt and Dieri, those of the first two tribes aiter Elkin (1938).

Warttrr PANKALA NGADJURI DrEri
father = - = bapi bapi *vapi *yaperi
mother - - yami nami ‘ygami ’gandri
wife - atuna katu “atu "noa
sister - ; yakana yaka "jaga *kaku (elder sister)
eldest brother = - nayana yuya nunya “neje

Hale and Tindale (1925, pp. 57-60) recorded many words of the Wailpi
tribe to some extent similar to those of the Ngadjurt.

Reference to Dicri vocabulary and grammar has been made recently by
Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, p. 369).

In the transcription, the alphabet of the International Phonetic Association
as modified for Australian languages has been used (Tindale, 1935 and 1940),
except in the case of the Wailpi.

The distinct [v] sound occurs, as in [’vapi] (father) and [vad'’napa]
(circumcision), and is probably the most noticeable. This is often a [bv] sound
hard to distinguish from the [b]; it is rare in Australia but occurs in the
Flinders Ranges, South Australia (Hale and Tindale, 1925, and Elkin, 1938).
Capell also mentions that the bilabial [v] is found in parts of north-west

Australia.
A PARTIAL LIST OF PRONOUNS
PERSONAL POSSESSIVE

NGADJ URI DIERI NGADJURI DIERI
I - - neiji ‘nani my - neiji ‘nakani
we - ‘yadlu *nalani mine - nadju, nuta ‘yakani
you - nena jidni our - ‘yadlu *naianani
he - nena nauja, nulu your - nena ‘jinkani
she - nania
it - - gundi’itji "jenia

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (1), 25 July 1941

NGADJURI
me ~ neijl
myself -
own - nena’idla
your -

OBJECTIVE

DIERI
‘pani
¢ nani/mata

} “yakani
‘jinkani

GENERAL VOCABULARIES

abdomen - e
adam’s-apple —- -
adder, large - -
adder, small wood -
ah! - - -
ancestral being (a giant)
ancestral times - =
(eternal dream-time)
ant, black - -
ant, bull - -
ant, green 7 -
ant, winged e -
ant-hole, winged ~

anus - =
aperture (of the body) -
arm - - -
arm-pit, hair of - 7
away - 7 2
hack, the - -
back-bone of a fish -
barter, or exchange
bat - : 7
beat, to - - -
beating on the ground to
accompany chants -
bee, stingless, or blowfly
berry, a grey bush with
green - - -
billy-button (a flower) -
bird, yellow-breasted — -
blackfellows (or peopic)
blind - ~ -
blood —- - -
boomerang - -
bone, sharpened - -
boy (before circumcision)
boy (after circumcision )-
branches rustling -
breasts - ~ 2
breasts, heavy - -
“bruising” (during re-
venge expedition after
a death) - -
bullroarer, large - -

NGADJURI

bunduka
‘judni’muku
‘apara
munka

“wa!

mirlki
warumata

“wipa

‘ardu

muni

“wip’a

’wip’a'junta,
‘wip’a’wadlju

mundu’wadlju

‘japa

“yuntu

‘bidnu’buti

‘yukana

‘jadna

‘jadna’walpu

kopera

mik’a

dundu

bun’ba’ta
mitji'mitji

‘unma
‘wilu
, Fs
arku'eta
“juru

alts
mena mika
garu
‘wadna
“baija
*mandu
vad’napa
inderi
yama.
nama'yara

midli’inda
‘wetana

DIERI
‘mandra
wonkili
‘wiparu

‘warula’mala

ai
mirka

‘katjiriri
‘kar jiriri’minka

‘ura
‘kapuru’nujdu

‘tuku
‘tuku’muku’parundru
*jinki’malina
*pintji’pintjin’dara
nandrana

‘kata’nandrana
‘muntju’runtju

‘kana

’putju

j ;

kumari

*kir ca

’muku’wutju
*kanku

‘karuwali, ’tjutjuru

“yama
‘nama’madi

*junta

WaAILPI

wipa
aldu

arti
wadna

bullroarer, small -
bullroarer design

bush, green

bush, small grey (havin
medicinal qualities )

bustard -
buttocks -
camp = -
camp, men’s
camp, women’s

camp, young men’s
cap, widow’s mourning

carrots, wild
cat, native
catch, to -
caterpillar
chest -
child, male
child, female
cicatrise

cicatrisation ceremony

circumcision

cloud = -

clouds, heavy white

clouds, thunder
clover -
club -
coccyx -
cockatoo,
coition -
coition, act of
cooked -

corpse -

white

country, flat (or plain)

country, tribal
covering -
crab -

creeper (Clematis )

creek, or river
crow -

crow, white-eyed

curlew -
dance, to

dance, an itnitative

dancing during initiation

deaf -
dead -

design or marks -
digging (with yam- -stieley

dingo -

duck -

eagle - hawk
tailed), black

eagle-hawk, red -

(wedge -

NGADJURI
muranali
‘ita‘malka’na
bundi

*judali
‘wala

bulta

‘wadli

meru wadli
‘atuni’wadli
mandu'wadli
‘wena

kaku
'aku'indji
muyguta
fjadna
gundu
meru'vapa
“atun’vapa
mayka
‘wiljarn
vad’napa

butji

malku
gundu’malku
“walbula
*wirl

‘wadnu
gudaki

budlti

‘judni
‘umbata
indata

bitana

bunari

‘palda

“jilaki
‘winda’murlku
bari

‘wakala
mena’nalkara
“wudlaru
mutaya

guri

‘nanbuta
uri’mika
indata

malka
dandura
‘wilka, ‘wurdiyi
mia. :ri

’wildu
mura

Dreri

’pita’kulja’kulja

’kala’tura
‘pit’ti

‘yura
‘nura’materi
‘gura’widla
‘yura’matert

‘jikaura
,
padana

’kal si’bil i’bil si,’

munambir :1
‘*kupa’kanku
‘kupa’mankara

Pe athe
wiljaru

‘materi’jankana,

WAILPI

wal’la

paya

‘karuwala’nankana

’palku
‘talara’palku

wulpi

“talaru’palku'pildri’pildri

‘kalumba

’katranu
‘tanina

*pindra
"nari
*palara, ‘palparu

’walpana
“kun’kutir ci

'kaijiri

’wil’luru
“kil’lina

“talpakur :u
‘nari

malka

’wadna
*kintala’jampa
‘tau‘urla

’kara’wara

wit

veri
wakla

wilka

wildu

ear - - -
elbow - - Fy
embers - = =
emu - - =
euro - - -
evening
excreta - i -
expectorate, to - -
eye - > -
eye-lash - - -
eyed, sharp = -
fat (from corpse) -
feet or toes - -
finger or hand - =
fire - - -
fire, earth-covered -
fire-stick -
fire-drill (basal stick) -
fire-drill (twirling or up
right stick) -
fish - - -
fish head, ~ -
fish trap (any kind)
fist - 7 -
flint (for fire-making )
flint-knife - -

1
t

flood - - -
flower - ~ -
fore-head
fore-skin - -
frighten, to - =
frog - - -
goanna - - -
goanna, large (Varanus
gouldii) - 2
go back! - -
going, I am 5
grasshopper - -
grease - - -
ground - = -
grubs - - -
grubs, sandalwood -
guard-stick - -
hair, human - ~
hand, lines on - -
hawk, sparrow - -
head ~ -
head-band (of hair string)
heel ~ - -
here - Mo -
hip - - -
hole,a_ - cs 7
hollow in a creek’s bank
homicidal native -
husband - 4 -

qT
1

NGADJURI
uri
*yjupu
be :la
“waridji
‘juru
7alawara
gudna
‘nalga
mena
mena’ butt
mena’ walpu
muy'i
tidna
mura
gadla
dunda
padia’widni
‘watate’widni

‘aru’watuy
guja
‘akadi'guja
‘wit’ wala
mura’muku
‘judla’gunija
‘judla

‘wunda

murlku

‘junta

‘wart’ bi

"wa ctnika, ‘weininda
"waka

budna

‘ina’ wal :a
‘’wun’ma’mara!
-"wandata
pityi/ilki
mary’i

‘jata

bati
bulkara’bati
‘jadli’gat'ta
’akuri
mura’bari
*yalulka
’akadi
muya

maku

"je

binka

*japa
‘won'guri
’waraya
mani

DIER! W£AILPI
‘talpa

“tinti’pudu

warichi
manja

‘waru kati

‘kalkaura
"*kudna’na
‘yaltja’warana
milki
milki’pilpa

mani
‘tidna
‘mara
‘turu

mara
ardla

man'ja

*paru
‘paru’mana'tandra

‘mara’muku

“turu’tula

‘kuku’ wanta,
‘kandi’muku

“nari’mata

"tiwi

*milpiri

yudla

‘japali
’kalatiri
‘kapiri

?
ngar na

*pirinti radna
"tikamai!
"yani’ wupai
‘pindri
"mani

‘mita

wichirika

ees
padi

*paria

"kir’ki

‘maya’tandra
‘jarpu

‘ninkida

‘kapa

‘minka

‘na’pa dulkuru

noa

hut =
hymen -
jaw -

kangaroo (general) -

kangaroo, rock

kangaroo, red (male) = -
kangaroo, red (female) -
kangaroo-skin bag =

king-fisher
knee -
labia minor
lark -
like this -
lip -
lizard, frilled
lizard, jew
lizard, sleepy
lizard, small
look -
louse -
magpie,
backed}
mallee -
mallee hen

sinall

NGADJ URI

- ganagu
- mita’japa
- ‘nilkinja
gudla
- gandu
‘wudlu
*waulwi
"wud jakuda
julu

- bura

- munini, bimba’kakuti

- dere :lja

- “art

- ‘nimi

- gadnu

- ’kudnu

- ‘alda

- UV iti

- ‘nakuka‘icla

- gudlu
(black-

- bindi’garu

- gula

- budnti

mallee root, water-bearing guna

man, a -
man, old
man, young
medicine-man
female)
milk, human
Mitky-way
moon -
morning -
mouse -
move! do not
mulga_—-
nail, finger
nape of neck
native tobacco
net, fishing
night -
nipple (female)
no! (stay)
no! (refusal)
noise -
nose
nostrils -

nut grass (tubers) -

ochre, black
ochre, red
opossum
opossum rug

opossum skin pad

owl, large

- “Juri, meru, ‘epa

(male or

- mindaba, mindabi
- "gama
- “walibart
- bera
> “nupuru
- muygu
- ‘panjeli!
- mulka
- berini
- “yumdi
- *pitjuri
- minda, mindi
- ‘wildja
- /yami
= “una :!
- ‘ne!
- ‘walpara
- mudla
- mudla’wadiju
"jalka
- muruya
- "jumbura, mildi
- bilda
- hilda’palda
- ‘walka
- ‘winda

DigERi WaAILPl

‘yura
‘tjukuru
wudlu

‘tjukuru jakuta

‘pan'tja

*jeruja
‘mana/mim ‘1

ardnu
*‘kadni ’kadni
‘kadiwaru
‘najina
"kata

wurukult
yunda

"napa

wulka
‘pinaru
‘materi yongari
“kunki
‘yama
‘kadri’pari’wilpa
"pira
‘tanu’bana
“punta
‘wata’walki’walkiamai !
‘malka
‘mar :a’pir ti
‘wakura
*pitjiri
“jama
‘tinkani
‘gama’tjilpi

vera

’wata

‘mir’tja

‘mudla
‘mudla’wilpa

"jaua
’mita’karku’maru
‘mita’karku’maralji
*pildra

‘winta

owl, small
parrot, green grass =
parrot, green tree =
parrot, grey - =
parrot, blue mountain -
parrot, mulga_-
parrot, red-backed :
parrot, shell = =
parrot, blue-bonnet -
peach, wild 4 =
pearl-shell - -
pears, wild <
pears, wild (roots of) -
penis = - = a
penis, erection of -
picking up 4
playstick (knobbed) — -
playstick (thrown through
a bush or along clay-
pan) - -
playstick (plain) 3
Pleiades - -
pointing-bone = - :
porcupine grass (iriodes
potatoes, wild -
pouch (for carrying
objects in) -
pubic covering - -
pubic hair - -
purulent discharge -
quartz, white = - -
quandong - -
rain - - -
rain-maker - 2
rain-stone (gypsum) = -
rain-bow - -
rat 7 - =
reeds (at waterholes) -
receptacle or wooden dish
revenge expedition (bon-
ing) - - -
ribs ~ - -
robin red-breast - -
round - : =
sandalwood tree -
scapula - - -
scars (on body) - -
serub land
seeds, Acacia
seeds of the silverwattle -
seeds, ground - -
semen = = =
shadow - < -
shaking out dust -
she-oak tree - -

‘
'

NGADJURI
"yani
mandelja
guli
’wurebu
’walaja
gupilja

‘wulur ti

‘wut

makil :a
*‘yawala
"nandi

‘wari
‘wariewaku
‘narinjenara
*jakura

*kukuru
’waba
bulali
badnu
‘nala
balku

‘jakuta
*wunari
"yani

gaba
“judla’gadna
gu'ti

galwi
galwi'jura
galwi’biki
guriqi
wada

“jaki’ walala
*pitji

badnu

“urinja

*jupi

buri

bulkara, baru
wer

manka
’walpa
min’ga
vaka’mai :
bulpa

"guru

buya
‘kunma'‘rindma

eudli

DIERI
‘munju

‘katatara
‘pulanku

’kaldrati

’kidni

, Sh
manina kurana

‘kuku :r :u’pirkina

*‘mankara’ wora
‘naria’moku

‘jakuta
‘yampu
*winti

‘talara’marda
‘talara’kunki
*talara
agra

kurt kir :a
‘punta
*wirka, ‘wilti

pia

*pankiriri

W AILPI

bard’laru

wulti

warilardly

aya

wuranyt

wichi

t ’ , . , .
dampu'dampuru, ’pira’pira

‘kalju’mara
‘tuki’imuku
‘dapa
‘mita’kunari
‘kuntjiripaua

*punpu

’katu
‘kanti’kanti’bana

emburu

shin S - -
silverwattle - -
sing, to - - =
sit, to - = -
sitting down of youth at
initiation
sky - = i
sleep - a +
snake, carpet = - -
snake, mythological -
snake, small red (asso-
ciated with the ’akaru)
snake, small - -
snake, tiger - -
snake, whip - -
Southern Cross (lit. eagle)
Southern Triangle -
sparrow, diamond -
spear -
spear-thrower = - =
spider, black
spider, trap-door s
spider’s web - -
spine = - - -
spirits or ancestral beings
spirit of deceased -
spirits causing heat -
spirits inhabiting hills -
spirit-children — - -
spirits that torment
spirit-men (ancestral or
medicine-men ) -
spirit-world - -
star = - =
stick - - -
stone
stone for grinding seeds -
stone, acreck - -
stony country = ~- -
stone-axe x 5
stomach - - -
string or fibre - -
sun - - -
sunrise - - -
sunset - = 3
subincision - -
swelling of penis after
circumcision - -
swelling, body - -
swim, to - os
talk, to - - -
“talk.” by sticks on the
ground, or “silent-talk’’
teeth - - -
testicles - - -

NGADJURI

*yati

vaka

guri wagutja
ikana

nara’ daburumbura

ikara
meja’wanti
mudlu
‘akaru

babu'lara

“arkubi
‘wiper
“wildu
‘winda’gudna
"iti

‘winda

midla

‘waku
“arambura
‘waku’quyura
bari

ligjura

‘wu japi
“epa'tura
muyiura
muri‘papa
‘wunda’winju

mindaba
’kintjura
budli
*widni
murku

murku, gunja’buri

gunja
‘udnamutna

bunduka
ita, “uri
“jandu, ‘djendu
‘jandu'witjanu

“jandu’yalpayda

bita
mudjuna

muyari
mulka

‘jata’mulka
"era

gadlu

Dieri W AILPI

‘wankana
‘gamana

‘part'wilpa
“muka’turana

*‘woma binaru

’wanku

’wiparu
*paia'tidna
’mankarawara
“tiwilitja

*kalti wadlala

,
marankara

‘tuku’julkura, ‘tuku'wirdi
’mura’mura

"kutji

*pari’tjiwaka buudli

“pita

’ .

marda miri
‘marda’kuparu mara, wadla

‘marda’paltirani
‘kalara

‘mandra

*jinka

‘ditji
‘ditji’dunka
‘ditji’ wiri

yuundu

‘purulke’tjerina
‘tara‘kana
*jatana

‘mana’tandra
“kadlu’kapi

NGADJURI DIERI WAILPI

thigh = - - - gunti ‘tara
throat - - - “judni ‘jarkala
thunder - - - ‘kandu, gurini *pildri’pildri
tongue - - - {jali ‘tali_
top 7 i - aru watuy mri
totem or “mate” - - daru, ‘numera ‘nanpu, “tua
tree, burnt : - ‘kakati ‘patara
tree, ti- - - - guda ora
umbilical cord - - mindati
umbilical cord, the one

who retains it - - ‘witjeti
under - - - ‘watate ‘yarinelu
urine - - - ‘gumbu, ‘kumbu ‘kipara
vagina - - - ‘aka, mini, wulaka "kilsa
virgin - 4 - muti
vulva - - - ‘yata, mudlju indi
wagtail, willy = - - ‘witjililki “tindri’tindri
waist = - - - ‘widli
waist-band of hair-string ‘akuli
wallaby, rock - - gandu andu
wallaby, small - - ginda
wallaby, scrub - - ‘wadla
water or rain - - galwi "yapa awi
water hen - - ‘wuna’djildi
water-hole - - aki ‘yapa’kudu
water from the mallee

root - - - guyu’galwi
whale - ~ - ‘yakula
what? - - - ‘a? ‘mina ?
whirl wind - - ‘jarw jaru, ‘yadla’dara ‘watara’watara
white = - - - ‘wenda ‘waru, “pulu
widow - - - maduku “‘namuri
wind, strong = - ‘nadlan'dara *watara’yur iu'njur su
wind, north - - bakara
wind, south - - ‘wailpi’wari ee
woman - - - ‘atuni widla adni
wombat - - - ‘watu yalpu
wood-pigeon —- - manbi ‘kuru’kuru
yacca - - ‘wuara
yam - - - ‘numpa
yam-stick - - ‘kata ; mungu-wiri
yes! - - - “em! kau ngaku

REFERENCES
Brernpt, R. M. 1940 Oceania, 10, (4)
Bernot, R. M. and Vocersana, T., 1941, Records of the S. Aust. Mus., 6, (4)
Curr, E. M. 1886 The Australian Race, 2,
CApeELL, A. 1940 Oceania, 10, (3)
Exxin, A. P. 1938 The Australian Aborigines
Evxin, A. P. 1938 Oceania, 8, (4)
Have, H. M., and Trnpare, N. B. 1925 Records of the S. Aust. Mus., 3, (1)
TinpaLr, N. B. 1935 Records of the S. Aust. Mus., 5, (3)
Trnpacr, N. B. 1937 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 61
TrnpaLe, N. B. 1940 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64, (1)

ATMOSPHERIC POLLEN IN THE CITY OF ADELAIDE AND ENVIRONS

By F. V. MERCER, University of Adelaide
(Communicated by J. G. Wood)

Summary

The work described in a previous paper on pollen frequencies (Mercer, 1939, Trans. Roy. Soc. S.
Aust., 63, (2) , 372) at Adelaide has been continued for a further year. Certain unknown grains have
since been identified, and as a result of the two years’ observations it is now possible to present a
generalised picture of the pollen grain cycle in Adelaide.

ATMOSPHERIC POLLEN IN THE CITY OF ADELAIDE AND ENVIRONS

By F. V. Mercer, University of Adelaide
(Communicated by J. G. Wood)

[Read 10 April 1941]

The work described in a previous paper on pollen frequencies (Mercer, 1939,
‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 63, (2), 372) at Adclaide has been continued for a
further year, Certain unknown grains have since been identified, and as a result
of the two years’ observations it is now possible to present a generalised picture of
the pollen grain cycle in Adelaide.

The sites were the same as before, but vertical as well as horizontal slides
were exposed at cach tri-weekly period during the year 1 August 1939-31 July
1940. At the Town Hall the vertical slides contained 63°7%, and at Croydon
63°5% of the total count, and at each individual count the percentage of cach
species was approximately the same on both sides. The relative percentages of
the different species are shown in the accompanying table, the frequencies and
incidence throughout the year being approximately the same as previously reported.

Ash Pine Elm Plane Cupressus Acacia
Town Hall... ao 59D 25°8 71 11-3 3-9 0-2
Croydon hh aa 46 2°6 0-1 1-0 1-9 0-6
Unknown

Casuarina Grass Dock Chenopods Group Araucaria
Town Hall ... te LB 11-7 0-8 5-1 9-9 0-4
Croydon ahs a. 4 28-2 0-9 13-7 10-8 oe

Echium Compositae Sisymbrium Walnut Conifer Plantain
Town Hall .... a 0°6 2:1 0-8 0-1 1-4 3-9
Croydon tn. a ~O°3 4-4 0-3 — 0-1 3-5

Almond Tamarix No. 4 Olea
Town Hall ... = -— 0-8 6:4
Croydon “ly . 14-0 4.5 1:5 3:2

SPECIES NOT PREVIOUSLY IDENTIFIED

Dock (Rimex spp.) occurred in very small quantities from September-
December, probably from plants commonly growing on wasteland.

Salvation Jane (fchuon plantagineum 1...) occurred sporadically from
October-November. The species is normally insect-pollinated and rarely becomes
atmospheric.

Walnut (Juglans regia 1..)—A few grains regularly from mid-October to
mid-November.

Sisymbrium spp—Occasionally present in September-October.

Olive (Olea europea L.)—Common in many areas, especially in the foothills.

Grains occurred from end of October to end of November. At the Waite
Research Institute, Glen Osmond, counts rose from one or two grains at the cnd
of October to 2,200 per unit area on 13-15 November, and thereafter fell to zero
at end of November. At other sites a similar incidence but smaller numbers was
observed.
; She-oak (Casuarina spp.), reported as No. 3 in the previous communication ;
it occurred over extended periods May-July and August-December but never more
than 2% of the total. Native she-oaks common in the Mount Lofty Ranges have
following flowering periods: C. stricta, summer; C. striata, June-December ;
C. Muelleriana, May-December.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.Ah, 65, (1), 25 July 1941

“Unknown group’—This is a residue of grains of doubtful origin. It reaches
a maximum in early spring when counts are high and doubtless includes some
already known tree pollens which are variable and difficult to identify at the mag-
nifications used for counting. The individual members of the group are never
present in large amounts nor for any length of time, and not therefore likely to
be of importance from a hay-fever aspect at Adelaide.

Tue GENERALISED PoLLEN CYCLE

This is shown graphically, utilising the data accumulated over two years.
The incidence and maximum for any species is the same for any part of the
Adelaide area, although the actual number of grains present depends on the
composition of adjacent vegetation.

All species listed produce pollen over long periods and can be regarded as
suspects in causing hay-fever. It is noteworthy that wild oats (Avena fatua),
still one of the commonest grasses around Adelaide in August-September with
large pollen grains is rarely found on the slides. Pollens found occasionally or

Composit,
4
| Elm é
4 Olea
Chenopodiaceae

a
4 Pine

General Pollen Chart in the City of Adelaide.
Each vertical division equals five grains per day per four square centimetres.

locally but not listed include: Eucalyptus spp. (September-April) ; Tamarix
(January-February) ; Malvaceae (probably Lagunaria), Spring.

In Spring, at higher levels, such as at the Town Hall, Adelaide, the grass
pollen consists mainly of smaller grains, whereas at the lower levels of the Uni-
versity and Croydon, both large and small grains are about equal.

The outstanding features of the cycle are:

June-July: Ash;

August-September: chiefly exotic trees, notably pines, elms, plane, Cupressus,

and occasionally Acacia and Casuarina ;

August-April: annual and herbaceous plants, notably grasses.

The above cycle applies only to Adelaide and its environs.

At increasing

distances from the city the prominence of pollen from introduced species is

probably replaced by that from indigenous species.

IDENTIFICATION OF ComMMON POLLENS

The following key permits practical identification of the prominent pollens
likely to cause hay-fever in Adelaide. It does not pretend to be a systematic

classification but ig arranged for practical convenience.

Bladders present.

Grains spherical—
(a) starch grains prominent

(vb) exine reticulate
June—iurrows vague, reticulations small.
September—grains irregular.

October—exine thick between furrows and stains deeply.

October—reticulations prominent and fine.
November—reticulations prominent and coarse.
January.
(c) exine pored.
pores single,
pores sunken.
pores papilliform.
(d) intine star-shaped.
Grains aspidate—
pores 3.
pores 3-7,
pores oo.
Grains compound.
Grains triangular-spherical—
Furrows conspicuous.
‘i inconspicuous, exine rigid.
i" 9 grains irregular.

Pinus spp.

size 70 4, Araucaria

30» Rumex spp.

Fraxinus
Platanus
No. 4
Sisymobrivm
Olea

Tamarix

Graminae
Chenopodiaceae
Plantago
Cupressus

Casuarina
Ublnus
Juglans
Acacia

Amygdalus
Eucalyptus
Echium

A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN HELIODINIDAE
(LEPIDOPTERA)

By A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.R.E:S.

Summary

This family is a modern conception, which we owe to Meyrick. I cannot do better than to
commence by quoting his description from the Genera Insectorum (1914).

A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN HELIODINIDAE
(LEPIDOPTERA)

By A, JerFER1s Turner, M.D., F.R.E.S.
[Read 10 April 1941]

This family is a modern conception, which we owe to Meyrick. I cannot do
better than to commence by quoting his description from the Genera Insectorum
(1914).

“Head smooth; occlli usually present; tongue usually developed. Antennae
one-half to over 1, often strongly ciliated in male or fringed with long rough pro-
jecting scales, basal joint without pecten. Labial palpi slender with appressed
scales, pointed, usually long, recurved, often diverging, sometimes short, porrected.
Maxillary palpi short or usually very short, filiform; scaled, appressed to tongue,
or often obsolete. Posterior tibiae hairy, bristly, or smooth, with more or less
developed whorls of bristles or scales at origin of spurs, tarsi always with more
or less developed bristles at apices of joints; in repose habitually erected over back
or projecting laterally (in Vaniccla appressed to abdomen without touching
ground). Forewings narrow or very narrow, often widest near base, costa usually
rather strongly arched towards apex, tornus obsolete; 1b furcate or simple, 2 from
towards angle, 7 and 8 separate or stalked, 7 to termen or costa, 11 from about
middle. Ilindwings 1 or under 1, from narrowly elongate-ovate to lanceolate or
linear, cilia 1 to 6; 3-7 normally separate, 3 and 4 seldom stalked, 6 and 7 sometimes
stalked. Larvae with prolegs on segments 7-10 and 13, feeding externally or
mining in leaves, stems, galls, or fruits, or on scale insects (Coccidae).”

He adds that the family “is specially characterised by the singular habit of
erecting the posterior legs in repose, for which, as in the case of the peculiar
attitude of the Gracilariadae, it is difficult to imagine any adequate explanation ;
associated with this habit is the invariable presence of apical bristles (sometimes
very short) on the joints of the posterior tarsi, often more conspicuously developed
on the tibiae also.”

In the Genera Insectorum Meyrick recorded 41 genera and 227 species, but
in his revised Handbook of British Lepidoptera (1927) he states that the ntumber
had risen to about 70 genera and 350 species. Since then many have been
described in his Exotic Microlepidoptera, and there is no doubt many more will be
discovered. The family is mainly tropical, but is well represented in Australia by
22 genera and 118 species.

Key To GENERA

1 Hindwings linear-lanceolate or linear 2
Ilindwings more broadly lanceolate or narrowly clongate-ovate 13
2 Forewings smooth
Forewing with tufts of raised scales Trychnopepla
3 Palpi short, drooping Actinascclis
Palpi long, curved, ascending 4
4 Antennae with basal segment dilated ta form an eyecap 5
Antennae without eyecap 7
5 Anterior tibiae and tarsi much thickened with smooth scales anteela
Anterior tibiae and tarsi not dilated 6
6 Antennae in male simple Calicotis
Antennae in male with long ciliations Hieromantis
7 ‘Tongue with long hairs on base Idioglossa
Tongue without basal hairs 8
8 Antennae much longer than forewings Zaratha
Antennae not longer than forewings 9
9 Antennae nearly as long as forewings Ethirastis
Antennae not exceeding four-fifths 10
10 Forewings with 6 and 7 out of 8 Lsorrhow
Forewings with 6 separate 11

Trans. Row Sac. S.A,, 65, (1), 25 July 1941

11 Hindwings with 4 absent, male antennae simple Pachyrhabda
Hindwings with 4 present, male antennae ciliated 12

12 Antennae of male shortly or minutely ciliated Aeoloscelis
Antennae of male with very long cilia towards base Stathmopoda

13 Palpi short, drooping Heltodinides
Palpi moderate or long, curved, ascending 14

14. Forewings smooth 15
Forewings with tufts of raised scales Coracistis

15 Palpi very long, much exceeding vertex 16
Palpi moderate, not exceeding vertex 18

16 Antennae with a ridge of raised scales on dorsum 17
Antennae without dorsal ridge Lissocarena

17 Hindwings with 6 and 7 connate or stalked Pseudaegeria
Hindwings with 6 and 7 separate, parallel Snellenia

18 Tongue absent Aenicteria
Tongue present 19

19 Forewings with 7 absent 20
Forewings with 7 present 21

20 Antennae less than one-half Agiton
Antennae four-fifths Molybdurga

21 Forewings with 7 absent Eretmocera
Forewings with 7 and 8 stalked Dolophrosyne

1 Gen. ACTINOSCELIS

Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 24.

Tongue rudimentary.

Palpi short, slender, drooping.

Antennae in male

ciliated. Posterior tibiae and tarsi with whorls of very long bristles ; inner median

spurs ending in whorls of short bristles. Forewings very narrow. Hindwings

linear. Type, A. trina Meyr., from India. Only two species have been described.
1 A. astricta Turn., P.R.S.Vict., 1923, p. 80. (Qld.: Caloundra.)

2 Gen. IptocLossa
Wals., Tr, E. S., 1881, p. 273.

Tongue with long hair-scales on base. Palpi long, recurved, diverging.
Antennae in male simple with a decp notch near base covered by a projection
beneath. Forewings with 6 and 7 out of 8. Hindwings linear-lanceolate ;
4 present. Type, J. miraculosa Frey, from North America. Two species are
recorded from India and one from Africa.

According to Meyrick the larvae feed in a silken tube on the underside of
grass leaves. Pupae within the tube.

2 I. metallochrysa Turn., P.R.S.Q., 1917, p. 84. (Cairns, Innisfail, Eungella,

Nambour, Mount Tamborine, Macpherson Range 2,000 ft.)

3. Gen. ZARATHA
Wilk., xxix, p. 789; Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 335.

Tongue present. Palpi very long, slender, recurved, ascending. Antennae
much longer than forewings; in male simple. Posterior tibiae with long hairs on
dorsum ; tarsi with very short or minute whorls of bristles. Forewings with 7 and
8 stalked. Hindwings linear-lanceolate.; 4 present. Type, 7. pterodactylella Wk.
from South America.

3. Z. trisecta Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 335. (Darwin, Cairns.)
4 Z. crotolitha Meyr., Exot. Micro., 1, p. 336. (Darwin, Cairns.)

4 Gen. ETHiRastis
Meyr., Exot. Micro., 11, p. 462.

Tongue present. Palpi very long, slender, recurved, ascending. Antennae
nearly as long as forewings; in male ciliated. Posterior tibiae with long hairs on
dorsum and with apical whorls of bristles; tarsi with minute whorls of scales.
Forewings with 7 and 8 stalked. Hindwings linear-lanceolate; 4 present.
‘Type, E. sideraula Meyr. Monotypic.

5 E. sideraula Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 315. (Cairns.)

5 Gen. VANICELA
WIk., xxx, p. 1,039; Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 314.

Tongue present. Palpi long, curved, diverging, slightly thickened with
appressed scales. Antennae with basal segment dilated to form an eyecap ; in male
with long ciliations. Anterior tibiae and tarsi thickened with appressed scales.
Posterior tibiae with rough bristly hairs on dorsum. Forewings with 7 and 8
separate. Hindwings linear-lanceolate; 4 present. Type, V. disjunctella Whk.,
from New Zealand. Four species.

6 V. «xenadelpha Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 315. Gen, Insect., pl. i, fig. 7. (Yeppoon,
Bundaberg, Noosa, Brisbane, Stradbroke Island, Mount Tamborine, Rose-
wood, Toowoomba, Lismore, Sydney.)

7 V. dentigera Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 81. (Herberton.)

8 V. tricolona Meyr., ibid., i, p. 81. (Cairns.)

6 Gen. HIEROMANTIS

Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 315.

Tongue present. Palpi long, recurved, diverging. Antennae with basal segment
expanded to form an eyecap; in male with long ciliations, Torewings with 7 and
8 stalked. Hindwings linear-lanceolate; 4 present. Type, H. ephodophora Meyr.
There are four Indian species and three from Fiji.

9 H. ephodophora Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 315. (Cairns, Cardwell, Brisbane,
Esk, Tweed Hds., Warwick, Sydney.)

10 H, albata Meyr., Exot., Micro., i, p. 94. (Dunk Island, Stradbroke Island.
Also fronr New Guinea.)

7 Gen, CALicotis
Meyr., Tr. N.Z. Inst., 1889, p. 170; P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 313.

‘Tongue present. Palpi long, recurved, diverging. Antennae with basal segment
dilated and hollowed to form an eyecap; in male simple. Forewings with 7 and 8
stalked. Hindwings linear-lanceolate; 4 absent. Type, C. crucifera Meyr.
Besides the Australian species two have been described from Fiji, and one from
the Seychelles.

Larvae feeding in galleries of loose refuse among the sporangia of ferns.

11 C. microgalopsis Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1904, p. 171, (Cairns,
Mackay. )

12 C. sialota Turn., P.R.S.Q., 1917, p. 87. (Nambour, Brisbane, Stradbroke
Island, Mount Tamborine, Tweed Hds., Toowoomba.)

13. C. crucifera Meyr., Trans. N.Z. Inst., 1888, p. 170; P.1S.N.S.W., 1897,
p. 313. Gen. Insect., pl. i, fig. 5. (Brisbane, Mount Tamborine, Macpher-
son Range 2,500-3,000 ft., Bunya Mountains 3,500 ft., Sydney. Also
from New Zealand.)

14 C. triplocsta Turn., P.R.S.Vict., 1923, p. 78. (Brisbane.)

8 Gen, PAacHyRHABDA
Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 312.

Tongue present. Palpi long, recurved, divergent. Antennae in male simple.
Forewings with 7 and 8 separate or stalked. Mindwings linear-lanceclate;
4 absent. Type, P. steropodes Meyr. The number of described species is now
22, of which four are from Ceylon and India, two from Africa, twelve from Aus-
tralia, one from New Zealand, three from Fiji, and one from the Seychelles. One
of the Australian species is recorded also from India, Ceylon and Kermadec
Island, and another from Ceylon. This, however, does not give a correct idea of
its real distribution, for there can be little doubt that the genus is of Indo-Malayan
origin, and will be found most plentiful in that region. With only two exceptions
the Australian species are confined to the coast of Queensland.

15 Pachyrhabda punctifera n. sp.

punctiferus, spotted.

4, 10 mm. Head, palpi, antennae, and thorax grey-whitish. (Abdomen
missing.) Legs white; posterior pair with fuscous rings on apices of tibiae and
on tarsi, Forewings moderate, apex pointed; 7 and 8 separate; grey-whitish ;
costal edge fuscous towards base; fuscous dots on fold at one-eighth and one-
fourth, a third subcostal at two-fifths, a fourth on costa at two-thirds, and a fifth
beneath it; cilia grey-whitish, on apex fuscous. Hindwings one-half; grey;
cilia 4, grey. Queensland: Bundaberg in August; one specimen.

16 Pachyrhabda campylosticha n. sp.

kaprvdorrixos, with zig-zag lines.

8, 8 mm. Head fuscous; face glossy ochreous-whitish. Palpi fuscous,
inner surface ochreous-whitish. Antennae grey. Thorax fuscous. Abdomen
fuscous, towards base brassy. Legs ochreous-whitish; anterior pair fuscous
(posterior pair missing). Forewings narrow, apex pointed; pale yellow with
blackish markings ; a costal streak from base to three fourths ; two closely appressed
longitudinal lines on middle of fold; two zig-zag fasciae, broadest on costa, slender
in middle, composed of coalesced longitudinal lines; first from mid-costa to before
tarnus; second from three-fourths costa to termen; an apical dot; cilia grey, on
apex blackish. Hindwings over one-half ; fuscous with brassy lustre; cilia 3, grey.
Queensland: Bunya Mountains in January; two specimens.

17 P, hygrophaes Turn., P.R.S.Vict., 1923, p. 79, (Gympie, Brisbane. )

18 P. adela Turn., ibid., 1923, p. 79. (Macpherson Range, 2,500-3,000 ft.)

19 P. capnoscia Turn,, ibid., 1923, p. 80. (Macpherson Range, 3,000 ft.)

20 P. xanthoscia Turn., sbid., 1923, p. 80. (Cairns.)

21 FP. steropodes Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 312. (Toowoomba, Ka-
toomba, Mount Wilson, Warragul, Mount Wellington 2,500 ft.)

22 P. antinoma Meyr., Trans. N.Z. Inst., 1910, p. 72 = cryeredes Turn.,
P.L.S.N.S.W., 1915, p. 195. (Macpherson Range 2,500-3,000 ft., Ebor.
Also from Kermadec Island, Ceylon, and India.)

23 Pachyrhabda argyritis n. sp.
apyvpitts, silvery.

8, 12 mm. Head and thorax shining white. Palpi grey-whitish, mner
surface white. Antennae dark grey. Abdomen grey. Legs dark grey; tarsi,
rings on posterior tibiae, and anterior coxae white. forewings narrow, apex
pointed; 7 and & stalked; shining silvery-grey ; a narrow whitish fascia from one-
third costa to one-third dorsum; a transverse whitish fascia from two-thirds costa
to tornus, not reaching margins; cilia grey, on apex fuscous. Ilindwings one-
half ; cilia 5, grey. North Queensland: Dunk Island, in May; one specimen.

24 Pachyrhabda acroscia n. sp.

dxpooxios, shaded at the apex.

é, 9, 811mm. Head and palpi white. Antennae grey. ‘Thorax and
abdomen grey-whitish. Legs white; posterior pair with tithiae broadly fuscous at
apices. Forewings narrow, apex obtuse; 7 and 8 stalked, whitish-grey; apical
area suffusedly fuscotis; cilia fuscous, on dorsum and tornus grey. Hindwings
one-half; grey; cilia 4, grey. Queensland: Mount Tamborine in March; Mac-
pherson Range (3,000 ft.) in November; Bunya Mountains (3,500 ft.) in
October ; three specimens.

25 P. bacterias Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 95. (Cairns, Tweed Hds. Also
from Ceylon.)

26 Pachyrhabda liriopis n. sp.

Atpiwmes, white as a lily.

9, 8-9 mm. Head, palpi, antennae, thorax, and abdomen white. Legs
white; posterior pair with a dark fuscous ring at origin of terminal spurs. I*ore-
wings narrow, apex acute; 7 and 8 stalked; shining white; cilia white. Hind-
wings one-third; pale grey; cilia 8, pale grey. Queensland: Macpherson Range
(2,500 ft.) in November; two specimens.

9 Gen. IsorrHOA
Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 79.

Tongue present. Palpi very long, slender, recurved, diverging. Antennae
of male simple towards base, towards apex with segments triangularly dilated
and minutely but interruptedly ciliated. Forewings with 7 and 8 out of 6. Hind-
wings linear-lanceolate; 4 present. Type: /. antimetra Meyr., from India. There
have been described four species from Ceylon and India, one from North and
one from South Africa.

27 I, atmogzona Turn., P.R.S.O., 1917, p. 85. (Cairns, Cardwell.)

28 f. pandani Turn., P.R.S.Vict., 1923, p. 76. Larvae feeding on Pandanus
in oval cases made of two conjoined segments each of the whole thickness
of the leaf, leaving oval perforations in the leaves. (Darwin, Palm Island,
Magnetic Island.)

29 J. ancistrota Turn., ibid., 1923, p. 77. (Macpherson Range, 3,000 it.)

30 J. emplecta Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc, S, Aust., 1926, p. 142. (Bunya
Mountains, 3,000 it.)

31 JI aetheria Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 327,,Gen. ‘Insect. pl. i, fig. 4 =
hydrographa Meyr., tbid., 1897, p. 327 = implicata Meyr., Exot. Micro.,
ii, p. 324 = loxoschema Turn., P.R.S.Vict., 1923, p. 97. In this species
the markings on the forewings vary much in detail. In 13 examples I have
found scarcely any two alike. The black scales on the forewings and cilia
are inconstant, frequently absent in the male, more developed in the female.
(Cairns, Yeppoon, Gympie, Brisbane, Tweed Hds., Mount ‘Tamborine,
Macpherson Range 2,500 ft., Sydney.)

32 J. ochrochyta Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. 5.A., 1926, p. 143. (Bunya Moun-
tains, 3,000 ft.)

33 J. eusona Turn., ibid., 1926, p. 143, (Macpherson Range, at the foot.)

10 Gen. AEOLOSCELIS
Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 326.

Tongue present. Palpi very long, slender, recurved, diverging. Antennae
of male shortly or minutely ciliated. Forewings with 7 and 8 stalked. Hind-
wings linear-lanceolate; 4 present. Type, 4. hipparcha Meyr. At present known
only from Australia.

34 A. chrysophoenicea Meyr., tbid., 1897, p. 328. (Gympie, Brisbane, Strad-
broke Island, Tweed Hds., Rosewood.)

35 A. hippercha Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 328. (Geraldton.)

36 A. sphragidota Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 329. (Geraldton, Carnarvon.)

37 A. thiostola Turn., P.R.S.Vict., 1923, p. 77. (Charleville.)

38 Aeoloscelis pachyceros n. sp.
maxveepws, thick-horned.
é, 9, 12-14 mm. Head pale ochreous or ochreous-grey; face and palpi

ochreous-whitish. Antennae grey with obscure fuscous annulations; in male
thickened, ciliations one-half. Thorax ochreous-grey. Abdomen grey; in male

bases of segments and tuft ochreous-whitish. Legs grey; posterior pair ochreous-
tinged. Forewings narrow, apex pointed; pale ochreous; costal edge fuscous
towards base; markings variable, sometimes some median fuscous irroration, or
a fuscous subdorsal median spot; cilia grey, on apex fuscous. Hindwings one-
fourth, grey; cilia 8, grey. North Queensland: Palm Island in May, Mackay in
October; four specimens.

11 Gen. STATIMMOPODA

Sttn., Brit. Tineina, p. 227; Meyr., P-L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 316.

Tongue present. Palpi very long, slender, recurved, diverging. Antennae in
male with very long fine ciliations (3-7), sometimes with a short series also.
Forewings with 7 and 8 stalked. Hindwings linear-lanccolate ; 4 present. Type,
S. pedella Lin., from Europe. By far the largest genus in the family, more than
150 species have already been described. It is most abundant in the Indo-Malayan
region and in Australia and well represented in New Zealand and oceanic islands,
but no continent is without at least one or two representatives. The Australian
species known at present number 61.

The larvae vary much in habit. Some feed in galls or fruits; some on scale
insects; and one on spider’s eggs.

39 S. melanochra Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 321, Gen. Insect., pl. i, fig. 11. (Bris-
bane, Toowoomba, Glen Innes, Armidale, Ebor, Gosford, Sydney,
Katoomba, Bathurst, Mittagong, Canberra, Adaminaby, Gisborne, Caster-
ton, Melbourne, Launceston, Deloraine, Campbelltown, Hobart, Mount
Gambier, Victor Harbour, Adelaide, Mount Lofty.) Larvae feeding on
Eriococcus sp. (L. Tonnoir).

40S. desmotcles Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 322 (Bathurst).

41 S. lethonoa Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 322 = acromolybda Turn., P.R.5.Vict.,
1923, p. 78. (Brisbane, Bunya Mountains, Tabulam, Gosford, Sydney,
Melbourne, Hobart.)

42 S. chalybeis Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 322. (Hobart, Port Lincoln, Albany.)

43 S. acontias Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 318. (Fernshaw, |_aunceston, Deloraine,
Strahan, Russell Falls, Hobart.)

44 §. chalchotypa Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 318 Larvae feeding in galls on
Acacia decurrens. (Brisbane, Warwick, Sydney, Melbourne, Hobart.)

45 S.cyanopla Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 319. (Mount Kosciusko, Deloraine. )

46 S. sphendonita Meyr., Exot. Micro., ii, p. 461. (Cairns. )

47S. holobapta Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1904, p, 171. (Melbourne. }

48 Stathmopoda castanodes n. sp.
xacravwons, chestnut-coloured.

@, 2,12-18 mm. Ilead with crown reddish-brown, fillet leaden-fuscous, face
shining white. Palpi pale brownish; internal surface white. Antennae pale grey,
base and apex darker; ciliations in male 7. Thorax brown; tegulae except bases
white, Abdomen brown; tuft whitish-ochreous. Legs white; posterior pair
brownish, apices of tibiae and last two tarsal segments white, tarsi with fuscous
rings. Forewings narrow, broadest near base, diminishing at first rapidly, then
gradually to an acute apex; costal edge fuscous to a variable extent; a brown-
whitish costal streak throughout; a reddish-brown median streak interrupted in
middle, with a rounded basal expansion reaching dorsum and containing a leaden-
fuscous spot; a brown-whitish streak along dorsum and termen interrupted beyond
tornus by a leaden-fuscous spot; cilia grey, bases ochreous-whitish, on apex
wholly fuscous. Hindwings one-fourth, almost linear; cilia 10, grey. North
Queensland: Atherton Plateau (Lake Barrine). I bred from an unidentified rain-
forest fruit 14 examples, of which only one was a male, in August. I also took
a female example in June,

49 S. cephalaea Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 319. Bred from galls on
Acacia decurrens and another Acacia, (Bunya Mountains, Guyra, Hobart,
Mount Wellington 1,500 ft.)

50 Stathmopoda amathodes n. sp.
dpabwons, sandy.

@, 14 mm. Head and thorax pale ochreous-brown; face and palpi white.
Antennae grey with fuscous annulations. (Abdomen missing.) Legs white.
Forewings moderate, apex rather obtusely pointed; pale ochreous-brown; an ill-
defined fuscous dot before midtermen; cilia grey, on apex pale ochreous-brown.
Hindwings one-half; grey; cilia 5, grey. West Australia: Merredin in Septem-
ber; one specimen.

51 S. astrapeis Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 320. (Campbelltown, ‘Tasmania;
Adelaide. )

52 S. mesombra Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 320. (Hobart.)

53 S. hyposcia Meyr., tbid., 1897, p. 320. (Warwick, Sydney, Mount Wilson,
Bathurst, Hobart, Albany.)

54 Stathmopoda notosticha n. sp.
VOTOTTLXYOS, with dorsal lines.

9,13 mm. Head with crown dark fuscous; face shining wlute. Palpi white.
Antennae pale grey. Thorax white. Abdomen whitish; apices of segments
fuscous; posterior pair with fuscous rings on apices of tibiae and on tarsi. Fore-
wings narrow; white with slight costal fuscous suffusion; markings dark fuscous ;
a broad dorsal patch extending from hase to one-third; a short median dorsal line
almost confluent with it; a short longitudinal line above tornus; cilia grey. Hind-
wings one-half; grey; cilia 5, grey. New South Wales: Mount Wilson in Novem-
ber; one specimen.

55 S. odes Meyr., ibid, 1897, p. 323. (Sydney, Fernshaw, Deloraine.)

56 S, doratias Meyr., tbtd., 1897, p. 323. (Albany.)

57S. sentica Low., ibid., 1899, p. 114. (Broken Hill.)

58 S. xanthoma Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 323. (Brisbane, Sydney.)

59 S. metopias Meyr., Exot. Micro., ii, p. 324. (Melbourne. )

60 S. isoclera Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 328. (Brisbane, Macpherson Range,
2,500 ft.)

61 S. callichrysa Low., Trans., Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1893, p. 184, Meyr., ibid.,
1897, p. 325. Bred from Acacia sp. (Brisbane, Stanthorpe, Sydney,
Melbourne, Port Lincoln, W.A., York, Northampton.)

62 S. ischnotis Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 324. (Carnarvon.)

63 S. crocophanes Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 324. One exaniple has been bred from
the fruit of the loquat (Photinia japonica). (Townsville, Yeppoon,
Duaringa, Gladstone, Gayndah, Noosa, Brisbane, Stradbroke Island,
Tweed IIds., Rosewood, Toowoomba, Bunya Mountains, Charleville, Mil-
merran, Warwick, Killarney, Glen Innes, Neweastle, Sydney, Cooma,
St. ITelens, Ilobart, Adelaide, Hoyleton, Perth, Mogumber, Geraldton.)

64 Stathmopoda ptycholampra n. sp.
mrvxyodaprpos, With shining fold.

?, 10mm. Head yellow; face glossy whitish. Palpi whitish. Antennae
grey. Thorax yellow. Abdomen grey. Legs whitish. Forewings rather narrow ;
yellow, towards apex with some brownish suffusion; costal edge fuscous from
base to one-third; a fuscous costal dot near base; a fine silvery metallic line on
fold; cilia grey. Jindwings one-half; grey; cilia 3, grey. Quecenland: Noosa
in May; one specimen.

65 Stathmopoda marmarosticha n. sp.

poppapootixos, with shining lines.

4, 9, 1415 mm. Head ochreous-yellow ; face whitish, Palpi ochreous-
whitish. Antennae grey; ciliations in male 3 near base only, together with a short
series from base to apex. Thorax ochreous in male; ochreous-fuscous in female.
Abdomen grey; apices of segments grey-whitish. Legs fuscous; posterior pair
ochreous. Forewings moderate, apex obtuse; ochreous-yellow, paler towards
apex; costal edge fuscous towards base; markings lustrous silvery; a narrow sub-
costal line from base to midcosta; a narrow line on fold from base to dorsum;
an oval spot on base of dorsum and another at one-fourth; cilia pale ochreous-
grey. Ilindwings one-half; grey; cilia 4, pale ochreous-grey. North Queens-
land: Townsville and Bowen in June; five specimens.

66 S. bathrodelta Meyr., Exot. Micro., ii, p. 461. (Cairns.)

67 Stathmopoda citroptila n. sp.
«itpomnaAes, citron winged.

g, 13 mm. Head and palpi whitish-ochreous. Antennae and thorax pale
fuscous. Abdomen and legs whitish-ochreous. Forewings rather broad towards
base, gradually narrowing towards apex, which is acute, costa moderately arched ;
very pale yellow; a moderately broad fuscous fascia from costa beyond middie
to dorsum before tornus, its edges somewhat, suffused ; cilia grey. Hindwings one-
half ; grey; cilia 3, grey. North Queensland: Bowen in June; one specimen.

68 S. trichopeda Low., Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 1904, p. 171. (Cairns,
Townsville. }

69 S§. arachnophthora Turn., P.R.S.Q., 1917, p. 86. Larvae feeding in the
egg capsules of an unidentified spider. (Etdsvold. )

70 S. basixantha Vurn., ibid., 1917, p. 83. (Rosewood.)

71S. tritophaea Turn., ibid., 1917, p. 86. (Cairns, Brisbane. )

72 S.mimantha Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 92. (Cape York, Cairns, Yeppoon,
Bundaberg. )

73 S. xanthocrana Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1933, p. 179, (Macpher-
son Range, 3,000 ft.)

74. S. triselena Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 318. (Cairns, Nambour,
Caloundra, Brisbane. )

75 Stathmopoda trimochla n. sp.
tptmoxros, three-barred.
$,12mm. Head white; filet narrowly fuscous. Palpi white. Antennae
grey; ciliations in male 4. Thorax white. Abdomen grey; tuft white. Legs
white; posterior pair with pale fuscous rings on apices of tibiae and on tarsi.
Forewings narrow, apex acute; white with fuscous markings; an oval subdorsal
spot at one-fifth; a moderate somewhat oblique fascia from two-fifths costa to
mid-dorsum, expanded on dorstm; an ill-defined fascia from four-fifths costa to
tornts; a subapical fascia leaving extreme apex white; cilia grey. Hindwings
one-half ; grey; cilia 6, grey. Queensland: Brisbane in September; one specimen.
76S. platynipha ‘Turn., P.R.S.Vict., 1923, p. 78. (Townsyville.)
77 ~=S. diclidias Meyr., Exot. Micro., ii, p. 462. (Cairns.)
78 S. pantarches Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 321. (Brisbane, Sydney,
Melbourne. )
79° S. mannophora Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust., 1900, p. 23. (Nambour,
Brisbane. )
80 .S. nitida Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 93. (Darwin.)
81 S. grammatopis Meyr., tbid., it, p. 462. (Cairns.)
82 S. rhythmota Meyr., ibid., ii, p. 324. (Brisbane.)

83 Stathmopoda dimochla n. sp.

dimoyAos, twice-barred.

¢,9mm. Head, palpi, antennae, and thorax white. Abdomen pale grey.
Legs white ; posterior pair with two broad tibial and three narrow tarsal fuscous
rings. Forewings narrow, apex pointed; white; markings and some irroration
fuscous.; a broad submedian fascia, its outer edge angled beneath costa; a second
somewhat suffused postmedian fascia not reaching costa, the two separated by a
narrow white inwardly oblique line, a median spot above tornus and another at
apex; cilia whitish-grey, on apex fuscous. Hindwings one-half; pale grey; cilia
5, whitish-grey. North Queensland: Cairns in August; one specimen.

84 S. canonica Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 326. (Yeppoon, Stradbroke
Island, Sydney, Katoomba.)

85 S. megathyma Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 325. (Brisbane, Stradbroke Island.
Mount Tamborine, Tweed Hds., Rosewood, Lismore, Glen Innes, Gosford,
Sydney, Wollongong.)

86 S. liporrhoa Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 326, (Toowoomba, Chinchilla, New-
castle, Sydney, Launceston.)

87 S. rubripicta Meyr., Exot. Micro., ii, p. 490. (Cairns, Innisfail, Nambour,
Tweed Hds.)

88 S. zalodes Meyr., ibid., i, p. 93. (Cairns.)

89 SS. effossa Meyr., ibid., ii, p. 460. (Adelaide.)

90S. nephocentra Meyr., ibid. ii, p. 461, (Broken Ti, Adelaide.)
91 S. aphanosema Turn., P.R.S.Vict., 1923, p. 78. (Stanthorpe. )
92 S. trifida Meyr., ibid., ii, p. 462. (Cairns.)

93 S. pampolia Turn., ibid., 1923, p. 79. (Tweed Hds.)

94 4S. ceramoptila Turn., ibid., 1923, p. 79. (Cairns.)

95 Stathmopoda zophoptila n. sp.

Coportiros, dark-winged.

$-10mm. Head with crown fuscous, fillet and face shining whitish; fillet
prominent. Palpi whitish. Antennae whitish; ciliations in male 8; there is also
a series of shirt ciliations. Thorax and abdomen fuscous. Legs whitish; posterior
pair with dark fuscous rings on apices of tibiae and on tarsi. Forewings moderate,
apex rather obtusely pointed; fuscous; a darker fuscous spot on costa at one-
third and another above tornus; small areas of whitish-ochreous. irroration’ on
costa at middle and three-fourths; a small whitish-ochreous crescent at apex;
cilia fuscous. Hindwings one-third; fuscous; cilia 6, fuscous. Queensland:
Bundaberg in September; one specimen.

96 Stathmopoda recondita n. sp.
reconditus, concealed, obscure.

é, 2, 12-16 mm. Head glossy ochreous-grey-whitish; in female fuscous.
Palpi ochreous-grey-whitish or grey. Antennae grey or grey-whitish; ciliations
in male 5 towards base, but with a continuous series of shorter ciliations. Thorax
ochreous-grey; in female fuscous. Abdomen grey; in female fuscous; tuft in
male whitish-ochreous. Legs ochreous-grey or grey; anterior pair fuscous, Fore-
wings broadest near base, gradually narrowing to an acute apex; grey-whitish or
ochreous-grey-whitish with usually a variable degree of fuscous irroration; this
may form inconstant basal, tornal, and subapical spots; cilia grey, on apex fuscous.
Hindwings one-half; grey; cilia 4, grey. Tasmania: Burnie in December and
January; Hobart, Strahan and Deloraine in February; six specimens,

97 Stathmopoda rhodocosma Nn. sp.

podoxocpos, with rosy ornament.

9,13mm. Head, palpi, and antennae white. Thorax white, in centre densely
sprinkled with crimson. Abdomen and legs white. Forewings narrow, broadest
at base, gradually attenuated to an acute apex; white; a few crimson scales clase
to base; termen from tornus to apex edged with crimson; cilia white. Hindwings
one-half ; whitish-grey ; cilia 4, whitish. North Queensland : Dunk Island in May;
one specimen.

98 Stathmopoda nympheuteria n. sp.

vupdevtypeos, bridal.

8,13 mm. Head, palpi, antennae, and thorax white. Abdomen grey; tuft
whitish. Legs white; posterior pair with fuscous rings on apices of tibiae and
on tarsi. Forewings moderate; shining white; cilia grey. Hindwings two-thirds ;
grey; cilia 3 and a half, grey. Tasmania: Mount Wellington (1,500 ft.) in
January ; one specimen.

12. Gen, Trychnopepla nov.

tpuxvorerAos, rough-coated.

Head smooth; face retreating. Tongue present. Palpi moderately long,
diverging, thickened with loosely appressed scales, slightly rough anteriorly ;
terminal segment shorter than second, equally stout, obtusely pointed. Antennae
with basal segment clongate. Posterior tibiae with long hairs on dorsum; tarsi with
whorls of short scales on apices of segments. Forewings with tufts of raised scales,
of even width with rounded apex; 7 and 8 separate; 11 from before middle.
Hindwings almost linear. The palpi and shape of forewings are distinctive.

99 Trychnopepla discors n. sp.
discors, unlike.

9, 10 mm. Head white. Palpi whitish-brown with two fuscous bars on
terminal segment, inner surface white. Antennae whitish-brown with dark
fuscous annulations. Thorax pale ochreous-brown sprinkled with dark fuscous.
(Abdomen missing.) Legs whitish; tarsi with dark fuscous rings. Forewings
with costa straight to near apex; pale ochreous-brown unevenly suffused with pale
crimson; markings and some irroration dark fuscous; a slender median line from
one-third to two-thirds; a subdorsal tuft of raised scales at one-fourth; a trans-
verse ridge of raised dark fuscous scales in dise at three-fourths; a spot between
this and apex; a slender terminal line; cilia pale ochreous, on costa fuscous, on
dorsum grey. Hindwings one-fifth; grey; cilia 6, grey. North Queensland:
Kuranda; one specimen received from F. P. Dedd.

13. Gen. AENICTERIA
Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1926, p. 143.

Tongue absent. Palpi moderately long, smooth, recurved, ascending;
second segment slightly thickened. Antennae in male very minutely ciliated.
Posterior tibiae with dense long hairs on dorsum and with a terminal whorl of
short scales; tarst wtth whorls of very short scales. Forewings with rounded
apex. JIlindwings lanceolate; 2 and 3 connate, 4 absent. Monotypic.

100 A. termiticola Turn., ibid., 1926, p. 143. Probably associated with termites,
(Cairns. )
14. Gen, LissocARENA
Turn., P.R.S.Vict., 1923, p. 80.

Palpi long, smooth, recurved, diverging ; terminal segment broadly dilated but
laterally compressed. Antennae nearly 1; in male simple. Posterior tibiae and
first tarsal segment clothed with short bristly hairs, whorls of short scales on apices

of tibiae and first three tarsal segments. Forewings with 7 and 8 stalked. Hind-
wings lanceolate; 4 absent. Monotypic.

101 L. semicuprea Turn., ibid., 1923, p. 81. (Cairns.)

15 Gen. HELIODINIDES
Sttn., Brit. Tin., p. 243; Meyr., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1906, p. 54.

Tongue present, Palpi short, filiform, porrect or drooping, Antennae im
male thickened, simple. Posterior tibiae smooth with whorls of short bristles at
apices; tarsi with short bristles at apices of segments. Forewings with 7 absent,
6 and 8 sometimes stalked. Hindwings lanceolate; 4 absent. ‘l'ype, H. roesella
Lin., from Europe. There are also nine species recorded from North America and
four from the West Indies. _

102 IJ. princeps Meyr., ibid., 1906, p. 54. (Cairns, Brisbane. )

16 Gen, AciTon
Turn., ibid., 1926, p. 145.

Tongue present. Palpi moderately long, recurved, ascending, divergent ;
second segment thickened towards apex with loosely appressed scales ; terminal seg-
meni stout, rather obtuse. Antennae short (less than one-half) ; in male thickened
and minutely ciliated. Posterior tibiae hairy on dorsum, with a terminal whorl
of bristles; tarsi with whorls of short bristles on apices of segments, Forewings
elongate-triangular; 7 absent (coincident with 8). Ilindwings spathulate-
lanceolate; 2 and 3 stalked, 4 absent, 6 absent. Monotypic. A curious and
isolated genus.

103 A. idioptila Turn., ibid., 1926, p. 145. (Macpherson Range, 2,500-3,000 fit.)

17. Gen. PsEUDAEGERIA
Wals., Tr. E. S., 1889, p. 17; Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1907, p. 133.

‘Tongue present. Palpi long, smooth, recurved, ascending; second segment
thickened with appressed scales. Antennae with dorsal ridge of scales; in male
ciliated, Abdomen with terminal tuft of laterally projecting scales. Posterior
tibiae with dense whorls of long scales at apices; tarsi with spines at apices of
segments. lorewings with 7 and 8 stalked. Hindwings narrowly clongate-ovate ;
3 and 4 connate or stalked, 6 and 7 connate or stalked. Type, /71 squamicornis
Teld. The genus appears to be confined to Australia.

104 Pseudaegeria phlogina n. sp.
proyivos, flery.

&, @, 23-28 mm. Head brilliant red; eyes white-cdged beneath. Palpi
moderately long, recurved, ascending, second segment moderately thickened, rough
anteriorly ; terminal segment 4, slender, acute; black, apex and apfiterior margin of
second segment white. Antennae about 4/5, with a ridge of dense scales on dorsum
from 3 to near apex, cillations in male (2/3) ; black, apex of dorsal ridge white,
‘Thorax black, posterior and sometimes anterior margin red. Abdomen expanded
towards apex with projecting lateral scales; bright red, transversely barred with
black on two basal and three terminal segments. Legs black; middle and
posterior tibiac with median part red, spurs white; posterior tarsi much longer
than tibiae. Forewings elongate, narrow, posteriorly dilated so as to be some-
what spathulate, costa sinuate, apex rounded, termen and dorsum not ditferen-
tiated; black with red markings; a narrow line on costa from base almost to apex ;
a similar line on dorsum from 1/5 to tornus; these are connected by an inwardly
curved transverse line shortly before middle; a spot in disc at 2/3 beneath or
touching costal line; cilia purple, bases narrowly white. Hindwings narrow ;

6 and 7 short-stalked or approximated; basal area in male scaleless and trans-
parent in costal half, bright red in dorsal half in male, orange in female; apical
area black; cilia as forewings.

The larvae of this remarkable species feed on the bark of the woody stems
of a climber locally known as “‘Supplejack,” making. small tunnels in its nodes
and spinning a covering of silk and sawdust as is done by some NX yloryctidae.
Mr, Il. Francis has identified the food plant as Ventilago viminalis (Rhamneae).
Queensland: Injune in March; four specimens received from W. B. Barnard.
Type in Queensland Museum.

105 P. squamicornis Feld., pl. cxxxix, fig. 6; Mevr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1907,
p. 134, Gen. Insect., pl. i, fig. 15. (Sydney, )

106 P. polytita Turn., ibid., 1913, p. 221. (Townsville.)

107 P. hyalina Turn., ibid, 1913, p. 222. (Birchip.)

18 Gen. SNELLENIA
Wals., Tr. E. S., 1889, p. 13; Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1907, p. 132.

Tongue present. Palpi extremely long, slender, recurved, ascending, slightly
rough anteriorly, Antennae with a dorsal ridge of rough scales; in male ciliated,
Abdomen margined with rough scales; in male with a large posterior tuft.
Posterior tibiae smooth with whorls of large scales on origin of spurs; tarsi with
short spines on apices of segments. Forewings with 7 and 8 stalked. Hindwings
very narrowly elongate-ovate; 3 and 4 connate, 6 and 7 separate, parallel, Type,
S. coccinea Wals., from India. Besides the Australian there are two Indian and
one South American species.

108 S. lineata Wik., viii, p. 261; Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1907, p. 132, Gen.
Insect., pl. 11, fig. 16 == sesioides Feld., pl. cxl, fig. 22. (Nambour, Bris-
bane, Tweed Hds., Tabulam, Sydney, Gisborne.)

109 S. fylaea Turn., ibid., 1913, p. 221. (Mount Tamborine, Macpherson
Range 2,500-3,500 ft.)

110) S. miltocrossa Turn., P.R.S.Vict., 1923, p. 81. ( Bulli.)

111 S. capnora Turn., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1913, p. 221, (Herberton.)

19° Gen, DoLopHRosyNE
Drnt., Novit. Zool., 1919, p. 120.

Tongue present. Palpi moderate, recurved, ascending; second segment thick-
ened and somewhat rough anteriorly ; terminal segment short. Antennae in male
thickened and slightly laminate with fascicles of cilia, Posterior tibiae with dense
scale-tufts at origin of spurs ; tarsi with whorls of short scales at apices of segments.
Forewings narrow; 7 and 8 stalked. Hindwings narrowly elongate-ovate; 3 and
4 connate or stalked, 5 remote, 6 and 7 stalked. Monotypic.

112 D, baltcata Drnt., ibid., 1919, p. 121. (Yeppoon, Duaringa.)

20 Gen, ERETMOCERA
Zel., Micr. Caffr., p. 96; Meyr., P.I..S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 420.

Tongue strongly developed, Palpi rather short, curved, ascending; second
segment somewhat thickened and rough anteriorly. Antennae with some long loose
scales on dorsum; in male simple or very minutely ciliated. Abdomen ‘broad,
flattened, with laterally projecting scales. Posterior tibiae smooth with whorls
of short scales at apices ; tarsi with short spines at apices of segments, Forewings
narrow; 7 absent, 6 and 8 stalked. Flindwings lanceolate. Type, E. fuscipennis
Zel., from Africa. Most numerous in species from Africa, from which 13 species
have been described, together with three from China and India, one from Europe,
and four from the Archipelago.

113 E. chrysias Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W,, 1896, p. 1,047, ibid., 1897, p. 421. (Palm
Island, Townsville, Duaringa, Maryborough, N.W.A., Noonkambah. )

114. E. cyanauges Turn., ibid., 1913, p. 220. ( Townsville.)

115 E. dioctis Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 370 = flavicincta Turn., ibid., 1913, p. 219.
(Banana, Brisbane, Rosewood, Toowoomba, Dalby, Bunya Mountains,
Injune, Milmerran, Warwick, Killarney, Geraldton (W.A.) )

116 E. coracopis Turn., P.R.S.Tas., 1926, p. 155. (Cradle Mount, 2,000 ft.)

21 Gen. MoLtysppurRGA
Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 369.

Tongue present. Palpi moderately long, curved, ascending; second segment
thickened with appressed scales. Posterior tibiae rough-haired; tarsi with short
bristles at apices of segments. Forewings with 4 absent, 6 and 7 stalked. Hind-
wings lanceolate; 2 to 7 separate, nearly parallel. Monotypic.

117 M. metallophora Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 369, Gen. Insect., pl. ii, fig. 20.
(Melbourne. )}
22 Gen Coracistis
Meyr., zbid., 1897, p. 370.

Tongue present. Palpi very long, recurved, ascending ; second segment rough-
scaled anteriorly towards apex. Antennae over 1; in male simple; in female with
tuft of scales on mid-dorsum. Posterior tibiae long-haired on dorsum with slight
whorls on origin of spurs; tarsi with short bristles on apices of segments. Tore-
wings with tufts of raised scales; 7 and 8 out of 6. Hindwings lanceclate ;
4 present, 6 and 7 parallel. Monotypic.

118 C. erythrocosma Meyr., ibid., 1897, p. 370. Gen. Insect., pl. ii, fig. 26.
(Melbourne, Gisborne.) Mr. Geo. Lyell, who has captured a specimen,
says that it simulated a wasp both in appearance and poise.

InnEx TO GENERA

Actinoscelis Meyr. ... 1 Ethirastis Meyr. ... 4 Molybdurga Meyr. .... 21
Aenicteria Turn. ... 2 Eretmocera Zel. .... 20 Pachyrhabda Meyr... 8
Aeoloscelis Meyr. .... 10 Heliodinides Sttn. ... 15 Peudaegeria Wals. .. 17
Agiton Turn. .... 16 Hieromantis Meyr. .. 6 Snellenia Wals. 18
Calicotis Meyr. 7 Idioglossa Wals. .. 2 Stathmopoda Sttn. ll
Coracistis Meyr. 22 lsorrhoa Meyr. eae Trychnopepla n.g..... 12
Dolophrosyne Drnt... 19 Lissocarena Turn. .... 14 Vanicela Wk. .... 5

Zaratha WIk. .... 3

INDEX TO SPECIES
Synonyms in Italics

acontias Meyr. 43 balteata Drnt. ... ... 112 citroptila nsp. .... 67
acroscia 1. Sp. .... 24 basixantha Turn. ... 70 coracopis Turn, 116
adela Turn, 18 bathrodelta Meyr. .... 606 crocophanes Meyr. .. 63
aetheria Meyr. 31 callichrysa Low. .... 61 crotolitha Meyr. 4
albata Meyr. 10 campylosticha n.sp... 16 crucifera Meyr. 13
amathodes n. sp. 50 canonica Meyr. a. 84 cyanauges Turn. 14
ancistrota Turn. 29 eapnora Turn... ... 111 cyanopla Meyr. 45
antinoma Meyr. . 22 capnoscia Turn. vw. ~19 dentigera Mcyr. 7
aphanosema ‘turn... 91 castanodes n.sp..... 48 desmoteles Meyr. 40
arachnophthora Turn. 69 cephalaea Meyr. .... 49 diclidias Meyr. 77
argyritis n. sp. 23 ceramoptila Turn. .... 94 dimochla n. sp. 83
astrapeis Meyr 51 chalchotypa Meyr. ... 44 dioctis Meyr. 115
astricta Turn. .... 1 chalybeis Meyr. .... 42 discors Turn. 99
atmozona Turn. 27 chrysias Meyr. a 113 doratias Meyr. 56
bacterias Meyr. 25 chrysophoenicea Meyr. 34 effossa Meyr. 89

emplecta Turn.
ephodophora Meyr. ..
.erythrocosma Meyr. ....
euzona Turn.
flavicincta Turn,
grammatistis Meyr. ..
hipparcha Meyr.
holobapta Low.
hyaling Turn... ...
hydrographa Meyr. ....
hygrophaes Turn. ....
hylaea Turn.
hyposcia Meyr.
idioptila Turn. ....
intricata Meyr.
jiodes Meyr.
ischnotis Meyr.
isoclera Meyr. ....
lethonoa Meyr.
lineata Wk.
liporrhoa Meyr.
liriopis, n. sp.
loxoschema Turn.
mannophora Turn. ....
marmarosticha n. sp...
megathyma Meyr. ....

melanochra Meyr. .... 39
mesombra Meyr. .... 52
metallophora Meyr. .. 117
metopias Meyr. aw 59
metallochrysa Turn. wid
microgalopsis Low. .. 11
miltocrossa Turn. .... 110
mimantha Meyr. ..... 72
nephocentra Meyr. .. 90
nitida Meyr. .... 2. 80
notosticha n.sp. .... 54
nympheuteria Turn. .. 98
ochrochyta Turn. .... 32
pachyceros n.sp..... 38
pampolia Turn. a 93
pandani Turn. ... .... 28
pantarches Meyr. .... 78
phlogina n. sp. 104
platynipha Turn. .... 76
polytita Turn. .... 106
princeps Meyr. 102

ptycholampra n. sp. 64

punctifera n.sp. ... 15

recondita Turn. a. 96

rhodocosma Turn. ..... 97
ERRATUM

rhythmota Meyr.
rubripicta Meyr
semicuprea Turn.
sentica Low.
sideraula Meyr.
sialota Turn.
sphendonita Meyr.
sphragidota Meyr.

squamicornis Feld. ..

steropodes Meyr.
termiticola Turn.
thiostola Turn.
trichopeda Low.
tricolona Meyr.
trifida Meyr.
trimochla n. sp.
triploesta Turn,
trisecta Meyr. ....
triselena Meyr.
tritophaea Turn.
xanthocrana Turn.
xanthoma Meyr.
xanthoscia Turn.
xenadelpha Meeyr.
zalodes Meyr. ....
zophoptila Turn.

By an unfortunate accident one of the best known species of Gracilaria was
omitted from my revision of the Gracilariidae in these Transactions published

last year.

169A G. xanthopharella Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1881, p. 141. N. Qld.: Atherton
Tableland. Qld.: Brisbane, Mount Tamborine, Tweed Ids., Toowoomba.
N.S.W.: Lismore, Sydney.

In the same paper the food plants of Lithocolletis aglaozona Meytr. were by

an error of copying transferred to L. stephanota Meyr.

Phyllocnistis enchalcoa (Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1938, p. 100) is a misprint for

P. enchalca,
brassy.

This is plainly indicated by the derivation given from

eyXaAkos,

REDISCOVERY OF ONE OF CANESTRINI'S AUSTRALIAN ACARIDS

By H. WOMERSLEY, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., South Australian Museum

Summary

In 1884, "Atti Ist Veneto,” ser. vi, vol. 2, 705-728, Canestrini described and figured a number of
species of Acarina from Australia, many of which were new. Of these none have hitherto been
recognised since Canestrini's publication. His figures were reasonably good and well enable the
species to be recognised; his descriptions, however, were inadequate.

2
REDISCOVERY OF ONE OF CANESTRINI’S AUSTRALIAN ACARIDS
By H. Womerstey, F.R.E.S., A.LS., South Australian Museum

{Read 10 April 1941]

In 1884, “Atti Ist Veneto,” ser. vi, vol. 2, 705-728, Canestrini described and
figured a number of species of Acarina from Australia, many of which were new.
Of these none have hitherto been recognised since Canestrini’s publication. His
figures were reasonably good and well enable the species to be recognised; his
descriptions, however, were inadequate.

Amongst the new species described was the deutonymph of Uropoda
spinulipes, from specimens found on a beetle, said to be allied to the European
Geotrupes. It was illustrated by a figure of the ventral surface and of the tarsus.

Recently I have received from Dr. J. W. Evans; of Hobart, a specimen of an
earwig killed by an overwhelming number of deutonymphal Uropodid Mites which

pe helctates

woe
oe

geet ee

Uroropa SPINULIPES Canestrini (deutonymph)
A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, epistome and palpi; D, gnathosoma from below;
E, tritosternum; F, mandible; G, tarsus 1; H, tarsus 11; I, dorsal seta

are undoubtedly the same as Canestrini’s U. spinultpes, The locality was Hobart,
Tasmania, September 1940. When received, all the mites were alive and, although
in the deutonymphal stage, were very active and the adhesive vesicle had dis-
appeared.

The purpose of this paper is to redescribe and refigure the species.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (1), 25 July 1941

Uropopa sprnuLirrs Canestrini 1884
Fig. A-I
Deutonymph
Shape broadly oval, slightly tapering apically. Length, 835 4, width 610»
(i.e. rather greater than dimensions given by Canestrini—720 and 5004,
respectively ).

Dorsal surface with an entire shield which is coarsely and sparsely pitted or
pored. Clothing as figured, mainly of long (90 2) strong setae, which basally are
strongly bent (fig. I); medially the two longitudinal rows are of much shorter
fine setae. There are also a few large pores in the middle field (not ‘figured).

Ventral surface—Tritosternum (fig. E) apparently trifurcate apically, the
base longer than wide, the furcae with ciliations. Sternal-metasternal-genital
shield long arid roughly 4-sided with eight pairs of short, fine setae and two pairs
of pores. Posterior shield roughly elliptical with the anus at the apex; it carries
14 long setae similar to those on the dorsum. The extreme edge of the venter
outside of the plates carries some short, fine setae.

Gnathosoma-epistoma as in fig. C. Ventral view as in fig. D. Palpi as
in fig. C and D, 5-segmented, segment I{ ventrally with a stout apical tooth.
Mandibles as in fig. F.

Legs short and stout, tarsi with claws at the apex of a long caruncle,
I apically with a number of long setae, one of which over-reaches the claws, and
another which is stout, blunt and rod-like, I-IV with a number of short, stout
spines.

SOME NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS OF PREY

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and PATRICIA M. MAWSON, University of Adelaide

Summary

This paper is based on material collected over a period of years from different parts of Australia.
We are indebted to the late Dr. T. L. Bancroft (Eidsvold, Burnett River, Queensland), the late Dr.
MacGillivray, Professor J. B. Cleland, Dr. A. Randall, Mr. J. T. Gray (Orroroo, S.A.), and the
Queensland Museum for some of the parasites examined. Most of the remainder where collected by
the senior author. The work was made possible by the Commonwealth Research Grant to the
University of Adelaide. Types of the new species described have been deposited in the South
Australian Museum. The following is a list of parasites arranged under their hosts:

SOME NEMATODES’ FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS OF PREY
By T. Harvey Jomnston and Parricia M. Mawson, University of Adelaide
[Read 10 April 1941]

This paper is based on material collected over a period of years from different
parts of Australia. We are indebted to the late Dr. ‘I, L. Bancroft (Eidsvold,
Burnett River, Queensland), the late Dr. MacGillivray, Professor J. B. Cleland,
Dr. A. Randall, Mr. J. T. Gray (Orroroo, S.A.), and the Queensland Museum
for some of the parasites examined. Most of the remainder were collected by the
senior author. The work was made possible by the Commonwealth Research Grant
to the University of Adelaide. Types of the new species described have been
deposited in the South Australian Museum. The following is a list of parasites
arranged under their hosts:

KALCO LONGIPENNIS Swainson (Orroroo, Gawler, and Lake Alexandrina, S. Aust. ;
Burracoppin, W. Aust.), Serratospiculum guttatum (Schneider).

FaLco perEGRINUS Tunstall (Moorook, S. Aust.), Serratospiculum guttatum
(Schneider).

F ALCO MELANOGENYS Gould (Macdonald Downs, Central Aust.), Serratospiculum
gutlatum (Schneider).

NIsAETUS MORPHNoIDES Gould (Lake Frome, 5. Aust.), Porrocaecum cercinum
n. sp.

Circus assiminis Jardine (Orroroo, S. Aust.), Porrocaecum circinum 0. sp.

Asrur NOVAE-HOLLANDIAE Gmelin (North Queensland), Thelazia equilina Baylis ;
(Brisbane), Porrocaecum circinumt n. sp.

ACCIPITER CIRRHOCEPHALUS Vieill. (Eidsvold), Hasmatospiculun sp. (? meneillt).

Hieracipea BERIGORA Vig. and Horsf. (Eidsvold), Bancroftinema dentatum,
n.g., n. Sp.

HreractrA ORIENTALIS Schlegel (Flinders Is., Bass Strait), Acuaria flindersi,
n.sp., Physaloptera hieracideae n. sp.

CERCINEIS CENCHROIDES Vig. and Horsf. (West Burleigh, South Queensland),
Habronema paraleptopiera n. sp.

Nrnox coNNIVENS Lath, (Eidsvold), Seuratinema brevicaudatum Nn. g., 1. Sp.

Ninox rura Gould (North Queensland), Hamatospiculum meneilli J. & M.

Ninox sBoosook Lath. (Burnett River, Queensland), Hamatospiculum meneili
J. & M.

Ninox strenua Gould (Burnett River, Queensland), Subilura sp.

Porrocaecum circinum n. sp.
(Fig. 1)

From the spotted harrier, Circus assimilis (type host), (Orroroo; coll., J. T.
Gray), the little eagle, Nisaetus morphnoides (Lake Frome, S. Aust.), and the
white goshawk, Astur novae-hollandiae (Brisbane—Queensland Museum).
Complete specimens not present. Material consisting of anterior parts of females
up to 100 mm. long, posterior parts of females up to 20 mm.; and the anterior
paris of narrower worms, either males or immature females, without genital
organs. Maximum width 1°5 mm. Head narrower than succeeding body.
Dentigerous ridge on anterior inner surface of each lip continuing along edge of
cuticular wing-like expansion on each side of lip, and extending nearly to its base.
Interlabia less than half length of lips, each joined anteriorly on its inner surface
to adjacent lips; two papillae on dorsal lip, one on each ventral. Oesophagus
3-7-4°3 mm. long, including ventriculus -32 mm. long. Intestinal caecum wide,
half to two-thirds oesophageal length. Nerve ring about -7--8 mm. from head

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A,, 65, (1), 25 July 1941

end. Vulva not observed, only female fragment long enough to be likely to
include it being very much coiled and twisted. Eggs subglobular, about 90-100 p
in diameter.

These worms differ from P. angusticolle in total length, in the relative length
of oesophagus, and the size and shape of the eggs. The absence of males
in our material, and of measurements of the oesophagus and intestinal caecum in
accounts of previously described species, makes comparison with other forms
difficult.

Physaloptera hieracideae n. sp.
(Fig. 2-3)

From the brown hawk, Hieracitdea orientalis, from Flinders Island, Bass
Strait. Several poorly preserved females; only external features distinguishable.
Length 17-18 mm., maximum breadth -8 mm. Cuticular collar barely covering

Fig 1, Porrocaecum circinum: head. Fig. 2-3, Physaloptera hieracideae: sub-

lateral and ventral views of head. Fig. 4-6, Acuaria flindersi: 4, head; 5, anterior

end; 6, male tail. Fig. 7-8, Habronema paraleptoptera: 7, head; 8, male tail.

Fig. 9-10, Seuratinema brevicaudatwm: 9, head; 10, male tail, Fig. 1, 6, and 10
to same scale; fig. 2, 3, 4, and 8. C, cervical papilla.

base of lips. Each lateral lip with one median conical tooth, two smaller latcral
stylet-shaped teeth on inner border, and two papillae externally. Median teeth
apparently not meeting in midline when head seen in dorsal or ventral view (fig. 3).
Oesophagus 2°8 mm. long. Tail pointed, -3 mm. long. The arrangement of the
teeth distinguishes this species from other Physalopterids known from birds.

Acuaria flindersi n. sp.
(Fig. 4-6)
From Hieracidea orientalis, Flinders Island. Male 14°5 mm., female 16-9
to 18 mm. long; maximum breadth -5 mm. Cordons rather faint, disappearing
beyond 4 mm. from head. Lips each with two large papillae. Mouth leads to

vestibule -25 mm. long, -03 mm. wide; anterior part of ocsophagus -9 mm.,
posterior part 4°3 mm. in leneth; nerve ring “4 mm. from head. Measurements
from female.

Male: longer spicule *51 mm. in length, tubular proximally, narrowed
distally ; shorter spicule +18 mm. long, spatulate with blunt tip. Caudal alae
narrow, extending *7 mm. in front of posterior end; on each side two large and
two smaller precloacal, four postcloacai, and near posterior end of ala one small
rounded papilla.

Female: tail 15 mm. long. Vulva 5-5 mm, in front of posterior end, a third
of body length from tail. Eggs, 36-38 w by 25-26 p.

Differs from A. indica Maplestone and A. corvicola J. & M. in length of
cordons and position of vulva.

tae

was ee

Vig. 11-13, Bancroftinema dentahon;: ventral, lateral and sub-lateral views of

head. Fig. 14-15, Subulura sp.: 14, head; 15, anterior end. Fig. 16-17, Serrato-

Spiculom gullatum: 16, head, anterior view; 17, male tail Fig. 18, Hamato-

spiculion sp. from ciecipiter cirrhocephalus, anterior cod. All fig. except 15 and
18 to same scate.

Habronema paraleptoptera n. sp.
(Fig. 7-8)

From stomach of the kestrel, Cerchneis cenchroides, from West Burleigh,
South Queensland. Material consisting of two maics 10 mm. and 6°3 imm. long,
their widths -21 and -1 mm. respectively; and posterior 9°8 mm. of a female.
Specimens so slender and fragile that only a lateral view of head could be
obtained. At least two, possibly three, teeth on each lateral lip; median of the
three external lobes ol each lateral lip slightly larger, the two outer each with
large papilla; dorsal and ventral lips not visible from lateral aspect. Vestibule

12 4 wide: oesophagus commencing 38 from top of lips. In male 10 mm. in
Be ’ bth 5 be . * a
length. oesophagus 1:8 mm, long, nerve ring -2 mm. and cervical papillae +17 min.
from head end, Lateral alae about a quarter body length.

Male: tail with caudal alae about +2 mm. long, reaching to within -05 mm.
of bluntly rounded tip. At least four pairs pedunculated preanal papillae, and
three pairs small sessile postanal papillae. Tail 1-2 mm, long. Spicules im longer
male -35 mm. and 1-1 mm, in length; in shorter male shorter spicule ‘3 mn...
longer spicule very fine and its termination not observed.

Female: Vulva not present in only available picee. Tail -31 mm. long,
pointed. Eggs, thick-shelled, 25-30 jp by 12-15 yp.

The species closely resembles H. leptoplera (Rud.), but ditfers in the relative
sizes of the lobes of the lips, the position of the nerve ring and excretory pore, and
the size of the eggs. In spite of our inadequate sitdy. these differences suggest
that we are dealing with a new specits.

Seuratinema brevicaudatum n.g., Msp.
(Fig. 9-10)

From the winking owl, Ninoxr connivens, from the Burnett River (coll., Dr.
Bancroft), One male present, 18 mm. long, ‘5 mm, wide. Head rounded, with a
pair lateral and two pairs larger submedian papillae; cuticle behind these inflated
for distance of *23 mm. Ocsophagus ‘5 mm. long, widening at base; nerve ring
25 mum, from head. Posterior end bluntly pointed. Cloaeca +16 mm. from tip of
tail, on prominence with four pairs pericloacal papillae at its base; posterior to
these are one median and two lateral papillae; near tip of tail three pairs smaller
papillae. Spicules subequal, about °22--25 mm. long, both tapering, shorter
slightly thinner.

The combined characters of the head, tail and oesophagus suggest a new
genus, diagnosed as follows:

Seuratinae: head rounded, cuticle behind head inflated for short distance.
Buceal capsule absent; oesophagus short, muscular. Male: tail short, conical,
with papillae not in linear row; no cattdal alae; spicules subequal, short, lFemale
unknown. Parasites of birds. Type species, Seuratinema brevicaudatum Mn. sp.

The genus appears to be nearest Seuratiim, from which it differs in the
absence of longitudinal bands on the cuticle, in the presence of inflated cervical
cuticle, and in possessing a shorter male tail. It differs from genera of Thelaziidae
in the absence of a buccal capsule, the presence of cervical inflation, the shortness
of the male tail, the arrangement of the caudal papillae, and the length of the
oesophagus.

Bancroftinema dentatum n.g., n.sp.
(Fig. 11-13)

From Hieracidea berigora from Fidsvold, Queensland (coll., Dr. Bancroit).
Two females present, 2-2°5 cm. long, -13-"15 mm. wide; body tapering anteriorly ;
tail rounded. Two more of less crescentic lateral lips, each with a smal] median
and two large lateral papillae. Oesophagus commencing 70» from front of lips.
From this level numerous (20-30 ?) chitinised rods extend torwards along inner
surface of each lip to terminate in tooth-like points. These form a sort of buccal
capsule, of which the dorso-ventral diameter is much greater than that from side
to side, and of which the walls are longer in the centre than dorsally and ventrally.
Cuticle inflated behind lips and extending backwards for about -25 mm. Two
parts of oesophagus not readily distinguishable, total length 2-5 mm.; nerve ring
-25 mm. from head, surrounding a constriction in oesophagus. Cervical papillae
hook-like, posteriorly directed, small, *1 mm, behind posterior end of cuticular
inflation, Vulva just anterior to middle of ocsophagus ; two uteri filled with thick-
shelled eggs about 50 » by 25-30 », each containing a coiled larva.

Owing to the absence of males we have been compelled to depend mainly on
the characters of the head and oesophagus to determine the systematic position of
this genus. The presence of two well-marked lateral “pseudolabia” suggests the
Physalopteridae, but it differs from members of that family in having a well-
developed stoma. The Spiruridae have a well-developed stoma but the pscudo-
labia are usually small, and cephalic papillae are situated posterior to them. Our
genus then appears to lie between the Spiruridae and the Physalopteridae as out-
lined by Chitwood and Wehr (1934). The genus Bancroftinema is diagnosed
as follows:

Spiruroidea: with two lateral lips, each with three papillae. Buccal capsule
present, narrower laterally than dorso-ventrally. its walls formed of rods arranged
vertically side by side each ending in a tooth-like point on inner margin of lips.
Cervical cuticle inflated. Oesophagus long, two parts not distinct. Vulva
oesophageal. Parasites of birds. Type species Bancroftinema dentatum n. sp.

The genus differs from Seuratinema in the presence of lips and in the posses-
sion of an armed stoma.

THELAZIA AQUILINA Baylis

From Astur novae-hollandiae, collected by Dr. MacGillivray in North
Queensland. Several specimens of both sexes were examined. They agree essen-
tially with Baylis’ description (1934). Our specimens are shorter and stouter ;
the males show only three pairs of post-anal papillae. the third however is in-
distinct and large, and may comprise two small ones close together.

SUBULURA sp.
(Fig. 14-15)

From Ninox strenua, Lidsvold, Queensland. One poorly preserved female
present, 9-5 mm. long, Vestibule 49 » long, 29 » wide; oesophagus 1:2 mm. long,
its terminal bulb -25 mm. long, -2 mm, wide. Nerve ring -28 mm., and excretory
pore 34 mm. from head end. Tail +755 mm. long; vulva at mid-body; eggs
30-32 4 by 22. Possibly owing to the density of the worm, teeth were not
observed in buceal cavity. In the absence of males this species cannot be compared
satisfactorily with recognised species.

SERRATOSPICULUM GUTTATUM (Schneider)
(Fig. 20-21)

Specimens were obtained from Falco longipennis, from Orroroo, S. Aust.
(coll., F. T. Gray and S. Aust. Museum), Lake Alexandrina, S. Aust. (coll.
Dr. A. S. Randall), Burracoppin, W. Aust. (coll. Dr. Cleland), and Gawler,
S. Aust.; alco peregrinus from Moorook, S. Aust.; and from [alco melanogenys
from Macdonald Downs, Central Australia, All the specimens examined appear
to belong to the same species, although those from F, peregrinus are larger. ‘The
measurements given are, unless otherwise stated, of males and females from
F, longipennis,

Males 80 mm. long, females 100-200 mm., maximum width 1 mm. (Males
and females from I*. peregrinus 160 mm. and 290 mm. long respectively, 2 mm.
maximum width.) Epaulette structures on head poorly developed; four pairs
submedian papillae large; laterals very small. Median anterior projection on each
lip short. Narrow anterior part of oesophagus -35 mm. long in female, -32 mm,
in male; posterior part 10 mm. in female 200 mm. long; nerve ring around
anterior part, about its middle.

Male: spicules of typical shape, longer ‘62 mm., shorter -3 mm. in length
(1:13 mm. and -5 mm. in specimens from J. peregrinus), i.ec., shorter spicule

about half length of longer. Caudal alae +22 mm. long; cloaca 90 4 from tip of
tail. Caudal papillae pedunculate, five pairs preanal, six pairs postanal, their
arrangement being remarkably constant in all specimens examined.

Female: anus 60,» in front of tip of rounded tail: Vulva near beginning of
glandular part of oesophagus, -8 mm. from head in 200 mm. long worm. All
females except those from F. peregrinus covered with small cuticular bosses.
Eggs, 50 » by 30-25 p.

The worms differ from Filaria attenuata Rud., 1819, as described by Seurat
1915, in being longer, in having a relatively shorter oesophagus,.a pair of lateral
cephalic papillae, and in the arrangement of the postanal papillae in the male.
It agrees with Schneider’s Filaria guttata, described in 1866 from Falco berigora
from Adelaide. Seurat placed the species as a synonym of Rudolphi’s
PF. attenuata (from Falco peregrinus), in spite of the fact that Schneider re-
described Rudolphi’s material at the same time as he published his own account
of F. guttata, Baylis (1925, 112) recorded S. attenuatuim from Falco longipennis
from St. George, Southern Queensland, quoting as a synonym Fuilaria guttata
Schneider.

HamaAtospIcuLuM MCNEILLI J. & M.

This species, originally described from Ninox booboek, irom Hayman Island,
Queensland, is now recorded from the same host from the Burnett River, Queens-
land, and from Ninox rufa, collected by Dr. MacGillivray in North Queensland.

HAMATOSPICULUM sp,
(Fig. 18)
Part of a female worm probably referable to this genus was obtained from
Accipiter cirrhocephalus at Eidsvold by Dr. Bancroft. Such features as can be
made out, suggest H. meneilli J. & M.

LITERATURE
Baytis, I. A. 1925 A.M.N.IL, (9), 15, 112-115
Bayuis, H. A. 1934 A.M.N.H., (10), 14, 142-154
Cuitrwoop, B. G., and Wenr, I. E. 1934 Z. Parasitenk., 7, 273-335
Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1941 Rec. Austr. Mus. (in press)
Mapestone, P. A. 1931 Rec. Indian Mus., 33, 71-171
SCHNEIDER, A. 1866 Monographie der Nematoden, Berlin
sEuURAT, L. C. 1914 Compt. rend. Soc. Biol., 76, 21-24
Seurat, L. C. 1915 Novitates Zoologicae, 22, 1-25

Note—To bring our host names into line with those given in the “Official
checklist of the birds of Australia” (1926), the following alterations are necessary :
Falco melanogenys = 1’, peregrinus; Nisaetus morphnoides = Hieraaetus m.;
ee berigora (syn. H. orientalis) = Falco b.; Cerchneis cenchroides =

‘alco ¢.

NEW AUSTRALIAN LEAF-HOPPERS

By J. W. EVANS, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.ES.

Summary

The classification adopted in this paper is based on the system proposed in an earlier publication
(Evans. 1939). No excuse is offered for considering the principal jassoid groups as families, as they
are certainly as distinct as well established families in several other Orders of insects. As long as
jassoid classification rests, to such a large extent, on the position of the ocelli, little progress will be
made, and genera such as Xerophloca Germ. which on basic head structure and accessory characters
clearly belongs to the Ledridae, will continue to be misplaced.

36
NEW AUSTRALIAN LEAF-HOPPERS
sy J. W. Evans, M.A,, D.Sc, FURIES.
[Read 10 April 1941]

‘The classification adopted in this paper is based on the system proposed in an
sarlicr publication (Evans, 1939). No excuse is offered for considering the
principal jassoid groups as families, as they are certainly as distinct as well estab-
lished families in several other Orders of insects. As long as jassoid classification
rests, to such a large extent, on the position of the ocelli, little progress will be
made, and genera such as Xerophloea Germ. which on basic head structure and
accessory characters clearly belongs to the Iedridae, will continue to be misplaced.

BYTHOSCOPIDAL

Parablocratus australis sp.nov. (Fig. 13)

Length, 6 mm. General coloration, pale yellowish-green; eyes reddish-
brown. Head, ante-clypeus parallel-sided, projecting beyond the maxillary plates.
Apex of head consisting of a white apical band, of even width throughout, bounded
on each side by a narrow brown line. he occelli on,this band are in contact with
the eyes on each side. Crown flat, coronal suture extending a little beyond the
ocelli, Pronotwm, more or less parallel-sided. Tegmen hyaline, very pale green,
appendix wide. Legs flattened, and with a development of minute spines between
each of the spines in the row of the shortest but strongest spincs.

Type &, from Gregory Downs, North Queensland (T. G. Campbell, May
1931), in the collection of the C.S.L.R. Division of Entomology at Canberra.

Parablocratus citrinus sp.nov. (Fig. 14-16)

Length, 6 mim, Ffead pale brown, ante-clypeus parallel-sided but not pro-
jecting beyond the maxillary plates; fronto-clypeus convex. Apical vertical
margin of the head wider against the eves than in the centre, white bounded on
each side by a faint brown line. Ocell1 on the apical margin, close to but not
touching the eves, visible from above. Crown concave, white with orange mark-
ings, coronal sulure extending to between the ocelli. Pronoten, anteriorly white,
posteriorly brown with orange markings as indicated in fig. 16. Tegimen pale
hyaline brown, appendix narrow. IJlind tibia flat with minute spines between
each short spine.

Type @, from Cairns, North Queensland (A. M. Lea), in the collection of
the South Australian Museum.

The genera Parablocratus Wieber and Spanbergiclla Sign. ure more closely
related to Bythescopus Germ. than to genera in the family Euscelidac. Accord-
ingly they are added to the list of those genera, which in the opinion of the present
author. comprises the family Bythoscopidae (Evans, 1939). It is recognised that
although they are not extremely close to Bythescopus and [urinoscopus Wirk.,
they are more closely related to them than are such genera as Alacropsis Lewis,
Tdiocerus Lewis and Agallia Curtis. With regard to the head, in Parablocratus
and Spanbergiella the ocelli are marginal, in Bythoscopus they are ventral. The
ante-clypeus is rectangular in all three genera, the maxillary plate wide and the
labium short. The crown in Bythoscopus consists entirely of the vertex; in the
other two genera it is made up of the vertex and part of the fronto-clypeus. The
pronotum in all is wide and more or less parallel-sided, the tegmina have all sinular
venation, and the hind tibiae are flattened and slightly curved. A change in head
shape from an evenly rounded head with ventral or marginal ocelli to one that is

Trans. Ros. Soc. S.A., 63, (1), 25 July 1941

flattened or even spatulate with marginal or dorsal ocelli has occurred indepen-
dently in several groups of leaf-hoppers. A series of figures illustrating such a
change and the transition stages, has been given in an earlier paper (Evans, 1937).

IDIOCERIDAE

Idiocerus swani sp.nov. (Tig. 4)

Length, 6 mm. (?), 45 mm. (6). Head hiscuit-coloured suffused with
pink posteriorly; ocelli red; eyes, dark reddish-brown. Face of the head in two
distinct planes which are separated by a line joining the antennae. Tronto-clypeus
anteriorly convex, posteriorly flat. Crown of even width throughout, pink with
two sail black spots close to the eyes on each side. Pronotum, finely transversely
striated, yellowish-pink with two large black spots in a line with the internal
margin of the eyes on each side. Scwfelliam, wide and long with a median trans-
verse depression, marked with a variable pattern of black, yellow and pinkish-
brown. Tegmen hyaline brown, veins pink excepting for the first anal vein which
is white. Thorax and abdomen, ventral surface pale biscuit colour; ovipositor,
black.

Type, %, from Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island (D. C. Swan, February
1940), in the collection of the South Australian Museum.

Idiocerus flindersi sp.nov. (Fig. 1)

Length, 4:3 mm. IIead, ventral surface pale biscuit-colour, eyes dull red.
Ante-clypeus medially depressed, lora swollen; fronto-clypeus anteriorly medially
convex, posteriorly flat. Crown of even width throughout, slightly produced
anteriorly. Pronotune and scutellinw pale biscuit-colour. Yegmen, transparent,
colourless, veins apically pale brown.

Type, @, from Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island (D. C. Swan, February,
1940), in the collection of the South Australian Museum,

Idiocerus macropensis sp.nov. (Fig. 2 and 3)

Lengih, 3 mm. Tead, ventral surface almost flat, pale biscuit-colour, with
a rectangular grey area lying against the posterior margin; ocelli brown, cyes
black, Crown wide, pale brown and pale yellowish-brown with two small black
spots close to the anterior margin. Prenotunt concolorous with the crown.
Tegmen, dull whitish-grey with several scattered brown spots, apical cells hyaline,
veins white. Thorax, ventral surface black. Abdomen, ventral surface pale
biscuit-colour.

Type, %, from Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island (D.C, Swan, February,
1940), in the collection of the South Australian Museum.

Idiacerus insularis sp.nov. (Fig 5 and 6)

Length, 2-5 mm. Ilead, ventral surface evenly convex, ante- and fronto-
clypeus apricot-colour; eyes purplish-brown, ocelli black; an oval area against the
posterior margin of the face, purplish-brown; lora and maxillary plates biscuit-
coloured. Crown medially pale pucplish-brown, laterally apricot, slightly wider
in the centre than against the eyes. Prenolum and sciutellum golden-yellow.
Tegmen, golden-yellow, apically hyaline. Thorax and abdomen, ventral surface
pale biscuit-colour.

Type, é@, from Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island (D. C. Swan, February
1940), in the collection of the South Australian Museum.

Austrocerus gen. nov.

The ante-clypeus is flat anteriorly and steeply convex posteriorly, The
fronto-clypeus is narrow and convex anterior to the antennae; posterior to the

antennae the face is evenly rounded. The maxillary plates are narrow and
emarginate, the eyes large and the apices of the frontal sutures directed inwards.
The crown is wide and the coronal suture distinct. The hind tibia has one spine
set on a prominent base in a row containing four other spines.

Austrocerus emarginatus sp.nov. (Genotype) (Fig. 8)

Length, 3 mm. Head, ventral surface biscuit-colour, eyes lemon, Crown
wider in the centre than against the eyes, medially apricot-colour, laterally biscuit-
colour. Pronotum, scutelhum and tegmen, apricot. Thorax and abdomen, ventral
surface biscuit-colour.

Type, '?, from Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island (D. C. Swan, February
1940), in the collection of the South Australian Museum.

Macrocerus gen. nov.

‘The ante-clypeus and the fronto-clypeus are wide and almost flat, and the
maxillary plates are narrow and depressed below the level of the lora. The frontal
sutures are directed outwards apically and the ocelli are sunk in slight depressions.
The crown is wide and the coronal suture very short. The hind tibia has two
spines set on prominent bases in a row containing four other spines.

Macrocerus minutus sp.nov. (Genotype) (Fig. 9)

Length, 3 mm, Head, ventral surface lemon-yellow ; eyes, greenish-yellow.
Crown slightly wider in the centre than against the eyes. Pronotum, scutellum
and tegmen, pale buff. Thorax and abdomen, ventral surface pale biscuit-colour.

Type, &, from Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island (D. C. Swan, February
1940), in the collection of the South Australian Museum.

Idiocerella gen. nov.

The ante-clypeus is swollen and declivous anteriorly and narrow posteriorly.
The fronto-clypeus is evenly rounded and narrow, and the frontal sutures are
parallel. The crown is wide and the coronal suture short. ‘The hind tibia has
two spines set on prominent bases in a row containing four other spines.

Idiocerella obscura sp.nov. (Genotype) (Fig. 7)

Length, 3-5 mm. Head, ventral surface pale buff, eyes lemon-ycllow. Crown
slightly anteriorly produced, wider in the centre than against ihe eyes. Pronolum
wide, hind border medially emarginate, dull buff. Seiéellusm and tegmen dull buff.

Type, 9, from Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island (D. C. Swan, February
1940), in the collection of the South Australian Museum.

Nineteen species of /diocerus Lewis have been described previously from
Australia. Ot these twelve occur in Queensland and two in Western Australia.
Two of the remaining species, /. seckeri Ev. and I. kirkaldyi Ev., are abundant
and widespread in South-Eastern Austraha and Tasmania, whilst three are
apparently rare insects. It is of particular interest to be able to record four new

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES
Fig. 1-25

1, Idiocerius flindersi, head, ventral aspect; 2, Idiocerus macropensis, head, ventral aspect;
3, Jdiocerus macropensis, tegmen; 4, Idiocerus swani, head, ventral aspect; 5, Idiocerus
insularis, head, ventral aspect; 6, Idiocerus iusularis, hind tibia; 7, Idtocerclla obscwra, head,
ventral aspect; 8, dustrocerus emarginatus, head, ventral aspect; 9, Macrocerus minutus, head,
ventral aspect; 10, Macropsis viridiceps, head and thorax, dorsal aspect; 11, Macropsis
variabilis, head and thorax, dorsal aspect; 12, Macropsis norrisi, head and thorax, dorsal aspect;
13, Parablocratus australis, head and thorax, dorsal aspect; 14, Parablocratus citrinus, tegmen;
15, Perablocratus citrinus, head, ventral! aspect; 16, Parablocratus citrinus, head and thorax,
dorsal aspect; 17, Eutettix passiflorae; 18, Eutettix passiflorae, maic genitalia; 19, Eutettix
passtflorae, hind tibia; 20, Tharra leai, head, ventral aspect; 21, Tharra leai, head and
thorax, dorsal aspect; 22, Tharra leai, hind tibia; 23, Austronirvana flavus, head and thorax,
dorsal aspect; 24, Austronirvana flavus, head, ventral aspect; 25, Austronirvana flavus, tezmen.

species of Idiocerus and three new species in allied genera, collected in a restricted
area on Kangaroo Island, during the same month.

MACROPSIDAE
Macropsis viridiceps sp.nov. (Fig. 10)

Length, 4mm. Head, ventral surface cmerald green, longer than wide; eyes
reddish-brown. Crown visible above as a very narrow border, widest against the
eyes. Pronotum emerald green, steeply declivous anteriorly, Scutellum yellow
with two dark brown triangular markings against the anterior margin. Tegmen
transparent, colourless, pale grey apically; a black spot at the apex of the claval
suture, and the costal border proximally black. Thorax and abdomen, ventral
surface green. The bases of the spines on the hind tibiae, dark brown.

Type, %, from Hobart, Tasmania (J. W. E., February 1936), in the collec-
tion of the South Australan Museum.

Macropsis variabilis sp.nov. (Fig, 11)

Length, 4 mm, Head, ventral surface wider than long, sordid yellow, eyes
red. Crown narrowly visible from above, widest against the cyes. Pronotim dull
brown flecked with black, declivous anteriorly. Scutellum brownish-yellow with
dark brown punctures. Tegmen smoky-hyaline, clavus and costal margin green.
Wing with R2,3 not fully developed. Therax and abdomen, ventral surface, pale
greenish-yellow.

Type, &, from New Norfolk, Vasmania (J. W. l., November 1938), in the
collection of the Seuth Australian Museum.

Note—This is a variable species, and the general coloration may be pale
yellowish-green.

Oncopsis norrisi sp.nov. (Fig. 12)

Length, 4 mm. Head, ventral surface, ante-clypeus, lora and manillary
plates, buff; fronto-clypeus reddish-brown, vertex posteriorly dark brown; eyes
red. Pronotum declivous, red. Scutellian dull brown. Tegmen proxinally pale
yellow, distally testaceous; a wide red area between the costal border and the
radius and a transverse median dark brown fascia; clavus yellow, anal margin
dark brown; veins distally red. Thorax and abdomen, ventral surface pale yellow.
Legs pale yellow, bases of spurs on hind tibia, black.

Type, @, from Guildford, Western Australia CX. R. Norris, September
1935), in the collection of the South Australian Museum.

EUSCELIDAE
Eutettix passiflorae sp.nov. (Fig. 17-19)

Length, 3°8 mm. Head, ventral surface buff with irregular yellowish-brown
markings, eyes dark brown. Crown buff mottled with yellowish-brown.
Pronotum anteriorly yellowish-brown, posteriorly grey mottled with brown.
Seutclluim apically, and anterior lateral angles, yellowish-brown, the remainder
butt. Tegmen whitish-hyaline with an irregular pattern of light and dark brown
spots; veins light and dark brown. An irregular dark grey median fascia extends
from the anal border to half-way towards the costal border. Thorax and abdomen,
ventral surface pale grey and buff. Legs, anterior two pairs buff with very dark
brown markings on the femora and tibiae. Hind legs buff, bases of the spines
dark brown.

Male Genitalia, as in fig. 18.

Type, é, from Sydney, N.S.W. CN. S. Noble on Passiflora edulis, August
1937), in the collection of the Australian Museum.

JASSIDAE
Tharra leat sp.nov. (Fig. 20-22)

Length, 6 mm. Head, ventral surface coffee-colour, eyes black, Ante-
clypeus, fronto-clypeus and lora smooth, maxillary plates with marginal, and
vertex with transverse striations. Occlli distant from the fronto-clypeus which
ig raised above the level of the eyes; antennae very long. Crown wide consisting
entirely of the vertex, the sides of which are at right-angles to the central portion.
A median carina marks the position of the coronal suture. Pronotum and
scutellum, dark brown. Tegiten, brownish-yellow, veins brown, Thoras and
abdomen, ventral surface pale brown.

Type, 2, from Cairns, North Queensland (A. M. Lea), in the collection of
the South Australian Museum.

Kirkaldy (1906) in describing the genus Tharra stated that it differed from
Jassus Fabr, by the possession of two sub-apical cells and the absence of, trans-
verse veins in the clavus. Later (1907) he was of the opinion that this venational
difference was unreliable, and separated the two genera in a key in which Jassus
was stated to have a flat frons and antennae situated near the intero-posterior
angles of the eyes, whilst in Tharra the frons was raised and the antennae
situated near the intero-antertor angles of the eyes. The species described above
has been placed in Wirkaldy’s genus as the fronto-clypeus is raised, although in the
position of the insertion of the antennae it resembles Jassus rather than Tharra.

NIRVANIIDAE
Austronirvana gen. nov.

The ante-clypeus, which is slightly convex, is narrower anteriorly than
posteriorly. The fronte-clypeus is concave, especially apically, and the labium is
short, reaching only a little beyond the fore-coxae. The head has an apical
flattened margin which is wider against the antennae on each side than in the
centre, and the muscle impressions of the sucking-pump extend onto this margin.
‘The crown is evenly convex and declivous, and the coronal suture extends for two-
thirds of the length of the crown. The ocelli are on the crown directly above the
antennae and are closer to cach other than are the eyes. ‘The pronotum narrows
slightly anteriorly and the scutellum is wide. The tegmen is long and narrow, has
a narrow appendix and several cells are developed between the median and the
first cubital vein. The hind tibia has two rows of evenly spaced similar spines,
between which is a row of slightly longer spines set on enlarged bases, There is
also a row of short hair-like spines.

Austronirvana flavus sp.nov. (Genotype) (Fig. 23-25)

Length, 10 mm. General coloration pale buff, eyes brown. Tegmen opaque.
venation indistinct.

Type, 2, trom Mount Tamborine, Queensland (A. M. Lea). in the collec-
tion of the South Australian Museum,

Norr—Other specimens of the species from the same locality are bright
yellow with a median longitudinal orange stripe on the head and pronotum. This
stripe may be bordered with white.

Nore—In an earlier paper (1939) the genera Ledrella Ev, and Ledraprora Ev.
were placed in a sub-family of the Ledridae, the Ledrellinae. It is now realised
that this was an error, and they are herewith transferred to the family
Thymbridae (Evans. 1939).

JREFERENCES
Evans, J. W. 1937 Mem. Queensland Mus., 11, (2), 149
Evans, J. W. 1939 Pap. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1938, 39, 19
Kirkatpy, G. W. 1906 Bull. Hawaii Sug. Ass. Ent., 1, (9)
Kirxartpy, G. W. 1907 Bull. Hawaii Sug, Ass, Ent., 3

REVISIONAL NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF
TENUIPALPUS (ACARINA, TETRANYCHIDAE)

By H. WOMERSLEY, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., South Australian Museum

Summary

In these Transactions, vol. 64, pt. 2, p. 236-242 ("Studies in Australian Acarina: Tetranychidae and
Trichodenidae"), I described or recorded the following species of Tennipalpus Donnadieu from
Australia: phoenicis Geijs'kes 1939, californicus Banks 1904 and vitis Worn.

REVISIONAL NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF
TENUIPALPUS (ACARINA, TETRANYCHIDAE)

By H. Womerstey, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., South Australian Museum
[Read 8 May 1941]

In these Transactions, vol. 64, pt. 2, p. 236-242 (“Studies in Australian
Acarina: Tetranychidae and Trichodenidae”), I described or recorded the follow-
ing species of Tenuipalpus Donnadieu from Australia: phoenicis Geijskes 1939,
californicus Banks 1904 and vitis Wom.

The last two species were distinct from the first in being very much less
chitinised, in lacking the distinct and well-defined propodosomal and opisthosomal
dorsal plates with their marked reticulations, and in the absence of the distinct
ventral plates.

Since publishing my paper I have been indebted to Mr. S. L. Allman, of the
Department of Agriculture, Sydney, for the loan of certain further specimens,
in which he had observed that the adult cuticle was well differentiated within that
of the nymph. From these specimens it is now possible to definitely ascertain
the relationship of particular nymphs to particular adults, with the following
results in synonynyy :

TENUIPALPUS CALIFoRNICUS Banks, 1904
J. New York Entom Soc., 1904, p. 55.

— Tenuipalpus phoenicis Geijskes: Meded, Landbouwhoogeschool,
Wageningen, 42, (4), 1939.

= y sf Womersley: Trans. Roy. Soc. S$. Aust.,
64, (2), 237, 1940.
= ‘3 californicus Womersley: Trans. Roy. Soc. 5, Aust.,

64, (2), 239, 1940.
The type of this species is therefore the form (nymphal) described by Banks and
also figured by Quayle (1912).

TENUIPALPUS AUSTRALIS Tucker, 1926
Div. Entomology, Dept. Agric., Mem. No. v., S. Africa, 1926, p. 3, pl. i, pl. iu,
fig. C-J.
— Tenuipalpus vitis Womersley: Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 64,
(2), p. 241.
Specimens collected from Virginia Creeper, Armidale, New South Wales,
22 November 1940, and sent to me by Mr. Allman, show very clearly the form
described and figured by ‘Tucker, within the nymphal cuticle of T. vitis. It is
therefore definitely established that the form vitis is but the early stage of australis.
T. australis was described from South Africa and, as such, has not hitherto
been recorded from Australia. My record of witts from lemons at Perth, Western
Australia, must now be referred to Tucker’s species.
The most obvious difference in the adult is that in californicus there are only
6 clavate setae around the posterior margin of the opisthosoma, whereas there are
8 in australis.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (1), 25 July 1941

MATA TRIRUDA fapond peyduisu WYyUM IejsUl ype Surmoys syueg SnIvudofyps sndjngimuayz
‘AIA JEHUAA ‘OUIP “gq MIA [esiop “Oxon sypasnp sndjodinua_z ‘Vy ‘SI

THE PRINCIPAL SOIL AND VEGETATION RELATIONSHIPS ON
YUDNAPINNA STATION, NORTH - WEST SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By R. L. CROCKER and H. R. SKEWES
(Waite Agricultural Research Institute)

Summary

Yudnapinna Station (about 50 miles north-west of Port Augusta) has been selected as the centre f or
soil erosion and vegetation degeneration and regeneration studies by the Waite Agricultural
Research Institute, under the Ranson Mortlock bequest. The Division of Soils of the Council for
Scientific and Industrial Research was co-opted to elucidate the soil and vegetation relationships. A
soil and ecological survey was made of some 25 square miles (North Lambing and South Lambing
Paddocks, etc.) in which it has been considered the investigations would be centred. By means of
some general traverses across the whole station a broader view of the ecology was obtained and
some new types investigated.

THE PRINCIPAL SOIL AND VEGETATION RELATIONSHIPS ON
YUDNAPINNA STATION, NORTH-WEST SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By R. L. Crocker and H. R. SKEWES
(Waite Agricultural Research Institute )
PLates L vo HI
[Read 8 May, 1941]
INTRODUCTION

Yudnapinna Station (about 50 miles north-west of Port Augusta) has been
selected as the centre for soil erosion and vegetation degeneration and regeneration
studies, undertaken by the Waite Agricultural Research Institute, under the
Ranson Mortlock bequest. he Division of Soils of the Council for Scientific
and Industrial Research: was co-opted to elucidate the soil and vegetation relation-
ships. A soil and ecological survey was made of some 25 square miles (North
Lambing and South Lambing Paddocks, etc.) in which it has been considered the
investigations would be centred. By means of some general traverses across the
whole station a broader view of the ecology wus obtained and some new types
investigated.

GEOLOGY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY

The general physiography is that of the last phases of a peneplain under-
going dissection. Only a few mesas and buttes give evidence of the former general
level, although smaller ranges and hills are representative of successive stages of
the weathering. The hills are rarely more than 300 feet above the general level,

iN,

—T

\.
\ Mg

—e

. i wi . jo Eta
5 1830 1895 1900 1905 1910 1915 1920 1925 1930 1935 1940
Vig. |

meee ee bw mM a wo
a

(Ke pene
rg

and the rock strata are horizontal or slightly inclined, and for the most part sand-
stone, quartzose sandstone, shales aud grits, of doubtful Ordovician age
(Howchin (3), 1929). The tableland was one time widespread and unquestion-
ably continuous with the Arcoona ‘Lableland further north. Much sand has been
superimposed on the area during an arid cycle in Recent (or late Pleistocene)

times. In places this has been thrown up into ridges exhibiting a rough parallelism.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (1), 25 July 1941

45
SOIL AND ECOLOGICAL SURVEY OF

PART OF YUDNAPINNA
PASTORAL LEASE 1867
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

SCALE
au

———

Chpinw ze a o0 taa Chairs

<a De PAE KEY TO SOIL TYPES
HL, PE 6 — AND VEGETATION —

TYPE 1 (ner) TYPE 1 Gramhol
PROFILE VEGETATION 4 PROFILE VEGETATION

SESE Cr
St
Bex
beet
A ky
~
ss53>35

Gi)

Adan Folia
2. Dustlorss

A, Sow La rree
A py rasritche te
Biparidara

Rlanicuspis
Kdéivurtcata

PA BOOCK

Uh gypsum»
ene deteniing

MAR OUS Ew S

lh dekenete

nb thr tztirdes

YUDBDNAPINNA

leterodendnn
aelfelana

Aristida

epenaria

=
Sas

x
X

SAY

Ny
SANS

Titabve annie

Hipaet Staton,

Ate
Creeks shown thee...

TYFE &

Aoumie: doegafiylta

Stony Hitis

wartad le

einilanss (fit

CLIMATIC FEATURES

‘The mean annual rainfall at Yudnapinna is 7-5 inches. Fig. 1 shows the
annual variation for the years 1885-1939. During this time the highest rainfall
recorded was 18°08 inches, in 1921, and the lowest 2°36 inches in 1928. One of
the most striking featureg is the variability of thg rainfall, which is influenced by
both winter low pressure systems and summer monsoonal rains, The area ‘falls
within Davidson’s (2) warm temperate arid zone, with P/E > 0-5 for 1-2 months
of the year. Particularly in the summer months tropical downpours may be
experienced. In 1938, of a total of 9°62 inches of rain, six inches fell in two days
(435 points on 20 February and 165 points on 23 October). It is generally
recognised that annual rainfall figures are very misleading as an index to effective
rainfall, The new meteorological station placed at Yudnapinna by the Waite
Institute will permit of more critical analyses of the climate in future,

THE SOILS

With the aid of aerial photographs a soil survey was made of North Lambing,
South Lambing and Horse Paddocks, and Lawrence’s Flat, representing a total
area of about 25 square miles. Seven soil types were classified and mapped on
the basis of soil profile and vegetation association. Their extent and distribution
are indicated on the accompanying soil map, No attempt was made (except in
the case where there were definite crabhole affinities) to differentiate the soils of
stony hills—the tableland remnants.

Subsequently some three square miles included in the Yarramundi grazing
experiment were also surveyed. On the more extensive reconnaissance one new
type and one new phase have been added to'thd seven types mapped above.

The first seven types described are those differentiated in the more detailed
survey of North and South Lambing Paddocks. The profile characteristics and
variation of the different types are summarised in the sketch figures shown on
the soil map.

Type 1—Limited to South Lambing Paddock in the detailed survey, but
occurs more extensively, though sporadically, over the whole station. It is asso-
ciated with the tableland remnants either on the slopes between the stony hills
and the lower gently sloping plains, or on the tableland itself. It is characterised
by gibber shelf and more or less gibber-free crabholes. There is no evidence of
crabhole puff development. Towards the eastern side of South Lambing Paddock
an area of this soil type occurs at a much lower topographical position and with a
slightly modified vegetation assemblage. On some of the higher stony slopes there
are practically no mature crabholes, but immature crabholes occur and affinities
with this soil type are obvious.

One of the most striking features of the shelf profile is the abundance of
surface gibbers and pebbles. These are iron-coated, somewhat glazed, grit and
sandstone gibbers, chiefly $ inch to 24 inch in diameter.) There are occasionally
isolated gibbers in the crabholes themselves, but they are usually gibber-free.
Apart from the presence or absence of surface gibbers, however, there is a great
difference in the structure of the clay in the twa profiles,'and in the distribution
of lime and in relative salinity. The shelf profile shows well developed nuttiness
(with some columnar tendencies) in the upper clay horizons, but there is a gradual
decrease in structure with depth. In the crabhole profiles, apart from the large
cracks which develop, there is no structure exhibited at all.

In the profile of Type 1b small included ferruginous-coated pebbles and sand
and coarse sand along the cleavage lines of the crabhole cracks show the maximum
depth of cracking. It is approximately 33 inches. The profiles were sampled

@) Compare shelf on Arcoona Tableland covered with large surface gibbers and
plates.

about a month after a moderate fall of rain. The shelf profile was quite dry, but
that of the crabhole was moist for the greater part of its depth. The better water
relationships of the crabhole are further emphasised by greater leaching, resulting
in low salinity and greater depth to the lime horizons relative to the shelf profiles.
In both La and 1b variable amounts of gypsum are present as‘loose crumbs ini
the deep subsoil.

Type 2—Probably the most extensive occurrence of this type on Yudnapinna
is in South Lambing Paddock, although it occurs elsewhere in isolated smaller
areas. In South lambing it is found over a gently sloping plain adjacent to the
stony hills. Its distribution in the detailed area studied is shown om the accom-
panying soil map. In Lawrence’s Flat and the Ilorse Paddock it is also important,
but is here modified by watercourse conditions,

Normally there is between two and seven inches of sandy loam above the
upper nutty clay horizon, but occasionally the profile is truncated and the clay
much nearer the surface. With a super-imposed A, horizon, showing lammae
of successive additions of washed soil, the depth to the clay increases.

The most constant feature of the type is the structure of the upper clay
horizon—the B, horizon. This always shows distinct nutty tendencies—some-
times less perfectly developed, but nevertheless present. Immediately above the
nutty clay, intimately associated with it, and often penetrating some short distance
down vertical cracks in the clay, is a bleached grey-brown sandy loam horizon.
This capping is a very constant characteristic, It varies in thickness between
about 4 inch and 2 inches, and shows on a pit face as an irregular and indefinite
greyish band. In the Murrumbidgee area a grey, weakly cemented, apparently
eluviated band has been described by Taylor and Hooper (8) ; it was sandier than
the surface and usually had a lower pII. At Yudnapinna this horizon had a
slightly lower pH.

Surface gibbers often occur, and very occasionally a crabhole. This and the
structure of the clay represent a link with the shelf profile:(Type la). This soil
type is associated with Atripler vesicarium (saltbush) — Kochia planifolia (blue-
bush) steppe, except where modifications occur under watercourse conditions.

Type 3—In the transition zone between Type 2 and Type 5 (to be described
later), soils more or less intermediate in profile occur.

Although the surface is deeper and the subsoil generally lighter with little
structure, it bears a direct relationship to Type 2, in that there is often evidence of
a thin bleached greyish layer immediately above the reddish-brown clay loam
horizon. Surface gibbers occur occasionally, and there are frequently gibbers in
the subsoil which impede the penetration of the soil auger. There is usually
gypsum in the deeper subsoil. The type is of a transitional nature, and con-
sequently somewhat variable and not important,

Type 4—Type 4 is predominantly associated with watercourses. Here the
water relationships oi the soils are not dependent on soil type and rainfall in the
normal way. It is distinctly a wetter habitat. The small creeks ‘from the stony
hills to the, south of, and in the south-west of, South Lambing, flood out over a
gently sloping saltbush-bluebush plain, which itself acts as a watershed. This
water is confined to more definite watercourses in the Horse Paddock and North
Jambing, which is slightly higher. This means a modified soil and variation in
vegetation relationships. All definite watercourses have been included in this type,
and no attempt has been made at ‘further differentiation. There is consequently
a great deal of variation in soil profile. Indeed, we have variation from modified
Type 2 on the one hand, where the shrub steppe gives way to more definite water-
courses, to modified Type 5 on the other, where the watercourse abuts against the
higher myall (Acacia Sowdenit) country. There is further variation introduced
by the fact that some watercourses run much more frequently than others, or

portion of a watercourse runs before and longer than the remainder. The soils
all have one thing in common: they have all been modified by additional water
and all have better water relationships than normal.

As is to be expected, the modification of Type 2, where the watercourses
become more definite, is not sudden and complete, but gradual and even irregular.
The red-brown clay preserves some structure, and the greyish thin band associated
with it frequently persists in some degree even under watercoutse conditions. On
the accompanying soil map the southern boundary of North Lambing has been
taken as an arbitrary boundary between Types 2 and 4. Some areas of Type 2
are included north of this, and to the south, particularly on Lawrence’s Flat, there
are more definite watercourses.

Type 5—This type is invariably associated with Acacia Sowdenti (myall) —
Myoporum platycarpum tree steppe. It occupies a large area in North Lambing
and is the most important single type over the station as a whole.

From the more extensive reconnaissance of the station as a whole it becomes
desirable to regard the shallow and deeper profiles within the range of variation
illustrated in the sketch figure on the map as two phases. These two phases grade
into each other, but in the extremes can be correlated with variations in floristic
composition of the sub-dominants. The light phase of Type 5 frequently has a
more red-brown sand surface and grades into Type 6. On the accompanying soil
map the lighter areas are differentiated by writing “light surface” across the map.
The subsoil often seems “powdery” in the field, and it is not unusual to find a
few small gibbers. These are generally coated with calcium carbonate, The
amount of calcium carbonate varies considerably, but generally is less abundant
in the lighter phase.

Type 5a—On the soil map a variant of Type 5 is mapped as Type 5a, In
the field there seems little to differentiate it from the shallow phase of Type 5.
It has the same powdery surface, but the sandy clay horizon is mostly shallower:
It is best considered a transition type as it gives way to modified shrub steppe.

Type 6—This type was defined in North Lambing and Lawrence’s Flat
Paddocks, where it is associated with the low and usually narrow sandy rises
adjacent to the watercourses. These rises are usually between five and ten fect
above the plain or watercourse level. There is a general transition in soil type
down the slope of the rise, Elsewhere on Yudnapinna the type occurs especially
as low sandy elevations in the myall-sandalwood country (Type 5). Indeed, all
stages in the transition betweon Type 6 and Type 5 (light phase) occur. These
intermediate soils when mapped under Type 6 are shown by writing “shallow
surface” across the soil map. They carry mulga (Acacia anewra)/ Occasionally
in the lower rises the profile is heavier in the deep subsoil, or occasionally, as in
the sample pit, it is underlain by large water-worn quartzite pebbles and stones.
The sandy loam and sandy clay loam horizons are sometimes weakly cemented
with lime,

Type 7—This type is not important. Its distribution in the area in which the
detailed survey was made is limited to areas adjacent to creeks. The soils are
composed principally of stratified alluvium. The surface is a sand or coarse sand,
but the subsoil is sometimes as heavy as a sandy clay, usually containing water-
worn and stratified stones and pebbles.

Type 8—Widely distributed over Yudnapinna, but not occurring in the area
surveyed in detail, are rather jumbled sandridges, which preserve a rough sort of
parallelism in any locality, Their trend is variable, but more or less east and west.
They are associated with Acacia linophylla (mulga) and Casuarina lepidophloia,
The soil becomes progressively shallower to the lime and the subsoil heavier,
proceeding from the crest down the ridge slope. The crest is invariably sand to
72 inches. No deeper borings were made. In the occurrence near Lake Maer
Farlane the soils are much paler‘in colour and very close to the lake are light
brown and light yellowish-brown, The type, however, is essentially the same.

The Stony Hills—The hills are somewhat variable, depending on the degree
to which weathering has proceeded. On those hills whose flat tops still indicate
the general pre-dissection level, there are usually crabholes and soils akin to Type 1
on the tableland remnant, but the soils of the slopes are variable and shallow and
mixed with much screen material in the steeper places. No attempt has been made
to classify these variable soils. Remnants of the old tableland, though, in every
stage of disintegration, occur widely over the area,

Laboratory Examination of the Soils—Standard methods of analysis were used for
the determination to be briefly described. Reaction values were determined with the
glass electrode in 1:5 soil-water suspension, previously shaken for one hour. An aliquot
of this suspension was also used for the estimation of total soluble Salts (conductivity
methods) and chlorides (Best’s (1) electrometric titration method).

Phosphoric acid was obtained from the hydrochloric acid extract. Replaceable bases
were also determined by standard methods set out by Prescott and Piper (6). Caustic
soda was used as a dispersing agent in the mechanical analyses which closely followed
the international “A'’ pipette method, and the results are set out fully in the appended
tables.

(Subsoil 6446

surface 6445 —*
Subsoil 6650 ---------~
Surface 6649 cere cece

TYPES6

TYPES |

FREQUENCY

Om.m. ‘08 ‘l 2 25 zi) aU 15) 20m,
PARTICLE SIZE (Logarithmic Scale)
Fig. 2

Distribution Curves of Type 6 and Type 8

Mechanical Analysis—Mechanical analyses of 45 samples, representative of the major
soil types, have been carried out. A noticeable feature is the predominance of coarse
sand over fine sand in most of the types. In general, the relationship between field
texture and mechanical composition has been satisfactory. Calcium carbonate has not
been specifically determined but the “loss on acid treatment” figures are a satisfactory
index, except where gypsum is present. Calcium carbonate is mostly in the form of soft
lime, and rubble is relatively scarce.

Mechanical analyses were not made of the two sand types—Type 6 and Type 8.
Detailed sievings, following Smith’s (7) technique, were done on these, and the results
expressed in a particle size distribution curve drawn from a previously constructed sum-
mation percentage particle size curve. The marked difference between the particle size
distribution in the two soils is clearly shown in Fig. 2.

Sotl Reaction—Soil reaction is alkaline, and in most soils markedly so, the lowest
value recorded being pH 7:4 for the surface horizons of the sandridge type—Type 8.

The highest value recorded was pH 9-9 for the deep subsoil of Type 5. Most of the pH
values range between pH 8-0 and pH 9:5, y

Nitrogen—Total nitrogen has been determined on a number of surface and sub-
surface soils and is shown in Table If]. The very low figures of -020% and -013%
recorded for the mulga sandrise (Type 6) and the sandridge (Type 8) are respectively
of the same order as those recorded for the parallel sandridge soils (Winkie sand) of the
Murray Mallee area (4), The highest value, -115%, was obtained with the surface hori-
zons of the crabhole profile (Type 1b).

Phoshoric Acid—Analyses of the hydrochloric acid extracts of ten surface soils and
numerous subsoil samples show that phosphates are generally low to moderate; but -07%
P2Qs in the surface horizons of the crabhole profile (Type 1b) is fairly high for Australian
soils. They range between 02% POs in Type 8 to -07% in Type 1b.

Soluble Salts—Total soluble salts and chlorides are variable but much higher on the
heavier types than the lighter ones, where they are negligible. In the case of the shelf
profile (Type la) the Bi horizon, sampled. only from 1-5 inches below the surface, con-
tained 1-44% total soluble salts, and -687% chlorides (as Cl). Undoubtedly this high
soluble salt content, ‘together with the great aridity of the edaphic habitat of which it is
indicative, is the cause of the almost complete absence of plants on the gibber shelf.
Soluble salts are also high in the subsoils of Type lb (crabhole) and Type 2 (A. vesi-
carium—K., planifolia steppe) where, however, they have been leached to a greater depth.
In most cases there is a steady increase in both total soluble salt and chloride content
with depth.

Exchangeable Bases—The results of some exchangeable base analyses are set out in
Table I. In general the relative proportions of the bases and their relationship to depth
and texture are somewhat different from those usually found in Australian semi-arid
soils. As is usual and to be expected, potassium is very low and sodium much more
important, while calcium is the dominant base. The unusual thing about Type 2 (shrub
steppe) is that the relative proportion of the bases remains more or less constant down
the B horizon. The high proportion of sodium, combined with the fairly high clay can-
tent of the subsoils of Type 2, must considerably restrict water movement through the
soil and tend to make the habitat a very arid one.

Taste I
Exchangeable Bases in Yudnapinna Soils

Total Total

soluble bases
Soil Soil Depth salts Clay m.e./ Percentage of total bases
Tyne No. (inches) pH % Yo 10Qgm. soil Ca Mg Kk Na
2 6416 5- 7 8-8 +047 _ 22-9 49 21 8 22
6417 7-13 8:9 172 51-3 30°0 45 20 6 29
6418 13-19 8-9 “671 44-7 31+2 40 22 4 34
6419 19-42 8-8 1-08 35°7 25-0 40 26 3 31
4b 6421 0- 5 8-9 025 231 15-7 62 21 14 3
6424 27-52 9-5 “051 27°8 15-6 54 28 8 10
4a 6428 4-19 8-7 -019 40-3 21:6 57 28 sol 4
5a 6442 18-23 9-4 +035 18-1 9-4 62 25 5 8
6443 23-36 9-9 +169 19-4 10-8 34 31 6 29

THE VEGETATION

The principal factors controlling the distribution of the vegetation at
Yudnapinna in the regions surveyed are essentially edaphic, although abnormal
water relationships are frequently a compensating factor. The floristics of a large
part of the north-west—the Lake Torrens Plateau—have already been very fully
dealt with by Murray (5) (1931), and the general ecology further mentioned by
Wood (9) (1937). Five important associations can be recognised at Yudnapinna
and are summarised in Table IT.

Taste II
Vegetation Associations

Association Soil type Edaphic complex Formation
Atriplex vesicarinun— 1
Bassia spp.
A, vesicarium— Shrub steppe
A. vesicarium— 2 K. planifolia

Kochia planifolia

Acacia Sowdenti— 5 A. Sowdenti— Tree steppe
M, platycar pion AM. platycarpum
Acacia ancura 6
Acacia linophylla— Scrub

‘A, linophylla— C. lepidophlota

C. lepidophloia

(1) Atriplex vesicarium—Bassia spp. association.

On the gibber crabhole and shelf areas (Soil Type 1) an interrupted steppe of
Atriplex vesicartuyn (bladder saltbush) principally associated with species of
Bassia occurs (see pl. i, fig. 1). A. vesicarium is prominent both tn and around
crabholes, and is found te a much less extent on the gibber shelf. The soils of
the shelf, however, in addition to being an arid habitat, have a high salinity, and
vegetation is sparse or even absent. Plants occurring are Bassia brachyptera,
B. ventricosa, B, sclerolaenoides, and sparingly B. lanicuspis, B. divaricata and
B. biflora, Other plants even more sparingly present include a samphire (probably
Pachycornia tenuis), Kochia spongiocarpa, K. planifolia, Bassia intricata,
Babbagia acroptera, Daucus glochidiatus, Frankenia sp. and a low Chenopo-
dium sp.

The crabhole habitat is a much moister one. Plants are much more abundant.
After rains water frequently flows from one crabhole higher up the slope to
another lower down. The most important species is A. vesicarium, but associated
with it frequently are Kochia spongiocarpa, K. planifolia, Bassia divaricata,
B, intricata, B. uniflora and B. biflora, Several grasses, including Eragrostis
selifolia, Stipa, sp., Panicum sp. and Tragus racemosus may occur, while Schismus
barbatus has been recorded. Bassia brachyptera, B. ventricosa and Pachycornia
tenuis are occasionally found on the edge of crabholes, After rains Atriplex
Spongiosum (pop saltbush), Convelvulus sp. (aff. C. erubescens), Psoralea sp.
and Medicago denticulata are usually important.

There is a modified vegetation assemblage towards the north-eastern portion
of South Lambing. This area has been badly overgrazed by sheep. ‘The principal
variation is the greater relative abundance of Kochia planifolia, the apparent
absence of K. spongiecarpa and the presence of Bassia bicuspis, which is very
abundant on both the shelf and in the crabholes. Kochia aphylla is present
occasionally in some of the crabholes. This association is widespread on the
gibber shelf-crabhole arcas over the whole station. It is undoubtedly allied
closely to that of the Arcoona Tableland and, with modifications in composition.
occurs on the Tableland renmnants.

(2) Atriplex vesicarinm—Kochia planifolia association.

On Soil Type 2 there is a shrub steppe dominated by A. vesicarium (bladder
saltbush) and K. planifelia (low bluebush) (pl. i, fig. 3). The associated plants
are principally chenopods of the genus Bassia (Bindyi)—B, lanicuspis, B. eria-
cantha, B. divaricata, B. decurrens, and B, brachyptera are most important, while
B. paradoxa, B, intricata, B, uniflora, B, ventricosa, B. bicuspis and B. biflora are
occasionally present. Grasses occur sparingly and include Stipa spp., Tragus
racemosus, Eragrostis sp. and Enneapogon sigricans,

On overgrazed and degenerated areas Bassias (Bindyi) become even more
important (particularly B. divaricata and B. decurrens). In extreme degeneration
Eragrostis Dielsit and the annual “pop saltbush,” Atriplex spongiosum, are prac-
tically the only plants of consequence to maintain a precarious existence, and then
only after rains and where there is small drift accumulation (see pl. ili, fig. 12).

Kochia Georgei, K. aphylla, K. pyranudata and Eremophila Dutton are
ustially prominent where water relationships are better, especially where the shrub
steppe gives way to the varied association of the more definite watercourses.
Although rabbit burrows are scarce in the A. vesicariwm—K. planifola associa-
tion, where they do occur K. pyramidata is usually prominent on the disturbed
earth (pl. i, fig. 2).

This association is not a particularly important one on Yudnapinna, and the
occurrence in South Lambing is probably the mast extensive. Near the eastern
side of Lake MacFarlane an almost pure A, vesicarium. steppe occurs on a lighter
soil type. This association is not widespread and not fully understood, either
edaphically or floristically, but K. George: occurs sparingly and the rare occur-
rences of a samphire suggest that soil salinity is high,

(3) Acacia Sowdenti—Myoporum platycarpum association.

This is the most extensive association on Yudnapinna and is associated with
Soil Type 5. The association is an open one and essentially tree-shrub steppe.
The dominant tree is Acacia Sowdenti (myall), although M. platycarpum
(“sandalwood”) is almost invariably present. It extends, with modifications,
northwards to the Arcoona Tableland and south to the Gawler Ranges; south, of
this it ig replaced by mallee. It has been mentioned earlier (p. 48) that a light and
shallow phase of Soil Type 5 can be recognised. These grade into each other,
In the extreme they are readily correlated with changes in floristic composition of
the associated plants.

On the shallow phase of Type 5 there is a lower stratum (3 to 4 feet high)
of Kochia sedifelia (bluebush), which gives a characteristic facies to the com-
munity (pl. i, fig. 4; pl. ii, fig. 5). The taller shrubs, Cassia Sturtii, C. phyllodinia,
HA, oleifolium and Lycium australe, are widespread but sparse. Other plants
frequently important in the lower strata are Kochia triptera var. pentaptera,
K. excavata, Enchylaena tomentosa (particularly under myall), Chenopodium sp.,
Bassia sclerolaenoides and Bassia obliquicuspis, which is very abundant. The
principal grass is Ewneapogon nigricans. Occurring sparingly are a number of
other plants, including Eremophila scoparia, Templetonta egena, Atriplex
stipitatum, A, vesicarium, Kochia Georget and Bassia paradoxa, Kochia pyrami-
data (black bluebush) occurs and is common where the association has been
heavily grazed. Oni the lighter phase of Type 5 Kochia sedifolia is more or less
replaced (sometimes entirely) by Atriplex vesicarium (pl. ii, fig. 6) and to a much
less extent A. stipitatum (smallec saltbush). The amount of free lime in the soil
seems an important factor influencing the distribution of K. sedifolia—the lighter
phase is generally less calcareous than the shallow phase but not invariably so—
this tends to confuse the edaphic relationships.

Associated with the saltbushes (Atriplex vesicartum and A. stipitatum) on
this light phase are a number of species which are absent or occur but rarely on
the shallower phase. Generally prominent are Templetoma egena, Acacia Burkittit
(Burkitt’s wattle), Heterodendron oleifolium, Cassia Sturin, C. phyllodinea,
Lycium australe, Kachia sp. (aff. K. Georget), Enchylaena tomentosa, K. triptera
var. pentaptera and K. pyramidata, Bassia obliquicuspis and B. paradoxa are
abundant, and Stipa sp. and E. nigricans are the principal grasses. Other species
frequently present, are Exocarpus aphylla (wild cherry), Fusanus acuminatus
(wild peach), F, persicarius, Pimelia microcephala and Eremophila scoparia,
Fusanus spicatus has now been almost entirely cut out but was once impontant.

On the extremely light soils bordering on Type 6, Acacia aneura (mulga),
Trichinium obovatum and Aristida arenaria occur freely; Kochia brevifolia and
Hakea leucoptera (needlebush) have been recorded. Loranthus pendulus is a
very common parasite on myall, and L. Preiss on Acacia Burkittii and other
acacias, L. Exocarpi occurs very rarely.

The A. Sowdenii—M. platycarpum association cannot be understood unless
the edaphic variation and the parallel modification in floristics are kept in mind.
It must be realised that there is complete variation in the type within the limits of
the light and shallow phases. A modification of floristics occurs on the soil variant
mapped as 5a in the detailed survey. It is best considered a transition area.
A. Sowdenii and M. platycarpum occur very sparingly; K. sedifelia is abundant
and K, planifolia always associated though less important.

(4) Acacia ancura association (pl. ii, fig. 8).

On the low sandrises (Soil Type 6) in North Lambing and Lawrence’s Flat
Paddocks, Acacia aneura (mulga) is dominant. Elsewhere on sandrises and low
sandy areas within the 4. Sowdenii—M. platycarpum association mulga scrub
occurs, but the floristics are known principally from the detailed survey of North
Lambing and Lawrence’s Flat paddocks. Kaochia pyramidata (biack bluebush )
is prominent. Other plants commonly occurring are Bassia paradoxa, Sida
virgata, Euphorbia Drummondii and the grass Aristida arenaria (mulga grass).
Much less frequently Acacia Burkittii, Heterodendron olcifolium, Rhagodia sp.
(probably R. spinescens), Alriplex vesicarium, A. stipitatum, Kochia brevifolia,
Templetonia egena, Bassia obliquicuspis, B. divaricata and Trichinium obovatum
are associated. The grasses Stipa nitida, Enneapogon nigricans, Tragus race-
mosus, Trisetum pumilum and Paspalidium gracile have been recorded,

Many annual and ephemeral species may be present after rains, including
Atriplex halimoides, A. angulatum, A, leptocarpum, A. limbatumi, A. spongiosum,
Citrullus vulgaris, Cucumis myriocarpus, Tribulus sp. (probably T. terrestris),
Portulaca oleracea, Tetragonia eremea, Salsola Kali (buckbush), Blennodia
trisecta and the composites Vittadinia tenuissima, Helipterum variabile, Hi.
moschatum, H. polygalifolium, and Helichrysum Mellorianum. Emex australis,
Kochia triptera and Kochia tomentosa var. appressa occur rarely. Casuarina
lepidophloia was recorded on one sandrise. The three mistletoes, Loranthus
Exocarpi, L. pendulus and L. Preissii, all occur very sparingly on mulga.

(5) Acacia linophylla—Casuarina lepidophloia association (pl. iii, fig. 9 and 10).

On the sandridges (Soil Type 8) that occur in the Yarraty-Roarys Dam area,
west of Lake MacFarlane (e.g., Litchfield’s Paddock), and elsewhere on Yudna-
pinna is a characteristic scrub of Acacia linophylla (mulga) and Casuarina
lepidophloia (black oak). C. lepidophloia tends to occur on the higher ridge crests
and in almost pure societies and is not as important as A. linophylla, which is
usually 10-12 feet high and more or less spreading—it is sometimes called
“umbrella mulga” locally. Associated shrubs or trees are practically limited to
Heterodendron oleifolium (bullock bush), Acacia aneura (mulga) and Lyctwm
australe which occur sparingly. Myoporum sp. (probably M. desertorum);
Pimelia microcephala and Eremophila longifolia have been recorded. Lower
down the slope of the sandridge Acacia Burkittli, A. aneura, Fusanus acuminatus,
FF, persicarius, etc., become prominent.

Other plants are principally grasses and annuals and ephemerals but are rela-
tively scarce. The principal grasses are Aristida arenaria, A. stipoides and
Schismus barbatus; A, stipoides and A. arenaria are sometimes locally important.
The annuals and ephemerals which may be of seasonal import include Agianthus
pusillus, Calandrinia polyandra (‘‘parakeelya”), Blennodia sp., Tetragonia
eremea, Senecio Gregorii and Myriocephalus Stuartii,

(6) Other Communities.

These five associations described are the principal ones on Yudnapinna and
most variations are understandable as transitions or as modihed communities on
more or less intermediate soil types. For example, Soil Type 3 (see soil map) is
essentially a transition type between Soil Types 5 and 2. As would be expected,
the associated vegetation is more or less intermediate between the 4. Sowdenti—
M, platycarpum and the A. vesicarium—K. planifolia associations. The most
prominent plants are A. vesicarium and K. planifolia, but other species less
important and of variable frequency include A. Sowdenii (myall), K. pyramidata,
K. sedifolia (where subsoil lime is abundant), Eremophila Dutton and numerous
Bassias, including B. obliquicuspis, B, lanicuspis and B, eriacantha,

Certain other communities should be mentioned, particularly the water-
courses and the stony hills.

(a) Vegetation of the watercourses.

In the area surveyed in detail (North and South Lambing Paddocks, etc.)
the watercourse soils varied (see p. 47) more or less from modified steppe soils
(Type 2) to modified tree-steppe soils (Type 5). Kochia pyramidata (black blue-
bush) and A. vesicarium are the most frequent and consistent species.

Associated with them on the heavier soils are Kochia Georgei, K. planifolia,
K. aphylla (cotton bush), Sida sp., Sida intricata (Paddy's lucerne), Eremophild
Duttonii, Acacia ancura, Bassia paradoxa and B. dwaricata, Less frequent are
Acacia Burkittii, Acacia sp., A. Sowdenii, Exocarpus aphylla, Pimelia micro-
cephala, Eremophila glabra, Lyciuim australe, Heterodendron oleifolium, Kochia
lobiflora, Bassia obliquicuspis and B. eriacantha, After rains the composite
Minuria leptophylla abounds. On the soils at the lighter end of the range with
A, vesicarium and K. pyramidata are A, ancura, A, Burkittii (pin bush or
Burkitt’s wattle), L. australe, K. planifolia, K, sedifolia, K. Georgei, Casuarina
lepidophloia (rarely), Rhagedia sp. (probably R. spinescens ), Enchylaena tomen-
tosa, Trichinium obovatum, Atriplex stipitatum, Bassia obliquicuspis and
B. divaricata.

Occasional crabholes given a particular facies by the grass Eragrostis setifolia
(never fail) occur in the watercourses, In small hollows in the 4. Sowd enti—
M, platycarpuon country, where water relationships are better through inward
drainage, groves of A. aneura (mulga) occur. Other species frequently occurring
in watercourses like Trichiniuin obovatum are associated. Lyciunt australe (Aus-
tralian hoxthorn) is often abundant where water relationships are likewise
improved.

(b) Vegetation of the stony hills.

The stony hills are remnants of the old tab!eland and the associated vegeta-
tion varics considerably depending on the degree to which weathering has pro-
ceeded. Where the old tableland horizon survives, or is only slightly reduced,
shrub steppe, with crabholes and shelf (c.f., Type 1) usually occurs on it, The
slopes, however, are usually wooded with mulga (4. aneura) and black oak
(C, lepidophloia).

The hills in South Lambing Paddock, where more or less flat-topped, have
definite crabhole affinities and Kochia spongiocarpa, Atriplex vesicarium and
Pachycornia sp., commonly associated with crabhole and shelf, are prominent. But
for the most part these hills have proceeded beyond this stage of weathering, and,
as might be expected, the vegetation is variable and no doubt influenced by depth
of soil and underlying rock. Acacia ancura, and usually where the soil is deeper
A, Sowdenii, are fairly common. Also occurring frequently are Acacia Burkittti,
Casuarina lepidophloia, Fusanus spicatus, Dodonaea lobulata, Lremophila
alternifolia, E. Latrobei, E. glabra, E, serrulata, Cassia Sturtii, Atriplex vesi-

carium, Kochia sedifolia, K. brevifolia, K. triptera var. pentaptera, K. triptera var.
(allied to var. pentaptera®)), Enchylaena tomentosa, Sida intricata, S. petrophila,
Rhagodia Gaudichaudiana, Scacvola sp. (probably S. spinescens), Trichinium
obovatuin, Zygophyllum Billardieri, and the grasses Paspalidium gracile and
Stipa sp. Less frequent are Eremophila longifolia, Portulaca oleracea, Rhagodia
parabolica, Rhagodia sp., Tribulus sp., Solanum ellipticum and several species of
Bassia.

Along and in creeks like Pine Creek and the Station Creek occasional gums,
Eucalyptus intertexta, and native pine, Callitris glauca, grow. Acacia aneura,
A. Burkittii and the grass Andropogon exaltatus (scent grass) are common.
Adjacent to the creeks on stratified alluvium (Soil Type 7) are associated
A. aneura, Dodonaea attenuata, Heterodendron oleifolium, Eremophila Duttonit,
Kochia pyramidata, Atriplex vesicarium and Aristida arenaria, Usually present
to some extent also are Kochia planifolia, K. tomentosa var. appressa, K, Georget,
Rhagodia sp., Eremophila glabra, Templetonia egena, Pittosporum phillvreoides,
Bassia decurrens and B, paradoxa.

(7) Pwric succession.

Much of Yudnapinna has been burnt by bushfires and some observations o1
succession in the A, Sowdenti—M. platycarpum association have been made. The
fire kills most of the trees and the associated plants. Most of the species seem
to regenerate readily although the time involved is doubtlessly dependant on
seasonal conditions. Some of the shrubs like the Cassias (especially C. eremophila
var. pluiypoda) are, however, relatively quick-growing compared to the young

“M., platycarpum, A. Sowdenii and A, ancura and may temporarily give a distinct
facies to the community. This stage has been reached in the Bowen Hill area,
Yudnapinna (lighter phase, Type 5), which until recently had not been stocked
since the fire of 1922. Regeneration of Atripler vesicarium and Kochia sedifolia
and other bluebushes and saltbushes in the community is rather slower because,
owing to the nature of the fruits, most of the seeds are probably destroyed in the
fire, which assists regeneration of the Acacias, etc.. by cracking the seed coat.

Further regeneration from the Cassia eremophila var. platypoda (wattle-
bush) stage would no doubt be a gradual increase in the abundance of the salt~
bushes and bluebushes, the Cassias will become mature scraggly shrubs and very
slowly the young myalls and young Myoporums will mature until the association
once more takes on its old physiognomy. Most of the mulga (A. eneura) will
probably be destroyed by rabbits. Much observation has been made of the damage
done to mulga and other young shrubs and trees through rabbits barking them.
It would appear that mulga is more liable to barking than myal!l and probably
sandalwood, too. In any case, it is very slow growing and cannot recover from
this setback as readily as do most other species. Future regeneration in the Bowen
{lil area will depend on the future stocking policy. There is no foundation for
the statement that “where wattlebush grows nothing else will.” Numerous cases
can be pointed out where, beneath thick mature societies of C. eremophila var.
platypoda, is good dense saltbush, bluebush, etc. The truth is that during the early
stages of the pyric succession when the Cassias are lower, dense and spreading,
and other species are just beginning to re-establish themselves, or as in the case of
myall, much slower-growing and inconspicuous, the C. ercmophila var, platypoda,
C. phyllodinea and C. Sturtii gives the community a characteristic facies

(pl. iii, fig. 11).

@) The genus Kochia is in rather a chaotic state, and present keys do not satisfac-
torily differentiate between what in the field are obviously different varieties or even

different species.

Tue RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN Sor, TYPE AND 'VEGETATION

‘he Yudnapinna area, of more than 1,200 square miles, is a complex one.
The principal soil types of the area have been described and vegetation
associated with them discussed. The edaphic control of the distribution of asso-
ciations and formations is evident. Modified soils are associated with moditica-
tions in floristic composition. The floristics are as complete as time and the season
permit them to be, and suffer mostly in the annuals and ephemerals, but these, even
in watercourses, do. not grow in the profusion apparent in the North-East of the
State. This is probably due to lower soil fertility and initially to geology. In the
north-east the rocks are principally Proterozoic and crystalline Archean of the
Willyama Series. In the north-west they are the sedimentary sandstones, shales,
grits, etc., of the Ordovician.

Soil Type 2 and the shelf soils of Type 1 are in this area the driest, and most
saline habitats for plants. The lighter soils of Types 5, 6 and 8 represent a moister
environment. The sandy surface in the lighter types acts as an absorbing medium
and further restricts soil evaporation. Many plants of the myall scrub or the
mulga sandrise grow on the heavier soils of the watercourses where water relation-
ships are compensating. From a study of the species distribution of the area it is
seen that A. anewra (mulga), A. Burkittii (Burkitt’s wattle), Kochia pyramidata,
Templetonia egena, Lycium australe (Australian boxthorn), Bassia paradoxa,
Trichinium obovatum, and to a less extent A, Sowdenii (myall), Heterodendron
oleifolium and others, are capable of growing on a wide range of soil types provid-
ing water relationships are suitable. They occur not only on light soils of Types 5
and 6, but on the heavier watercourses (see pl. ii, fig. 7). Thickets of mulga in
lower-lying areas, which receive additional water, are common in the A. Sowdenii
—M. platycarpumt association.

Other plants like Sida virgata, although frequent on the sandrises, are more
exacting in their edaphic environmental limits and do not oceur on the heavier
soils of the watercourses. Kochia aphylla, on the other hand, is found in the
watercourses but never on the lighter soils of Type 5, Gand 8. Some plants, like
Kochia sedifolia and K. excavate, occur in soils which vary greatly in texture and
profile, but which are all characterised by much lime,

DEGENERATION, EROSION AND ERODIBILITY

The area surveyed (North Lambing, South lambing, etc.) has all been used
for grazing, but over any area the rates of stocking vary considerably. Intensity
of grazing is governed primarily by the disposition of the watering places, about
which large numbers of sheep are concentrated, especially in the warmer summer
months. Practically all serious degeneration and erosion in this area is about past
and present watering centres—e.g,, erosion about Lawrence’s Dam, Ryan’s Well,
Pine Well, etc., witnesses severe overgrazing in the past.

The effect of overgrazing is firstly a degeneration, and finally the disappear-
ance of the more palatable species. In myall-sandalwood-bluebush country con-
tinuous overgrazing Icads to the disappearance of Kochia sedifolia altogether, its
place being taken (unless degeneration is far too rapid) by the valueless
K. pyramidata (black or green bluebush). The latter species is now becoming
important over large portions of the north-west and north-east. It was always
present to some extent in watercourses and probably sparingly in the A. Sowdenit
—M. platycarpum association, but it was unable to compete satisfactorily with the
K. sedifolia here and was always subordinate, In the absence of competition
resulting from overstocking and selective grazing, the species has spread consider-
ably and is now frequently dominant. K. pyramidata is slowly becoming more
widespread at the expense of more palatable species. If degeneration is too rapid
for black bluebush to replace the K. sedifolia the low, shrubs disappear altogether
and there is a great increase in Bassia obliquicuspis and B, paradoxa, Providing

the associated shrubs (Cassia spp., Heterodendron, etc.) and trees are not
removed, degeneration and erosion may not progress: much further than this.

In the A. vesicarium—kK. planifolia steppe (Type 2) degeneration follows a
somewhat different course. Overgrazing leads firstly to a disappearance of
A, vesicarium (selective grazing) with an increase in the Bassias (especially
B. divaricata and B. decurrens). Further heavy grazing gradually lowers and
finally kills the K. planifolia with a further increase in the Bassias (Bindyis) and
the appearance of the annual Airiplex spongiosum (pop saltbush). If this country
is to be saved degeneration must not go any further. Continued heavy stocking,
results in partial or complete destruction of the Bindyis, mechanical disturbance of
the soil surface and the gradual breaking down of the dead shrub remains. Wind
erosion begins, and the surface soil, becoming unstable, is ready for potential water
erosion. The wind erosion and water erosion, although working hand in hand,
are, ofice started, almost independent of each other. From this stage onward
water is the most serious eroding agent. It rapidly removes the A horizon, is
somewhat retarded again by the weakly cemented grey-brown layer above the clay,
but, breaking through this, has no difficulty in eroding the B horizon. Erosion
of the B horizon apparently proceeds at quite a rapid rate. In places towards the
north of Lawrence’s Flat there is as much as 12 inches silt (A,) accumulation,
which has washed from the vicinity of Lawrence’s Dam, where water erosion has
proceeded well down into the B, horizon, This type is particularly liable to water
erosion because it occurs on a gently sloping plain over which much water from
the creeks off the stony hills floods out.“

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Particular thanks are due to Miss H. M. Douglas of the Agronomy Depart-
ment, Waite Institute, for assistance in,collection and identification of botanical
specimens. Numerous discussions with Mr. K. Woodroffe were also helpful.
Mr. J. K. Taylor, Senior Soil Surveyor, Division of Soils, Council for Scientific
and Industrial Research, assisted with the sampling and made many further
valuable suggestions. The Manager of Yudnapinna Station (Mr. D. R. Douglas)
willingly offered every facility.

REFERENCES
(1) Best, R. J. 1929 J. Agric, Sei, 19, 5-35
(2) Davinson, J. 1936 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 66, 88
(3) Howcurin, W. 1929 The Geology of South Australia
(4) HHuspve, G. D., and Crocker, R. L. 1940 Coun. Sci. Ind. Res, (Aust.),
Bull. 137
(5) Murray, B. J. 1931 Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 55, 91
(6) Prescorr, J. A., and Piper, C. S. 1928 Coun. Sci. Ind, Res. (Aust.),
Pamphlet No. 8
(7) Smoru, R. 1940 Jour. Aust. Ins. Agr. Sc., 6, No, 4
(8) Taytor, J. K., and Hooper, P. Dy CS.LR. (Aust.), Bull. 118
(9) Woop, J.G. 1937 The Vegetation ‘of South Australia

@) An effort was made in the first instance to map the extent of the erosion, and to
estimate it in a broad quantitative way, after the methods employed by the Soil Conserva-
tion Service in U.S.A. and set out under their printed “Procedure for making Soil Con-
servation Surveys.’ The method was found impracticable at Yudnapinna and, in the
author’s opinion, would be found so in most types of country, The variation in depths
of horizons in any natural soil type is so great that it is impossible to estimate with any
accuracy and consistency the percentage ioss of A horizon, even though there are only
three major divisions; less than 25%, 25-75%, jland over 75%. Furthermore, assessing
erosion in such detail only applies at the actual time the specific area is surveyed. By the
time the survey is completed and the maps published the position might be very different.
This was so to some extent at Yudnapinna following a modest rain in September, 1939.

Tasre III ANALYTICAL DA
\

Soil Type bee an la Shelf
Locality .... e wn South Lambing Paddock
Soil No. .... av ae 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405 6406
Depth (inches) ... bebo 0-1 1-5 5-12 12-20 20-31 31-40
Coarse Sand an shes 34:8 18-6 23-1 17-1 17-6 17°3
Fine Sand Li fe 48-4 16-5 25-4 21-8 21-0 20-3
Silt 6°7 2-6 4-0 6-1 6:0 6:2
Clay Ma . _ 8:6 §2-8 39°53 45°8 43-1 40-9
L. on Acid Treat, sige 0-8 3-0 3:7 3-4 8-2 9-4
Moisture as re 1-0 7°6 6:3 8°3 7°9 7-9
L. on Ignition .... _ | 1°7 5-4 4-7 4:7 5°6 5°6
Tot. Sol. Salts .... ee 0-143 1:44 1°32 1-74 2-34 2:26 |
Chlorides (Cl)... am | 0-057 0-687 0-618 0-840 0-717 0-637
Nitrogen fe ee 0-039 0-067 0-045 = —_ _
P20s alls ; wr 0-027 0-040 0-034 0-041 — —
Reaction (pH) . ’ we 8-02 7-7 8:4 8-4 8-2 8-2
Soil Type .... a as rr: Watercourse 4b
Locality... Ae a6 Xe North Lambing Paddock
Soil No. ... te oe _ 6421 6422 6423 6424 6425
Depth lirichest. _ ay wi i 0-5 5-12 12-27 27-52 52-59
Coarse Sand es | 45-6 41-6 36-5 31-2 39-4
Fine Sand : 20-1 19-5 19-4 17-1 20-5
Silt 7 9-2 4-8 5°3 2-9
Clay = se eee } 23-1 24-5 30-0 27-8 28-0
L. on Acid Trent, mA st | 1-4 3-1 5-3 16:8 7°3 i
Moisture me ef sath 2:5 3-4 4-0 4-1 3°4 |
L. on Ignition .... =a aa 3-2 4-0 4-9 9-8 4:8
Tot. Sol. Salts .... soit tt 3 0-025 0-04 0-04 0-05 0-08
Chlorides (Cl) <2 oh, — — 0-004
Nitrogen sities a fl 0-037 0-030 = 0-025 4 ms
P.Os 8 Lf te ee i 0-037 0-033 0-032 _ =
Reaction (pH) i 8-9 9-0 9-0 9-5 9-8
Soil Type _.... ae Bs. Type Sa
Locality Nt. ais: bes North Lambing Paddock
Soil No. ‘al an ae 6438 6439 6440 6441 6442 6443 6444
Depth (inches) in wi 0-2 2-7 7-11 11-18 18-23 23-36 36-60
Coarse Sand L chla ETs 44-4 50-7 45-1 43-1 39-7 30-3 25-8
Fine Sand... bas sanz 34°8 27-9 28-3 27°2 24-0 19-0 21-8 |
Silt se e. at 5+1 4-1 3:5 2-9 2:6 3-0 3:8
Clay... ae The 12-7 12-5 14-5 16:3 18-1 19-4 25-5
L. on Acid Treat. eds ik 1:4 3+1 7°2 8-9 14-9 26-9 22-3
Moisture ewe 1-8 2-0 2-3 2-6 2-6 2:7 4-3
L. on Ignition 2-4 3-0 4-6 5-9 8+] 13-4 10-4
Tot. Sol. Salts se See 0-05 0-03 0-03 0-03 0-04 0-17 1-3 |
Chlorides (Cl) A Pe —_— 0-036 0-156
Nitrogen Ge co i 0-049 Q-031 @-026 — = — ass
P205_ .... _ ims 0-029 0-024 0-029 0-025 — jaish 25
Reaction, (@H) 9-2 9-2 91 9-1 9-4 9-9 8-4

‘ Sort Types At YUDNAPINNA

1b Crabhole Type 2
South Lambing Paddock South Lambing Paddock
6407 6408 6409 6410 6411 6413 6414 6415 6417 6418 6419 6420
Q-4 4-13 13-23 23-34 34-40 0-2 2-4 4-5 7-13 13-19 19-42 42-66
16°6 21-0 25-9 18-9 12-2 54-4 52-6 550 23-8 22-5 25°5 31-4
23°8 21°9 22-6 20-2 17-1 27-2 31-9 27-7 13:3 14-9 15-3 16-6
7°5 4-9 4-2 4-9 5-4 5-3 6-0 7°8 4-8 5:9 6-1 4-5
42-5 42-4 39+7 42-9 36:1 10°9 8+3 8-7 51-3 44-7 35:7 33-2
2-4 3-7 3+8 7°6 18-6 0-9 0-8 0-7 2-0 5-3 11-0 11-2
6:2 6-4 5:8 7°4 8-8 1-2 1-0 1-0 7:0 7°5 7-0 5°7
6°0 4-9 4°6 5-1 7°75 2:2 17 1:5 5-0 6-1 7°8 71
0-055 0-060 0°066 = 1-02 1:50 0-035 0-019 0-019 0-172 0-671 1-08 1-42
= — 0-004 «0-023 0-126 0-066 0-302 0-486 0-483
0-115 0-044 0-032 — — 0-048 0:022 0-017 0-044 — _— =
0-072 0-053 0-048 —_— _— 0-030 0-024 0-023 0-044 0-057 — —
8°5 8-8 9-2 8-1 8-4 8-5 8-8 8-7 8-9 8-9 8-8 8-4
Watercourse 4a Type 5
North Lambing Paddock North Lambing Paddock
6426 6427 6428 6430 6431 6432 6433 6434 6435 6436
0-2 2-4 4-19 36-64 H 0-4 4-12 12-17 17-44 44-72 72-84
54-4 50-7 31-2 33°8 53°5 46-2 42-5 37-6 41-2 26°7
198 18-9 15-5 17-0 | 26-1 28°5 27-3 22-6 25+4 22-4
671 7°8 4-0 3-4 4-7 3-4 3-8 3-0 2-3 4-0
15-8 20+1 40-3 31-7 | 13-1 13-4 17-9 17-2 18-5 31-5
1-0 0-9 1°6 11-3 1-5 6-4 8-1 19-4 11-1 9-4
1-9 2-4 5+6 4-4 1-7 2-0 2-6 2:8 2-8 6:4
266 2-6 4-1 7°3 2:3 4-3 5:3 9-7 6:2 3-1
0-02 0-02 0-02 0-07 0-03 0-07 0:28 0-56 0-48 1-43
ast it a 0-004 | — 0-012 0-114 0-230 0-173 0-198
0-039 0-029 0-032 — | 0-026 0-028 0-021 ys rer anh,
0-037 0-036 0-044 — | 0-027 0-027 0-026 a — Sse
8-4 8-3 8-7 9-6 | 9-0 9°5 9-1 8-8 8-9 7:9
Type 6 Type 8 Type 5 (light phase)
Horse Paddock Yarraby Paddock West Strawbridge
6445 6446 6447 6448 6649 6650 6651 |, 6652 6653 6654
0-4 4-15 15~28 28-40 0-6 6-36 36-66 0-7 7-21 21-25
48-9 42-9 | 50-6 46-0 41-2
See 29°8 24-1 See 33°2 34:9 35-0
19 1-7 3°8 3-9 &-3
distribution 18-4 27+2 distribution 11-2 13+1 7°9
0-5 2:0 0°6 0-7 5°4
curves 2:5 3-9 curves 1+3 1-9 4°5
2-0 2-9 1:7 1-8 455
0-02 0-01 0-02 0-07 0-00 0-00 0-03 — 0-05 0-38
a — Lee — _ — = = _ 0-125
0-020 0-013 = — 0-016 a pat 0-021 0-010 =
0-030 0-022 — — 0-016 0-01 - 0-027 0-023 0-025
8-8 8-7 8-9 9-6 74 8-9 9-2 8-7 9-6 9-4

EXPLANATION OF PLATES I-Iil

PLaTE I

Fig. 1 Atriplex vesicarium—Bassia spp. association on crabhole gibber shelf (Soil
Type 1). Note the almost complete absence of vegetation from the gibber shelf owing to high
salinity and edaphic aridity.

Fig. 2 K. pyramidata (black bluebush) on disturbed earth of a rabbit warren in the crab-
hole shelf area (Type 1), South Lambing Paddock. Acacia anewra along small creek in
background.

Fig. 3 Atriplex vesicarium—Kochia planifolia association (Soil Type 2). Bassia
lanicuspis and B. eriacantha are also fairly abundant in the ground flora.

Fig. 4 Acacia Sowdenii—Myoporum platycarpum association (Soil Type 5). The chief
undershrub is Kochia sedifolia, but K. pyrasmidata is also present. Heterodendron oleifoluum
(bullock bush) in left foreground. Bassia obliquicuspis is very prominent in the ground flora.

Puate IT
Fig. 5 Acacia Sowdenti—M. platycarpum association. K. sedifolia very prominent in
steppe stratum: Bookaloo Paddock.
Fig. 6 Acacia Sowdenii—M. platycarpum association, light phase Soil Type 5, with
Atriplex vesicarium dominant in the shrub stratum, West Strawbridge Paddock.
Fig. 7 Mulga in watercourse, North Lambing Paddock. Kochia pyramidata—K. aphylla
(cotton bush) are the prominent shrubs.

Fig. 8 Acacia aneura association on a low sandy rise (Soil Type 6); K. pyramidata
abundant. Other plants prominent are Sida virgata and Aristida arenaria.

Piate III

Fig. 9 Acacia linophylla—Casuarina lepidophloia association on the crest of a sand-
ridge, Yarraty Paddock. Soil Type 8.

Fig. 10 Acacia linophylla scrub. Roary’s Paddock.

Fig. 11 Cassia society at an early stage in the pyric succession, S.E. Bowen Hill Pad-
dock. Note the young Myoporum platycarpum centre right.

Fig. 12 Severe degeneration and erosion of the Atriplex vesicarium—K. planifola
shrub steppe, Soil Type 2, near Lawrence’s Dam. Eragrostis Dielsit and Salsole Kali main-
tain a precarious existence on the small accumulation of sand (Ao).

Trans. Ray, Sov, S. Aust, 1041 Vol. 65

Plate |

Vol. 65, Plate II

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1941

Plate

Vol.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1941

Trans.

OL Sty

IT “Sty

cae

eee
a

NOTES ON THE SMARIDIDAE (ACARINA) OF AUSTRALIA
AND NEW ZEALAND

By H. WOMERSLEY (Entomologist, South Australian Museum)
and R. V. SOUTHCOTT

Summary

In this family Vitzthum (Kukenthal's Handbuch der Zoologie, 1931, 3, (2), 148) includes only the
two genera Smaris Latreille 1796 (= Smaridia Latreille 1817 = Fessonia von Heyden 1826 =
Phanolophus André 1927) and Microsmaris Hirst 1926, both of which have been recorded from
Australia. From the allied Erythraeidae he separates the family (Tierwelt Mitteleuropas, 1929, 3, (7)
, 67) as follows :

NOTES ON THE SMARIDIDAE (ACARINA) OF AUSTRALIA
AND NEW ZEALAND

By H. Womerstey (Entomologist, South Australian Museum)
and R. V. SourHcort

[Read 8 May 1941]

In this family Vitzthum (Iukenthal’s Handbuch der Zoologie, 1931, 3, (2),
148) includes only the two genera Smaris Latreille 1796 (= Smaridia Latreille
1817 = Fessonia von Heyden 1826 = Phanolophus André 1927) and Microsmaris
Hirst 1926, both of which have been recorded from Australia. From the allied
Erythraeidae he separates the family (Tierwelt Mitteleuropas, 1929, 3, (7), 67)
as follows:

“Mouth-parts not extrusile. Mandibles stylet-like. One or twa sessile eyes. With crista

metopica; two sensillary areas, on anterior and posterior ends of crista.
Erythraeidae Oudemans 1902

“Mouth-parts including palpi far extrusile. Mandibles stylet-like. One or two sessile eyes
on each side. With or without crista metopica; one sensillary area on posterior end of crista
or a corresponding position. Smerididae Kramer 1878”

It is not clear why Vitzthum placed Microsmaris in the Smarididae, unless it
was on the absence of a crista. The mouth-parts, however, are not extrusile in
this genus, and it cannot therefore be placed in this family, Probably he had not
secn any specimens and was misled by the name.

In Europe there are apparently only three species recognised with certainty,
placed hitherto in the genus Smaris Latreille 1796.

Vitzthum (loc. cit., 1929) separates these species thus:
“1 Without crista metopica. Anterior end of dorsum produced in a long extended
process, Two eyes on each side. S. squamata (Hermann 1804)
“With crista metapica. Anterior end of dorsum without extended process. 2
“2 Body hairs in form of short leaves with serrated edge. Two eyes on cach side.
S. papillosa (Hermann 1804)
“Body hairs angular, the edges with wart-like serrations, Allegedly with only 1 eye
on each side. S. anpulligera (Berlese 1887)”

Before considering the Australian species it will be necessary to evaluate
taxonomically the characters used in the above key. At first glance, in this family
as well as in the Erythraeidae, the presence or absence of crista, and possibly also
of a nasus, may appear to be of generic value. But are there other characters to
support this?

If we look at the figures of S. squamata given by Berlese (A.M.S. ital. Repta.,
fasc. v, No. 4), and again (ibid., fasc. Ixxi, No. 4) we observe two distinct dorsal
shields, anterior and posterior, a large ventral shield embracing the anterior two
pairs of coxae, a pair of lateral ventral shields embracing coxae IIT and IV, as
well as a large quadrangular genital shield. On the posterior margin of the
anterior dorsal shield, and well behind the paired eyes, is a single pair of sensory
setae. In Berlese’s figures, however, of ampulligera (ibid., fase. xxxix, No. 10;
Ixxi, No. 4) and papillosa (ibid., fase. xvi, No. 3; Ixxi, No. 4) there is no sugges-
tion of dorsal or ventral shields and no nasus; but there is a distinct linear crista
with anterior and posterior sensillary areas, and in papillosa an additional sen-
sillary area in the middle. The separation of squamata from the other two species
on the absence of a crista and the presence of a nasus is supported by the presence
of dorsal and ventral shields.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (1), 25 July 1941

In 1916 Banks (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 40, 225, pl, xxiii, fig. 5), described
Fessonia prominens trom ants’ nests in Victoria, In 1934 (Rec. S. Aust, Mus., 5,
(2), 225) the senior author recorded the same species from various localities in
other States and suggested that it was not necessarily a myrmecophilous species.
Unfortunately, in that paper, the species was erroneously placed in Calyptostoma
(Calyptostomidac), a genus and family to which it has no relation, It is re-
described and refgured as Smaris prominens in this paper.

Although overlooked by Banks, the dorsal and ventral shields found in
squamala are present in prominens, They were apparently missed as the
specimens were mounted in balsam; but remounting of his co-type, in the South
Australian Museum collection, in gum-chloral, renders them visible. Banks,
however, does refer to several dorsal patches free of hairs, and these correspond
to the smaller muscular plates described later. His figure shows only a single
sensillary area with paired setae placed posterior to, but close to the eyes, It is
obvious, however, that these do not correspond in position to those shown by
Berlese for squamata, Banks also shows a distinct nasus but no crista,

Re-examination of the Australian S, prominens shows that there are actually
two pairs of sensory setae, an anterior pair as figured by Banks, atid a posterior
pair (as shown by Berlese for squamata) on the posterior margin of the anterior
shield, It appears, then, that whereas Banks overlooked the posterior pair of
sensillae in prominens, an anterior pait, missed by Berlese, probably occurs in the
European squamata.

Berlese (Bull. Soc. ent. Ital., 1888-90) records Smearidia ampulligera var.
longipes and S, depilata ‘n. sp. from South America, In the latter species he
describes and figures a large diamond-shaped anterior dorsal shield and seven
smaller posterior plates, one in the midline, the others more lateral; that in the
midline probably corresponds to the posterior shield in squamata, but the others
are probably muscular plates. On the anterior dorsal shield he shows two pairs
of sensillae as in prominens and both posterior to the single eyes. The species is
obviously closely related to prominens and squamata,

With regard to the eyes, Berlese (A.M.S., 1883, fasc. v, No. 4) clearly figures
S. squamata (Rhyncholophus squamatus) as having only one cye on each side.
In 1887 (loc. cit., fasc. xxxix, No, 10) he stated that whereas previously (loc. cit,
1884, fasc, xvi, No. 3) he figured papillosa with only one eye on each side, there
was a smaller additional eye present on each side, which he had not ‘been able to
see in squamata and ampulligera, Later (loc. cit., 1894, Ixxi, No. 4) he describes
and figures 2 + 2 eyes in squamata, Accordingly it appears reasonable to suppose
that he missed the 2 + 2 eyes in the South American depilata.

It is evident, then, that squwamata, prominens and depilata are closely related
in the absence of a crista, the posterior position of both pairs of sensillae with
regard to the eyes, and the presence of dorsal shields; but are yet generically
distinct from ampulligera and papillosa, hitherto placed under Smaris (s.l.).

As squamata Hermann is the type of Smarts it is proposed to restrict this
generic name to the above three species. Of the other two species, papillosa
Hermann is, according to Oudemans (Krit. Overz d. Ac., HIC, 954), the type
of Fessonia yon Heyden 1826. It differs from ampulligera in having a third and
middle sensillary area to the crista and two eyes on each side,

It remains for European workers to re-investigate the presence or otherwise
of the anterior pair of sensillae in sguamata and whether depilata has 2 +- 2 or
1 + 1 eyes.

Recently (Psyche, 45, (2-3), 1938, 123) Jacot has rediscovered and re-
described Say’s American species Trombidium sericeum, and shown that it should
be placed in Smaris (s.1.). It has both a linear crista and a short nasus but there
is no suggestion of dorsal or ventral shields. In addition, Jacot also briefly
describes but does not name a second very similar species of Smaris from North
America. Both these species are obviously closely related to ampulligera.

A re-examination of the Australian Hirsttosoma scalaris Womersley, and of
the New Zealand H, novae-hollandiae Womersley shows that both have extrusile
mouth-parts and are closely related to ampulligera and to Jacot’s two species.
All these are generically distinct from papillosa (Fessonia) and squamata
(Simaris) and accordingly require a new generic name for which Hirstiosoma
Womersley is available, with scalaris Womersley as the type. In addition to the
genotype it will include H, sericea (Say, Jacot) H. sp. Jacot, from North
America, . novac-hollandiae, New Zealand, and H. tasmaniensis n. sp., Tasmania.

Another genus which must be included in the Smarididae, as understood here,
is Sphoerotarsus (genotype S. allmani Womersley 1936) from Australia. It is
closely related to Hurstiosoma even in the general form of the dorsal setae, differ-
ing in having the posterior sensillary setae clavate and the é hind tarsus enlarged.
The genus includes S. ripicolus (Womersley 1934), S. allmani Wom. 1936,
8S. leptopilus n. sp., and 8. claviger n. sp., all four being from Australia,

The four genera included in the family can be keyed as follows:

1 Crista absent, two sensillary areas with paired sensory setac, both placed posterior to
the paired eyes. Dorsal and ventral shields present, anterior dorsal plate produced
tc a nasus. Smaris Latreille 1796,
type S. squamata (Hermann 1804)
Crista present, linear, with 2 or 3 sensillary areas, each with paired sensillae. Dorsal
plates or shields absent. Eyes 2 + 2 or 1 + 1 about level with middle of crista. 2
2 Crista with 3 sensillary areas. Eyes 2 + 2. Iessonia von Ileyden 1826
type S, pupillosa (Hermann 1804)
Crista with only 2 sensillary areas, anterior and posterior. Eyes, 1 + 1,
3 Posterior sensillary setae tapering with ciliations minute or absent. Hind tarsi in
g normal. Ilirstiosoma Womersley 1934
type H. scalaris Womersley 1934
Posterior sensillary setae clavate, strongly ciliated. Ulind tarsi in ¢ greatly enlarged.
Sphaerotarsus Womersley 1936
type S. allmant Womersley 1936

Genus Smarts Latreille
Précis car. gén. Ins., p. 180, 1796.

SMARIS PROMINENS (Banks 1916) Text fig. 1, A-T; 2, A-I; 3, A-C

Fessonia prominens Banks, Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 1916, 40, 225.
Calyptosioma prominens Womersley, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 1934, 5, (2), 235

Redescription of Adult, fig. 1, A-P—Colour brown to reddish, Oval in out-
line with rather prominent shoulders, With distinct nasal process. Dorsum
rather flat with raised marginal areas giving a sunken central portion which
extends anteriorly on each side to the origin of the nasus. Length to 1-0 mm.,
width to 0-5 mm., greatest anterior to the middle.

Dorsally with two distinct shields; the anterior pear-shaped with the apex
forming the nasus, anteriorly with two sessile eves on cach side on indistinct
ocular plates, behind the eyes in the midline is a pair of sensillae, 43 » long with
their pits 494 apart; on the posterior margin of this shield is a second pair of
sensillac, 47 » long, with their bases 18» apart and the pits conjoined to form a
sensillary area, the distance between anterior and posterior sensillae is 220% and
both pairs are finely ciliated; this anterior shield extends to the middle of the
body length and laterally to half-way between the midline and the lateral body
margins, its length is 450, width 280»; the posterior dorsal shicld is roundish
in the @, 180» long by 140 wide, in the é it is rather straight on the anterior
margin and somewhat larger than inthe ¢, 2504 by 220. In both sexes between
the anterior and posterior shields are two pairs of small subcuticular muscular
plates which are roundish and somewhat angled medially, in the 3 the posterior

Fig. 1
Smaris prominens (Banks 1916)—A—P adult: A, entire dorsal view 9; B,
dorsum 9; C, venter 9; D, anterior sensillae{ E, posterior sensillae; F, palp
dorsal; G, palp ventral; H, post. dorsal plate @; I, tarsus and metatarsus I;
J, tarsus and metatarsus IV; K, L, M, N, different aspects of dorsal setae
(N, transverse section); O, P, leg setae; Q-T, nymph; Q, dorsum; R, venter;
S, T, dorsal setae from above and below.

pair are attached to the anterior angles of the posterior shield, giving it a widened
appearance anteriorly, other smaller muscular plates are as hgured. Ventrally
the anterior coxae are on a Jarge somewhat triangular shield 385 » long and 385 p
wide; the posterior coxae are on triangular lateral shields, 305 » long by 180 p
wide: smaller muscular plates are present as figured. The genital opening ts
externally the same in both sexes, 280 » long by 45 » wide, the lips are furnished
with about 18 simple spine-like setae, and outside these lips the cuticle is raised
as a pair of outer ridges furnished with normal yentral setae; in neither sex are
genital discs present. Legs: I 1,100, long, Il 660,, LI 630 pn, IV 1,020 u
(including coxae); tarsus I elongate, 190» by 40 » high; metatarsus 1 225 p;
all tarsi without scopulae, no difference between metatarsi and tarsi IV of
@ and ¢@. Setae: dorsal short and oval, rather flattened ventrally, broadly
convex dorsally, with longitudinal rows of adnate serrations, 15-204 long;
laterally on anterior end of dorsum are a few similar but longer ones to 45 4;
ventral setae similar to dorsal but mostly shorter 12-144, some 28m; most leg
setae similar to dorsal, 20; various types of sensory setae are also present
on the legs.

Mouth-parts extrusile, palpi with fine indistinctly ciliated setae dorsally,
strongly ciliated ventrally, tarsus of palp shorter than the strongly curved claw
and with one blunt sensory seta, three strong simple setae and four ciliated setae.

Remarks—From the figures of squamata given by Berlese and already
referred to, our Australian species differs in the size and shape of the dorsal and
ventral shields. In sywamata the anterior shield extends much further back and
is square-ended; in prominens it is shorter, more pear-shaped and rounded
posteriorly. The posterior shield is larger and longer in squamata, and there is
a wide quadrangular genital shield not present in prominens.

Description of larvae, fig. 2, A-1—Colour orange. Shape roughly ovoid,
widest anterior to the middle, evenly rounded posteriorly, somewhat tapering
anteriorly, length ranging from 223, to 460 when fully gorged, width 184,
of a specimen 254, long, With a single dorsal shield, as figured, with concave
anterior and convex posterior margin, length 28 », width 45 », depth of anterior
concavity 4; with two pairs of ciliated sensillae placed as shown; anterior 27 p
posterior 44 ~; with two pairs of ordinary fairly stout ciliated setae placed at the
anterior and posterior angles, anterior 45» long, posterior 32. Eyes 2 + 2,
postero-lateral to dorsal shield, anterior ocellus the larger. Dorsum with about
44 brown fairly stout blunt ciliated setae, 24-41» long, arranged 4.4.4,.4(5).
4448(9) 4.2. ;

Venter: each coxa with one ciliated seta, on I 32 long, II 20p, III 26y,
that on III blunt at tip, others pointed. Between coxae I a pair of bushy ciliated
setae, 16m long; a pair of pointed ciliated setae, 20 long, between coxae IIT,
none between coxae II, but in the usual position of such setal bases is a pair of
small rings suggestive of pores rather than the bases of sctac; behind coxae III
are three rows of blunt ciliated setae, 20-24 » long, arranged 4.4.3. Legs stout,
I 285 long, I] 285p, IIL 337 (including coxae); tarsus I 57 y long,
30 2 high. Claws strongly pulvilliform, empodium claw-like slender and curved,
much longer than the claws; tarsi I with setae as figured, metatarsus I 47 » long.

Mouth-parts and palpi as figured; palpal claw trifurcate; femur, genu, tibia
and tarsus with 1, 1, 3, 6 setae respectively.

Remarks—No larvae appear to have previously been referred to the
Smarididae. Within the Erythraeidae the genus Bochartia Oudemans, Zool.
Jahrb., Suppl. 14, pt. i, 1912, p. 126 (type B. kwypert Ouds.) appears to be most
closely related to the larvae of Smaris prominens, They agree in having a dorsal
shield wider than long, furnished with two pairs of ordinary ciliated setae, and
two pairs of sensillary setae, and in having 2 + 2 eyeg and coxae well separated.
S. prominens differs from all Erythraeid larvae in that the two tarsal claws are

identical, strongly pulvilliform with long cilia; the palpal claw is tri- and not
bifurcate as in Bochartia, It also differs from this genus in the scutum being
erescentic or oblong rather than circular, with distinct anterior and posterior lateral
angles.
Description of Pupa, fig. 3, A-C—Colour orange. Shape ovoid with a
flattened ventral surface. Length 455 #, width 295; dorsal surface strongly

Fig. 2
Smaris prominens (Banks 1916)—Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, dorsal scutum:
D, capitulum and right palp, dorsal; E, capitulum and palpi from below; F, tip of
palp; G, leg I, posterior aspect; H, tip of front tarsus and claws; I, dorsal seta.

convex with the anterior end notched, J.aterally the ventral surface is raised,
the lateral areas merging at each end into two pairs of raised bosses in which
the nymphal tarsi develop. The sunken central area is broadly convex. The
dorsum entirely, and the venter peripherally, with long parallel-sided, apically-
pointed setae, with serrations, setae 68-80 » long, a few clongate-lanceolate and
34» long, each seta arising from a definite papilla, In well-developed pupae the
nymphal parts can be secn, the eye spots being visible throughout the whole pupal
stage, At first the eye spots are wide apart as in the larva, then approach gradually
until the nymphal position is assumed. In ecdysis the larval skin splits trans-
versely, one half remaining attached to each end of the pupa. The anterior hall
of the cast skin has the mouth-parts, legs | and Hf and the dorsal scutum; legs [1
separate to some extent from this part. “he posterior halt consists of the
remainder, excepting perhaps the eyes, whose fate has not been ascertained,
Description of freshly emerged Nymph, fig. 1, Q-T—Colour orange, Shape
oval, rather flattened dorsally with raised lateral border as in adult, length 490 p,
width 313 4. Dorsum with only the anterior pear-shaped shield present; this

Fig, 3
Smaris prominens (Banks 1916)—-Pupa: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, setae.

carries 2 + 2 eyes and two pairs of sensillac as in the adult. The anterior sensillae
are 34 » long, their bases 39 » apart, the posterior 57 » and 14 p» respectively ; they
are all fine and shortly ciliated; as in the adult there is no crista and both pairs of
sensillae are posterior to the paired eyes, the distance between the pairs of sensillae
is 129». With four large and a number of smaller muscular plates as in the adult.

Dorsal setae of sinular form, but more elongate than in adult, 18-20 » long,
some laterally near the nasus 40. Ventral setae similar to dorsal, 16-24 » long.
Coxae on ventral shields as in adult. Small ventral muscular plates as figured,
devoid af cuticular striations, No genital organs present. Mouth-parts extrusile,
Palpal claw stout, simple, curved.

Legs slender, I 662m long, IT 303», IIT 4380p, IV 573 (all including
coxae) ; tarsus I 123 long by 45 high, metatarsus [ 135 » long; normal setal
clothing of legs as in adult, various sensillae also present; tarsal claws two, falci-
form, finely ciliated.

Localities—New South Wales: Bathurst, under logs, October 1932, one
specimen (S. L. A.); Menindee, July 1928, three adults (S. H.). Victoria:
Ocean Grove with [ridomyrmex nitidus, date ? (A. M. 1..), (¢ co-type of
Fessonia prommens Bks. in S. Aust. Museum). South Australia: Urrbrae,

under bark, September 1933, one nymph (H. W.); Encounter Bay, with termites,
January 1934, one adult (H. W.) ; Mount Barker, in moss, July 1934, one nymph
(H. W.); Bordertown, December 1934, one adult (R.V. S.) ; Myponga, in moss,
April 1935, one nymph (R. V. S.); Belair, May 1935, one adult (H. W.), January
1940, one adult (J. S. W.), May 1940, two adults (R. V. S.); Sellick’s Beach,
February 1937, one adult (H. M. H. and K. S.); Unley Park, August 1938, two
adults and one nymph, October 1940, one nymph, all under eucalypt bark
(R. V. S.); Torrens Gorge, in burnt stump of Nenthorrhoea, April 1939, one
adult and three nymphs (R. V. S.); Glen Osmond, adults found throughout the
year, 1935-40, particularly from April to June, nymphs from April to October
and particularly April to May; both from soil, vegetable debris and under eucalypt
bark; larvae found in similar habitat either free or attached to the introduced and
cosmopolitan Psocid Liposceles (Troctes) divinatorius (Linn.), March 1935 (one
specimen), April 1939 (8), May 1939 (2), April 1940 (2), (all R. V. S.).

Notes ON THE Bio.ocy or SMARTS PROMINENS (Bks.)

In trying to trace the life-history of this mite attempts to obtain eggs from
adults in captivity have so far been unsuccessful. It has been possible, however,
to rear nymphs from larvae attached to Psocids and these nymphs have been
correlated with the adults on morphological grounds. The details of the four
successful rearings (by the junior author) are given in the following table:

Specimen ACA 324 | ACA 326 ACA 654 ACA 661
Period Periad Period Period
Tate in Days Date in Days Date in Days Date in Days
Mite found Tess THe 9 Apr. 39 — 7 May 39 — 21 Apr. 40 —_ 28 Apr. 40 —
Left host wee owe f12-15 Apr. 39 — 12 May 39 — 24 Apr.40 — -— —
after
Became dormant ... [12-15 Apr. 39 0 13-15 May 39 0 24 Apr. 40 0 29 Apr, 40 0
before
Skin split wee ee [TB-1D Apr. 39 3-7 22 May 39 7-9 28-9 Apr. 40 9 4-5 20 May 40 0-30
after alter
Nymph emerged ... 12 May 39 27-30 5 June 391) 21-24 29 May 40 35 19 June 40 (2) 31-51 -
Nymph still alive . [Killed at once — — 16 Aug. 40 — — _

@) Tube not examined until December 1939, when a dead nymph and cast larval
and pupal skins were found,

®) Pupa put into formalin; the nymph was apparently ready to emerge, showing
strong development as compared with ACA 654.

The mites, together with their hosts, were kept in separate damp tubes
supplied with pieces of bark or paper, When fully gorged the mites left their
hosts and wandered freely about the tube for several days before becoming
dormant. Arfter several more days the skin splits transversely, revealing the pupa.
Three to four weeks later the nymph emerges from a rent towards the posterior
end of the pupa. After each experiment the larval skins were checked to ensure
correct correlation of larva and nymph. Whether a second resting stage and
nymph occurs has not been ascertained, but seems to be unlikely. One of the
reared nymphs (ACA 654) lived in captivity for 80 days without any sign of
further ecdysis and without any increase in body length or distance between the
pairs of sensillae. Larger nymphs than the one described have been taken in the
field, one from Glen Osmond, May 1937 m,easured 770 p long, 460” wide, and
157 » between pairs of sensillae. These dimensions, i.e., body nearly as big as
adult, but with distance between sensillae corresponding to proven first stage
nymphs, indicate that probably there is only one nymph.

Genus Hirsriosoma Womersicy
Ree. S. Aust. Mus., 1934, 5, (2), 242. Type H. scalaris Wom., 1934 (loc cit.).

HirsTiosomaA scALAris Womersley Fig. 4, A-F; 5, A-E
Ree. §. Aust. Mus., 1934, 5, (2), 242.

Redescription of Aduli, fig. 4, A-F; 5, A-C, E—Colour red. Oval in outline
with prominent shoulders and a short nasus. Length 1:0 mm., width 0°65 mm.
Crista linear with two sensillary areas, anterior and posterior each with two
sensillae; anterior sensillae 304 Jong, expanding slightly distally, distal half
with longer outstanding ciliations, proximal half with very minute adpressed
ciliations, posterior sensillae very slender and tapering, 85 », with adpressed
minute ciliations barely visible under high magnification. Distance between
anterior and posterior sensillae 3004, Eyes 1 + 1, level with middle of
crista. Palp as figured. Dorsal setae numerous, brown but not heavily
pigmented, 3-flanged, 16-24» long. Ventral setae posteriorly similar to
dorsal, anterior to genitalia oval with long strong ciliations, 14-16p long.
Legs: I 1,230.4 ‘long, Il 650y, HII 640pn, IV 960 pp (including
coxac), tarsus I 180u by 45 high, metatarsus 240», tarsus IV 8lp by
34 » high, metatarsus [V 228 p long.

Description of Nymph, fig. 5, D-E—Colour red. Shape as in adult. Length
500 », width 295. Crista and ‘sensillary setae as in adult. Anterior sensillae
26 » long, posterior 85», distance between anterior and posterior 188, Eyes
1 + 1 level with middle crista. Dorsal setae similar to adult but more elongate,
18-28» long; ventral setae posteriorly similar to dorsal, more anteriorly elongate-
oval, 14-16 » long, with long strong ciliations, Legs not available.

Localities—South Australia: Victor Ilarbour, by sweeping tea-tree on banks
of Ilindmarsh River, one adult (type), January 1934 (11. W.); Glen Osmond,
in soil at base of eucalypts, January 1938, two adults, February 1939, one adult,
December 1939, one nymph, January 1940 one adult, December 1940, one adult,
January 1941, one adult (R. V. S.); Rocky River, Kangaroo Island, one adult,
under stone, December 1939, (R. V. S.).

Hirstiosoma tasmaniensis n.sp. Fig. 4, G-O; 5, F-J

Description of Adult, fig. 4, G-N; 5, F-H, J—Colour brownish. Oval in
outline with prominent shoulders, length 1-4 mm., width 0°83 mm, Propodosoma
produced into a nasus about 160 long, Crista linear with anterior and posterior
sensillary areas each with paired sensillac, anterior sensillae strong, tapering,
pointed, “50 » long, with minute ciliations, posterior sensillae strong, long, tapering,
pointed, 97 » long, with minute ciliations, distance between anterior and posterior
serisillae 323 p, Eyes 1 + 1, level with middle of crista. Palp as figured, setae
spiniform, with fine ciliations. Dorsal setae numerous, dark brown (heavily
pigmented), 3-flanged, 24-31 » long; ventral setae posteriorly similar to dorsal,
anterior to genitalia oval with long strong ciliations, 14-22. J.egs: I 1,640 p,
JI] 900», IIT 960, IV 1,375 p (including coxae) ; tarsus I 224p long by
75» high; metatarsus I 255 » long; tarsus TV 97 p long hy 68 p high, metatarsus
IV 265 » long.

Description of Nymph, fig. 4, OQ; 5, I—Colour brownish. Shape as in adult,
length 510, width 255. Crista linear, as in adult, anterior sensillae fairly
strong, only slightly tapering, pointed, 384 long, with fine ciliations, posterior
sensillae more slender, tapering, pointed, 87 » long, with minute ciliations, distance
between anterior and posterior sensillae 183». Eyes 1 + 1, level with middle of
crista. Dorsal setae similar to adult but more elongate, 22-34 » long; ventral setae
posteriorly similar to dorsal, more anteriorly a long oval with long strong cilia-
tions, and 14-l16u long. Legs I: 1,020» long, IT 460.4, ITI 465, IV
745 » (including coxae); tarsus 1 150 w long by 54 high, metatarsus I 160 » long,
tarsus TV 60 by 36, mectatarsus TV 195 p» long.

Localities—Tasmania: Mount Wellington, December 1937, one adult and
one nymph; Hobart, in moss, March 1940, five adults (one the type), (J. W. E.).

HIRSTIOSsOMA NOVAE-IHOLLANDIAE Womersley Vig. 4, P-W; 5, H-M
J. Linn Soc., London, (Zool.), 1936, 40, 118

Redescription of Adult, fig. 4, P-U; 3, K-M—Colour brownish. Oval in
outline with prominent shoulders and a short nasus. length 1-5 mm., width
0-95 mm. Crista linear, with anterior and posterior sensillary areas each with
iwo sensillae; anterior sensillae fairly stout, almost parallel-sided, finely ciliated,
26» long; posterior sensillae 45» long, tapering, pomted, ciliations doubtfully
visible at 3.000 diameter, distance between anterior and posterior sensillac 414 p.
Eyes 1 + 1. very slightly behind middle of crista. Palp as figured. Dorsal setae
numerous, brown (heavily pigmented), 3-flanged, dorsal Hange very broad and
frequently with excavations, setae 24-26 uw long; ventral setae posteriorly sinular
to dorsal, anterior to genitalia oval with long strong ciliations, 16-20 jong.
Legs: I 1,620, long, IT 1,030p, I[L 11109. 1V 1420, Cineluding coxae) ;
tarsus | 230 long by 125 » high, metatarsus 1 345» long; tarsus 1V 115 » long
by 62 »% high, metatarstus TV 305 p long,

Description of Nymph, tig. 4, V-W; 5, M—Colour brownish. Shape as in
adult. Length 835 2, width 525». Crista linear with seusillary areas as in adult,
anterior sensillac 18), long, fairly stout, slightly tapering and finely ciliated ;
posterior sensillae as in adult, 40 « long, distance between sensillae 2544. Eyes
1 + 1, behind middle of crista. Dorsal setae similar to adult but more elongate and
less heavily pigmented, 22-28 long ; ventral setae posteriorly similar to dorsal, more
anteriorly similar, but with strong ciliations, 16-22» long. Legs: I 1125p long.
TT 640 p, WI 645 », TV 845 » (including coxae) ; tarsus 1 145 » long by 60» high,
metatarsus I 215 » long; tarsus LV 73 long by 32 high. metatarsus 1V 200 p
long.

Locality—New Zealand: Manurewa, Auckland, May 1934, one adult (type),
(EK. D, P.); August 1934, one ¢ and one nymph (I. D. P.).

GENERAL Remarks on THE Genus fHirsriosoma
The specific differences in this genus, although small, are important. The
principal ones are the dimensions of the metatarsus and tarsus of leg 1, the
characters of the sensillary setae of the crista and the structure of the dorsal setae.

Previously the senior author (J). Linn. Soc., London, (Zool.), 1936, 40, 118)
used the character of the setae arising from papillae at the tip of the tarsi as being
of value in separating scalaris and novae-hollandiac, those of scalaris having
earlier (Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, (2). 242, 1934) been considered as simple.
Actually these setae are ciliated in all species (both adult and nymphal) of the
fanuly of which we have specimens. A key to the three species from Australia,
Tasmania and New Zealand is given but their exact relationship to the other
species cannot be determined from the published data.

Tn A.M.S. ital. Repta., xxxix, No. 10, Berlese shows the anterior sensillae of
ampulligera as relatively short thick and apically poimted with distinct ciliations,
posterior sensillae as long and slender without ciliations. In the same work,
Ixxi. No. 4, for the same species he shows them both as long and slender, without

Fig, 4
Hirstiosoma—A_F, sealaris Wom. 1934, adult: A, crista and eyes: B, anterior
sensillary area; C, post. sensillary area; D, palp; E, tarsus and metatarsus I:
F, tarsus and metatarsus 1V; G-O, tasmaniensis n.s.p: G-—N, adult; G, outline;
H, crista and eyes; I, ant. sensillary area; J. post. sensillary area; K, mouth-
parts from below; L, palp; M, tarstts and metatarsus I; N, tarsus and meta-
tarsus TV; O, tarsus and metatarsus I of nymph. P-W, novac-hollandiae Wom,
1936; P-U, adult: P, crista and eyes; Q, ant. sensillary area; R, post. sensillary
area; 5, palp from above; T, tarsus and metatarsus I; U, tarsus and metatarsus
IV; V—W, nymph: V, dorsum; W, tarsus and metatarsus I. All tarsi and meta-
tarsi are to same magnification,

Fig. 5

ciliations, This suggests that he had more than one species. The figures of the
setae given for ampulligera by Berlese, and for sericea and his second species by
Jacot, do not permit of comparison with the three Australasian species.

1 Tarsus 1 four times as long as high. Anterior sensillae not tapering, expanding
slightly distally and here with long ciliations; posterior sensillae very slender.
H. scalaris Womersley 1934

Tarsus I not more than twice as long as high. Anterior sensillae tapering. 2
2 Tarsus I one and one-half times as long as high. Posterior sensillae fairly thick,
about 100 4 long. Dorsal setae widest about middle, dorsal flange of setae narrower,
without basal excavations. H, tasmaniensis n. sp.
Tarsus I twice as long as high. Posterior sensillae slender, about 50 4. Dorsal setae
widest beyond middle; flange on dorsal surface broader, with basal excavations.
H. novae-hollandiae Womersley 1936

Genus SPHAEROTARSUS Womersley
J. Linn. Soc., London (Zool.), 1936, 40, 269, 119. Type S$. allmani Wom.

SpPHAEROTARSUS RIPICOLUS (Womersley, 1934) Fig. 6, A-H; 7, A-F
Sphaerotarsus ripicolus (Womersley, 1934),
Cacculisoma ripicola Womersley, 1934 (nymph), Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, (2), 239.
Sphaeretarsus allmani Womersley, 1936 (part), J. Linn. Soc (loc. cit.).

Description of Adult, fig, 6, A-D; 7, A-D—Red. Oval, somewhat pointed
anteriorly, and with prominent shoulders. Length about 1-0 mm., width about
0-6 mm. Crista linear with anterior and posterior sensillary areas each witit
two somewhat clavate, finely ciliate sensillae, anterior sensillae 23 » long, posterior
40 »: distance between centres of sensillae 264». Eyes 1 + 1 behind middle of
crista. Palpi very similar to nymph, but with a few more setae, Dorsal setae
numerous, brown, short, ovoid (narrowing slightly distally), 3-flanged, with cross-
bars, and with adnate serrations, 18-24 long (some dorsal setae are un-
pigmented). Ventral setae posteriorly similar to dorsal, anterior to anus oval,
with long strong ciliations, setae 17-22 4 long. Legs: I, (?) », I 8204 long,
Ill 870 », 1V 1,170» (including coxae) ; tarsus I and metatarsus I not available,
tarsus [V (6) oval, 147 long by 94 across, metatarsus TV ( 3!) 230» long.

Redescription of Nymph, fig. 6, E-H; 7, E-F—Red. Shape as in adult. Length
0:875 mm., width 0°56 mm. Crista as in adult, anterior sensillae 22» long,
posterior 432. Distance between centres of sensillae 215», Eyes as in adult.
Palpi as figured. Dorsal setae shortly ovoid or elongate-ovoid, 3-flanged, with
serrations, and with crossbars, 20-32 » long; ventral setae posteriorly similar to
dorsal, anterior to anus elongate-oval, with long strong ciliations, 18-20» long.
Legs: I 805, long, IT 5554, HI 625, IV 780 (including coxae); tarsus I
112 long by 49, across, metatarsus I 161 long, tarsus 1V 63 long by
34 » high, metatarsus 1V 170 » long,

Localities—South Australia: Victor Harbour, by sweeping tea-tree along
Hindmarsh River, January 1934, five nymphs (including type) (H. W.); Glen
Osmond, November 1937, one nymph (R. V. S.). Victoria: Sandy Waterhole,
Glenelg River, January 1941, one adult ¢ (H. W.).

Erratum—Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 1934, p. 239, fig. 184 and 185 should be
transposed.

Fig. 5
Hirstiosoma, dorsal and ventral setae—A-E, scalaris Wom. 1934: <A, dorsal seta
of adult above and below; B, same, end view from above; G, same, transverse
section; D, dorsal scta of nymph from above and below; E, ventral setae, adult
above, nymph below. F-J, tasmaniensis n.sp.: F, dorsal seta of adult. from
above and below; G, santc, end view; H, same, transverse section; I, dorsal seta
of nymph from above and below; J, ventral seta of adult, K~M, novae-hollandiac
Wom. 1936: K, dorsal seta of adult from above, below and end view; L, dorsal
seta of nymph from ahove and below; M, ventral setae, adult above, nymph below.
(All to same magnification.)

Fig. 6
Sphacroiarsus, dorsal and veutral setae—A-—II, S. ripicolus (Wom. 1934), A-D
adult: A, dorsal seta above; B same, below; C, same, end view; D, ventral seta;
E-H, nymph, E, dorsal seta, above; F, same, below; G, II, ventral setae.
I-L, §S. leptopilus n.sp., nymph: I, dorsal seta, above; J, same, below; K, longer
dorsal seta; L, ventral seta. M-—U, S. alimant Wom. 1936, M—Q adult: M, dorsal
seta, above; N, same, below; O, same, end view; P, Q, ventral setae; R-U,
nymph; R, dorsal seta above; S, same, below; T, same, end view; U, ventral
seta. V-Y, S. claviger n.sp., adult: V, dorsal seta, above; W, the same, below;
X, same, end view (from below); Y, ventral seta. (AIl setae to same scale).

Sphaerotarsus leptopilus n.sp. Fig. 6, 1-L; 7, G-M

Description of Nymph—Colour red. Oval in outline, somewhat pointed
anteriorly, and with prominent shoulders. Length 0:91 mm., width 0°67 mm.
Crista linear with anterior and posterior sensillary areas, each with two clavate,

Fig. 7
Sphaerotarsus—A-F, S. ripicolus (Wom. 1934), A-D adult: A, anterior sensillary
area; B, posterior sensillary area; C, tarsus II] and metatarsus II, outline: D,
tarsus IV and metatarsus IV, ( g) outline; E-F, nymph; E, palp from above;
F, palp from below. G-M, S. leptopilus n.sp., nymph: G, outline, entire, ventral:
H, anterior sensillary area; I, posterior sensillary area; J, tarsus I and meta-

tarsus I, outline; K, tarsus IV and metatarsus IV, outline; L, palp, above:
M, palp, below. (A-B; C-D; E, Fk, L, M; H-I; J, K, to same magnification. }

finely ciliate sensillae, anterior sensillae 22 » long, posterior 34 »; distance between
centres of sensillac 163 p. Eyes 1 + 1, behind middle of crista. Palpi as figured.
Dorsal setac numerous, brown, elongate-ovoid, 3-flanged, with serrations, and
small for genus, 14-30 » long, the posterior setae being the longer. Dorsal setae
without the crossbars present in S, ripicolus, Ventral setae posteriorly similar
to dorsal, anterior to anus elongate (fusiform) with long strong ciliations, 14-20 p
long. Legs: I 655» long, II 465 », TIT 5004, TV 585 (including coxae),
tarsus I 95 p long by 52» across, metatarsus I 129 » long, tarsus IV. 56 # long by
24 p high, metatarsus TV 136 » long.

Locality—South Australia—Victor Harbour, by sweeping tea-tree along
Jlindmarsh River, January 1934, one nymph (type) (H. W.).

Remarks—Closest to S. ripicolus, with which it was originally taken, but
differs in the form of the dorsal setae, and in the dimensions of sensillae. The
single nymph was among the syntypes of S. ripicolis.

SPITAEROTARSUS ALLMANI Womersley 1936 Fig. 6, M-U; 8, A-J
—=Sphaerotarsus allmani Wom. 1936, J. Linn. Soc., Lon (Zool.), 40, 269, 119.

Redescription of Adult, fig. 6, M-Q; 8, A-D—Red. Oval, somewhat pointed
anteriorly, and with prominent shoulders. Length 1-1 mm., width 0-7 mm, Crista
linear with anterior and posterior sensillary areas, each with two somewhat
clavate finely ciliate sensillae, anterior sensillae 27 » long, posterior 75 y, distance
between centres of sensillae 290. Eyes 1 + 1, behind middle of crista, Palpi
as in nymph. Dorsal setae numerous, brown, short, 3-flanged, without crossbars,
with serrations, 16-20 » long; ventral setae posteriorly similar to dorsal, anterior
to anus a short oval, 16-19 long, with long ciliations. Legs: I 1,155» long,
Il 705p, III 760p, 1V 1,050,» (including coxae); tarsus 1 154m long by
73» high, metatarsus I 205 » long; tarsus 1V (3) nearly spherical, 148 » long
by 127 » across, metatarsus 1V 209» long. No genital discs.

Description of Nymph, fig. 6, R-U; 8, E-J—Red. Shape as in adult. Length
0-77 mm., width 0-5 mm. Crista as in adult, anterior sensillae 20 » long, posterior
62 p, distance between centres of sensillae 194y.. Eyes as in adult. Palpi as
figured. Dorsal setae similar to adult, but more elongate, 18-30» long, ventral
setae posteriorly similar to dorsal, anterior to anus clongate-oval, with long strong
ciliations, setae 15-20 long. Legs: I 835, long, Il 485 ,, III 5254,
IV 715, (including coxae), tarsus I 109 Jong by 41 across, metatarsus I
167 » long, tarsus 1V 60» long by 26 high, metatarsus IV 167 » Jong.

Locality—New South Wales: Bathurst, under fallen leaves, 31 May 1934,
one adult (type) and two nymphs (S. L. A.).

Sphaerotarsus claviger n.sp, Fig. 6, V-Y¥; 8, M-Q
Description of Adult—Colour red. Oval in outline, somewhat pointed
anteriorly, and with prominent shoulders. Length 1°315 mm., width 0°755 mm.
Crista linear with anterior and posterior sensillary areas, each with two clavate,
finely ciliate sensillae, anterior sensillae 20 » long, posterior 63 », distance between

Fig. 8
Sphaerotarsus—A-J albnani Wom, 1936, A-D adult: A, anterior sensillary area,
B, posterior sensillary area; C, tarsus I and metatarsus I, outline; D, tarsus IV
and metatarsus IV (4), outline; E-J, nymph; E, anterior sensillary area;
F, posterior sensillary area; G, tarsus I and metatarsus I, outline; H, tarsus IV
and metatarsus IV, outline; I, palp above; J, palp, below. K-Q, claviger n. sp.,
adult: K, outline, entire, dorsal; L, anterior sensillary area; M, posterior sen-
sillary area; N, tarsus I and metatarsus I; O, tarsus 1V and metatarsus IV,
(¢ ) outline; P, palp, above; Q, palp, below. (A, B, E, F, L, M; C, D, N, O; G. A;
I, J, P, Q to same magnification.)

centres of sensillae 3524. Eyes 1 + 1, behind middle of erista. Palpi as figured.
Dorsal setae numerous, brown, short, 3-flanged, the dorsal flange being fairly
broad, without crossbars and with serrations, setae 16-21 » Jong. Ventral setae
posteriorly similar to dorsal, anterior to anus oval, with long strong ciliations,
setac 15-22. long. Legs: 11,335 » long, 11 805 », U1 880 p, LV 1,205 p (including
coxae); tarsus | 178% long by 66» across, metatarsus | 242 » long, tarsus LV
(¢) 106 » long by 49 » high, metatarsus IV 247 » long.

Loculity—New South ‘Wales: Bathurst, “under bark,’ 28 June 1932, ¢

REMARKS ON THE GENUS SPAAEROTARSUS

‘The dorsal setac vary somewhat in form and size on different parts, especially
so in the nymph. In the figures given, a typical dorsal seta, from the anterior two-
thirds in each case. is shown. Those of the posterior part of the dorsum are
more elongate than those more anterior.

The specific characters of most value are the structure and dimensions of the
sensillac, and the character of the dorsal setae. The genus is, at present, confined
to Australia.

Key To THE SPECIES OF SPIHAEROTARSUS

1 Posterior sensillary setae 1-5 x as long as auterior, Dorsal setae elongate-oval,
length :breadth = 2-5:1. (Anterior sensillae 22 ,, long, posterior 34 aw.)

S. leptopilus n. sp

Posterior sensillary setae 2-0 x as long as anterior, or more, Z:

2 Posterior sensillary setae 2-0 x as long as anterior, Dorsal setae broadly ovoid,
narrowing slightly distally. (Anterior sensillae 22», posterior 45 y.)

5S. ripicolus (Wom. 1934)

Posterior sensillary setae about 3-0 x as long as anterior. 3

3 Dorsal flange of dorsal seta comparatively narrow, less than one-third breadth of seta,
and with (generally) four longitudinal rows of serrations. On ventral surface of
dorsal seta is a very broad clear central area. Posterior sensillac widest a little away
from their distal end. S. albnani Wom, 1936

Dorsal flange of dorsal seta comparatively broad, more than one-third of breadth of

seta, and with (generally) 6 longitudinal rows of serrations. The central clear areca

on the ventral surface of the dorsal seta is narrower, Posterior sensillae widest right

at their distal end. S. claviger u. sp.

: SUMMARY

In this paper the family Smarididae Kramer 1878 is reviewed and the generic

characters evaluated, The genera Smaris Latreille 1796, Fessonia von Heyden
1826. Hirstiosoma Womersley 1934, and Sphaerotarsus Womersley 1936 are in-
cluded, but Microsmaris Hirst 1926 is excluded (it belonging to the Erythracidae ).
The genus Smaris includes S. squamata (Hermann 1804) from Europe,
S, depilata (Berl. 1888) from South America and 5. prominens (Banks 1916)
from Australia. Sphaerotarsus has four species—S. ripicolus (Womersley 1934),
S. allmani Womersley 1936, S. leptopilus n. sp., S. claviger n.sp., all from Aus-
tralia. Fessonia is at present restricted to F. papillosa (Hermann 1804) from
Europe. Hirstiosoma contains H, scalaris Womersley 1934 and H. tasmaniensis
n.sp. from Australia, H. navae-hollandiae Womersley 1936 from New Zealand ;
HT. ampulligera (Berlese 1887) from Europe and (doubtfully) South America,
H. sericea (Say 1821, Jacot 1938) and indet. sp. (Jacot 1938) from North
America.

The first larval Smaridid, that of S. prominens (Banks), is described. It has
been reared through the resting or pupal stage to the nymph which has heen
correlated morphologically with the adult. The nymphs of the Australasian species
of Llirstiosoma and Sphaerotarsus are described and correlated (on morphology )
with the adults.

GASTROPODA
FROM THE ABATTOIRS BORE, ADELAIDE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA
TOGETHER WITH
A LIST OF SOME MISCELLANEOUS FOSSILS FROM THE BORE

By N.H. LUDBROOK

Summary

The Abattoirs Bore has been an object of interest since its very rich fossiliferous material was
collected in 1919 by the late Sir Joseph Verco and the late Professor Howchin. The present paper
deals with the remaining groups to be considered in completing the list of species from the Bore
represented in the Fate Collection. The writer is entirely dependent upon information given in
conversation with Sir Joseph Verco relating to the manner of collecting and the depths from which
the material was obtained. Notes by Verco, in my possession, are of conchological interest only; as
the fossil species were unfamiliar to him, remarks were made on the outstanding features of shells,
many of which were already described by Tate and other workers on Tertiary fossils from Victoria,
Tasmania and South Australia.

GASTROPODA
FROM THE ABATTOIRS BORE, ADELAIDE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA
TOGETHER WITH
A LIST OF SOME MISCELLANEOUS FOSSILS FROM THE BORE

By N. H, Lupprookx
[Read 8 May 1941]
Priatres TV ann V

INTRODUCTION

The Abattoirs Bore has been an cbject of interest since its very rich
fossiliferous material was collected in 1919 by the late Sir Joseph Verco and the
late Professor Howchin. The present paper deals with the remaining groups to
be considered in completing the list of species from the Bore represented in the
‘Tate Collection. The writer is entirely dependent upon information given in con-
versation with Sir Joseph Verco relating to the manner of collecting and the
depths from which the material was obtained. Notes by Verco, in my possession,
ate of conchological interest only; as the fossil species were unfamiliar to him.
remarks were made on the outstanding features of shells, many of which were
already described by Tate and other workers on Tertiary fossils from Victoria,
Tasmania and South Australia.

The writer has always felt that the information available to her was unsatisfac-
tory from a stratigraphical viewpoint; Verco stated that a dray-load of fossilifer-
ous sand, from depths of 400-500 feet, heaped beside the Bore, had been collected
and the mollusca sorted out by him. A preliminary glance at the numerous species
revealed that some, hitherto considered as restricted to the Barwonian in Victoria,
appeared with a predominantly Pliocene assemblage. It seemed likely that the
boring had penetrated more than one horizon, and an admixture of faunas
resulted from an indiscriminate dumping of the material before it could be
collected by someone interested primarily in stratigraphy. After listing the
Pelecypoda and describing new species (34), the writer deferred work on the
Gastropoda until more reliable data could be used as a basis.

Howchin and Parr (20) have since published details of the Foraminifera
from the Bore, together with the driller’s log, indicating that several horizons had
been penetrated before the boring stopped at 820 fect. This would appear to
support the writer’s earlier conclusion that, as a contribution to stratigraphy, the
mollusca were so confused as to be of relatively little value. More recently.
through the courtesy of the South Australian Mines Department, the writer has
been able to examine material from several other borings near Adelaide, all
collected carefully from various depths. While none of them is as rich in the
number of species as the Abattoirs, sufficient indication has been given that the
Abattoirs Bore mollusea, with a lew possible exceptions, represent a single stage.
It is likely that they came from depths of about 360 feet to 500 feet. the “grey
sand” horizon, and that the yellow underlying Miocene (20) is not represented
in the mollusca. Homogeneity in the state of preservation and colour, however,
is an insufficient and misleading indicator of a single stage, and in the deposits
underlying the Adelaide Plains cannot be considered as such.

AGE OF THE MATERIAT
Difficulty is generally experienced in correlating Tertiary horizons

in Southern Australia. Some workers have found it difficult to agree on the
relative positions of numerous isolated beds. and others have, as the occasion

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (1), 25 July 1941

demanded, changed their opinions as a result of increasing knowledge of the
geographical and stratigraphical range af species; it is partly due to the con-
sideration of some zoological groups to the exclusion of others, particularly with
the foraminifera and moflusca. It should be possible, as Finlay and Marwick
have found in New Zealand (14), to take both the macro- and micro-faunas into
consideration and eliminate apparent inconsistencies.

The ‘grey sand” horizon under consideration here is the “Adelaidean”
(PHocene), appearing in many borings near Adelaide at somewhere uear the
350-foot level, The relative position of these beds has always seemed doubttul,
mainly because only the larger and more common species were identified, At first
elance, a close relationship to the Kalimnan of Eastern Victoria seems obvious.
The writer (21) has expressed the view that both the Kalimnan and Adelaidean
stages are Lower Pliocene in age; Hall and Pritchard (16) and Chapman (1. 4)
have identified the Adelaidean with the Kalimnan, though in a recent note (20)
the latter has stated that its “position in the vertical scale appears to be better
indicated by the comprehensive series of the foraminifera,” and he agrees with
Howchin that the beds are younger than Kalimnan (though not stating, as
Howehin does (18, 19, 20) that they are Upper Pliocene), In an earlier paper
(9) Cotton and the writer followed Howchin and referred Abattoirs Bore species
of Lurritella to the Upper Pliocene; these belong to the Adelaidean stage. Single-
ton classifies the Adelaidean as (?) Middle Pliocene (25).

The evidence of the foraminifera cannot be overlooked, but it is doubtiul
whether, from carly Pliocene upwards, they alone can be conclusive, I tnlay and
Marwick (14) have found that New Zealand Pliocene stages are indicated prin-
cipally by the mollusca, and the same has been the ease hitherto in Australia.
With the Adelaidean stage, to the fauna of which the Abattoirs Bore makes the
largest contribution, useful results are obtainable by considering the foraminitera
and mollusca along parallel lines. Parr (24) has made an interesting analysis
of the Kalimnan and Adelaidean foraminifera, which. from the point of view of
the age of the Adelaidean, could be strengthened by comparison with the micro-
faunas of PHocene localities nearer geographically to the Adelaidean.

From an analysis of the mollusca and the evidence of the foraminifera, the
writer considers the Adelaidean a slightly younger stage than the Kalimnan, To
adjust the Adelaidean, Werrikooian and Kalimnan to the European time-scale
is uot easy; if the Kalimnan is accepted as Lower Pliocene and the Werrikooian
as Upper Pliocene, to place the Adelaidean without qualification in Middle
Pliocene is to convey the impression that the Adelaidean provides a single link
between the Kalimnan and the Werrikooian. This is far from being the case,
many of the Adelaidean mollusca being restricted Kalimnan species and very few
Werrikooian species are found. Since the Adelaidean beds are thicker than those
of the type Kalimnan area, careful investigation of further borings may show
that the Adelaidean represents a longer time range than the Kalimnan and should
be classified as Lower-Middle Phocence.

CONDITIONS OF DEPOSIT

The unusual richness, specifically and numerically, of narrow, highly fossili-
ferous beds of the Adelaidean stage invites comparison with thick shelly deposits
on certain beaches today. Mr. B. C, Cotton states that under South Australian
conditions, shells are deposited at the north-eastern part of a beach, preferably in
a sheltered bay or estuary. The Abattoirs and other richly fossiliferous bores
in the Adelaidean show similar conditions of deposit to those of the Outer
Harbour at the present day. The maximum thickness is about 200 feet, laid down

() Dr. Singleton’s recent publication, “The Tertiary Geology of Australia,” Proc,
Roy. Soc. Vict., 53, (1), (n.s.), 1941, came to hand after the present paper had heen suh-
mitted for publication.

under conditions oi depression contemporaneous with early stages of the step-
faulting from the Mount Lofty Ranges to St. Vineent Guli. ‘The gastropod
gencra represented indicate much warmer climatic conditions than those of the
present day or of the Werrikooian, and many new species exhibit close relation-
ships, both generically and specifically, with Recent shells of tropical Quecusland
to which they are possibly ancestral.

ANALYSIS OF THE GASTROPOD FAUNA

OF the 200 gastropod species, 67 occur in the Kalimnan of Victoria, cither in
the Gippsland Lakes area or at localities accepted as contemporaneous with the
type; 16 are known previously only in the Barwonian; three are restricted to South
Australian Lower Phocene horizons; live are found e'sewhere only among the
“Murray Desert” (33) fossils (possibly exactly contemporaneous with the
Adelaidean) ; 44 are peculiar to the horizon and 22 are identical with or close
to Recent species not occurring in the Kalininan; the rest are of doubtiul iimits
(such as Baryspira pseudaustralis which occurs in the Barwonian, in the * Murray
Desert” fossils and in the Adelaidean}, or are indeterminate specifically. Of the
species in common with the Kalimnan, about 22 appear to be restricted. The
Adclaidean apparently has about 10% more of its gastropod species living ihan
has the Kalimnan. This cannot be taken as a significant percentage in view of the
linnited geographical distribution of some of the species in question and the hikeli-
hood of many of them proving distinct as more material becomes available for
comparison,

MISCELLANEOUS FAUNA

Various oddments collected with the mollusca have been Hsted, though the
bryozoa appear to have been completely overleoked, and no information is avail-
able. Other phyla represented are consistent with species from the Kalimnan.

NOMENCLATURE

It is felt that some explanation 1s needed of obvious inconsistencies in the
use of generic names. This list provides a working basis for comparing the fauna
of the Adelaidean with those of other horizons. As far as is possible, names in
present use have been employed, Cotton (8) being followed tor Recent shells.
Considerable difficulty arises with the fossil species. Australian workers generally
have been conservative and little revision of genera has been done. ‘To alter some
generic names without investigating the group as a whole is undesirable. From
a palaeontological viewpoint. the genus and subgenus method used with the
Turritellidae is the most satisfactory, being intelligible to the geologist and suffi-
ciently accurate for the specialist, and is consistent with modern trends in
systematics (35).

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The writer wishes to express indebtedness to Mr. T. Iredale, of the Aus-
tralian Museum; Mr, B.C. Cotton, of the South Australian Museum; Sir Douglas
Mawson, Dr. C. ‘T. Madigan, Miss I. Crespin, Mr. F. A. Singleton, and par-
ticularly to Miss Joyce Allan of the Australian Museum, for her excellent
illustrations.

DESCRIPTION OF NEW SPECTES AND REMARKS ON
NOTEWORTHY SPECIES
HTolotypes of all new species are lodged in the Tate Collection, Adelaide
University ; the type locality of all new species is the Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide,
South Australia; the geological horizon is Adelaidean. Pliocene, in each case.

Class GASTROPODA
Subclass STREPTONEURA

Ord. ASPIDOBRANCHIA
Subord. ARCHAEOGASTROPODA

Superfam. ZEUGOBRANCHIA
Fam, FISSURELLIDAE
Genus Tucarr Gray 1843
Tugali infortunatum sp. nov.
(PL iv, fig. 1)

Shell thin, small, oblong, low. Apex small but prominent, strongly recurved,
situated at about one-quarter from the posterior margin. Shell flatly convex
anteriorly, slightly concave below the apex and flattening towards the posterior
margin. Sculpture of about 40 primary radiating ribs with fainter secondary
ribs rising irregularly between them, Numerous concentric ribs, closer and less
prominent than the radials, the radials over-riding the concentrics so that there is
no conspicuous granulation. Margin flattened, finely crenulate. Anterior margin
sinuate, sinus produced into a faint canal within, corresponding to a thickened
anterior rib on the exterior. Length, 4-2 mm.; breadth, 2:5 mm.; height, 1-0 mm.

This distinct species presents one or two unsatistactory aspects. There are
two specimens from the Bore, a larger with the margin completely broken and a
smaller which is perfect but obviously immature. The younger is taken as the
holotype. he only difference exhibited by the older shell is that the thickened
rib from the apex to the anterior border in the juvenile extends only about hali-
way in the older shell, developing into three normal, radiating ribs with the
regular concentrics as in the rest of the shell,

Subord. RHIPIDOGLOSSA

Superfam. TROCHACEA
Fam. TROCHIDAE
Genus CLancuLtus Montfort 1810

Clanculus quadricingulatus sp. nov.
(PL iv, fig. 2)

Shell solid, depressed conoidal, falsely umbilicate. Protoconch of one-and-a-
half small turns, apex smooth, gradually developing four pronounced lirae; adult
whorls four, sculptured with rows of granulose cinguli, four on the penultimate
whorl. 13 extending from the suture to the umbilical fissure on the body whorl,
the nine on the base being finer, somewhat more closely granulose and more closely
situated than the four above the periphery. The granulation of the cinguli
develops with the number of the whorls; part ol the protoconch and the first adult
whorl show smooth cinguli, the second whorl a very fine granulation which
becomes increasingly coarser on the third and fourth whorls. Tnterstices finely
axially lirate. Whorls slightly convex, suture depressed, periphery rounded.
Aperture oblique, tetragonal; outer lip thick, abruptly lirate within; columella
oblique, edge reflexed with one median tubercle and a prominent bifid tooth at the
lower edge; umbilical depression relatively deep and narrow, strongly dentate.
Height, 6°2 mm.; diameter, 6°9 mm,

A larger specimen, differing slightly from the type, but apparently con-
specific with it, shows 10 cinguli on the base and four on the whorl, with an addi-
tional very fine spiral lira developed by intercalation.

Clanculus eucarinatus sp. nov.
(PI. iv, fig. 3)

Shell solid, depressed conoidal, falsely umbilicate, FProtoconch small, of
one-and-a-half flattened turns, smooth at the origin, gradually developing four
spiral lirae which become granulose cinguli on the adult whorls. Adult whorls
four, very slightly convex, bearing four cinguli, three of approximately equal size,
the fourth immediately above the suture being more strongly developed and pro-
ducing a distinct carination in the body whorl. Suture deeply canaliculate.
Cinguli granulose, interstices axially lirate, three lirae corresponding generally
to two granules on the cinguli. Periphery roundly carinate, base convex, with
nine fine granulose cinguli with axially lirate interstices. Aperture oblique,
tetragonal; outer lip thick, with two rows of denticles, the outer corresponding
to the cinguli, the inner about six in number; columella oblique, reflexed, with a
bifid tooth at the lower edge; umbilical cavity deep, narrow, dentate. Height,
5-2 mm.; diameter, 5°6 mm.

Genus PrrasrAnorrocHus Fischer 1885
Phasianotrochus laxegemmatus sp. nov.
(Pi. iv, fig. 4)

Shell small, acutely conical, falsely perforate. Protoconch of one-and-a-hali
convex turns; adult whorls five, flat, sculptured with a strong peripheral cord
above the suture bearing numerous fine lirae and prominent, fairly widely-spaced
tubercles, which are more prominent on the early whorls, Above the cord five
equal spiral lirae, broader than interstices, crossed by numerous crowded axial
lirae. Suttire linear. Base convex with about 11 spiral lirae of unequal size
faintly crossed by numerous radial striae. Periphery angulate. Aperture roundly
quadrate, somewhat angularly produced in the outer lip, columella arcuate. Height,
4:6 mm.; diameter, 4:1 mm.

Phasianotrochus subsimplex sp. nov.
(PL. iv, fig. 10)

Shell small, thin, conical, whorls evenly sloping, suture linear, impressed.
Protoconch flattened, of two-and-a-half smooth, rounded turns, adult whorls five,
sculptured with numerous, crowded, microscopic and sometimes obscure spiral
striae, crossed by microscopic oblique axial growth striae. Periphery sharply
angulate; base very slightly convex, with about 12 spiral striae, stronger than
those on the whorl. and faint but definite oblique axials. Aperture quadrate,
slightly produced and angled at the periphery, Columella somewhat curved, with
a small tooth at the base. Height, 4-8 mm.; diameter, 3-7 mm.

Genus CALTHALoTIA Iredale 1929
valthalotia nitidissima sp. nov.
(PL. iv, fig. 11)

Shell small, thin but solid, imperforate, almost perfectly conical with a slight
impression above the suture on the evenly-sloping whorls. Protoconch small, of
one-and-a-half turns, adult whorls five, with strong spiral ribs of approximately
equal size, increasing from three in the first to seven in the body whorl; inter-
spaces crossed by oblique axial lirae growing more numerous towards the last
whorl. In the earher whorls, an oblique cancellation between and granulation on
the ribs is produced; on the last whorl the cancellation gives way to a strong and
even granulation, the axials showing relatively fainter on the interspaces. Base
convex, with nine narrow, slightly granulose spirals and numerous axials of
growth. Aperture trapezate, produced in the outer lip, roundly angled at the

periphery, channelled within, following the exterior spiral ribs. Columella
slightly curved, with a slight callus. Height, 6 mm.; diameter, 5 mm.

Calthalotia fictilis sp.nov.
(Pl. iv, fig. 14)

Shell small, fairly thin, conical, falsety pertorste, Proteconch of one-and-a-
half small, smooth turns; adult whorls four, evenly sloping, sculptured with fine,
subequal spiral Hrae, eight on the body whorl, reticulated by numerous fine.
oblique axial lirae of about half the strength of the spirals. Base convex, with
eight smooth spirals crossed by minute accremental striae, progressively wealen-
ing from the periphery to the umbilical fissure. Periphery angulate, aperture
roundly quadrate, outer lip slightly effuse, columctla arcuate, expanded at the

unbili¢al fissure. Height. 4-0 mm.; diameter, 3-5 mm.

Observations—This species is slightly variable, particularly in the degree of
prontnence of the spirals above the suture. The two above the suture in some
specimens are more prominent than the rest and pro: duce a slight carination. The

number of spirals varies with the size of the specimen. The holotype is, unfor-
AGAR a young shell, Jarger specimens being broken at the tips. The diameter
af a farge example is 7*1 mm.

Genus Larrirautor Iredale 1929
Laetifautor obliquicancellatus sp. nov.
CPL iv, fig. 7)

Shell fairly small, conical, imperforate. Protoconch and earliest whorls
missing, four remaining on the holotype. Aperture approximately one-quarter
height of shell. Whorls flat, sloping towards the angular periphery. Sculpture
varies on individuals, but consists in the holotype of five strong spiral lirae,
increasing to seven on ‘the bod y-whorl, two being less conspicuous than the others.
These are crossed obliquely by cqual-sized. strong, sharp ‘axial ridges, producing
a rhambie cancellation with deep interstitial pits; points of intersection developed
inte rounded granules. Base flat. with 10 basal spirals crossed by close, valid
radial lirae producing granules nearly twice as frequent as those on the whorls.
Columella slightly carved, with tooth at the base. Aperture subquadrate, broken.
Ileight (estimated), 8 mm.; diameter, 6 nim.

Observations—Fragments of larger specimens reveal the regularity of the
primary spiral lirac, though the secondary lirae may vary in number.

Laetifautor spinicarinatus sp. nov.
(Pl. iv, fig. 8)

Shell moderately small, fairly thin, broadly conical, imperforate. Protoconch
(slightly damaged ) ) of one-and-a-half turns; adult whorls four, slightly concave.
anteriorly carinate, Sculpture of three strong spiral lirae on the posterior half
of the whorl, two keels on the anterior half, “each stirmounted by two or three
crowded lirae, those on the keel nearer the suture being of equal, those on the
further of unequal strength; lrae of both anterior and posterior areas crossed by
strong, sharp, oblique axial lirae producing a rhombic sculpture with deep, clearly
defined interstitial pits; intersections with spinulose granules. Base flat, with
eight strong spirals, faintly crossed and granulated by numerous radial lirae.
Aperture rectangular on inner lip, acute- angled on outer lip which is produced
into two ridges corresponding to the keels on the periphery, Columella almost
straight, with tooth at base. Height, 5°35 mm.; diameter, 4°8 mm.

L. similaris Reeve. is very close to this fossil species.

LAETIFAUTOR Sp.

‘This is a specics closely related to L. spinicarinatus, but there is no specimen
sufficiently complete for an accurate diagnosis to be made. The one shell that is
almost complete shows sculptural features approximating very closely to the
former from which it differs in that the anterior ribs on each whorl are less
strongly developed and can scarcely be described as keels. They are. however,
stirmounted by lirae in the same manner, and it is probable that the species is
merely an aberrant form of spinicarmatus.

Laetifautor crebrinodulosus sp. nov
(Pl. iv, fig. 9)

Shell conical, fairly small, stout, mnperforate, Protoconeh very sinall, of
one-and-a-half turns, faintly axially lirate; adult whorls six, slightly convex,
sculptured with strong spirals, increasing hy intercalation from three primary on
the first whorl to four primary and three secondary on the body whorl. Spirals
narrower than interspaces, crossed by evenly-spaced oblique axials, about 20 on
the penultimate whorl, producing grazules at the intersections and aime interstit'al
pits between. Base slightly convex, with seven spirals, eqtal in width to inter-
spaces, crossed by numerous tine radials producing a faint granulation. Aperture
subquadrate, columella oblic jue, outer lip produced, roughly crenulate within.
Height, 7-9 mim.; drameter, 6 mun,

Observations—This species has features in common with Calliostoma spinit-
losa, Tate, Calliostoma balcombensis Chapple, and Thalotia cvigua VT. Woods, but
is distinct from each.

Laetifautor bicarinatus sp. nov.
(Pl. iv, fie. 13)

Shell rather small, fairly stout, conical, higher than broad, falsely perforate.
Protocouch very small, of one-and-a-half turns; adult whorls six, slightly convex
in the early whorls, sculptured above the suture with a strong peripheral cord
supporting in the body and penultimate whorls four beaded lirae, fewer i
number in the carly whorls; above this a narrow beaded cord and then four small,
strong, beaded, equal lirae. In the early whorls oblique axial hrae are strongly
marked, with beads at the junction of axials and spirals and deep interstitial pits
between. These become obsolete in the penultimate and bedy whorls, the effect
being that of simple granulation of the spirals. Base flat, with eight spiral lirae
of approximately equal size with the interspaces, Aperture (broken) somewhat
oblique, subquadrate, about one-quarter height of shell, columella straight.
Height, 675 nim.; diameter, 4-8 mm.

These specimens are all small, The species is extremely close to L. spini-
carinatus and is possibly conspecific with it. In general the sculpture of
bicarinatus is more even, particularly on the keel, und there is a less rugged
appearance about the shell generally. The keels are more strongly developed than
in spinticartnatus,

LAETIFAUTOR sp, 2

Fragments of a large Lactifautor, the sculpture of which consists of a broad
peripheral carina supporting several beaded threads; a narrower rib above this
also surmounted by beaded lirac, and several small beaded lirae of varying size
on the posterior portion of the whorl. Base flat, with about 16 spirals crossed
and beaded by fine radials of growth.

LARTIPAUTOR sp. 3

Fragments of a large Laetfautor similar to the previous species, but differ-
ing 1m the unbeaded nature of the spirals on the whorls and in the smaller number
of the basal spirals.

Genus AsTELE Swainson 1855
Astele fanaticum sp. nov.
(Pl. iv, fig. 6)

Shell depressed-conical, perforate; whorls somewhat concave, sloping.
Protoconch small, slightly broken in the holotype, of two depressed rounded turns ;
adult whorls three, flattened beneath the suture in an almost horizontal narrow
plane, then steeply sloping for the rest of the whorl. Periphery carinate. Sculp-
ture of fine approximately equidistant spiral threads, four on the infra-sutural
plane, nine on the sloping section of the whorl, 14 on the base of the body whorl.
Interstices broader than lirae, crossed by crowded, very fine axial threads follow-
ing the lines of growth. Base convex. Umibilicus deep. Aperture subovate;
outer lip thin, angulate, following the peripheral carina. Height, 6-1 mm.;
diameter, 7°O mm.

Genus Putcuraste.r Iredale 1929

Pulchrastele planiconicum sp. noy.
(PI. iv, fig. 12)

Shell moderately small, conical, higher than broad, narrowly perforate,
whorls evenly sloping, flattened. Protoconch small but prominent, of two turns;
adult whorls six, sculptured above the suture with a strong peripheral cord which
supports beaded lirae increasing in number to five on the body whorl; above the
cord prominent lirae increasing by intercalation from three on the early whorls
to five on the body whorl. Spirals crossed by numerous strong axial lirae pro-
ducing a cancellation in the early whorls with granules on the spirals; the axials
become relatively more frequent and less prominent in the last whorls and the
cancellation develops into a mere granulation. Base flat, with 11 primary spiral
lirae and one or two faint secondary lirae on the interspaces, somewhat granulose
near the umbilicus, faintly crossed by numerous radial striae. Aperture broken,
quadrate, produced in the outer lip and angled at the peripheral cord; outer lip
thin; inner lip straight with a slight denticle at the base. Height, 8 mm.;
diameter, 5°5 mm.

Pulchrastele tuberculatum sp. nov.
(PI. iv, fig. 15)

Shell small, broadly conical, narrowly umbilicate, stout, whorls evenly sloping.
Protoconch slightly broken, very small, flattened, of onc-and-a-half turns ; adult
whorls five, sculptured with a thick cord supporting four small tuberculate lirae
at the sharply-angled periphery; above the cord three narrow spirals with small
prominent tubercles on each whorl, about half as wide as the interspaces ; number
of tubercles on the periphery increases on each whorl, there being about 40 on
the periphery of the body-whorl in the holotype. Aperture relatively small,
rhombic, produced and sharply angled in the outer lip; inner lip damaged but
showing a callus reflected towards the umbilicus. Base flat, with eight strong
spirals, narrower than interspaces; umbilical spirals tuberculate. Height.
4-8 mm.; diameter, 4°5 mm.

Genus Erumtnoiia Iredale 1924

Ethminolia perglobosa sp. nov.
(Pl. iv, fig. 8)

Shell solid, obtuse, globose conic, perforate. Protoconch somewhat flat-
tened, turbinate, of three very small turns; adult whorls three, convex, sculptured
with numerous fine spiral striae, crossed irregularly and frequently by faint,
oblique striae of growth. Periphery rounded, base convex, sculptured with spiral
striae as whorls, striae broadening somewhat and deepening near the umbilicus.

5, 5

Aperture subcircular, outer lip moderately thick, obscurely crenulate within ;

inner lip arcuate, with faint suggestion of tooth at hase. Height, 4:6 mm..;
diameter, 5-8 mm.

Observations—The sculpture of this species varies somewhat, some speci-
mens presenting finer spiral striae than others. Ethminolia probabilis Iredale 1s
the closest Recent species.

Fam. TUBIOLIDAE
Genus Partrupio.a Iredale 1936

Partubiola depressispira sp. nov.
(Pl. iv, fig. 16)

Shell very small, subdiscoidal, depressed, broadly umbilicate, tricarinate.
Protoconch very small, slightly elevated, helicoid; adult whorls three, at first
more or less rounded; body whorl with three regularly disposed carinae with
flattened areas between; that between the suture and the carina below it decidedly
sunken. Spiral sculpture of fine, more-or-less regular lirae, about stx between
each two keels; axial sculpture of indistinct growth lines on the spire faintly
reticulating the spirals; axials much more prominent on the base, strongly reticu-
lating the spirals in the umbilical area. Base flattened near the keel, convex
towards the umbilicus. Unibilicus broad, showing all the whorls. Aperture wide,
roundly quadrate, peristome not continuous; outer lip attached to whorl above
at median carina, overhanging aperture above, excavate below. Height, 1°5 mm. ;
diameter, 3°5 mm.

Partubiola varilirata sp. noy.
(Pl. iv, fig. 17)

Shell very small, stibdiscoidal, depressed, broadly umbilicate. Protoconch
very small, of about two helicoid turns, clevated; adult whorls three, with one
carina at the posterior one-third of the whorl. Area between suture and carina
flat, depressed, sculptured about eight very fine spiral lirae; below the carina
whorls convex, spiral lirac stronger and more widely separated. On the body-
whorl about 12 subequal. strong lirae extend from the carina to the umbilicus,
where they disappear; umbilical area with very faint spirals. Axials faint or
absent in the region of strong spirals, finely reticulating the fine spirals below
the suture and in the umbilicus. Umbilicus broad, showing all the whorls; aper-
ture rounded, peristome not entire; outer lip overhanging above and excavate
below. Height, 1-3 mm.; diameter, 3°5 inm.

Observations—This species is very like P. blancha Iredale, from which it
differs in sculpture and size.

Fam. STOMATELLIDAE
Genus Hrerprropoma Pilsbry 1889

Herpetopoma pliocenica sp. nov.
(PI. iv, fig. 18)
Jtuchelus baceatus Chapman 1914 non Menke sp.; Chapman, Proc. Roy, Soc.
Vict., 26, (2). (ns.), 316.

Shell small, globose-conical, thin, perforate, Protoconch very small. of
one-and-a-half flatly convex, axially lirate turns; adult whorls 4, convex, body
whorl globose. Aperture about three-quarters as high as spire, suture deep,
impressed. Sculpture of cquidistant. granulose, spiral ribs, three on the post-
embryonic whorl, increasing by intercalation to nine on the penultimate whorl ;
13 on the body whorl extending evenly from the suture to the umbilicus. Inter-
spaces wider than ribs, adorned with fine, regular, axial threads which are more
distinct in the carlier whorls. Granules on the ribs correspond to threads on the
interspaces. Deriphery rounded. Aperture circular, entire; outer lip thin, crenate
within; inner lip reflexed; columella rounded, smooth. Unmbilicus narrow, deep.
Ileight, 9 mm.; diameter, 7 mm.

Observations—This species is very like, and is probably ancestral to
i. baccata (Menke) ; the sculpture of H. pliocenica is finer and the axial threads
sharper and more clearly defined on most specimens. A. pliocenica is a smaller
shell. less than half the size of the Recent baccata, A difference between the
Pliocene species and the Recent was recognised by Chapnian who states, “The
Mallee example appears at first sight to have a neater and more concise ornament
than fresh shells of the living species.”

Fam, LIOTIIDAE
Genus Doxtrcrossea Iredale 1924
DOLICROSSEA LABIATA (Tenison Woods 1876)
Five small examples of this species occur; it is represented in the Barwonian
as D. sublabiata (‘Vate). The Adelaidean specimens approximate more closely

to the Recent labiala than to sublabiaia and are smaller than either.

Superfam. NERTITACIKA
Fam. PHENACOLEPADIDAE
Genus PHENACOLEPAS Pilsbry 1891
Phenacolepas tela sp, nov.

(PL. iv, fig. 19)

Shell moderately small, thin, oval, fairly low; apex prominent, slightly
recurved, situated one-eighth distance [rom posterior border. Sculpture absent
near apex, elsewhere of 80-90 radial ribs, with about 11 raised, sharp, concentric
ridges, between which are very fine, crowded, inconspicuous, concentric lirac.
Ridges crowded posterior to the apex, widely spaced anteriorly, Margin of shell
raised slightly in the central portion, smooth; interior of shell smooth with faint
irregular grooves corresponding to growth lines and radial ribs, Length, 7°53 mim. ;
breadth, 5:2 mm. ; height, 2°5 mm.

Ord. PECTINIBRANCHIA
Subord. TAENIOGLOSSA
Section PLATYPODA
Superfam, RISSOACEA
Pam. RISSOLDAI:®
Genus Kaurnella nov.
Shell small, stout, imperforate, subglobose-conical. Apex paucispiral, smooth,
small. Spire short, body whorl large; suture lincar, whorls spirally lirate ; aper-
ture subcircular, entire. Genotype Kaurnella denotata sp. nov.

Kaurnella denotata sp. nov.
(Pl.ov, fig. 1)

Shell small, fairly stout, subglobose-conical, imperforate. Spire small, body
whorl large and globose. Protoconch of one-and-a-half very small, flatly convex,
smooth, shining turns; adult whorls four, rapidly increasing, inflated; suture
linear, deep. Wohorls sculptured with numerous fine, spiral lirae, two ol which
are more prominent than the rest, crossed by inconspicuous, fine, oblique axial
striae. Each whorl! absolutely semi-ribbed, seven on the last whorl, producing a
more-or-less obscure tttberculation on the prominent lirae, Base convex, Hirate.
Aperture subcireular; outer lip thickened; columella very slightly concave.
Height, 3-1 mm.; diameter, 2°2 mm.

a aagaae CIERITHIACEA
am, STRUTHIOLARIIDAE
aad Tytospira flarris 1897
TVLOSPIRA CORONATA MARWICKI (Finlay 1941)

Pelicaria coronata Vate: Tate 1890, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 13, (2), 176;
marwicki Finlay 1931, Trans. N.Z. Inst., wee (1), 17; howehini Cotton 1934,
S.A. Nat. 16, (1), 7; Hlowehin 1936, Trans. he "Ses S. Aust.. 60, 19;
coronala Tate subsp. hewehini Cowon, Howchin 1935, Trans. Roy. Soc.
S. Aust., 59, 85, 90.

Tylospira coronata Tate: Dennant and Kitson. 1903, Rec. Geol. Surv. Viet., 1,
(2), 144.

Confusion appears to have arisen over the identification of this common and
restricted WKalininan species, probably on account of the few specimens
examined by various authors. In the opinion of the writer the Adelaidean

> merely geographical variants of 7Tvlospira corandla as it occurs in

examples are
and they are extremely

Victoria. Examination of a large series of these shells
abundant—shows that the species is considerably variable between localities, those
from the Adelaidean departing furthest from the type. The Adelaidcan specimens,
in general, show a weaker tendency to stulcation at the suture, but this, together
with the height of the spire, is very variable in individuals from the same locality.
Tate himself identified Adelaidean specimens with corendia. tlowever, ihe
writer acknowledges that differences occur, principally in the degree of sulcation
and shape of the whorls, sufficiently general to permit the classification of the
Adelaidean examples as a subspecies.

Tinlay’s name (no figure) has priority over Cotton’s; the latter was evidently
unfamiliar with the species and figured an extremely eroded shell. Tylospira is
the correct genus.

Fam. CERITIHIDAE
Genus CLypEomorus Jousseaume 1888

Clypeomorus bivaricatus sp. nov.
(DL iv, fig. 20)

Shell moderately small, turreted, spire elongate. Protoconch of one-and-a-
half small, inconspicuous turns, sharp at the origin; adult whorls nine, angulate
at the posterior third, almost vertical in the anterior two-thirds; angulation more
prouounced in the early whorls; body whorl more or less rounded, convex.
Suture linear, impressed. Scuipture of curved axial costae, about 15 on the
penultimate whorl. tuberculate at the angle, crossed by about six strong spiral
lirae in the anterior two-thirds, and four much weaker, more closely-set lirae
above the shoulder ; the number of lrae mereases slowly by intercalation from two
on the carliest whorls. Two varices on cach whorl, fairly prominent, one at the
aperture, Sculpture finer on the base, about six fine spiral lirae extending from
the columella. Aperture ovate, with a short, recurved anterior canal; outer lip
thin, columella concave, inner lip with a thin callus. Height, 11 mim.; diameter,
3:1 mm.

Obscrvations—The sculpture of this species is variable, its characteristics
in gencral being that of tuberculate axial costae crossed by spiral lirae of unequal
strength ; angulation of the whorls is always present, at least in the arly whorls.

Clypeomorus multiliratus sp. nov.
(PL. iv, fg. 22)
Shell moderately small, Asche. spire elongate. Protoconch of three rela-
tively large, convex whorls; adult whorls seven, convex, sculptured with promi-

nent curved axial costae, increasing from seven in the first adult whorl to LL in
the body whorl. Spiral sculpture of numerous fine lirae, wider than interspaces ;
about 15 on the penultimate whorl. Three varices of each whorl, only slightly
more prominent than the costae. Sculpture on the base comparatively weak,
about seven widely-spaced, faint spiral lirae being developed on an otherwise
smooth surface. Aperture subovate, outer lip thin, broken in the holotype; canal
short, slightly recurved ; columella smooth, curved. Height, 9-7 mm.; diameter.
3°6 mm.
Genus Adelacerithium nov.

Shell small, elongate-turreted, spirally and axially ribbed. Apex prominent,
paucispiral. Suture impressed, whorls flat. Columella with a strong twist or
fold; aperture somewhat pyriform; outer lip not expanded, thin. Genus recall-
ing Ataxocerithium but lacking pagodoid formation and possessing vertagoid
columellar plait. Genotype Adelacerithium merultim sp. nov,

Adelacerithium merultum sp. nov.
(Pl, iv, fig. 23)

Shell fairly small, clongate-turreted. Tip of protoconch broken, one smooth
convex whorl remaining; adult whorls 14, flattened; suture deep, impressed,
Sculpture of fine, prominent, axial costae crossed by approximately equidistant
spiral lirae, with a slight granulation at the intersections; about 24 axial costac
on the penultimate whorl, with five spirals ; the number of costae increases rapidly
at about the seventh adult whorl; earlier whorls show a much coarser cancellation
than the subsequent. Aperture broken in the holotype, subpyriform ; columella
short, with a strong plait; canal short, recurved. Ifeight, 9°5 mm.; diameter,
2:2 mm,

Genus Ostortio Hedley 1899
Obtortio liratus sp. nov.
(PI. iv, fig. 24)

Shell small, thin, elongate-turreted. Protoconch of one-and-a-half small,
smooth turns; adult whorls seven, angulate at the posterior third, sculptured with
fine, prominent, spiral lirae below the angle, absent or inconspicuous above ; spirals
crossed by about 14 curved, axial costae, more prominent in the early whorls and
weakening considerably in the body whorl. Whorls varicate. Base spirally
lirate, not so strongly as whorls. Aperture subovate, with a very short anterior
canal. Ileight. 5:2 mm.; diameter, 1-7 mm.

Observations—The axial costae vary in intensity and in the degree of curva-
ture or angulation. The angulation is modified in the holotype, but may be pro-
nounced and the costae be somewhat tuberculate at the shoulder.

Genus Crrrriiorsis Forbes and Hanley 1849
Cerithiopsis perelongatus sp. nov.
(Pl. iv, fig. 25)

Shell small, very elongate-turreted, whorls flattened. Protoconch of three
carinate, smooth, tapering whorls; tip heterostrophic. Adult whorls eight, sculp-
tured with three spiral costae of about equal size with the interspaces, crossed by
about 16 axial costae, less conspicuous than the spirals and producing a flattened
gemmulation on the spirals. Suture linear; base smooth. Aperture with outer
lip broken, columella curved, with a short curved anterior canal, Height, 6-1 mm.,;
diameter, 1-1 mm.

Paratype—One specimen consists of the last whorls of a much larger shell.
the height of which is estimated at 12 mm., the diameter 2°5 mm. The sculpture
is consistent with that of the holotype.

Genus TEREBRALIA Swainson 1840
Terebralia fallax sp. nov.
(PI. iv, fig. 21)

Shell clongate-turreted, of moderate size. Protoconch missing in the holo-
type; adult whorls 13, the first six convex and cancellate, the posterior half of
the whorl more finely cancellate than the anterior; plications develop at about
the sixth whorl and become increasingly prominent throughout the rest of the
shell. Seven plications to each whorl narrow, curved, crossed by spiral sculpture ;
spiral sculpture commences in the post-embryonic whorls as fine, thread-like ribs,
more prominent in the centre of the whorl aud coarser in the anterior half; the
ribs become wider and more nearly equal in size in the succeeding whorls; in the
early whorls ribs are more or less rounded, in the latter whorls they are flattened
and rectangular in section, interspaces correspondingly channelled with vertical
sides; narrower than ribs. Each rib in the last whorl supports a fine median
striation, Axial sculpture equal to the spiral in the post-embryonic whorls,
obsolete in the last whorls. Base spirally lirate. Aperture and body whorl broken,
columella concave; a short, slightly recurved anterior canal. Height, 31 mm.;
diameter, 11°5 mm.

Paratype—A portion of a small shell has the protoconch intact, of two small
globose turns, smooth and shining; succeeding whorls are convex and cancellate
as m1 the holotype.

Observations—The sculpture and shape of this species are very like some
forms of Pyrasus ebeninus, the common Sydney whelk, but the resemblance is
superficial only. The species is not uncommon in the Bore, but no perfect
specimen is available; the holotype is the most complete, fragments of two others
are larger, about half the size of Pyrasus ebeninus,

Genus MANULONA noy.

Shell small, elongate-turreted; protoconch straight, paucispiral, smooth;
suture linear; whorls flat, spirally sculptured; sculpture tuberculate ; aperture sub-
ovate; canal short, almost straight or only slightly reflexed; columella slightly
arcuate. Genotype Manulona arrugosa sp, nov.

Manulona arrugosa sp. nov.
(Pl. ty, fig. 26)

Shell small, slender, turreted; whorls flat to concave. Apex straight. of two
smooth whorls; adult whorls 10, pronunently sculptured with a supra-sutural
thread above which is a prominent band with about 12 elevated tubercles: above
the band, three flattened, beaded lirae, the beads being about twice as numerous
as, and very much smaller than the tubercles; inlerspaces very narrow. Suture
hnear, irregular. DBase striate, aperture sub-ovate, broken in the holotype, with a
faint anterior canal. Height, 8-7 mm.; diameter, 2-2 mm.

Manulona lirasuturalis sp. nov.
(Pl. iv, fig. 27)

ohell small. slender, turreted, whorls slightly carinate. Protoconch of two
smooth, convex whorls; adult whorls 11. Whorls more or less smooth, faintly
axially and spirally striate, with a row of about nine tubercles above the suture
giving a carinate appearance to the whorls; below the suture an inconspicuous
tow of fine, numerous beads. Suture linear, with a single, fine lira imbricating
above; the lira shows conspicuously on the periphery of the body whorl. Base
spirally striate. Aperture broken in the holotype, columella curved. Height,
9-1 mm.; diameter, 2:2 mm.

Observations—This species is very similar to M. arrugosa, from which it
differs in its sculpture. The aperture of specimens otherwise less coniplete than
the holotype is shown as subquadrate, with a short anterior canal,

Fam. TRIPHORIIDAE
Genus Tripiora (s.L) Blainville 1828
‘TRIPHORA (s.1.) spp
‘The only species of Triphera recorded from the Nalimnan is 7. wilkinsent,
but it seems more than likely that several genera and species may be represented.
Adelaidean examples, of which there are two species, do not seem to answer to
the description of wilkinsoni T. Woods (Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1878, 3. 233),
although they belong to the same species as some from the KKalimnan, It is desir-
able to investigate further material, including authentic examples from the Bar-

tes
wonian, before identifying the present specimens in more than a broad sense.

Fam, DLIALIDAI
Genus Mereldia nov.

Shell small, solid, subulate; apex paucispiral, smooth, dome-shaped; whorls
numerous, flattened, striate; aperture relatively small. ovate; columella aluiost
straight, short, smooth. Genus allied to Diala, differing in size, apex, and striation
of whorls. Genotype Mereldia inconimoda sp. nov.

Mereldia incommoda sj. nov.
(Pl. v, fig. 3)

Shell small, solid, subulate, whorls with straight sides, Protoconch of two
fattened, dome-shaped, smooth, convex whorls; adult whorls nine, flattened,
gradually tapering posteriorly ; suture linear, impressed. Whorls shining but
sculptured with numerous fine spiral striae. Aperture small, ovate; outer lip thin,
simple; columella short, straight, smooth. Height, 10 mm.; diameter, 3°6 mm.

Superfam. AGLOSSA
Fam. PYRAMIDELILIDALE
Genus Syrnoita A. Adams, 1860

Syrnola acrisecta sp. nov.
(Pl. v, fig. 2)

Shell very small, moderately tapering, thin, shining. Protoconch prominent,
of two smooth, heterostrophic turns; adult whorls six, moderately rapidly increas-
ing, flattened. Suture canaliculate, impressed, Sides of body whorl almost
vertical, base convex, an obscure angulation at the periphery. Aperture elongate-
pyriform, columellar fold near the origin, inner lip effuse, slightly expanded below.
Height, 3-3 mm.; diameter, 1-1 mm.

Observations—This small species bears strong resemblances to 5. infrasulcata
and S. jonesiana; it is somewhat broader than either and is more deeply impressed
at the suture.

Genus ‘TURBONILLA Risso 1826
Turbonilla vixcostata sp. nov.
CPL vy, fie. 6)

Shell elongate-turreted, solid, fairly thin, Proioconch of two prominent
somewhat globose heterostrophic turns; adult whorls nine, slightly convex, slowly
increasing; suture impressed and well defined. Axial costac about 14, from

suture to suture in the early whorls but becoming less conspicuous to the sixth
whorl, from which they are obsolete for the rest of the shell; in the last three
whorls costae give way to faint axtal striae cf growth; wharls also very obscurely
striated spirally. Aperture subquadrate, elongate; columella almost straight,
slightly plicate; outer lip thin. Height, 9°8 mm.; diameter, 2-2 mm.

(?) TURBONILLA sp.

Six specimens of a Turdonilla-like shell, all with the early whorls missing.
There is no axial ribbing shown on any of the shells, though the most complete
shows a stiggestion of costae in its first whorl. The species is very hke, though
not identical with, 7. vircoslata; however, there is absence of ribbing, the shell is
thicker and in the anterior quarter of each whorl there is a suggestion of angula-
tion with a sudden oblique descent to the suture.

Turbonilla subfusca sp. nov.
(PL ov, fig. 7)

Shell very small, elongate-turreted, thin. Protoconch of two small hetero-
strophic turns, smooth and prominent; adult whorls seven, slightly convex. the
Arst lwo of which are not or only obscurely costate. The costae rise towards the
end of the second post-embryonic whorl and are almost fully developed in the
third; in later whorls the costac are prominent, extending from suture to suture:
about 16 costae on the penultimate whorl, slightly oblique and of approximately
equal size with the interspaces, Suture impressed, deep, Aperture subquadrate ;
outer lip parallel to columella, with a downward turn at its junction with the
previous whorl; aperture rounded anteriorly, Base without costae. Height,
5-1 mm.; diameter, 1:0 mm.

Observations—T. subfusca is somewhat like T. radicans Chapman and
Crespin, but is a more fragile shell. with more numerous ribs, Its nearest
resemblance is to the Recent 7. fusca Adams. from which it differs in the sculpture
of the early whorls, in the shape of the aperture and in possessing flatter whorls.

Fam. EULLMIDAE
Genus Eurima Risso 1826
Eulima longiconica sp. nov.
(Pl. v, fig. 4)

Shell small, shining, smooth, narrowly conical, very slightly curved. Proto-
conch of one inconspicuous flattened turn followed by eight adult whorls, nearly
straight, slowly increasing. Suture linear, slightly impressed. Aperture ovate,
outer lip entire; columella nearly straight, with a slight callus. Ileight, 5 mm.;
diameter, 2 mm.

Observations—YJhe nearest living species to this shell is F, roegerace Cotton
and Godfrey,

Eulima minuticonica sp. nov.
(PI. v, fig. 5)

Shell minute, smooth, shining, subulate. Protoconch of two conspicuous,
smooth, convex turns; adult whorls 7, straightly sloping; suture linear; body
whorl with an obscure angulation. Aperture pyriform; columella slightly con-
cave, reflexed. Height, 3-1 mm.; diameter, 1-0 mm.

Observations—Practically identical in shape with FE. lougiconica, distinguished
by smaller size and number and shape of embryonic whorls.

Superfam. CHEILEACEA
Fam. CHEILEIDAE
Genus Cuenca Modeer 1793

Cheilea adelaidensis sp. nov.
(Pl. v, fig. 8, 9)

Shell considerably broken, size and adult shape indeterminate, elevated ; apex
anterior, smooth and sharply curved in two turbinate whorls. Shell fairly smooth
in the neighbourhood of the apex, central portion of the shell forming a cap with
steep sides, rest of the shell apparently more or less flattened and irregular in
shape. Sculpture of numerous, very fine, waving, radial lirae slightly wider than
interspaces, broken by irregular, concentric lines of growth and crossed irregularly
by diagonal radial grooves; sculpture extends from edge of smooth portion
surrounding apex to the adult area outside the cap. Internal appendage fairly
strong, broken in the holotype. Dimensions (of cap only)—height, 4 mm.;
diameter, 6 mm.

Paratype—The internal appendage of the paratype is semi-circular in basal
outline, convex in front, fairly wide and showing irregular growth lines.

Observations—Although neither of the two specimens is complete, it is
desirable to describe this apparently rare and interesting shell. It differs markedly
from cither of the two Recent South Australian species, and like C. occidua
Cotton forming a distinct cap in the early part of the shell, although the sculpture
in no way resembles that of occidua.

Superfam. CYPRAEACEA
Fam, TRIVIIDAE
Genus Ex.atrivia Lredale 1931
Ellatrivia wirrata sp. nov.
(PL v, fig. 16)

Shell small, thin, globular, narrowed anteriorly, spire conspicuous and
globular. Surface of shell sculptured with fairly even, fine, sharp prominent ribs,
most extending over the dorsal surface without interruption by medial line, others
necting at an angle in the medial dorsal region, About 35 ribs approach the
outer lip over the dorsal surface, approximately 20 of which continue over the
thickened, inflected outer lip and denticulate it within; about the same number
denticulate the inner lip, extending across the columellar groove. Aperture
arcuate, narrow, slightly widened anteriorly. Length, 9 mm. ; breadth, 7 mm.;
height, 6 min.

Observations—Ellatrivia merces Lredale, the genotype, is very close to
E. wirrata which is more globular, has a more prominent spire, and closer and
finer ribs.

Superfam. DOLIACIA
Fam, CYMATIIDAE
Genus CyMATIELLA Iredale 1924

Cymatiella adelaidensis sp. nov.
(PI. v, fig. 10)

Shell of moderate size, strong, elongate-fusiform, spire one-and-a-half times
height of canal and aperture. Protoconch of three smooth, globose whorls, the
first very small, the rest rapidly increasing ; adult whorls six, with a strong varix
every three-quarters of a volution. Sculpture of prominent, narrow, elevated
axial costae, the number varying from four to five on different whorls, between
each varix; between the costae numerous irregular striae of growth; axial sculp-
ture crossed by small, narrow, spiral ribs, wider than interspaces, irregular and
unequal in size; faint nodulation where the spirals cross the axials. Aperture

subovate, with a fairly short, sharply recurved anterior canal; outer lip strongly
variced, with elongate denticles more or less in pairs within; inner lip smooth,
reflected over columella, faintly nodulose below; columella arcuate. Height,
15 mm.; diameter, 8 mm.

Observations—Two Pliocene species come close to C. adelaidensis, the Upper
Aldingan C. sexcostala (Tate), which differs in the number of intervariceal costae
and in the spiral sculpture, and Personella clarkei Chapman and Crespin, which
has less prominent axial costae and is not so slender as the Adelaidean species.

Subord. STENOGLOSSA
Section RACHIGLOSSA
Superfam, MURICACEA
Fam. MURICIDAE
Genus Murex Linné 1758
Murex peramangus sp. nov.
(Pl. v, fig. 24)

Shell of moderate size, triangularly ovate, imperforate, somewhat squat ;
spire half length of aperture and canal; body whorl large, with seven varices.
Varices stout, prominent, squamose; sculpture of fairly fine, spiral lirae of un-
equal size, narrower than interspaces, crossed by frequent, finely-waving, axial
lirae and foltaceous growth lamellae. Varices foliaceous below ; umbilical depres-
sion conspicuous. Aperture ovate, outer lip variced; inner lip thickened, reflected
over columella; columella arcuate; canal tubular, almost closed, recurved.
Ileight, 33 mm.; diameter, 25 mm.

Observations — This species appears to be considerably variable in the
strength of the spiral lirae and in the height of the spire, and to grade into
M, biconicus Tate, which is a more elongated shell with a distinct sculpture, A
graduated series from the 7-variced, squat M. peramangus to the clongate,
6-variced M, biconicus occurs in the Bore, but it is possible to separate the two
species fairly easily. M. biconicus is a common species in the Adelaidean, though it
is apparently rare elsewhere; so far as the writer is aware, the “Murray Desert”
(type locality) is the only other locality at which it occurs.

Genus Widningia nov.

Shell moderate, elongate-fusiform, spire shorter than aperture; apex small,
paucispiral; whorls convex, axially lamellose-costate, spirally lirate; sculpture
squamose, resembling Bedeva. Aperture ovate, canal long, obliquely curved,
columella without plait, otherwise shell resembles Peristernia. Unlike Nodo-
pelagia, Genotype Widningia crassiplicata sp. nov.

Widningia crassiplicata sp. nov.
(Pl. v, fig. 25)

Shell of moderate size, fusiform, elongate, spire shorter than aperture and
canal. Protocouch eroded, one small tooth turn remaining; adult whorls six,
rapidly increasing, body whorl large. Six plicate axial costae on the body whorl,
increasing gradually in number posteriorly ; whorls completely and evenly sculp-
tured with numerous spiral lirae which are more prominent on the anterior half
of the whorl; these are crossed by crowded, squamose, waving, fine lamellae. the
waves of which are regularly directed backwards over the lirae and forwards in
the interspaces ; Jamellae slightly more prominent over the costae and becoming
foliaceous, as do the plicate costae, towards the base. Shape of the whorls some-
what angulate from the prominence of the costae. Aperture elongate-ovate with
a large canal; margin of aperture broken in the holotype; inner lip reflected over

columella. Height, 40 mm.; diameter, 17 mm; length of aperture, 12 mm, ; length
of canal, 11 mm.

Paratype—A_ specimen, more eroded than the holotype, with the aperture
and canal complete. Outer lip with two rows of small, elongate, numerous
denticles; canal recurved, half closed. Umbilical fissure wide in this specimen.

Superfam. BUCCINACEA
Fam. PYRENIDAE
Genus Ademitrella nov.

Shell small, elongate-fusiform, spire comparatively short, aperture long;
protoconch smooth, subconical tip small, pointed, eccentric; whorls smooth, suture
linear; columella smooth, outer lip of aperture thickened, subvaricose, smooth
within. Genotype Ademitrella insolentior sp. nov.

Ademitrella insolentior sp. nov.
(Pi. v, fig, 11)

Shell small, spindle-shaped. with a comparatively short spire. Protoconch
sharp, sub-conical, of one-and-a-half smooth turns, the apex eccentric; adult
whorls three-and-a-half, smooth, flattened or slightly convex; body whorl large,
compressed at the base. Whorls smooth except for faint, axial growth striae and
about eight spiral striae on the base. Suture distinct, lincar, ascending near the
aperture. Aperture elongate, outer lip thickened, subvaricose, slightly excavate
above, inflected below, smooth within; columella excavate a little above the middle,
slightly twisted below and turned to the left. Height. 6°2 mm. ; diameter, 2°L mm.

Genus ZEMITRELLA Finlay 1926

Zemitrella muscula sp. nov.
(Pl. v, fig. 12)

Shell very small, bluntly fusiform, spire approximately equal to aperture.
Protoconch of one blunt, flattened, smooth, convex turn; adult whorls four, flat-
tened; body whorl moderately convex, tapering anteriorly, Suture canaliculate ;
whorls smooth except for indistinct axial growth lines and about 10 incised spiral
striae at the base. Aperture elongate, fairly narrow; outer lip somewhat notched
above and inflected below, conspicuously and finely dentate within; columella
slightly excavate above, almost straight and turned to the left below. Height,
4-2 mm.; diameter, 2 mm.

Superfam. VOLUTACEA
Kam, MITRIDAE
Genus AuSTROMITRA Finlay 1926
Austromitra angusticostata sp. nov.
(Pl. v, fig. 13)

Shell small, rather thin, turreted. Protoconch of one-and-a-half small
globose, smooth turns; adult whorls five, convex, sculptured with strong, arcuate,
axial ribs, narrower than interspaces, 11 on the penultimate whorl; interspaces
very finely axially striate. Suture deep, impressed. Aperture elongate, narrow-
ing anteriorly; outer lip broken but apparently smooth within; columella with
four sharp, fairly stout plications; base strongly spirally lirate, six lirae on the
holotype. Height, 8 mm.; diameter, 3 mm.

Observations—This species comes very close to A. schomburgki (Angas),
but differs in having its axial ribs decidedly curved, and in the number of
columellar plications. It is slightly more slender than A, schomburgki. In
similar respects it is distinct from 4. scalariformis (T. Woods).

Fam. TUDICLIDAE
Genus ‘Iunrera Bolten 1798
Tudicla sinotecta sp. nov.

(Pl. v, fig. 14)

Shell of moderate size, thin; spire conical, very short; body whorl large and
elongate-conical. Protoconch very conspicuous of two prominent, convex turns,
completely flattened at the top; adult whorls three, very rapidly increasing ; whorls
with slightly concave sides ; body whorl concave posteriorly, rising at the periphery
to a sharp angulation, slowly descending anteriorly. About 12 sharp angular
ridges on the periphery becoming obsolete towards the edges of the whorl. These
ridges are shown on the suture as even deep undulations imbricating the suture
which is prominent and waving. Elsewhere sculpture of uneven, spiral ribs and
threads crossed by irregular growth striae. Aperture elongate-ovate with a long
canal; outer lip thin, broken; inner lip thickened; columella with a single twist,
fold not prominent. Height, 23-5 mm.; diameter, 15 mm. Height of aperture
and canal, 20 mm.

Fam. MARGINELLIDAE
Genus MARrcINELLA Lamarck 1801
Marginella moana sp. nov.
(PL. v, fig. 15)
Shell small, solid, pyriform, spire immersed, apical portion depressed.
Body whorl completely enveloping the rest of the shell. Aperture long, narrow,
curved, with margins parallel; aperture raised above the apex of the shell and
curving somewhat towards the origin, Outer lip thickened, faintly and finely
denticulate within; columella with four plails, the anterior shorter than the rest
and bordering the canal; canal narrow, curving inwards, Height of whorl,
4-1 mm.; height of aperture, 4°3 mim.; diameter, 3:1 mm.

Observations—This pear-shaped species comes closest to M. globiformis

Chapman and Crespin, also occurring in the Abattoirs Bore.

MARGINELLA sp.

Shell small, stout, elongate-ovate, spire bluntly rounded, body whorl large,
somewhat cylindrical. Protoconch roundly depressed, of one convex turn; adult
whorls three, each almost covering the preceding whorl. Aperture nearly twice
height of spire, elongate, narrow posteriorly and broadening anteriorly; outer lip
constricted in the niuddle, with a row of fine denticles along almost the whole
length; columella with four parallel plaits, one bordering the broad anterior canal.

The single specimens from the present bore being somewhat freakish, com-
plete description of this species is deferred.

Superfam. TOXOGLOSSA
Fam, TURRIDAE
Genus BatHytoma Harris and Burrows 1891
Bathytoma adelaidensis sp. nov.
(PI. v, fig. 17)

Shell of moderate size, broadly fusiform, solid, turreted. Protoconch of
two fairly large, flatly globose, smooth whor!s; adult whorls six, sculptured with
two strong spiral cords close together on the shoulder; above the cords fine spiral
ribs crossed by numerous, obliquely curved axial threads; below the cords one
or two fine spiral ribs increasing in number on each whorl. On the body whorl,
strongly costate from shoulder to base, about 10 prominent ribs approximately
equal to the interspaces which bear from one to four fine spiral lirae. Spirals
crossed by numerous fine growth lines showing a conspicuous sinus. Whorls
carinale at the shoulder, concave above and below: suture lincar. Aperture

oblique, clongate-pyriform, fairly narrow; outer lip slightly broken, with a sinus
at the shoulder, canal short and slightly flexuous; columella somewhat oblique
and concave; inner lip thin, smooth, reflected over columella, Height, 20 mm.;
diameter, 8-5 mm.

Observations—Three specimens occur, apparently of the same species, with
a narrower spire angle, the relative dimensions being 21 x 8 mm, The spiral
sculpture is less prominent but otherwise resembles that of B. adelaidensis which
is variable.

Genus Ingutsiror Hedley 1918
Inquisitor detritus sp. nov.
(Pl. v, fig. 18)

Shell small, narrowly fusiform. Protoconch of two somewhat flattened,
convex, smooth turns; adult whorls six, slightly angled just above the middle of
each whorl; suture impressed. Axial sculpture of about 11 prominent narrow
costae to each whorl, extending from just above the angulation to the suture
below, most prominent at the angle; spiral sculpture of one prominent rib inme-
diately below the suture, followed by numerous, very fine, inconspicuous, crowded
lirae to the angle, thery by about five strong striae, crossing the axial ribs and the
interspaces; on the body whorl the striae continue from the periphery to the base,
about 16 in number. Aperture oblique, elongate, fairly narrow; outer hp broken
in the holotype but obviously carrying a prominent sinus above the periphery ;
columella straight above, turned to the left below; inner lip smooth; canal almost
straight, obliquely turmed to the left. Leight, 12 mm.; diameter, 3-8 mm.

Observations—This fossil species fairly closely resembles the Recent
I, flindersianus Hedley, a larger shell lacking the rib beneath the suture. It
appears to be not unconmmon in the Kalinman, part, though not all, of the examples
identified with the New Zealand J. wanganuiensis (Hutton), belonging to this
species. Adelaidean specimens are certainly not wanganuiensis.

Genus AustropriLita Iledley 1918
Austrodrillia trucidata sp. nov.
(PI. v, fig. 20)

Shell small, turreted, spire elongate. Protoconch smooth, of two flatly
globose turns; adult whorls seven, gradually increasing, angulate at the middle.
Sculpture of oblique axial costae, 12 on the penultimate whorl, sharp and promi-
nent on the angle of the whorl and extending nearly to the suture below, absent
above the angle, the post-angular area being more or less sharply excavate;
numerous fine axial threads of growth; spiral sculpture absent except for about
eight fine lines at the base. Aperture elongate-pyriform, about two-thirds height
of spire, with a deep narrow sinus near the junction with the penultimate whorl ;
outer lip broken but fairly thick; columella straight above, slightly turned at the
canal; inner lip callused over the columella and thickened into a tooth-like promi-
nence near the sinus. Height, 15 mm.; diameter, 5 mm.; height of aperture and
canal, 6 mm.

Austrodrillia decemcostata sp. nov.
(Pl. v, fig. 19)

Shell small, elongate-fusiform, moderately thick. Protoconch of one-and-a-
half globose, smooth turns; adult whorls five, angulate at the middle in the early
whorls, less so in the later. Sculpture of 10 axial costae on each whorl, more
prominent in the middle but extending to the suture in each direction; whorls
otherwise smooth except for very faint axial growth striae and six short spiral
lirae adjacent to the canal in the body whorl. Suture impressed. Aperture
oblique, fairly open; outer lip with a prominent sinus above and inflected below ;
columella almost vertical; anterior canal short, with a broad notch; inner lip
smooth and slightly callused; callus near the sinus developed into a slight tubercle.
Height, 7'2 mm.; diameter, 2°2 mm.; height of aperture, 2-2 mm. :

Observations—A small species, very like A. trucidata,; size distinct and costae
extend front suture to suture, instead of being cut off above as in the former
species.

Genus Mappingia nov.

Shell very small, clongate-subtusiform, near Guraleus in general appearance ;
apex toulti-spiral; whorls convex, axially costate, spirally lirate; aperture pyri-
form, columella smooth; outer lip with a very shallow sinus, somewhat thickened
and conspicuously dentate within. Genotype Afappurgia aculispira sp. nov.

Mappingia acutispira sp. nov.
(PL. v, fig. 21)

Shell very small, subfusiform, spire elongate. Proteconch of three elevated,
convex, smooth turns; adult whorls four. convex, constricted at the suture which
is irregular and impressed. Sculpture strong, of prominent, oblique slightly
curved, plicate axial ribs, eight on the penultimate whorl, extending from suture
to suture on the spire whorls and on the body whorl weakening from the periphery
to the base where they disappear; axial sculpture crossed by fine, spiral lrae
extending over the whole of the whorl including the base of the body whorl.
Aperture narrow, clongate-pyriform; outer lip with a faint sinus at the suture;
lip inflected below and conspicuously dentate within-—about 10 small denticles
altogether ; columella almost vertical above, turned to the left and retroflect below ;
canal fairly long, narrow, deep, and slightly recurved; inner lip smooth. Height,
5°5 mm.; diameter, 2 nun.

Genus Errema IIedley 1918
Etrema peramoena sp. nov.
(PL v, fig. 23)

Shell very small, fusiform, with sharply carinate whorls. Protoconch of two
large, erect. globose, smooth turns; adult whorls three, carinate at the middle.
Above the carina sculpture of about six very fine spiral lirae crossed by curved,
oblique axials, very fine but widely separated; spirals about three times as close
as axials; on and below the carina sculpture of two fine spiral costae crossed by
oblique axials producing a cancellation with sharp nodules at the intersections.
Body whorl about equal to the spire, with coarse sculpture of the anterior half of
each whorl continued to the base, the spirals becomming more numerous and
crowded on the canal area, the axials growing fainter and disappearing. Aperture
elongate-pyriform with a deep subquadrate sinus above the carina; outer lip
slightly expanded below the carina, smooth within except for roughening by the
spiral ribs; columella straight above, turned to the left below; canal very slightly
curved, Height, 4-1 mm. diameter, 2+1 mm.

Genus GuraLeus Hedley 1918
Guraleus subnitidus sp. nov.
(PL. v, fig. 22)

Shell very small, fusiform, spire gradate. Protoconch clevated, of three
smooth, convex, flattened turns, the first very small; adult whorls four, roundly
angulate just above the middle, deeply constricted at the suture; suture irregular,
impressed. Axial sculpture of strong costae—1l0 on the penultimate whorl—
strongest and most prominent at the angle; below the angle slightly oblique, in
the narrow area above curved in the manner of the apertural sinus; costae weaken-
ing towards the sutures, fading out towards the base of the body whorl; spiral
sculpture of numerous fine lirae (less strongly developed in the holotype than in
most specimens, which vary considerably in the number and prominence of the
spiral lirae); lirae stronger on the base in the holotype, about 12 in number.
Aperture fairly narrow, sides subparallel, with a bluntly-rounded sinus below the

100

suture, constricted below to a short, open, slightly recurved canal; outer lip with
sinus above, inflected below ; columella slightly oblique, straight. Height, 4°8 mm. ;

diameter, 1:8 mm.
List or SPECIES
(GASTROPODA
*Haliatis nacvosoides McCoy 1876; Tugalt cicatricosa Adams 1851, imfortimata, sp. nev. ;
Emarginia candida Adams 1851, tdelicatissima Chap. & Gab. 1923, *dennanti Chap. and
Gab. 1923; *Sophismalepas nigrita (Sow. 1834); Clanculus quadricingulatus, eucarinatus,
Phasianotrochus laxegemmatus, subsimpler, Calthalotia nilidisstuma, fictilis, Lactifautor
obliquicancellatis, spinicartnatus, crebrinodidosus, *bicarinatus spp. nov.; Laettfauter spp.
indet.: Astele fanaticum, *Pulehrastele planiconicum, ttberculatum, Ethminoha perglobosa
spp. nov.; *Soluriella strigata (T. Woods 1878) ; *Teinostoma depressula Chap. & Gab.
1914; Partubiola depressispira, varilirata, *Herpetopoma pliocenica spp. nov.; Gera sp.;
*Liotclla capitaia Hedley 1907; Liotella sp.; *Liotina lamellosa (T. Woods 1876) ; *Dol-
crossea labiata (T. Woods 1876), cf. Lurbe sp. (operculum), cf. Astraca sp.; *Astraea
(Bellastraca) aster (T. Woods 1878) ; *Phasianella denntanti Cresp, 1925; Phastanclla sp.
(opercula) ; Phenacolepas tela sp. nov.; *Cocculina praccompressa Chap. & Gab. 1923;
Keournella denotata sp. nov.; Haurakia cf. novarensis (Frauend. 1867); *et. demessa.
Tate & May 1900; Merclina cf. suprasculpta May 1915; */Epigrus chrysalidus (Chap. and
Gab, 1914), *evlindracens (T. Woods 1878) ; *Estea cf. bicolor (Petterd 1884); Rissoina
clegantila Angas 1880, ntvea Adams 1851; *Purritella (Gasameda) acricula adelaidensis
C. & W. 1935; subacrienla C. & W. 1935, * (Maoricolpus) murrayana subrudis C. & W.
1935, sp. aff. platyspira T. Woods 1878, (Ctenocolpus) trilix C. & W. 1935; *2ylospira
coronata marwicki (Finlay 1931); Siliquaria australis Q. & G, 1934; *Neodiastoma provist
(Tate 1893); *Zeacumantus diemenensis (Q. & G. 1835): Clypeomorus bivaricatus,
multiliralus spp. nov.; Cacoscliana ci. yranaria (Kiener 1842); tAterocerithiwm can-
catenatum Tate 1893, cf. Alarocerithinim sp.3 Adelaccrithiuin merultum sp, nov.; cf.
Hypotrachus penctricinctis C. 1932, cf. Hypotrochus monachits (Crosse and Fischer
1864), cf. Hvpotrochus sp. indet.; Obtertio liratus sp. nov.; Sentivertagus capillatus Tate
1893; Terebralia fallax sp. nov., adelaidensis Tow. & C, 1936, cf. Cerilhiopsis sp.;
{Lrichotropis acerescens Tate 1890; Cerithiopsis perelongatus sp, Nov. 5 *Cerithiella trigem-
miata Chap. & Cresp. 1928; Manulone arrugosa, lirasuturalis spp. nov.; Seila (Noltoscila)
crocca Angas 1871; {Triphora spp.; Mereldia incommoda sp. nov.; *Architectonica wan-
nonensis (T. Woods 1878); Epitoninar ct. interstrialume (Tate 1890); *Eglisia triplicate
(Tate 1890), sp. indet.; *Odestomia ef. deplera Tate & May 1900; Syrnola bifasctata
T. Woods 1875, * tasmanica T. Woods 1876, *tincta Angas 1871, infrasulcata Tate 1898,
acrisecla sp. nov., Syrnola sp.; *Turbonalla radicans Chap. & Cresp, 1928, subfusca sp. nov.,
* Hiraecostata LT. Woods 1877, ef. mariae T. Woods 1876, *cf. radicans Chap. & Cresp.
1928, tixcostata sp. nov. (2?) Turbonilla sp.; *Eulima longiconica, miinliconica spp. Nov,,
sp.; *Niso psila T. Woods 1879; Sabia conica (Schum. 1817); ¢Capulus circinatus Tate
1803; +Crepidula hatusworthi Johnston 1885, * dubitabilis Tate 1893, * wunguiformis Lam.
1822; *Sigapatella crassa (Tate 1893) ; Cheilea phocenica sp. nov. } *Polinices baltcatellus
(Tate 1893), *substolidus (Tate 1893), *subvarians (Tate 1893), ** (2) huttent von
Ihering 1907; *Sigareiotrema subinfundibula (Tate 1893); *Natica hamiltonensis Tate
1893, “Natica” sp. opercula, cf. Ampullina sp; Cypraca sp. indet.; *Nototrivia sp.; Ella-
trivia wirrata sp. nov.: +Proterato australis (Tate 1890); *Hypocassis lextilis (Tate
1882) ; **Semicassis transcuna Tate 1889, **radiata Tate 1889; (2) Cymatinne sp.
**Anstrotrilon armatus (Tate 1887), teeoodsi (Late 1879); Cymaticlla adclaidensis
sp. nov.; Colubraria sp.; Widniigra crassiplicata, Murex peramangus spp. nov., RAT re
hiconicus Tate 1887, spp. indet.; +Pyphis lacintatus Tate 1887, cf. Pusiius sp. indet.;
+Fusinus dictyotis (Tate 1887): Zenitrella menkeana (Reeve 1858), Hucoluensis (Reeve
1859), *cf. tayloriana (Reeve 1859), wuscula sp. nov.; Ademitretia insolentior sp. nov.3
cf. Zufra sp.; Cominella sp. indet.; *Nassarius jatci (CT. Woods 1878) ; *Oltella nympha-
lis (Tate 1889) ; **Baryspira pscudaustralis (Tate 1889), *tater (Marwk. 1924); Anstro-
autra schomburgki (Angas 1878), anguslicostata sp. Nov, scalariformis (T. Woods 1876),
sp.; Mitra rhodia (?) Reeve 1845, glabra Swain, 1821, fodinalis Tate 1899; +Austroharpa
sulcosa (Tate 1889); Tudicla sinotecla sp. Nov.; et Aulica tabulata ‘(Tate 1889) ;
**) oluta wicifera Tate 1889. *ellipsoidea Tate 1889; +Fulgoraria ancilloides (Tate 1889) ;
*Qamaruia tater (Cossu. 1889); Cancellaria spp. indet, ; +Marginella kitsont Chap. 1922;
* coenlworlhi.T. Woods 1877, * globiformis Chap. & Cresp. 1928, * muscarioides Tate 1878,
tasmanica T. Woods 1876, *kalimnae Chap. & Cresp. 1933, sp. nov., wigan sp. nov., Spp.
indet.: (?) Asthenotoma subtilinea Hedley 1918; *FRilodrilfia dilectoides Chap. & Gab.
1916, cf. Milodrillia sp,; Bathytoma sp.; adelaidensts sp. nov. ; *Zuqguisitor detritus ; *Austro—

* Species (mot necessarily subspecies) occurring in Kalinman or Lower Pliocene,
+ Species previously recorded only from Barwonian.
** Species uccurring among ‘Murray Desert’? fossils.

101

drillia decemcostata, *trucidata; Mappingia acultspira; Etrema peranioena spp. nov.;
+Etrema praespurca Chap. & Cresp, 1928; *Guraleus cf. fasmanicus (T. Woods 1876),
* subnitidus sp. nov, sp.; *Conus hamiltonensts Tate 1890; **Terebra subspectabilis Tate
1889, ** angulosa Tate 1889, + additeides T. Woods 1877, sp.; tActeon scrobiculatus
T. Woods 1877, cf. Actcon sp.; *Sentiacicon nucroplocus Cossn. 1897; *Retusa longispira
(Cossn. 1897), *apiculata Tate 1879; *olvulella rostrata (A. Adams 1850); *Cylichnella
cuncopsis (Cossn. 1897), *cf. angustata (Tate & Cossn, 1897) ; *Scaphander tatei Cossn.
1897; *Roxanta bullaeformts Cossn. 1897.

SCAPHOPODA ; ; ;
Dentalaun (Paradentalinm) howchini Cott. & Ludb, 1938, * (Fissidentalium) bifrons Tate
1887; tCadulus mucronatus Tate 1887, * acaminatus Tate 1887,

VERMES
*Ditrupa cornea wormobetiensis McCoy 1874.

ECHINODERMATA
* (2?) Gontocidaris mortenst Chap. & Cud. 1934.

ARTHROPODA
*Balanus (Chirona) sclandicus Withers 1924, *amphitrite acutus Withers 1924.

Pisces
*Odontaspis contortidens Ag. 1843; Lamna sp.; *Carcharias (Prionodon) aculcatus (Davis
1888) ; *AMyhobatis moorabbinensis Chap, & Prit. 1907.

REFERENCES
| Crapman, F. 1916 Rec. Geol, Surv. Vict., 3, 4
2 CHarman, F. 1914 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 27, (1). (ns.)
3 CirarmMan, F., and Cresvix, lL. 1933) Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 46, (1), fins.)
4 Ciapman, F., and Crespin, 1. 1935 Rep. A.N.Z.A.A.S., Melb. Meeting
5 Cuaprman, I., Crespin, I, and Kupre, R. A. 1928 Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict.,
5, (1)
6 Corron, B. C. 1934 S.A. Nat., 16, (1), 7
7 Corron, B.C. 1935 Journ. Roy. Soc. W. Aust., 21, 153-4
8 Cotton, B. and Goprrry, F. K., 1938 Mal. Soc. S. Aust., 1
9g
0

Cotton, B. C., and Woops, N. II. 1935 Ree. S.A. Mus., 5, (3), 369-387
Corron, B. C., and Lupproox, N. H. 1938 Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust.,
62, (2), 217-228

IL Dennant, J.. and Kirson, A. E. 1903 Ree. Geol. Surv. Viet., 1, (2)

12 Finray, El. J. 1931 Trans. N.Z. Inst., 62, (1), 7-19

13. Vintay, H. J. 1926 Trans. N.Z. Inst. 57

4 Frnvay, H. J., and Marwick, J. 1940 Trans. Roy. Sac. N.Z., 70, (1),
77-135

15 Fryray, H. J., and Marwics, J. 1937 N.Z. Pall. Bull., 15

16 Hare, T. S., and Prirciarp, G. B., 1902 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 14, (1),
n.s.), 75-81

17 eae C. 1922 Rec. Aust. Mus., 13, 213-359

18 Ilowcuin, W. 1935 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 59, 68-102

19 Howcuinx, W. 1936 Ibid., 60, 1-34

20 Howcnin, W., and Parr, W. J. 1938 Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 62, (2),
287-317

21 Lupproox, N, H. 1937 Rep. A.N.Z.A.A.S., 23, Auckland Meeting

22 Marwick, J. 1924 Trans. N.Z. Inst., 55, 545-579

23) Marwick, J. 1923 Rep. A.N.Z.A.A.S., Wellington Meeting.

24 Parr, W. J. 1939 Min. & Geol, Journ. (Melb.), 1, (4), 65-71

25 Stnoreton, F. A. 1937 Rep. A.N.Z.A.A.S., 23, Auckland Meeting

26 Srncteron, F. A. 1932 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 44, (2), 289-308 ~

27 Sincieton, F. A., and Woons, N, H. 1934 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 46,
(2), 207-213

28 Tate, R. 1890 Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 13, (2), 172-180

29 Tate, R. 1887 Jbid., 10, 91-176

lan

102

Tate, R. 1888 J/bid., 11, 116-174

Tare, R. 1890 IJbid., 13, 185-235

Tate, R. 1804 J/bid., 17, 316-345

Tate, R. 1899 Jbid., 23, 102-110

Woops, N. H. 1931 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 55, 147-151

“The New Systematics’ Ed. by Julian Huxley Oxford The Clarendon
Press 1940

EXPLANATION OF PLATES IV AND V

Pate IV

Tugali infortunation sp. nov. Holotype, side and dorsal view, X 5
Clanculus quadricingulatus sp. nov. Holotype, X 33

Clanculus cucarinaius sp. nov. Holotype X 33

Phasianotrochus laxcgematus sp. nov. Holotype X5

Ethminolia perglobosa sp. nov. Holotype X5

Astele fanaticum sp. nov. Holotype X 34

Lactifanior obliquicancellatus sp. nov. Holotype X 3)
Laetifautor spinicarinatus sp. noy. Tlolotype X& 32

Lactifautor crebrinodulosus sp, nov. Holotype X 33

10 Phasianotrochus subsimpler sp. nov. Holotype X5

11 Calthalotia nitidissiina sp. nov. Holotype X 3}

12 Pulchrastele planiconicum sp. nov. Tlolotype X 34

13 Laetifautor bicarinatus sp. nov. Holotype X 32

14 Calthalotia fictilis sp. nov. Tlolotype X53

15) Pulchrastele tuberculatum sp. wov. Holotype X 4

16 Partubiola depressispira sp. nov. Uloletype X 5

17) Partubiola vaviliraia sp. nov. Tlolotype X5

18 Jlerpetopoma pliocenica sp. nov. Holotype X 33

19 Phenacolepas tela sp. nov. Holotype, side and dorsal view, X32
20 Clypeomorus bivaricatus sp. nov. Holotype X5

21 Terebralia fallax sp. nov, Holotype X 2

2 Clypeomorus multiliratus sp. nov. Holotype X 34

23) Adelacerithium meriultum sp. nov. Holotype X 34
24 Obtortio liratus sp. nov. Holotype X5

25 Cerithiopsis perelongatus sp. noy. Holotype X5
26 Maanlona arrugosa sp. nov. Helotype X5

27 Manulona Hrasuturalis sp. nov. Holotype X4

DONA Up whre

Piatt V
1 Kaurnella denotata sp. nov. Welotyp: X6
2 Swrnola acrisecla sp. nov. Ilolotype X 6
3 Mereldia inconunoda sp. nov, Holotype X 4
4 Eulima longiconica sp. nov. Holotype X 4
5 Eulima minuticonica sp. nov. Holotype X 54
6 Lurbonilla viecostata sp. noy. Holotype X4
7 Turbonilla subfusca sp. roy. Holotype X4
8 Caheilea adelaidensis sp. nov. Holotype, exterior view, X 4
9 Cheilew adelaidensis sp. nov. Paratype, interior view, 4

10 Cymatiella adelaidensis sp. nov. Holotype X 23

11. Ademitrella insolentior sp. nov. Holotype X 4

120 Zemitrella muscula sp. nov. Uolotype X 6

13. Austronitra angusticostata sp. nov. Holotype X 4
14 Pudicla sinolecta sp. nov. Holotype X 2

15 Marginella moana sp. nov. Holotype K4

16 Ellatrivia wirrata sp. nov. Tlolotype X 3

17. Bathytoma adclaidensis sp. nov. Holotype X 2

18 Jnquisitor detritus sp. nov. Holotype X 2)

19 Austrodrilia decemcostata sp. nov. Holotype X 34
20 Austrodrillia trucidata sp. nov. Holotype X 23

21 Mappingia acutispira sp. nov. Holotype X7

22 Guraleus subnitidus sp. nov. Holotype X6

23 Etrema peramocena sp. nov. Holotype X6

24 Murex peramangus sp. nov. Tolotype c. nat. size
25 Widningia crassiplicata sp. nov. Holotype c. nat. size

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1941 Vol. 65, Plate IV

Wo?

Vol. 65, Plate V

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1941

NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF
SOUTH-EAST SOUTH AUSTRALIA
WITH REFERENCE TO LATE CLIMATIC HISTORY

By R. L. CROCKER

Summary

The chief physiographic feature of the South-East generally is the unique arrangement of sand dune
ranges parallel to the existing coastline. These ranges are frequently indurated. They are rarely more
than 100 feet above the general level and between them are series of flats or plains. The ranges are
generally recognized (11, 2, 5) as representing old coastal dunes, or dune remnants, connected with
successive stages in the retreat of the sea in late Pleistocene or Recent geological times. These
superimposed ranges have impeded the natural drainage to the sea and have preserved a topography
of extreme immaturity.

103

NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF
SOUTH-EAST SOUTH AUSTRALIA
WITH REFERENCE TO LATE CLIMATIC HISTORY

By R. L. Crocker
{Read 8 May, 1941}

The chief physiographic feature of the South-East generally is the unique
arrangement of sand dune ranges parallel to the existing coastline. These ranges
are frequently indurated. They are rarely more than 100 feet above the general
level and between them are series of flats or'plains. The ranges are generally recog-
nised (11, 2, 5) as representing old coastal dunes, or dune remnants, connected
with successive stages in the retreat of the sea in late Pleistocene or Recent
geological times. These superimposed ranges have impeded the natural drainage
to the sea and have preserved a topography of extreme inunaturity:

Fenner (2) considers that the Naracoorte Range represents an old fault scarp
and not a sand dune ridge. According to Howchin (5): “Jn the Mosquito Creek
near Struan there ig... . a beach at the foot of the limestone ridge. This old
heach is now 200 fest above present sca level, and about 50 miles from the coast.”
The Naracoorte Range may represent a fault line, but, if so, there are sand dunes
and indurated dunes superimposed upon it. The important thing is that the
country to the cast of this range is much higher. Its physiography is now modiled
but it was the old land surface prior to the positive earth movements, of late
Pleistocene and Recent times, which resulted in the retreat of the sea (4). The
major physiographic features of the Lower South-East are illustrated in fig. 1.
The figures represent heights above sca level (normal spring tides) at some
selected centres, Proceeding across sand range and inter-range flat, [rom the coast
to the most inward range, the Naracoorte Range, it is possible io retrace the suc-
cessive steps in the recession of the sea. ‘he plains are underlain hy flat-bedded
Miocene marine limestones, but at least in part these are overlain by more recent
calcareous material and recent deposits of sand and clay. This is especially
so in the flat heath areas so characteristic of the Hundred of Coles and north-
wards.

The sand dune ranges reach their maximum developmeru in the Mount Burr
Range, but the geological features are here further complicated by the existence
of numerous small and isolated basaltic, ash and tuff hills. Mount Lyon, Mount
Burr, Mount Edward, Mount Watch, Mount Lookout, Mount Muir, Mount Muir-
head, Mount Grahame, the Bluff, Mount MacIntyre, etc., all have volcanic
affinities, and are capped with cither basalt, or tuff and ash. This volcanic
capping is frequently of very limited extent and in some cases is liniited to a few
square chains—at Mount |.ookout it is much less. These are generally considered
to be the same as, and probably contemporaneous with, volcanic activity in the
Mount Gambier district, which Fenner (1) considers very recent or “prehistoric.”
From new evidence, both of a geological and pedological nature, it seems certain
that the western volcanic activity of the Mount Burr Kange preceded that of
Mount Gambier and Mount Schank. But before detailing this evidence it will be
necessary to deal more fully with the dune range remnants.

The Dune Range Remnants—The old dunes have been preserved in two
forms—firstly, as consolidated dunes, and secondly as unconsolidated siliceous
sands. The Woakwine Range is a “consolidated dune” range almost entircly free

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (1), 25 July 1941

104

from siliceous sands, and the ranges extending easterly to the Naracoorte Range
include both siliceous and consolidated dunes.

jt is a well-known fact that the present-day dunes of our southern coast are
of a predominantly calcareous nature, although quartz sand frequently forms a
considerable part. At Robe (Thomas, 8) quartz sand forms some 25% of most
of the aeolian sand soils. These calcareous dunes are well known in South Aus-
tralia because of “coastiness” in sheep associated with them in the South-East
and on Kangaroo Island.

eKtUANGaeoe

eo » &

SKETCH MAP SHOWING

CHIEF PHYSIOGRAPHIC FEATURES
OF SOUTH EAST OF S.A.

Fig. 1

The problem of why the sands of the dune ranges are so siliceous, and how
other dunes have become indurated, has always been a puzzling one. It is un-
reasonable to suggest that the beach ridges during the Pleistocene clevations were
not calcareous, as today, and a simple explanation is now offered on pedological
evidence. It is supposed that leaching of former calcareous dunes led to a com-
plete removal of the calcium carbonate and other more soluble salts from the

105

upper horizons, leaving them predominantly siliceous, leaching, however, was
not complete, and the calcium carbonate was deposited in definite horizons lower
down. Pedologists have established conditions of moderate to low rainfall (semi-
aridity) for development of lime pans in soils, and it is necessary to presuppose
these conditions. ‘This period of lime pan formation was probably concerned
with the onset of a period of great aridity that was to follow it. This arid period
must have developed very rapidly in its final stages and have been very severe,
for vegetation was not able to exploit the new environment and maintain soil
stability. This loss of stability resulted in a general aeolian re-sorting of the upper
leached layers with a consequent exposure of the zone of lime accumulation—the
old B (illuvial) horizon of the soil. The re-sorted upper horizons today form the
siliceous sands of the South-East, and the old zone of calcium carbonate deposition
is preserved in the consolidated dunes.

In the Woakwine Range (see fig. 1), where the consolidated dunes are
most exposed and where practically all the siliceous sands have been removed,
the sandy limestone varies in thickness between one foot and several feet and is
underlain by a highly caleareous sand with abundant fine shell fragments, This
material is practically identical with that in the present-day coastal dunes. Similar
calcareous sand can be seen underlying the limestone mantle in the consolidated
dunes further inland, eg., there is a good exposure in a road cutting in West
Avenue Range, near Bull Island. No doubt the method of “consolidation” has
been similar.

Evidence for a particularly arid period in late Pleistocene or Recent times can he
found in other parts of the State. On south Kangaroo Island unconsolidated cal-
careous coastal dunes, in composition very like those of the South-East (Thomas,
8), overlic an old consolidated dune formation (fig. 2). The upper ieached
horizons have been completely removed during this arid cycle and are represented
today in the grey and light grey sands which oceur (particularly in valleys and
on slopes) in the lateritic areas, and the grey-white siliceous sands in the region
of Mount Stockdale and Mount Taylor. The more or less parallel sandrises of
the Murray Mallee, with their east-west trend and the sandridges of the north-
west of South Australia, must also have been built up during a late period of great
desiccation and wind erosion on a grand scale. Whitehouse (10) considers that
there has been an arid period in the late Pleistocene in Queensland and that since
then rainfall increased. although it may possibly be declining now. He suggests
that the large dune ridge formations of the Simpson Desert were built up during
this aridity. Hills (4) believes that the rainfall decreased after the Pleistocene
in Victoria, but that during Recent times there have been relatively wetter and
drier periods. That the climate in South Australia has become wetter since the
arid period is demonstrated by the fact that the then unstable siliceous sands of
the South-East are now fixed by vegetation—indeed, are supporting a dry sclero-
phyll forest. The sandrises of the Mallee, too, are stabilised by whipstick mallee
and porcupine grass, and in the North-West the ridges are largely fixed by Alcacia
finophulla (mulga) and Casuarina lepidophloia (black oak).

Hills (3) considers that the Pleistocene period exhibits in Victoria a succes-
sion of dune-building periods with intervening periods of sand stability, and
suggests that the period of dune building may be correlated with ice-cap forma-
tion (after Sayles). Considering the present-day dunes along our southern coast,
and particularly the large area occupied by them on south Kangaroo Island, it
does not seem necessary to postulate conditions very different from today to
explain the building up of coastal dunes.

It has been recognised (Hills) that, could the age of the consolidated dunes
be determined, a period of great stratigraphical significance in deciding the age
of many of the Cainozoic volcanic rocks of Southern Australia would be fixed,
Tt seems evident that pedologists, physiographers and geologists must take increas-

106

ing cognisance of late geological climatic changes, Our sandridge deserts, for
example, are almost certainly connected with the last great arid cycle rather than
with the present-day climate. This probably explains the very imperfect correla-
tion obtained by Prescott (6) im attempting to relate them to the present climate
by means of precipitation/saturation deficit-ratio zones.

While not yet prepared to place the last arid period as late Pleistocene or Recent,
it is suggested that the South-East of South Australia may prove a critical area
for its study. If one accepts Tindale’s (9) correlation of coastal terraces in
U.S.A. and the South-East the Woakwine Range would be very late Pleistocene,
and the arid period Recent. Without fixing this horizon definitely, use can already
be made of it in establishing some of the stratigraphical sequence in this region.

Volcanic Activity in South-East South Australia—Owing to the limited
extent and greater complexity of the volcanic rocks of the Mount Burr Range
area they have been little studied geologically, but the evidence for their being
older than the Mount Gambier and Mount Schank activity can be detailed briefly.

Firstly, in the Mount Burr region the yellow and grey siliceous sands are super-
imposed upon the general volcanic framework, which means that volcanic activity
must have been of the pre-arid period. At Mount Gambier, on the other hand,
gently undulating siliceous sandrises have a capping of volcanic ash varying in
thickness up to approximately one-and-a-half feet and weathering to a rich volcanic

— Bay

an HAWKES
NEST.

OF SOUTHERN KANGARGG ISLAND

“ee Ganthoaume

Fig, 2

loam, The Mount Gambier activity, therefore, has been of the post-arid period.
Secondly, Howchin (5) draws attention to a raised sea beach on the sides of
Mount Grahame which, he says, “shows that the sea must have encroached upon
the locality, and again receded since the volcanoes were in cruption.” Other
strong evidence, too, (a) water-worn basaltic grit and pebbles in a bore put down
near the Mount Burr Forest Homestead (and noted by the author), and (b) the
occurrence of a shell bed (very like that on Mount Grahame) above volcanic tuff,
in a deep observation pit of the Forest Research Station, suggests inundation.
‘There is no evidence (1) of a similar inundation in the Mount Gambier district.
It may be, of course, that the raised beach at Mount Grahame does not mean
an incursion of the sea, but rather that this region was an island during the
Pleistocene retreat. “his fact is rather supported in that on the slope of Mount
Grahame, and to Mount Muirhead and beyond, there are frequent outcrops of
consolidated dune limestone at two separate horizons, and suggestive of successive
stages in the retreat of the sea, Thirdly, the volcanic soils of the Mount Burr
region are more acid in reaction, indicative of longer leaching, and range as low
as pH 5-2 in samples collected by Stephens. In the Mount Gambier region,
according to Prescott and Piper (7), the reaction range is from pH 6:4 to pH 8-2.

©) Stephens, C. G., private communication,

107

‘The volcanic activity of the Mount Burr region is, therefore, older than that
at Mount Gambier, which seems to have been placed accurately by Fenner as
“prehistoric.” It is now also possible to limit within some degree the period of
the retreat of the sea. For example, prior to the arid period, the coastline of the
South-East must have been very similar in outline to the coast today, as con-
solidated dunes occur in the succession of all the ranges from the Naracoorte
Range to the Woakwine Range. Ii this arid period can be chronologically fixed
a very great step forward in interpretation, of late climatic history, and its effect
on present land form and pedogenics, will be made,

REFERENCES
(1) Fenner, C. A. 1921 Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 45, 169
(2) Fenner, C. A. 1930 JLbid., 54, 1
(3) Hurrs, E. S. 1939 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 51, (1), 112
(4) Tims, E. S. 1939 Ibid., 51, (2), 297
(5) Howenin, W. 1929 “Geology of South Australia,’ Adelaide
(6) Prescort, J. A. 1936 Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. 5, Aust., 60, 93
(7) Prescotr, J. A., and Piper, C.S., 1929 [bid., 53, 196
(8) Tuomas, R. G. 1938 CSIR. Bull, No. 113
(9) Tinpare, N. B. 1933 Trans. and Prac. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 57, 130
(10) Wuirenouse, F. W. 1940 “Studies in the Late Geological History of
Queensland,” Univ. of Queensland
(11) Woops, J. 1862 “Geology of South Australia”

WORORA KINSHIP GESTURES

By J. B. LOVE

Summary

The Worora recognise sixteen degrees of kinship, for which there are sixteen terms, as listed below.
These sixteen degrees are included in ten gestures. There are also separate words for the
relationship of elder and younger brother and sister, but the elder or younger relationship does not
alter the status of the individual with regard to other members of the tribe, and there is no separate
gesture to denote elder or younger. In general the terms for brother and sister in any degree are the
same, with the masculine and feminine form of the noun in each case. The exceptions to this rule
are: (1) mother and mother's brother; (2) wife and wife's brother; also wife's-father, wife's-brother's-
son, and all the male line of the wife's horde; (3) father and father's sister. In this last instance,
however, it is to be noted that, though father's-sister is in adult speech a different term from father
(being the same as man's daughter), in baby talk the father and father's-sister are denoted by the
masculine and feminine forms of the same term. viz., [djidai] and [djidjinjaj. Not counting the
separate terms for elder and younger brother and sister, nor masculine and feminine forms as
separate terms. the sixteen kinship terms of the Worora are as follows

108
WORORA KINSHIP GESTURES
By J. R. B. Love
[Read 12 June 1941]
Priate VI

The Worora recognise sixteen degrees of kinship, for which there are sixteen
terms, as listed below. These sixteen degrees are included in ten gestures. There
are also separate words for the relationship of elder and younger brother and
sister, but the elder or younger relationship does not alter the status of the indi-
vidual with regard to other members of the tribe, and there is no separate gesture
to denote clder or younger. In general the terms for brother and sister in any
degree are the same, with the masculine and feminine form of the noun in each
case. The exceptions to this rule are: (1) mother and mother’s brother; (2) wife
and wife’s brother; also wife’s-father, wife’s-brother’s-son, and all the male line
of the wife’s horde; (3) father and father’s sister. In this last instance, how-
ever, it is to be noted that, though father’s-sister ig in aduit speech a different term
from father (being the same as man’s daughter), in baby talk the father and
father’s-sister are denoted by the masculine and feminine forms of the same term,
vis., [djidai] and [djidjinja]. Not counting the separate terms for elder and
younger brother and sister, nor masculine and femisine forms as separate terms,
the sixteen kinship terms of the Worora are as follows:

1 Vather, for which the Worora word is [irai]. In reciprocal speech the father
and son will address one another as [irai], but in speaking of one another
the sou will speak of his father as [irai], while the father will speak of
his son as [kayo:lu| (or some other grammatical form of that word,
which is not a noun, but a verb, meaning I-beget-him).

2 Man’s-son, [igko:lu], which means \Whom-he-begets.

3 Man’s-daughter, [pamaranja]. Father’s sister is also denoted by this term
[pamaranja].

4 Mother [karanja].

5 Woman’s-son and woman’s-daughter, [ibai] and [ibanja].

6 Mother’s-brother, [kakai]. Man’s-sister’s-child, [ibai] and [ibanja].

7 Brother and sister, [yawaia| and [yawanja]. Elder-brother is [abia]. elder-

sister is [abi:nja], younger-brother is ‘[iwomale], younger-sister is
| njimbomalinja ].

8 Mother’s-mother, [kadjanja]. Mother’s-mother’s-brother is [kadjaia].

9 Woman’s-daughter’s-son and woman’s-daughter’s-daughter, [buda] and
| budinja].

10 Husband, [kulai]. Husband’s-sister is [kulanja].

11 Wife, [manganja].

12 Wife’s-brother, also wife’s-father, and all males in wife’s line, [waia].

13. Wife’s-mother, i.e., man’s mother-in-law, [kurumanja]. Man’s mother-in-
law’s-brother is [kurum].

14. Woman’s-daughter’s-husband, i.¢., woman’s son-in-law, [wolbaia]. Woman’s
daughter’s-husband’s-sister is [wolbanja].

15 Husband’s-mother, i.¢., woman’s-mother-in-law, [yalindjanja]. Husband’s-
mother’s-brother is [nalindjaia]. Woman’s-son’s-wife, i.e., woman's
daughter-in-law is the same term as husband’s mother, vs., [nalind-
janja] ; also woman’s-son’s-wife’s-brother is [yalindjaia].

16 Mother’s-father, [tjamaia]. Mother’s-father’s-sister is [tjamanja]; but
man’s-daughter’s-child is called by the same tern: as the daughter uses,
viz., [ibai] or [ibanja], the same term that is used by the mother’s
brother.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (1), 25 July 1941

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1941 Vol. 65, Plate VI

109

Father’s-father is classed with elder-brother, and son’s-son is classed with
younger-brother. Husband’s brother is classed with husband, and wife’s-sister
is classed with wife. Father and son address each other reciprocally as [‘irai’’] ;
hence son’s-wife is classed with mother, zis., [“karanja’.] A man addresses his
daughter’s husband by the term the daughter uses, viz., [“kulai,”] husband.

The masculine terminations of the kinship terms may be heard as |-ai| or
[-aia]. Wife’s-brother (etc.) is always heard as [waia|, avoiding the mono-
syllable [wai], which is another word; the longer words 1nore usually are heard
as ending in [-ai.]

Most gestures are used repicrocally to denote either party to degree of kinship,

Terms 1, 2 and 3, the father-child relationship, is shown by bending up the:
arm and touching the shoulder with the hand, See fig. 1.

Term 4, the mother-child relationship; mother holding her breast. (Fig. 2.)

Term 5, the child-mother relationship, is shown by placing one hand belaw
the thigh near the buttock, Tihe son, or daughter, also uses this same gesture to
denote mother’s-brother. See fig. 3. An alternative is for the son or daughter to:
place the clasped hands behind the neck. See fig. 3a.

Term 6, the man’s-sister’s-child relationship, is denated by the mother’s brother
pointing to his belly. (Not figured.)

Term 7, the brother-brother, brother-sister, and sister-stster relationship, is
denoted by placing a hand on the lower leg, either shin or calf, See fig. 4.

Terms 8 and 9, the mother’s-mother and daughter’s-child relationship, is
denoted by touching one knee. See fig. 5,

Terms 10 and 11, the husband-and-wife relationship, is denoted by touching
one hip. See fig. 6. Term 12, wite’s-hrother or father, is included in this gesture.

Terms 13 and 14, the mother-in-law and son-in-law relationship, is denoted
by placing one hand on the shoulder-blade. See fig. 7.

Term 15, the mother-in-law and daughter-in-law relationship, is shown by
touching the spine about the region of the kidneys, See fig, 8. N.B—In this
figure the mother-in-law’s brother, [nalindjaia], is making the gesture.

Term 16, mother’s-father, is shown by placing the hand below the thigh,
near the knee. Sce fig. 9. An alternative is to touch the spine high up, either by
reaching the hand over the shoulder, or by reaching up the back.

The sixteen kinship terms, with their ten gestures, may be summarised as
follows: Father :son : daughter, three terms, one gesture; mother : child :
mother’s-brother, three terms, three gestures; brother : brother sister, one term,
one gesture; maternal-grandmother : grandchild, two ternis, one gesture ; husband :
wife : wife’s-brother, three terms, one gesture; mother-in-law : daughter-in-law,
one term, one gesture; mother-in-law : son-in-law, two terms, one gesture;
mother’s-father, one term, one gesture.

In daily use the gestures accompany the spoken word for the degree of
kinship, In introducing a stranger, the one making the introduction will name
the relationship that exists between hiruself or herself and the stranger, and at the
same time, make the gesture for that relationship. So, also, in answering a
question as to the relationship that exists between a person interrogated, the one
answering will name the relationship and, at the same time, make the gesture,

In reply to a question as to why the gestures are used, or what purpose they
serve, one man said, “For use at a distance.’ This would seem quite a reasonable
answer, as the gesture can be conveyed at a distance, when speech might not be
convenient, The majority of men questioned sintply said, [jun]. [“juy’’] is
the way things have always been from time immemorial. Men have conceived the
spirits of their children in a dream, [“juy”]; the Worora people used these signs.

In addition, a very full set of gestures denotes the atumals, and would seem
to serve the purpose of communicating at a distance. Several of the kinship
gestures are very obvious in their meaning. Others seem, to have been deliberately
devised to complete the set to include the whole kinship system.

ASCAROID NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and PATRICIA M. MAWSON, University, Adelaide

Summary

Much of the material referred to in this paper was collected by the late Dr. T. L. Bancroft at
Eidsvold, Burnett River, Queensland; his daughter, Dr. M. J. Mackerras, from the same locality, and
from the Thompson River at Longreach, Western Queensland; Professor J. B. Cleland from some
localities in New South Wales, South Australia and Western Australia; J. T. Gray, Orroroo, South
Australia; and the late Dr. W. D. Walker at Morgan, Murray River, South Australia. Some of
Krefft's original material was forwarded by the Director of the Australian Museum. Sydney for our
examination. The rest was obtained by the senior author from localities in Queensland, New South
Wales, and South Australia, the material from Tailem Bend having been found in birds collected for
us by Messrs. G. and F. Jaensch and L. Ellis. To all who have assisted us we tender our thanks. The
study of the material was made possible by the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of
Adelaide.

110

ASCAROID NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS
By T. Harvey Jonnston and Patricia M. Mawson, University, Adelaide
[Read 12 June 1941]

Much of the material referred to in this paper was collected by the late
Dr. T. L. Bancroft at Eidsvold, Burnett River, Queensland; his daughter, Dr.
M. J. Mackerras, from the same locality, and from the Thompson River at Long-
reach, Western Queensland; Professor J. B. Cleland from some localities in New
South Wales, South Australia and Western Australia; J. T. Gray, Orroroo, South
Australia; and the late Dr. W. D. Walker at Morgan, Murray River, South Aus-
tralia. Some of Krefft’s original material was forwarded by the Director of the
Australian Museum, Sydney, for our examination, The rest was obtained by
the senior author from localities in Queensland, New South Wales, and South
Australia, the material from Tailem Bend having been found in birds collected
for us by Messrs. G. and F. Jaensch and L. Ellis. To all who have assisted us
we tender our thanks. The study of the material was made possible by the Com-
monwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide.

Most of the species described below belong to Contracaecum. It is regretted
that. in the past, many authors omitted to indicate the ratios of lengths of parts
of the alimentary canal and of the spicules to the total body length. In the older
and even in some of the recent descriptions a wide range of body length but only
one length of spicule is given, so that the actual ratio which appears to us to be of
systematic value is not available for comparison. In describing the new species,
we have stressed what have appeared to us to be the main distinguishing specific
characters—the shape and relative lengths of lips and interlabia, width of the head
relative to the body, the ratios of the oesophagus and of the diverticula of the ali-
inentary canal to the body length, the ratio of the spicules to the body length, the
position of the vulva, and the arrangement of the male caudal papillae. The two
last-mentioned features are similar in several different species, so that they alone
are insufficient for diagnostic purposes.

‘Types of the new species have been deposited in the South Australian
Museum.

List oF PARASITES ARRANGED UNDER THEIR Hosts

PiraLAcrocorax cargo Linn, (var. NOVAE-HOLLANDIAE). Contracaecum spicu-
ligerum Rud. (Lower Hawkesbury R., N.S.W.; Tailem Bend, 5. Aust.).
C, sinulabiatuim n. sp. (Eidsvold, Qld. ).

PHALACROCORAX FUSCESCENS Vieill. C. spiculigerum Rud. (Kangaroo Island).

PEATACROCORAX vaRIUS Gmelin. Contracaecum spiculigerum Rud. (Perth, W.A.).

PHALACROCORAX MELANOLEUCUS Vieill. Contracaecum spiculigerum Rud.
(Hawkesbury R., N.S.W.; Thompson R., Qld.; Adelaide, Orroroo, and
Encounter Bay, S. Aust.). C. siaalabiatum n. sp. (Tailem Bend, 35. Aust.).

PHTALACROCORAX sSULCIROSTRIS Brandt. Contracaecuim spiculigerum Rud.
(Thompson R. and Burnett R., Qld.; Adelaide).

PLOTUS NOVAE-TIOLLANDIAE Gould. Contracaecum sinulabiatum n.sp. (Burnett
R. and Thompson R., Qld.). C. tricuspe (Ged.) ‘(Australian Museum,
Burnett R., Qld.).

PELECANUS CONSPICILLATUS Temm. Contracaecum bancrofti nu. sp. (Burnett R.
and Thompson R., Qld.; Sydney Zoological Gardens, from N.S.W.; Morgan,
S, Aust.). C. clelandin.sp (Perth). Contracaecumt sp., larvae and immature
worms (Perth; Tailem Bend, S. Aust.).

NoropHoyx pacirica Lath. Porrocaccum reticulatum Linst. (Thompson R. and
Eidsvold, Qld.). Contracaecum spiculigerum Rud. and Contracaecum sp.
(Thompson R., Qld.).

Trans. Roy; Soc. S.A,, 65, (1), 25 July 1941

ill

NoTOPHOYX NOVAE-HOLLANDIAE Lath. Contracaecum spreuligerum Rud.
(N.S.W.). Contracaecum sp., iragments and larvae (Tailem Bend, S. Aust.).

NyctTicorAx cCALEDONICUS Gmelin. Contracaecum spiculigerun Rud. (Tailem
Bend, 8. Aust.).

BOTAURUS POECILOPTILUS Wagl. Contracaecum spiculigerum Rud. (Orroroo
S. Aust.).

XENORHYNCUUS asiaticus Lath. Centracaccum sp. larvae (Zoological Gardens,
Adelaide, from Murray R., 5. Aust.).

Ecretta ALBA Less, Porrocaccum reticulatum (Linst.) (Thompson R., Qld.).
Contracaecum sp., larvae (Tailem Bend, S. Aust.).

CHENONETTA JUBATA Lath. Heterakis chenonettae Johnst. (Sydney Zoological
Gardens, from N.S.W.).

ANAS BoscHAS Linn. (pomesTicA Briss.). Contracuecum microcephalum (Rud.)
and Heterakis isolonche Linst. (Lord Howe Island).

ANAS SUPERCILIOSA Gmelin. Contracaecum microcephalum Rud. (N.S.W.).

EupYPTULA MINOR Forst. Contracaecum sp., Jarva (Brighton, S. Aust.).

Awous stoLipus Linn. Contracaecum magnicollare n.sp. (North-West Islet,
Great Barrier Reef, Qld.).

CONTRACAECUM SPICULIGERUM (Rud.)
Fig. 1-2

We have identified this species from Phalacrocorax carbo (Eidsvold, Qld.;
lower Hawkesbury River, N.S.W.; Tailem Bend, S. Aust.); P. sulcirostris
(Adelaide, S. Aust.; Thompson R., Old., coll. Dr. Mackerras) ; P. melanoleucus
(Encounter Bay, S. Aust., coll. Dr. Cleland; Orroroo, S. Aust., coll. J. T. Gray;
Hawkesbury River, N.S.W., coll. Dr, Cleland; Thompson River, Old., coll. Dr.
Mackerras; Adelaide); P. fuscescens (American River, Kangaroo Island);
Notophoyx pacifica (Thompson River, Qld., coll. Dr. Mackerras); N. novae-
hollandiae (N.S.W.); Botaurus poeciloptilus (Orroroo, S. Aust., coll, J. T.
Gray) ; Nyeticorax caledonicus (Tailem Bend, 5. Aust.). Some broken specimens
from Phalacrocorax varius from Perth, W. Aust., are also assigned to this species.

This species was described very briefly by Rudolphi (1809), Schneider, in
1886, gave a longer illustrated account, but omitted measurements except the total
length of the worm. Since then the parasite has been recorded from many
different species of birds from various parts of the world. One of us recorded
it from Phalacrocoraxy sulcirostris (Johnston 1912, 74; 1912 b, 108; 1916, 49)
from Southern Queensland ; and as Ascaris spiculigera ? (1912, 75) from P. carbo
from Sydney. Ascaris sp. of Johnston (1912 b, 108) from P. carbo from N.S.W.
is the same species. ‘I'he presence in Pelecanus conspicillatus {rom Sydney of
parasites, apparently referable to the species, was also mentioned (Johnston,
1912, 74) ; and these nematodes were also quoted as Ascuris spiculigera ? (John-
ston, 1912b, 108), but our re-examination of the material indicates that they
belong to a closely related new species, C. bancrofti, Ascaris spiculigera of John-
ston (1912, 74; 1912b, 108; 1916, 49) from Plotus novae-hollandiae, Purnett
River, Queensland, has been re-examined and is now ideutified as a very closely
allied new species, Contracaccum sinulabiatum, together with C. tricuspe (syn.
Ascaris sp. Krefft, 1873).

C. spiculigeruim appears to us to be one of several very closcly related species
formerly confused under that name. Rudolphi’s type (1809) of Ascaris spicu-
ligera came irom a pelican, Pelecanus onocrotalus, but in 1819 he recorded it from
Pelecanus carbo, P, cristatus, and P. pygmaeus (p. 290), as well as from P. brazili-
ensis and P, aquila (p. 662). Most of the identifications made subsequently have
been based on specimens from cormorants and other birds. The re-examination
of Rudolphi’s type material would be necessary to determine the true C. spiculi-
gerum, The available descriptions are, however, few and incomplete and the
following account based on Australian material is offered.

112

Length varying greatly, even among adult specimens. Males, 14-26 mm.;
females, 16-55 mm. Body tapering in anterior third. Head narrower than suc-
ceeding part of body. Lips as described by Schneider (1866), with characteristic
antero-lateral projections and without lateral cuticular flange. No dentigerous
ridge seen, though figured by Linstow. Interlabia nearly as long as lips, some-
times with bifid tips. Annular striations forming marked “collar” at base of lips.
Ocsophagus 1:4°6-8°8 of body length, generally 1:7. Oesophageal appendix
and intestinal caecum respectively 1:3-5 (usually 1:3°7) and 3:4 of length of
oesophagus. Nerve ring about midway between head and anterior end of caecum;
cervical papillae just behind that level.

Fig 1-2—Contracaccum spiculigerum: two views oi head. Fig. 3-5—Contracaccian
hancrofti: 3 and 4, two views of head; 5, male tail. Fig. 6-8—Contracaecum sinulabiatum:
6 and 7, two views of head; 8, male tail. Fig. 9-10—Contracaccim eleland?: 9, head; 10, male
tail, Fig. 11-12—Contracaecum magnicollare: 11, head; 12 male tail. Fig. 13—Meterakis
chenonettae, ventral view of male tail. Fig. 1 and 2 to same scale; fig. 3 to 12 to same scale.

a, alae; c cloaca; s. spiculc.

Male—Arrangement of caudal papillae exactly as described and figured by
Schneider; in a few specimens the arrangement of the three pairs of lateral post-
anal papillae varied slightly. Spicules usually 1:3°6 to 1:4°2 of body length. In
one collection from Phalacrocorax carbo (Tailem Bend), and in the material from
Notophoy« novac-hollandiae the spicules were as short as 1 :7 body length, but in
the appearance of the head and in the other ratios these specimens agreed with
C. spiculigerunt.

Female—Vulva between a third and a quarter body length from head end.

Contracaecum: bancrofti n. sp.
Fig. 3-5
From Pelecanus conspicillatus from Burnett River, Queensland, type locality
(coll. Dr. Bancroft); Thompson River, Queensland (coll. Dr. Mackerras) ;

113

Morgan, South Australia (coll, Dr. Walker); and from Sydney Zoological Gar-
dens, from New South Wales. Males up to 24 mm. long; females to 30 mm.
Lips with short antero-lateral projections. Interlabia nearly as long as lips; with
bifid ends. Head narrower than body succeeding it; striated cuticular “collar’’
well developed.

Male—Breadth -64 mm.; oesophagus 3:2 mm. long, 1:6 body length; oeso-
phageal appendix 1:5, and intestinal caecum 3:4°8 of oesophageal length, nerve
ring “48 mm. from head in 20 mm. long worm; cervical papillae at same level.
Spicules 2°2-2°8 mm. long, 1:7-9 body length, alate, with blunt tips. Tail -18-
‘2 mm. long, conical. Three pairs double postanal papillae and about twenty-
three pairs preanal papillae, latter arranged in a straight row on cither side of
ventral surface, the first two pairs adanal, and the first ten papillae on each side
larger and closer together than the remainder.

Female—Oesophagus 1:7-10 body length; intestinal caecum 3:3-+7-4°5, and
oesophageal appendix 1:4 of oesophageal length. Tail conical, -34 mm. long.
Vulva at 4:9 body length from head. Eggs subglobular, about 544 by 58 p.

The male tail of this species most closely resembles that of C. micropapillatum
(Stoss.), but the species differs in the length of spicules, size of eggs, and position
of the vulva. C. bancrofti differs from C. spiculigerum in the shape of the lips
(antero-lateral projection not so marked in the former), in the length of the
spicules and in the arrangement of male papillae.

Contracaecum clelandi n. sp.
Fig. 9-10

From Pelecanus conspicillatus from Perth, West Australia, coll, Dr. Cleland.
Males, 27-30 mm. long; females, 32 mm. Tlead much wider than long, interlabia
about three-quarters length of lips; papillae on lips just below level of anterior
ends of interlabia. Body following head much wider than head. Ocsophagus
1:6°1-1:7°5 body length, oesophageal appendix 1:3-5-5, and intestinal caecum
1:1°2-1-3, of oesophageal length. Nerve ring ‘44 mm. from head, just in front
of cervical papillae.

Male—Tail tapering suddenly, -8 mm. long; a pair large postanal caudal
papillae, followed by four pairs, as in fig. 10; over twenty pairs preanal. Spicules
1-3-1-4 mm. long, broadly alate.

Female—Vulva 12 mm. from head, at 1:2°7 body length,

The species is distinguished from C. bancrofti and C. spiculigerum by the
relative breadth of the head, the shortness of the spicules, as well as the number
and arrangement of male caudal papillae.

Contracaecum sinulabiatum n. sp.
Fig. 6-8
Fron a darter, Plotus novae-hollandiae (type host) from Burnett River (coll.
Dr. Bancroft), and Thompson River, Queensland (coll. Dr. Mackerras) ; from
Phalacrocoray carbo from Eidsyold, Queensland (coll. Dr. Bancroft); and
P. melanoleucus, Vailem Bend, South Australia,

Males, 14-16 mm. long; females, 18-20 mm. IJlead about same width as suc-
ceeding body, Each lip with antero-lateral ear-like projections; in addition,
below these, prominent lateral cuticular flanges. Interlabia broad; tip widened
and frequently bifid, reaching between antero-lateral projections and lateral
flanges of adjacent lips. Head about three-quarters as long as wide. Papillae on
hips at level of anterior ends of intcrlabia. Oesophagus 2:08-2:24 mm, long in
male, and 2°36 mm, in female, 1:7-8-6 body length; intestinal caecum 3:4 and
oesophageal appendix 1:2-9-3-7 of oesophageal length. Nerve ring -44--48 mm.
from head, just anterior to cervical papillae.

114

Male—Vail conical, -15 mm. long; spicules 1:8°3-9°5 of body length, with
blunt tips. Between twenty and thirty pairs preanal papillae and seven pairs post-
anal, arranged as in C. spiculigerum.

Female—Tail conical. Vulva at 1:4°4-4°5 body length.

The species differs from C. spiculigerum chiefly in the possession of lateral
flanges on the lips, in the shortness of the spicules, and in the more anterior
position of the vulva.

Contracaecum magnicollare n. sp.
Fig. 11-12

From a noddy, Anous stolidus, from North-West Islet, Capricorn Group,
Great Barrier Reef, Queensland. Four worms present, two young males
8-11-6 mm. long, and two young females 9°7-10°2 mm. long. Head about twice
as wide as long, and rather narrower than succeeding body. Lips with antero-
lateral projections but no lateral flanges. Papillae on lips just below level of tips
of interlabia; latter four-fifths length of lips, Annulated “collar” following lips
well developed, even in young specimens. Oe5sophagus 1:4°8-6°] body length ;
intestinal caecum 3:4°2, and oesophageal appendix 1:3°5 oesophageal length,
Nerve ring *35 mm. from head, just anterior to cervical papillae.

About twenty to twenty-two pairs of preanal papillae in male, the four most
posterior papillae of each side closest together. Six pairs postanal papillae, their
arrangement resembling that in C. smicrocephalum. Vulva 1:2°2-1:2°5 body
length from head. Both females young, ripe eggs not present.

The species resembles C. microcephalum and C, punctatum in the male tail,
but differs from both in length of the spicules.

CoNnTRACAECUM MICROCEPHALUM (Rud. 1809)

This species was taken from the caccum of a domestic duck, Anas bochas,
from Lord Ilowe Island; and from a black duck, Anas superciliosa, from New
South Wales.

Male 18 min., females 18-25 mm. Head half as long as wide, slightly
narrower than succeeding body. Lips with wide earlike antero-lateral projections.
Interlabia bifid in all specimens, three-quarters length of lips; papillae on lips at
level of tips of interlabia. Oesophagus 1:7-7-5 body length; interstinal caccum
1:1-4 aud oesophageal appendix 1:6 oesophageal length. Spicules 1:7 body
length. Vulva a third body length from head.

CONTRACAECUM TRIcUSrE (Gedoelst 1916)

From Plotus novae-hollandiae from the Burnett River (coll. Dr. Bancroft)
and from the Australian Museum (coll. Krefft, also from Burnett River).
Krefft (1873) had recorded it as Ascaris sp. Spicules in our specimens about
1:4:7 body length, instead of 1:3 as given by Gedoelst, and the two pairs of
small papillae figured by that author just posterior to the cloaca are in our single
male specimen merged into one pair of very large papillae. In other respects our
specimens agree closely with those described by Gedoelst.

CONTRACAECUM spp., larvae

(1) From the jabiru, Xenorhynchus asiaticus; length 24 mm., width *8 mm.; no
lips present, larval tooth prominent. Ocsophagus 3:2 mm. long, intestinal
caecum 2°56 mm., oesophageal appendix -56 mm. Tail +24 mim. long.

(2) From the egret, Egretta alba (Tailem Bend, 5. Aust.), Length 8-10 mm. ;
larval tooth and three low lips present; oesophagus -88-1°6 mm_; oesophageal
appendix *4--52 mm.., and intestinal caecum *56-1°12 mm. in length.

(3) Irom Pelecanus conspicillatus (Vailem Bend, 5. Aust.). Length 8-2 mm.,
width -4 mm.; three low lips present. Ocsophagus 1:04 mm.; intestinal
caecum -72 mm., and oesophageal appendix -64 mm. in length, Tail -12 mm.
long.

115

(4) Larval Contracaecum spp. were also obtained from Notophoyx nozae-
hollandiae (Tailem Bend, S. Aust.; and from Ludyptula minor (Brighton,
S. Aust.), latter worms 2 mm, in length.

CONTRACAECUM spp.

Worms and parts of worms unidentifiable specifically were taken from
Pelecanus conspicilatus (Derth, W. Aust., coll, Dr. Cleland) ; Netophoys pacifica
(Thompson River, Queensland, coll. Dr. Mackerras); Notophoyx novae-
hollandiae (Yailem Bend, S. Aust.) and Plotus novac-hollandiae (Australian
Museum, from Queensland).

PoRROCAECUM RETICULATUM (Linst. 1899)

Material consists of two females; one 80 mm. long, from Notephoysx pacifica
from Eidsvold, Queensland (coll. Dr. Bancroft), and the other 65 mm. long, from
the same host species from the Thompson River, Queensland (coll. Dr. Macker-
ras); also a male 35 mm, long from Egretta alba, Thompson River, Queensland.
We find on the male tail six pairs of preanal papillae and ‘three pairs pastanal,
the most anterior of the latter group having (as described by Hsii, 1933) double
nerve endings. Spicules in our male 41 mm. long, gubernaculum +1 mm.

HETERAKIS CHENGNETTAE Johnston 1912
Fig. 13

Several worms belonging to this species were obtained from the caecum of
a wood duck, Chenonetta jubata, from New South Wales (Sydney Zoological
Gardens). A re-examination of the type material shows that a revised descrip-
tion of the male tail is necessary.

Spicules equal, -4--42 mm. long; sucker -8 mm. diameter, posterior border
‘2 mm. in front of cloaca; cloaca *25 mm. from tip of «ail. Alae commencing
just anterior to sucker, extending to within -11 mm. of posterior end of body,
leaving narrow spinc-like tail. Two pairs pedunculated papillae at level of sucker;
two pairs sessile adanal papillae; eight pairs pedunculate papillae in alae,
arranged as in fig. 13.

In other features our specimens agree with the original description (Johnston
1912). The species differs from H. altaica Spaul 1929 in being smaller, in hav-
ing a rather longer oesophagus and relatively shorter spicules, and in the arrange-
ment of papillae on the male tail. It most closely resembles H. papillosa Bloch,
differing chiefly in the shape of the alae and sucker, and in the number of papillae
on the male tail.

HETERAKISISOLONCHE Linstow 1906

Several specimens agreeing closcly with H. isolonche Linst.. as described
and figured by Li (1933), were taken from the caecum of a domestic duck, Anas
boschas, from Lord ITowe Island. Baylis (1939) has recorded this species from
Brisbane, where it was taken from a crested pheasant, Chrysolophus ambherstiac,
an introduced bird.

LITERATURE
sAYLis, H. A. 1934 Parasitol., 26, 129-132
Cram, E. B. 1927 U.S. Nat. Mus., Bull. 140
Jounston, T. H. 1912 Proc. Roy, Soc, Qld., 24, 63-91
Jounsron, 1. H. 1912b Emu, 12, 105-112
Krerrt, G. 1873 Tr. Ent, Soc. N.S.W., 2, (1871), 206-232
Li, H.C. 1933 Chinese Med. Jour., 47, 1,307-1,324
Roupvotpnt, C. 1819 Entozoorum synopsis. Berlin
SCHNEIDER, A. 1866 Monographie der Nematoden, Berlin
Yorke, W., and Mapuestone, P. A. 1826 The nematode parasites of verte-

brates. [London

RESULTS OF THE HARVARD-ADELAIDE UNIVERSITIES
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION, 1938-39
ANALYSIS OF AN AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL'S HOARD
OF KNAPPED FLINT

By NORMAN B. TINDAL and H. V. V. NOONE

Summary

The following is a contribution to the results of the Harvard-Adelaide Universities Anthropological
Expedition of 1938-39, which was made possible by a generous grant from the Carnegie
Corporation of New York.

116

RESULTS OF THE HARVARD-ADELAIDE UNIVERSITIES
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION, 1938-39

ANALYSIS OF AN AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL’S HOARD
OF KNAPPED FLINT

By Norman B, TrnpAre and H. V. V. Noone
[Read 12 June 1941]

The following is a contribution to the results of the Harvard-Adelaide
Universities Anthropological Expedition of 1938-39, which was made possible by
a generous grant from the Carnegie Corporation of New York.

The 74 pieces (A. 27556 in the South Australian Museum) of light brown
and grey flint dealt with in this analysis were found in June 1939 by D. M.
Tindale on an aboriginal site of recent occupation among coastal dunes near
Eucla, a telegraph repeating station, now abandoned, situated where the eastern
border of Western Australia meets the shore of the Great Australian Bight. The
pieces had been buried under blown sand of the coastal dunes but were lying in
such a position that evidently they formed, at one time, a compact parcel which
for some reason had been abandoned. This fact and the semi-finished appearance
of most of the flakes, together with their presence in that particular locality,
indicated that the collection was a hoard or trade parcel which was in transit from
the known flint sites on the coastal cliffs one day’s journey to the East. These
deposits, exposed by the weathering away of the cliff face of the Miocene lime-
stone beds of the Nullarbor Plain, provide nodules of an excellent grade of flint
in a fresh or “green” condition.

From the cultural point of view the Mirning, the present-day aborigines of
the locality, are amongst the most primitive of the people in Australia, their
habitat being about 750 miles south-westward beyond regions where edge-ground
stone axes are made, and at least 500 miles away from areas where even “traded”
axes of that kind have penetrated. As the find apparently represents a collection
of material made during a flint knapper’s expedition, it was expected that such
an unique opportunity as was presented by these specimens would reveal interest-
ing characteristics of the technique practised on flint material by a people living
at what might be termed a palaeolithic-level of culture.

Tere it is perhaps as well to emphasise that during the semi-developed stages
of a stone industry the tools produced are, for several reasons, restricted to a few
tvpes which serve many purposes. Pieces, therefore, which we term “scrapers,”
“adzes,” “points,” etc., in this survey are only named as such for convenience
and in order to conform to established classification, Two typical worked stone
tools of the Eucla area. of types in use up to the present day are shown as fig. 1.
They are made of similar flint to that found in the hoard. An example made of
material similar to that of this hoard has been found 180 miles away to the north
at Wardaruka (Boundary Dam), and other examples have been noted at Ooldea
(200 miles east).

The notes below are the result of our preliminary analysis of the pieces.
The accompanying diagrams, fig. 2, will serve, we hope, as a guide to the nomen-
clature employed.

DESCRIPTION

Viewed as a whole, the 74 specimens appear the product of knapping at least
four nodules of flint—light brown, reddish brown, grey and blackish grey pieces

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (1), 25 July 1941

117
being distinguishable. Two of the pieces are “flake implements.” There are no
cores or coroid implements, and the parcel consists of flakes—a few reaching the
“blade” category—but two specimens are actually more in the nature of blocks.
A few pieces have been crackled by heat.

Twelve of the pieces are really large fragments, as they lack the platform
and bulb end. One of these shows a certain amount of trimming at one end,
approaching the shape of an “ogival” or nosed-scaper. Some of them are such
as would be handy pieces mounted in gum for cutting purposes. Eight of the
flakes show a certain amount of trimming on the platform. These last, as well
as the two implements, will be referred to separately in more detail.

Fig. 1

a-c, flint implement from Eucla (A. 27550 in S.A. Museum);
d-f, ditto from hoard of knapped flint (A. 27556).

FLAKE ANALYSIS
There are left 52 pieces which bear the platform intact, and are thus suit-
able material for analysis. Some 19 of this group show trimming, or squilling
of sorts at one or other part of the margin, and a few of them may have been
called into use or more likely touched up during the knapping operation, but thev
are included in this group to provide a more adequate sample for study, the

118

secondary attention not having becn sufficient to obscure the characteristic major
features of the flakes. There are, however, four specimens with smashed bulbs
and seven pieces with snapped-off ends—as also one with heat-crackled tip—which
are in consequence not included in some of the analyses.

Platform—A_ simple prepared, that is a flattened, platform was usually
employed. There is only one instance of the impact spot being on the crust.
Very little crushing of the comparatively brittle cortex has taken place. ‘The bulb
on this specimen is of the diffused form. On the other hand, some 13 flakes
show bruising or pulverising at the impact spot, or at the intersection of the plat-
form and bulb, z.e.; the bulb-top. Of the other 38 pieces, 22 show clean and un-
marked platforms, and 16 bear small arc-shaped cracks at the impact spot form-
ing what may be described as a ghost, or incipient, cone (fg. 3a). There were
no genuine cxamples of the platiorm with several facettes.

As regards the depth of the platform, i.c., the distance between the inner
face edge at the bulb-top and the outer face edge which is directly opposite, this
reaches 1:6 cm. in one case whilst in one or two specisnens it is too small for

END

or RL BiNe BEAT Rae my

ne
2
ie)
in
c
= NUCLEUS
k
=x
cu)
&
3% FLAKE

i
Impact sPot

merci i ner
PLATFORM
ANGWE
Fig. 2

Diagrams illustrating nomenclature employed.

ordinary measurement. A division showed 17 flakes with depth of platform at
5 mm. or under, and 35 at over 5 mm.

The above evidence suggests an absence of regular procedure as to the treat-
ment and form of the platform, except that a plain (simple) levelled platform
over 5 mm. in depth was more frequent.

Inner Platform Angle—Taking the angle between the plane of the platform
at impact spot and the planc of the adjacent bulbar, or inner face, to a length of
2°5 em., it was found that six pieces showed an angle below 100° Clow), while
32 were from 100° to 115° (medium), and 10 above 115° (high), the highest
being 125°. The deepest platform of 1°6 cm. mentioned above was at a low angle.

‘The evidence shows that, except for most of the work being done at an angle
between 105° and 115°, the worker knapped off any angle within a range of some
35°, and had no particular rule.

Bulbs—It was found that the more or less curved edge which intersects the
bulb and the platform, where the fracturing that separated the flake from the

119

nucleus commenced, was of large radius (diffused, fig. 3b) on 21 pieces and of
small radius (salient, fig. 3c) on 27, These forms of bulb-top do not show any
dependence on the angle of the platforms, as of 32 pieces of meditim angle plat-
form, 15 have diffused and 17 salient bulbs, while of the high angles three were
diffused and seven were salient. The salient bulb is in a slight majority, nearly
60%, but is not characteristic of the worker.

Multiple Bulbs, ete—-Multiple bulbs occur in five pieces and are salient
except in one case, Three pieces bear more of a pyramidal than a conic form

of bulb.

Eraillures (chafed or searred marks on bulb) are comparatively plentiful,
being found clearly on 23 pieces.

Conchoidal ripples, as also fissures on the bulb, are not much in evidence.

Six of the pieces show checked (step, resolved) flake scars at the butt on the
outer surface (fig. 3e), These may be the result of ineffective blows due to
clumsiness, irregularity of material or unfavourable surface contour,

Six flakes end with a hinge fracture.

Dimensions—The length of the flakes ranges from 3-5 em. to 8:5 cm. The
commonest lengths are, respectively, 5 cm., 7 cm, and 6 cm., and these three sizes
comprise nearly 60% of the total number of complete flakes.

Measuring the greatest width of each piece the range is found to be 2-5 em.
to 7°5 cm., and the majority (nearly 60%) are between 3°35 and 5 cm. In this
connection it should be borne in mind that we are here concerned with selected
flakes, rejections having been left on the working site, and it must be assumed
that the above show the dimensions of pieces thought suitable for tool production.

SECONDARY WORKING
Two pieces which are definite flake implements have been mentioned. One
has a truncated isosceles triangular outline and the appearance of an end-scraper,
the wings of which were the working edges. Its dimensions are 7°5 cm. long by
5:5 cm, at the scraper end. The narrower butt-end has been worked by long
retouches, and the striking off of the platform and bulb kas been done by one
blow. Some rough white cortex occupies about one-fifth cf the outer face.

The other implement (fig. 1 d-f) appears to be a forin of large flake adze
such as would be mounted axially in gum at the end of a wooden haft and is
roughly a semi-dise in outline. being 9 cm. x 6 cm.. The marginal shaping and
trimming has in its course removed the platform and most of the bulb. About
one-third of the outer face retains the rough white cortex.

Both implements are made on stout flakes of dull brown flint, and in fact the
material is so similar in texture that they appear to be off the same nucleus, The
outstanding attention given to these implements, as 1f they were one of the main
reasous for the knapping, coupled with the likelihood that they were dertved from
the same nucleus and the fact that they still retain a fair proportion of the nodule
crust, warrants the deduction that their maker was a rapid and deft stone worker.

In addition to these two implements there are eight flakes which show more
or less trimming of the platform (fg. 3d), and these bear definite signs that this
work was done after detaching the flake from the nucleus. In appearance they
are somewhat similar to the “facetted butts’ of Europe which are said to be the
peculiar product of the “tortoise core.’ These cight fakes, however, cannot be
thus explained, the facetting cither being subsequent to, or, where the impact spot
is plain and intact, independent of the knapping. We therefore view these pieces
as (1) possibly providing a working edge which had been trimmed on the butt
because of its suitable formation; or (2) as having been semi-trimmed about the

120

time of knapping with a view to making them into more definite tools when
required.

The above 10 pieces show the secondary work and trimming to have been
done by the removal of bold and well-placed shaping scales followed by chipping
and a longish retouch. There are few signs of a “‘step” (or “checked”) retouch
having been employed, and none of the abrupt or the pressure trimming kind. It
should not be overlooked, however, that the nature of the find is such as to imply
that the pieces are incompletely finished material.

Discussion ON KNAPPING TECHNIQUE EMPLOYED

Thirty-four specimens of the flakes are found to be thinner at end than at
butt, and taking into account the seven snapped pieces, as also six which end
with a hinge fracture, a thin-ended flake may be taken as the usual result of this
knapper’s work. Twenty-one of the specimens show some form of median
ridge on the outer face, but only 12 of these end in anything approaching a

Fig. 3

Details of Specimens from Hoard
a, incipient or “ghost” cones; b, diffused bulb; c, salient bulb; d, subsequent
trimming of platform, resembling “facetted butt’; e, checked flake scars at butt

point. Twenty-one other pieces bear more than one ridge and 10 have none at all.
There would thus seem to have been no definite desire to make pointed flakes,
and in this connection it may be mentioned that, except for a single specimen
(pirri) of local material found on a Eucla site (which may be a relic of an
earlier period), such implements as points are not now used in the Eucla terri-
tory. In regard to what is achievable with pointed flakes in the more advanced
northern culture areas, it may not be out of place to mention that we have seen
one magnificent single-ridged specimen from Wave Hill, North Australia. It is
in a very pale rose quartzite of a length of 27 cm. (actually about 27-5 cm. as tip
is broken off) of almost perfectly flat lanceolate shape and obtuse triangular
transverse section, the width near butt being 6°3 cm. This is a triumph of Aus-
tralian knapping, as no trimming was necessary to make the shape perfect. The
inner platform angle is 110°. The source of the material from which such
blades are made is known to be in the Katherine area of North Australia,

121

but the technique has not yet been studied. Motion picture studies of such
workmanship as this, with, just as important, running commentaries by experi-
enced eyewitnesses, as also of hammer-dressing, polishing, “pressure” denticulat-
ing edge, and each tribe’s knapping technique are highly desirable. Australia’s
uniqtie preservation of so many different methods of stone working will not last
much longer.

Careful inspection of the direction of the knapping blows that detached the
earlier flakes from each of the 52 pieces, as shown by the flake scars on! the outer
face, reveals that on 25 pieces: all the blows were delivered ‘from the same direc-
tion, whilst 26 bear scars showing that the blows were from more than one direc-
tion. One picce is all crust on the outer face.

The above facts would seem to show that the Eucla worker (or workers)
did not aspire to the making of long flakes, but the 25 pieces each worked in the
same direction not only imply an appreciation of a common platform but the
realisation that a carefully shaped face on a nucleus, bearing the right ridges and
contour, 1s the major essential to successful knapping. This is further borne out
by the fact that most of the flakes are practically free of cortex, and that no less
than 21 of the pieces show a median ridge. It as unfortunate that no nucleus 1s
included in the heard. Whilst the evidence of a repeatedly used prepared simple
platform suggests that a sort of prismatic nucleus was eventually formed, the
number of flakes with diversely produced ridges, assuming they do not all repre-
sent preliminary dressing, should mean the formation of globular or polyhedral
cores also. The use of a common platform and the production of thin-ended
flakes entails: (a) some dressing of the nuclear face; (b) simultaneous use
of more than one platform on the nucleus; or (c) commencement of the work
on a high-angled plattorm or conically dressed nucleus in order to counteract the
consequent sub-pyramidal form that the nucleus assumes after several flakes have
been removed.

Stone was probably used as the knapping and trimming tool, One cannot
definitely say that comparatively saft material was not also employed. We expect
that a granite pebble or ‘a flint nodule was used, as these are the only kinds of
suitable stone material available within a radius of 250 miles.

Tt will be noticed that we have not made use of the platform analyses in our
above remarks. Our experience in experimental knapping, as also that gained by
one of us of stone work done during his sojourns amongst the aboriginal tribes
still using stone, has led us to believe that, provided the impact point on a nucleus
of good material offers sufficient obstruction (a correctly delivered blow suitably
placed being assumed), little else but a favourable range of angularity is required
of the platform, The shape of the knapping tool at the spot where it comes into
contact with the nucleus is apparently a more intimate influence on the nature of
the fragment detached. The careful sclecting of the exact portion of the hammer
that is to come into contact with the nucleus immediately before the blow is
struck is a noticeable characteristic of present-day aboriginal knapping. ‘There is
also a freedom from working restrictions which is also revealed by the analyses
given above in regard to bulbs and platforms, and this exposes the minor part
actually played by the platform. The major factor in knapping technique is
shown to be the contour and ridging of the face of the nucleus from which the
desired fragment is detached—together with the position of the point of impact
in regard to same, these being the main controlling factors of block, flake or
blade form.

CONCLUSIONS

We class the Eucla work in flint as that of a developed flake industry produc- -
ing good flakes at the “incipient blade” stage. and we consider the parcel the
product of one or more practised specialists, who could work on a platform angle
range of 35°.

122

Simple flat platforms were prepared but no strict rule of detached platform
angle was followed beyond 60% ranging between 105° to 115°, and as to platform
size, except that it was usually over 5 mm. This contrasts with the finding of
one of us (Tindale 1937) amongst Tasmanian implements, where the angle is
usually over 110°, and commonly even 120° in the case of the most recent.

Preparation by decortication of the nodule was effected to produce a good
nucleus. The face of the nucleus was prepared and a common platform utilised,
though this higher technique was not improved to a full development. A salient
bulb, 60%, and craillures are to some extent characteristic, “hin-ended flakes
ranging from 5:0 to 7-0 em. long by 35 ito 5-0 cm. wide are to a slight extent,
60%, characteristic. It would seem that though not entirely dependent on
secondary work to obtain the desired tool shape, its employment was still to a
fair extent necessary to complete the tool. In trimming well-placed shaping scales
were followed by finer chips and the long retouch. There are no signs of pressure
trimming.

It may not be out of place here, in order that the workmanship of the hoard
should be appreciated, to draw attention to the great irregularities, almost
amounting to inconsistencics in some modern aborigines’ treatment of stone for
their requirements. Any random piece of suitable stone may at times be used
without further treatment and, if at all trimmed, this may in some cases be actually
done with the teeth. What might be described as professional work may be found
alongside examples of very indifferent work in the same group, or even done. by
the samc person. When a cutting chip of sorts is required, such as in the biood-
letting ceremony. the procedure may be little more than hitting one stone with
another and selecting from the sharpest fragments so obtained. A suitable piece
with sharp edge, as knapped, is brought straight into use, and what might be
scientifically classed as “secondary work” or “trimming” is actually re-edging.
This re-edging. moreover, may be done with the teeth, stones, a spear-thrower,
a throwing stick, or any other convenient article such as a hunting boomerang, if
hard enough. As to the aboriginal use of the re-edged tool, the plain face used
as the platform upon which is applied tha re-edging blow or force, is invariably
the face nearest to the material worked upon when chopping or scraping, Some
favourite tools are so repeatedly re-edged that the working edge faces are at a
marked obtuse angle, whilst a few others are so often used as to show a
distinct polishing of the working edge. In one case, a pebble chopper (A. 28408)
from a Murundian site, at Moana, South Australia, the obtuse angle shown by the
faces forming the working edge, was as high as 140° when discarded.

REFERENCE CITED
TinpaLe, N. B. 1937 Records of South Aust. Museum, 6, 36

AN EXAMINATION OF SOME SOILS FROM TROPICAL AUSTRALIA

By J. A. PRESCOTT and H. R. SSKEWES, Waite Agricultural Research Institute

Summary

Comparatively little information is generally available concerning the soils of tropical Australia,
and until relatively recently few samples had been collected and little field work had been done.
The present report is the result of an examination of samples collected during field work carried out
in 1933 and 1937, following a preliminary visit to tropical Queensland in 1929.

123

AN EXAMINATION OF SOME SOILS FROM TROPICAL AUSTRALIA

3y J. A. Prescorr and II. R. Skewes, Waite Agricultural Research Institute
[Read 12 June 1941]

INTRODUCTION

Comparatively little information is generally available concerning the soils
of tropical Australia, and until relatively recently few samples had been collected
and little field work had been done, The present report is the result of an
examination of samples collected during field work carried out in 1933 and 1937,
following a preliminary visit to tropical Queensland in 1929.

For some years the Chief Chemist of the Queensland Department of Agri-
culture has published analyses of soil samples in hig annual report, and some of
these naturally relate to the tropical areas. Previous investigations on soils from
the Northern Territory have been principally laboratory studies on samples
collected by reporters on various parts of the Territory. Amongst these reporters
under the South Australian administration were Brackenbury (1896) and Holtze
(1911). Brackenbury’s samples were analysed by Goyder, of the South Aus-
tralian School of Mines, and commented upon by |.owrie. Holtze collected
samples from Goulburn and other islands; these samples were examined and
reported upon by Hargreaves, the government analyst in Adelaide.

Soil samples from the Territory have also been examined from time to time
in the laboratories of the Queensland Department of Agriculture. A number of
samples from the Pindan country of the Kimberleys was collected by Despeissis
about 1911 and subsequently examined by the government analyst of Western
Australia. More recently samples have been collected by the survey parties
engaged in fixing the boundary between the Northern Territory and Western
Austraha.

In all these cases the analyses relate to the major plant nutrients, and little
or no information is available regarding the field characteristics of the soils or
their physical texture.

The samples dealt with in the present report are derived from three main
areas. The first is the Kimberley region of Western Australia, the second is the
western and accessible part of Arnhem Land, and the third is the cattle country
of northern Queensland, west of Charters Towers. The alluvial soils of the
Katherine and Daly Rivers, devoted to cultivation of the peanut, have already
been described (Prescott, 1938).

rom the field notes taken during the traverses and from other information,
an atiempt has been made to construct a picture of the character of the major soil
zones and of their general distribution. The forees at work in the determination
of the soil zones will also be discussed.

The soils of the Dutch East Indies, which have been described by Mohr
(1933, 1934), should afford a useful parallel, Generally speaking, however,
those of Australia’s nearest neighbours, Dutch Timor and Dutch New Guinea,
are relatively little known, and Mohr emphasises climatic conditions and parent
rocks rather than the soils themselves. Dutch Timor, with a rainfall varying
from 37 to 79 inches and with annual drought periods of from cight months to
two months, should afford a better parallel with Australia within these limits of
rainfall than does New Guinea.

Trans. Roy. Soc. $.A., 65, (1), 25 July 1941

124

SOIL-FORMING PROCESSES AND THE CLIMATIC FACTOR

In considering the principal climatic factors responsible for the soil-forming
processes in tropical Australia, it has been found necessary to emphasise three
factors:

(1) Amount of rainfall and its efficiency as controlled by evaporation.

(2) Intensity and length of the drought period.

(3) Intensity of daily rainfall,

The first factor, the actual amount of the rain and its efficiency as determined
by evaporation, is probably best considered on a monthly basis rather than on an
annual basis. The degree of leaching to which the soil may be subject is deter-
mined by the balance between rainfall and the loss of soil water by direct evapora-
tion, the transpiration of plants and percolation through the soil. A complicating
factor in tropical Australia is the high proportion of run-off, with the result that
local topography and micro-relief may be very important in determining the

MAP 1 KEY TO LOCALITIES

Site Number Soil Sample Numbers Site Number Soil Sample Numbers
1 Yeeda - - - 5183, 5184 9 Stapleton - ~ 5244, 5245, 5246, 5247,
2 Liveringa - - 5178, 5179, 5180, 5181, 5249
5182 10 Adelaide River - 5253, 5254, 5256, 5257
3. Noonkanbah - 5186, 5187, 5188, 5189, | 11 Katherine - - 5259, 3261, 5262
5190, 5177 12 Manbulloo - - 5267, 5268, 5269
4 Wyndham - - 5215 13 Millungera - - 3466, 3467, 3468, 3469
5 Ivanhoe - - 5210, 5211 14. Saxby Downs - 3460, 3461, 3462, 3463
6 Argyle - - 5214, 5216, 5218, 5212 15 Chudleigh Park - 3455, 3456, 3457, 3465
7 Darwin-Koolpinyah 5229, 5230, 5231, 5236, | 16 Myola - - $3446, 3447, 3448, 3449
§237, 5238 17 Barrington - - 3443, 3444, 3445
8 Batchelor - = 5239, 5240, 5241 18 Cardigan - - 3439, 3440, 3441, 3442
19 Mirtna - - $3470, 3471, 3472, 3473

character of the drainage through the soil. Quite a number of soils examined
were associated with ironstone gravels, and these probably with lateritic parent
materials which do not show the same obvious tendency to podsolisation as do
more normal soils. Therefore, in spite of relatively high rainfalls for three or
four months of the year, only the leaching out of calcium carbonate is completed,
and full leaching with the removal of exchangeable calcium and mobilisation
of iron oxides is restricted to swampy areas. If the pH values of the samples
recorded later are taken as indices of the degree of leaching, it will be seen that
on the whole only a mild degree of podsolisation is achieved.

The second factor, the length and intensity of the seasonal drought, must be
considered also in this connection. It is quite possible that the prevailing redness
of soils under Mediterranean and monsoonal conditions may be determined by
this drought period which dehydrates the free iron oxides in the soil, and this

125

protects them from leaching during the wet season. For maps illustrating the
monthly climatic indices expressed in terms of the ratio of rainfall to saturation
deficit, and for details of the lengths of the wet season and drought periods,
reference may be made to a previous publication in these Transactions (Prescott,
1938).

The intensity of the rainfall itself, expressed most simply in terms of the
amount of rainfall per rainy day, is a very important factor in the tropics in
determining the degree of soil erosion, If reference be made to fig. 6 in the
3ulletin “Vhe Soils of Australia in Relation to Vegetation and Climate” (Tres-
cott, 1931), the minimum intensity of rainfall in Australia is seen to be of the
order of 0-15 inches per wet day, and the maximum intensity is 0°60 inches per
wet day. This high value is at some distance inland from the northern coast and
must play an important part in determining the character and amount of the run-
off in these parts of Australia, The rivers running into the Indian Ocean, the
‘Timor Sea and the Gulf of Carpentaria are essentially storm-water drains, many
of them of very large size but dry, except for waterholes and certain reaches, for
the greater part of year. Generally spcaking, an average intensity of 0°30 inches
per wet day is required before drainage lines develop in southern Australia. The
imtensity of rainfall in Timor and Dutch New Guinea ranges from 0:53 to 0:83
inches per wet day. In the mandated territory of New Guinea the range is from
0-33 to 0-71.

It is generally recognised that the most erosive rains are those immediately
following a dry period, and it is to be expected therefore that opportunities for
such erosion under natural conditions will be very common in northern Australia.

THE SOI. ZONES OF TROPICAL AUSTRALIA

The major soil zones in tropical Australia may be divided into nine groups.
Each group of soils is associated with a characteristic native vegetation, frequently
with indicator species of plants, a feature which assists materially in interpreting
the reports of other observers when the correlations have once been worked out
by investigations in the field. The distribution of these main soil groups will be
found in the accompanying map, in which subdivision of some of the groups has
made possible the recognition of twelve principal groups of soils.

1 Desert sandhills.

The only part of the Australian sandy deserts occupying any portion of
tropical Australia belongs to the northern part of the Great Sandy Desert of
Western Australia, the boundaries of which have been more accurately defined
in recent years by the aerial reconnaissances of the Mackay expeditions. particu-
larly that of 1933. An outlier of this desert lies between Tanami and Tennant’s
Creek. This was traversed by Davidson (1905) in 1900 and by Chewings (1930)
iy 1909. The sandhills have an east-west trend and are parallel, The principal
vegetation consists of species of Triodia, Generally speaking, the colour of the
sandhills is fiery red and in parts they are very close together, particularly to the
north-west of Lake Mackay. ‘The red colour of these desert sands shows a
higher degree of saturation than can be matched by means of the Munsell colour
disks as standardised and recommended for use with soils.

2 Soils of the desert and semi-desert other than sandhills

The soils of the semi-desert country, characterised by an Acacia grassland
including mulga (Acacia aneura) in the central area and gidgea (Acacia Cam-
bage?, and Georginae) towards the Queensland border, have not been investi-
gated in any detail. The plains are intersected by ranges and by channel country
in the south. Samples of soils from the country between the Granites and Lake
Mackay have been previously reported upon (Prescott and Skewes, 1938), and
there is no reason to believe, from the degree of acidity of this group of soils and
from the presence of ironstone gravels, that they are residual from a former wet

126

climatic period. In this area, instead of a mulga savannah or mulga scrub, the
plant association, according to Professor J. B. Cleland; is one of Triedia with
small trees and shrubs. These latter include. the mallees, Bucalyptus gamophylla,
pachyphylla and odontocarpa, several species of Hakea, of which A. lorea is
common, and a number of acacias, including A. coeriacea and notabilis, The
association is very similar to that recorded by Blake (1938) for the sand plains
of south-western Queensland. These soils may be separated: for mapping pur-
poses into two groups—the desert loams and ‘the desert sand plains.

3. Stony tablelands and ranges

It has been emphasised above that the character of the rainfall in tropical
Austraha is favourable to a much greater degree of erosion than is common in
southern Austraha. This erosion is the result of the more torrential character
of the rainfall, and is probably most active following upon the long winter drought
and the firing of the dried grass which has been practised by the aburiginal
population for many centuries.

The importance of this aspect of erosion in monsoonal regions cannot be
over-emphasised, and the key to the soil-forming processes may well lie in its
recognition. It is worth while to quote from two other observers of this
phenomenon. Gautier (1935) vividly describes the process in French West
Africa in the following terms :

“The rains are concentrated into a few months; there is a long dry
season, at the end of which the country is scorched, naked, powdery, ” This
alternation is obviously favourable to the progress of erosion. The desiccated
rock material offers a minimum resistance to the torrential downpour of the
equatorial rains.”

Sinilarly Votsey (1939), in his summary of the stratigraphy of the Northern
Territory, says:

“Alluvial flats occupy large arcas of country and separate rocky hills.
This alluvium has accumulated during the present cycle of erosion owing
to the action of heavy monsoonal rains. Disintegrated rock material has
been washed off.the hills and deposited in the valleys, so that even small
creeks have wide flood plains which end abruptly against hills of almost
bare rock,”

Under these conditions, generally speaking, two types of country may be
recognised in-Australia—the steep-sided ranges and the tablelands associated
either with horizontally bedded rocks or with cappings of ironstone or laterite.
Somic areas may be practically devoid of soil, particularly in the north-west region
of Western Australia in the “Nullagine, Hamersley and Ashburton soil provinces
of Teakle (1938), but elsewhere there may be a thin cover, or on gentle slopes
somewhat ‘deeper soils which are very stony. Apart from the north-west region
just mentioned, important areas include the Kimberley region between the King
arene Range and the Carr Boyd Range, the eastern section of Arnhem Land
and the ntining country of the eastern half of Cape York Peninsula and to the
west of the Atherton Tableland.

‘The vegetation carried by these ranges is usually a savannah woodland of
seattered eucalyptus aud poor grasses. If the drought season ig at all- lengthy
species of Triodia become dominant. In the Nullagine- Flamersley country of
Western Australia Triodia dominates the landscape and trees are. few. In the
rugged country of the Cloncurry-Mount Isa district of Queensland, with some+
what better rainfall, the community is one of mountain gum and spinifex

(Eucalyptus pallidifolia—E. leucophylla—Triodia) aud has been described by
Blake (1938). This and related Chinn EnIHEs» on stony country f satteted into the

@) Privately communicated.

127

Northern Territory to the north of the Barkly ‘lableland and beyond the
McArthur River, Trivdia communities also occur on the ranges and tablelands
in the vicinity of the Victoria River. The vegetation of ranges in the higher
rainfall areas of the Kimberleys has been described by Gardner (1923), who dis-
tinguisl hes between basaltic savannahs and sandstone savannahs. In neither case
is Triodia present, the wet season being of sufficiently long duration 1o ensure the
permanence of better grasses.

4 Brown soils of light texture

The soils immediately on the wetter side of the desert areas belong to the
group of brown soils, ‘hey are associated either with an open grassland or
savannah or with a savannah woodland of low trees, the association depending
upon the texture and level of fertility of the soil itself. The marked difference
in general character and manner of use of the two main groups of light-textured
and heavy-textured types, makes it worth while to separate them in any discussion.
The light-textured types, including sands and sandy loams, are eae
pastorally in the Kimberleys and cccur also in Queensland, They have a tem-
perate parallel in the mallee soils of the south, but differ from them in so Tae as
they are relatively free from salt and are free from calcium carbonate except
possibly in the very deep, horizons.

‘The Pindan country of Western Australia, which includes areas near broome
and Derby, and the sandy country between the alluvial plains of the Vitzroy and
the King Leopold Range are very characteristic. The Warralong province of ihe
north-west of the same State may be included. ‘The Cockatoo Sands across the
Ord River from Ivanhoe Station afford another example, and the country
between Victoria River Downs and Daly Waters should probably be included. In
Queensland an area between the Downs country and the mining belt at Croydon
has been noted and sampled on Saxby Downs. Owing to the light texture of these
soils the rains penetrate easily and leaching is possible during the wet season.
The soils are in consequence neutral to somewhat acid in reaction and accumula-
tions of calcium carbonate in the profile have not been observed, although stich
accumulations are commnon in the case of heavier soil types ‘in the same localities.
In some eases ironstone gravels are associated with these soiJs, as on Saxby
Downs, and this suggests that in such cases they may he derived from older and
leached soils. ‘he Warralong province of Western Aus:ralia has been described
hy Teakle (1938); here the monsoonal trees, whitewood (Atalava hemiglauca)
and Bauhinia Cunninghamii are associated with the kanji (Acacia pyrifolia),
corkwood (Hakea lorea) and other small trees of ‘the semi-desert region. The
grasses include species of Triodia, Triraphis, Eragrostis and Chrysopogon.

Gardner (1923) has described the vegetation of the Pindan country. <A
characteristic tree ts the Pindan wattle (Acacia tumida). Small trees mentioned
by him as being prominent include a bloodwood (Eucalyptus pyrophora),
Ei, miniata, E. papuana and Eervthrophicwm Labouchert, The shrubs include the
Kkonkerberry (Carissa lanceolata), Melaleuca alsophylla and two species ot
Terminalia, The grasses are usually coarse and Andropogon affinis, speargrass
or sugargrass, 1s very common,

The Pindan sands like the mallee sands frequently take the form of low
sandhills having an east-west trend, suggesting that they are possibly a vegetated
extension of the sandy desert which lies to the south and cast.

Pastorally the main value of these sandy soils is best achieved in combina-
tion with the heavier soil types. These latter are usually very boggy in the wet
season and the sandy country on the higher level is usually safe for cattle and

sheep at this period, The sands respond quickly to rain, but the fertility level and
setae capacity are low. They can only be reasonably managed when heavy
soils and flood plains are readily accessible.

128

The general character of these soils may be gathered by reference to Table 1.
Descriptions of full profiles are not generally available,

The samples from Saxby Downs include surface scrapings consisting of
a coarse sand containing about 3% of fine gravel. The colour is somewhat
pinkish as a result of the intense insolation during the dry season, in marked
contrast with the brownish colour of the true soil immediately below. In un-
disturbed soils in these practically uninhabited regions, this thin surface layer is
very characteristic. It is washed almost free ‘from clay by the rains.

Generally speaking, these sandy soils are deficient in plant foods, particularly
in phosphates. There is, however, a scale of fertility level even here, and as in the
desert soils previously described (Prescott and Skewes, 1938) this low fertility
level is associated with Triedia as the main perennial grass.

5 Brown soils of heavy texture.

The most important pastoral soils in tropical Australia are brown soils of
heavy texture carrying an open grassland in which Mitchell grasses (Astrebla
spp.) and Flinders grasses (/seilema spp.) are important and characteristic.

TABLE 1 ~ ANALYTICAL DATA RELATING TO CHARACTERISTIC
BROWN COILS OF LIGHT TEXTURE,

Sample No.
Rorizon

Depth (inches)
Colour 2&
Reaction (pH)

Mech al
Coarse.sand

Fine sand

f4lt

Clay

L.on acid treatment
Moisture

Chemical Analysis
L. on ignition

Nitrogen (N)
Phosphoric acid (P9205)
Potash (K,0)
Soluble salts

& Key to soil colours in this and subsequent tables: R = red; B= brow;
= light; D= dark; Y= yellow; G= grey; BL = black; W= white;
Ch = chocolate, 4

Profile No. 1—Paradise Section of JLiveringa, West Kimberley, W. Aust.
Pindan country with red anthills and Triodia, Rainfall, 22 inches. Length
of season, 3-5 months.

Profile No. 2—Yeeda, West Kimberley, W. Aust. Sandy coastal pindan country.
Rainfall, 24 inches. Length of season, 4-1 months.

Profile No. 3—Ivanhoe, East Kimberley, W. Aust. Cockatoo Sands. A
savannah woodland with tall grasses. Rainfall, 33 inches. Length of
season, 4-4 months.

Profile No. 4—Saxby Downs, Nth. Queensland, south of Saxby River, 13 miles
north-east of homestead. The vegetation ‘consists of a savannah woodland
with low trees and some tall “spear grass,” probably Andropogon and a little
Triodia. The trees include Bauhinia, sandalwood, various acasias and /beefwood
(Grevillea). Rainfall, 20 inches. Length of season, 3-1 months.

Many of these are alluvial soils on the desert margins, watered to a certain
extent by flood waters, and would include the plains of the Fortescue and pos-

129

sibly the plains of the Sturt Creek. ‘I"he alluvial country of the Fitzroy and Ord
Rivers is important also, but there are also heavy soils at higher levels derived
from suitable rocks, such as basalt, which tend to be stony but which are very
important pastorally, particularly in the valleys of the Ord and Victoria Rivers.

Further east the Barkly Tableland and the Queersland Downs between
Cloncurry and Hughenden afford, characteristic examples. The soils are usually
brown in colour, cloddy in texture and contain calcium carbonate and frequently
gypsum in the profile. The colour range varies, however, from dark grey to.
chestnut.

The pastoral country of the Barkly Tableland is a complex of Mitchell grass
downs, Bauhinia savannahs, and low lying, heavy country subject to flood, which
is not at all well understood and does not appear to have been visited by any
ecologist. The pastoral community recognises grass country and desert country,
the latter being used in the wettest part of the season or again as reserve country
during drought.

TABLE 2 — ANALYTICAL DATA RELATING TO SOIL PROFILE FROM NCONKANBAH, W.AUST.

Depth (inches)
Reaction (pH)

Coarse sand

Fine sand

cit

Clay

Lon acid treatment
Moisture

Chemical Analysis:

L, on ignition
Calcium carbonate
Calcium sulphate
Total soluble salts
Organic carbon (C)
Nitrogen (N)
Phosphoric Acid (P,0x)
Potash (K,0) :

come

en a mon
Oanunn

Exchangeable Bases:
Total (m.e.per 100 gas.)
Proportion as: Ca

Locality: Noonkanbah: Terrace of Fitzroy alluvium near home-
stead. Pure stand of Triodta, Rainfall, 20 inches.
Length of season, 3-0 months.
Description of profile:
Sample No. 5186: surface half-inch—Dust mulch round clumps
of Triodia; brown to grey-brown.
Sample No. 5187: 0-5 inches—Nutty structure, brown to grey-
brown.
Sample No. 5188: 5-17 inches—Cloddy structure, with white
flecks of calcium carbonate. Brown to dark grey-brown.
Sample No. 5189: 17-35 inches—Cloddy structure, white flecks
increasing. Brown to dark grey-brown.
Sample No. 5190: 35-48 inches-——-Cloddy structure, gypsum,
increasing with depth.

Samples of these soils have been collected on the Fitzroy and on Argyle
Downs in the Kimberleys and have been examined at Victoria River Downs and
at several points in the Queensland areas. Samples from a profile on Millungera
Station in North Queensland are described below.

130

The vegetation varies from almost pure grassland to open savannah; the
texture, fertility level, degree of stoniness, and amount of flooding determine the
vegetation. The heaviest and low-lying soils are associated with the guttapercha,
fvcaeccaria parvifolia, which is to be found from Western Queensland to the
Kimberleys in quite restricted habitats on dark soils, Analyses of samples from
two profiles are given in Tables 2 and 3.

TABLE 3 - ANALYTICAL DATA RELATING TO SOIL PROFILE FROM
MILLUNGERA, N.QUEENSLAND.

Sample No.
Depth (inches)
Reaction (pH)

Coarse sand

Fine sand

Silt

Clay

L.on acid treatment.
Moisture

L.on ignition

Calcium carbonate
Total soluble salts
Nitrogen (N)
Phosphoric acid (P05)
Potash (KO)

Locality: Millungera, clean skin paddock, 26 miles by road from
homestead, Open savannah with a few bloodwoods and white-
wood (Alalaya). Rainfall, 20 inches. Length of season,
3:l months, Heavy grey soil (very dark grey-brown to brown)
throughout profile.

The two profiles selected are of relatively low fertility but quite charac-
teristic. Teakle (1938) also quotes data for a greyish-chocolate heavy soil from
Ivanhoe, carrying a Mitchell grass—Bauhinia savannah, very similar in character
to the above. An interesting feature brought out is the very low salt content and

TABLE 4 — ANALYTICAL DATA RELATING To HEAVY-TEXTURED BROWN SOILS FROM THE
KIMBERLEYS.

K20 |Total fReaction
salts pH
% g

Argyle.Newry Cate
Argyle.Rosewood Gate

Paes
paeraary
MAOKAWA DY

Argyle
Argyle-stony soil
Upper Liveringa
Upper Liveringa
Upper Liveringa
Noonkanbah

. .
moO ONOA w
Ba8oaSss
cee
ena

eooo090or
s9000000
FONO900000
ORPBRANRAN
NIAIOAROM-~A

absence of solonisation, in marked contrast to conditions in similar soils in
southern Australia. Information regarding other heavy-textured soils from the
Kimberleys is given in Table 4. The soils from Liveringa and Noonkanbah are
on Fitzroy alluvium, All are associated with grasslands.

131

6 Black carths, modified black earths of the brigalow scrubs, and rendginas,

The belt of true black earths in Queensland does not extend very far north
into the tropics and is closely associated with scrubs or low forests in which
brigalow (Acacia herpophylla) is frequently an important constituent. The black
earths proper carry an open grassland in which the important species is bluegrass
(Dichanthiwn sericeum). The analyses of characteristic examples have already
been recorded by Iosking (1935).

The northern limit of these soils is in the neighbourhood of Natal Downs
and extends down the valley of the Suttor tawards the Burdekin. The associated
brigalow has been observed as far north as Mirtna, where the soil profile was
exanuned and samples taken. There is evidence generally in Queensland that the
brigalow is tending to invade the open grasslands even where the soils are quite

TABLE 5 — ANALYTICAL DATA RELATING TO SOIL. PROFILE
FROM MIRTNA, N.QUEENSLAND.

Depth (inches)
Reaction (pH)

Mechanical Analysis:
Coarse sand
Fine sand
Silt
Clay
L.on acid treatment
Moisture

Chemical Analysis:
L.on ignition

Calcium carbonate
Total soluble salts
Nitrogen (N)
Phosphoric acid (P20s)
Potash (K.0)

Exchangeable Bases:

Mg
K
Na

Locality: Mirtna, Nth. Qld., near homestead. Brigalow scrub.
Rainfall, 22 inches. Length of season, 4-8 months.
Description of profile:
Sample No. 3470: 0-4 inches, grey sandy loam.
Sample No. 3471: 4-5 inches, light grey fine sand showing
signs of hardpan formation.
Sample No, 2472: 5-13 inches, grey-brown heavy clay,
Sample No. 3473: 13-25 inches, whitish clay.

heavy, and there is further evidence ‘that salt is present in many of these soils
and that they are subject to some degree of solonisation, The occurrence of such
salt Jakes as Lake Buchanan is of some possible significance.

This belt of country is in the path of the easterly winds from the VPacitic
Ocean and may be subject ‘to accessions of cyclic salt such as are known to occur
in southern Australia. Some confirmation is obtained from the analysis of the
samples from Mirtna, recorded in Table 5, which shows evidence of solonisation.

132

Throughout tropical Australia there occur many scattered examples of
‘rendzinas, black soils derived from highly calcareous parent materials. The
samples from Chudleigh Park, analysed and recorded by Hosking (1935), are
from an undoubted rendzina formed on a local deposit of limestone possibly of
‘tertiary age.

A very characteristic rendzina on limestone has been observed covering a
fairly extensive area on Elsey Station in the Northern Territory. This soil was
found to be relatively shallow, the vegetation was a savannah woodland which
included nutwood (Terminalia sp.) and anthills were frequent and quite black
in colour.

7 Red soils, including red loams, residual red carths and red-brown earths,
Soils with a predominantly red or red-brown colour are characteristic of

much of tropical Australia receiving a reasonably high rainfall marked by a

seasonal incidence in which the drought period is characterised by high midday

TABLE 6 — ANALYTICAL DATA RELATING TO RED-BROWN EARTHS.

Sample No.
Horizon
Depth (inches)
Colour
Reaction(pH)

Mechanical Analysis:

Coarse sand
Fine sand
Silt

Clay

L.on acid treatment
Moisture

Chemical Analysis:
L.on ignition

Calcium carbonate
Nitrogen {N)
Phosphoric acid(Ps0r)
Potash (K,0)
Soluble salts

Profile No. 1—Cardigan Station, near Charters Towers. Sandy soil over
granite. Savannah woodland with ironbark and bloodwood. [Rainfall
26 inches, Length of season, 5-0 months,

Profile No 2—An example of a light-textured soil carrying cypress pine
(Callitris), Manbulloo, near Katherine, N.T., along the road towards
Victoria River Downs. Rainfall, 38 inches. Length of season, 4-7 months.

temperatures accompanied by relatively high rates of evaporation, particularly in
autumn and spring. It appears probable that the prevailing redness of soils in
regions having cither a Mediterranean or monsoonal climate is associated with
this drought period, during which the iron oxides are dehydrated to such an
extent that mobility during the wet season, unless accompanied by waterlogged
conditions, is non-existent. Where the parent materials are predominantly ferru-
ginous, as in many soils of lateritic origin, the rainfall needs to be high and
persistent before any degree of podsolisation becomes evident. Such soils may
be called “ferromorphic,” just as rendzinas may be referred to as being “calci-

133

Jo ULsue'T

yysua’|

uo swozOq ayoiug
DIIYIOAINUL “YF “OpMOPdAjo]
[Aydorpos eB St UoNepSIA sATEN
peor wrew ay} Suoye Ynos satu g STN ‘UIMIeEq—f ‘oN afyoig

g00°O | 6c0°O
i ab°O0
-. 420°O
= 460°O
oP L°P
8°T &°T
3°0 £°O
9° 6g 9°6S
6°bT Ese
S*TS L°Ts.
B°et e°et
$ ¢
Tg ones)
ad HO
6°21 6°OT

‘SOUT OO “Yeyurery

“LN f4oTsuozeg

“SOYIUL QC ‘[PRPUIeY,
pseysio passeis pue pouopueqe uy

“aq “pypauate
BART opleppy

‘syyuOUL ¢-g ‘UOSBos

WIE JUSWIUABAOT) JIULWoy JO
“LN ‘topayoeg—p ‘oN apyoag

"syjuOUL ¢.9 ‘Uosvas Jo

‘sayaut /Z MO[Sq Yoo: Sursodurosap

‘opaiway | “uohodosajayy ‘speaso ‘snuepueg

suggdpoangq YUM 18310}

600°O jOTO"O
£0°O $0°O
egO0°O jB8eu'o
6z0°O |T90°O
Td o°2
a°1 ans
TT ant
9° se S°SS
ag ork
Tbe 6°OP
PPT boeT
% %
L°¢ "9
@u-d = jgudI-dic
L°ST 6° 4T
61-2 9-0
Oges 62eS

"LN ‘Uyaseg

‘[PJUTEYy

spsemo}

T*OT 6°6
Bcy $°¢
$*0 $*0
L°ts Bes
E°tt 0" OT
Gey 2°at
£°St T°St
e %
Th Gras
aad axa
Lt canad
Op-2z | 22-6T
LSPS S3be

“OTN SH4eg udteTenyg

ee ee

‘StJUOLU g-¢ ‘UosEDs JO yYBuaT]T ‘saysur gz

‘aged FF pue duondod snjgdjponzy UWA pueypoom

YRUUPARS BP Sl UOlJeB}esaA DALIEN
9Y} UO JOABIS JUOJSUOIE YUM Jpesey IaAo TIOS UMOIgG yIep yY “]pPaN
Sasioor) wosg aprar F “plt) WN Wed Yyseppnyo—zg “oN ayoid
“syJUOU Q-p ‘UOS¥as JO YYSCO'T
-040]3F7 pue vpamay 7 YM ‘yTequodr
aseqyeo JO purypoom YRUUBARS FP SI NoRjsaa aaneN ‘jypeseq
YUM pozyelsosse [los pol Yo “yaely Yoajoy FO yynos sureyd cy
‘peojsowmoy Ivatt “prd) ‘GIN “oor sarpeg 2 ‘woAW—[ ‘ON 9YO1g

6°6T

ohrag
6bb2

‘aqyoid ay} ur puke aoeyins

“SOUT gz ‘TTeyuIeyy «= ‘MOHod
‘poompoojq MoO ‘WINS

eB) su uotzdedoug
sud QOT dad *otw)qTeqoy

8Tu"o 10°O) =[Ts0°0 SYTES aTQnTos

et‘o | tso | ecco (ofx) useiog
1g0°0 |sz0to fuzt°o | (30%a) prey otsoudsoug
aeo"o = f4b0"O = fe800 (N) UsFou4 THN
- 2 a aZEUuogiED wNpOTRY
b°6 6°8 6°B UOFRTUAT uory

. TL oUt
S*P 6°b ay SOIT STOW
TS "sg a°T PUSTPHS4. PTIG UoOrT
ges | peg | 6tde fat
bk S° OT 6° 9T tts
gy ork O°SsT poes suty
3°33 cam t ¥°Ge pugs esi809

$ % t TSTEATSUy Tes PuBoeH
"9 b*y 6"9 (gd) uopQowey
gud-ad ddd ie Ujavy aUTZ Jo sneqtog
eqdues Jeuysy10
r’BT O° OL sg JO sFeyuedsed se
asus euopsuoly
ee-te | 12-6 8-0 (seyout) uydeq
BPPS Lbvs Shes ‘on aydwes
T “ON 8TTJO4d

“Ty TUSLVN LNTUYd OILTUSLYT HLIM G3LVIOOSSY SHLYVA CEU OL ONILVTHY VLVO ‘TVOILAYNY — 4 aTeYL

134

morphic.” The main characteristic of these soils is that, a:tthough rainfall is suffi-
cient to wash down a proportion of the clay to form a subsoil heavier than the
surface soil, conditions are not favourable for the mobilisation of free iron oxide,
except such as is associated with the clay fraction, Calcium carbonate may or
may not be present in the illuvial horizons, depending on its presence or absence
in the parent materials.

In tropical Australia there are many lateritic areas, of which those in Western
Queensland have recently been described and mapped by Whitchouse (1940).
To the north-west of Charters Towers occurs an extensive area of red_ soils
associated with the basaltic flow known as the “great basalt wall.” These appear
to be residual soils associated with a peneplain some 1,100 feet above sea level
and they are characterised by heavy ironstone gravel. In all probability this area
is related to the Alice Tableland, somewhat to the south, and described by Whute-
house (1940), on which the soils, similarly residual, are more podsolic in
character.

TABLE 8 ~ ANALYTICAL DATA RELATING TO RESIDUAL AND LATERITIC PODSOLIC SOILS.

Locality Barrington Stapleton

Sample No.

Gravel in original
sample %

Horizon

Depth (inches)
Colour

Reaction (pH)

nD
wo

Mechanical Analysis:
Coarse sand

Fine sand

Silt

Clay

L.on acid treatment
Moisture

.
mwmePemoan

4
3.
7
4.
fo)
0)

el A
Lion ignition
Nitrogen (N)
Phosphoric acid(Po0.
Potesh (K,0) E
Soluble salts

Profile from Barrington, Nth. Qld., at junction of Lolworth-Balfe’s Creek Road with
Allendale-Toomba road. Twenty-four miles from Allendale. Vegetation con-
sists of a low tree savannah woodland of wattle, silver-leaved ironbark, broad-
leaved yellow jacket and speargrass. A coarse grey sand with superficial layer
of very coarse sand or fine gravel. The gravel is quartz. ‘Rainfall, 26 inches.
Length of season, 4°8 months.

Profile from near Stapleton, N.T., at the junction of the Stapleton, Brock’s Creek
and Daly River roads. A savannah woodland with box, ironwood and bloodwood
with ironstone gravel in the profile. Rainfall, ca. 50 inches. Length of season,
5-5 months.

At a somewhat higher elevation on Chudleigh Park similar red soils occur
associated with heavy ironstone gravel. In the immediate vicinity of Darwin and
for some distance to the south, soils rich in ironstone gravel or associated with
massive laterite give rise to similar red and red-brown soils.

Red loams over deeply weathered basalt are characteristic of the Atherton
Tableland. Many typical red loams have been described previously (Prescott
and Ilosking, 1936). Bryan (1938) considers that many such red loams are

135

residual in character and should be described as residual red earths. It is probable
that a detailed study of the Atherton Tableland would reveal some relationships
between soil types and late geological history. Soils derived directly under
current climatic conditions from parent rock occur generally as red-brown earths,
and it is probable that the alluvial soils on the Katherine in the Northern Terri-
tory are immature variants of the group.

The vegetation under these groups is nearly always savannah woodland with
cucalypts of various species as the dominant trees. The grasses include both
Themeda and Heteropogon Contortus, the latter being associated probably more
with podsolised soils. In the wetter areas sclerophyll forest, as near Darwin, or
rain forest, as near Atherton, may be associated with these red soils.

3oth these examples show a degree of eluviation with an accumulation of
clay in the subsoil. In addition, the profile from Cardigan shows an increasing
degree of base-saturation in the deeper horizons, although calcium carbonate 1s
not actually present in quantity.

8 Podsolised soils.

There are two main groups of podsolised soils in tropical Australia, a group
near the coast and in regions of high rainfall which may be considered as of
normal occurrence, aud another inland group which may be considered as residual
fronz a former wet cycle and which are generally associated with lateritic forma-
tions. The northern margins of the Alice Tableland to the south-west of Charters
Towers afford good examples of this latter group,

Two examples are given in Table 8 of a residual podsol from the Balfe’s
Creek district in Queensland and of a podsol derived from lateritic material in

TABLE 9 — ANALYTICAL DATA RELATING TO PODSOLIC SOILS.

Adelaide River, N.T. Katherine, N.T.

Semple No.

Horizon
Depth (inches)
Colour

Reaction (pH)

Mechanical Analysis:
Coarse sand
Fine sand
Silt
Clay
Lion acid treatment
Moisture

Chemicsl Analysis:
L.on ignition
Nitrogen (N)
Phosphoric acid (P05:
Potash (K»0)

Goluble salts

o 8

AR MoOnNo

Profile from just south of Adelaide River, level country with chiefly Melaleuca sp. and
very large anthills. Hardpan was present in the B. horizon. Rainfall, 55 inches.

Length of season, 5-4 months.

Profile sampled 16 mites north of ‘Katherine in granitic country—a single layer of
fine white gravel covered the surface with nearly 50% of granitic gravel through-
out the profile; a savannah woodland with ironwood, stringy bark and a little
bloodwood. Rainfall, 40 inches. Length of season, 4-7 months,

136

the vicinity of Stapleton in the Northern Territory. In Table 9 are given data
relating to examples of podsolised soils from the Territory.

9 Swamps and marshes.

A factor of importance in tropical Australia in determining the character of
some of the coastal districts, which is unfamiliar in the south, is the high tidal
range along the coast which determines the character of the lower reaches ot
many of the rivers and which results in the periodic inundation of wide stretches
of coast, resulting in extensive marshes and mangrove belts. Possibly the high
erosive power of the early monsoonal rains is responsible also for extensive
coastal plains and shallow off-shore belts, particularly around the shores of the
Gulf of Carpentaria. These coastal marshes are, or have been, used for salt
reclamation near Burketown and at the mouth of the Roper River. They ave
extensive near Wyndham and Derby, where they may be covered only by the
highest tides or during the wettest part of the monsoon. Only one of these areas
was sampled, near Wyndham, The relevant information is tabulated below.

TABLE 10—ANALYTICAL DATA RELATING TO SAMPLE OF SOIL
FROM A MARSH NEAR WYNDHANM, W.A. (BETWEEN 9-MILE AND
WIRELESS HILL)

Sample No. 5215:

pH - - - - - - 7:0
Total salts % - - - - 2:24
Nitrogen (N) % - - - - 0-052
Phosphoric acid (P:0;) % - - 0-048
Potash (K:0) % - - - - 1:35
Clay % - - - - - 39-5

Elsewhere local permanent springs give rise to swamps associated with
jungle forests or reeds, according to the degree of drainage available. Peats may
occur under these conditions even under a relatively dry climate. At Saxby
Downs a burnt-out peat swamp was observed which had probably been fed from
artesian springs. These peaty arcas are important in the Northern Territory for
market gardening—there is a well-known one near Pine Creek and another on
the King River, near Marranboy.

The lower reaches of the Adelaide and Alligator Rivers, east of Darwin, are
associated with extensive areas of low-lying flooded country with permanent
swamps. On Koolpinyah Station near Darwin the flood plains of the Adetaide
River are relatively accessible and the soil profile was examined in a locality
on the swamp, four miles west of the river itself. ‘The area is regularly flooded
in summer and was still wet in the subsoil when sampled in August. The swamp
carried tall grass, useful as cattle fodder and affording protection to the water
buffalo which is now wild in these areas. In Table 11 are given data relating to
this profile. The heavy texture, acidity of the subsoil, high salt content and thigh
loss on acid treatment due to the presence of gypstm is to be noted. The clay
was highly plastic, and in the third depth was grey with red and yellow mottlings
and inclusions of gypsum.

SOME GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Reaction.

The reaction of the soil expressed in terms of the pH value is generally a
fair index of the degrce of leaching. The soils examined do not show a very
wide range in this respect, and the position is further complicated by the fact that
many of the soils are associated with lateritic parent material and with ironstone
gravels.

137

The most acid soils encountered were a deep subsoil on the flood plain of
the Adelaide River, sampled on Koolpinyah (pH 4:1) and a swamp in the Botanic
Gardens in Darwin (pII 4-5). The most alkaline soils are those belonging to the
heavy-textured grey and brown group, which may reach over pH 9 in the sub-
soils. Some, but not all, of the residual soils or soils derived from lateritic parent
material showed an increase of acidity with depth, a feature of these soils which

TABLE 11 - ANALYTICAL DATA RELATING TO A SWAMP
SOIL ON KOOLPINYAH, N.T.

Depth (inches)
Colour
Reaction (pH)

Mechanical Analysis:

Coarse sand

Fine sand

Silt

Clay

L.on acid treatment
Moistare

L.on ignition
Nitrogen (N)
Phosphoric acid (P20.)
Potash (K20)

Soluble salts

Sodium chloride

has been noted in other countries. The range of pH values observed in the
surface soils of the several groups has been:
3rown soils of light texture - - -
Grey and brown soils of heavy texture -
Red earths and red-brown earths:
(a) ordinary - 7 : -
(b) lateritic - . : -
Podsolised soils - - = .
Alluvial soils of Daly and Katherine Rivers

|
DAD
GINI OO io oe)

Aun Aum
bOAO Cc &%
|

Teakle (1938) has already pointed out the acidic character of the brown
soils occurring under the relatively arid conditions of the north-western soil pro-
vinces of Western Australia.

Fertility Levels

The unimproved pastoral or forest value of any soil under a given set of
climatic conditions is frequently found to be a function of the level of natural
soil fertility. HFrequently a scale of fertility can be expressed in terms of phos-
phate alone, and there is frequently also a correlation between nitrogen content
and phosphate content. The samples secured and examined are too scattered and
inadequate to enable a final opinion to be expressed on tropical Australia as a
whole, but generalisations with respect to specific localities may prove possible.
The chemical fertility will depend to a,great extent on the geological source of
the soil material, and this will apply particularly to the phosphate content, The

138

potash content will, in addition reflect the climatic history of this material
].ittle more can be donc, therefore, than to group soils together from specific
localities for this comparison. The comparison has been restricted to surface
soils. In the case of potash the comparison is made on the basis of the ratio of
k,© to the clay content.

Generally speaking, it may be said ‘that the analyses do not reveal any’ soils
of strikingly high fertility except that those derived from basalt are, as usual.
relatively rich in phosphate. ‘Lhe youngest soils, those derived from recent
alluvium, show the highest ratio of potash to the clay content. Many of the
others, particularly those associated with ironstone gravels, show low ratios for
potash. In the immediate neighbourhood of Darwin relatively high values for

TABLE 12 - SUMMARY OF INFORMATION REGARDING PLANT-FOOD STATUS OF SOME
SOILS FROM TROPICAL AUSTRALIA.

Nitrogen (N) Phosphate (P,0. Potash (K@)
g %

Alluvial Soils;
Fitzroy
Daly
Katherine

Light -
soils
Heavy soils, E.Kimberley

textured brown

N i .

Darwin end Bathurst
Tsland

Batchelor to Katherine

North Qaensiands
Basaltic red earth
residurls 0.089,9.158,0.066] 0.127,0.551,0.094] 0,58,0.78,0,95
Charters Towers to
Millungera 0.021 ~ 0.104 0.011 - 0.082 (0.1) 1,22 - 1,95

phosphate of the order of 0-08% have been noted. One of the basaltic soils
quoted above has a very high value for phosphate (0°3519%). This is from an
old cow-yard growing molasses-grass and is a good example of localised man-
made fertility. Another exceptional soil, not quoted elsewhere in this paper, was
a highly calcareous coastal soil near Darwin derived from fragments of shell and
carrying a dense jungle forest situated between the mangrove belt of the coast
and the sclerophyll forest of the inland ironstone country. Values of 0°252%
were found for nitrogen and 0°258% for P,O,.

Salinity.

There is very little evidence of salinity in any of the samples examined
except where associated with the sea-coast or with tidal marshes, In the Kim-
berleys and the north-west of Western Australia the provision of salt licks for
stock, particularly for sheep, is regarded as essential, Only the sample from
Mirtna on the northern fringe of the brigalow country of Queensland shows any
degree of solonisation, and it is interesting to compare the values for exchange-
able bases in the three profiles specifically examined and quoted elsewhere in this
paper, namely those at Chudleigh Park and Mirtna. In heavy soils gypsum may
be encountered, but this is rarely associated with chlorides.

109 pat al gute sure) ammjxa? nly fo 8110S UMOLE
amen oe TOPRL ties eal ge pf sccoadl “57708 = ey ;

bunpon ronporsed, Ss i hie La SDUIXPUILT a upgqpuns 2.12807

02 goalgns ALNUno02 MOT

spospod junpsey Fe ei FeO ssn TT smypuns pa
Sa.
$7080, wee Fife jo SPUNjATAL pun aq

S25
5

+
>,
‘on

Pegi caus

¢,

Cy
oe
52525]
GOOD

Te6t ‘(1) ‘s9 “isny “S ‘20g “Aoy ‘sus, — Z dt

————

SaTIWooe 00%

oot

O of oT

VWIIWaLlsny TyYok
JO dVW 1110S

oe)
500%

SSL
Pe ettetatete

OOOO?

OOO

139

MAPS

Two maps are published with this account: the first is a guide to the sites
from which the soil samples described have been obtained.

The second map represents the senior author’s interpretation of all the data
so far examined, based on personal traverses and on a re-examination of records
of exploration and geological reports. The two volumes, “Northmost Australia,”
by R. Logan Jack (1921), have proved to be a useful guide to exploration in the
Cape York Peninsula, The recent works by Blake (1938), Bryan (1938) and
Whitehouse (1940), of the University of Queensland, have provided much new
material, In this map twelve zones have been recognised :

1 Ranges and tablelands 8 Red soils, including red-brown earths,
2 Desert sandhills red loanis and residual red earths
3 Desert sandplain 9 Podsols

4 Brown soils of light texture 10 Residual podsols

5 Brown and grey soils of heavy texture 11 Low country subject to periodical
6 Desert loams and channel country flooding

7 Rendzinas and black earths 12 Tidal marshes and deltaic formations

REFERENCES

BLAKE, S$. T. 1938 Proc. Roy. Soc. Old., 49, 154

BRackENBuRY, L. J. 1896 “Northern Territory of South Australia; Report on
Agricultural and other Lands,’’Adelaide

Bryan, W.H. 1938) Proc. Roy. Soc, Old., 50, 21

Cuswincs, C. 1930 Geogr. Jour., 76, 316

Davipson, A. A. 1905 “Journal of Ixplorations in Central Australia, ete.,
1898-1900,” Adelaide

GARDNER, C. A, 1923 Forests Dept. W. Aust., Bull. 32

GavuTigr, E. F. 1935 “L’Afrique Noire Occidentale,” Pacis, 27

Hovtze, N. 1911 ‘Report on Goulburn ‘and other Islands.” Parl. Pap. S. Aust.,
No, 32

Hosxinae, J. S. 1935 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 59, 168

Jack, R. Locan 1921 “Northmost Australia,’ London

Mour, H.C. Jun. 1933, 1934 “De bodem der tropen in het algemeen, en die
van Nederlandsche-Indié in het bijzonder,’ Amsterdam

Prescott, J. A. 1931 Coun. Sei. Ind. Res., Bull. 52

Prescott, J. A. 1938 Jour. Coun. Sci. Ind. Res., 11, 261

Prescotr, J. A., and Hoskrna, J. 5. 1936 ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 60, 35

Prescott, J. A. 1938 Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 62, 226

Prescott, J. A., and Skewrs, H. R. 1938 Trans. Roy. Soc. 5S, Aust., 62, 320

Tearce, L. J. H. 1938 Jour. Roy. Soc. W. Aust., 24, 123

Votsey, A. H. 1939 Jour. and Pro, Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 72, 136

Wurtetrousz, F. W. 1940 Univ. of Qld. Papers, Dept. ot Geol., 2, No. 1

LIFE CYCLE OF THE TREMATODE,
DIPLOSTOMUM MURRAYENSE J. & C.

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and L. MADELINE ANGEL, University of Adelaide

Summary

In 1938 was published an account of Cerearia murrayensis, a common furcocercaria occuring in
Limnaea lessoni in the swamps of the Lower Murray River (Swan Reach and Tailem Bend),
infection being observed from December to May, the infection rate varying from 6 to nearly 50%
(Johnston and Cleland, 1938). Its similarity to C. flexicauda Cort and Brooks from North America
was noted. The parasite was allotted to the Proalaria group (Proalaria is now considered a
synonym of Diplostomum), and its next larval stage, a Diplostomulum, was stated to occur in the
eyes of freshwater fish. The sporocyst stage was also described.

140

LIFE CYCLE OF THE TREMATODE, DIPLOSTOMUM MURRAYENSE J. & C.
By T. Harvey JomNsTon and L. MapveLine ANGEL, University of Adclaide
{Read 12 June 1941]

In 1938 was published an account of Cercaria murrayensis, a common furco-
cerearia occuring in Limnaea lessoni in the swamps of the Lower Murray River
(Swan Reach and Tailem Bend), infection being observed from December to
May, the infection rate varying from 6 to nearly 50% (Johnston and Cleland,
1938). Its similarity to C. flexicauda Cort and Brooks from North America was
noted. The parasite was allotted to the Proalaria group (Proalaria is now con-
sidered a synonym of Diplostomum), and its next larval stage, a Diplostomulum,
was stated to occur in the eyes of freshwater fish. The sporocyst stage was also
described.

Next year an account was given of the metacercaria, Diplostomulum
murravense, obtained from the lens of various species of fish tn about six weeks
after experimental infections with cercariae taken from October to April. The
infection rcute was traced and found to be similar to that described by Van
Haitsma (1931) for D. flexicaudum. A review of the literature relating to the
occurrence of similar parasites in the eyes of freshwater fish in Europe and
North America was also given. These parasites were stated to he of consider-
able economic importance because heavy infection, in the case of very young or
small fish, commonly resulted in high mortality (Johnston and Simpson 1939),

Freshwater fish reported capable of being infected experimentally with
C. murrayensis were golden carp (Carassius auratus), rice fish (Oryzias latipes),
congolli (Pseudaphritis urville’), Pseudomugil signifer and Melanotaenia NIGrans,
the last three being native fish, Natural infection was reported to have been
cbserved in the lens of larger specimens of .the golden carp, Murray cod
(Maccullochella macquariae), callop (Plectroplites ambiguus), and Murray
bream (Therapon bidyana), all from Tailem Bend. Attempts to obtain the adult
stage by feeding diplostomula to laboratory-bred white rats and to muscovy
ducklings led to negative results. It was believed that the adult would be found
in gulls or terns; most probably the silver gull, Larus novachollandiae,

Later experience Jed us to regard the marsh tern, Chlidontas leucopareia, as
the probable host, because of abundance of that bird on the swamps from late
spring to autumn, its food consisting mainly of dragonfly larvae, prawns and small
fish. Thanks to the assistance of Messrs. G. and F. Jacnsch and L, Ellis, we
were able to examine some of these birds, finding ninute diplostomes in four out
of nine of them, taken during the period November to March, some of the para-
sites being very young and sintilar im size and anatomy to the parasites from fish
eyes. On one occasion fish lenses were also present in the digestive tract, and,
on another, abundant remains of very small fish were seen along with various
stages in the development of the trematode from the diplostomulum stage to
the adult,

Since the original account was published, we have found in twelve collec-
tions of Linmaea lessoni taken at Tailem Bend during the summer months 1938-
41, infection varying from 0 to 25%, C. murrayensis being identified from 68 out
of 680 snails, z.¢., in 10% of the total examined during the period.

Eggs from adult diplostomes taken from a marsh last December were added
to a small aquarium containing jaboratory-bred L. lessoni, cercariae (C. murray-
ensis) being noticed 36 days later. Fish (Gambusia affinis) were subjected to
infection by these cercariae, many fully developed diplostomula (fig. 5) being
recovered from the lenses four weeks after the earliest infection; hence the
minimum period may be less than that observed. Daily attempts were made to

Yrans. Roy. Sac. §.A., 65, (1), 25 July 1941

141

infect tadpoles of Limnodynastes tasmaniensis, but this seems to be a refractory
host, since the parasites found in the lens had not passed beyond the tail-less
cercaria stage even after six days from the commencement of infection.

Since the original account of the diplostomulum stage was published, we

have found it occurring under natural conditions during the summer 1940-41 in
the following fish in the Murray River or swamps at Tailem Bend and Murray

Fig. 1, adult. contracted; 2, male system; 3, female system (same specimen as fig 2);
4, adult; 5, 6, diplostomula from Gambusia; 7, 8, 9, successive stages of development
in Chhdomas,; 10, youngest stages seen in Gambusia, All figures were drawn to same
scale. e¢, egg; i, intestine; o, ovary; t, testis; u, uterus; vr, vitelline reservoir:

vs, vesicula seminalis.

sridge: Ketropinna semoni, Carassiops klunsingeri, Melanotaenia nigrans, Nanno-
perca australis, Pseudaphritis urvillei, Craterocephalus fluviatilis, Mugilogobinus
galwayt, Philypnodon grandiceps, Mogurnda adspersa, Percalates colonorum
and Carassius auratus; and from Galavxias attenuatus and G. olidus from
other South Australian localities. Our records indicate that Cercaria

murrayensis has been observed each month from November (rarely October) to

142

May inclusive, and that the diplostomulum stage has been collected from! the lens
of fish in the same locality (Lower Murray) each month from November to
May inclusive, but not in those taken in June, August and October, These
observations indicate that snails (unless the infection has survived the winter)
may become infected in September or October by eggs which have passed through
the winter in the swamp or which have been present in the faeces of the earliest
terns to arrive in the spring. By October cercariae have become available to
infect fish in which fully developed diplostomula may be present in November
when the terns may become infected. Our original observation that infection,
if present, was always light in the case of large fish, can be explained by the habit
of such fish, since they rarely visit the shallow swamps ( where small species and
the young of all species are to be found), but live in the river and decper channels
where the food plants on which Limnaca lessoni feeds, do not find a suitable
environment for their growth.

We have now recorded the occurrence of the diplostomulum stage in the lens
of fifteen species of native ireshwater lish and one introduced species from South
Australia, as well as (experimentally) from two exotic fish (Orvysias and
Gambusia) commonly kept in aquaria. The exteusive range of the species of
Ssh concerned and the wide variety of orders and iamilies involved suggest that
the parasite may be expected to be able to infect additional species. Dubois
(1938, 192) listed over forty species of freshwater fish from the northern hemi-
sphere recorded by various observers as hosts for the diplostomulum stage of an
allied Diplostomuim (D. spathaceune) which oceuts in gulls in Europe and North
America.

The length of egg-bearing specimens of Diplostomum murrayense, lying flat
in fluid, without compression, ranged from -5 to l mm. The total length of nine
such worms, the length and breadth of the fore- and hind-body respectively, and
the approximate ratio of the length of the post-body to the tore-body, were as
follows: (1) *S mm. (:28 & °22 -+ :22 X 154), 1:°78; (2) *5 mn.
(26 & -24 + +24 & +16), 1:°9; (3) 54 mm. (25 « +19 + -29 * -13),
1:1:16; (4) °67 mm., (36 & 36 -—F “31 « +18), 1:°86; (5) *67 mm.,
(33 & +28 + 34 & +238), 1:15 (6) ‘85 mm. (4 & °35 + °45 & “19},
1:1°12; (7) °88 mm.. (-47 & 43 4+ “41 & 729), 1:°87; (8) -89 mm.,
(53 &% °3 4+ +36 & +21), 1:°68; (9) L mm. (5% 42 + +5 & 23), 1:1
Most adults seen were ‘5 to -7 mm., few between. -F7 and -9, and extremely few
measured 1 mmm, in length. Vhe breadths and relative lengths of the two parts
of the body varied, but the post-body was usually approximately equal to, or
slightly greater than, the fore-body in length.

A few strongly contracted specimens with the hind-body lying at right
angles to the fore-body were also measured (seen in lateral view) in fluid:

(1) estimated total length -84 mm., fore-body (including its posterior region
projecting beyond the hind-body) +55 mim, long, hind-body *55 mm. with a
mnaximium dorso-ventral diameter +26 mm.; (2) -80 mm., ‘67 mm., °3 (markedly
arched ventrally), and +34 respectively; (3) -88, °65 (with depth *2 mm.).
-42 and -32 mm. respectively.

Anterior sucker *04--06 mm. diameter, rounded or slightly longer than wide.
Ventral sucker about same size, outline circular or slightly broader than long,
anterior border (in fully adult specimens) distant from the anterior end of the
worm 44 to 47%, occasionally 50%, of length of fore-body. Anterior glands
each between ‘05 and °06 mm. long, with definite ;cavity directed antero-laterally
or almost forwards. Holdfast (tribocytic) organ about *1--12 mm. long, about
-1--15 broad, sometimes round; projecting prominently (especially in strongly
contracted worms) ; often overlapping part of ventral sucker, but more usually a
slight interval between the two organs ; opening slightly longitudinal, with short
groove leading into a canal surrounded by deeply-staining tribocytic glands;

143

breadth of organ about *43 mm, or less, under half maximum breadth of fore-body.
Genital pore dorsal, about -04--05 mm. from posterior end; excretory pore a short
distance behind it.

Anterior sucker directed more or less ventrally; prepharynx very short,
‘Ol mm, long, above end of oral sucker; pharynx elongate, -04--06 mm. long,
-02--03 mnv. wide; oesophagus short, °01 mm. long; caeca extending back close
to base of tribocytic organ and almost reaching end of worn.

The reproductive system has the same general disposition as in D. fleai-
caudum, D. spathaceum, D. huronense and D, indistinctum, The testes have the
form usual in the genus, The front of the anterior testis hes at about -13 mm,
behind the junction of the fore- and hind-body '(i.¢., at less than 30% of the length
of the hind-body), and adjacent to, or partly above, the posterior edge of the ovary.
Its length is about ‘05 mm., and the breadth “1mm. It is longer directly behind
the ovary and tapering somewhat towards the opposite side of the body. The
second testis, measuring ‘07 by +13 mm., is curved in transverse section, with its
limbs directed ventrally, and with its front edge just behind (55-64%) half the
total length of the post-body. The vasa deferentia were not traced fully but they
pass back between the limbs of the second testis. The large rounded vesicula
seminalis lies just behind, and partly below, the arch of the second testis. The
narrow ejaculatory duct enters the genital atrium above the uterus.

The spherical ovary, ‘05 mm. diameter, lics dorsally, immediately in front of
the first testis and may be partly overlapped by it. The anterior end of the organ
is at about ‘07 mm. (at 15% of the total length of the hind-body). The oviduct
travels back above part of the anterior testis to pass through Mehlis’s gland
lying dorsally between the two testes. The yolk reservoir is ventral and trans-
versely placed, entering the ootyp [rom below. The uterine duct passes down-
wards and curves so as to lie antero-ventrally from, and parallel with, the ootyp,
and then forwards as the ascending uterus below the anterior testis, extending
into the region of the junction of the fore- and hind-body, It then curves back,
traversing the ventral region below the testes and ootyp to reach the genital
atrium. Laurer’s canal is short and opens dorsally between the ovary and the
anterior testis. Yolk glands extend forwards into the region just in front of the
ventral sucker. The follicles obscure most of the organs in the hind-body, except
in the vicinity of the genital atrium. ‘here are 1 to 12 large eggs, usually 3 or 4,
in the uterus; they measure *072-71 mm, by *04--06 mm., generally +09 by +06.

D. murrayense differs from D, flexicaudwm as figured by Van Haitsma
(1931), and D. spathaceum as figured by Krause (1914), Fuhrmann (1928),
and Dubois (1938), in its dimensions, body ratios, position of the ovary and
number of eggs. It closely resembles ), huronense La Rue (1927) and especially
D. indistinctum Guberlet (1923, syn. D. confuswm Gub. 1922) in the disposition
of its organs, but differs in the detailed measurements of them and particularly
in the size of the worms.

Some very young stages of the parasite were recovered from two marsh
terns. Tor comparison with the youngest obtained, we mention the dimensions
(in ») of the diplostomulum stage (killed with boiling formalin) as given in the
original account: body length 231-392 (mean 296); breadth 154-215 (177);
anterior sucker 22-43 (34) long by 42-51 (47) broad; ventral sucker 30-37 (34)
long by 34-47 (39) broad; holdfast 71 long by 79 broad. The largest specimens
we obtained from Gambusia were rather larger than those described but were
somewhat swollen by postmortem changes in the dead fish before we found them,
the normal dimensions having probably become slightly increased—measurements
intmm.: *4--44 long, -2-:25 broad; anterior sucker °05 by -05--06; ventral sucker
‘O05 diameter ; holdfast -09 by -06 and 07 by ‘07. The smallest found in the bird
host measured -3 mm. long by -12, with fore-body -28 long and a minute post-
body -02 long by -05; anterior sucker ‘035 by :03; ventral sucker -035 by +025;

144

glandular areas (head) ,-015--02 long; holdfast -04 by ‘018 (grooved portion),
‘06 by -04 if glandular region be included; pharynx -025 by °013; oesophagus
‘Ol long; genital anlagen represented by relatively few deeply-staining cells in
the fore-body behind the holdfast and by cells in the post-body indicating the
differentiating genital ducts and pore. Another was slightly larger but did not
exhibit any differentiation into fore- and post-body. Its dimensions were:
-45 mm, long, *19 broad; anterior sucker -04 by +03; posterior sucker -035 by ‘04;
glandular areas ‘055; holdfast ‘09 broad; pharynx -03 by -02; genital anlage
pyriform, much larger than in the preceding specimen but not differentiated,
situated in the posterior -12 mm. behind the deeply-staining paired holdfast
glands. In its characters it resembled closely the diplostomulum stage. Another
young worm, ‘44 mm. long, possessed the following features: fore-body -3 by
-16; post-body +14 by ‘1; anterior sucker -03 by °035; ventral sucker -03 by -03;
holdfast prominent, -06 by -06, with well marked groove and two deeply staining
glandular masses; pharynx ‘03 by 02; genital anlagen in three masses represent-
ing ovary, anterior testis and posterior testis, also a cord of cells representing
the terminal portions of the differentiating uterus and seminal vesicle, <A
specimen ‘4mm. long, with fore-body -3 by -19 and hind-body -1 by -11, exhibited
a similar stage of reproductive development as seen in the preceding worm. Yolk
glands seem to be fully differentiated before the sex organs become functional,
the latter occurring when the parasites have become about *5 mim. in length,

In addition to the diplostomula, already referred ta above, taken from
Gambusia, we obtained from the same fish several very early stages, also from
the lens. Some of these were practically tail-less cercariae (fg, 10) measuring
from ‘14 by -04 to -19 by -05, with the anterior organ still persisting and with
rows of spines around the head end, as well as a prominent row surrounding the
projecting ventral sucker. A minute diplostomulum ‘(fig. 6) was also obtained,
measuring ‘15 mm. long, -05 broad; with an anterior sucker -02 mm. long by
‘024 mm.; a posterior sucker ‘02 by -02 mm.; a tribocytic organ immediately
behind the latter and provided with a deep groove; and head glands like those of
older diplostomula; but all spines had disappeared from the body and from the
ventral sucker. “hese various stages from Gambusia were obtained as a result
of submitting the fish to infection at short intervals by a very small number of
cercariae.

Diplostonuum murrayense is the first Australian Strigeate trematode whose
complete life cycle is known, and is the first member of the genus, as now
restricted, to be described from, the Commonwealth.

‘Type material of the various stages is deposited in the South Australian
Museum, Adelaide. Acknowledgment is made of the generous assistance
rendered by Messrs. G. and F. Jaensch and J. Ellis of Tailem Bend in regard to
material; and by the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of
Adelaide.

LITERATURE

Dusors, G. 1938 Monographie des Strigeida (Trematoda). Mem. Soc.
Neuchat. Sci. Nat., 6, 535 pp.

EFUHRMANN, QO. 1928 Trematoda. Ktikenthal’s Handb. d. Zool., 2, 1-140

GuBERLET, J, E. 1922 Journ. Parasit., 9, 6-14

Jounston, T. II., and CLeLAnp, E. R. 1938 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 62,
127-131

Jounston, T. H., and Simpson, E, R. 1939 Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 63,
230-237

Krause, R. 1914 Z. Wiss. Zool., 112, 92-238

La Rug, G. R. 1927 Tr. Amer. Micr. Soc., 46, 26-35

Van Haitsm4, J.P. 1931 Pap. Mich. Acad. Sci., 13, 1930 (1931), 483-516

Wholly set up and printed in Australia by Gillingham & Co. Limited, 106 Currie Street, Adelaide

VOL. 65 PART 2 19 DECEMBER, 1941

TRANSACTIONS OF
THE ROYAL SOCIETY
OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

“ADELAIDE

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS
KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE

Price - - Twenty-one Shillings

Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide,
for transmission by post as a periodical

REPORT ON FORAMINIFERAL SOUNDINGS AND DREDGINGS OF THE
F.LS. "ENDEAVOUR" ALONG THE CONTINENTAL SHELF OF THE
SOUTH-EAST COAST OF AUSTRALIA

By FREDERICK CHAPMAN, A.L.S., Hon. F.R.M.S.

Summary

The material described was collected by the "Endeavour' about the year 1912. Captain Dannevig
forwarded it to me through the late Robert Etheridge., Jnr., together with a schedule of the samples
dated 23 June 1913. Two other samples of soundings, collected about the same time, and included
in this schedule, have already been described.” Unavoidable delay in carrying out further
descriptions of this interesting material has been due to stress of official and private work prior to
my retirement as First Commonwealth Palaeontologist.

145

REPORT ON FORAMINIFERAL SOUNDINGS AND DREDGINGS OF THE
F.LS. “ENDEAVOUR” ALONG THE CONTINENTAL SHELF OF THE
SOUTH-EAST COAST OF AUSTRALIA

By Freperick CuarmMan, A.L.S., Hon. F.R.M.S.
[Read 10 July 1941]
Puates VII, VIII, IX
INTRODUCTORY

The material described was collected by the “Endeavour” about the year
1912. Captain Dannevig forwarded it to me through the late Robert Etheridge,
Jnr., together with a schedule of the samples dated 23 June 1913. Two other
samples of soundings, collected about the same time, and included in this schedule,
have already been described.) Unavoidable delay in carrying out further
descriptions of this interesting material has been due to stress of official and
private work prior to my retirement as First Commonwealth Palaeontologist.

SCOPE OF INVESTIGATION

The present Report relates to the soundings marked E 3915 to E 3923, com-
prising all those samples located towards the eastern end of Bass Strait, near
the boundary of Victoria and New South Wales, chiefly east by south from Green
Cape; east from Babel Island; and on the eastern edge of Bass Strait.

As these soundings range from 65 to 505 fathoms, the results have a direct
bearing on the form and contour of the continental shelf around the south-
eastern coastline of Australia, in which the late Capt. Dannevig was so keenly
interested. (See Biol. Res. F.I.S. “Endeavour,” VII—The Continental Shelf of
the East Coast of Australia, 3, (6), 1915). The remainder of the Samples
included in this collection, reserved for a further Report, were chiefly obtained
from localities centred about the Great Australian Bight, off Eucla.

These Reports have been made possible through the courtesy of Sir David
Rivett, K.C.M.G., F.R.S., and Dr. H. Thompson, Chief of Division of Fisheries,
C.S.LR. The writer is also indebted to Mr. S. Fowler, of the same Department,
for facilities in consulting the charts of the area investigated.

DESCRIPTION OF SAMPLES AND THEIR CONTENTS

SAMPLE E 3915

Loc.—East from Babel Island (east of Vlinders Island), 63 fathoms.
28 October 1912. Dried Material—Grey foraminiferal and shelly ooze, with a
greenish tinge. Coarse Siflings contain many larger Foraminifera, as Lenticu-
lina, Saracenaria, Dentalium, Eponides, Elphidium, Pyrgo, Pelosina, H. aplophrag-
moides, Dorothia and Textularia, Also abundant tube-building Worms, Polyzoa,
Brachiopoda, many Mollusca and Ostracoda.

® Biol. Res, “Endeavour,” 1, (3), 309-311, 1912, Also Report of the Foraminifera
and Ostracoda obtained by the F.1.S. “Endeavour” from the East Coast of Tasmania and
off Cape Wiles, South Australia, 3, (1), 1915, 1-51, pls. i-iii,
Trans, Roy. Soc, S.A., 65, (2), 19 December 1941
A

146

POLYZOA
Order CHEILOSTOMATA

Caperea GRANDIS Hincks 1881
Hincks 1881, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), 8, 50, pl. iti, fig. 4; MacGillivray, 1895,

Trans. Roy. Soc. Vict., 4, 25, pl. in, fig. 9; Stach, 1935, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.,

47, (2), ns., 342, pl. xii, fig. 3.

Common and typical. This species first appears as a fossil in the lower
Miocene of Balcombe Bay, Flinders, the Moorabool Valley, Muddy Creek and
the Mitchell River, Bairnsdale; also in the Lower Pliocene {Kalimnan) at Mac-
Donald’s, Muddy Creek and in the Sorrento Bore at 726 fect. In the living
condition it has been found on the cable in Bass Strait, at Western Port, Jakes
Entrance, Port Phillip Heads, 22 miles cast of Port Jackson at 80 fathoms and
at Darnley Island, Torres Strait (10-30 fathoms), as recorded by L. W. Stach.

CABEREA DARWINII Busk 1884
Busk 1884, Chall. Rep. Polyzoa, pt. i, 29, pl. xxxii, fig. 65 MacGillivray (in

McCoy), Prod. Zool. Vict., 1887, dec. xiv, 141, pl. cxxxvii, fig. 1-5; Jbid.,

1895, Trans. Roy. Soc. Viet., 4, 25, pl. ii, fig. 10, 11.

Rare. The original, living, forms were described from New Zealand. Those
from Victoria were from Port Phillip Heads (MacGillivray) and Portland
(Maplestone). The fossil specimens are noted from the Tertiary of Muddy
Creek near Hamilton.

CELLARIA GRAcILIS (Busk 1852)
Salicornaria gracilis Busk 1852, Brit. Mus. Cat., pt. i, 17.
Cellaria gracilis (Busk), MacGillivray, 1895, op. cit., 30, pl. iti, fig. 26.

Common and typical. Fossil specimens have been recorded from the Lower
Miocene of Balcombe Bay and Muddy Creek. As a living species MacGillivray
notes it from Queenscliff and Sealers’ Cove, Wilson’s Promontory.

CELLARTA RIGIDA var. VENUSTA MacGillivray 1895
MacGillivray 1895, op. supra cit., 30, pl. iii, fig. 24.
Very abundant. Found fossil im the Lower Miocene of Balcombe Bay,
Muddy Creek and Bairnsdale, Victoria. Living, Australia.

CELLARIA TENUIROSTRIS (Busk 1852)
Salicornaria tenuirostris Busk 1852, op. cit., 17.
Cellaria tenuirostris (Busk), MacGillivray (in McCoy), 1880, Prod. Zool., Vict.
dec. v, 49, pl. xlix, fig. 3.
Very abundant. This species was collected by Baron v. Mueller from
Queensland, Sealers’ Cove and Cape J-e Febre (det. by MacGillivray).

CONESCHARELLINA BIARMATA (Maplestone 1909)
Bipora biarmata Maplestone, Rec. Aust. Mus., 7, (4), 1909, 268, pl. Ixxv,
fig. La, b.
Frequent. Previously recorded 22 miles east of Port Jackson in 80 fathoms,
H.M.C.S. “Miner.”

CONESCHARELLINA PHILIPPINENSIS (Busk 1854)
Lunulites philippinensis Busk, Brit. Mus. Cat., pt. it, 1854, p. 101.
Bipora philippinensis (Busk), MacGillivray, 1895, Trans. Roy. Soc. Vict., 4, 89,
pl. xii, fig. 2.

147

Occasional specimens. Fotnd fossil in marls of Lower Miocene age at Bal-
combe Bay and Muddy Creek. Abundant in borings at Lakes Entrance, in beds
of the same age (Imray Bore and others). Living off the coast of New South
Wales.

CELLEpoRA Fossa (Haswell 1881)
Sphaerophora fossa Haswell, Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 1881, 5, 42.
Cellepora fossa (Hasw.), MacGillivray, op. cit., 1895, 108, pl. xiv, fig. 8-10.

Rare. Found fossil in most Lower Miocene marls in Victoria. Living
around the Australian coast. C. M. Maplestone records it from 22 miles east of
Port Jackson (80 fathoms).

Retepora babelensis sp. nov.
Pl. vi, fig. 1-3
Description—Holotype specimen. Zoarium slender, ramose, branching twice.
ength, 5-5 mm. Zooecial tubes comparatively long and prominently recurved,

as in R. fissa and R. schnapperensis. Margin of zooecial tubes ragged, often,
spinous and frequently everted, sometimes with a notch on the lower edge.
Diameter of zooecial tubes, 0-19 mm. Zooecial tubes three or four in a more or
less oblique series. Avicularia as a minute oval or longitudinal slit. Ovicells
with a transverse slit-like opening.

The reverse face shows a rectangular or irregularly hexagonal areolation, as
in Retepora fissa MacGillivray.

East from’ Babel Island, 63 fathoms. Lare,

Order CYCLOSTOMATA
Crista scaLarts MacGillivray 1895
MacGillivray, op. cit., 1895, 119, pl. xvi, fig, 1.

Common. Litherto found fossil in the Lower Miocene of Corio Bay,

Geelong.
IDMONEA MILNEANA d’Orbigny 1839
d@’Orb., Voy. dans ?Amér, Mérid., 1839, pt. v, 20. MacGillivray (in McCoy),

1882, Prod. Zool. Vict., dec. vii, 29, pl. Ixviii, fig. 1. Jd., 1895, Trans. Roy.

Soc. Vict., op cit., 124, pl. xvil, fig. 1, 2.

Abundant. Fossil records in Victoria are: Lower Miocene of Muddy Creek
and Bairnsdale. As a living form this widely distributed species is known from
South America, Florida and irom Australian waters. All Australian examples,
fossils and recent, seem to be typical,

Mecynoecia (Entalophora) dannevigi sp. nov.
(PL vii, fig. +)

Description of Type—Zoarium dendroid, slender, once-branched and
shghtly curved. J.ength, 14 mm.; breadth of stipe, 0°4 mm. Zooecia long, tubular
and irregularly disposed but sometimes double or nearly adjacent, length of tubes
cire. 0-8 mm., diameter 0°22 mm. The wall of the zoarium is somewhat densely
punctate. The zooecia are comparatively smooth but for the presence of fine
longitudinal grooves. Colour of this recent zoarium is of a delicate plum-brown
tint.

Species abundant in this sample.

A closely related species is Mecynoecia proboscidea (Milne Edwards) which,
by the way, has a cosmopolitan distribution both in time and space. It ranges
from the Cretaceous to Recent in America and Europe, whilst it is common in
the Lower Miocene of Gippsland. The present specimens are of a more tentious

148

structure and have no cortical thickening of the wall. Entalophora australis (Busk)
of the Lower Miocene of Muddy Creek lives also in Australian seas, but is a
distinctly incrassate form with fewer and larger zooecia.

MOLLUSCA
In checking and identifying the names of these, and of the Brachiopoda,
J have had the expert assistance of my friend, Mr. C, J. Gabriel. A small propor-
tion of species were recorded by the late Charles Hedley, from “‘Endeavour”
dredgings off Cape Wiles, South Australia.) These are indicated by an asterisk.

PELECYPODA

Poroleda spatulata Hedley (c.); Sarepta tellinaeformis Hedley (v.r.);
Arcoperna recens Tate (v.r.); Chlamys famigerator Iredale (cf. *C. anti-
australis Hedley) (r.); Myodora aff. antipodum Smith (v.r.); *Venericardia
amabilis (Deshayes) (v.r.); Myrtaea gabrieli sp. nov. (1.) (vide infra) ; Diplo-
donta globulosa A, Adams (v.r.) ; *Cardium pulchellum Gray (ab.) ; Macrocallista
planatella (Lamarck) (v.r., Juv.).

SCAPHOPODA
Dentalium spp. (fragments, indet.).

GASTEROPODA
*Turritella atkinsoni Tate and May (c.); *Vermicularia flava Verco (f.);
Nassarius semigranosus (Dunker) (f.); Marginella inconspicua Sow. (f.);
M. gatliffi May (v.r.); Cylichnella protumida Hedley (v.r.); Retusa cf. cumteri
Crosse and Fischer (v.r.); *Muitra cf. stadialis Hedley (v.r.); Crassispira cf.
lacteola Verco (v.t.); ? Filodrillia sp. (v.r.).

BRACHIOPODA

*Campages jaffaensis (Blochmann) (r.).

Note—The Foraminifera and Ostracoda found in the foregoing and suc-
ceeding samples are collected in the Table of Distribution at the end of the
Description of the Dredgings and before the Systematic portion of the work deal-
ing with the above-named groups. The abundance of the species in the Samples
is indicated in the Table by the relative and not actual number of examples, and
elsewhere in the text by small letters, as follows: Very Rare, 1 (v.r.); Rare,

2-3 (r.); Frequent, 4-7 (f.); Common, 8-16 (c.); Very Common, > 16 (v.c.).

SAMPLE E 3916

Loc.—33 miles east by south from Green Cape, north of the Victorian border.
From anchor. Dried Material—A pale grey, tenacious, calcareous mud, Finest
Washings contain an abundance of coccoliths, denoting a rich plankton in this
area. These coccoliths are of great interest from a palaeontological point of view,
for they are structurally similar and of the same dimensions as those found in
the Upper Oligocene marls of the Lakes Entrance borings East Gippsland.
The richness of this planktonic sediment is a good indication of its
suitability as a fishing ground. The remainder of the finest sediments of this
sample consists of a few minute shell fragments, some minute Foraminifera
(cf. Discorbis) and occasional siliceous sponge spicules and stellate spicules of

@ Hedley, C, 1911, Zool. Results, F.I.S. “Endeavour,” 1, (1), 91-96. Idem, ibid.,
1914, 2, (i), 65-70, See also Iredale, T., 1925, Rec. Austr. Mus., 14, No. 4, 249-270,
pls. xli-xliii.

149

Tunicates. Medium Fine Siftings comprise numerous echinoid (salenid) spines,
siliceous sponge spicules (cf. Tethys), abundant spicules of Tunicates (Lepto-
clinum) and molluscan bivalved shells in the neanic stage (cf. Lissarca). The
Foraminifera and Ostracoda here belong especially to thin-shelled forms, indicat-
ing a pelagic and nektic fauna.

SAMPLE E 3917

Loc—Eastern edge, Bass Strait. 140 fathoms. 12 December 1912. Dried
Material—Cream-coloured, fine-grained calcareous mud, Finest Washings con-
sist largely of minute crystallised rhombs of calcite, comprising about 40% ; also
minute molluscan shell-fragments and Foraminifera, A minute quantity of
angular quartz grains present. The crystalline calcitic rhombs mentioned are so
sharply defined that they suggest dolomite at first sight, but when treated with
cold HC] they dissolve almost entirely, leaving a thin trace of ferruginous residue.
(See Note below.) Medium Siftings contain a fair number of echinoid spines
(salenids), frequent valves of Ostracoda and abundant Foraminifera, together
with some fragments of Polyzoa. Floatings contain an abundance of Globigerina,
Lagena and Bolivina. Amongst the larger fragments, after washing, there is a
somewhat decomposed shell, with united valves, of Cardium pulchellum, measur-
ing 15 mm. in length and 12 mm. in height; also fragments of Dentalium and
Turritella,

The following Potyzoa also occurred in this sample: Cellaria rigida var.;
venusta MacGill; Crisia acropora Busk and Mecynoecia dannevigi sp. nov.

Notre ON THE OCCURRENCE OF CRYSTALS OF CARBONATE OF LIME IN ROTH
RECENT AND Fosst. DEPOSITS, AND THE PROBABLE CONDITIONS UNDER
WHICH THEY WERE FORMED

During the past few years, whilst examining Lower Miocene marls from
deep borings in East Gippsland, I have repeatedly met with rhombohedral crystals
of Calcite in the finer washings.

At first they seemed to be possibly referable to dolomite, on account of the
sharpness of their outlines. This doubt was solved, however, by their complete
disappearance when treated with cold hydrochloric acid, thus proving them to be
calcite crystals.

Whilst examining the recent deposits of the present series from Bass Strait,
and particularly that of EF 3917, from the eastern edge of Bass Strait, at 140
fathoms, I was struck with the large proportion of these calcitic crystals. They
brought to mind the fact of their previous occurrence in the washings of the
fossiliferous marls of Lower Miocene age in Gippsland, which sediments were
deposited in an ancient trough formerly contiguous with the Southern Ocean.

In both fossil and recent sediments these calcite crystals are of somewhat
variable size, but generally much larger in ancient Miocene deposits than in
Recent. Inthe Miocene marls of the Imray Well in East Gippsland, for example,
the average diameter is 0-04 mm., whilst. from Recent soundings only 0-006 mm.
In Miocene examples I have sometimes detected the “nail-head” termination on
an occasional prism.

It is somewhat remarkable that there are so few references to the occurrence
of free Calcite in descriptions of present-day sediments of the ocean. Murray
and Renard“), in their “Deep Sea Deposits,” p. 204-5, have recorded such an
occurrence from “a highly characteristic Radiolarian ooze,” taken at 4,475
fathoms, Sta. 225, lat. 11° 24’ N., long. 143° 16’ E, between New Guinea and
Japan, which contains “some very peculiar white-coloured aggregations composed

@) Report, ‘Challenger,’ Deep Sea Deposits, 1891.

150

of minute rhombohedral crystals, which when treated with dilute acid decompose
with liberation of carbonic acid, but a flocculent residue is left behind, as well as
microscopic granules; we are inclined to consider these crystals as calcite or
dolomite.”

The crystals referred to by Murray and Renard are shown on pl. xxvii, fig. 5,
of their Report, where it can be seen that they have exactly half the diameter
(0:003 mim.) of the crystals occurring in the present sounding (E 3917).

The minute crystals of hydrated calcium oxalate which Earland found in
the deposits from the Weddell Sea (‘‘Scotia” Exped. 1902-4)“ cannot easily be
mistaken for the present ones, for they are tetragonal bipyranids and show an
“envelope” structure of the facets; moreover, they are ten times the diameter.

As regards the probable cause of the deposition of Calcite crystals in marine
sediments, this is not far to seek. The normal calcium carbonate, as found in
marine shells, is very slightly soluble, and average sea water contains only 0-12
parts per thousand, After remaining in contact with the same substance in a
state of exceedingly fine division, the sea water may “take up as much as 0°65
parts per thousand (see “The Ocean” by Sir John Murray, p. 214, Home Uni-
versity Library).

It is known that polar waters contain a minimum of calcic carbonate, hence
the thin-shelled faunas of those regions; and that by a rise in the temperature
of oceanic waters increased solution is induced. It follows then, that, as in the
warmer waters of Bass Strait, where oceanic currents are prev alent, the super-
saturated water, meeting with colder flows, will consequently yicld up this dis-
solved calcic carbonate, down to its normal saturation point. Thus the presence
of these calcitic rhombs points directly to an area of ‘sedimentation over which
currents of varying temperatures are passing.

SAMPLE E 3918

“Loc.—"Lat. 37° 21’ 20” S,, long. 150° 24” 25” E. Foraminiferal sand.
2 October 1912. Washings of mud from Agassiz Trawl. Depth, 505 fathoms.
F.LS. ‘Endeavour’.” Dried Material—Greenish-grey shelly (chiefly fora-
miniferal), loose, calcareous marl. Fine Washings show abundant angular quartz.
a large proportion of tetractinellid sponge spicules and numerous coccoliths. Also
occasional minute Foraminifera, chiefly Discorbis, In the Medium [WVashings
Foraminifera and Ostracoda are abundant; tetractinellid sponge spicules occa-
sional; ovoid mud pellets (excreta) in great profusion, Coarse Siftings contain.
besides abundant ovoid mud pellets and occasional polished quartz grains, the
following organisms: ForamMINIFERA—Large forms, especially arenaceous ones.
ECcHINODERMATA—Spines of spatangoid sca-urchins and of one of the Centre-
chinoida (purplish red, hollow and with oblique rings of spinules). PoLtyzoa—
Rare; represented chiefly by Crisia acropora Busk, Cellaria gracilis (Busk) and
C. rigida MacGill. var. perampla Waters. Motiusca—Amiong these are: Sarepta
obolella (Tate); Nuculana pala (Hedley); Lisserca rubricata Tate; Philobrya
pectinata Hedley; cf. Carditella; Creseis virgula Rang; Clio pyramidata Linn. ;
Limacina inflata VOrb.; Volvula rostrata (A. Adams), This latter species was
recorded by Chas. Hedley from dredgings by the “Thetis” at 63 to 75 fathoms
off Port Kembla, New South Wales (Sci. Res. Mem. Aust. Mus., 4, No. 6, 1903,
p. 394.

Also Prsces—Otoliths of fish, indet.

(“Discovery Reports, pt. iv, 1936. Foraminifera. Additional Records, A. Earland_
With a Report on some Crystalline Components of the Weddell Sea Deposits, F. A.
Bannister and M. H. Hey.

151

SAMPLE E 3919

Loc—*Lat. 37° 21’ 20” S., long. 150° 24” 25” E, Depth, 505 fathoms.
Washing from mud brought up in Agassiz Trawl.” Dried Material—Greenish-
grey fine shelly and foraminiferal mud. J*ine Washings, rich in plankton (cocco-
liths, etc.) ; numerous broken siliceous sponge spicules; a small proportion of fine
angular quartz sand and other terrigenous material. Ostracods chiefly in these
siftings. Medium Washings with a large pelagic foraminiferal fauna. Also
numerous ovoid mud pellets. Coarse Siftings contain tetractinellid sponge
spicules, echinoid spines (spatangoid ).

Po.yzoa include Cellaria gracilis Busk, Caberea grandis Uincks, Cone-
scharellina philippinensis (Busk), and Crisia acropora Busk. Mortusca—
Nuculana pala (Hedley), Poroleda ensicula (Angas), Syrnola spp., Turritella
sinuata Reeve, Nassarius tasmanicus (T. Woods), Clio sp. and Dentaliun sp.

A large proportion of this residue is composed of ovoid mud pellets. There
are also some fish otoliths present.

SAMPLE E 3920

Loc—*“Lat. 37° 21’ 20” S., long, 150° 297 25” E. 33 miles east by south
from Green Cape, 470 fathoms.” Mud with a greenish-grey tinge; also rubbly
rock with corals. Fine Washings—Containing few coccoliths, broken sponge
spicules and some angular quartz sand. Also minute Foraminifera, as Discorbis.
Floatings with numerous Lagenae. Medium Siftings—Rich in echinoid spines
(spatangoid), alcyonarian spicules, tetractinellid sponge spicules, as well as
Foraminifera and Ostracoda. A fair proportion of the washings, about 10%,
consist of ovoid mud pellets. Coarse Siftings contain abundant echinoid spines
and plates, aleyonarian spicules, polyzoa and small mollusca.

The coarser rubbly element consists largely of coral fragment, Solenasmulia.

HexacorALta—Abundant fragments of Solenosmilia variabilis Duncan
occur in the present sample. This deep water coral was not noted by the
“Challenger” from the present region, but Professor Moseley records it from
various stations in the South Atlantic which seem to have been at one time out-
posts of the more extensive Antarctic Continent. Thus three localities are given
for this coral—Tristan da Cunha at 1,000 fathoms, Prince Edward Is'and at
310 fathoms and from Ascension at 420 fathoms. Off Green Cape it occurs in
great profusion, OcrocoraLLA—Melitodes sp. cf. rugesus. Numerous fragments.

Por.yzoa—Catenicella sp.; Cellaria. gracilis (Busk); Crisia acropora Busk.
All of these in abundance.

MOLLUSCA

Nucula obliqua Lamarck; Mvyrtea gabrieli sp. nov. (vide infra); Turritclla
sinuata Reeve; Pyrene sp.; Nassarius tasmanicus (T. W.); Cavelina telemus
(Linn.); cf. Haminoea sp.; Clio pyramidatus |.inn.; Diacria trispinosa (Blain-
ville).

Fam. LUCINIDAE
Genus Myrrea Turton 1822
Myrtea gabrieli sp. nov.
(PL. ix, fig. 7a.)

Description—Type specimen, subquadrate; ventral border deeply convex,
mecting the dorsal slope at a decided angle, the latter almost straight. Beak small,
prominent, sharply recurved anteriorly, almost subcentral, with a narrow, exca-
vated lunule. Surface of valves inflated, more depressed in the younger stages ;

152

older forms as in the type specimen, depressed anteriorly and posteriorly, having
an undulate depression from behind the umbo to the ventral. Concentric ribs
close together in the neanic stage, becoming much more widely spaced propor-
tionately in fully grown shells, numbering about 60 in the type.

Height of holotype, 25-5 mm.; length, 32 mm.; thickness of united valves,
12 mm.

Comparisons—Another species, Myrtea bractea, has been described and
figured by Charles Hedley from Cape Wiles Sta. (‘Endeavour’), from 95-100
fathoms.“ It differs in the more subcircular outline, the less prominent
umbo, which in M. gabrieli is almost falciform, the subrounded concentrics (more
scaly in our species), and the evenly curved shell-surface, which in M. gabrieli is
depressed in the anterior and posterior area. From Myrtea mayi (Gatliff and
Gabriel) the species is essentially different in the absence of radial striae on the
shell surface.

Accompanying these shells, from 33 miles east by south from Green Cape at
470 fathoms, are some smaller forms of this genus, which are probably refcrable
to M. botanica Hedley. M. gabrieli also occurs in E 3915.

Pisces—Otoliths (indet.), common.

SAMPLE E 3921,

Loc—‘Foraminiferal sand. 33 miles east by south from Green Cape.
Lat. 37° 21’ 20” S., long. 150° 24’ 25” E., 505 fathoms. (Washings of mud
from Agassiz Trawl.)” Fine and coarse, yellowish-brown foraminiferal mud,
with Pteropoda (Cavolina inflexa Lesueur) and corals (Solenosimilia variabilis
Duncan, Melitodes and alcyonarian spicules).

SAMPLE E 3922

Loc.—*‘Foraminiferal sand. 33 miles east by south from Green Cape, 470
fathoms.”

Notre—Although this sample bears the same locality data as E3920, the
material has a very different appearance. It is a coarse rubbly and concretionary
mud accumulation, with the larger particles, obtained by washing, stained with
iron oxide. This concretionary material is, however, largely calcareous, for when
treated with weak hydrochloric acid, it falls to pieces with strong effervescence,
leaving a small residue of quartz sand, some siliceous sponge spicules and few
ferruginous particles.

With such unpromising material it is surprising to find how numerous are
the microzoa, the species of which are fairly common to both samples, E 3920
and E 3922,

The finer siftings, after washing, contain a fair proportion of ovoid mud
pellets, echinoid spines, aleyonarian spicules and a few fish otoliths.

SAMPLE E 3923

Sample number only; no locality. A fine, grey, foraminiferal sand. The
washings show the same general characters, as regards organisms, as sainples
east of Babel Island and west of Flinders Island, Tasmania, referred to as E 3915.
The present one probably came from east of Babel Island but at a greater depth.
It shows a fair proportion of ovoid mud pellets, abundant echinoid spines of both
cidaroid and spatangoid types and numerous tetractinellid sponge spicules.

©) Zool. Results, “Endeavour,” 1, (1), 1911, 99, pl. xvii, 5-8,

153

FoRAMINIFERA and Ostracopa are abundant, the former chiefly represented
by the genera Uvigerina, Cassidulina, Cibicides, Globigerina, Orbulina, Globo-
rotalia, Planispirina and Quingueloculina;
Crisia and Mecynoecia;
obolella (Tate), Cerithiopsis sp., Rissoa verconiana Hedley; Diacria trispinosa
(Blaiuville), Clio pyramidatus Linn., Cavolina sp. and Limacina inflata d’Orbigny.

Cytherella; Potyzoa, Cellaria,

TABULATION OF FORAMINIFERA IN THE FAUNULES OF EACH SAMPLES

Sample
Species Depth
1 Spirillina inaequalis Brady
2 Lenticulina clericti (Forn.)
3 L. sp. aff, convergens (Born.)
4 L.cultrata (Montf.)
5 L.gibba (d’Orb.)
6 L. rotulata Lam.
7 Lisp. aff, articulata (Reuss)
8 L.sp. aff. orbicularis (d’Orb.)
9 L. sp. aff. subalata (Reuss)
10 Planuloria australis sp. nov.
11 Saracenaria italica Defr.
12 S. navicula (d’Orb.) :
13 Astacolus crepidulus (F.& M. 40,
14 Marginulina glabra d’Orb.
15 Vaginulina legumen (L.inn.)
16 Dentalina communis d’Orb.
17 D. fistuca (Schwager }
18 D. sp. aff. consobrina (d'Orb.)
19 DY. soluta Reuss
20 Nodosaria catenulata Brady
21 N.calomorpha Reuss
22 N. pyrula d’Orb.
23 N, pyriela var. semirugosa d Orb.
24 N. vertebralis (Batsch)

25 Lagenonodosaria scalaris (Batsch y

26 L. scalaris var. separans Br,
27 1. scalaris var. seminuda nov.
28 Lagena annectens Bur. & Hol.
29 L.apiculata (Reuss)

30. 1. clavata d’Orb,

31 L. costata (Will)

32 L. crenata P, & J.

33 L.distoma P.& J...

34 L. globosa (Montagu)

35 L. hexagona (Will)

36 L, hispida Reuss

37 L, lacunata Bur. & Holl.

38 OL. lagenoides CWill.) ‘
39 L. marginata Walker & Boys
40 L. melo (d’Orb.)

41 L. orbignyana (Seg.)

42 L. striata (d’Obr.)

43 L. sulcata (W.& J.)

44 I. variata Brady

45 Pseudoglandulina rotimdata| (Rss. y

46 Guttulina conwnunis (d’ Orb.)

47 G. lactea (Walker & Jace)

48 G. problema dOrb. :

49 G. regina (Br. P.& J.)

50 G. yabet Cushm. & Ozawa ie

51 Globulina gibba d’Orb. var. glo-
bosa (Minster) 2

52 Glandulina lacvigata d’ Orb.

* Numbers in Table relative and not actual.

the latter by Bairdia, Cythere and
MoLiusca, Sarepta

3915 3916 3917 3918 3919 3920 2921 3922 3923
63fm, anch, 140 505 505 470 505 470 65
a} (ws a 1 =. = _ a ar
tas rz. 1 st =
/ ae. a
Belfi fie a Jon. Bese oa
6 Tes eel ES pe
— + i. 1 pies — _ 1 mon
a3 ph a
47 = 1 1
iT m3 i ren I = = = —
f~ 2 _ a 1 —_ —_ Less aes
<a Tt = i. ei yp =
a ee we ea) tee
ah a 1 ates fase — _ = =!
Baten _- oe 4 wee | MAn ta ee 1
je Oe 1 ¢ oF. te 4.
1 ad 5 aan eu 2 i, ahs ism,
ne 4 — _ wt 1 o7 _ ae
pe ee i BS
1 = = tae a .
if Dye ee toe tA sey oct
dace _ =e = tae mae a8 1 _—
pie a wes nel = em = —_ ]
= 4s J ae. 1 — “Ss a
— op See ee ' 2-3
Sig te 2S OB Ce Oa OS BE
—— 7 1
_ jae — 1 wast
A ee 1
— ee a — hers a 1 a 7.
ae ee tr »= 1
= 1 Te, eed _ eo
= a 7 Ree: 1 1 = _ _
pee ee pre ] Aan as
=. <= _ — 1 :
1 rae — = =
a, £m, suse _- 1 a ae ra a!
—_ 2 _ pe, | pon = = a
(as -_ = sa AD 1 oe: ae is
= _ 1 AS 1 = ney ta ot
oad | ow too BE ae a de Ese
sae ie, loge ce, wee eee er
2-3 2-3 1 Le “4a
- 1 Wo. <<) «.
om, 1 a" = 20 ot Le we Pr eet
a es a
1 ay i. f eves eal
ues a aR Men She a es
23 — 23 23
i ee 1 tives eee i oF
oy eS ee ee
- 1
fa Me aL are be el ade OS

See p. 148.

154

TABULATION OF FORAMINIFERA IN THE FAUNULES OF EACH SAMPLE

; Sample 3915 3916 3917 3918
Species Depth 65fm. anch. 140 505

53 Bultminella sp. ws *y 1 = am fs
54 Bulimina aculeata d Orb. ba “i es a = =
55 B. elegans d’'Orb. ote
56 B. sp. aff. marginata dOrb. fy (9A 1 1 =
57 B. notovata sp. nov. sy a wh, J.

58 Pirgulina aE ein Egger

3919 3920 2921 3922 3923
505 470 505 470 65

59 Boltwina alata (Seguenza) a wis HF

61 B. beyricht Reuss... - - 816 2-3
62 B.limbata Brady .. sta nf aes am
63 B. punctata d'Orb. : ra

64 B.robusta Brady...

65 Rectobolivina bifrons (Brady )

1
60 B. sp. aff. hentyana Chap, - >16 — 1 23
1 =

ipiives deer eat
~

66 Loxesiomun karrerianum (Br.)

67 Bifarina fimbriata (Millett) F 4 -_

68 Uvigerina sp. aff. piymea (VOrb.) >16 8-16 1 8-16
69 Trifarina bradyi Cushman ra

70 Cassidulina crassa d’Orb. or 2.3

71 C. laevigata d’ Orb. a ta a — by, =
72 C. subglobosa Brady

73 C. subglobosa var. producta Chap-
man and Parr ..

74 Eltipsolagena schlichtt (Silv.)

75 Bolivinita quadrilatera (Schw. oa = ee — 8-16

76 B. quadrilatera var. tortilis nov.

77 Bolivinella folium (P.& J.) ke 23
78 *Parafrondicularia helenae sp. nv = — en Kon
79 Nodogeucrina bradyi Cushm, ae eer —_ w= =
80 N.insolita (Schwager) .. _ —_ ] —
81 Patellina corrugata Williams

82 Patellinella inconspicua (Br.)

83 Discorbis australis Parr .. tye 1

84 D. bertheloti (d'Orb.) av AG e=3, “2550 <2.3
85 D. dimidiatus (J.& P.)

86 D. disparilis (H. A. & E.) if = = 1 —
87 DD. opercularis (d’Orb,) .. be a 253 ne =
88 D. orbicularis (Tergq.) be ee ies ee moe 1
89 L).rarescens (Brady) ty EA a —_ = 1
90 D. rosacea (d’Orb.) rf . — —_ — 1
91 D. rugosa (d’Orb.) ¢ a
92 1D. globularis (d’Orb.) a Pr —_ — — >16
93 Eponides karstent (Reuss) ete oes — —_—
94 E. repandus (F.& M.) ie at 2-3 a =

|
|
|
|
meeee!

=
to
b

95 Sireblus beecarit ( Linn.) .. 816 2-3

96 Notorotalia clathrata (Brady) .. —

|
Lt |

2
97 N. decurrens sp. nov. oa 2-3 — 1 4
98 Epistomina elegans (d’ Gib. ) .. §-16 2-3 2.

99 Mississippina concentrica (P. & J.)
100 Cancris auricula (TP. & M.) as — 1 — —

101 Anomalina colligera Chapm.& Parr 1 —_
102 A. glabrata Cushm. .. 8-16 — 2-3 1
103 A. globulosa Chapm. & Parr is — — — —
104 4. polymorpha Costa :* sa — — 1 1
105 A. sp. aff rotaad’ Orb. ake te 4

106 A. vermiculata (d’Orb.) 4

peee | to
|

107 *Pldvulina-biconcova.@P. 4. ag
108 P. bicencava var. unguiculata
(Sidebottom) .. sk at —_— —_ oo _

a 1 =

* This species was originally placed in Plectofrondicularia but is now seen to be referable

to the recently described genus Parafrondicularia Asano.
proofs, its original position in the text is retained.

+ Since made the genotype of Planulinoides Parr.

To avoid much disturbance of

109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148

149
150
151

152
153
154
155
156
157
158
189
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170

155

TABULATION OF FORAMINIFERA IN THE FAUNULES OF

Sample
Species Depth
P. haliotis (H.A.& EL)...
Cibicides aknerianus (d’Orb.)
C. lobatulus (W. & J.) ae
C. sp. aff. victortensis Ch., P.& os
C. psendoungerianus (Cushm.)
C. refulgens Montiort
C. wuellerstorfi (Schwager )
Dyoctbicides biserialis C.&V.
Amphisicgina lessonti TOrb.
Chilostomella cushmani sp.nov. ..
Pullenia sphaeroides (d'Orb.)
P. subcarinata (2 Orb.) .
Sphaeroidina bulloides @Orb.
Globigerina bulloides d'Orb.
G. conglomerata Schwager
G. dutertret d’ Orb,
G.inflatad’Orb. —..
G. pachyderma (E hrenberg)
G. subcretacea Chapm. .
Globergerinotdes trilobus (Reuss)
Globigerinella eequilateralis (Br.)
Orbulina universa d’ Orb,
Pulleniatina obliqutloculata(P. &]. )
Sphaeroidinella dehiscens (P. &J.)
Globorotalia hirsuta (d’Orb.)
G. scttula (Brady)
G. truncatulinoides (a Orh. )
Nonton depressulus (W.& J.)
N. grateloupi (d’Orb.)
N. scapha (F.& M.)
No wmbilicatulus (Mont), <
Fiphiduon advenum (Cushman)
E. crispum (Linné)
IS. imperatrix (Brady)
fi. fensent (Cushman )
E. lessonii (d'Orb.)
Ev imacellum (F.& M.)
E. poevanume (VOrb.)
Fi. verriculatum (Brady )
Tlyperammina novaescalandiae
H.A.& E. :
Saccammina sphacrica G. O. Sars
Pelosina cylindrica Brady
? Brachystphon corbuliformis
Chapman

Technitella cl, le. gumen Norn man ..

Rhabdammina discreta Brady
R.irregularis W. B. Carp.
Cornuspira foliacea (Philippi)
C. foliacea var. expansa Chap.
C. lacunosa Brady ..

C. striolata Brady ..
Ophthalmidiue circularis (Ch. _
Planispirina bueculenta (Brady )

P bucculenta, vy. placentiformis Br.

Quinqueloculina auberiana d’ Orb.
O. australis Parr

O. crassa. d’Orb.

O. cuvieriana d’ Orb.
O.lamarckiana dOrb.

O. seminulum (Linn. )

QO. vulgaris d’ Orb.

Spiroloculina canaliculata a ‘Orb.
Sigmoilina latissima sp. nov.

EACH SAMPLE

3915 3916 3917 3918 3919 3920 2921 3922 3923
65fm. anch. 140 505 505 470 505 470 65
fe et
—_ = — a —_ 1 ewan = —
— 23 2 2-3 2-3 —_ 1 47 —
>16 — 1 2-3 4-7 1 _ — —
4-7 — — 8-16 1 — — 47 47

det ad eet ee 2-3

23 23 47 47 47 47
. 1

4 1

— — 2.3 1 - 4-7

1 1 — —_ — : —_ ooo —_—
— 1 —_ — 1 2-3 — — _

1 - 2-3 2-3 1 —_ 1 —
23 8-1€ 47 >16 B16 S16 47 S16 47
a a 2-3 4 i
4-7 8-16 47 >16 8-16 »>16 >16 >16 >16
a 1 i -

. 2383 ae oe = ele
ee BS 8-16 fa me
rn, Sol ae fa cs, Beh ee
47 — 23 S16 16 >16 416 816 47

; gee ee pee
ae See a a a, Pe

lL = 33 B16 846 316 = 47 49
See wise Mice Thine fins, 2 en 4
a £2 23 BE Po = 9 t 4a 49
LS. ete See a te

: ie Mey A
wn. £3 .
oe a. Ie oss

‘ike Sa ee He ee le He
— - — _— 1
2-3 — — 47 47 —- = — —
= 1 ee, lee

wee ee | ; 47
ae S39. AS Bek
=! ed A Tei ee
Sip te Ue. gat Xa, Met ot Seu
ee a ae

1 é

47 - — ~ — —
yop Bs gett BLP es

1 l .

pa 4 Soe WN ks
Be 2. . 1 eres = poe

1 Car Gay #._ — ere! oe Be Ee

jim oa wat pk el, Me ame tn

1 3
ce! om et

EBS ys ay Ag 8-16
: 23° - 8-16
23 1 23

Piet 23 f,

1 at AO eee, Tie i oN BD Ste ighit

ors” col ee 4 =
47 — 1 — — 2.3 1 1 4-7
etl mt SS) Bg ee Btls ee
8-16 1 — 816 8-16 2-3 — 1 2-3
8-16 — — 23 2.3 - 47
- 2-3 4-7 -

171
172

174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191

192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201

202
203

156

TABULATION OF FORAMINIFERA IN THE FAUNULES OF EACH SAMPLE
3915 3916 3917 3918

Sample
Species Depth
S. schlumbergert A. Silv. ..
Ptychomiliola separans (Brady 7

173 Triloculina chrysostoma (Chap. )

T. circularis Born.

T. quadrilateralis d’' Orb,

T. tricarinata d’Orb.

T. trigonula (Lamarck)

T. oblonga (Montagu)
Pyrgo comata (Brady).
P. elongata (d’Orb.) at
P. fornasinit Chap. & Parr
P. sarsi (Schlumb.)

P. vespertilio (Schlumb.)
Pyrgoella sphaera (d’Orb.)
Biloculinella globulus (Born.)

THaplophragmoides emaciatus ( Br.)

HH. grandiformis Cushman
Recurvoides contortus Earland

Ammobaculhites agglutinans (d’O.)

Reophax dentaliniformis Brady
R. distans v. pseudodistans Cush.
R. scorpiurus Montfort
Textularia conica (d’Orb.)

T. corrugata HLA. & EB,

'T. pseudogramen Chapm. & Parr £

T. sagittula Detr.

Trochammina. planoconvex aCh.&P.

Clavulina serventyi Ch. & Parr
Dorothia arenata Cushman

D, scabra (Brady)

Lasterella sp.

Gaudryina robusta Cushman
G. (riangularis Cushman

65 fm. anch.

140

505

3919
505

3920
470

2921
505

3922
470

Pe SE Pema

1
1

4-7

TABULATION OF OSTRACODA IN

Sample

Species Depth
Pontocypris bradyi nom, mut.
P. attenuata G.S. Brady
P. simplex G.S. Brady ..
P. subreniformis G. S. Brady
Argilloecia badia G. S. Brady
Macrocypris decora (G. 5S. B.)
M. setigera G. S. Brady

Bythocypris reniformis G.S.B. ..

Bairdia acanthigera G. S. Brady
B.amygdaloides G. S. Brady

-B. australis Chapman

B.ct.expansa G. S. Brady
B. foveolata G. S. Brady

B. fusca G. S. Brady

B, minima G.S. Brady
Cythere acerosella sp. nov.
C. canaliculata Reuss

C. crispata G. S. Brady a
C. cristatella G.S, Brady ..

C. cytheropteroides G. 5. Brady v4

C. dasyderma G. 8, Brady
C. demissa G. S. Brady

C. dictyon G. 5. Brady

C. exilts G. S. Brady

C. falklandi G. S. Brady
C. foveolata G. S. Brady
C, goujont G. S. Brady

3915

65 fm.

THE FAUNULES OF EACH SAMPLE
3916 3917

anch.

140
1

i
PJ Huddle! |

3919
505

3920
470

2921
505

3922
470

ee
trp Od ee

Plld do

tN
LP aun

el teeetl i lal i

157

TABULATION OF OSTRACODA IN THE FAUNULES OF EACH SAMPLE

; Sample 3915 3916 3917 3918 3919 3920 2921

Species Depth -anch. 140 505 505 470 505

28 C. inconspicua G. S. Brady os
29 C. trrorata G. S. Brady
30 C. militaris (G. S. Brady)
31 Cc.
32 C.
3

bs
Les)
lll] ag
Lor

normoant G. S. Brady ar
obtusalata G. S. B. v. tenuis nov.
3 C. ovalis G. S. Brady

Lx]

Zor

li tii) 38

34 C. postcaudispinosa sp. nov. Pert
35 C. rastromarginata G. S. Brady

36 C. scutigera G. S. Brady

37 C, subrufa G. S. Brady

38 C. tetrica G. S. Brady

39 Eucythere declizis (Norman)

40 Krithe producta G. S, Brady

41 Loxoconcha australis G. S. DEG
42 L.avellanaG.S. Brady... *
43 Xestoleberis curta (G.S. Brady)
44 X.davidiena Chapman... ‘
45 X. margaritea (G. S. Brady)

46 X. nana G. S. Brady ‘ts

47 X. polita G. S. Brady

48 X. setigera G. S. Brady

49 X. variegataG, S. Brady ..

50 Cytherura costellata G, 5. B.

51 C. eryptifera G. S. Brady =
52 Cytheropteron assimile G. S. B.

53 C. dannevigi Chapman

54 C. hedleyi sp. nov.

55 Bythocythere arenacea G, 5. B.

56 Pseudocythere caudate G. O. S.

57 P. fuegiensis G. S. Brady

58 Cytherella lata G. S. Brady

59 C. polita G. S. Brady

60 Cl pulchra G. S. Brady

61 C. punctata G. S. Brady

62 C. semttalis G, S. Brady

63 Cytherelloidea auris sp. nov.

is
Los)

brfrritirttetrrs

"
Lay

ee ee

Piakl bash Tt thie EEE ETT ee EM
~

ted chet gla sel PT Rec OPT Bec

ce
he, Go

~
te
Vv

PleemPLEPPP bd ddd ible tbr dtd dtl bd tee
Praltrriltidtitelde

Deter bait eile del
Ctr) eee ee Se ee el
|

COE ET Pe ea eee Seg

mtomtentoet ITIP ebri rid

I 1]
th

SYSTEMATIC
FORAMINIFERA
Superfam, SPIRILLINOIDEA
Fam. SPIRILLINIDAE
Genus Sprrittina Ehrenberg 1843

1 SPIRILLINA INAEQUALIS Brady 1879
Brady 1879, 278, pl. viii, fig. 25 a,b, 1884, 631, pl. Ixxxv, fig, 8-11; Chapman,

1915, 28.
A well-known Pacific species. Previously noted from Sta, 36, east of Tas-
mania, 777 fathoms. E3918 vr

Fam, NODOSARIIDAE
Genus LENTICULINA Lamarck 1804
2 LENTICULINA CLERICII (Fornasini 1895)
Cristellaria clericii Fornasini 1895, text fig. 1901, 65, fig. 17.
This form belongs to the group of L. vortex (d’Orb.), serpens (Se guenza )
and orbicularis (d’Orb.), in which the sutural lines are extremely angulate.

Typical of South Pacific areas. This hitherto fossil form was described from a
late Tertiary deposit (? Pliocene) of Italy. E3917. vr

to ee

158

3. LENTICULINA sp. aff. CONVERGENS (Bornemann 1855)
Cristellaria convergens Bornemann 1855, 337, pl. xiii, fig. 16, 17
The original species, with which the present is doubtfully identified, came
from the Oligocene deposits of Hermsdorf, Germany, The “Challenger”
examples came from the North and South Pacific (Brady 1884). Ww 461s +

4 LENTICULINA CULTRATA (Montfort 1808)
Robulus cultratus Montfort 1808, 215,
Cristellaria cultrata (Montf.), Brady, 1884, 550, pl. Ixx, fig. 4-8.

A widely distributed species, both fossil and recent. The “Challenger”
obtained it from the West Indies and Fiji. I have previously noted it from
“Endeavour” material, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms.

EE 3915, ¢; E 3919, v.r. (deformed).
5 LEnNtTIcULINA Ginpa (d’Orbigny 1839)
Cristellaria gibba d’Orbigny 1839, 40, pl. vii, fig. 20, 21.

The “Challenger” figured specimens came from the West Indies. It is

widely distributed both in fossil deposits and recent dredgings. 3915. r.

6 LENTICULINA ROTULATA Lamarck 1804
Lamarck 1804, 183, No, 3; 1806, pl. Lxii, fig. 11,

The “Challenger” figured specimens came from the West Indies. It is
a widely distributed form. Previously noted by me from 40 miles south of Cape
Wiles, 100 fathoms (‘Endeavour’). E3918. v.r.: EF 3922. vir.

7 LENTricuLina sp. aff. ARTicuLATA (Reuss 1264)

Robulina articulata Reuss 1864, 53, pl. v, fig. 62 a, b, 63a, b.

Recent forms, similar to the present material, found in southern waters, do
not appear to be referable to the fossil species figured by Reuss from the Septaria- -
clays of Germany, The recent form is typical of the Australian region, Under
the name of Cristellaria articulata I have noted it from 40 miles south of Cape

Wiles, 100 fathoms. E 3915, r.

8 LENTICULINA sp. aff. oRBICULARIS (d’Orb. 1826)

Robulina orbicularis d’Orbigny 1826, 288, pl. xv, fig. 8, 9.

I have previously recorded this form as Cristellaria orbicularis d’Orb, from
40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. 3915, £: E3917, ver.: E3918, ver.

9 LENTICULINA sp. aff. supaLata (Reuss 1854)

Cristellaria subalata Reuss, 1854, 68, pl. xxv, fig. 13.

This, in common with many other recent forms, cannot be specifically identi-
fied with the Cretaceous and Tertiary fossils of Europe. E3915. vr.

Genus Pranuraria Defrance 1824
10 Planularia australis sp. nov.
(PL. ix, fig. 1)
Cristellaria tricarinella Chapman (non Reuss), 1915, 24, pl. i, fig. 6.
Description—Test subovate to elongate-arcuate. Surface complanate; dorsal
edge thickened but not sharply tricarinate as in Reuss’ figures. Seven arcuate
chambers in type, forming a widely open spiral. A small subspherical proloculus
at the origin of coil. Aperture dentate. Length of test, 0:7 mm.; greatest
breadth, 0°38 mm.; thickness of test, 0°08 mm.

159

Comparisons—Differs from “Cristellaria” tricarinella Reuss and from
C. complanata Reuss in having the sutures flush with the surface. Brady’s
specimens figured in the “Challenger” Report appear to be intermediate between
the present and Reuss’ form in showing some carination of the dorsal border.
As Cristellaria tricarinella, variations of this form have been recorded from the
Philippines and from the west coast of New Zealand. E 3919, vr.

Genus SARACENARIA Defrance 1824
11 Saracenarta zraLica Defrance 1824
Defrance 1824, 177; Blainville, 1825, 370, pl. v, fig. 6.
The “Challenger” figured examples came from the West Indies and Fiji.
The occurrence of this species is usually indicative of the presence of warm water.

E 3915, r.; E 3917, ver.

12 SARACENARIA NAViCULA (d’Orb. 1840)
Cristellaria navicula d’Orb. 1840, 27, pl. ii, fig. 19.
A broad variation of the preceding species. It is typically a Cretaccous form,
but seems to range, without any great difference, into recent times. E 3915, r.

Genus Astacotus Montfort 1808
13. AstTAcoLus crepiputa (Fichtcl and Moll 1798)
Nautilus crepidiula Fichtel and Moll 1798, 107, pl. xix, g-!.

A widely distributed species, with many intergradations. Typical forms were
found by the “Challenger” off the Ki Islands, Japan; at the Azores, the West
Indies and the Bermudas. E 3917, wer.

Genus Marcinutina d’Orbigny 1826
14 MarcinuLina GLapra d’Orbigny 1826
d’Orbigny 1826, Modeles, 55; Parker, Jones and Brady, 1865, 27, pl. i, fig. 36.

A common form, of wide distribution.

E 3915, r.; E 3917, v.r.; EE 3920, v.r.; If 3923, v-r.

Genus Vacrnuuixa d’Orbigny 1826
15 VAGINULINA LEGUMEN (Linn. 1758)
Brady, 1884, 530, pl. Ixvi, fig. 13-15.
A cosmopolitan species. Also found in the Philippines.
E 3915, v.r.; E3918, v.r.; E 3919, ver.

Genus DENTALINA d’Orbigny 1826
16 Denrattna communis d’Orbigny 1826
dOrbigny 1826, 254, No. 35.

An arcuate form with oblique chambers. It agrees with those found by
Brady, whose “Challenger” specimens came from the West Indies, Bermudas
and Fiji. E 3915, vir.

17. DENTALINA ristuca (Schwager 1866)
Nodosaria fistuca Schwager 1866, 216, pl. v, fig. 36, 37.

This finely hirsute form, having long ovoid chambers, was originally
described from the Neogene fossil deposits of Kar Nikobar, south of the
Andaman Islands. ¥ 3920. vr

160

18 DeENTALINA sp. aff. consoprina (d’Orb. 1846)
d’Orbigny 1846, 46, pl. ii, fig. 1-3.

Dentalina consobrina of d’Orbigny is chiefly known as a Tertiary fossil, and
was originally described from the Lower Miocene of the Vienna Basin. The
recent species, from southern waters, is of a more regular and evenly chambered
form, and occurs in the Antarctic amongst other localities.

E 3915, r.; E 3921, v.r.

19 DENTALINA SOLUTA Reuss 1851
Reuss 1851, 60, pl. iti, fig. 4.
Nodosaria (D.) soluta Brady, 1884, 503, pl. Ixii, fig. 13-16.

This remarkably persistent form in time ranges from the Cretaceous to
the present. E 3915, wer.
Genus Noposaria Lamarck 1812
20 NoposaRiA CATENULATA Brady 1884

Brady 1884, 515, pl. Ixili, fig. 32-34.

This species has an interesting distribution as regards the present soundings,
for Brady records it from the Philippines at 95 fathoms and off Raine Island,
Torres Strait, at 155 fathoms. E 3915, v.r.; E 3920, vir.

21 NoposaRIA CALOMORPHA Reuss 1865
Reuss 1865, 129, pl. i, fig. 15-19; Brady, 1884, 497, pl. Ixi, fig, 23-27; Chapman

and Parr, 1937, 61.

The southern occurrences of this species, often at great depths, comprise the
Falkland Islands, and Kerguelen Island (Brady) and also South Georgia (Ear-
land), and in Bass Strait (Chapman and Parr). Brady also reters to it as from
the Ki Islands and off the Philippines. Reuss’ specimens were from the Oligo-
cene of Pietzpuhl, North Germany. E 3922. v.r.

22 Noposarta pyRULA d’Orbigny 1826
d’Orbigny 1826, 253, No. 13. Brady, 1884, 491, pl. Ixu, fig. 10-12.

This is a common species in the Philippines and it has also been obtained off
the Ki Islands. It is a widely distributed species elsewhere. I have previously
recorded it from “Endeavour” material from east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms.

E 3923, vir.
23 NopDOSARIA PYRULA var. SEMIRUGOSA d’Orbigny 1846
Nodosaria semirugosa VOrb. 1846, 34, pl. i, fig. 29-23; Millett, 1902, 515, pl. xi,
fig. 5.
Nedosaria costulata Brady 1884, 515, pl. Ixiii, fig. 23-27.
Nodosaria pyrula var. semirugosa d’Orb., Cushman, 1913, 50, pl. xxvi, fig. 4-8,

This species is found from the Cretaceous to Recent. It has been dredged
from the Philippines, the Malay Archipelago and off Japan, as well as at various
Stations in the West Indies. E 3917, v.r.: E 3919, v.r

24 Nobosaria VERTEBRALIS (Batsch 1791)
Nautilus (Orthoceras) vertebralis Batsch 1791, 3, No. 6, pl. ii, fig. 6 a, b.
Nodosaria vertebralis (Batsch) Brady, 1884, 514, pl. lxili, hg. 35; pl. Ixiv,
fig. 11-14.
Amongst other localities, this species occurs in the North Pacific, off the
Tlawaiian Islands, and from the east coast of New Zealand. E 3922. +

161

Genus LAGENONopDOSARIA Silvestri 1900
25 LaAGENONODOSARIA SCALARIS (Batsch 1791)
Nautilus (Orthoceras) scalaris Batsch 1791, No. 4, pl. ii, fig. a, c.
Nodosaria scalaris (Batsch) Cushman, 1913, 58, pl. xxiv, fig. 7.

This species occurs as a common fossil in the Neogene of Europe. It is
found living off the coast of Australia, on the east coast of New Zealand, the
Philippines, Guam, Japan and the Hawaiian Islands. It is one of the most
abundant forms in the present series; previously recorded from “Endeavour”
material (1915), from 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms.

FE 3915, v.c.; E3917, r.; E 3918, r.; E3919, £.;
E 3920, f.; E3921, r.; E 3922, r.; E 3923, r.

26 LAGENONODOSARIA SCALARIS (Batsch) var. SEPARANS (Brady 1884)
Nodosaria scalaris var. separans Brady 1884, 516, pl. Ixiv, fig. 16-19.

Hitherto from the west coast of New Zealand (fide Nuttall’s Locality List
of Brady’s figured specimens of the “Challenger” Report in Annals and Mag.
Nat. Hist., (9), 19, 209-241, 1927—an invaluable adjunct to Brady’s work).

E 3915, v.r.; E 3923, ver.

27 Lagenonodosaria scalaris (Batsch) var. seminuda nov.
(PI. ix, fig. 2)

Descripttion—Test stoutly built, consisting of three sub-globular chambers,
well inflated and even more so than in the type species; aperture round at the
extremity of the extended tube, the surface of which is distinctly annulated.
Shell surface polished, relieved, by a few indistinct linear costae. Length,
0°59 mm.; greatest width of last chamber, 0°3 mm. E 3922, v.r.

Genus Lacena Walker and Jacob 1798
28 LAGENA ANNECTENS Burrows and Holland 1895
Burrows and Holland (in Jones, Parker and Brady) 1895, 203, pl. vii,
fig. lla, b.

This fossil Lagena from the English Crag (Pliocene) has more recently
been recorded as an Antarctic (Kerguelen) and New Zealand species. It also
occurs off the coast of New South Wales. As a fossil it has also been found in
the Lower Miocene of Batesford, near Geelong, Victoria. E 3919, vr.

29 LAGENA AprcuLaTA (Reuss 1850)
Oolina apiculata Reuss 1850, 22, pl. i, fig. 1.
A cosmopolitan species both as to locality and depth. It is geologically an
ancient type, dating from the Lias, E 3921, vr.

30 Lacena cLavata (d’Orbigny 1846)
Oolina clavata d’Orbigny 1846, 24, pl. i, fig. 2, 3.
Lagena clavata Brady, 1884, 456; Cushman, 1913, 9, pl. u, fig. 3.
A bipolar form and otherwise extensively distributed. Cushman records it
from the North Pacific, near Guam, at 234 fathoms, and from several Stations

in the Philippines. FE 3917, v.r.; E3919, vr.

162

31 Lacena costaTaA (Williamson 1858)
Entosolenia costata Williamson 1858, 9, pl. i, fig. 18.
Lagena costata (Williamson) Sidebottom, 1912, 388, pl. xv, fig. 16-21.
This species has been recorded by Sidebottom from the South-west Pacific.
E 3919, v.r.
32 LAGENA CRENATA Parker and Jones 1865
Parker and Jones 1865*, 420, xviii, fig. 4a,b; Brady, 1884, 467, lvii, fig. 15, 21.
Besides occurring at several British localities, this comparatively rare form
was noted by the “Challenger” from the Cape of Good Hope, 15-20 fathoms,
from Australian shore-sands, off Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait, 38 fathoms, and
at three localities in the South Pacific at 2,325-2,425 fathoms. Ileron-Allen and
Earland obtained it from the Antarctic (Terra Nova Expedition).
E 3919, v.r.; E 3920, v-r.

33. LAcEeNna bistoma Parker and Jones 1864
Parker and Jones (Ms. in Brady) 1864, 467, pl. xlviii, fig. 6.

Distributed in all seas and at varying depths. The figured specimens from
the “Challenger” collection (pl. Iviii, fig. 12-15) came from Kerguelen Island
(fide Nuttall). E 3920, v.r.

34 LAcENA GLoBosA (Montagu 1804)
Vermiculum globosum Montagu 1804 (in Brown, Ill. Rec. Conch.), 144, pl. lv,

fig. 37, 40.

Widely distributed in all seas. The figure 2 on pl. lvi of the “Challenger”
Report came from Bass Strait (fide Nuttall). E 3919, vir.

35 LAGENA HEXAGONA (Williamson 1848)
Entosolenia squamosa var. hexagona Williamson 1848, 20, pl. ii, fig. 25.
Lagena hexagona Brady 1884, 72, pl. lviti, fig. 32, 33.
Widely distributed in present seas. Common in various Tertiary deposits
of Europe. Has been recorded generally from the Antarctic, E 3919, vr.

36 LAGENA HISPIDA Reuss 1858
Reuss 1858, 434. Idem, 1862, 335, pl. iv, fig. 77-79.
Brady figures this species from Torres Strait and off Japan. It has an exten-
sive geographical distribution and a wide geological range, from Lias to Recent.
E 3919, vr.
37. LAGENA LACUNATA Burrows and Holland 1895
Lagena castrensis Brady (non Schwager) 1884, 485, pl. Ix, fig. 1, 2.
Lagena lacunata Burrows and Holland 1895, 205, pl. vii, fig, 124,b; Chapman

and Parr, 1926, 378, pl. xvii, fig. 18.

The “Challenger” records (under L. castrensis) are: Moncoeur Tsland, Bass
Strait, 38 fathoms; Raine Island, Torres Strait, 155 fathoms; Amboyna, 15-20
fathoms; south of Japan, 345 fathoms. Heron-Allen and Earland noted it from
North Cape, New Zealand (Terra Nova Expedition), Chapman and Parr found
fossil specimens of Lower Miocene age in the Altona Bay Coal shaft, Port
Phillip. The original type was recorded as fossil in the English Crag (Pliocene).

Lagena lacunata was previously recorded by me from “Endeavour” material
east of Tasmania at 777 fathoms. E 3919, ver.

163

38 LAGENA LAGENOIDES (Williamson 1858)

Entosolema marginata var. lagenoides Williamson 1858, 11, pl. i, fig. 25, 26.
Lagena lagenoides (Will.), Brady, 1884, 479, pl. Ix, fig. 6, 7, 9, 12-14.

Previously recorded by me from “Endeavour” material east of Tasmania,
1,122 fathoms. E 3920, vir.

39 LacENA MarGINATA (Walker and Boys 1784)

Serpula (Lagena) marginata Walker and Boys 1784, 2, pl. i, fig. 7.
Lagena marginata, Brady 1884, 476, pl. lix, fig. 21-23.

This species has a widely extended range, “almost to the Antarctic Icc-
Barrier” (Brady). E 3917, v.r.; E 3919, ver.

40 Lacena MELO (d’Orbigny 1839)
Oolina melo d’Orbigny 1839%, 20, pl, v, fig. 9.
Lagena melo, Jones, Parker and Brady, 1866, 38, pl. i, fig. 35.
Heron-Allen and Earland record this species from east of North Cape, New
Zealand. E 3917, v.r.; E3919, r.; E 3920, £.; E3922, v.r.

41 LAGENA oRBIGNYANA (Seguenza 1862)
Lissurina orbignyana Seguenza 1862, 66, pl. ii, fig. 25, 26.
Lagena orbignyana , Brady, 1884, 484, pl. lix, fig. 1, 18, 24-26.

Distribution world-wide and geologically co-extensive with the Tertiaries.
Earland records this species from South Georgia, and Cushman from New
Zealand. Previously recorded from “Endeavour” material, 40 miles south of
Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. E 3919, r.; E 3920, vir.

42 Lacena striata (d’Orbigny 1839)
Oolina striata d’Orbigny 1839, 21, pl. v, fig. 12.
Lagena. striata, Brady 1884, 460, pl. tvit, fig. 22, 24, 28, 29.
Species of wide distribution. Previous records from “Endeavour” material
(1915) are: east of Tasmania at 777 fathoms, and 40 miles south of Cape Wiles,
100 fathoms. E 3917, r.; E3919, r.; E3920, v.r.; E 3921, vr.

43° Lacena suLcata (Walker and Jacob 1798)
Serpula (Lagena) sulcata W. and J. 1798, 634, pl. xiv, fig. 5.
Lagena sulcata, Brady 1884, 462, pl. Ivii, fig. 23, 26, 33, 34.
Several examples figured in the “Challenger” Report came from Southern
Seas, as, for instance, from Kerguelen Island (pl. lvii, fig. 23, 25, 34). A
previous record from “Endeavour” material is 40 milcs south of Cape Wiles,

100 fathoms. E 3919, v.r.; E 3920, v.r.
44 LacENA variATa Brady 1884
Brady 1884, 461, pl. Ixi, fig. 1; Chapman, 1907, 128, pl. ix, fig. 8. '

A rare form, according to Brady. The only localities appear to be Bass
Strait, 38 fathoms, Beaumaris (Chapman) and the Malay Archipelago.

E 3916, v.r.
Genus PSEUDOGLANDULINA Cushman 1929

45 PsEUDOGLANDULINA ROTUNDATA (Reuss 1850)
Glandulina ratundata Reuss 1850, 366, pl. xlvi, fig. 2

Nodosaria (Glandulina) rotundata Brady 1884, 491, pl. lxi, fig. 17-19; Chapman,
19161, 32, pl. iti, fig. 20 a, b,

164

Recorded from upthrust muds, slopes of Mount Erebus (Chapman) and
from Mawson’s Antarctic material (Chapman and Parr, 1911-14). Previously
recorded by me from “Endeavour” soundings, 40 miles south of Cape Wiles,
100 fathoms.

E 3915, r.
Fam, POLYMORPILIINIDAE
Genus Gurrutina d’Orbigny 1826
46 Gurrutina communis d’Orbigny 1826
Polymorphina (Guttulina) communis d’Orbigny 1826, 266, pl. xii, fig. 1-4.
Polymorphina communis, Brady 1884, 568, pl. Ixxu, fig. 19.

A well-grown example of this species was found close to the Antarctic Ice
Barrier, in 1,810 fathoms (Chapman and Parr, 1937). Also found generally in
moderately shallow water off the coast of New Zealand (“Terra Nova’).
Previous records from “Endeavour” material as “Polymorphina communis,” from
40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. E 3915. vr.

47 Gutrutina Lacrra (Walker and Jacob 1798)
Serpula lactea Walker and Jacob 1798, 634, pl. xiv, fig. 4.
Polymorphina lactea, Williamson 1858, 70, pl. vi, fig. 145-152.
Guttulina lactea, Cushman and Ozawa 1936, 43, pl. x, fig. 1-4.

A common species round the British Isles; also found in shallow to
moderately deep water in the West Indies, the Tortugas (Florida), the coast of
Japan and the Philippines. It has also been recorded in shore sands of the Vic-
torian coast. E 3919, r.

48 GUTTULINA PROBLEMA d’Orbigny 1826
Guttulina problema d’Orbigny 1826, 266, No. 14.
Polymorphina problema, Brady 1884, 568, pl. ixxii, fig. 20; pl. Ixxiii, fig. 1.

Both of Brady’s figured specimens came from Bass Strait (fide Nuttall).
Recorded by Parr and Collins from San Remo, Victoria, and from Oyster Bay,
and east of Cape Pillar, Tasmania, at 100 fathoms.

E 3915, r.; E3917, r.; FE 3918, r-

49 GurruLina recina (Brady, Parker and Jones 1870)
Polymorphina regina B., P. and J. 1870, 241, pl. xli, fig. 32,0; Chapman, 1907,

132, pl. x, fig. 4.

Guttulina regina, Cushman and Ozawa 1936, 34, pl. vi, fig. 1, 2; Parr and Collins

1937, 193. pl. xii, fig. 5; text fig. 1-7.

Localities in Victoria are Port Lonsdale and Barwon Heads; in New South
Wales, Port Jackson; also from Queensland, Tasmania and West Australia, Great
Australian Bight (Parr and Collins). “Challenger” examples were obtained from
Raine Island, Torres Strait, 155 fathoms. — 3915, v.r.; E 3917, v.r.; E 3918, v-r.

50 Gurrutrna yaper Cushman and Ozawa 1930
Polymorphina oblonga Brady (non d’Orb.) 1884, pl. Ixxiii, fig. 6, 7.
P. ihouini Chapman (non d’Orb.) 1907, pl. x, fig. 2.
Guttulina yabei Cushman and Ozawa 1930, 30, pl. iv, fig. 6, 7; Parr and Collins,

1937, 192, pl. xii, fig. 3, 4a-c; pl. xiii, fig. 4a-c.

This species is usually found at moderate depths (6-114 fathoms). It has
been recorded (as P. oblonga) by the “Challenger” from Bass Strait (38-40
fathoms) and Port Jackson (6 fathoms) ; other localities are off Japan and New
Zealand (off the Snares). : E 3915, r.

165

Genus GLopuLina d’Orbigny 1826
51 GrosuLina cippa d’Orbigny var. GLososa (Munster 1838)
Polymorphina globosa Minster 1838 (in Roemer), 386, pl. iii, fig. 33.
Globulina gibba var. globosa, Cushman and Ozawa 1930, 60, pl. xvi, fig. 1-4;
Parr and Collins, 1937, 199, pl. xii, fig. 13.
Common in shore sand off the coast of Victoria. Also from Burnie, Tas-
mania, and Glenelg, South Australia (Parr and Collins). E 3923, v.r.

Genus GLANDULINA d’Orbigny 1826
52 GLANDULINA LAEVIGATA (d’Orbigny 1826)
Nodosaria (Glandulina) laevigata d’Orbigny 1826, 252, No. 1, pl. x, fig. 1-3;

Brady, 1884, 490, pl. Ixi, fig. 20-22.

Glandulina laevigata, Cushman and Ozawa 1930, 143, pl. xl, fig. L a,b; Parr and

Collins, 1937, 208, pl. xii, fig. 6 a-c.

Brady’s figured specimen came from the West Indies (fide Nuttall). Parr
and Collins record it from Oyster Bay, Tasmania. My previous note of its
occurrence in “Endeavour” material is from Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777
fathoms. G. laevigata is found fossil in the Lower Miocene and Pliocene of
Victoria and in the Lower Miocene of Table Cape, Tasmania. E 3919. r.

Fam, BULIMINIDAE
Genus BULIMINELLA Cushman 1911
53 BULIMINELLA sp.
Bulimina elegantissima v. seminuda Brady 1884 (non Terquem).
This species is now under description, in the Results of the Mawson Expedi-
tion to Antarctic, 1929-31. E 3915, v.r.

Genus Butimina d’Orbigny 1826
54 Buiiina acureata d’Orbigny 1826
d’Orb. 1826, 269, No. 7; Brady, 1884, 406, pl. li, fig. 7-9.

A species universally distributed, and usually found in deep water. It often
accompanies B. marginata according to Dr. H. B. Brady. It is found as far south
as the Antarctic Ice Barrier. Records in the Australian region are: 274 miles
east of Port Jackson Head, New South Wales (Goddard and Jensen) and
Western Australia (Egger). Previous records from “Endeavour” material are:
Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms and east of Tasmania, 1,122 fathoms.

E 3922, v.r.
55 Burimina ELEGANS d’Orbigny 1826
d’Orbigny 1826, 270, No. 10; Modéle, No. 9; Brady, 1884, 398, pl. 1, fig. 1-4;

Chapman and Parr, 1937, 86.

Recorded from the Islands of the South Pacific and from the coast of New
Zealand. Chapman and Parr have recorded it from stations close to the Antarctic
Ice Barrier.

Nore ON THE “ENDEAVOUR” ExampLes—Typical forms of regularly ovate-
elongate contour tend to have the initial series of chambers spinose or marginate,
and thus pass into B. marginata, Dr. C. Fornasini found the same variation in
his specimens of B. elegans from the Adriatic (Accad, Sci. Ist, Bologna, 1901,
375). These variations are shown on pl. o, fig. 7, 14, 33, 39, of his paper.

E 3920, c.; E 3921, f.; E3922, f.

166

56 BuLimina sp. aff. Marcinata d’Orbigny 1826
(PL viti, fig, 6)

The figured specimens of the “Challenger” Report (Brady, 1884), were
drawn from examples obtained off the west coast of Ireland. The forms met
with in southern waters are of more tumid build and have the free edge of the
segments more coarsely crenulated than those from the northern hemisphere.

E 3915, r.; E 3916, v.r.; E 3917, v.r.; E 3919, v.r.; E 3920, r.; E 3922, £.

57 Bulimina notovata sp. nov.
Bulimina ovata Brady (non d’Orbigny, 1846) 1884, pl. 1, fig. 13 a, b.

Brady’s figured specimens of B, ‘ovata’ were obtained east of New Zealand
(fide Nuttall). d’Orbigny obtained his fossil type from the Miocene of the
Vienna Basin; when the latter is compared with the living form, so familiar in
southern waters, the differences are easily seen. B. ovata, according to the
figured type, is a long ovate form, with the segments slightly inflated and pro-
minent and therefore specifically different from the ‘Challenger’ specimen.
Goés (1894, 45) has placed Brady’s ovata in the synonymy of Bulimina ellipsoides
Costa, but that form, according to Goés’ figures (1894, pl. viii, fig. 31-36), is also
distinct from this southern living species. E3018 1

Genus VirGuLina d’Orbigny 1826
58 VIRGULINA SUBSQUAMOSA Egger 1857

Egger 1857, 295, pl. xii, fig. 19-21; Brady, 1884, 415, bh li, fig. 7-11; Chapman

and Parr, 1937, 89.

The “Challenger” figures of the above came from Tahiti (Nuttall). Heron-
Allen and Earland obtained it around the Falkland Islands and Egger in the South
Pacific. The “Aurora” soundings (Mawson, 1911-14) showed that this species
commonly occurred to the east and south of Tasmania, and more rarely near
the Antarctic Ice Barrier. E 3919, f.; E 3923, r.

Genus Borivina d’Orbigny 1839
59 Borivina ALATA (Seguenza 1862)
Vulvulina alata Seguenza 1862, 115, pl. ii, fig. 5, 5a.
Bolivina beyrichi Reuss var. alata Brady (pars) 1884, pl. lin, fig. 2-4.

This form appears to be common in the Late Tertiary and Recent of Italy
and the Mediterranean. One of the figured specimens of the “Challenger” came
from the Philippines. It was of frequent occurrence in the “Aurora” soundings
east of Tasmania.

E 3916, £.; E3917, v.r.; E3919, r.; E 3920, f.; E 3922, r.

60 Bortvina sp. aff. HENTYANA Chapman 1916
Bolivina hentyana Chapman 19161, 145, fig.

This species is common in one of the “Endeavour” soundings of the present
series. It is a recent modification of the Lower Miocene fossil, B. hentyana
Chapman. E 3915, v.c.; E 3917, v.r.; E 3918, r.

61 Borivina peyricur Reuss 1851
Reuss 19512, 83, pl. vi, fig. 51; Brady, 1884, 422, pl. liu, fig. 1; ical and
Parr, 1937, 90.

This species occurred off Sydney at 110 fathoms (“Challenger”). Dr.
Egger records it off the coast. of Western Australia. It was found in material
gathered by the ‘“Aurora,”. 1911-14, and in former “Endeavour” soundings, in

167

abundance at Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms, and rarely at 1,122

fathoms in the same locality. 3915, ¢.; E3916, r.; E3917, vr.; E3918, £.;
E 3919, v.r.; E3920, #.; E3921, £.; E 3922wv.c.

62 BoLivina LimsBata Brady 1884
Brady 1884, 419, pl. liti, fig. 26-28; Chapman, 1907, 32, pl. iv, fig. 83.

A well-distributed form in the Tasman Sea and the Indo-Pacific area. It
has previously occurred in “Endeavour” material, east of Tasmania, at 1,122
fathoms, and 40 miles south of Cape Wiles at 100 fathoms. It is also a JLower
Miocene fossil in Victoria. E 3921, v.r.; E 3923, r.

63 Borivina PuNCTATA d’Orbigny 1839
d’Orbigny 1839, 63, pl. vili, fig. 10-12; Chapman, 1907, 32, pl. iv, 80; Chapman
and Parr, 1937, 92, pl. viii, fig. 16.
Widely distributed in Australian waters, Previously recorded from
“Endeavour” material, Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Also in shore
sands at Beaumaris, Port Phillip (Chapman). E 3919, vr.

64 Bortvina rogusta Brady 1884
Brady 1884, 421, pl. lui, fig. 7-9; Cushman, 1937, 131, pl. xvii, fig, 1-4.

Widely spread through Atlantic, Pacific, and Indian Oceans and Antarctic
Seas. The “Challenger” figures are from the ‘Ki Islands and Fiji. It has been
recorded from former “Endeavour” material, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms,
and 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms.

E 3920, c.; E3921, v.r.; E 3922, f.

Genus Recropotivina Cushman 1927
65 REcTOBOLIVINA BIFRONS (Brady 1884)
Sagrina bifrons Brady 1884, 582, pl. lv, fig. 18-20.
Rectobolivina bifrons, Cushman, 1937, 204, pl. xxiii, fig, 13, 14.

Noted in dredgings made by the “Aurora,” 1911-14, Antarctic Expedition,
off the east coast of Tasmania. The “Challenger” record is off south-east of
Japan. It is known also from the Philippines and from Funafuti, this latter a
record of great depth (2,400 fathoms), by Chapman. Egger obtained it from
“Gazelle” dredgings off Western Australia. E 3917, v.r.; E 3923, ver.

Genus Loxostomum Ehrenberg 1854
66 LoxosTOMUM KARRERIANUM (Brady 1884)
Bolivina karreriana Brady 1884, 424, pl. liit, fig. 19-21.
Lovxostomum karrerianum (Brady), Cushman 1937, 184, pl. xxi, fig. 17.
This species is well distributed in the Southern Hemisphere, from Mauritius,
the Philippines and the Fijis down to the east coast of Australia and New Zcaland.
FE 3913, v.r.; E3917, f.

Genus BrrArtwa Parker and Jones 1872
67 BirarinA FIMEPRIATA (Millett 1900)
(Pl. ix, fig. 4)
Bigenerina fimbriata Millett 1900, 6, pl. i, fig. 2-4,
Bifarina fimbriata (Millett), Cushman 1937, 200, pl. xxiii, fig. 3-3; pl. iti, fig. 4.
The only record for this species was the Malay Arelivdlase: It is now
noted for the first time from the Australian region, viz., 33 miles east from Green
Cape, 470 fathoms. r= EE 3922, v.r.

168

Genus Uvicerina d’Orbigny 1826
68 Uvicertna sp. aff. picMEa d’Orb. 1826
Uvigerina figmea @’Orbigny 1826, 269.

One of the most ubiquitous species in the Bass Strait dredgings. Both
A and B stages (megalo- and microspheric) are represented. This type corre-
sponds to Brady’s fig. 13, 14, of pl. Ixxiv, “Challenger” Report, which came from

Station 232, south of Japan (fide Nuttall).
E 3915, v.c.; E 3916, c.; FE 3917, v.r.; E3918, c.; E 3919, ¢.;
E 3920, r.; E3921, v.r.; E 3922, ¢.; E 3923, f.

Genus TriraRina Cushman 1923
69 TRIFARINA BRADYI Cushman 1923
Rhabdogonium tricarinatum Brady (non Vaginulina tricarinata d’Orb.) 1884,
525, pl. Ixvii, fig. 1-3.
Trifarina bradyi Cushman 1923, 99, pl. xxii, fig. 3-9; Chapman and Parr 1937, 98.
The “Aurora” dredgings off the coast of Tasmania, at 1,320 fathoms, included
the above species. Heron-Allen and Earland noted this form from the “Terra
Nova” dredgings off New Zealand.
The present record is from 33 miles east by south from Green Cape, 470
fathoms. As a fossil it occurs in the Lower Miocene of Victoria.
E 3920, v.r.
Genus Cassipurina d’Orbigny 1826
70 CASSIDULINA cRASSA d’Orbigny 1839

d’Orbigny 18398, 56, pl. vii, fig. 18-20; Cushman 1911, 97, text-fig. 151 a-c;

Chapman and Parr 1937, 81.

This species becomes increasing'y abundant towards the south. Falkland
Islands and Cape Horn (d’Orbigny). The results of the Mawson Expedition
showed its distribution to extend to the east of Tasmania and the Ice Barrier.

E 3917, r.
71 CassipuLina LAEvIGATA d’Orbigny 1826
d’Orbigny 1826, 282, No. 1, pl. xv. fig. 4, 5; Brady 1884, 428, pl. liv, fig. 1-3.

The “Aurora” results, 1911-14, proved the occurrence of this species to the
east of Tasmania at 1,320 fathoms. The present investigation shows it to be
abundant in fairly deep water, 33 miles east by south from Green Cape, north of
the Victorian border. It is of minute size and only occurs in the finest siftings.
C. laevigata is also fossil in the Lower Miocene of Victoria.

E 3919, v.r.; E 3920, v.c.; E 3921, v.r.; E 3922, v.c.

72 CASSIDULINA SUBGLOBOSA Brady 1884
Brady 1884, 430, pl. liv, fig. 17 @-c.
The “Challenger” figured specimens came from Pernambuco, Brazil. It is a
well-distributed species in the Southern Ocean. Common as a Miocene fossil in
Victoria. E 3920, r.; E 3922, v.r.; F 3923, f.

73 CASSIDULINA SUBGLOBOSA var. PRODUCTA Chapman and Parr 1937
Cassidulina murrhyna Chapman (non Schwager) 1915, 20.
Cassidulina subglobosa Brady, var. producta Chapman and Parr 1937, 82, pl. viii,

fig. 12

The “C. murrhyna” of Schwager of my previous report on “Endeavour”
material from east of Tasmania, 1,122 fathoms, has since proved to belong to a

169

variety of Brady’s species. C. subglobosa. Also as a fossil in the Lower Miocene
of Victoria. E 3920, v.r.; E3923, vir.

am. PLEUROSTOMELLIDAE
Genus ELtrpsocraGena A. Silvestri 1928
74 EQLLIPSOLAGENA SCIILICHTI (Silvestri 1902)
Fissurina schlichti A. Silvestri 1902, 143, text-fig. 9-11.
Ellipsolagena schlichti, Chapman and Parr 1937, 99.

Previous records for this specics are:—the Subantarctic Islands of New
Zealand, 50-85 fathoms; soundings from 121-171 fathoms in the Ross 5ea,
Antarctic, and from the “Terra Nova” Stations off New Zealand. From
“Endeavour” material (Chapman 1915) it was obtained east of Tasmania,
777 fathoms, E 3919, v.r.; E 3920, r.

Fam. TETEROHELICIDAE
Genus Bortvinita Cushman 1927
75 Bovivinita QUADRILATERA (Schwager 1866)
Textularia quadrilatera Schwager 1866, 253, pl. vii, fig. 103.
Bolivina obsoleta, Chapman (non Eley) 1915, 20.
Bolivinita quadrilatera, Chapman and Parr 1937, 101.

The dredgings from the “Aurora” containing this species came from the east
of New Zealand. As BSolivina obsoleta this species was recorded in 1915 from
“Endeavour” material, east of Tasmania, 777 and 1,122 fathoms,

E 3918, c.; E 3919, v.r.; E 3920, v.; E 3921, v.r.; E 3922, v.c.; E 3923, v.r.

Bolivinita quadrilatera (Schwager) var. tortilis nov.
(Pl. iii, fig. 3)

Description—Differs from the specific form in having deeply concave faces,
a twisted and incurved test and the opposite sides or square edges out of parallel,
so that when mounted on edge one of the keels appears to be interfacial. The
transverse section, therefore, resembles that of Bolivina rhomboidalis Millett, io
which it was referred at first sight. It may yet prove that Millett’s species is
another modification of Bolivinita and not a true Bolivina. Length, 0°75 mm.;
greatest breadth, 0-24 mm.

Nore—-Heron-Allen and Earland draw attention to the fact that their
“Bolivina obsoleta” (now Bolivinita quadrilatera), from “Terra Nova,” Station 6,
east of North Cape, New Zealand, has a spiral twist. In all probability the present
variety is identical with theirs. E 3920, f.; E 3921, v.r.; FE 3922, f.

Genus BoLIvINELLA Cushman 1927
77 BotaviNELLa FoLtuM (Parker and Jones 1865)

Textularia folium Parker and Jones 1865, 370 and 420, pl. xviii, fig. 19; Brady

1884 (pars), 357, pl. xii, fig. 1, 2; Chapman 1907, 127, pl. ix, fig. 4.
Bolivinella folium Cushman 1927, 79; 1928, pl. xxxiii, fig. 15, 16; Parr 1931,

223, pl. xxi, fig. 23.

Parr has pointed out (op. cit., 1931) that Brady had confused two distinct
species under Parker and Jones’ name, and that subsequently Cushman gave an
unnecessary varietal name, ornata, to the Australian species. This Australian
form is typical of B, folinm (P. and J.), and the tropical species erroneously
linked with Parker and Jones’ Australian form is distinct; for this Parr suggests
Bolivinella elegans.

170

Although Parr refers to this second species figured by Brady (op. cit.,
pl. xb, fig. 3-5) as tropical, Nuttall has given all but fig. 3, which came from Fiji,
as from Bass Strait.

I have already recorded this species under the name of Tertularia foliwm,
from McHafhe’s Reef, Phillip Island, as well as from previous “Endeavour”
material from 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. The localities given by
Parr are Hardwicke Bay, South Australia, and a bore at Boneo, near Rosebud,
at 177-187 feet (Pleistocene).

Bolwinella folium occurs in one of the present samples, 33 miles east by

south from Green Cape, north of the Victorian border, at 470 fathoms.
E 3918, r.
*Genus PARAFRONDICULARTA Asano 1938
78 Parafrondicularia helenae sp. nov.
(Pl. ix, fig. 5, 5a)
Frondicularia interrupta Brady (non Karrer) 1884, 523, pl. Isvi, fig. 6, 7.

Description—Test narrowly hastate, margin finely, narrowly keeled; surface
complanate, with a longitudinal shallow sulcus, and with closely set vertical raised
striae numbering about 18-20. Chambers V-shaped for the last three-fourths of
the test, the initial fourth being taken up by the biserial growth. The later frondi-
cularian chambers consisting of eight enchevroned segments. Aperture terminal,
central and elliptical, with a denticulate margin, Length, 0-946 mm.; greatest
breadth, 0°243 min.

Observations—Brady’s figured specimen agrees with the present type in length,
measuring about 1 mm. Its habitat was off the Ki Islands, south-west of New
Guinea. . He identified his “Challenger” specimen with Karrer’s Frondicularia
interrupta, from the Lower Miocene of Baden, Vienna (Karrer, F., 1877, 380,
pl. xvi 8, fig. 27). The Bass Strait and the New Guinea examples both belong to
the genus Parafrondicularia, On reference to Karrer’s original figure we find
the arrangement of chambers is specifically frondicularian, and this is supported
by his own description. It is also clear that the interrupted character of the
striations is a feature in Karrer’s species, hence the name, whercas the Australian
form has continuous striae throughout the length of the test.

Norr—I dedicate this beautiful species to the memory of my wife, who for
nearly fifty years has been my constant and devoted helper in studies on the
Foraminifera. Only within a short time ot her passing, Mrs. Helen Mary Chap-
man assisted me in selecting the material included in the present investigation.
From the time of describing the Foraminifera of the Gault of Folkestone, the
genus /’rondicularia and its allies were to her particularly attractive. E 3927 €.

Genus Nopocenrrina Cushman 1927
79 NODOGENERINA BRADYI Cushman 1927
Sagrina virgula, Brady (pars), 1884, 583, pl. Ixxvi, fig. 8.
Nodogenerina bradyi Cushman 1927, 79.
Brady found that the above form was confined to the South Pacific. The
figured specimen was dredged by the “Challenger” from Pernambuco (Nuttall).

E 3922, v.r.
80 NopoGENERINA INSOLITA (Schwager 1866)

Nodosaria insolita Schwager 1866, 230, pl. vi, fig. 63; Cushman 1921, 191.

This species was originally described as a fossil (Pliocene), from Kar
Nikobar. Cushman has recorded the species from the “Albatross” dredgings
from Verde Island Passage at 260 fathoms, and from the east coast of

*Sce first footnote on page 154.

171

Mundanao, 490 fathoms, both in the Philippines. Unknown hitherto to the
Australian coast. E3917. vr.

Fam, ROTALIIDAE
Genus PATELLINA Williamson 1858
81 PareLLInA corruGATA Williamson 1858
Williamson 1858, 46, pl. ili, fig. 86-89; Brady 1884, 634, pl. Ixxxvi, fig. 1-7;

Heron-Allen and Earland 1922, 198; Parr and Collins 1930, 90, pl. iv, fig. 1-5;

Chapman and Parr 1937, 102.

This species was found in “Aurora” dredgings close to the Antarctic Ice
Barrier and near Macquarie Island. Parr and Collins recorded it from Geraldton
Harbour, West Australia, and east of Cape Saunders, Otago, New Zealand.
Earlier records of mine are from the Subantaretic Islands of New Zealand (off
the Snares, 60 fathoms and 10 miles north of Enderby Island, 85 fathoms), and
cast of Tasmania, 777 and 1,122 fathoms (‘“Endeavour’’). E 3923, vr.

Genus PATELLINELLA Cushman 1928

82 PATELLINELLA INCONSPICUA (Brady 1884)
Textularia inconspicua Brady 1884, 357, pl. xlii, fig. a-c; Millett 1899, 557,

pl. vil, fig. 1.

Patellinella inconspicua, Cushman 1928, 5, pl. i, fig. 8a-c; Parr and Collins 1930,

92, pl. v, fig. 7.

This species ranges from the south of Japan, through Admiralty Islands,
Malay Archipelago to Bass Strait and New Zealand. It also occurs in the Indian
Ocean, at Kerimba. Parr and Collins give additional localities around Victoria—
shore sand Port Lonsdale, Torquay and Port Fairy. As a Pleistocene fossil it
was found in a boring at Boneo, near Rosebud, at 177-187 feet (W. J. Parr). One
of the “Challenger” Stations for this species was Moncoeur Island Bass Strait.

E 3919, r.

Genus Discornis Lamarck 1804
83 Drscorpis AuSTRALIS Parr 1931

Discorbina valvulata Brady (non Rosalina valeulata Orb.) 1884, 644, pl. lxxxvii,

fig. 57.
Discorbis australis Parr 1931, 227, pl. xxii, fig. 31 a-c.

This species occurred at Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait and near Fiji (Brady).
It is found in shallow water on the coast of Victoria and fossil in the Lower
Miocene of Muddy Creek (Varr). E 3915, v.r.

84 Driscorpis BERTHELOTI (d’Orb. 1839)

Rosalina bertheloti d’Orbigny 18391, 135, pl. i, fig. 28-30.
Discorbina bertheloti, Brady 1884, 650, pl. Ixxxix, fig. 10-12.
Discorbis bertheloti, Chapman, Parr and Collins 1934, 561, pl. ix, fig. 13 a-c;

Chapman and Parr 1937, 102.

Recorded by Brady from the Philippines, and down to the south-east corner
of the Australian coast. Found in Bass Strait and along the Victorian coast.
From the “Aurora” dredgings, east of Tasmania, at 1,320 and 1,300 fathoms. It
is a common Tertiary fossil in Victoria, as old as the Lower Miocene.

E 3916, r.; E 3917, r.; E 3918, r.; E 3920, r.

172

85 Drscorsis prmipratus (Jones and Parker 1862)
Discorbina dimidiata Jones and Parker (in Carpenter) 1862, 201, fig. xxxilB (in

text) ; Chapman 1907, p. 136, pl. x, fig. 8a, b.

Discorbis vesicularis (Lam.), var. dimidiata, Parr 1932, 227, pl. xxi, fig. 27 a-c.,

28 a-c, 29 a-c.

Discorbis dimidiatus, Chapman and Parr 1937, 103.

Recorded from shore gatherings round Victoria, from Altona Bay, Beau-
maris, McHaffie’s Reef, Phillip Island, Port Nepean, Shoreham and Torquay.
Common on the Australian coast below Sydney. On beaches near Auckland,
New Zealand (Parr).

This species has also been noted from “Aurora” dredgings near the Antarctic
Ice Barrier and east of Tasmania. E 3919, r.; E 3923, r.

86 Discorpis vispARILIs (Heron-Allen and Earland 1922)
Discorbina disparilis Heron-Allen and Earland 1922, 205, pl. vii, fig. 20-22.
Discorbis disparilis, Parr 1932, pl. xliv, fig. 2.

Originally recorded off New Zealand, 100 fathoms. Parr has since noted it
in Victorian shore sands. E 3917, vr.

87 DiscorBis opERCULARIS (d’Orbigny 1826)
Rosalina opercularis d’Orb. 1826, 7, 271, No. 7; 1839%, 101, pl. in, fig. 24, 25,
pl. iv, fig. 1.
Discorbina opercularis, Brady 1884, 650, pl. Ixxxix, fig. 8, 9.
Brady records this species from Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait (at 38 fathoms )
and Port Jackson, 2-10 fathoms. Also from Torres Strait and Queensland.
E 3916, r.; EE 3923, r.

88 DrscorBis oRBICULARIS (Terquem 1876)
Rosalina orbicularis Terquem 1876, 75, pl. ix, fig. 4 @-0.
Discorbina orbicularis, Brady 1884, 647, pl. Ixxxviii, fig. 4-8.

This species is known from both the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans and is found
as far south as the southern coast of Australia (Brady). My previous record in
“Endeavour” material was 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathomis,

£3918, v.r.; E 3923, r.

89 DiscorBIs RARESCENS (Brady 1884)
Discorbina rarescens Brady 1884, 651, pl. xc, fig. 2, 3.
Discorbis rarescens, Chapman and Parr 1937, 105. -

The “Challenger” examples came from Raine Island, Torres. Strait and from
the Philippines. Heron-Allen and Earland obtained this species in “Terra Nova”
dredgings off the coast of New Zealand. From the “Aurora” samples it occurred
east of Tasmania, in 1,320 fathoms. E 3918, v.r.; E3923, r.

90 Duiscorpis RosAcEA (d’Orbigny 1826)
Rotalia rosacea d’Orbigny 1826, 7, 273, No. 15—Modéle No. 39.
Discorbina rosacea, Brady 1884, 644, pl. Ixxxvii, fig. 1, 4; Chapman 1915, 29.
The “Challenger” specimens were figured fronr Admiralty Islands, north of
New Guinea and Bass Strait (Nuttall). Found in former “Endeavour” material,
40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. E 3918, v.r.; E3919, vor.

173

91 Discorzis rucosa (d’Orbigny 1839)
Rosalina rugosa d’Orbigny 1839%, 42, pl. ti, fig. 12-14.
Discorbina rugosa, Brady 1884, 652, pl. Ixxxvii, fig. 3a-c, pl. xcvi, fig. 4a-c;
Chapman 1915, 29.
The “Challenger” figured specimens were obtained from the Ki Islands and
Torres Strait. It has already occurred in “Endeavour” material, east of Tas-
mania, 777 fathoms. E 3923. v.r.

92 DiscorBis GLoBULARIS (d’Orbigny 1826)
Rosalina globularis d’Orb. 1826, Modélés No. 69, 271, pl. xiii, fig. 1-4.
Discorbina globularis, Brady 1884, pl. lxxxvi, fig. 8 and 13.
This widely spread species occurs in Sample E 3918. Heron-Allen recorded

it from the coasts of New Zealand (“Terra Nova” Report).
E 3918, v.c.

Genus EronipEes Montfort 1808
93 EPoNIDES KARSTENI (Reuss 1855)
Rotalia karsteni Reuss 1855, 275, pl. ix, fig. 6.
Pulvinulina karsteni, Brady 1884, 698, pl. cv, fig. 8, 9.
The “Challenger” recorded this species from the Magellan Strait at 55
fathoms, from which locality it was figured; also from the Falkland Islands,
4 fathoms, and the Rio Plata, 13 fathoms. E 3922, v.r.; E 3923, r.

94 Eponipes REPANDUS (Fichtel and Moll 1798)
Nautilus repandus Fichtel and Moll 1798, 35, pl. iii, fig. a-d.
Pulvinulina repanda, Brady 1884, 684, pl. civ, fig. 18 a-c; Cushman 1921, 326.
Found in every sea, excepting the Arctic (Brady). Cushman records this
species at many Stations in the Philippiries. In previous “Endeavour” dredgings,
40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common in Tertiary strata from
borings in Victoria, E 3915, r.
Genus StreBLus Fischer 1817
95 Srresius Beccary (Jinn. 1767)
Nautilus beccarii L. 1767, Syst. Nat., 12th ed. 1,162.
Streblus beccarti, Fischer 1819, 75.
Rotalia beccarii, Brady 1884, 704, pl. evii, fig. 2, 3.
This species ranges from the Shetlands to the Cape of Good Hope (Brady).
It is well established in the Philippines at the average depth of 318 fathoms, It
is common as a fossil in borings in the Tertiaries of Victoria and South Australia,
especially the Pleistocene.
E 3915, c.; E 3917, r.; E 3918, r.; E 3920, v.r.; E 3922, v.r.

Genus NotToroTaia Finlay 1939
96 NoTOROTALIA CLATHRATA (Brady 1884)
Rotalia clathrata Brady 1884, 709; pl. evii, fig. 8, 9; Chapman 1915, 32, 33;

Chapman and Parr 1937, 108.

Common around the New Zealand coast. Brady’s Report shows its restric-
tion to the South Pacific, between Moncocur Island, Bass Strait and Cook Strait,
New Zealand. It has also been found at two Stations on the west coast of Pata-
gonia, and also occurred in shore sands at Torquay, Victoria. Previous records

174

from “Endeavour” material are: Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms, and
40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Fossil in the Tertiary bores in

Victoria. E 3920, v.r.; E 3922, v.r.

97 Notorotalia decurrens sp. nov.
(PI. viii, fig. 7a, b)

Description—Test rotaline, plano-convex, depressed. Superior face almost
flat, with thickened sutural shell development, breaking up into papillae near the
initial stage of the shell. Inferior face strongly convex, with thickened, curved
sutural lines of a more regular character than those on the upper surface, with
faint striae at right angles between them, Djamieter of test, 0°386 mm.

Distinct from Brady’s Rotalia clethrata in the suppression of strong lattice
ornament, surface sutural thickening and more depressed superior face,

E 3915, r.; E 3917, v.r.; E 3918, £.

Genus Epistomina Terquem 1883

98 EPISTOMINA ELEGANS (d’Orbigny 1826)
Rotalia (Turbinulina) elegans d’Orbigny 1826, 7, 276, No, 54.
Pulvinulina elegans, Parker, Jones and Brady 1871, 174, pl. xu, fig. 142; Brady
1884, 699, pl. ev, fig .4-6.
Brady’s figured specimens came from Tristan d’Acunha and Fiji. This
species was common in “Aurora” material, between Tasmania and the Antarctic
Ice Barrier. Previous records of “Endeavour” material, 40 miles south of Cape

Wiles, 100 fathoms. _& 3915, c.; E 3917, r.; E 3918, r.; E3919, v.r.; E 3922, f.

Genus Mississtprina Howe 1930

99 ‘MISSISSIPPINA CONCENTRICA (Parker and Jones 1864)
Pulvinulina concentrica Parker and Jones (in Brady) 1864, 470, pl. xlviii, fig. 14;
Brady 1884, 686, pl. cv, 1 a-e.
Eponides concentricus, Chapman, Parr and Collins, 1934, 565, pl. ix, 17 a-c.
Common and typical in the Philippines (Cushman). Previous record from
“Endeavour” material, 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common
and of variable size. Found in the Lower Miocene of Port Phillip. fF 3919, r.

Genus Cancris Montfort 1808
100 Cancris aurIcULA (Fichtel and Moll 1798)

Nautilus auricula Fichtel and Moll 1798, 108, pl. xx a-c; pl. xx d-f.
Pulvinulina auricula, Brady 1884, 688, pl. evi, fig. 5a-c; Chapman 1915, 31;

Cushman 1915, 53, pl. xxii, fig. 1.

Cancris auricula, Cushman 1931, 72, pl. xv, fig. la-c; Chapman and Parr 1937,

109,

A well distributed species in southern waters. Records from the “Aurora”
give one typical example east of Tasmania, 1,320 fathoms. From the “Terra
Nova” was noted at 7 miles east of North Cape, New Zealand. Also occurred in
dredgings by the trawler “Bonthorpe” in the Great Australian Bight. Cushman
states in his Philippine memoir, 1921, that it is one of the characteristic species
in the dredgings off the Philippines below 100 fathoms. Previously recorded in
“Endeavour” material, 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common as
a fossil in the Lower Miocene of Victoria. E 3916, v.r.

175

Genus ANoMALINA d’Orbigny 1826

101 ANOMALINA COLLIGERA Chapman and Parr 1937
Anomalina ammonoides, Brady (non Rosalina ammonoides Reuss) 1884, 672,
pl. xciv, fig. 2, 3.
Anomalina colligera Chapman and Parr 1937, 117, pl. ix, fig. 26.

Brady’s “Challenger” specimens came from Fiji and Papua. The “Aurora”
examples were found in dredgings east of Tasmania and between Tasmania and
the Antarctic. It was recently recorded from the Great Australian Bight
(“Bonthorpe”). Previous records from the “Endeavour” (Chapman 1915, as
“1. ammonoides) were-—east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms, and 40 miles south of
Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. E 3915, v.r.; E 3922, ver.

102. ANOMALINA GLABRATA Cushman 1924

Cushman 1924", 39, pl. xii, fig. 5-7; Chapman, Parr and Collins 1934, 570, pl. xi,

fig. 39 a-c; Chapman and Parr 1937, 117.

Type locality, off Samoa, in shallow water, From “Aurora” dredgings this
species was obtained off the Shackleton Shelf, Antarctic, and south and north-
east of Tasmania. It also joccurs as a fossil im the Miocene of Victoria (Parr)
and in beds. of the same age in Califorria,

E 3915, c.; E3917, r.; E 3918, v.r.; E 3920, r.; E 3922, vr.

103. ANOMALINA GLOBULOSA Chapman and Parr 1937
Anomalina grosserugosa, Brady (non Truncatulina grosserugosa Giimbel) 1884,
673, pl. xciv, fig. 4, 5.
Anomalina globulosa Chapman and Parr 1937, 117, pl. ix, fig. 27.

Brady’s “Challenger” Stations for this form are situated in the North and
South Atlantic and the North Pacific; two are in the South Pacific, 4. globu-
losa occurred in the “Aurora” soundings off St. Frances Island and to the east
of Tasmania. It has also been found on the coasts of Victoria and New South
Wales. Under the name of A. grosserugosa it was recorded earlier from an
“Endeavour” sample, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. 7 3920, v.r.; E3922, vr

104. ANOMALINA POLYMORPHA Costa 1856
Costa 1856, 252, pl. xxi, fig. 7-9; Brady 1884, 676, pl. xcvii, fig. 3-7; Chapman,

1907, 138.

Recorded by the “Challenger” off Sydney, 410 fathoms, west of New
Zealand, 275 fathoms and Fiji, 210 fathoms. Previous “Endeavour” material
proved this species to be common at 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms.
It was also found in shore sand at Beaumaris, Port Phillip.

E3917, v.r.; E3918, v.r.; E 3923, vr;

105 ANOMALINA sp. aff. roruLa d’Orbigny 1846
Anomalina rotula d’Orbigny 1846, 172, pl. x, fig. 10-12; Macfadyen 1930, 99, pl. iv,
fig. 10 a-c; Chapman, Parr and Collins 1934, 570, pl. xi, fig. 38 a-c,
Hitherto a fossil (Miocene) species, from the Vienna Basin, Egypt and Vic-
toria, The recent specimens are not quite typical when compared with the Lower
Miocene fossils from Victoria. E 3915. ff.

106 ANOMALINA VERMICULATA (d’Orbigny 1839)
Truncatulina vermiculata d’Orbigny 1839, 39, pl. vi, fig. 1-3.
Anomalina polymorpha Costa?, Brady, 1884, 676 pl. xevii, fig. 7.
Anomalina vermiculata, Heron-Allen arid Earland 1932, 423, pl. xv, fig. 1-15.
Common in the Falkland area (H.-A. and E.). E 3915, f.: E3920, vr.

176 .

Genus PLanutina d’Orbigny 1826
+107 PrLanuLina piconcava (Parker and Jones 1862)
Discorbina biconcava Parker and Jones (in Carpenter) 1862, 201, text-fig. xxxil;

Brady 1884, 653, pl. xci, fig. 2 a-c (non fig. 3).

The “Aurora” soundings from east of ‘lasmania contained examples of this
species. Also found off New Zealand (“Terra Nova’), Notably an Australian
species, it has been found in Bass Strait, Port Jackson, Torres Strait and Gulf
of Carpentaria. As Discorbina biconcava it also came from a former “Endeavour”
dredging, 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. E 3918, v.r.

108 PLanuLrina piconcava (Parker and Jones), var. UNGUICULATA
(Sidebottom 1918)
Discorbina lingulata, Burrows and Holland, var. unguiculata Sidebottom 1918,

255, pl. vi, fig. 12-14.

This variety appears to belong to the Planulina type of test rather than to
Heronallenia, in which genus lingulata is now placed. It was originally obtained
from Pteropod ooze, dredged by H.M.S. “Dart,” Station 19, at 465 fathoms.
The locality is north of Shoal Bay, New South Wales. E 3922, v.r.

109 PranuLina HALIoTIS (Heron-Allen and Earland 1924)
Discorbina haliotis Heron-Allen and Earland, 1924, 173, pl. xiii, fig. 99-101.

Originally described from the Tower Miocene of Batesford, Victoria, it is
of much interest to find this species still existing in Bass Strait. The locality is
33 miles east frony Green Cape, 470 fathoms. E 3922, vr.

Genus Ciprcipes Montfort 1808
110 Crprcmes AKNERTANUS (d’Orbigny 1846)

Rosalina akneriana dOrb. 1846, 156, pl. viii, fig. 13-15.
Truncatulina akneriana, Heron-Allen and Earland 1932, 421.

Recorded in “Discovery” Reports as very common in the Falkland Island
area. E 3920, v.r.
111 Crsrcmes LopatuLus (Walker and Jacob 1798)

Nautilus lobatulus Walker and Jacob 1798, 642, pl. xiv, fig. 36
Cibicides lobatulus, Chapman and Parr 1937, 119.
Very common at a large number of Stations, from the Antarctic to Tasmania
and New Zealand (“Aurora’ Expedition).
E 3916, r.; E 3917, r.; E3918, r.; E3919, r.; E 3921, v.r.; E 3922, f.

112 Cuinicives sp. aff. vicrorniensis Chapman, Parr and Collins 1934
Cibicides victoriensis Chapman, Parr and Collins 1934, 38, 571, pl. ix, fig. 16 a-c.
A recent development of the Victorian Miocene C. victoriensis.
E 3915, v.c.; E 3917, v.r.; E3918, r.; E 3919, £.; E 3920, vr.

113 CisicipEs PSEUDOUNGERIANUS (Cushman 1922)
Truncatulina pseudoungeriana Cushman 1922, 97, pl. xx, fig. 9.
Cibicides pseudoungerianus Cushman 1930, 123, pl. xxii, fig. 3-7.
Universally distributed in Southern Seas.
E 3915, f.; E3918, c.; E 3919, v.r.; E3922, f.; TE 3923, £.

+ See second footnote, p. 154.

177

114 CipicrpEs REFULGENS Montfort 1808
Montfort 1808, I, 122, 31me génre.
Truncatulina refulgens, Brady 1884, 659, pl. xcil, fig. 7-9.

Of world-wide distribution, this species occurs generally in the Southern
Hemisphere, and has been recorded from the Cape of Good Hope, Patagonia,
Falkland Islands, the Antarctic Ice Barrier and up to the shores of the Australian
continent. E 3915, r.; E 3918, v.r.; E 3922, r.

115 CIBICIDES WUELLERSTORFI (Schwager 1866)
Anomalina wuellerstorfi Schwager 1866, 258, pl. vii, fig. 105, 107.
Truncatulina wuellerstorfi, Brady 1884, 662, pl. xciii, fig. 8, 9.
Cibicides wuellerstorfi, Chapman and Parr 1937, 21.

Brady’s figured specimens came from the west coast of New Zealand. This
species was also found in the “Bonthorpe” dredgings off the Great Australian
Bight. Earlier “Endeavour” material recorded it fram east of Tasmania, 777
fathoms, and 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Fossil examples are
known from the Eocene and Miocene of New Zealand, and Schwager’s specimens
came from the Pliocene of Kar Nikobar.

E 3916, r.; F 3919, r.; E 3920, f.; E3921, f.; E 3922, {.3 E3923, f.

Genus Dyocintcipes Cushman and Valentine 1930
116 Dyocinicipes BISERIALIS Cushman and Valentine 1930
Cushman and Valentine 1930, 31, pl. x, fig. 1, 2 a-b.; Cushman 1931, 126, pl. xxiv,
fig. 2; Chapman, Parr and Collins 1934, 572, pl. xi, fig. 43 a-c.
Sparsely occuring off the coast of Australia and in the Southern Ocean, Also
fossil in the ].ower Miocene and upward in Victoria. F 3033) vt.

Genus AmpuistTecina d’Orbigny 1826
117 AmprrsrecIna Lessonir d’Orbigny 1826
d’Orbigny (pars) 1826, 304, No. 3, pl. xvii, fig. 1-4; Brady 1884, 740, pl. exi,

fig. 1-7,

The examples here recorded came from 505 fathoms, just north of Twofold
Bay, New South Wales (37° 21’ S., 150° 24’ E.). It is probably a record for this
high latitude, and it is teresting to note that the soundings from the “Bonthorpe”
trawler, in the Great Bight, record another solitary instance of the species in
high latitudes (from Sample 4, 33° 14’ S., 126° 16’ E.) at a depth of 100 fathoms,
a little south of Dover Point. E 3919. ver.

Fam. CHILOSTOMELLIDAE
Genus CHILOsToMELLA Reuss 1850
118 Chilostomella cushmani sp. nov.
(PI. viii, fig. 9; pl. ix, fig. 6)
Chilosiomella ovoidea Cushman (non Reuss) 1919, 621,

Cushman remarks, under the above reference, which deals with the examples
found off ‘Poor Knights Islands,” as follows: “There are several specimens
mounted on the slide which seem to show possibly both microspheric and
megalospheric forms. There are two very distinct sizes: the larger
specimen is evidently somewhat like CL grandis Cushman, described from the
Philippines. It is, however, not as large as that species.”

178

The definition of these New Zealand chilostomellids as given by Cushman so
well fits the characters of the specimens before me, and not C. grandis, that 1
have no hesitation in referring them to the same form as those from the
“Endeavour” soundings, including their reference (as Cushman supposes in his
case) to the forms A and B, as here illustrated. I have much pleasure, therefore,
in naming the species after my long-standing, eminent and indefatigable friend,
as Chilostomella cushmant.

Description—Test large, ovoid, about twice as long as broad; sides evenly
and fully curved; aperture sub-terminal, with an elevated rim (stand-up-collar
shape) and a widely open mouth. No internal segmentation visible from outside.
Surface of test smooth to polished, with numerous scattered puncta. Length,
1-08 mm.; breadth, 0°65 mm. This is probably Form A, pl. ii, fig. 9.

Test small, more narrowly ovoid and thinner than in Form A, more pointed
at oral end, with sides slightly more convex in proportion to Form A, Aperture
slit-like, closely adpressed to surface of test and without a rim-like margin as in
Form A. Surface smooth, less punctate and with internal chambers alternating
on a transverse axis, the edges of which are seen through the transparent test.
Length, 0°57 mm.; breadth, 0-27 mm. This is probably Form B, pl. iii, fig. 6.

Under the name of Chilostomella odlina Schwager, Heron-Allen and Earland
have figured (“Discovery” Reports Foram., Falkland Islands, 1932, 360, pl. 1x,
fig. 38, 39) what appears to me to belong to a formi very like C. cushmani of the
stage B. ‘Their figures also agree in point of size, measuring 0°677 mm. in length.

E 3917, r.; E3918, v.r.; E3923, f.

Genus Puttenia Parker and Jones 1862
119 Puttenra spHAEROIDES (d’Orbigny 1826)
Nonionina sphaeroides WVOrb. 1826, 293, No. 1—Modele No, 43.
Pullenia sphaeroides, Brady 1884, 615, pl. Ixxxiv, fig, 12, 13; Chapman and Parr

1937, 110.

Of world-wide distribution, from lat, 70° N., to lat. 54° S. (Brady). In the
Southern Hemisphere it ranges down to the Antarctic Ice Barrier, and is also
found around the coast of New Zealand, Previous “Endeavour” material recorded
it east of Tasmania, at’ 1,122 fathoms. E 3915, v.r.; E 3916, v.r.; E3920, r.

120 PuLLENIA suBCARINATA (d’Orbigny 1839)

Nonionina subcarinata d’Orbigny 1839%, 28, pl. v, fig. 23, 24.
Pullenia subcarinata, Heron-Allen and Earland 1932, 403, pl. xili, fig, 14-18.

Originally described from the Falkland Islands by d’Orbigny, it has been
generally confused with P. quinqueloba (Reuss), as pointed out by Heron-Allen
and Eatland, It remains to be seen whether the northern form differs from this
species and agrees with the fossil forms of P. quingueloba,

E 3916, v.r.; E 3919, v.r.; E 3920, r.

Genus SpHArrorprna d’Orbigny
121 SPHAFROIDINA BULLOIDEs d’Orbigny 1826
d’Orbigny 1826, 267, No. 1; Modéle No. 65; Brady 1884, 620, pl. Ixxxiv, fig. 1-7.
The “Aurora” dredgings containing this species were found around Tasmania.
It occurs in Sample 4 of the dredgings by the “Bonthorpe” in the Great Aus-
tralian Bight (Chapman and Parr).
E 3915, v.r.; E 3917, r.; E 3919, r.; E 3920, v.r.; E 3922, v-r.

179

Fam. ORBULINIDAE
Genus GLopicErtna d’Orbigny 1826
122 GLOBIGERINA BULLOIDEs d’Orbigny 1826
d’Orbigny 1826, 277, No. 1, Modéles: Nos. 17 and 76; Chapman and Parr 1937,
111.
A ubiquitous deep water and pelagic form,
E 3915, r.; E 3916, c.; E3917, f.; E 3918, v.c.; E3919, ¢.;
E 3920, v.c.; E3921, f.; E 3922, v.c.; E 3923, f.

123 GLOBIGERINA CONGLOMERATA Schwager 1866

Schwager 1866, 255, pl. vii, fig. 113.
G. dubia, Brady (non Egger) 1884, 595, pl. xxix, fig. 17 a-c.
G. conglomerata, Cushman 1927%, 172; Chapman and Parr 1937, 111,

An Eastern Pacific form agreeing with the Pliocene species of Kar Nikobar

FE 3918, r.
124 GLOBIGERINA DUTERTREI d’Orbigny 1839

d’Orbigny 18397, 84, pl. iv, fig. 19-21,

This species was noted as comnion from the soundings by the. “Aurora,”
extending from the Antarctic Barrier to New Zealand and Tasmania. From
previous “Endeavour” material the species was found at Station 35, east of
Tasmania, bottom sample, 377 fathoms; and 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100
fathoms. E 3919, r.; E 3922, vr.

125 GLoBIGERINA INFLATA d’Orbigny 1839
d’Orbigny 18391, 134, pl. ii, fig. 7-9.

The “Aurora” soundings contained numerous records of this species, from
south of Tasmania and near Macquarie Island. It is one of the commonest of
the genus in the present samples. Former “Endeavour” material contained the
species as follows: Station 35, east of Tasmania, bottom sample, 377 fathoms.
Station 36, ditto, 777 fathoms; east of Tasmania, 1,122 fathoms; 40 miles south
of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms.

E 3915, f.; E 3916, c.; E3917, £.; E 3918, v.c.; E3919, ¢.;
E 3920, v.c.; E 3921, v.c.; E 3922, v.c.; E 3923, v.c.

126 GLospIcERINA PACHYDERMA (Ehrenberg 1873)
Aristerospira pachyderma Ehr. 1873, 386, pl. i, fig. 4.
Globigerina pachyderma, Brady 1884, 600, pl. exiv, fig. 19, 20; Ileron-Allen and
Earland 1922, 190; Chapman and Parr 1937, 112.
From the east of Tasmania down to the Antarctic Ice Barrier.

E 3916, v.r.; E 3917, wr.

127 GLOBIGERINA SUBCRETACEA Chapman 1902
Globigerina cretacea, Brady (non d’Orbigny) 1884, 596, pl. Ixxxii, fig. 10.
G, subcretacea Chapman 1902, 410, pl. xxxvi, fig. 16¢,b; 1924, 17; Chapman
and Parr 1937, 113.
G, subcretacea was originally described from Funafuti, and has since been
found off the South African coast (Chapman). More lately it has been recorded
from the “Aurora” soundings round Tasmania and off the Shackleton Shelf

(Chapman and Parr), E 3918, r.; E3919, r.; E3920, £.; E3923, c.

180

Genus GLoBIGERINOIDES Cushman 1927
128 GLoBIGERTNOIDES TRILOBUS (Reuss 1850)

Globigerina triloba Reuss 1850, 374, pl. xlvii, fig. 11.
G. bulloides var. triloba, Brady 1884, 595, pl. Ixxix, fig, 1, 2; pl. Ixxx, fig. 2, 3.

Present in “Aurora” samples, between Tasmania and New Zealand, south of
Tasmania and in mid-ocean, north of the Antarctic Ice Barrier. Heron-Atlen and
Earland (1932) found this species more abundant than G. bulloides, in “Dis-
covery” material from the Falkland Islands. Previously from “Endeavour”
soundings (Chapman, 1915), cast of Tasmania, 1,122 fathoms, and 40 miles south
of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. E 3916, f.; E3917, r.; E 3920, c.; E 3922, vr.

Genus GLOBIGERINELLA Cushman 1927
129 GLOBIGERINELLA AEQUILATERALIS (Brady 1884)
Globigerina acquilateralis Brady 1884, 605, pl. Ixxx, fig. 18-21.
Cushman recorded it from many Stations in the Philippines. Earlier
“Endeavour” material secured this species from Station 36, east of Tasmania,
777 fathoms, and East Tasmania, 1,122 fathoms. E 3919, vr.

Genus Orsttina d’Orbigny 1839
130 Orsutina uNIversa d’Orbigny 1839
d’Orbigny 1839, 3, pl. i, fig. 1; Brady 1884, 608, pl. Ixxviti; pl. Ixxxi, fig. 8-26;
pl. ixxxii, fig. 1-3; Chapman and Parr 1937, 114.
Abundant in dredgings by the “Aurora,” from Tasmania to the Antarctic
Ice Barrier. Previous “Endeavour” records: Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777
fathoms, common; east of Tasmania, 1,122 fathoms, common; 40 miles south of
Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms, common and small.
E 3915, £.; E3917, r.; E3918, v.c.; E 3919, v.c.
E 3920, v.c.; E3921, v.c.; E3922, c.; E 3923, f.

Genus Putteniatina Cushman 1927
131 PULLENIATINA OBLIQUILOCULATA (Parker and Jones 1865)

Pullenia obliquiloculata Parker and Jones 1865, 368, 421, pl. xix, fig. 4; Brady
1884, 618, pl. Ixxxiv, fig. 16-20.
Pulleniatine obliquiloculata, Chapman and Parr 1937, 114.
This species occurred in only one sample from the “Aurora,” south of Tas-
mania. The “Terra Nova” records were mainly round New Zealand (Heron-
Allen and Earland). FE 3918, c.; E3919, v.r.; E3921, v.r.; E 3922, r.

Genus SPITAEROIDINELLA Cushman 1927
132 SPHAEROIDINELLA DEHISCENS (Parker and Jones 1865)

Sphaeroidina dehiscens, Brady 1884, 621, pl. Ixxxiv, fig. 11; Egger 1893, 376,

pl. xiii, fig. 58, 59; Chapman 1910, 418.

This species is apparently absent or very rare in cold water areas, Only one
immature specimen is recorded by the “Discovery” from the Falkland Islands.
It did not oceur in any of the “Aurora” soundings. Cushman notes it from
numcrous Stations in and around the Philippines. At Funafuti it occurred at
23 Stations, mostly in very deep water, from 590 to 1,489 fathoms, Brady records
it from 23 Stations in the South Pacific. Egger records it, from amongst other
Stations, from Mauritius, West Australia, Timor, New Guinea and [Eastern
Australia. It has been found only once in the fossil state, from the Pliocene of
Kar Nikobar (as Globigerina seminulina Schwager). E 3919, v.r.; E 3920, r.

181

Genus GLonoroTaLiA Cushman 1927
133 GropororaLia HirsuTA (d’Orbigny 1839)
Rotalia hirsuta d’Orbigny 1839", 131, pl. i, fig. 37-39.

Globorotalia hirsuta, Chapman and Parr 1937, 115, pl. ix, fig. 24.
The “Aurora” dredgings showed a restricted distribution for this species—

south and east of Tasmania and in Bass Strait, east of Adelaide.
Te 3915, v.r.; E 3917, r.; E 3918, c.; E 3919, c.;
E 3920, v.c.; E 3922, f.; E 3923, f.

134 GrLopororarra sciruLa (Brady 1882)
Pulvinulina scitula Brady 1882, 716.
Pulvinulina patagonica Brady (non d’Orbigny) 1884, 693, pl. cili, fig. 7 a-c.
Pulvinulina patagonica (d’Orb.) var. scituda, Leron-Allen and Earland 1922, 215.
Globorotalia scitula, Chapman and Parr 1937, 116.

Common in the “Aurora” dredgings; its distribution comprises Bass Strait
and south-west of Australia in the Southern Ocean, and the Antarctic Ice Barrier,
off Queen Mary Land. From the previous “Endeavour” dredgings (under
Pulvinulina patagonica), at Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms, and east
of Tasmania, 1,122 fathoms. E. 3922, f.; E 3923, v.r.

135 GLOBOROTALIA TRUNCATULINOIDES (d’Orbigny 1839)
Rotalina truncatulinoides d’Orb. 18391, 132, pl. ii, fig. 25-27.
Globorotalia truncatulinoides, Chapman and Parr 1937, 116.

From the “Aurora” it was obtained at Stations south-west of New Zealand
and deeper parts of the Southern Ocean. Previous material from “Endeavour”
soundings yielded it from Station 35, east of Tasmania, bottom sample, 377
fathoms; Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms; east of Tasmania at 1,122
fathoms, and 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms.

FE 3916, f.; E3917, r.; E3918, v.c.; E 3919, v.r.;
E 3921, v.r.; E 3922, f.; E 3923, f.

Fam. NUMMULITIDAE
Genus Nonion Montfort 1808
136 Nownion pEpREssuLus (Walker and Jacob 1798)
Nautilus depressulus Walker and, Jacob 1798, 641, pl. xiv, 33.
Nonionina depressula, Brady 1884, 725, pl. cix, 6, 7; Chapman 19162, 70, pl. v,
fig. 41.
Nonion depressulus, Chapman and Parr 1937, 99.

From the “Aurora” samples the above species was obtained in the D’Urville
Sea, off the Ice Barrier; also south of Tasmania and in the deeper parts of the
Southern Ocean. Heron-Allen and Earland found it in the “Discovery” samples
round the Falkland Islands, where they were numerous but small.

E 3917, r.; E 3919, r.

137 Nonion craTeLourr (d’Orbigny 1826)
Nonionina grateloupt dOrbigny 1826, 294, No. 19; 18392, 46, pl. vi, fig. 6, 7.
Nonion grateloupi, Heron-Allen and Earland, 1932, 437, pl. xvi, fig. 9, 10.
This species occurs in the West Indies and also in the Falklands
(“Discovery”). E 3920, f.

182

138 Nownion scapHa (Fichtel and Moll 1798)
Nautilus scapha Fichtel and Moll 1798, 105, pl. xix, fig. d-f.
Nonionina scapha, Brady 1884, 780, pl. cix, fig. 14, 15.
The “Aurora” samples (Chapman and Parr 1937) contained the above
species at two stations, east of Tasmania and off Queen Mary Land, Antarctica.
E 3916, v.r.; E 3918, r.

139 Nonron umBiLicatutus (Montagu 1803)
Nautilus umbilicatulus Montagu 1803, 191; Suppl., 78, pl. xviii, fig. 1.
Nonionina wmbilicatula, Brady 1884, 726, pl. cix, fig. 8, 9.
Nonion umbilicatulus, Chapman and Parr 1937, 100.

The above species occurred at the following Stations: south-east of Tas-
mania; between Tasmania and New Zealand; off the Ice Barrier (Wilkes Land) ;
north of Auckland Island, 85 fathoms. Previous “Endeavour” material, east
of Tasmania, 1,122 fathoms. Fossil in the Lower Miocene of Victoria.

E 3915, r.; E 3922, v.r.

Genus E_puiprum Montfort 1808
140 Evpuipium apvENUM Cushman 1922
Polystomella subnodosa, Brady (non Minster) 1884, 734, pl. cx, fig. a, b.
Polystomella advena, Cushman 1922, 56, pl. ix, fig. 11, 12.
Elphidium advenum Cushman 1930, 25, pl. x, fig. 1, 2.

This, species, under the name of Polystomella subnodosa, was recorded by
Brady from two “Challenger” Stations south-west of New Guinea, viz., Station
187, off Booby Island, 6-8 fathoms, and Station 188, closely adjacent, at 28
fathoms. Cushman recorded it, under the same name as Brady, at 13 Stations
in the Philippines. E 3915, c.; E3916, v.r.; E 3917, v.r. E 3918, f.;

E 3919, r.3 E 3922, v.r.; E3923, vur.

141 Evpuipium crispum (Linné 1767)
Nautilus crispus Linné 1767, 1,162; 1788, 3,370.
Polystomella crispa, Brady 1884, 736, pl. cx, fig. 6, 7; Cushman 1921, 368,
Elphidium crispum, Chapman and Parr 1937, 100.

Recorded from the Subantarctic Islands, New Zealand, and off Kerguelen
Island. Fairly common in the dredgings by the trawler “Bonthorpe,” from
West Australia. Previous “Endeavour” dredgings found it 40 miles south of
Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms, where it was frequent. E 3923, v.r.

142 ExpHipiuM IMPERATRIX (Brady 1884)
Polystomella imperatrix Brady 1884, 738, pl. cx, fig. 13-15.
Brady’s. figured types were, fig. 13, 14, from Storm Bay, Tasmania, and
fig. 15, from Station 163B, Port Jackson, 2-10 fathoms (fide Nuttall).
E 3915, r.; E 3918, f.; E 3919, f.

143. ELpHIpIUM JENSENI (Cushman 1924)
Polystomella jenseni Cushman 1924, 49, pl. xv, ?4, 6.
Polystomella macella (T°. and M.) var., Jensen 1905, 817, pl. xxiii, fig. 4.
Cushman’s specimens were dredged at Samoa. Jensen’s original examples

came from 100 fathoms off Wollongong, New South Wales.
E 3920, v.r.

183

144 Exvprmipium Lesson (d’Orbigny 1826)
Polystomella lessonii V’Orbigny 1826, 284, No. 6; 18393, 29, pl. iti, fig. 1, 2.
Elphidium lessonii, Cushman 1930, 22, pl. ix, fig. 1-4; Heron-Allen and Earland
1932, 44, pl. xvi, fig. 29, 30.
d’Orbigny’s specimens came from Patagonia and the Falkland Islands.
E 3917, r.; E 3918, v.r.; E 3922, f.

145 Exreninium MACELLUM (Fichtel and Moll 1798)
Nautilus macellus F, and M. 1798, 66, pl. x, fig. e-k.
Polystomella macella, Brady 1884, 737, pl. cx, fig. 8, 9, 11.
Elphidium macellum, Chapman and Parr 1937, 101.
The “Aurora” samples came fronv east of Tasmania, Previous “Endeavour”
material occurred at Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms, and from 40 miles
south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. E 3920, r.; E 3921, v.r.; E3922, r.

146 EvpHipium poryanum (d’Orbigny 1839)
Polystomella poeyana d’Orbigny, 18392, 55, pl. iv, fig. 25, 26; Cushman 1922, 55,
pl. ix, fig. 9, 10.
This. species has been described from Cuba and Jamaica; also from Florida.
E 3920, r.

147 ELPHIDIUM VERRICULATUM (Brady 1884)

Polystomella verriculata Brady 1884, 738, pl. cx, fig. 12a, b.; Chapman 1907,

142, pl. x, fig. 10.

Elphidium verriculatum, Chapman and Parr 1937, 101.

Brady records this species from Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait, at 38 fathoms,
and according to Nuttall this is the type locality. Brady also gives Curtis Strait,
Queensland, which, however, does not appear in the ‘list of Stations, but would
inferentially be of not very deep water. Other localities for this) species are the
Malay Archipelago, Sagami Bay, Japan and from shore sand, Beaumaris, Port
Phillip, Victoria. Jensen notes it from Lizard Island, Great Barrier Reef,
Queensland; whilst Goddard and Jensen obtained it from Palm Island, Towns-
ville, at 15 fathoms. The exceptional depths recorded for this species, of 1,320
and 1,300 fathoms, were from| samples dredged by the “Aurora” to the east of
Tasmania; it is usually considered a shallow water form.

E 3915, v.c.; E3918, v.r.; E3922, v.r.; E 3923, r.

Superfam. AMMODISCOIDEA
Fam. HYPERAMMINIDAE
Genus HyperAMMINA Brady 1878
148 HyPpEeRAMMINA NOVAEZEALANDIAE Heron-Allen and Earland 1922

Technitella mestayeri, Cushman 1919, 595, pl. Ixxiv, fig. 4.

Hyperammina novaezedlandiae Heron-Allen and Earland 1922, 89, pl. iii, fig. 1-5.
Heron-Allen and Earland obtained this species in “Terra Nova” dredgings,

7 miles east of North Cape, New Zealand. E 3920. r.

184

Fam. SACCAMMINIDAE
Genus SaccAMMINA M. Sars 1869
149 SAcCAMMINA SPHAERICA Sars 1872
G. O. Sars 1872, 250; Brady 1884, 253, pl. xviii, fig. 11-17; Chapman 1916?, 61,
pl. ii, fig. 12; Heron-Allen and Earland 1922, 85, pl. i, fig. 16; Chapman and

Parr 1937, 161.

This bipolar species has been shown, by the investigations of the “‘Challenger”
at the Antarctic Ice Barrier, to be almost as equally abundant in Antarctic Seas as
in the North Atlantic. From the “Nimrod” gatherings (Shackleton Expedition)
I obtained it from the Ross Sea; whilst from the soundings of the “Terra Nova”
(Scott Expedition) Heron-Allen and Earland recorded it as occurring on the
east coast of New Zealand and off the Ice Barrier. The “Aurora” records
(Mawson 1911-14) were off Wilke’s and Adelie Land. The present example is
small, white, globular with a short neck and composed of minute, irregularly-
sized quartz grains. E3915. vr.

Genus PeLosina Brady 1879
150 PELOsINA CYLINDRICA Brady 1884
Brady 1884, 236, pl. xxvi, fig. 1-6; Chapman and Parr 1937, 162.

It is interesting to find this species ranging into lower latitudes of the
Southern Ocean, for it was formerly known as occurring off the Ice Barrier and
off the east coast of New Zealand. The “Aurora” obtained it to the east of

Tasmania. E 3915, f.

Genus BracuysipHon Chapman 1906

151 ? BRACHYSIPHON corRULIForMIs Chapman 1906
Chapman 1906, 84, pl. ili, fig. 2a, b, 3.

Two examples, referable to the above species, were found. These are sub-
spherical, open at one end in the smaller and at both ends in the larger specimen.
Test composed of small foraminiferal shells mingled with broken spicules of
sponge. Diameter of larger specimen twice that of the type from New Zealand.
Orifice in both nearly circular, with internal margin smooth. E 3915, +.

Genus TECUNITELLA Norman 1878
152. TrctNitetita cf. LEGUMEN Norman 1878
Norman 1878, 279, pl. xlvi, fig. 3, 4.

This species has been recorded from, amongst other localities, Kerguelen
Islands, 120 fathoms; off Sydney, 410 fathoms; the Society Islands and Fiji.
Also from the North and South Atlantic. E 3915, v.r.

Fam. ASTRORHIZIDAE
Genus RHABDAMMINA M. Sars 1869
153. RiABDAMMINA DISCRETA Brady 1884
Brady 1884, 268, spl. xxii, fig. 7-10.
Recorded off Kerguelen Island, 120 fathoms. Also in the North and South

Atlantic and the Pacific Ocean. As the cooler waters of the north and south
poles are approached, the habitat of the species decreases in depth,

E 3918, £.; E3919, v.r.; E3920, v.c.; E 3921, vr.

185

154 RHABDAMMINA IRREGULARIS W. B. Carpenter 1869
Carpenter 1869, 60; Brady 1884, 268, pl. xxi, fig. 9; Cushman 1918, 17, pl. viii,
fig. 1.
Norman obtained this form from the Bay of Biscay. It has also been found
off the West Coast. of Australia andj in the Pacific. E 3920, v.r.

Fam. OPHTHALMIDITDAE
Genus Cornuspira Schultze 1854
155 CorRNuSPIRA FOLIACEA (Philippi 1844)

Orbis foliacea Philippi 1844, 147, pl. xxiv, fig. 26.
Cornuspira foliacea, Brady 1884, 199, pl. xi, fig. 5-9; Cushman 1921, 387,

pl. Ixxvii, fig. 1.

This species is common to a fauna extending from Japan, the Philippines
and the South Seas, the extremity of which area includes Tasmanian shores and
Bass Strait. A large specimen, 6 mm. in diameter. E 3915, v.r.

156 Cornuspira Fotracea (Philippi 1844) var. Expansa Chapman 1915

Cornuspira carinata (Costa) var. expansa Chapman 1915, 12, pl. i, fig. 3.
Cornuspira foliacea (Phil.) var. expansa, Cushman 1919, 633.
C. foliacea (Phil.) var. expansa, Cushman 1921, 388, pl. Ixxvil, fig. 2.

In 1921 Cushman pointed out that my variety expansa belonged to C. foliacea,
a typical Cornuspira of the Philippines. Although my specific determination of
C. carinata, to which eapansa was referred, was based on Brady’s figure of Costa’s
species, in deference to Cushman’s close acquaintance with the Philippine fora-
miniferal fauna I accept this view of the case. Cushman had already discovered
my varicty in the New Zealand fauna, from the east coast, at Poor Knights
Islands. In previous “Endeavour” material, two examples from 40 miles south of

Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. E 3919, v.r.

157 CorNUSPIRA LACUNOSA Brady 1884
Brady 1884, 202, pl. cxiti, fig. 1.
Recorded from Torres Strait (type locality), and rarely in the Philippines
and off Japan (Cushman). E3915, vr.

158 Cornusrrra sTRIOLATA Brady 1884
Brady 1884, 202, pl. exiii, fig. 18, 19; Chapman 1907, 23, pl. iii, fig. 47.

The type locality is Farde Channel (cold area), 540 fathoms. Howchin, in
1889 (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 12, 4), regarded this species as a variety of
C. foliacea, with its structure presumably brought out by weathering. This was
the first note on the occurrence of this interesting species, living elsewhere, as an
Australian Lower Miocene fossil.

When describing the above as a fossil species in 1907, I remarked that “the
doubts relating to their specific identification were removed,” and further noted
“its strictly northern distribution in the living condition.” Since then it has been
recorded also in the living condition in the Southern Hemisphere in two instances :
(1) By Heron-Allen and Earland, in “Terra Nova” samples, off South Victoria
Land (Station 339), where one specimen reached the dimensions of the enormous
tests found in the cold area of the Farde Channel, namely, 21 mm. x 19 mm.;
(2) in the present series, east of Babel Island, Flinders Island, Bass Strait.

E 3915, v.r.

186

Genus OPIHTHALMIDIUM Zwingli and Kiibler 1870
159 OPHTHALMIDIUM cIRCULARIS (Chapman 1915)
Spiroloculina dorsata Reuss var. circularis Chapman 1915, 7, pl. i, fig. 1.
Previously obtained from “Endeavour” dredgings, Station 36, east of Tas-
mania, 777 fathoms. E3918 vr.
Genus PLANISPIRINA Seguenza 1880
160 PLANISPIRINA BUCCULENTA (Brady 1884)

Miliolina bucculenta Brady 1884, 170 pl. cxiv, fig. 3@,b; Heron-Allen and
Earland 1922, 65.

Planispirina bucculenta, Schlumberger 1892, 194, pl. viii, fig. 6, 7; Chapman 1909,
324, 14, pl. xiv, fig. 2; Chapman 19161, 42, pl. v, fig. 4; Heron-Allen and
Earland 1932, 322; Chapman and Parr 1937, 129.

This. species is fairly abundant and often of large size in southern waters;
notably near the Subantarctic Islands of New Zealand, near the Western Base,
Shackleton Shelf (“Aurora”), Falkland Islands (“Discovery”)—small specimens,
and from the upthrust muds on Mount Erebus (“Nimrod”).

E 3915, r.; E 3918, f.; E 3919, £.; E 3923, ¢.

161 PLANISPIRINA BUCCULENTA var. PLACENTIFORMIS (Brady 1884)

Miliolina bucculenta var. placentiformis Brady 1884,.71, pl. iv, fig. 1, 2.
Planispirina bucculenta var, placentiformis, Chapman 1916!, 43, pl. v, fig. 5.

Found in upthrust muds on Mount Erebus. E 3918, r.: E 3923. ¢.

Fam. MILIOLIDAE
Genus QUINQUELOCULINA d’Orbigny 1826
162 QUINQUELOCULINA AUBERIANA d’Orbigny 1839
d’Orbigny 18397, 193, pl. xii, fig. 1-3.
A small and rather contorted form of Q. lamarckiana d’Orb, Also cf.

Q. contorta d’Orb., which was recorded from previous “Endeavour” samples ;
Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. F 3919, r.; E3922, v.r.: E3923, r.

163. QUINQUELOCULINA AUSTRALIS Parr 1932
Parr 1932, 7, pl. I, fig. 8 a-c.
Having a more compressed test and marginal keel, as compared with the

northern Q. subrotunda (Montagu). Recorded as the latter from former
“Endeavour” material, 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. E 3919, r.

164 QUINQUELOCULINA cRASSA d’Orbigny 1826

d’Orbigny 1826, 301, No. 14; Fornasini 1905, 65, pl. iii, fig. 5.

Test suborbicular, swollen and finely striated. Occurred in several samples
of dredgings by the trawler “Bonthorpe” in the Great Australian Bight.

E 3915, V.F.
165 QUINQUELOCULINA CUVIERIANA d’Orbigny 1839

dOrbigny 18397, 190, pl. xi, fig. 19-21.
Miholina cuvieriana, Brady 1884, 162, pl. v, fig. 12 a-c,

Periphery sharply keeled. In shore sand, Victoria, Papua and the Philip-
pines. From previous “Endeavour” material, 40 miles south of Cape Wiles,
100 fathoms. Common as a Lower Miocene fossil in Victoria.

E 3915, r.; E 3917, v.r.; E 3918, v.r.

187

166 QUINQUELOCULINA LAMARCKIANA d’Orbigny 1839
@Orbigny 18392, 164, pl. ix, fig. 14, 15.

A common species in shore sands in Victoria, Distinguished by its sharp
periphery.
E 3915, f.; E 3917, v.r.; E 3920, r.; E 3921, v.r.; E 3922, v.r.; E 3923, f.

167 QUINQUELOCULINA SEMINULUM (Linn. 1767)
Serpula seminulum Linn, 1767, ed. xii, 1,264, No. 791.
Miliolina seminulum, Brady 1884, 157, pl. v, fig. 6.

One of the commonest miliolines, in shore sands on the coast of Victoria.

E 3917, v.r.; E 3923, f.

168 QUINQUELOCULINA vuLGARIs d’Orbigny 1826
d’Orbigny 1826, 302, No. 33; Schlumberger 1893, 65, (207), pl. ii, fig. 65, 66,

woodcuts 13, 14.

Recorded from previous “Endeavour” material, 40 miles south of Cape
Wiles, 100 fathoms. Abundant and rather small, Abundant as a Lower Miocene
fossil in Victoria. E 3915, c.; E 3916, v.r.; E 3918, ¢.; E3919, c.;

E 3920, r.; E 3922, v.r.; E 3923, r.

Genus SprroLocuLina d’Orbigny 1826
169 SprroLocULINA CANALICULATA d’Orbigny 1846

d’Orbigny 1846, 269, pl. xvi, fig. 10-12; Cushman 1921, 395, pl. Ixxx, fig. 3, a, b;

Chapman 1915, 6,
Spiroloculina tmpressa, Brady 1884 (non Terquem), 151, pl. x, fig. 3, 4.

Common in the Philippines, usually at less depth than 100 fathoms. From
previous “Endeavour” material 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms,
abundant. E 3915, c.; E 3918, r.; E 3919, r.; E 3923, f.

Genus Sicmoiuina Schlumberger 1887
170 Sigmoilina latissima sp. nov.
(Pl. viii, fig. 8)

Description—Test broadly ovate, complanate, with surface encrusted by
cement and fine sand. Exterior showing slight undulations indicating the sig-
moiline arrangement of the interior. Contour not so tumid as in S. schlumbergeri
Silvestri, nor so spiroloculine as in ? Spiroloculina arenaria Brady. Aperture
small, at the end of a short tube, butt as long as in the latter form, with which,
however, it may be related. Length, 1-83 mm.; breadth, 1-6 mm.; thick-
ness, 0-44 mm. E 3918, r.; E3919, f.

171 SiGMOILINA SCILLUMBERGERI Silvestri 1904
Planispirina celata, Brady (non Costa) 1884, 197 pl. vili, fig. 1-4.
Sigmoilina schlumbergeri Silvestri 1904, 267; Chapman 1915, 317; Cushman
1921, 449.
Previous “Endeavour” material contained this species at Station 36, east
of Tasmania, 777 fathoms, frequent; and east of Tasmania, 1,122 fathoms.
E 3922, v.r.; E 3923, v.r.
Genus PrycHomiLiota Eimer and Fickert 1899
172 PrycHOMILIOLA SEPARANS (Brady 1881)
Miliolina separans Brady 1881, 45; 1884, 175, pl. vii, fig. 1-4.

This species has previously been recorded from Raines Island, Torres Strait,
Booby Island, New Guinea, and Storm Bay, Tasmania. E3915, r.

188

Genus Tritocutina d’Orbigny 1826
173 Trivocutina cHRysostoma (Chapman 1909)
Miliolina chrysostoma Chapman 1909, 322, pl. xiii, fig. 8-10; pl. xiv, fig. 1-4.
These show an extremely variable series, ranging from ovate to bi- and tri-
loculine modifications. The oral septum is plate-like or feebly T-shaped. Found off
the Snares at 60 fathoms; 20 miles north; and 10 miiles north of Enderby sland,
85 fathoms. E 3919, v.r.

174 Trirocutina circuLaris Bornemann 1855
Bornemann 1855, 349, pl. xix, fig. 4; Cushman 1921, 462, pl. xcii, fig. 1, 2.
Miliolina circularis, Brady 1884, 169, pl. iv, fig. 3 a-c; pl. v, fig. 13.

A common species in the Indo-Pacific, and in the dredgings by the “Bon-
thorpe” off the Great Australian Bight. Previous “Endeavour” soundings
recorded this species 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms; small but very
abundant. E 3923, f.

175 TRILOCULINA QUADRILATERALIS d’Orbigny 1839
d’Orbigny 18392, 173, pl. ix, fig. 14-16 (quadrilatera on pl.).
This form resembles Q. auberiana but is triloculine and with straight sides.
The type locality is the West Indies. E 3920, v.r.; E 3921, v.r.; E 3922, v.r.

176 ‘TRILOcULINA TRICARINATA d’Orbigny 1826

d’Orbigny 1826, 7, 299, No. 7, Modeéle, 94.
Miliolina tricarinata, Brady 1884, 165, pl. iii, fig. 17 a, b.

Its distribution extends from Franz Josef Land in the north to the Antarctic
Ice Barrier in the south. Found in shallow water on the Victorian coast. As a
fossil it ranges through the Tertiary and is frequent in the bores in Victoria.
Previous “Endeavour” material yielded this species as follows: 40 miles south
of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms, and east of Tasmania, 1,122 fathoms.

E 3915, f.; E 3919, v.r.; E 3920, r.

177. TriLocuLina TRIGONULA (Lamarck 1804)
Miliolites trigonula Lamarck 1804, 351, No. 3; 1822, 612, No. 3.
Triloculina trigonula, @Orbigny 1826, 299, No. 1, pl. xvi, fig. 5-9.
Miliolina trigonula, Brady 1884, 164, pl. iii, fig. 14-16.

A widely distributed species, extending even to the Antarctic, but there very
small. The largest forms occur in tropical waters. Also as a fossil from carliest
Tertiary time. Previous “Endeavour” material yielded one rather large specimen
from 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. PAGS: HAST

Genus MiniotinELta Wiesner 1931
178 MILIoLINELLA opLonca (Montagu 1803)
Vermiculum oblongum Montagu 1803, 522, pl. xiv, fig. 9.
a sae oblonga, d’Orb. 18392, 175, pl. x, fig. 3-5; Chapman and Parr 1937,
Miliolina oblonga, Brady 1884, 160, pl. v, fig. 44, b.
A widely distributed species from the North Sea to the Antarctic. A bipolar
form. E 3915, v.r.; E3916, v.r.; E 3918, v.r.; E 3922, vr.

189

Genus Pyrco Defrance 1824
179 Pyrco comata (Brady 1881)

Biloculina comata Brady 1881, 45; 1884, 144, pl. i, fig. 9a,b; Schlumberger

1891; 565, text-fig. 26-28, pl. x, fig. 72, 73; Cushman 1921, 477, pl. xcvi,

fig. 3.a,b.

Amongst Brady’s localities for this rare species are: off Sydney, 410
fathoms; north of New Guinea, 1,070 fathoms; and off Pernambuco, 350 fathoms.
Cushman records B, comata from several Stations in the Philippines, and also
from the east coast of New Zealand. Schlumberger’s specimens came from the
Gulf of Gascony and the Skagerak. E 3919, v.r.

180 Pyrco ELoncatra (d’Orbigny 1826)
Biloculina elongata d’Orbigny 1826, 298, No. 4; Brady 1884, 144, pl. it, fig. 9a, b;
Schlumberger 1891, 571, text-fig. 35, 36; pl. xi and xii, fig. 87-89; Chapman
1907, 15, pl. i, fig. 14; Cushman 1921, 473, pl. xcv, fig. 4 a, b.

Abundant in the North and South Pacific (Brady). Schlumberger’s speci-
mens came from the Mediterranean. Previous “Endeavour” material contained
this species from Station 36, east of ‘Tasmania, 777 fathoms. This species occurs
as a fossil in the Lower Miocene and Pliocene of Victoria.

E 3919, r.; E 3920, v.r.; E 3921, v.r.; E 3923, v.r.

181 Pyrco rornastnit Chapman and Parr 1935
Biloculina ringens, Brady (non Miliolites ringens Lamarck) 1884, 142, pl. ii, fig. 7.
Biloculina bradyi, Schlumberger (non Fornasini) 1891, 170, text-fig. 15-19, pl. x,
fig. 63-71.
Pyrgo fornasintt Chapman and Parr 1935, 5.

The trivial name for this species, having been pre-occupied by Fornasini,
necesitated the above change of name. The original specimen figured by Brady
came from the West Indies (fide Nuttall). ‘Those figured by Schlumberger were
dredged in the Gulf of Gascony, Coast of Marocco. The Australian examples
were dredged by the trawler “Bonthorpe” in the Great Australian Bight. The
species was also met with in “Endeavour” dredgings (1915), when I described it
under the name of Biloculina bradyi Schl., from 40 miles south of Cape Wiles at
100 fathoms. It has also been dredged from the areca around the Subantarctic
Islands of New Zealand. As a fossil it is found in the Lower Miocene Tertiaries
of Port Phillip (Chapman). E 3915, f,; E3918, vr.

182 Pyrco sarsr (Schlumberger 1891)
Biloculina ringens, Brady pars (non Lamarck) 1884, 139.
Biloculina sarsi Schlumberger 1891, 551, text-fig. 10-12, pl. ix, fig. 55-59; Chap-

man 1907, 14, pl. i, fig. 1, 2.

The type locality for the above, as given by Schlumberger, is the North Sea,
between Norway and Greenland. Lrady does not specifically figure it, but it
comes from the same “Biloculina Clay” discovered by G. O. Sars of Christian
and described by him in his official report on the Norwegian Sea-fisheries for the
year 1876. It has been recorded by me from the Subantarctic Islands of New
Zealand, and from previous “Endeavour” dredgings, 40 miles south of Cape
Wiles. The species has also been found in the Lower Miocene of Victoria.

E 3918, v.r.; E 3922, v.r.; E 3923, rv.

190

183 PyRco vEsPERTILIO (Schlumberger 1891)
Biloculina vespertilio Schlumberger 1891, 561, pl. x, 74-76, text-fig. 20-22.
Biloculina ringens, Brady (non Miliolites ringens | ‘amarck) 1884, 142, pl. ii, fig. 8;

Chapman 19092, 315, pl. xiii, fig. 4,0; Cushman 1917, 77, pl. xxx, fig, 1.
Pyrgo vespertilio, Chapman and Parr 1937, 142, pl. ui, fig. 8,

Schlumberger’s specimens came from the Gulf of Gascony. Cushman has
noted it off the coast of Japan at 258 fathoms, and it has occurred around the Sub-
antarctic Islands of New Zealand (Chapman) and in “Aurora” dredgings south-
west of Tasmania (Chapman and Parr) E 3919, v.r.

Genus PyrRGoELLA Cushman and White 1936
184 PyRGOELLA SPHAERA (d’Orbigny 1839)
Biloculina sphaera d’Orbigny 1839, 66, pl. viii, fig, 13-16; Brady 1884, 141,
pl. ii, fig. 4a, db.
Planispirina sphaera, Schlumberger 1891, 377, text-fig. 45, 46; Chapman 1906, 82,
pl. iii, fig. 1 a, 6; Heron-Allen and Earland 1932, 322, a vi, fig. 41, 42.
Pyrgoella ‘sphaera, Cushman and White 1936, 90.

The South American type of d@’Orbigny’s Biloculina sphaera shows a similar
labyrinthic aperture to one found off Great Barrier Island, New Zealand: (Chap-
man 1906). Schlumberger’s specimens came from the Gulf of Gascony. Heron-
Allen and Earland’s Antarctic examples came from the Talkland Islands and

South Georgia. E 3915, {.; E3918, £.; E 3920, v.r.; E 3923, ver.

Genus BILocuLINELLA Wiesner 1931
185 BILocuLINELLA GLOBULUS (Bornemann 1855)
Biloculina globulus Bornemann 1855, 349, pl. xix, fig. 3; Schlumberger 1891, 575,

text-fig. 42-44, pl. xii, fig. 97-100; Chapman 1907, 15, pl. i, fig. 17, 18.
Pyrgo globulus, Chapman and Parr 1937, 137.

This species was found in the Antarctic (“Aurora” dredgings), near the
Western Base, off Queen Mary Land, specimens frequent. Cushman records it
from the Philippines, at eleven different Stations. It was found as a fossil in the
Lower Miocene of Port Phillip, Victoria. 3915, {.; E3916, v.r.; E 3919, v.r,

Fam. LITUOLIDAE
Genus HariorHracMorwes Cushman 1910
186 HaApPLopHRAGMOIDES EMACIATUS (Brady 1884)

Haplophragmium emaciatum Brady 1884, 305, pl. xxxili, fig. 26-28; Heron-Allen

and Learland 1922, 98.
Haplophragmoides emaciatum, Cushman 1910, 102, text-fig. 150-152; 1920, 40,

pl. vin, fig. 4, text-fig. 1-3.
Haplophragmoides emaciatus, Chapman and Parr 1937, 139.

Brady recorded this species from the West Indies. It has recently been
found in the Antarctic, off Adele Land, Queen Mary Land, east of Tasmania and
to the south of New Zealand, in dredgings from the “Aurora.” E 3918. ver

, vit.

187 JIAPLOPHRAGMOIDES GRANDIFORMIS Cushman
Cushman 1910, 440, text-fig. 11; 1921, 82, pl. xi, fig. 2.

Cushman described this species from the China and Molucea Seas. It has
been lately recorded in “Bonthorpe” material from the Great Australian Bight.

FE, 3915, c.; E 3918, vr.

191

Genus REcurvoiwrs Earland 1934
188 RECURVOIDES conToRTUS Earland 1934
Earland 1934, 91, pl. x, fig. 7-19; Chapman and Parr 1937, 138, pl. ix, fig. 34 a, b.
First described from the Falklands Sector of the Antarctic (“Dis-
covery”). Chapman and Parr did not find it north of latitude 60° (“Aurora”) ;
it was commonest at 150-300 fathoms. Its greatest depth was 1,550 fathoms.
The present occurrence, 33 miles cast from Green Cape, is a great distance from
its hitherto known habitat. E3022 +

Genus AMMopBACULITES Cushman 1910
189 AMMOBACULITES AGGLUTINANS (d’Orbigny 1846)
Spirolina agglutinans VOrbigny 1846, 137, pl. vii, fg. 10-12.
Haplophragnuium agglutinans, Brady 1884, 301, pl. xxxii, fig. 19, 20, 24-26;
Heron-Allen and Earland 1922, 97.
Ammobaculites agglitimans, Cushman 1920, 60, pl. xti, fig. 3; Chapman and Parr
1937, 142, pl. x, fig. 37.

A well-distributed species. lt occurs sparingly off the Antarctic Ice Barrier
(“Aurora”). It was originally described from the Tertiary of the Vienna Basin.

E 3919, ver.
Fam. REOPHACIDAE
Genus Reopuax Montfort 1808
190 REOPHAX DENTALINIFORMIS Brady 1884
3rady 1884, 293, pl. xxx, fig. 21, 22; Chapman and Parr 1937, 147.
This species has been recorded from the Ross Sea (“Nimrod”) and from the

Antarctic by the “Terra Nova.” The “Aurora” dredged it from the Antarctic and
from east of Tasmania. E 3919, r.

191 ReOPHAX DISTANS var. PSEUDODISTANS Cushman 1919
Reophax spiculifera Brady var. pseudodistans Cushman 1919, 598, pl. Ixxv,
fig. 1.
Reophas distans var. pscudodistans, Heron-Allen and Earland 1932, 338, pl. vii,
17-20.
From the “Discovery” soundings around the Falkland Islands. The present,
Green Cape, locality is remote from the earlier one. E 3920, vr.

192 ReopHaAx scorriurus Montfort 1808
Montfort 1808, 330, 83 genre; Brady 1884, 291, pl. xxx, fig. 12-17; Chapman and
Parr 1937, 149.
Found off the Ice Barrier and commonly around the Australian coast. ‘The
species was dredged by the trawler ““Bonthorpe” off the Great Australian Bight.
The previous “Endeavour” record for this species is 40 miles south of
Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. IE 3928, r.
Fam. TEXTULARIIDAE
Genus TExTULARIA Defrance, 1824
193 TextunArta conica (d’Orbigny 1839)
dOrbigny 18392, 135, pl. i, fig. 19, 20; Brady 1884, 365, pl. xlii, fig. 13, 14;
pl. cxiii, fig. 1 a, b.

192

Heron-Allen and Earland recorded this species from east of North Cape,
New Zealand (‘Terra Nova’). It has also occurred off the Great Australian
Bight (‘“Bonthorpe’’). E3915, ¢.

194 TEXxTULARIA CoRRUGATA Heron-Allen and Earland 1915
Textularia conica d’Orbigny, var. corrugata Heron-Allen and Earland 1915, 629,
pl. xlvii, fig. 24-27
Textularia corrugata, Cushman 1932, 12, pl, ill, fig. 2, 4.
This form was first described from the Kerimba Archipelago. Cushman
also records it from the Fijis at 40-50 fathoms; off Rougelap Atoll, Marshall
Islands; and from Guam Anchorage, Ladrone Islands at 21 fathoms. f 3915. ¢,

195 TEXTULARIA PSEUDOGRAMEN Chapman and Parr 1937
Textularia gramen, Brady (non d’Orbigny) 1884, 365, pl. xiii, fig. 10.
Textularia pseudogramen Chapman and Parr 1937, 153.

Common on the Australian coast. It is recorded in the list of the “Bon-
thorpe” Foraminifera, 1935. This species was identified in the previous
“Endeavour” material (1915) as Spiroplecta gramen (d’Orb.) at Station 36,
east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms; and also from 40 miles south of Cape Wiles,
100 fathoms. E 3915, c.; E3919, v.r.; EE 3923, v.r.

196 TEXTULARIA SAGITTULA Defrance 1824

Defrance 1824, 177. Atlas Conch., pl. xiii, fig. 5; Chapman and Parr 1937, 154

This species is common on the Australian coast. The “Terra Nova” dredged
it from the New Zealand area. In the previous material from the “Endeavour”
it was recorded, as Spiroplecta sagittula, from 40 miles south of Cape Wiles,

100 fathoms. E 3915, r.; E3917, v.r.; E3918, v.; £3919, r.; E3923, f.

Fam. TROCHAMMINIDAE
Genus TrocHamMMrIna Parker and Jones 1859
197. TROCHAMMINA PLANOCONVEXA Chapman and Parr 1937
Chapman and Parr 1937, 158, pl. x, fig. 45.
In the above original reference the distribution of the species is given as
confined to the Shackleton Shelf, from 250-358 fathoms. E 3922, v.tr.

Fam. VALVULINIDAE
Genus CLavuLixa d’Orbigny 1826
198 CLAVULINA SERVENTYr Chapman and Parr 1935
Chapman and Parr 1935, 5, pl. i, fig. 7a, b.

‘The original specimens were dredged by the trawler “Bonthorpe,” from the

Great Australian Bight (Sample 6, 170 fathoms). Recorded from previous
“Endeavour” dredgings as Clavulina parisiensis d’Orb. from 40 miles south of
Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms, common. E3915, r.; E3917, r.

Genus Dorotui1a Plummer 1931
199 DorormtaA ARENATA Cushman 1936
Cushman 1936, 32, pl. v, fig. 11 a-c.
This species was described from the “Albatross” dredgings off Mindanao,
Philippines, in 490 fathoms. ‘To find this species so far south is of great interest.
FE 3915, c.; E3919, v-r.

193

200 Dorornia scAbra (Brady 1884)
Brady 1884, 381, pl. xlvi, fig. 7; Cushman 1921, 146, pl. xxviii, fig. 5.
Localities for this species are Luzon, Bornco, north of Celehes, and Macassar
Strait. E 3915, r.

Genus LrstTeretia Cushman 1933
201 LisverRELLA sp.

This species will be shortly described from the Mawson Antarctic dredgings,
1929-31. E 3915, v.r.
Fam. VERNEUILINIDAE
Genus GAupRYINA d’Orbigny 1839
202 GAUDRYINA ROBUSTA Cushman 1913

Cushman 1913, 636, pl. Ixxviti, fig. 2; 1937, 67, pl. ix, fig. 15.

This species was described from the “Albatross” dredgings, Gulf of Tomini,
Celebes, at 750 fathoms. E 3915, v.t.; E3922, vr.

203 GAUDRYINA TRYANGULARIS Cushman 1911
Cushman 1911, 65, text-fig. 104; 1937, 66, pl. ix, fig. 16.

Recorded from the Poor Knights Islands, east coast of New Zealand; also
east of Mesbate Island, Philippines, 108 fathoms. As Gaudryina rugosa d’Orb.
it was recorded from previous “Endeavour” material (1915, 16), from 40 miles
south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. FE 3915, f.

Subphyl. CRUSTACEA
Class OSTRACODA
Fam. CYPRIDAE
Genus Pontocyrris G. O. Sars 1865

1 PoNTOCYPRIS BRADYI fom. mut.
(PI. viti, fig. 1)
Pontocypris faba G. S. Brady (non Reuss 1855) 1878, 382, pl. Ixiii, fg. 6a-¢;

G. S. Brady 1880, 37, pl. i, fig. a-d; Chapman 1916, 71, pl. iv, fig. 45 a, db,

In 1855 Reuss figured an ostracod from the Chalk of England as Bairdia faba
(Zeitschr. d. Geol. Gesellsch., 278, pl. x, fig. 2), which I consider he correctly
placed in that genus. Reuss states that the material from which he obtained this
form came from Charing, in Kent, England. ‘The only one likely to supply Reuss
with that local material would have been my old friend and fellow worker, Pro-
fessor T. Rupert Jones. From the same source I have also a fairly large quantity
of Charing washings, and so was able to search for a topotype. Upon examining
this material, which I fortunately brought with me to Australia, I found definite
examples of a form agreeing with Reuss’ original figures. Brady himself made
only a provisional comparison with Reuss’ species and usually queried it. A
careful comparison of the topotypes with Brady’s Crag specimens shows that the
anterior of the latter is broader than that of the Chalk fossils (Bairdia faba).

Specimens similar to Pontocypris bradyi have been obtained by the “Chal-
lenger” off East Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait, 38-40 fathoms, and off reefs,
Honolulu, 40 fathoms. E 3916, v.r.; EF 3917, v.r.; E 3918, r.; E 3920, v.r.

194

2 Ponrocypris arreNnuata G. S. Brady 1868
(PL. ix, fig. 8)
Brady 1868, 179, pl. iv, fig. 11-14, Idem, 1880, 38, pl. xv, fig. 2 a-d., Idem,; 1890,

491, pl. i, fig. 3,4; Chapman 1919, 17.

Brady points out, in his South Sea Ostracod Mempir that the original figures
were based on young examples ; those of the full-grown specimens, from the South
Seas (and incidentally our present ones), being armed at the posterior ventral
angle with a single short and stout spine. The original types came from
Mauritius, whilst it was later noted from New Caledonia and the Fiji Islands. It
also occurred at Funafuti, in the deeper dredgings by H.M-S. “Penguin,” at 1,215
fathoms. E 3919, r.

3 Pontocypris sIMPLEX G. S. Brady 1880
G. S. Brady 1880, 37, pl. i, fig. S5a-d; Egger 1901, 421, pl. i, fig. 1-3; Chapman
1919, 18, pl. xi, fig. 2,24.
This species was previously recorded irom Ascension Island, at 7 fathoms.
It also occurred in “Aurora” dredgings, west of Tasmania, at 1,300 fathoms.
Egger found it at Station 9 (“Gazelle”), off North-West Australia, 357 «metres.
E 3918, r.; E3919, v.r.; E 3923, vr.

4 PoNTOCYPRIS SUBRENIFORMIs G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 38, pl. xv, fig. 2a-d; Egger 1901, 421, pl. vii, fig. 50-52; Chapman

1915, 35.

Previously recorded (Brady) from Simon’s Bay, South Africa, 15-20
fathoms and from Port Jackson, 2-10 fathoms. The “Gazelle” obtained it from
Mauritius, Station 66 (Egger), at 411 metres. This species previously occurred in
“Endeavour” material from Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms.

FE 3915, v.r.; E3916, v.r.; E3918, v.r.

Genus ArcILLoEcIA G. O. Sars 1865
5 ARGILLOECIA BADIA G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880. 40, pl. vi, fig. 3 a-d; Egger 1901, 422, pl. iv, fig. 6, 7; Chapman

1919, 19,

Recorded from Port Jackson (“Challenger”), 210 fathoms. Egger
(“Gazelle”) recorded it from Station 90, off North-West Australia at 357 metres,
and from Station 116 (off North-East Australia) at 951 metres. Chapman
(“Aurora”) noted it from south of Tasmania at 200 fathoms. E 3923. vr.

Genus Macrocypris G. 5. Brady 1868
6 Macrocypris vecorA (G, S. Brady 1866)
Cytherideis decora Brady 1866, 366, pl. Ivii, fig. 13 a-c.
Macrocypris decora, Brady, 1880, 44, pl. i, fig. 3.a-d, pl. vi, fg. 8a, b.; Chapman

1915, 37; 1919, 20.

Widely distributed in the Southern Hemisphere. Locations given by Brady
(“Challenger”) are: Culebra Island, 390 fathoms; North Brazil, 350 fathoms;
Kerguelen Island, 120 fathoms; Admiralty Islands, 16 fathoms. The types of
this species were from Australia, 17 fathoms (Brady 1866). The previous
“Endeavour” record is, Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms, frequent.

E 3915, f.; E 3916, v.r.; E3917, v.r.; £3918, r.; E 3919, v.r.; E 3923, v.r.

195

7 Macrocyrris seticera G. S. Brady 1880
CPL vii, fig. 5)
Brady 1880, 43, pl. i, fig. 1 a-d.; Egger 1901, 423, pl. 1, fig. 21, 22.
This species was originally recorded from Port Jackson, at 2-10 fathoms.
It is distinguished from M. maculata by the broader valve and evidence of bristle
pits on the extremities. It may only be a variety of M. maculata, as Brady’s
earlier figures seem to show. Egger found this species at Station 90, North-
West Australia at 357 metres, and near Mauritius at 411 metres (“Gazelle”).
E 3915, £.; E3917, v.r.; E 3923, v.r.

Genus BytTnocyrris G. S. Brady 1880
8 Bytsocyrris rentrormis G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 46, pl. v, fig. 1 a, b; Egger, 423, pl. i, fig. 40, 41.

The “Challenger” records are: Culebra Island, North Brazil, Prince Edward
Island, and off East Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait, 38-40 fathoms. [Egger reports
this species from Kerguelen Island, 104 metres (‘Gazelle’).

E 3918, v.r.; E3919, v.r.; E 3920, v.r.

Genus Bairpia McCoy 1844
Q JBaiRDIA ACANTITIGERA G. 5. Brady 1868
(PI. viii, fig. 4)
Brady 1868, 390, pl. xxvii, fig. 18-21, Idem 1880, 61, pl. ix, fig. 4 a-c; Egger 1901,

425, pl. ii, fig. 16-19; Chapman 1919, 22.

The type specimens came from the English Channel. Recorded by G. S.
Brady off St. Vincent. Egger had it from Kerguelen, Fiji and West Africa. The
present examples are fairly typical. From the “Aurora” soundings, 1,300 and
1,320 fathoms (Chapman). E 3917, r.; E 3918, r.

10 Barrpia AMYGDALOIDES G. 5S. Brady 1866
Brady 1866, 364, pl. Ivii, fig. 6a-c, Idem, 1880, 54, pl. ix, fig. 5 a-f, pl. x, fig.

2 a-c.

Bairdia subdeltoidea, Egger (non Minster) 1901, 428, pl. ii, fig. 20, 21; Chapman

1915, 38.

Egger’s record (as B. subdeltoidea) is Station 55, Kerguelen Island, 104
metres. Previous “Endeavour” records are: Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777
fathoms, frequent; 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms.

E3915, ¢.; E3916, v.r.; E3917, f.; E3918, r.;
E 3919, v.r.; E 3921, v.r.; E 3922, v.r. E 3923, v.c.

11 Barrpia AuSsTRALIs Chapman 1914

Rairdia ovata, Brady (non Bosquet sp.) 1866, 354, pl. Ivii, fig. 7 @-c.
Bairdia ?ovata, Brady 1880, 53, pl. vii, fig. 3 a-d.
Bairdia australis Chapman 1914, 31, 32, pl. vi, fig. 7.

(For relationship and fossil distribution see the last reference, supra cit.).

The “Challenger” specimens were found at Station 140, Simon’s Bay, South
Africa, 15-20 fathoms, and east of New Zealand, 150 fathoms.

E 3917, v.r.; E 3918, v.r.; E 3919, v.r.; E 3920, v.r.; E 3923, f.

12 Barepia cf. eExpansa G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 58, pl. ix, fig. 2 a-e, Idem, 1890, 495; Chapman 1910, 430,
Recorded from Honolulu, 40 fathoms (“Challenger”); also South Sea
Islands and Noumea in shallow water. Around Funafuti, in deep water, 1,050
and 1,215 fathoms. E 3920, v.r.

196

13. Barrpia FovEoLaTa G. S. Brady 1867
Brady 1867, 56, pl. vii, fig. 4-6, Idem, 1880, 55, pl. viii, fig. 1 a-f, 2. a-f, Idem, 1890,
493; Egger 1901, 426, pl. ii, fig. 2-4; Chapman 1902, 423, Idem, 1910, 429.
Egger records it from Amboyna, 54 metres; Monrovia, West Africa, 68
metres; near Mauritius 411 metres. Around Funafuti in both shallow and deep
water (74 to 1,485 fathoms), Chapman, F308 act.

14. Bairpra rusca G. S. Brady 1866
Brady 1866 364, pl. Ivii, fig. 9 a-d, Idem, 1880, 49, pl. vii, fig. 2 a-d; Egger 1901,
427, pl. vii, 46-49.
‘This species was dredged by the “Challenger” from Port Jackson, 2-10
fathoms. Egger records it from West Africa at 677 metres. Previous ““En-
deavour” material gave Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. — — 3917, r.

15 Barrpra minrmMa G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 53, pl. vii, fig. 6a-g; Egger 1901, 427, pl. ii, fig. 14, 15.
Egger’s record for the “Gazelle” is Station 90, North-West Australia, 357
metres. . E 3917, v.r.; E 3919, f.

Fam. CYTHERIDAE
Genus Cyruerrm Miller 1785

16 Cythere acerosella sp. nov.
(PI. viii, fig. 5)

Description—Valve seen from the side, subreniform, slightly higher in front
than behind; anterior roundly curved, posterior broadly so; dorsal margin slightly
curved and tapering posteriorly; ventral slightly sinuate in the middle. Seen
from above, oblong, ovate, thickest in the middle, tapering to the anterior
extremity and broadly to the posterior, both being sharply acuminate, End view,
broadly ovate. Surface of valve sparsely covered with minute papillae, which are
distinctly setose. Length, 0°88 mm.; greatest height, at anterior, 0°54 mm.

Observations—This species, in outline and form, belongs to the Cythere
kerguclenensis group of the genus, but has no surface pittings, these being other-

wise represented by papillae. E 3917, v.r.; E 3920, v.r.; E3923, wer.

17. CyTiteRE CANALICULATA (Reuss 1850)
Cypridina canaliculata Reuss 1850, 76, pl. ix, fig. 12,
Cythere canaliculata (Reuss), Egger 1858, 33, pl. v, fig. 10, 11; Brady 1866, 373,
pl. lix, fig. 4 a-f, Idem 1880, 73, pl. xiv, fig, 7a-d; Egger 1901, 432, pliv,

fig. 15, 16; Chapman 1914, 32, pl. vi, fig. 8, Idem 1919, 23.

‘The first recent occurrence of this species in Australia was recorded by
Brady from Hobson’s Bay in 1866. It was later obtained in “Challenger” dredg-
ings from E. Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait and at Port Jackson. Egger’s recent
forms were found in “Gazelle” dredgings, at Station 90, North-West Australia.
The “Aurora” Antaretic Expedition (Mawson 1911-14) obtained this species
south-west of Tasmania. Previous “Endeavour” material yielded this species
from Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. It was found, in association
with many other still living ostracods, in the Mallee Bores of Tertiary age in Vic-
toria, and recorded in 1914. It ranges as far back as the Lower Miocene.

E 3921, v.r.; E 3922, v.r.

197

18 CyrHere crispata G. S. Brady 18608
Brady 1868, 221, pl. xiv, fig. 14, 15, Idem 1880, 72, pl. xiv, fig. 8 a-d; Chapman

1914, 33, pl. vi, fig. 9, Idem 1919, 23.

In lower latitudes this species seems to inhabit shallow water, as at Port
Jackson, 2-10 fathoms; Booby Island, New Guinea, 6-8 fathoms; and Hong
Kong, 7 fathoms. In the “Aurora” sample, however, it occurred to the south-
west of Tasmania at 1,300 fathoms. Fossil in lower Miocene strata in the
Mallee Bores. E 3920, v.r.; E 3923, v.r.

19 CyrueErr crIstATELLA G, S, Brady 1880
G. S. Brady 1880, 90, pl. xix, fig. 6 a-d.
Dredged by the “Challenger” at Booby Island, at 6-8 fathoms. 3915, r.

20 CyTrnere CYTHEROPTEROIDES G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 78, pl. iv, fig. 16-18; pl. xx, fig. laf,
The “Challenger” obtained specimens of this species from the Cape of Good
Ifope at 150 fathoms. From previous “Endeavour” material this species was
obtained at Station 36, cast of Tasmania, at 77/7 fathoms. E 3915, r.

21 CyTHERE DASYDERMA G. S. Brady 1880

Brady 1880, 105, pl. xvii, fig. 4a-f, pl. xvili, ig. 4a-f; Chapman 1910, 432, Idem

1914, 34, pl. vi, fig. 10.

This is a distinctly deep water form. Brady gives 13 “Challenger” Stations
of over 1,000 fathoms from which it was obtained. The greatest depth was at
Funafuti at 1,485 fathoms (Chapman). Many localities in the Indian Ocean
and South Pacific are given for this species. It was found as a fossil in the
Lower Miocene of the Mallee Bores, Victoria. E 3918, v.r.

22 CYTHERE DEMISSA G. 5S. Brady 1868
Brady 1868, 180, pl. xii, fig. 1, 2, Ideny 1880, 66, pl. xii, fig. 1 a-7, Idem 1890,
497 ; Chapman 1914, 34, pl. vi, fig. 11.
This species was described from Port Jackson, 2-10 fathoms. It is a shallow
water form. Asa fossil it occurs in the Lower Phocene of the Mallee Bores.
E 3918, v.r.; E 3922, v.r.

23 CYTHERE Dictyon G. S, Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 99, pl. xxiv, fig. 1 a-y; Egger 1901, 442 pl. vi, fig. 41-43; Chapman

1910, 433, Idem 1914, 34, pl. vii, fig. 12, 13, Idem 1915, 41.

This is another deep water form; fifteen of the “Challenger” Stations con-
tained this species, which reached a depth of over one thousand fathoms. Egger
records it from “Gazelle” dredgings from Kerguelen Island and Table Bay,
South Africa. Previous “Endeavour” material contained this species, as follows:
Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms; and 40 miles south of Cape Wiles;
100 fathoms. It is fairly common in the Lower Miocene strata of the Mallee
Bores, E 3915, v.r.; E3918, r.; E 3922, v.r.

24 CYTHERE EXILIs G. 5S, Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 69, pl. xvi, fig. 5 a-h; Egger 1901, 439, pl. vii, fig. 29-31.

The “Challenger” specimens came from Simon’s Bay, South Africa, at

15-20 fathoms. The “Gazelle” dredged it from Kerguelen Island at 104 metres.
E 3922, v.r.

198

25 CyYTHERE FALKLAND! G, 5S, Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 65, pl. xii, fig. 6 a-f.

The original locality for the species is Stanley Harbour, Falkland Island,

6 fathoms. E 3919, r.
26 CyTHERE FOvEOLATA G, S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 75, pl. xiii, fig. 5 a-h; Chapman 1915, 41, Idem 1916, 38, 49, pl. iv,

fig. 2.

The “Challenger” specimens came from Christmas Harbour, Kerguelen
Island, at 120 fathoms, and from Heard Island, at 75 fathoms. Typical specimens
were found in the upthrust muds on the slopes of Mount Erebus on the “Nimrod”
expedition (Chapman), Previous “Endeavour” material from Station 36, east

of Tasmania, afforded this species, at 777 fathoms. E 3917, r.; E3919, vr.

27 CyTHERE Goujoni G. S. Brady 1867
Brady 1867, 78, pl. x, fig. 9, 10, Idem 1880, 96, pl. xxv, fig. 7 a-g; Egger 1901,
431, pl. vi, fig. 29-31.
The “Challenger” found this species at Port Jackson, 2-10 fathoms; at
Booby Island, 6-8 fathoms, and at Hong Kong Harbour, 7 fathoms, From the
“Gazelle,” Station 90, off North-West Australia, it was found at 357 metres.

E 3919, v.r.; E 3922, wr.

28 CyTHERE Inconspicua G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 70, pl. xiii, fig. 1 a-d.
The “Challenger” obtained this species at one Station only, at Raines Island,
Torres Strait, 155 fathoms. E 3918, r.

29 CyTHERE 1rRRORATA G, S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 108, pl. xvii, fig. 2 a-d.

Recorded from one “Challenger” Station, near the Admiralty Islands, at
16-25 fathoms. E 3919, v.r.
30) CytitEreE Minirartis (G. S. Brady 1866)

Cythereis subcoronata G. S. Brady (non Speyer) 1866, 384, pl. Lx, fig. 9 a-e.
Cythereis militaris G. S. Brady 1866, 385, pl. Ixi, fig. 9 a-d.
Cythere clavigera G. S. Brady 1880, 109, pl. xxiii, fig. 7 a-d; Chapman 1914, 37,

pl. vii, fig. 18.

In commenting on Cythere clavigera of the “Challenger” collection, Brady
(1880, 110) says: “And it is just possible that the Australian species described
in the same memoir (Cythereits militaris) may represent a very young specimen
of C. clavigera.’ C. militaris (1866 Memoir) was from Hobson’s Bay, Mel-
bourne. The ‘Challenger’ specimens were dredged from Port Jackson, at
2-10 fathoms. In the descriptions of Ostracoda from borings in the Victorian
Mallee, the writer has shown that typical as well as varietal forms of the above
species are very common in both Kalimnan (Lower Pliocene) and Lower
Miocene strata in those borings. At the depth of 256-263 feet (Lower Pliocene)
this species, in association with Cythere dictyon, another living species, was so
abundant that it formed about 15 per cent. of the washings of a glauconitic clay.
in which they were embedded. E 3916, v.r.

”

31 CytTrERE NorMANI G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 101, pl. xvii, fig. 3 a-d, and (?) pl. xxvi, fig. 4a,b; Chapman 1914,
37, pl. vii, fig. 19, Idem, 50, 73, pl. vi, fig. 2.
The “Challenger” specimens were dredged off Heard Island, Station 150,
on coarse gravelly bottom at 150 fathoms. The examples described by the writer

199

in 1916 were from dredgings in the Ross Sea and irony upthrust muds on Mount
Erebus (“Nimrod”). This species dates, as a fossil, from the Lower Miocene of
the Mallee Bores, and has been identified in late Tertiary deposits from a well-
sinking in the Murray Flats, South Australia, by Brady. E 3915, vr.

32 Cythere obtusalata G. S. Brady tenuis var. nov.
(PI. ix, fig. 9)

Ref. to specific form—Cythere obtusalata G, S$. Brady 1880, 91, pl. xi,
fig. La-c; Egger 1901, 443, pl. viii, fig. 12-15; Chapman 1914, 38, pl. vii, fig. 20.

Resembling Brady’s type figure, excepting for the very delicate areolation
or polygonal pitting and the thinner build of the shell. The outline of the carapace
agrees with the specific form.

Brady’s species was found in “Challenger” dredgings off E. Moncoeur Island,
Bass Strait, 38-40 fathoms, and off Admiralty Islands, 16-25 fathoms. Egger
records the species from Kerguelen; Monrovia, West Africa; and Mauritius
(“Gazelle”). The writer found the species, C. obtusalata, in the Lower Miocene
and the Lower Pliocene of the Mallee, Victoria.

Ii 3919, r.; E3921, r.; E 3923, 1.

33 Cyruere ovanis G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 66, pl. xiv, fig. 4 a-d; Chapman 1914, 38, pl. vii, fig. 21.

Brady’ s type specimens were dredged off Booby Island, 6 to 8 fathoms. The
fossil specimens, from the Victorian Mallee, were found in Lower Miocene strata.

E 3918, v.r.
Cythere postcaudispinosa sp. nov.
(PL viu, fig. 3)

Description—Valve seen from the side, subrectangular, anterior extremity
wider than posterior, roundly arched and bordered by a raised flange beset with
a few denticles; narrower to posterior extremity which is terminated by a few
stout teeth. Dorsal margin sinuate below the anterior third, thence sloping to
posterior elevation. Ventral margin gently curved to meet the toothed extremity.
Surface of valves anteriorly swollen and punctate, with prominent antcrior
median tubercle; posterior area slightly concave, without pittings. In profile the
carapace is much more inflated than in the related Kalimnan to Lower Miocene
fossil (C. caudispinosa) of the Sorrento Bore. It also lacks the long’ spine of the
posterior extremity and the thickly punctate ornament of the Sorrento fossil
(Cyihere caudispinosa Chapman and Crespin. In Chapman, “The Sorrento
Bore, Mornington Peninsula.”—-Records Geol. Surv. Vict., 5, pt. i, 1928, 125,
pl. ix, fig. 64a,b). Length, 0-8 nim.; greatest height, at anterior, 0-43 mm.; thick-
ness of carapace, 0°03 mm, E 3917, vr.

35 CYTHERE RASTROMARGINATA G. S, Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 83, pl. xvi, fig. 1 a-d; Egger 1901, 442, pl. vi, fig. 5-9; Chapman 1914,

40, pl. vii, fig. 24.

The “Challenger” dredgings of C. rastromarginata were: off Reefs, Hono-
lulu, 40 fathoms; off Moncocur Island, Bass Strait, 38-40 fathoms; and Station
167, blue mud, between Sydney and New Zealand, 145-150 fathoms. The
“Gazelle” soundings, recorded by Eggcr, containing this species, were from, Fiji,
Samoa and Western Australia. Fossil specimens of this species, fairly typical,
came from the Tertiary of the Victorian Mallee.

Ee 3917, v.r.; E3920, v.r.; E3922, v.

200

36 CYTHERE scuTicERA G. S. Brady 1868
Brady 1868, 70, pl. viii, fig. 15, 16, Idem 1880, 109, pl. xxii, fg. 5 a-f; Chapman

1914, 41, pl. viii, fig. 27.

Brady’s “Challenger” specimens came from Java, Amboyna and Papua. The
fossil specimens from the Mallee Lower Miocene were typical though not so
clearly sculptured. E 3923, r.

37 CyTHERE suBRUFA G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 81, pl. xx, fig. 3 a-f.

From ampngst the “Challenger” samples Brady recognised this species from
Balfour Bay, Kerguelen, 20-50 fathoms, and Prince Edward’s Island, 50-150
fathoms. E 3923, v.r.

38 CyTHERE TETRICA G. S. Brady
Brady 1880, 104, pl. xxiii, fig. 5 a-d.
“Challenger” specimens dredged off Booby Island, 6-8 fathoms (Station 87).
E 3920, v.r.
Genus Eucytrere G, S. Brady 1868
39 EUCYTHERE DECLIVIs (Norman 1865)
(PI. viii, fig. 10)
Cythere declivis Norman 1865, 16, pl. v, fig. 9-12.
Eucythere declivis G. S. Brady 1868, 430, pl. xxvii, fig. 22-26; Egger 1901, 449,

pl. iv, fig. 65-67.

The species was previously recorded by the present writer [rom “Endeavour”
soundings off Cape Wiles, 25 years ago, A more typical example of this rare
form is here figured. Its wide distribution is remarkable. Earlier records are
from the coasts of Great Britain and Ireland (G. S. Brady), and off North-
Western Australia at 357 metres (Egger, “Gazelle,” Station 90). It was also
found in the Pleistocene glacial clays of Scotland. §& 3918, v.r.; E3919, vor.

Genus Kritue Brady, Crosskey and Robertson 1874
40 Kririe propucta G. S. Brady 1880

Brady 1880, 114, pl. xxvii, fig. 1 a-7; Egger, 1901, 451, pl. iv, fig. 17, 18; Chap-

man, 1902, 427, Idem 1910, 434.

The “Challenger” dredgings from which this species was recorded came from
Pernambuco, North Brazil, Prince Edward’s Island, and off Sydney at 410
fathoms. Lgger’s specimens from the “Gazelle” soundings came from Kerguelen
Island and the north-west coast of Australia. In 1910 the writer recorded this
species [from around Funafuti (H.M.S. “Penguin”) at the great depths of 1,489-
2,715 fathoms, Previous “Endeavour” material (1915) showed it to occur at
Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms, common; and south of Tasmania at
1,122 fathoms. E 3915, f.; E3918, vr.

Genus Loxoconcna G. O, Sars 1865
41 LoxoconcHa AusTRALIs G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 119, pl. xxviii, fig. 5 a-f, pl. xxix, 3 a-d; Chapman 1914, 42, pl. viii.

fig. 30, Idem 1915, 44.

In the latter reference, on pl. ii, fig. 6, a thin-shelled and nearly smooth form
is figured as var. fasmanica, This has not been met with in the present samples,
with the exception of a possibly solitary specimen. The “Challenger” met with
this well-distributed Australian form at Port Jackson, 2-10 fathoms; Booby
Island, 6-8 fathoms. E 3918, r.; E3919, v.r.; E3920, vt.

E 3921, v.r.; E3922, f.; E3923, vr.

201

42 LoxoconcHa AVELLANA G. 5S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 117, pl. xxviii, fig. 1 a-f,
The “Challenger” examples were dredged at Port Jackson, 2-10 fathoms;
and at Tongatabu, 18 fathoms. E 3918, r.; E 3922, r.

Genus XESTOLERERIS G. O. Sars 1865
43 XESTOLEBERIS cURTA (G. S. Brady 1866)
? Cytheridea curta G. S. Brady 1866, 370, pl. lviii, fig. 7 a, b.
Xestoleberis curta G. S. Brady 1868, 79, pl. x, fig. 16-18; Idem 1880, 126, pl. xxxi,

fig. 6 a-d.

The “Challenger” dredgings containing this species are: Kerguelen Island,
Port Jackson, Booby Island, Fiji, New Caledonia. The writer found this species
at Funafuti to inhabit shallow to deeper water to 200 fathoms. It occurred as a
Pliocene fossil in the Mallee Bores. E 3915, r.; E3920, v.r.

44 XESTOLEBERIS DAVIDIANA Chapman 1915
(PI. viii, fig. 2)
Chapman 1915, 45; Idem 1916, 51, pl. vi, fig. 5, 6 (typical); Idem 1919, 32,
pl. xxu, fig. 2, 2@ (not typical).

The earlier references to the above species relate to the material collected as
upthrust muds on the slopes of Mount Erebus, and also muds dredged in the Ross
Sea by the “Nimrod,” of the Shackleton Expedition of 1907-9. The “Aurora”
specimens were obtained from several dredgings along the Ice Barrier, and also
from South-East Tasmania towards Macquarie Island. Previous records of

“Endeavour” material include south of Tasmania, 1,122 fathoms.
E 3916, v.r.; E 3917, r.

45 XESTOLEBERIS MARGARITEA (G. S. Brady 1866)
Cytheridea margaritea G. S. Brady 1866, 370, pl. lviii, fig. 6 a-d.
Xestoleberis margaritea (Brady) 1880, 127, pl. xxx, fig. 2 a-g; Egger 1901, 456,

pl. iti, fig. 27-30; Chapman 1902, 429, Idem 1914, 43, pl. viii, fig. 32.

Records by Brady are Sponge sand, Mediterranean, and from the “Challen-
ger,” off Booby Island. Egger’s “Gazelle” Stations are: Kerguelen and off the
coast of West Australia. It was also found by the writer in shallow water round
Funafuti, and as a Lower Miocene fossil in the Mallee Bores, Victoria.

FEE 3923, v.r.
46 XESTOLEBERIS NANA G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 127, pl. xxxi, fig. 5 a-c; Egger 1901, 456, pl. iti, fig. 31, 33; Chapman

1902, 430, Idem 1915, 46, Idem 1919, 32,

Recorded by Brady (“Challenger”) off Tongatabu, 18 fathonis in coral bottom.
Egger found it in “Gazelle” dredgings from Fiji, Samoa, and North-West Aus-
tralia, The writer has noted its occurrence at Funafuti (South Pacific) at 18-200
fathoms, and also in “Aurora” soundings, west of Tasmania. Previous records
in “Endeavour” material are: east of Tasmania, 1,122 fathoms, and 40 miles
south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. E 3923, r.

47 XESTOLERERIS POLITA G. S. Brady 1876
Brady 1876, 202, pl. xxvii, fig. 15, 16, Idem 1880, 127, pl. xxxi, fig. 7 a-c; Chap-

man 1919, 33.

The type specimens were obtained from the Straits of Magellan, and the
“Challenger” examples came from Stanley Harbour, Falkland Islands, in
6 fathoms. The writer recorded the species from Mawson’s “Aurora” dredgings
from the west of Tasmania at 1,300 fathoms. E 3923, v.r.

202

48 XESTOLEBERIS SETIGERA G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 125, pl. xxxi, fig. 2a-d, 3a-c; Egger 1901, 456, pl. iii, fig. 37-39;
Chapman 1902, 428.

The “Challenger” specimens came from Kerguelen, Tleard and Prince
Edward’s Islands. The “Gazelle” dredged it off Monrovia, West Africa, From
Funafuti the writer obtained it from beach sand of Avalau, sand from the lagoon
beach at Funafala, the lagoon dredgings Rocky Islet, lagoon dredgings 84 miles
from the Mission Church at 12 fathoms, and off ‘Tutanga at 50-60 fathoms.

FE 3918, v.r.
49 XESTOLEBERIS VARIEGATA G. S. Brady 1880

Brady 1880, 129, pl. xxxi, fig. 8a-g, Idem 1890, 508; Chapman 1902, 429, Idem

1914, 43, pl. viti, fig, 33, Idem 1915, 46, Idem 1919, 33.

The “Challenger” records for this species are: off St. Vincent, Cape Verde,
at 1,070-1,150 fathoms; and off Tongatabu in 18 fathoms. Brady also found the
species at Noumea in 2-6 fathoms, and in shallow water from seven localities in
the South Sea Islands, in shore sands and reef pools. At Funafuti, X. veriegata
was found in lagoon dredgings in shallow water, and off Funamanu at 50 fathoms.
Only one occurrence was noted from the “Aurora” dredgings, at Station 59, in
1,320 fathoms, near Western Tasmania. As a fossil this species was found in
the Lower Miocene of the Victorian Mallee Bores (Chapman). But for the more
swollen dorsal convexity, this fossil form was typical of the living form, even to
the variegated surface markings. Previous “Endeavour” samples showed this
species to occur at the Station 40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms.

E 3923, vr.
Genus CvyTHERURA G. O. Sars 1865

50 CyTHERURA. COSTELLATA G. S. Brady 1880

Brady 1880, 134, pl. xxxii, fig. 7 a-d; Chapman 1916, 51, pl. vi, fig. 7, Idem 1919,

34.

The “Challenger” examples came from Balfour Bay, Kerguelen Island,
20-50 fathoms. From soundings in the Ross Sea and from upthrust muds on the
slope of Mount Erebus, Shackleton Expedition, the writer obtained typical
examples of this striking species. It also occurred in the “Aurora” dredgings
opposite Kaiser Wilhelm II Land off the Ice Barrier, and off West Tasmania.

E 3918, v.r. 3 E3922, v.r.

51 Cyruerura crypTirera G. 5. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 134, pl. xxxii, fig. 4a-c; Chapman 1919, 34.

When first described, this species was monotypic and represented by a single
valve, which was found east of Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait, 37-40 fathoms. It
was noted from previous “Endeavour” material (Chapman 1915, 46), when two
valves were found in dredgings, east of Tasmania, in 777 fathomts. Since then
the species has been found in dredgings by the “Aurora” (Mawson 1911-14)
Expedition from the west of Tasmania at 1,300 and 1,320 fathoms. } 3918 yur,

Genus CyTHEROPTERON G. O. Sars 1865
52 CyTITEROPTERON ASSIMILE G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 138, pl. xxxiv, fig. 3 a-d; Chapman 1902, 431
The “Challenger” examples were dredged off Christmas Harbour, Kerguelen
Island, 120 fathoms, and off Heard Island in 75 fathoms. C. assimile was also
found at Funafuti, in the beach sand, Avalau Islet, and in Sollas’s second boring
at 40 feet down. E 3919, v.r.; E 3920, v.r.

203

53 CYTHEROPTERON DANNEVIGI Chapman 1915
Chapman 1915, 47, pl. iil, fig. 2 a-c.
The nearest relation to this form is Cytheropteron wellingtoniense G. S. B.
The original type was obtained from Station 36, eadt of Tasmania, 777 fathoms.
E 3917, v.r.
54 Cytheropteron hedleyi sp. nov.
(PI. vii, fig. 6, 7)

Description—Right valve subrhomboidal, anterior narrowly rounded; ventral
border nearly straight, ending posteriorly in blunt wing, Dorsal margin steeply
arched, posterior extremity sharply pointed. Height of carapace slightly more
than half the length. Edge view of carapace broadly ovate, dorsal edge with a
distinct flange. Ornament sparsely punctate; a deep fossa near the border of the
alate margin. Jength of carapace, ‘07 mm.; thickness of carapace, 0°76 mm.

Observations—Both Cytheropteron wilesi Chapman and C. hedleyi are
related to C. abyssorum Brady, but probably not conspecific as all three differ
strongly in ornament though not in shape. E3915, vari

Genus BytmocyTnere G, ©. Sars 1865
55 ByriuocyrmierRe ARENAcEA G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 142, pl. xxxii, fig. 3.a-g (B. arenosa on pl. xxxiil); Chapman 1902,
432; Chapman and Crespin 1928, 17/1.
This species was described from a “Challenger” specimen from Torres Strait,
155 fathoms. It was obtained from T'unafuti, South Pacific, at Tutanga, 200
fathoms (Chapman). As a fossil it was found in the Kalimnan (Lower Pliocene)
of the Sorrento Bore, at 605 feet (Chapman and Crespin).
E 3918, v.r.; E3921, ver.

Genus PsreupocyTHERE G, QO, Sars 1865
56 PsrupocyTHERE cAUDATA G. ©, Sars 1865

Sars 1865, 88; G. S, Brady 18682, 543, pl. xxxiv, fig. 49-52, pl. xli, fig. 6; Brady,

Crosskey and Robertson 1874, 210, pl. ii, fig. 9; Brady 1880, 144, pl. i,

fig. 6a-d; Brady and Norman 1889, 225.

Brady recorded this species from Kerguelen Island and from Prince Edward’s
Island. It is also a northern species, found round the coasts of Britain; also fossil,
from the Pleistocene of Scotland and Ireland. E 3917, v.r.; E3922, vr.

57 PSEUDOCYTHERE FUEGIENSIS G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, 145, pl. i, fig. 7 a-d; Egger 1901, 464, pl. viii, fig. 39, 40.

Brady’s species was monotypic when described, from Tierro del Fuego.
Much interest attaches to this discovery in the Tasman Sea, for, in 1901 Egger
found another single valve, at Station 90, off North-West Australia (“Gazelle”).
This third specimen comes from 33 miles east by south from Green Cape; it is a
right valve, agreeing exactly in form and lineate ornament with Brady’s type.

E 3918, wer.
Fam. CYTIIERELLIDAE
Genus CYTHERELLA Rupert Jones 1849
58 CyTHERELLA LATA G. S. Brady 1880

Brady 1880, 173, pl. xliv, fig. 5 a-e; Chapman 1914, 50, pl. ix, fig. 44 2, b; Chapman
and Crespin 1928, 171.

204

A widely distributed species. Recorded from the “Challenger” dredging at
Culebra Island, off the Azores, Pernambuco, Torres Strait and the Ki Islands.
As a fossil it has been recorded from: the Lower Miocene of the Sorrento Bore,
and as a Miocene and Pliocene form from the Mallee Bores. E 3922, v.r.

59 CyrHerELta potita G. S. Brady 1880
Brady 1880, p. 172, pl. xliti, fig. 5 a-c, pl. xliv, fig. 1 a-g; Chapman 1914, 50, pl. ix,

fig. 45 a-b; Chapman and Crespin 1918, 171,

This species was found in “Challenger” dredgings at Wellington Harbour,
New Zealand, in tow-net at trawl; and at the mouth of the Rio de la Plata,
13 fathoms. As a fossil it was found in the Lower Miocene to Pliocene of the
Sorrento Bore, Mornington Peninsula and in the Lower Miocene and Lower
Pliocene in the Victorian Mallee Bores. E 3917, r.; E3922, vr.

60 CyTHERELLA puLCHRA G. 5. Brady 1866
Brady 1866, 361, pl. lvii, fig. 1 a-d, Idem 1880, 174, pl. xliv, fig. 3.@,b; Chapman

1914, 50, pl. ix, fig. 46 a,b; Chapman and Crespin 1928, 171.

This minute form is here represented by a valve having a length of 0-55 mm.,
against Brady’s figured specimen with a length of 0-77 mm. Amongst other
localities Brady has recorded it from Port Jackson. It was apparently well estab-
lished in I.ower Miocene times, for it occurs abundantly in strata of that age both
in the Mallee Bores and that of Sorrento. E 3976, v.r.; E 3917, r.; E3918, v-r.

61 CyTueretta puncrata G, S. Brady 1866
(PI. ix, fig. 11)
Brady 1866, 362, pl. lvit, fig. 2 a, b, Idem 1880, 174, pl. xxxvi, fig. 6a, b, pl. xliv,

fig. 4a-g; Egger 1901, 469, pl. iv, fig. 34, 35: Chapman 1914, 51, pl. ix,

fig. 47, Idem 1919, 42; Chapman and Crespin 1928, 171.

The localities given by the “Challenger” are Tristan d’Acunha, Port Jackson,
Ki Islands, between Sydney and New Zealand, and the Straits of Magellan.
Brady has figured a medio-sulcate form as C. punctata; as this seems to pass into
C. irregularis Brady, these may have to be separated from C. punctaia, sensu
stricto. This species, C. punctata was also found in “Gazelle” dredgings, Station
90, off the North-West Australian coast.

The “Aurora” deep water dredgings which contained this species were taken
off the east coast of Tasmania, in 1,180 and 1,300 fathoms. The fossil examples
are quite typical and denote a Lower Miocene to Pliocene age from both the
Mallee and the Sorrento Bores.

E 3915, v.r.; E 3916, v.r.; E 3918, r.; E 3920, v.r.; E 3922, v.r.; E 3923, v.c.

62 CYTHERELLA SEMITALIS G. S. Brady 1867
Brady 1867, 72, pl. viii, fig. 23, 24, Idem 1880,.175, pl. xliv, fig. 2 a-e.

This species was first described from north of Java. The “Challenger”
samples containing this species were from Booby Island, 6-8 fathoms; [Iumboldt
Bay, Papua, 37 fathoms; Nares Harbour, Admiralty Islands, 16 fathonis.

FE 3918, v.r.
Genus CYTHERELLOIWEA Alexander 1929
63 Cytherelloidea auris sp. nov.
(PL. ix, fig. 10)

Description—Valve (right) somewhat depressed, subrectangular, with

broadly rounded extremities. Dorsal margin gently sinuous. Ventral edge

205

slightly concave, with rounded margin. Anterior border with an inner, sulcated
rim. Central area largely occupied by a thickened oval ring, having a central
fossa nearly divided transversely. This central, raised, ridge-like feature is not so
definitely cochleate as in the Tertiary Cytherelloidea auricula (Chapman), of the
Mallee Bore and the Sorrento Bore. Length, 0°58 mm.; height, 0°34 mm,

Observations—The nearly related Cytherelloidea auricula (Chapman) (Proce.
Roy. Soc. Vict., 27, pt. i, 49, pl. ix, fig. 42 a, b, 43) of the Tertiary of, the Mallee
and Sorrento Bores is similarly of a long rectangular shape, but the central ridge-
like ring is more sinuous, narrow, and more nearly resembling the inner fold of

the ear.
FE 3922, v.t.

SUMMARY OF RESULTS

(a) On Hedley’s Regional Areas of the Australian Coastline

The majority of these samples are beyond the mud-line. The present evi-
dence, however, strongly supports the use of the terms first suggested by Charles
Hedley for those regional areas that are primarily marked out by their shallower,
molluscan fauna.

The Solanderian region takes in the coastline from Torres Strait to Moreton
Bay, Queensland; the Adelaidean includes the south and south-west coasts of
Australia, from Wilson’s Promontory in Victoria to Shark Bay, and the north
and west coasts of Tasmania; the Perontan, the remainder of the east coast of
Australia and Tasmania and the south coast of Victoria; and the Dampierian
from Torres Strait, North-East Australia, to Houtman’s Abrolhos, below Shark
Bay, West Australia.

in general support of these four divisions of the coastal regions, Iredale
has drawn attention to the fact that, in regard to the /ittoral molluscan faunas,
these are distinct if we take a central point in those regional areas; Sydney show-
ing a pure Peronian assemblage, whilst Adelaide gives a typical Adclaidcan fauna.
At the same time, as one would expect, there is an overlapping of regional faunas
near their respective boundaries.

This regional distribution also applies to that of the microzoa (the Fora-
minifera and Ostracoda), especially in the littoral zone (between tide-marks) and,
to some extent, in the shallow water deposits between low-water mark and the
100 fathoms line. Two of the present samples, E 3915 and E 3923, come within
that category. ;

Beyond the mud-line, however, including E 3916 to E3922, a remarkable
number of species, of both Foraminifera and Ostracoda, are included in the
present lists, many of which are recorded for the first time as Northern or South-
ern types, respectively. This particular assemblage has a distinct bearing on the
Antarctic or the Torresian origin of many of the species now Found in the Aus-+
tralian deep water microzoic fauna. This points either to a vestigial southern or
northern remanié fauna, as the case may be, or, possibly, and what is perhaps
more likely, the direct influence of two opposite sets of currents. The actual
existence of one, the northern, has been demonstrated by Charles Hedley, who
consequently named these southward-flowing currents, the Notonectian.

For the occurrence and effect of the latter, Eledley cites several instances

©@) Results from Roy Bell’s Molluscan Collections, Proc. Linn Soc. N.S.W., 49,
(3), 180.

206

where tropical and northern organisms have been found as far south as Flinders
Island.“

It should, however, be borne in mind that even in the shallower soundings
there are occasional stray species which show a similar origin; but they only prove
the gencral rule, that by far the larger number of these apparently introduced
forms are to be found where the deeper currents prevail.

In the paper above quoted, Iredale rightly points out, in discussing the dis-
tribution of his groups of mollusca, that he is there dealing only with the littoral
faunas. As we have seen elsewhere, Hedley has occasionally found types of
mollusca of a different or specialised character inhabiting the greater deeps of the
ocean below the mud-line around the east and south-east coasts of Australia.

In regard to the deeper dredgings of the “Endeavour” at 470 and 505
fathoms, 33 miles east by south of Green Cape, the “strangers” brought [rom vast
distances, most likely through the agency of persistent currents, are often very
much in evidence.

Within the mud-line, however, as at Babel Island, at 65 fathoms, the follow-
ing is perhaps a typical selection of species that are well established on the benthic
feeding ground of the mud-line itself, perhaps in association with a few adven-
turous Notonectian forms.

Forms Typical of a 65 Fathom Level, North-east of Tasmania
FORAMINIFERA—

Lenticulina cultrata Quinqueloculina lamarckiana
a sp. aff. orbicularis ¥ vulgaris
Bolivina sp. aff. hentyana Spiroloculina canaliculata
y beyrichi Triloculina tricarinata
Streblus beccarti Pyrgo fornasinii
Epistomina elegans Pyrgoella sphaera
Anomalina glabrata Biloculinella globulus
4 aff, rotula Haplophragmoides grandiformis
aj vermiculata Textularia conica
Cibicides sp. aff. victoriensis § corrugata
- pseudoungerianus % pseudogramen
Elphidium advenum Clavulina serventyi
re verriculatum Dorothia arenata
Pelosina cylindrica Gaudryina aff. rugosa
OsTRACODA—
Macrocypris decora Bairdia amvygdaloides
2 maculata Krithe producta

(b) Specific Elements of a Microsoic Fauna which may have been introduced by

Deeper Currents beyond the Continental Shelf.

Taking the samples E 3920, E3921 and E 3922 at 470 to 505 fathoms as
being typical of the blue, grey and green muds below the 100 fathom line, it is very
enlightening to make a comparison of certain species contained therein which have
a naturally northern or southern habitat. The following, therefore, are especially
regarded as having been distributed by Notonectian or Antarctic currents,
respectively :

() Chas. Hedley, Presidential Address, Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1910, 30 (1), 10-12.
For the Discussion of Regions, see Hedley—The Effect of the Bassian Isthmus upon the
Existing Marine Fauna: a Study in Ancient Geography, ibid., 1903, (4).

207

NOTONECTIAN
(Philippines, Andaman Islands, Ki Islands, Torres Strait)
ForAMINIFERA—
Vaginulina legumen Cornuspira foliacea
Nodosaria fistuca A » expansa
» catenulata < lacunosa
is pyrula senurugosa Quinqueloculina cuvieriana
Lagenonodosaria scalaris Spiroloculina canaliculata
lagena clavata Ptychomiliola separans
Rectobolivina bifrons Pyrgo comata
Bifarina fimbriata » tornasinii
Uvigerina sp. aff. pigmea Ilaplophragmoides grandiformis
Parafrondicularia helenae Textularia corrugata
Sphaeroidinella dehiscens Dorothia arenata
Elphidium advenum Gaudryina scabra
fe robusta
5 triangularis
OstTRACcOoDA—
Cythere crispata Xestoleberis curta
re goujoni Bythocythere arenacea
n inconspicua Cytherella lata
J irrorata - punctata
a3 scutigera a seinitalis
Loxoconcha australis
ANTARCTIC
(Great Ice Barrier, Kerguelen Islands, Heard Island, Falklands, New Zealand)
TFoRAMINIFERA—
Lagena annectens Orbulina universa
» erenata Pulleniatina obliquiloculata
ea distoma Globorotalia scitula
ct marginata J truncatulinoides
» melo Nonion depressulus
» orbignyana y grateloupi
a sulcata My scapha
Bulimina elegans rd umpbilicatulus
Bolivina alata Elphidium lessoni
» robusta Hyperammina novaezealandiae
Cassidulina crassa Saccammina sphaerica
Ellipsolagena_ schlichti Rhabdammina disereta
Rolivinita quadrilatera v. tortilis Planispirina bucculenta
Patellina corrugata Triloculina chrysostoma
Cibicides refulgens + tricarinata
Anomalina wuellerstorfi Miliolinella oblonga
Chilostomella cushmani Pyrgoella sphaera
Pullenia sphaeroides Haplophragmoides emaciatus
A subcarinata Recurvoides contortus
Globigerina dutertrei Reophax dentaliniformis
’ inflata % distans v. pseudodistans
7 pachyderma sh scorpiurus
= subcretacea Textularia conica

i; triloba Trochammina planoconvexa

208

OsTRACODA—
Bairdia australis Xestoleberis davidiana
Cythere dictyon a setigera
nf exilis Cytherura costcllata
falklandt Cytheropteron assimile
3 foveolata Pseudocythere caudata
44 normani i fuegiensis
subrufa

The main facts leading to this conclusion are given on pp. 149, 130. These go
to prove that the deposition of calcitic rhombs in such sediments must, be due to
fairly rapid changes in temperature which are taking place in the waters of Bass
Strait.

(d) General Nature of the Sediments of the present Samples.
The majority are richly organic and largely calcareous. In four out of the
nine samples there were small quantities of quartz sand present, as follows:

E3917 A minute quantity of angular quartz grains, Could not have travelled
far from source, by weathering of continental rocks.

E3918 Occasional polished quartz grains. Probably wind-blown, and carried
out to sea from desert regions.

E3919 A small proportion of fine angular quartz sand and other terrigcnous
material. Deposited not far from source of origin (continental).

E 3922 Concretionary mud, stained with iron oxide. When dissolved in H Cl,
leaves a small residue of quartz sand (derived from continental rocks).
The microzoa released by crushing are found to be marvellously perfect.

DeEposiTion or TYPES AND DUPLICATE SPECIMENS DESCRIBED
in turs Monocrarit
The Director of the National Museum, Melbourne, Mr. D. J. Mahony, M.Sc.,
has kindly consented to undertake the care of the present collection, Former
collections of the Microzoa described by me from the “Endeavour” soundings are
also to be found in the collection of the National Muscum, Melbourne.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The writer is greatly indebted to his friend, Walter J. Parr, F.R.M.S. (Mines
Department, Melbourne), for discussions on the taxonomic position of several
species contained in this paper.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF FORAMINIFERA

Batscu, A. J. 1791 Conchylien des Seesandes

Brapy, H. B. 1864 Trans. Linn. Soc., Lond., 24

Brapy, H. B. 1879 Quart. Jrn. Mier. Sei. 19

Brapny, H. B. 1881 Jbid, 21

BrApy, H. B. 1882 Proc. Roy. Soc. Edin.

Brapy, H. B. 1884 “Challenger” Exped., Zool. 22, 9

Brapy, Parker and Jones 1870 Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., 21

Biainvitte, H. 1825 Manuel Malac. et Conch.

BoRNEMANN, J. G. 1855 Zcitschr. Deutsch. Geol. Gesellschaft, 7

Burrows, H., and Hotranp, R. 1895 (in Jones, Parker and Brady) Pal.
Soc., Mon.

CarRPENTER, W. B. 1868 Proc. Roy. Soc., 17

209

CARPENTER, W. B. 1881 The Microscope and its Revelations, 6th ed.

CHAPMAN, F. 1906 (for 1905) Trans. N.Z. Inst., 38

CuHapman, F. 1907 Journ. Quekett Club, (2), 10

CHapMan, F. 1907 Journ. Linn. Soc., Lond., 30

CHapMaNn, I. 1909 Subantarctic Islands of New Zealand, 1

CuApmMan, F. 1910 Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond. Zool., 30

Cuapman, F. 1915 “Endeavour” Sci. Results, 3, (1)

Cuarman, F. 1916 Shackleton Brit. Antarctic Exped. 1907-9. Geol. 2, (2)

CHapMAN, F. 19161 Jbid, Geol. 2, (3)

CHAPMAN, F. 1916? Vict. Nat., 32

CHApMAN, F, 1924 Rep. Sth. Afric. Govt. Fisheries for 1922, No. 11

CuHapMaN, F., and Parr, W. J. 1926 Journ. Linn. Soc., Lond., 36

CHapMAN, F., Parr, W. J., and Cottrns, A. C. 1934 Jbid, 38

CHAPMAN, F., and Parr, W. J. 1935 Journ. Roy. Soc. W, Aust., 21

CHAPMAN, F., and Parr, W. J. 1937 Mawson Antarctic Exped. 1911-14,
Ser. C, 1, (2)

Costa, O. G. 1856 Atti dell’ Accad. Pontan, 7, fasc. 2

CusHMAN, J. 1910 Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., 71, (i)

CusuMan, J. 1911 fbid, 71, (ii)

CusUMAN, J. 1913 fbid, 71, (iii)

CusnMan, J. 1913 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 44

CusHMAN, J. 1918-31 Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., 104

CUSHMAN, J. 1919 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus, 56

CusHMAN, J. 1921 Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., 100

CusHMAN, J. Carnegie Inst., 17

CusHMAN, J. 1924 Carnegie Inst., Publ. 342

CUSHMAN, J. 1927 Contr. Cushm, Lab., 3

CUSHMAN, J. 1928 Contr. Cushm, Lab., 4, (i)

CUSHMAN, J. 1932 Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., 161

CUSHMAN, J. 1936 Spec. Publ, No. 6

CusHMAN, J. 1937 Spec. Publ. No. 7

CusIIMAN, J. 19371 Spec. Publ. No, 9

CusuMman, J. 19372 Contr. Cushm. Lab., 13

Cusuman, J. A. and Ozawa, Y. 1930 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 77, Art. 6

CusuMan, J. A., and Wuite, E. M. 1936 Contr. Cushm. Lab., 12

Derrance, J. L. M. 1824 Dict. Sci. Nat., 32

Eccer, J. G. 1857 Neues Jahrb. f. Min.

Eccer, J. G. 1893 Foram, “Gazelle” (1874-6), Abhandl. k, bayer, Ak. Wiss.,
Wien, Cl. ii, 18, (2)

FISCHER DE WALDHEIM, G. 1817 Adversaria Zoologica, Mém. Soc., Imp. Nat.
Moscou, 5

Fornasint, C. 1895 Contributo a la Conoscenza de la Bulimine Adriatiche.
Bologna (privately printed)

Fornastnr, C. 1901 Accad. Sci. Ist. Bologna, Mém., (5), 9

Fornasini, C. 1905 Jbid, Mém., (6), 2

Gois, AxEL 1894 K, Svenska Vet. Akad., Handlingar, 25, No. 9

Heron-ALien and EarLtAnp 1915 ‘Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., 20, (17)

HerRon-AtLEN and Earranp 1922 ‘Terra Nova” Exped., Zool. vi, No. 2

Heron-ALLEn and EarLtAnp 1924 Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc., Lond.

HeERoN-ALLEN and Eartanp 1932 “Discovery” Reports, 4

Jones, Parker and Brapy 1866 Pal. Soc. Mon., 19

oe ape ee ik De a DR
eo
bho
nN

210

Karrer, F. 1877 Geologie der Kaiser Franz ~-Josefs Hochquellen-Wasser-
leitung, Abhandl. k.k. Geol. Reichsanstalt, 9

Lamarck, 1804 Annales du Muséum, Paris, 5 and 9

LamMarcK 1811 In Parkinson’s “Organic Remains of a Former World”

LAmMARCK 1815-1822 Histoire Naturelle des Animaux sans Vertebres, 2 1816,
7 1822

Mittert, F. W. 1898-1904 Journ. Roy. Mier. Soc., Lond.

Montacu, G 1803 Testacea Britannica

Montacu, G. 1804 In Brown’s “Illustrated Recent Conchology”

Mowntrort, P. Denys pE 1808 Conchyliologie Systematique, 1

Munster, G. 1838 (in Roemer, F. A.) Neues Jahrbuch iur Min.

p’OrBIGNY, A. 1826 Ann. Sci. Nat., 7

p’Orpicny, A. 18391 In Barker-Webb and Berthelot’s “Histoire Naturclle [les
Canaries”

p’Orpicny, A. 18392 In Ramon de la Sagra’s “Ilistoire Physique, Politique et
Naturelle de !’ Ile de Cuba”

p’OrBIGNY, A. 18393 Voyage dans 1’ Amerique Meridionale, (3), 5

p’Orpicny, A. 1840 Mém. Soc. Géol. France 4

p’Orpiexy, A. 1846 For. Foss., Vienne

Parker and Jones 1865 Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., Lond.

Parker, Jones and Brapy 1865 Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist., (3), 16

Parr, W. J. 1932 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 44, (2)

Parr and Cottins 1930 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 43, (1)

Parr and Cottrns 1937 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 50

Puiiprr, R. A. 1844 Enumeratio Molluscorum Siciliae, 2

Reuss, A. E. 1850 Denkschriften k, Ak. Wiss., Wien, 1
Reuss, A. E. 1851 Haidinger’s ‘““Naturw. Abhandl.,” 4
Reuss, A. E. 1854 Denkschr. k. Ak. Wiss., Wien, 7, (1)
Reuss, A. E. 1858 Zeitschr. d. d. Geol. Gesellschaft, 10
Reuss, A. E. 18621 Sitz. d.k. Ak. Wiss., Wien, 46, (1)
Reuss, A. E. 1862? Sitz. d. k. Ak, Wiss., Wien, 46, (1)
Reuss, A. E. 1864 Sitz. d. k. Ak. Wiss., Wien, 48, (1)

ScHLUMBERGER, C. 1891 Mém. Soc. Geol. France, 4

Scuwacer, C. 1866 “Novara” Exped., Geol. Theil, 2

Sipenotrom, H. 1918 Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc., Lond.

Stivestri, A. 1902 Mem. d. Pont. Accad. Romania, Nuovi Lincéi, 19

Trerouvem, O. 1876 Anim. sur la Plage de Dunkérque

Watker and Boys 1784 Testacea minuta rariora .... in arena littoris Sand-
vicensis

Waker and JAacop 1798 In Adams’ Essays

Wittramson, W. C. 1858 Ray Society, London

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF OsTRACODA

Brapy, G. S. 1866 Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., 5
Brapy, G. S, 1867 Les Fonds de la Mer., 1

Brapy, G. S. 1868! Trans, Linn. Soc. Lond., 26
Brapy, G. S. 18682 Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., (4), 2
Brapy, G. S. 1878 ‘Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond.

Brapy, G. S. 1880 “Challenger” Exped., Zool., (111)
Brapy, G. S. 1890 Trans. Roy. Soc. Fdin., 35

Brapy, CrossKEY and Roperrson 1874 Pal. Soc. Mon,
Brapy and Norman 1889 Trans. Roy. Dublin Soc., (2), 4
Bosquet, J. 1853 Crustacées fossils, Limburg

Crapman, F. 1902 Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond. Zool., 28

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1941 Vol. 65, Plate VIT

Endeavour,” E 3915

Potyzoa and Ostracoda, F.I.S.

F, Chapman, del. ad nat.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1941 Vol. 65, Plate VIII

Ostracoda and Foraminifera, F.I.S. “Endeavour,” E 3916-8

F. Chapman, del. ad nat.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1941 Vol. 65, Plate IX

——

Foraminifera, Ostracoda and Mollusc, F

LS. “Endeavour,” E 3919-23

F, Chapman, del. ad nat,

211

Cuapman, FF. 1910 Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond. Zool., 30
Cuapman, F. 1915 “Endeavour” Results, 3, (1)
Cuapman, F. 1916 Shackleton Brit. Antarctic Exped. 1907-9, Geol, 2, (2)
CuapMAaN, F, 1919 Mawson Antarctic Exped., 1911-14, Ser. C, 5,
Cuarman, and Crespin 1928 (in Chapman, F.) Report on Sorrento Bore
Eacer, J. G. 1858 Ostrakoden der Miocan Schichten, bei Ortenburg
Eccrer, J. G. 1901 Abhandl. k.k. Bayern Ak. Wiss., 21, (2)

Gots, AXEL 1865 Oversigt. Norges Marine Ostracoda

Norman, A. M. 1865 Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumberland and Durham, 1
Norman, A. M. 1876 Report “Valorous” Exped., Proc. Roy. Soc. Lond.,

No. 173

Reuss, A. E. 1855 Zeitschr. d. d. Geol. Gesellsch., 7

Fig. 1 Retepora babelensis sp. nov. Portion of zoarium under low power. Holotype.
Fig. 2 fr iS Fr. Zoecial surface. X 18.
Fig. 3 ss m " Dorsal surface. X 18.
Fig. 4 Mecynoecia dannevigi sp. nov. Holotype. X 18.
Fig. 5 Macrocypris setigera G. S. Brady. X 37. ;
Fig. 6 Cytheropteron hedleyi sp. nov. Holotype. Walve secn from the side, X 37.
Fig. 7 re Pe *3 Dorsal aspect. X 37.
Puiate VIII
Fig. 1 Pontocypris bradyi (nom. mut). Plesiotype. Left valve. E3916. X 37.
Fig. 2 Xestoleberis davidiana Chapman, Plesiotype. Left Valve. E3917. X 37,
Fig. 3 Cythere postcaudispinosa sp. nov. Holotype. Right valve. T. 3917. X 37.
Fig. 4 Bairdia acanthigera G. S. Brady! Right valve. E3917. X 37.
Fig. 5 Cythere acerosella sp. nov. Holotype. Left valve. E3917. X 37.
Fig. 6 Bulimina aff. marginata dOrb. E3917, X 88.
Fig. 7 Notorotalia decurrens sp. nov.: a, superior face; b, inferior face. Holotype. E 3918,
Fig. 8 Sigmoilina latissima sp. nov.: a, lateral aspect; b, edge view. Holotype. E3918.
X 18.
Fig. 9 Chilostomella cushmani sp. nov. Syntype. Form A. E3918. X 37.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

Prate VIT
All specimens from Sample E 3915. East of Babel Island, 65 fathoms.

Fig.10 Eucythere declivis (Norman). Left valve. E3918. X 88.

Tig.

Fig.

Fig.
Fig.
Tig.

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Pirate IX

1 Planularia australis sp. nov. E3919. X 74.

2 Lagenonodosaria scalaris (Batsch), var. seminuda var. nov. E 3922. Type of
X 74,

3 Bolivinita quadrilatera (Schwager), var. tortilis nov.

4 Bifarina fimbriata (Millett), FE 3922. X 74,

(7):

X 5.

var.

5 Parafrondicularia helenae sp. nov. E 3922. Holotype. X74 54a, Another example,

longitudinal section at a bored end. E3922, X 112.
6 Chilostomella cushmani sp. nov. Form B. E3923. Syntype of stage B. X74,
7a,b Myrtaea gabrieli sp. nov. Holotype. E3920. Nat. size.
8 Pontocypris attenuata G. S. Brady (showing spine), E3919. X74,

ig. 9 Cythere obtusalaia G. S. Brady var. tenwis var. niov. E 3921 Holotype of var. X 74,
Fig. 10 Cytherelloidea auris sp. nov. F.3922. X 55.
Fig.11 Cytherella punctata G. S. Brady, E3923. X55,

THE BROMINE CONTENT OF SOME SALINE WATERS
IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By W. TERNENT COOKE

Summary

There are a few references (2, 5, 6) to be found dealing with the bromine content of the many saline
waters which exist in this State. Goyder (6) examined many bore and spring waters, and mentions
the absence or presence of traces of bromine in some of them, but gives no actual figures for
bromine.

212

THE BROMINE CONTENT OF SOME SALINE WATERS
IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By W. TERNENT COOKE
{Read 10 July 1941}

There are a few references (2, 5, 6) to be found dealing with the bromine
content of the many saline waters which exist in this State. Goyder (6) examined
many bore and spring waters, and mentions the absence or presence of traces of
bromine in some of them, but gives no actual figures for bromine.

The growing importance of bromine is shown by the increase in output in
the U.S.A., where between 1928 and 1938 the production rose from slightly more
than 2 to 38 million pounds per annum. So far, apparently, Australia has not
manufactured bromine commercially, and in 1938-9 nearly 100,000 pounds, valued
at nearly £9,000, were imported. This is all the more regrettable since liquors
from salt works, etc., are virtually relatively concentrated bromide solutions, often
as rich in bromine as those from which it was in general obtained before the
present increased demand for this element arose.

Mernop or ANALYSIS

The procedure given by Doering (4) was used. The chemical basis of the
method consists in oxidising the bromide present to bromate, allowing this to
liberate iodine from potassium iodide, and titrating the liberated iodine with
standardised sodium thiosulphate solution. Standardisation can be made directly
against pure potassium bromate, or indirectly against potassium bromide by
putting it through the routine process of the analysis. The method was found to
be simple, cheap, quick, and quite sufficiently accurate for the present purpose ;
it can be carried out on 10 ml. of solution by, using a 0-005 normal thiosulphate
solution. Usually two portions of sample were taken, 10 ml., and 25 ml., and
titrated against 0-005 N, and/or 0-05 N thiosulphate, respectively, giving values
such as, e.g., 544, 541, 535, 549 grammes per million ml. of sample. Experiments
were made with some of the samples in order to compare the volumetric method
here used with the “aspiration” method of Baughman and Skinner (1). It was
found that satisfactory agreement could be obtained if the time of the aspiration
was increased at least three times; this increase is necessary apparently on account
of the very small amounts of bromine under estimation. Also, where as in the
present case, the ratio of chlorine to bromine is high, the finding of Baughman
and Skinner concerning the necessity for two aspirations and absorptions was
confirmed. The bromine, carrying with it some chlorine, must first be absorbed
in carbonate-sulphite solution, and the bromine then aspirated from this into a
solution of potassium iodide.

RESULTS

The results of the analyses are set out in tabular form in Table I, the bromine
contents being expressed in grammes of bromine per million millilitres of the
sample, or roughly pounds per 100,000 gallons. The water of the open sea, from
which large amounts of bromine are today being obtained, contains from 60 to 70
parts per million. The figures for bromine actually include any iodine which may
be present, but the amounts of the latter are very minute; in sea water the ratio
of bromine to iodine is about 3,000 to one (3).

The results in Table I show the bromine content of the samples as received,
since the main objective of the work was to ascertain what available raw materials
might be considered as possible sources of commercial supplies of bromine, For

Trans. Roy. Soc, S.A., 65, (2), 19 December 1941

213

the sake of being able to make a further comparison between some of the samples,
certain additional data are given in Table II, which data show the actual saline
content of some of the samples, and the bromine content of the salts present in
the solution, the bromine content of the solution being known from the results of
Table I. The saline contents were determined by evaporation and drying of the
saline residue at about 230°C. Admittedly the method does not give strictly
accurate values of the saline contents of the liquors, since some chlorine (and
bromine) is lost by hydrolysis of the halogen salts present, particularly magne-
sium chloride, but the method is sufficiently accurate to,serve as a basis of
comparison. The loss of halogens by hydrolysis can be seen by comparing
column 4 of Table II, which gives the bromine content of the salts after drying
(and hydrolysis), with the bromine content of the same salts as existing in the
original liquors (column 3, Table IL). The figures in column 4 give the propor-
tion of bromine in the dried salts, on the basis of 100 in the dissolved salts.
Column 5 gives figures for chlorine calculated on the same basis. The losses in
bromine in the different samples are seen to be considerable and variable, while
those for chlorine, as might be predicted, are distinctly less.

TasLe I

Grammes of Bromine

Na. Sample Locality per Million Millilitre
Al Seawater Brighton 70
2 5 Port Augusta 96
3 oy it 8 103
4 ” Ww bad 131
5 Creek Witchellina | 53
6 Pool of Siloam Beachport | 158
7 Bore Dry Creek 8
8 Well? Reedy Creek 14
Bl Lake Butler Near Robe . 5
2 Dogleg Lake +5 ” 9
3 Fellmongery Lake " " | 21
4 Lakeside ” " | 43
5 Battye’s Lake ie 7 46
6 Lake Robe 54 a 84
7 » Eliza ” o 201
8 » Amy ” .; 231
9 » St. Clair ss , 272
cil Brine Gypsum Works 353
2 : ” ” ” 370
a 4 - Salt rs 382
455) 7 Gypsum __,, 406
5. ae Salt ee 411
6. n » a5 437
7 : ” ” ” 472
8. ” ” ” 542
Be: ” ” ” 611
10 - 3 725
il a iS $i 850
12 ” " rr 927
13 ” ” ” 1015
14 i 33 45 1249
15 + a 1448
16 - es + 1569
17 S 42 if 1640
18 ” ” ” 1647
19 ” » ” 1789
20 ” ” ” 1932
21 ” ” ” 5636

214

TaBL_e II
7 a 2 3 4 5
P . of original ||, ;
Sample Grms. Salt per Per cent. of Bromine Baie lef apes Per cent. of Chlorine

100 ml. Solution | in Salts, in Solution Salts | leit in Dry Salts
C6... 2:76 0-159 88-5 | —_—
Cue ass 2-26 0-184 82:7 | a
B77... 1I-l1l 0-217 69-1 —
Bs. 6:37 0+363 81-7 97-4
B4 1°55 0-277 _ 98:2

Grateful acknowledgment is hereby made of the valuable help I have

received in prosecuting this investigation. Several firms have kindly collected and
forwarded samples; the Education Department and some of its country officers
have also been very helpful in collecting samples for analysis.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(6)

REFERENCES

BAUGHMAN and Skinner 1919 Ind. and Eng. Chem., 11, 954

Cooxr, W. T. 1917 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 61, 39

Dirrmar, W. Report of “Challenger” Expedition, 1873-1876, Physics and
Chemistry, 1, 89

Dorrinc, H. 1937 Zeit, f. Anal. Chem., 108, 255

Firzpatrick, A. S., and Stronc, H. W. 1925 Proc. Roy. Soc. of Vict.
(N.S.), 37, (1), 98

Govper, G. A. 1893 Parliamentary Paper; also Rept. S. Aust. School of
Mines, 1891, 168

ON CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS

PART II THE MURIDAE
(Continued from 64, (I), 136, 1940)

By H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

RATTUS spp.
No species of Rattus was taken in the area worked over, nor reliable reports of them obtained.
However, the specimens of R. villosissimus described by Waite (15, 125) evidently came from a
locality west of the Lake Eyre Basin.“” and two slight anomalies in the skull measurements as
compared with skulls from the latter district have already been pointed out.

215

ON CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS
PART II THE MURIDAE

(Continued from 64, (1), 136, 1940)
By H. H. FINLAyson
[Read 10 July 1941]

Piates X, XI, XII, XIII

Rarrus spp.

No species of Rattus was taken in the area worked over, nor reliable reports
of them obtained. However, the specimens of R. villosissiimus described by Waite
(15, 125) evidently came from a locality west of the Lake Eyre Basin,“ and two
slight anomalies in the skull measurements as compared with skulls from the latter
district have already been pointed out.

The skulls have since been re-examined and the anomalies confirmed (in a
reduced form). Both skulls have slightly longer molar rows, 7°5 and 7-4 as
against a maximum of 7°3 in the Lake Eyre Basin, and the male skull has an
inlerorbital breadth of 5-6 as against a maximum of 5*3, The latter skull is
damaged and evidently old, and its temporal ridges are more like those of
norvegicus than any other I have examined. In other dimensions and in non-
metrical characters both are in good agreement with the eastern series.

Pseupomys (PsEvupoMyYS) MINNIE Troughton

This species, originally described from the Lake Eyre Basin, where it is
periodically extremely abundant, was not taken in the Amadeus Basin, nor in any
of the highlands adjacent to it, in the work of 1931-35; nor does it occur in any
other collection from this region which I have examined. A small series, how-
ever, from the Arckaringa tablelands in the winter of 1933, about 60 miles south-
west of Oodnadatta, has already been briefly noticed (3, 99).

The pelage in four is of the rich brown type common at Cordillo in 1930-31;
the other two a paler grizzled buff phase approaching that of Mulka and Appa-
munna. Flesh dimensions of the four adults are slightly lower than the average
for the Lake Eyre Basin series, but well within the extremes, The skulls are of
the light and comparatively fragile type common in Appamunna collections, with
both zygomatic breadth and width of brain case lower than in the larger series;
they agree with these, however, in the three critical characters of molar length,
anterior palatal foramina and palate length which separate minnie from rawlinnae.

The slight differences noted can have little significance as geographical varia-
tions, since specimens taken at Ooldea, 250 miles further to the south-west, are
still closer to the Lake Eyre Basin average.

PseupoMys (LEGGADINA) HERMANNSBURGENSIS Waite

Menki, of the Pitchenturra. Described (14, 405) in 1896 from material
taken in and about the Macdonnell Ranges, subsequent work has, proved its

©) This term is used throughout these papers in the restricted sense defined by me
in an earlicr paper in Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 57, 195, 1933, and excludes the
greater part of the western drainage towards the lake from the Finke, Stevenson, Hamil-
ton, Alberga, and Arckaringa Creeks. In their upper course these streams traverse areas
in which the mammals are scarcely differentiated from those of the Amadeus lands, while
the eastern part of the Lake Eyre Basin is a well marked natural region, distinguished
both by the absence of western forms and the presence of indigenous ones.

Trans. Roy. Soc. §.A., 65, (2), 19 December 1941

216

range to extend north to Alexandria (9, 536) in approximately 19° south and
136° 50’ east; south to Ooldea (6, 318) in latitude 30° 27’ south and longitude
131° 25’ east; south-west to Rawlinna (13, 292), 400 miles west of Ooldea, and
south-east (1, 10) to the junction of the Murray and Darling Rivers in north-
west Victoria. It is absent from the Lake Eyre Basin, which is probably its
eastern limit in the central areas, while to the west, in these latitudes, although no
specimen has been examined from beyond Ayers Rock, it almost certainly extends
to the Rawlinson Range on the Western Australian border and probably far
beyond. It was not taken, however, by the Canning Stock Route expedition of
1930 through the Western Sandridge Desert.

Throughout the area between the Macdonnells and Everards, personally
worked over during 1931-1935, it was widely spread but nowhere very plentiful,
and on the loamy grass and mulga flats where most of the collections were made,
it was out-numbered by Notomys alexis. It proved difficult to trap in the open
country, with ordinary baits, largely because of the ants which swarm upon the
traps in such areas. A few were got with bread baits in store tents at camps near
the Basedow Range, where it had adopted the raiding habits of Mus musculus,
which latter was often trapped alongside it.

The majority of the specimens were dug by the blacks from simple burrows
two to three feet long and nine to twelve inches deep, Five was the greatest
number taken from a tunnel, and on two occasions the gecko, Nephurus laevis,
was found in occupation at the same time; the association is evidently well known
to the blacks, as I had independent accounts of it from several localities. The
natural diet seems to be entirely seeds, grass roots and small tubers; the chief
constituent of the stomach contents in summer collections, particularly from the
Basedow Range area, was a small dark-cased seed from the local succulent called
Wokiti—a Portulaca species extremely abundant on flooded ground after summer
rains. Sand was always present in variable, but sometimes very large amount.

The following examination is based upon 73 specimens, of which 22 are skins
and skulls and the rest alcohol preserved. The series is made up of eight collec-
tions, taken at the following times and places.@)

(1) At two camps between Wollara and the Basedow Ranges, February and
March, 1932. (2) Ayers, Rock, February, 1932. (3) Wollara, in winter of 1932.
(4) Alpera, at the north-west extremity of the Musgrave Range, December, 1932.
(5) Erliwunyawunya, Owellinna and Ernabella on the southern side of the Mus-
grave Range, January, 1933. (6) Chundrinna, on the northern front of the
Everard Range, February, 1933. (7) Karmeena, on the southern side of the
Everard Range, winter of 1915. (8) Miscellaneous specimens from Charlotte
Waters, Hermannsburg, Macdonnell Ranges, Tennant’s Creek, and three un-
localized.

The conclusions as to reproductive activity which can be deduced from these
records are similar to those relating to Notomys alexis; 1.¢., seasonal independence
of such activity and its occurrence in marked form after heavy rains. At Wollara,
in February, 1932, six weeks after a heavy rain, reproduction was particularly
active the collection comprising numerous growth stages from aged examples to
nestlings. In this batch nearly all females are pregnant, and the frequency of
litters is shown by the occurrence of heavily pregnant females still suckling nest-
lings. In adult males the testes are generally well developed and scrotal, or have
undergone very recent retraction, leaving a prominent scrotal skin flap. Uterine
embryos are either three or four, asymetrically arranged with the larger number
in the right horn. In the entire series sexed females predominate in the ratio
24 6 : 42 9.

@) The bearings of these localities have been given in connection with Notomys
alexis collections in Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64, (1), 1940, 127.

217

A Laelaps occurs, but very sparsely; and in this respect the species is in
strong contrast to Notomys alexis, which (at the same times and places) was
heavily infested.

‘The great bulk of the material is clearly referable to the typical race, of which
topotypes have been available, but in collections from the Musgraves, anomalous
examples occur which fore-shadow racial differentiation; in the sequel the data
relating to these has been disassociated from that of the main series, and will be
considered under Section B.

A Tue Typican RAcE

External Characters—Size, build and general appearance much as in Mus
musculus, but the head larger and broader between the orbits when seen from
above. Mysticial vibrissae to 32 mm,; moderately stout at base but the larger
members terminating in an extremely attenuated almost invisible tip, Ear short
and conspicuously broad; maximum length, 14-5,

The manus varies in size and proportions from individual to individual, and
is sometimes widely different on the two sides of the same individual. Length
from base of carpal pads to apex of third digit, to 6 mm. Breadth across the base
of digits 2-5, 3 mm.; third digit to 3mm. Undersurface of digits lightly haired ;
claws moderate and lightly fringed. Palmar pads generally well developed and
high, their proportions moderately constant. Carpals, generally large and squat;
outer much larger in area than inner, but not markedly elongate. Occasionally,
especially in subadults, the carpals may be subequal and are then smaller than
usual. The first and second interdigitals small and rounded or irregularly pyri-
form; the third subequal or larger than second, triangular with the apex distad
and sometimes with an external accessory fold or heel, but never a separate
satellite. General formula of the palmar pads therefore: outer carpal > inner
carpal > third interdigital > or = second interdigital > first interdigital.

The pes has length to 18 mm.; breadth across base of digits 1-5, 3 mm. and
across base of digits 2-4, 2-8 mm. Heel narrowed by infringement of hairs from
both sides, and a few bristly hairs sometimes present in the main interdigital
basin. Undersurface of toes lightly haired. Claws moderate, and moderately
fringed. Plantar pads well raised; highly variable in size, shape and proportion.
Metatarsals, small, round and subequal. First interdigital larger than meta-
tarsals, but very variable, usually bluntly oval or rounded, sometimes divided into
moities by a shallow vertical sulcus; second and third interdigitals generally
pyriform and subequal; but in one or two examples 2 > 3 and bell-shaped; fourth
interdigital obtusely oval or bell-shaped, normally much larger than two and three,
but sometimes equal and occasionally with a postero-external heel or satellite.
Immaturity chiefly shown by the smaller size of the interdigitals 1 and 4.
The general formula of the plantar pads is, therefore: fourth interdigital > or
= second = third > first > inner metatarsal = outer metatarsal.

Tail longer than the head and body except in one example, but variation as
high as 25%; thin and tapering with the termination well haired, Scales
on the mid-dorsum from 17 to 21 per cm. The posterior mammary nipples in
functioning adults, 6 mm. from base of clitoris; the anterior 6 mm. from
the posterior. The scrotum is pigmented almost black over the greater part of
its area,

Pelage—The following description is drawn up from observation on living
and recently chloroformed animals, supported by examination of field skins which
have had no contact with liquid preservatives. Coat soft but sleek and not fluffy,
texture varying somewhat with the proportion of guard hairs, which, however,
are scarcely longer than the main pile; mid-dorsal length from 9 to 11 mm. On
the dorsum, the basal two-thirds of all hairs is about blackish-plumbeous of

218

Ridgway, and the terminal one-third of the main pile varies from orange cinna-
mon in the brightest individuals to tawny olive in the dullest. The longer guard
hairs are black-tipped and the intermingling of these three colours, in varying
proportions, produces a gencral external colour which varies from warm red
browns near Mikado’s brown to. much colder and darker tones, near bistre. Muid-
ventrally the fur is 5 mm. long, the basal one-third somewhat paler than the dorsal
plumbeous, and the upper two-thirds snow white, completely excluding the basal
grey. The sides show a more or less decided brightening in colour due to the
usual falling off in the number of guard hairs and the line of demarcation from
the white belly is very sharp. Head slightly greyer than the back but still
strongly grizzled; the extremity of muzzle and upper lip greyish-white. The ears
sparsely clothed within the upper margins only, with greyish-white; externally
varying considerably from greyish-brown to blackish-brown, Fore and hind
limbs internally like the belly, externally like the sides. Manus and pes dorsally
pure white, with a slight calcaneal darkening in some examples. Tail distinctly
bicolor, darker above, the colour varying like the ears from greyish-brown to
blackish-brown. The scales are plainly visible mid-dorsally, but distally the hairs
lengthen and are more closely set, forming at the tip a minute but distinct dark
brush both above and below.

Seasonal and sexual differences nil—age variation appreciable but subject to
much irregularity; in general, subadult pelages are slightly darker and colder
than in adults. Short-coated nestlings are pure white ventrally, but at the head
and body, 50 mm, stage, when the coat has lengthened, the basal colour ventrally
may be either white or grey, but no examples of the retention of white-based
belly fur in adults have been observed.

The effect of alcohol immersion upon the colouration of this species has been
much Jess than upon Notomys alexis from the same areas, preserved under
exactly the same conditions. After eight years the dorsal colour is still quite close
to that of the field skins, though the white ventrum has been stained yellow.

Skull and Dentition—Twenty examined. Range in variation in non-metrical
characters is wide with several anomalies in the relation of skull size to body
size, and of skull size to molar wear, etc., though these are less than in Notomys
alexis and Pseudomys munme,

Nasals generally rather short and broad in subadults, longer and without
additon to width in aged skulls; their contact with the frontals is fairly wide
and the width increases but slightly to its maximum at the pre-maxillary
margin.

Braincase remarkably variable in width and shape even in examples of the
same basal length from the same locality, though the more conspicuously swollen
examples are all aged skulls. The zygomatic outline shows similar and probably
sympathetic variation from an almost parallel-sided condition to one in which the
anterior width, is little more than half the posterior. Age changes in the inter-
orbital constriction slight or largely masked by individual variation; the mean
value for subadult skulls little if at all greater than for adults. Upper and lower
points of the zygomatic plate usually vertical or the lower somewhat anterior,
with the free margin slightly concave or nearly straight, never conver as given
by Thomas for the subgenus (11,604). In immature skulls the lowest point is
decidedly anterior to the upper and the condition then quite similar to that in
Ps. (Gyomys) apodemoides, Anterior palatal foramina comparatively wide,
the posterior extension variable; sometimes falling short of the anterior margin
of M!, but usually reaching about one-third the distance from that point to the
lingual cusp of the first lamina. Mesopterygoid fossa highly variable in size and
shape; parapterygoid with distinct external and internal walls, neither feature

219

affording any appreciable distinction from such
forms as Ps. minnie, higginsi, and apodemotdes,
Bullae large, swollen and subject to considerable
age changes. In immature skulls the inflated
portion rises almost abruptly from the hamular
process, but in aged examples a low-set tubular
portion separates the two, In the molars the
antero-internal cusp of the upper M? varies
much in size, prominence and exact position;
sometimes decidedly less lingual than as figured
by Waite (14, pl. xxvi, 5d). It is, how-
ever, unmistakably present in all examples save
one which is quite normal in other charac-
teristics.

Flesh Dimensions—The following figures give,
in mm., the range and mean value (in brackets)
of: (1) adults selected as free from obvious
immaturity in external characters; (2) subadults
of slightly inferior bulk to Group 1; (3) a group
definitely immature; and (4) two short-furred
nestlings.

Even after minimising uncertainties as to ma-
turity by segregation into several age groups
and eliminating the geographical factor, the indi-
vidual variation remains large within each group,
reaching in some items as high as 25%. More-
over, the variation in any one dimension through-
out the series, is complicated (as in NV. alexis and
Ps. minnie) by disharmonies in proportion in
individuals—a maximum value for one dimen-
sion not infrequently occurring with a minimum
value for another in the same example; this is
particularly noticeable in the head and body: tail
ratio. The tabular arrangement of four develop-
mental stages brings out clearly the very early
attainment of maximum dimensions of the pes,
and to a less degree of the ear.

Waite’s (14, 405) comparison of size of this
species with Mus musculus is rather misleading ;
it should be stressed that hermannsburgensis is
quite equal to the former in average bulk, and the
four conventional measurements of the two
species overlap so widely, that distinction by this
means is impossible,

Skull Dimensions—the following figures give
in mms, the range and mean (in brackets) for
6 4 and 7 @ skulls, extracted from examples of
the series free from: obvious immaturity in flesh
characters and showing wear on all laminae of
M’', followed by the values for a subadult 9
having H. & B, 69 mm., weighing 8°5 grammes,
and with unworn molars.

(4)

(3)

(2)

()

Land st ON
ot m
moon
OP .o Fa
NNN
NNN |
Mm We es
Ne ee eet
OF wh
i co tS
ia]
Sea
mn
Binmw a
Ana
“AN In
Mm We
ee OY
_
—
vo +65
” ona
NSae
I
et abt aie
Rw:
N
~~
inn NL
She age
Nn Oe
RS —
— ee
Or
mm
Om ot
ear Tee
add od
Noa
PARAS
tr Nt
NNO mM oe
ee ee
*6 wn
wn :
oo oO +
Rae ware
Nw
+ et
Xo
mm
PON TN NN NN SON
spin in s+ co On wy
COR 8 wt Ne wet
i YOY — CN ee
_ oe
OF at 2
Dj ey ee
“ln mo ton ow
Te TTTIT
pdip dt bdda
m IN ho
Ne)
rt
RR RRR
wet mM OAN
ne
me eS Oe —
oo aw
€y| 7 —
wm wm
co . .
Scanxtouaort
hank Tete ee
{
PtanN ee Na aAw
dn pe * .
on fon
wh
o
2 &
> y =
ot eee Hog
<a
mM ene, &
Pega: eee =
oy EFS EMS
ee o IS
— ©°F o
qa
a=) op
ose OL
m™ Sw kh Wed V'G
a Fans go ms
Hades

Greatest length - - - - 21-6-23-2 (22:1), 21°0-23-2 (22-1); 20°6
Basal length - - - - - 17-0-19°5 (17-9), 17°6-19-2 (18:4); 16-8
Zygomatic breadth - P Bs - 10-7-11+8 (11-2), 10-7-12-2 (11-1); 11-4
Braincase breadth - - - - 10°4-11°5 (10-9), 10-5-11-8 (10-8); 10-8
Interorbital breadth - - - - 3+3-3-8 (3-5), 3+3-3-7 (3-5); 355
Nasals, leneth - - - - 7+4-8:2 (7-7), 7:2-7:9 (7-6); 674
Nasals, greatest breadth - - - 2:0-2°5 (2:4), 2:1-2:6 (2:3); 2:3
Palatal length - - - - 10-5-11-7 (11-1), 10-4-11-5 (11-1); 10-7
Ant. Palatal Foramina; length - - 3-846 (4°3), 4:00-4:55 (4:3); 3:8
Ant. Palatal Foramina; breadth - - 4-4-1-6 (1:5), 1:41:7 (1:6); 1-4
Bullae - - - - - 4:3-4-7 (4-5), 4°445-0 (4:8); 4-7
Upper Molars “ ~ - - 3+4-3-9 (3:6), 3:43:8 (3-6); 3-5

B Ps. (LmGGADINA) IERMANNSBURGENSIS cf, var, BoLAMI Troughton

Four specimens from the Musgrave Range are conspicuous in possessing a
very long pes associated with a very long ear. The three adults (all 9 ) have
the following range of dimensions: head and body 70-78, tail 81-92, pes 18-19,
ear 15:5-17, and suggest affinity with the form from Ooldea, named as above by
Troughton (13, 292). Brazenor (1, 10) has disputed the racial validity of this
form on the grounds that local variation, both in Ooldea and in Central Australian
material, is sufficiently high to embrace the dimensions given for both races, and
that the pelage characters quoted for the southern form can be found much further
north in specimens of normal dimensions, and the data given by Wood Jones for
his Ooldea series certainly supports him so far as dimensions go. No specimens
from Ooldea are available to me, but I find, on careful analysis of all relevant
characters of the present series, that despite intergradation of individual
characters, and a high prevailing rate of variation, the four specimens noted are
easily distinguished from the rest by: (1) simultaneous occurrence of maxima
for pes and ear; (2) larger size of the metatarsal pads and a more posterior site
for the inner of the two, in the two specimens in which this can be tested; (3) the
presence of all three of these features in a very immature example, which has head
and body 66, tail 77, pes 19, ear 16°5. In pelage characters two of them are con-
spicuously cold in colour; the others quite normal.

This complex of characters makes an approach to bolamt, as given by
Troughton, and would appear to justify the view that two distinct strains of
hermannsburgensis occur side by side throughout the area between Ooldea and
the Musgrave Range. The absence of pure communities of bolami at Ooldea
might well be due to the interdiffusion having taken place on an east-west, rather
than a north-south axis, in which case its centre of origin may lie far to the west
in the area from which unfortunately no specimens are available.

It should be noted that the skull of the long-eared, long-footed example from
the Musgrave Ranges, here examined, differs in no way from that of its asso-
ciates. Of the three skull characters quoted for bolami at Ooldea, the interorbital
width and molar length are both to be found in numerous short-eared, short-
footed examples of the typical race, from the localities listed above.

Psrupomys (Leccaprna) waiter Troughton (13, 290)

Twelve specimens examined; one adult, one subadult, and three nestlings
from Wollara in the winter of 1932; one adult and three nestlings from Macdonald
Downs in the winter of 1933; one subadult and two extra skulls unlocalized, but
probably from the Macdonnell Ranges.

The Wollara specimens were obtained by a group of natives from the Petermann
Range, who regarded it as a rarity and called it Anoola. Unlike hermannsburgensts

221

which greatly out-numbers it at Wollara, it makes no considerable burrow but lives
and nests in shallow excavations at the base of Triodia tussocks,

The adult female of this batch was lactating and the three associated nest-
lings were probably hers; the subadult female was pregnant with three embryos,
two in the right horn of the uterus, one in the left; the Macdonald Downs female
was also lactating and associated with three nestlings, Of the nine which can
be sexed, seven are females. Stomach contents in the Wollara examples consisted
of coarsely granular reddish vegetable matter and some sand.

External Characters—Head and body length about as in the largest examples
of hermannsburgensis, but the body bulkier, thicker set, with stronger limbs,
Head much as in the latter species; the ear length to 14 mm.; mysticial vibrissae
to 30 mm.

Manus large and heavy; length from base of carpal pad to apex of middle
digit 7°5; breadth across base of digits 2-5, 3-5 mm.; third digit to 3 mm.; claws
of moderate length and well fringed. Pads of medium size but sharp cut and
high; outer carpal longer than inner but the disproportion in area less than in
hermannsburgensis, and the third interdigital rounded and not triangular. Pad
formula: outer carpal > inner carpal > second interdigital > third interdigital
> first imterdigital.

Pes—Short, broad and strong; length to 17°5 mm.; breadth across base of
digits 1-5 to 3-8 mm.; middle toe to 4 mm. Pads strongly developed and high,
and notable for their simple, rounded and complete outlines, without trace of heels
or satellites. Somewhat variable, but in the two best preserved examples the
metatarsals and first interdigital are small, round and subequal, and the second,
third and fourth interdigitals larger, rounded not pyriform, and also subequal,
leading to the unusual formula: fourth interdigital = third = second > first
= outer metatarsal = inner metatarsal.

Tail conspicuously short, ranging from 65-77% of the head and body length;
scales, 27 per cm,

In the largest lactating example the posterior mammary nipple is 9 mm. from
clitoris; the anterior 11 mm. from posterior.

Pelage—No field-made skins are available, and the following description is
drawn up from material preserved in alcohol for eight years. Fur moderately
soft in texture, guard hairs scarcely coarser than the main pile; fluffer and more
sparse than in hermannsburgensis. Mid-dorsally the main pile reaches 9 mm.
and guard hairs 11 mm.; basal two-thirds of the former coloured a medium
plumbeous; followed by a subterminal band of dull ashy buff and free tips black;
guard hairs black throughout. General external dorsal colour near Ridgway’s
buffy brown; paler, less brown and more distinctly grizzled than in hermanns-
burgensits, Ventrum creamy white to base (probably pure white in nature). Sides
clearing somewhat but still ticked with black almost to the junction with the
ventrum, where a narrow band of pale buff intervenes; transition much less
sudden than in hermannsburgensis and somewhat less than in forresti of the
Lake Eyre Basin. Head like the back. Ears pale in substance; within sparsely
haired greyish-white towards margins; externally pale ashy buff, darkening to
the anterior margin, where there is a narrow border of blackish-brown. Limbs
externally like the sides, internally like the belly. Manus and pes originally white
or very slightly greyed, and the latter with a small area of buffy-brown on the
external aspect of the ankle. Tail well covered with moderately erect hairs, which
do not lengthen towards the tip to form a brush; bicolor, the dorsum buffy over a
small area near the base, then greyish-brown to end; below greyish-white.

222

The northern specimens from Macdonald Downs are somewhat more olivaceous
than those from Wollara but the detailed distribution of colour is quite the same.
The six nestlings are all at the dark short-coated. stage, but.are all more buffy
dorsally than hermannsburgensis nestlings of comparable growth, and the ear
shows distinctly the narrow dark mark on the anterior margin.

Skull and Dentition—Two examined, both 9 ; one from Wollara, one from
Macdonald Downs; they are in close agreement with one another and with the
example figured by Waite (14, pl. xxv, fig. 1 g-h). General features apparently
very close to the form of forresti from the Lake Eyre Basin, of which, however,
only parts of one skull are available. Skull larger than that of hermannsburgensis
in almost all dimensions, but braincase, nasals, interorbital breadth and the bullae
relatively smaller than in fully adult examples of that species. In dorsal aspect
the zygomata are stronger anteriorly and wider spread in their middle course, and
the braincase is more abruptly expanded, resulting in a squarer outline, as men-
tioned by Waite. Interorbital area strongly concave and supraorbital edges
levelled off in a characteristic way by a marked muscular impression and not
rounded and overhanging as in fermannsburgensis. Temporal and occipital
muscular impressions more pronounced and in the larger of the two skulls, the
former are distinctly beaded, thotigh less so than in Waite’s figure. The zygomatic
plate has its upper and lower points on a perpendicular and the free margin
distinctly concave in its lower course, not convex, and its completed outline a
shallow sigmoid, Anterior palatine foramina narrower, especially posteriorly, where
they extend almost to the lingual cusp of the first lamina.“? Upper M? much
larger, its length exceeding the combined lengths of M? and M*. A very large
elongate antero-internal cingular cusp is present on the upper M?; it is much
larger and its position more apical than in hermannsburgensis. Incisors long;
markedly orthodent.

Flesh Dimensions—JDimensions in mms. of (1) an adult @ from Wollara,
(2) an adult 2 from Macdonald Downs, (3) a subadult @ from Wollara. Head
and body, 88, 83, 79. Tail, 59, 64, 52, Pes, 17, 17-5, 16; breadth (across
base of digits 1-5), 3:5, 3:8, —. Manus length, 7:5, 7°5, 7; breadth,
3, 3:5, 3. Ear, 12:5, 14, 12-5,

As shown by Waite’s table and confirmed by the present material, individual
variation is considerable. The dimensions of the topotype, as re-measured by
Troughton, can be exactly matched in the Wollara specimens, but it should be
noted that the values for head and body, tail and pes, in the type are all consider-
ably exceeded, both in Waite’s series and in the present specimens.

Skull Dimensions—Dimensions of the two above females from Wollara and
Macdonald Downs, respectively; both have worn molars. Greatest length, 24-1,
25:4; basal length, 21°3, 22°6; post. zygomatic breadth, 13:3, 14:0; braincase
breadth, 12-0, 11-7; interorbital breadth, 3-5, 3°6; nasals length, 8°2, 8-2; nasals
breadth, 2-3, 2°3; palatal length, 12-5, 14-0; ant. palatal foramina length, 5-3,
5-5; ditto, breadth, 1-3, 1-5; bullae, 4:6, 4°6; upper molar row, 4°2, 4:5.

The Wollara specimens undoubtedly represent the typical race as defined
from Alice Springs, and the agreement of the Macdonald Downs specimen is also
close in essentials. It is noteworthy, however, that this specimen, like that of
Troughton from the Ilart Range, 50 miles south, shows minor anomalies in a
longer ear and probably in colouration as well, and may foreshadow a still more
marked differentiation further to the north-east. From forresti (3, 101), of the
Lake Eyre Basin (to which it is mtch closer than to hermannsburgensis), it is
distinguished by its darker colouration, longer and softer fur, bicolor tail, longer
nasals, and, in the southern part of its range at least, by its shorter ear.

() Waite’s figure is erroneous here, as pointed out by Troughton (13, 290).

223

LAoMYS PEDUNCULATUS Waite 1896

Neither specimens nor recognisable accounts of this interesting rat could be
obtained during 1931-5. A special sojourn was made at Ilamurta on the south
side of the James Range in the hope of obtaining it, but the place is less virgin
than when E. C. Cowle got his two specimens there, and trapping was without
result.

In working out the relationships of the succeeding species, I have re-
examined seven examples; five alcohol preserved and two skulls. Three of these
are of the original series upon which Waite (14, pl. xxv, fig. la-f) founded
pedunculatus, and the others are evidently of the second collection noted by him
two years later (15,117). All are from Alice Springs in the central Macdonnells,
except one skull representing the variety brachyotis which is from Hlamurta.

None of the males show any external vestige of a scrotum; in two females
the mammary nipples are moderately prominent, but neither utert are pregnant.
The stomachs of the five in alcohol have all been skilfully extracted through a
small incision in the lateral abdominal wall—probably by natives, as I have seen
a similar embalming trick practiced by their children upon lizards. The sex ratio
in the combined series. recorded is 8 4 : 3 &.

The following notes are supplementary to Waite’s generally excellent descrip-
tion, and may serve to bring the account of this interesting species into uniformity
with those dealt with in this, series of papers.

External Characters—Four of the alcohol specimens are evidently adult and
are uniform in bulk and dimensions; the fifth is slightly smaller and apparently
subadult. Form rather stout and short-limbed, an appearance heightened by the
profuse pelage and swollen tail, Head large and long muzzled with a well-
developed though not swollen upper lip and moderately prominent rhinarium.
Ears large and broad. Eye apparently prominent in life, Mysticial vibrissae
strongly developed, stout basally and the longer members reaching 65 mm. ; smaller
anterior members white, the rest black with the terminal one-quarter white. The
general aspect of the head in these specimens is not especially anomalous, very
much as in the larger Pseudomys spp.

Manus stout, with conspicuously short digits and small though prominent
pads. Length to 11 mm.; breadth across the base of digits 2-5, 5 mm.; middle
digit, 4 mm. Backs of digits strongly haired and the short, weak claws well
fringed. Palm and undersurface of digits quite naked, Outer carpal consider-
ably exceeding inner both in length and area, and the inner faintly heeled, Inter-
digitals much smaller than carpals, rounded or roughly heart-shaped, and the third
always with a distinct satellite postero-laterad; their relative size somewhat
variable, but in the majority: outer carpal >> inner > third interdigital
> second > or = first. Pes very stout and tapering strongly to heel. Length to
27-5 mmi.; breadth at base of digits 1-5; 6°5 mm.; middle digit to 5°5 min. Pads,
except for lower metatarsal, short, rounded, but well raised. The lower meta-
tarsal with a variable and low posterior prolongation and a somewhat crescentic
or comma shape. The upper metatarsal much smaller and rounded; first and
fourth interdigitals equal, bell-shaped or rounded, with the base heeled, especially
in the fourth, where it is almost a separate satellite pad in some examples. Inter-
digitals, second and third bluntly pyriform, subequal, or the second the larger.
Formula of pedal pads, therefore: inner metatarsal > fourth interdigital = first
> second = third > outer metatarsal,

Tail slightly longer than head and body, as high as 114%. Detailed shape as
given by Waite, and much as in Chaetocercus cristicauda; incrassation variable,
reaching a maximum diameter of 12 mm.; scales ventrally about 12 per cm.
Integument over the swollen portion thick and fibrots but not fragile; below the

224

derma the tail tissues are of normal diameter and apparently devoid of fat (in
alcoholic material).

Posterior mammary nipple 6 mm. from base of clitoris, anterior 8 mm. from
posterior.

Pelage—Rather harsh but quite profuse; mid-dorsally the main pile averages
18 mm. with guard hairs up to 25 mm., but a proportion of them are co-terminous
with the main pile; ventral fur 10 mm. Distribution of colour, in the main as
given by Waite, but in the unfaded examples there is a marked increase in the
richness of the ground colour upon the crown and nape and tail base (clay colour
to cinnamon), and the resulting external colour varies from tawny olive on these
parts to Saccardos umber on the mid-back. The external colour over the whole
of the ventrum is creamy white; basally it is pale plumbeous on thorax and mid-
belly, pure white on gular, sternal and inguinal areas. The dark markings on the
originally buffy manus and pes are still plain in four of the five specimens, The
tail brush reaches 15 mm. beyond tail tip.

Sbull-—The two skulls examined are those used by Waite, and of these his
excellent figures are apparently based upon the larger, the measurements of which
are given below. The brachyotis skull is definitely young and with less worn
molars, but does not differ in any important way; its incisors have been destroyed.
In general structural characters the skull of Laomys pedunculatus is quite similar
to that of Leporillus (as pointed out by Thomas (10, 372) ), and is still closer to
the larger species of Pseudomys s.str., such as higgins, The striking molar
characters of parallelism of laminae and reduction of buccal cusps are shown in
about the same degree by both skulls; in the larger the incisors are stout and
strongly opisthodont.

Flesh Dimensions—The following are the results of the re-measurement of
(1) two adult @ and (2) two adult ¢, from Alice Springs: Head and body, 137,
124: 120, 119. Tail, —, 128; 130, 126. Pes length, 27, 27°5; 27, 27;
breadth at base of digits 2-5, 6:5, 6°5, 6°5, 6. Manus length, 11, 10; 11, 11;
breadth at base of digits 2-5, 5:5, 5-0; 5:0, 5:0. Ear, 23, 22; 23, 20.
Rhinarium to eye, 20, 19; 20, 19. Eye to ear, 12, 11; 13, 11.

Skull Dimensions—Re-measurement of the skulls “F’ and “B” studied by
Waite gives the following figures. “F” represents brachyotis from JMammrta.
Greatest length, 35°0, 36°8; basal length, 28-9, 31-1; zygomatic breadth, 17:0,
17-6; braincase breadth, 15-6, 16-0; interorbital breadth, 5-0, 5-2; nasals, length,
12-6; 13-3; nasals, greatest breadth, 3-5, 3°8; palatal length, 18-1, 19-3; anterior
palatal foramina, length, 7-0, 7°3; ditto, breadth, 1-9, 2-1; bulla, 5-1, 5-3; upper
molar series, 6°6, 6°5.

In his key to the genera of South Australian Muridae, Wood Jones (6, 296)
makes use of the incrassation of the tail as a differential generic character, In
the five examined there is marked variation in this feature and Waite mentions
that the form brachyotis is less incrassated, as is also, apparently, the later species
woodwardi of Thomas. While the dermal thickening is perhaps less subject to
change than the fat deposits of thick tailed marsupials, it seems nevertheless an
uncertain character to use in such a connection. The ear length of Laomys, also
used in this key, is inferior to that of Ps. minnie and Ps. fauritus,

Pseupomys (TueToMys) NANUs Gould
Mus nanus Gould, 1857, P.Z.S. 243; Waite, 1897, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., N.S., 10,
127, pl. vi, fig. 4.a-d
Mastacomys sp., Waite, 1896, Rpts. Horn Expd., II, 406, pl. xxvi, fig. d-f; rbtd,
1897, Proc, Roy. Soc. Vic, N.S., 10, 128
Rattus or Pseudomys sp., Thomas, 1922, A.M.N.H., 10, (9), 550

225

Pseudomys (Thetomys) nanus, Wood Jones, 1925 (in part), Mamms, S. Aust.,
314-315

Pseudomys (Gyomys) deserlor Troughton, 1932, Rec. Aust. Mus., 18, (6), 293

Gyomys desertor, Iredale and Troughton, 1934, Check List Aust. Mamms., 79

Pseudomys (Gyomys) desertor, Brazenor, 1936, Mem, Melb. Mus., 10, 74

Seven specimens examined; two skins and skulls, three in alcohol and two
skulls without skims. Of these, two were obtained in January 1933, about 10 miles
south of Koonapandi on the southern front of the Musgrave Range, in an area
of sandy loam covered by giant spinifex, which was being worked at the time for
the Maala (L. hirsutus). One specimen was dug by a native boy from a shallow
hole, and the other ] trapped some days later with a witchetty larva bait set for
Chaetocercus cristicaudata which was plentiful in the vicinity. Of the others,
one is from near Mount Crombie in the same area as the above, two more are of
the Iforn Expedition material from the localities in and north of the Macdonnell
Ranges, listed by Waite, and two are unlocalised but are probably also from the
Macdonnell Range area.

Little data ig available on reproduction or habits. Of the six which can be
sexed, three are 9, three ¢. All but one are adult or advanced subadults. Two
of the males have prominent testes in conspicuously dark pigmented scrota.
Stomach contents were not examined, but the modification of manus and the
success of the larva bait on traps, suggests that the diet may be partly insecti-
vorous.

It is a species of strikingly distinctive characters, The Pitchenturra name
is Entroota,

External Characters—Form in fully adult examples stout, short-limbed,
powerful. The head with short pointed muzzle and bowed profile. Eye and ear
small; the latter to 14-5 mm. with a breadth of 9-5 mm. across the trough of the
pinna ; rounded in outline and thick in substance; relatively shorter than recorded
for any (ryomys. Mysticial vibrissae weak, the longest ca. 25 mm.

Manus—Details of manus and pes are based chiefly upon a subadult example
in alcohol (figured) in which these features are well preserved; but the condition
in adults is evidently very similar though the parts are stouter and the digits less
attenuated.

Length from base of carpal pads to apex of third digit 7 mm.: width across
base of digits 2-5, 3 mm.; middle digit 4 mm, Claws remarkably long, slender,
sharp, and strongly curved even in the oldest examples. Undersurface of digits
naked and strongly ridged; palms dusky. Pads small but fairly high and well
developed ; carpals plain, the outer slightly larger both in area and length than the
inner ; first interdigital small, rounded; second pyriform, third crudely triangular,
and with a distinct heel or satellite postero-externally, Outer carpal > inner >
second interdigital = third > first,

The modification of the manus, in the great length of the central digits and
their claws, suggests a specialization to a probing and piercing function, though
this is somewhat discounted by a similar if less extreme condition in the pes.

Pes—Tapering to the heel from an interdigital breadth of 4 mm.; third digit
5mm. Undersurface of toes as in manus; claws sharp and long, but less so than
in the manus, Plantar surface irregularly pigmented and mottled, and the pads
made conspicuous by still darker pigmentation. Pads small and weakly developed ;
metatarsals and lateral interdigitals bell-shaped with apex distad: second and
third interdigitals elongate pyriform; fourth with a low satellite; fourth inter-
digital = inner metatarsal > third interdigital = second > outer metatarsal

226

> first interdigital. Tail shorter than head and body; its length from 88 to 93%
of same; mid-dorsal scales 14-15 per cm.

Pelage—The following description is drawn up from field notes upon chloro-
formed animals, and upon a field-made skin, having had no contact with
preservatives.

Fur harsh, coat dense. Mid-dorsally the main pile is about 11 mm, long, the
guard hairs 18 mm. The colour of the basal half is blackish-plumbeous, the broad
subterminal band about clay colour, and the extreme tip of about 1 mm. black.
The guard hairs are black throughout or have the extreme tip pale buff, and the
resulting external colour is a strongly grizzled rich brown near Saccados umber,
but the exact colour, as in all strongly grizzled pelages, depends on the angle of
view. The dorsum of head grizzled like the back, but the ground colour both here
and on the rump slightly richer than mid-dorsally. Ear, both within and with-
out, well covered with cinnamon buff hairs; externally the buff is mixed with a
sprinkling of blackish-brown especially towards the anterior margin, but there is
no localized dark marking on the margin. Eye conspicuously ringed with an area
of rich cinnamon, Sides somewhat paler than the back but still strongly grizzled ;
the transition to the belly gradual. The basal colour on the ventrum for the most
part paler than on the back; the external colour at the margins of the belly similar
to the sides—a lightly grizzled cinnamon buff with the slate basal colour showing
through, but in the centre of the belly there 1s an irregular-shaped area of bright
unmixed cinnamon buff; remainder of ventral surface greyish buff with the basal
colour showing through. Limbs externally like the sides; internally like the
margins of the belly. Carpus and manus cinnamon buff with irregular markings
of blackish-brown covering a large part of both; digits greyish-white. Pes,
generally cinnamon buff but a dark blackish-brown marking on the outer aspect
of tarsus; digits of pes changing sharply to greyish-white, then to black at the
base of the claws. ‘Tail well haired throughout and forming an incipient brush
terminally ; the basal 5 mm. a rich cinnamon on all surfaces; the rest strongly
bicolor, with the dorsal hair jet black and ventral, cinnamon buff fading distally
into greyish-white.

Seasonal and sexual variation apparently nil, but individual variation
appreciable though not great. The orbital ring which is a very conspicuous mark-
ing in the living animal, is present in all the specimens, as are also the dark mark-
ings on manus and pes. However, in one subadult example in alcohol, the curious
midventral chestnut patch is absent, and in another (skinned from alcohol) the
chestnut areas of ear and tail base are grizzled with black.

Skull—Five examined, including specimens C and E figured by Waite. In
gencral aspect and many details of structure and dentition, very unlike the skulls
of Gyourys available to me. It is strongly, even massively, built and densely
ossified, and in general outline and form of braincase and nasals reminiscent of
Mus and Rattus, respectively. The braincase is tapered anteriorly, not globular,
and the intcrorbital space in adults is narrow and tubular, but not bevelled at the
edges. The nasals peculiarly shaped, with a bulbous expansion anteriorly, from
which they narrow rapidly posteriorly, terminating well in advance of the main
labyrinth of the fronto-maxillary suture. The nasals and muzzle short and broad,
and in profile strongly arched down. Jacrymals moderately large and rounded
Zygomatic outline strongly tapered forward, the anterior width only half the
posterior; the individual zygomata stout and strong. In the zygomatic plate the
upper and lower extremities are vertically situated and the edge evenly concave
in two, nearly straight in two others, and terminates above a well-matked
masscteric tubercle. Anterior palatal foramina short and narrow, barely reach-
ing the molars, their maximum width anterior to their mid-point. Parapterygoid
fossa well developed and deep, with a well-marked external wall, in the only adult

227

(figured) in which this region is undamaged, shallower in immature skulls.
Bullae large, broad and much inflated. Upper molars heavy and broad, with the
laminae of M' and M®? feebly cusped and but slightly arched; in worn examples
(as figured), the laminae are almost transverse as in Laomys, A variable but
sometimes well-marked cingulum extends around the posterior and lingual margins
as far as the first lamina, where (in the example figured) a distinct low level cusp
is developed. This is absent in the other four, where, however, rugosities are
sometimes developed on the same site. In the lower molars the supplementary
posterior cusp is present but very reduced. Incisors short, stout and opisthodont.

Flesh Dimensions—The following figures give the dimensions in mm, of
(1) an adult ¢ from Koonapandi, (2) an adult @ from Mount Crombie, and
(3) an adult ¢ unlocalized but probably from the Macdonnell Range. Head and
body, 101, 98, 107; tail, 88, 92, 97; pes, 21:5, 21, 21:5; ear, 14x 9-5, 14-5, 13 ca. ;
rhinarium to eye, 14, —, —; eye to ear, 12, —, —; weight in grammes, 28:5, —, —,

Skull Dimensions—The following are the skull dimensions in mm. of (1) the
above é from Koonapandi, (2) the above @ from Mount Crombie, (3) the
2 skull “E” figured by Waite. Greatest length, 26°6, 27-5, 25-9; basal length,
23°0, 23°6, 21°8; zygomatic breadth, post., 14-3, 14:2, 14-0; braincase breadth,
13-4, 12-9, 12-9; interorbital breadth, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6; nasals length, 9-2, 9-0, 9-1;
nasals breadth, 2-6, 2°8, 25; palate length, 14-1, 13-9, 13-9; anterior palatal fora-
mina, length, 4-4, 4-6, 4-4; ditto, breadth, 1-4, 1-4, 1:3; bulla, 5-5, 5-6, 5-4; upper
molar row, 4:7, 5-0, 4-9,

The material here reviewed undoubtedly represents the species from Central
Australia identified by Waite as Mus nanus Gould and re-named Pseudomys
(Gyomys) desertor by Troughton in 1932 on the grounds of subgeneric uncon-
formity with Thetomys, in which group Thomas had meantime (1910) placed
Gould’s nanus. I am unable at present to follow Troughton in this, however,
both through doubt as to the unconformity with Thetomys and belief in its un-
conformity with Gyomrys.

Under the first head, the following points may be noted: (1) Gould’s plate
of manus illustrates the living Central Australian animal closely both in general
aspect and detail; the discrepancies that exist might reasonably be attributed to
omissions by the artist; the description and dimensions are also in agreement.
(2) Thomas, in 1910 and in subsequent contributions, did not dispute Waite’s
identification of the adult Central Australian specimens, though the immature
were questioned. (3) No description, dimensions, or figures of the skull of nanus
appear to have been published, but Thomas’s definition of the Thetomys skull
(with manus as genotype) agrees with the present material in the majority of
points raised; particularly in the more normal (7.e., Rattus or Mus like) form of
skull, in the frequent concavity of the zygomatic plate and the deeper excavation
of the parapterygoid fossa.

The evidence of the supplementary cusp on M1 seems to me much less con-
elusive of affinity here than is believed. Thomas omits any mention of the
number of skulls examined, and in view of the varying incidence of the cusp
already shown in Notomys, Pseudomys, and even Leggadina, this doubt must con-
tinue until series are examined. It may be recalled that a cingular cusp does occur
on one of the five skulls here examined, and that in the two examples of Thetomys
gouldi which have been figured, it is quite absent from that of Waterhouse,

There is little evidence of regional! variation. Specimens here noted are from
localities about 300 miles south-west of the most southerly of Waite’s series, but
the agreement in all characters is close. Some minor differences in dimensions
are evidently due to condition of material or method of observation ; for example,
the very short ear given by Waite is no doubt due to the older method of measur-

228

ing the back of the pinna, and in the holotype of desertor (a mounted specimen)
to shrinkage. No really large specimens (judged by externals) seem to have been
examined hitherto, though the above holotype skull is as large as any of the
present five,

Brazenor has recorded an interesting extension of the range of this species,
to the Murray River in north-west Victoria, nearly 1,000 miles from the Central
Australian sites.

Levorittus aricatts Gould 1853

Though the types of the species described by Gould were said to be from
South Australia, its position in the fauna of the southern portions of this State
remains very obscure, as records and material alike are entirely lacking. ‘That
the original specimens were from northern mallee or Upper Murray districts and
not from the far north or centre is rendered very probable, partly by the circum-
stance that these latter were at that time for the most part unknown, and partly
from the records of its plentiful occurrence ten years later in the contiguous Vic-
torian mallee, provided by Krefft (7, 64) and Brazenor (2, 77).

The first reference to the presence of Leporillus in Central Australia (exclu-
sive of the Lake Eyre Basin) is provided by Ernest Giles, who, in the summer
of 1872-73 near Mount Peculiar in the north-west Macdonnells, records having
seen nests of “Mus conditor” in a dense mixed miulga scrub. The nests were
15-20 feet in diameter and 4 feet high and contained sticks, up to 3; feet long and
1 inch in diameter (4, 101). A: month or two later, having crossed the Amadeus
Zasin, he again records the presence of these stick nests along the 26° parallel
between Ayers Range and the Cavanagh Range. It was not till 23 years later
that specimens obtained by Mr. Field at Alice Springs enabled Waite (15, 115) to
identify the species as apicalis. In 1903, Basedow recorded a nesi-building rat as
occurring plentifully near his camp 68, south of ithe Mann Range.

Recent interrogation of blacks by Mr. Bowman at Glen Helen in the western
Macdonnells indicates that it may still be extant in the country west of Mount
Peculiar along the north border of the Aboriginal Reserve, and the Pintubis
hereabouts call it Tweealpi, and the west Aruntas Turulpa, But over the greater
part of the country traversed by Giles between the Macdonnells and the 26°
parallel and as far west as the West Australian border, it now seems to have
become rare to vanishing point, and though the blacks are well acquainted with
it still and give consistent descriptions of it, I failed to secure specimens on any
of the routes personally travelled during 1931-35. Several white residents, how-
ever, particularly A. Brumby of Ernabella, who had travelled much along the
southern part of the Mann and Tomkinson, assured me that some of the colonies
mentioned by Basedow and Giles south of the Mann and Musgrave, were still
extant, and in the winter of 1933 while conducting Dr. Cecil Hackett and Mr.
N. B. Tindale through the area, he found a nest under a kurrajong on lime-
stone country eight miles west of Mount Crombie. From this two specimens
were secured by the time-honoured method of firing the pile and allowing the
natives’ dogs to sieze the inmates as they fled.

As pointed out in discussing the disappearance of L conditor from the Lake
Eyre Basin, the usual explanation given by settlers of the disturbing cffect of
introducing stock into the rats’ habitat, is quite insufficient to account for the facts.
In the western centre the argument fails altogether, since the chief known former
habitats of apicalis have never been stocked. On the other hand, a sparse but
active hunting aboriginal population persisted here much later than in the Lake
Eyre Basin, and the stubbornly colonial and gregarious habits of the rats render
them very vulnerable to the attack by fire; there seems little doubt that the native
has been the chief factor in their disappearance.

229

All specimens of Leporillus from the western centre so far examined have
proved to be apicalis, and the most westerly record for covditor in these latitudes
is the west shore of Lake Eyre, 450 miles east-south-east of the locus of the
specimens here described. It is quite possible, however, that formerly both
species occurred in the central areas; overlappitig of their former habitats in
Victoria and New South Wales seems well attested.

Both Mount Crombie specimens were adult non-pregnant females, with
mammary nipples strongly contracted. The stomach contents were voluminous
but little characteristic; for the most part finely comminuted as in such small
species as Notomys alexis and quite without recognisable vegetable fragments or
sand, The rich oily seeds of the local kurrajong (Brachychiton Gregorii) no
doubt contribute to the diet. The dung pellets are short and obtusely oval; the
largest about 7x 5 mm. No external parasites were taken upon the preserved
material.

External Characters—The only alcohol prescrved material of other species
available for comparison is the series bred in captivity from Lake Eyre Basin
stock which I have already reviewed (3, 111). Compared with these, the present
form is light and slender limbed. Head relatively longer and narrower muzzled
and profile straight. On preservation the head has “set” upon the vertebral
column almost at right angles and the ears are pricked, faithfully reproducing the
characteristic “alert” stance apparently adopted by all the species. Ear apparently
of much the same relative size as in conditor; longer than in jonesi; mysticial
vibrissae strongly developed, as stout as in the much larger conditor and much
longer; to 83 mm.; black with a long attenuated white tip.

Manus—Length to 16 mm.; breadth to 6°5; third digit to 6°5. Pads rela-
tively smaller than in conditor of the Lake Eyre Basin and their shape more
angular and puckered, though this may be due to plasmolysis, Outer carpal larger
than inner, both in length and area; first and third interdigitals crudely triangular
and both with heels or satellites; sccond crudely tetrahedral. Outer carpal
> inner > second interdigital > third = first.

Pes—Much lighter than in conditor of the Lake Eyre Basin and with pads
simpler, especially the lateral interdigitals which are less hollowed out at the base ;
differing in detail on the two sides of the same specimen. The inner metatarsal
on the right side crescent-shaped with the concavity laterad; on the left side much
straighter though of the same overall length. The outer metatarsal much smaller,
evenly oval; second and third interdigitals irregularly oval, first and fourth with
well marked postero-laterad heels and their completed outline bell-shaped.
Fourth interdigital > second = third > first > inner metatarsal > outer meta-
tarsal.

Tail decidedly longer than the head and body (1:1°2); rather thinly haired
anteriorly ; scales showing through plainly, 10 per cm.

Mammary nipples very posterior and close together; posterior 9 mm. from
base of clitoris; anterior 9 mm. from posterior.

Pelage—In dealing with the colouration of the Alice Springs material, Waite
limited himself to a reference ta Gould’s plate (5, pl. ii, 3), with which he found
agreement. Brazenor (2) does not mention the preservation of his material nor
its location, and Troughton’s notes (12, 32) are based on old faded mounted
specimens. The following description is drawn up from the skin of the larger of
the Mount Crombie specimens made up after six weeks in alcohol, and it shows
minor discrepancies with each of the foregoing, the importance of which it is
difficult to assess at present.

Fur comparatively soft and dense and of even texture; the two constituent
piles differing in length and colour, but not greatly in the thickness of the hairs.

230

Mid-dorsally the shorter is 18 mm. long, with its basal two-thirds dark plumbeous
followed by a subterminal band of warm buff, and the extremity dark brownish
black. The second pile reaches 23 mm. (though a proportion is scarcely longer
than the first) and is similarly plumbeous at the basal two-thirds and the rest
shining black. The resulting external colour from crown to tail base is a strongly
grizzled brown near Prout’s Brown, the general effect browner and less yellow
than in conditor, and still more so than in jonesi, On the sides the subterminal
colour fades to ivory and the black overlay is reduced, leading to a much paler
and greyer grizzle. Belly fur 14 mm.; creamy white to base; junction with sides
sharp. Dorsum of head like back or with a slightly richer ground colour; muzzle
and cheeks like the sides with a rather conspicuous paler patch infraorbitally.
Chin and throat like belly. Ears very sparsely covered within with greyish-white,
externally well and evenly haired with a fine grizzle of near black and silvery-grey
darkening only very slightly at the anterior margin; the ear back as a whole near
fuscous and much colder and darker and more contrasted with the crown than in
cither conditor or jonesi, Outer aspect of fore limb like sides but with a wash of
pale buff sharply interrupted by a narrow oblique grizzled black marking extend-
ing quite across the carpus; manus and digits white. Hind limb similar but with
a browner wash; a grizzled black marking extending irregularly right round the
tarsus, but not produced along sides of pes, which is quite white. Tail sparsely.
haired proximally, but lengthening distally and culminating in a pure white pencil
extending 25 mm. beyond the terminal vertebra. Dorsum of tail blackish-brown
for three-quarters of its length, changing abruptly to white without inter-
mingling; lateral and ventral surfaces white throughout.

Skull and Dentition—Two skulls have been examined; the larger of the
Mann Range specimens and one from Alice Springs figured by Waite. The
former is considerably more aged, and is narrower, has narrower anterior palatal
foramina and lighter molars, but the agreement in diagnostic features is close.
The general structural characters of the apicalis skull are close to those of jonest
and conditor, the slight but apparently valid differences being a narrower brain-
case and posterior zygomatic width, narrower lacrymals, deeper muzzle, a nearly
vertical and straight zygomatic plate, and anterior palatine foramina which are
slightly longer than the molar rows. The lengths of molars and nasals are also
lower than have been recorded for other species, and the bullae are smaller. The
interorbilal condition is not appreciably different. Waite’s reference to horn
coloured molars is evidently meant to apply to incisors, His (15, pl. v, fig. 1 a-c)
figure does not agree very well with the skull on which it is based; the outlines of
nasals and zygomata are appreciably different and the bullae are less globular.

Flesh Dimensions—The following are the dimensions of the two Mount
Crombie specimens, both adult @ : head and body, 184, 175; tail, 217, 238; pes
length, 43, 44; pes, breadth across base of digits 1-5, 9, —; manus, 16, —; manus,
breadth across base of digits 2-5, 6°5, —; ear, 33, 32; rhinarium to eye, 21, 22;
eye to ear, 16, 15.

Skull Dimensions—The following are the dimensions of the skull from Alice
Springs figured by Waite (re-measured), and that of the larger Mount
Crombie 9: greatest length, 40-5, 43-2; basal length, 35:1, 36°2; zygomatic
breadth, 20°4, 20°1; braincase, breadth, 17:4, 17-9; interorbital width, 5-1, 5-2;
nasals, length, 15-5, 15-4; nasals, breadth, 4°5, 4-6; palatal length, 21-3, 21°8;
ant. palatal foramina, length, 8-0, 8-0; ditto, breadth, 3-3, 3-0; bullae, 7-1, 6°8;
upper molar series, 7-5, 7°7.

While easily distinguished from. conditor and jonest by its much longer and
pencilled tail, by its pure white belly fur and somewhat lighter build, all three
species are evidently very closely allied; one of the above specimens is larger than

231

has previously been recorded and still further closes the gap in dimensions
between the species; attention may be drawn to the misprint in Brazenor’s dimen-
sions. The specimens here described show certain minor discrepancies with exist-
ing accounts, which are difficult to interpret owing to the widely different condition
of the material on which they have been founded, As compared with Gould’s
plate of the types, the Mount Crombie examples are more grizzled dorsally, their
ear backs and tail tops are definitely darker and the tail much better brushed.
The colouration is definitely darker and more grizzled than the specimens of
conditor and jonesi available to me, and not lighter as given by Troughton (Joc.
cit.), and the dorsal colour is browner than the tawny olive given by Brazenbr.

Brazenor (loc. cit.), who alone seems to have examined both central and
south-eastern specimens, considers them identical.

HypROMYS CHRYSOGASTER Geoffrey

No specimens of this rat could be obtained, and so far as numerous enquiries
show, it is unknown in the western centre by settlers and natives alike. Songer’s
(8, 9) record, quoted by B. Spencer, applies to the Lake Eyre Basin where the
prevailing form has south-eastern affinities, as I have elsewhere shown (3, 114).

INTRODUCED SPECIES

OFf exotic murids, Mus musculus scems to be the only representative. It was
common, though much less so than in the Lake Eyre Basin and its numbers have
never yet, [ think, assumed plague proportions in the western centre. Those taken
were nearly all of the dark-bellied greyish, urban types and were probably recent
intruders. Several examples examined had entirely unnotched incisors as in
Pseudomys, and rapid distinction from the duller examples of Ps. hermanns-
burgensis was not always easy.

REFERENCES CITED

Brazenor, C. W. 1936 Mem. Nat. Mus., Melb., (9)
Brazenor, C. W. 1936 Ibid, (10)

Frxniayson, H. H. 1939 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (1)
Gites, E. 1876 Australia Twice Traversed, (1)
GouLp, J. 1863 Mammals of Aust., (3)

Jones, F. Woop 1925 Mammals of S. Aust.

Krerrt, G. 1864 Cat. Mammals Aust. Mus.

Soncer, E. 1884 Amer. Nat., (18), 9

10 Tuomas, O. 1909 A.M.N.H., 8, (3)

11 ‘Tomas, O. 1910 Jbid., 8, (6)

12 Trouciuton, E. C. G. 1923 Rec, Aust. Mus., 14, (1)
13° Troucuton, E. C. G. 1932 Jbid, 18, (6)

14 Wairr, E. R. 1896 Repts. Horn. Exped., 2

15 Warre, E. R. 1897 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., (10)

OANA uBR WN

232

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

Plate X

A: Right pes of Pseudomys (Leggadina) hermannsburgensis cf. var. bolamt, Imm. @.
Erliwunyawunya. Musgrave Ranges. x 4-0. B: Right pes of Ps. (Leggadina) hermanns-
burgensis typicus, Adult g. Ayers Rock. x 4-0. C: Right pes of Ps. (Leggadina). waitet.
Adult @. Wollara. x 4-0. D: Right pes of Ps. (Thetomys) anus. Subadult 9. Koona-
pandi. x 3-3. E: Right pes of Laomys pedunculatus, Adult ¢@. Alice Springs. x 2:5.
F: Right pes of Leporillus apicalis. Adult 9. Mount Crombie. x 1-7. G. Right manus of
Ps. (Leggadina) hermannsburgensis typicus. Adult Q. Ernabella, Musgrave Range. x 5-7.
H: Right manus of Ps. (Leggadina) waitet. Adult @. McDonald Downs. x 4-8. I: Right
manus of Ps, (Thetomys) nanus. Subadult ¢. Koonapandi. x 5-5. J: Right manus of
Laomys pedunculaius. Adult Q. Alice Springs. x 3-0. K: Left manus of Leporillus apicalis.
Adult 9. Mount Crembie. x 2-3.

Plate XI

A and B: Dorsal aspects of skulls of an aged and adult female, respectively, of
Ps. (Leygadina) hermannsburgensis typicus, both from Wollara; to show the extremes of
variation in braincase development and zygomatic outline, x 3-2 and 3-4. C: Dorsal aspect
cf skull of Ps. (Thetomys) nanus. Adult ¢. Koonapandi. x 2-8. D: Lateral aspect of
right manus of same. Subadult 9. Koonapandi. x llca. (The digits are artificially flexed
for purposes of illustration.) EE: Palatal aspect of B. x 3-4. F: Palatal aspect of C.
x 2-7.

PhLate XIT

A: Dorsal aspect of skull of Ps. (Leggadina) waitei. Adult 9. Wollara, x 2-9. B:
Dorsal aspect of skull of Laomrys pedunculatus, Adult ¢. Alice Springs. x 1-9. C: Dorsal
aspect of skull of Leporillus apicalis. Adult @. Mount Crombie. x 1-6. D: Palatal aspect
of A. x 2-9. E: Palatal aspect of B. x 1-9 F: Palatal aspect of C. x 1-6.

PLate XIII

A: Lateral aspect of skull of Leporillus apicalis. Adult 9. Mount Crombie. x 1-6.
B: Lateral aspect of skull of Laomys pedunculatus, Adult g. Alice Springs. x 1-9.
C: Lateral aspect of skull of Ps. (Leggadina) waitei, Adult 9. Wollara, x 2-9. D:
Lateral aspect of skull of Ps. (Leggadina) hermannsburgensis typicus. Adult °9. Wollara.
x 3-4, E: Lateral aspect of Ps. (Thetomys) nanus. Adult g. Koonapandi, x 2-8. F:
Right molars of same. Adult 4. Koonapandi. x8+2. G: Right molars of Laomys peduncu-
latus. Adult g@. Alice Springs. x 5-7. H: Right molars of Ps. (Leggadina) wattei.
Adult 9. Wollara. x 10-0. I: Right manus of Ps. (Leggadina) hermannsburgensis
typicus. Subadult. x 10-5.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1941 Vol. 65, Plate X

Photo by H. H. Finlayson

‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1941 Vol. 65, Plate X1

Photo by H. H. Finlayson

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1941 Vol. 65, Plate XII

Photo by H. H. Finlayson

Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 1041 \ Vol. 65, Plate XIII

Photo by H. H. Finlayson

NATIVE SONGS OF THE SOUTH-EAST OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA PART II

By NORMAN B. TINDALE

Summary

Nineteen songs obtained from Milerum of the Tanganekald tribe were described in a previous paper
in these Transactions (61, 107-120, 1937). Further work has since been carried out with the same
informant, whose recent death, at the age of approximately seventy-two years, removes one of the
last links with the old life of the people of the South-East of South Australia

233

NATIVE SONGS OF THE SOUTH-EAST OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA
PART II

By Norman B, TINDALE
[Read 10 July 1941]

Nineteen songs obtained from Milerum of the Tanganekald, tribe were
described in a previous paper in these Transactions (61, 107-120, 1937). Further
work has since been carried out with the same informant, whose recent death,
at the age of approximately seventy-two vears, removes one of the last links with
the ole life of the people of the South-East of South Australia,

Electrical recording devices having become more readily available in South
Australia, six double-sided discs were prepared between November, 1937, and
January, 1938. The present paper presents the contents of five of these; the
sixth forms part of a series belonging to the Crow Legend, which is being
separately prepared. Brief notes are included concerning fresh recordings of
nine of the songs mentioned in Part I.

‘The fifteen new songs belong to tribes between Rapid Bay and Mount
Gambier. Many belong to the Buandik [’Ruyanditj] tribe, but in one the subject
matter belongs to Rapid Bay among a southern horde of the Kaurna [‘Kaurna|
tribe, although its language is that of the Ramindjeri [’Ra:mindjeri] of Encounter
Bay. Two are of post-European origin, one describing the opening of Murray
Bridge to railway traffic (about 1886) and the other recording the making of a
road at Guichen Bay (Robe) in the south-east of our State, about 1865.

Several tribes are mentioned, their boundaries being defined in a paper in
the previous volume of these Proceedings; where the phonetic system used is
also set out.

Tue older (pre-European) songs of the present series are associated with:
1, sickness and death; 2, hunting; 3, mythological and totemic stories; 4, magic;
5, personal experiences and adventures; 6, drama, They touch on many aspects
of native life and throw much light on the culture of the vanished folk, memory
of whom has lingered only in the minds of the few survivors of the aborigines.

Disc. No. 1, entitled “Clarence Long Series, 9 November 1937.”

A Dream SonG

y’gaw’ercila Samburayal d’oropoalni ‘bunareilar ‘’winmayal ‘werciy’galowei
‘wudkeilin d’oropoalnal ’mantalananar ’kulkeilin ’arupulnal ’yonan’galowei.

This Tanganekald song has been described as No. 12 of the first series
(loc. cit. 109); there are some variations in the transcriptions of this rendering,
while |’tambaryga!l] and [toropoalna] were also given as variants of words in
the song.

Sone anout DratH
’Mangei ‘nar ’galmur ‘jere’gara :nal ‘gonayuna ‘kara’gar
Away-in-the-west he-made-it listen: a-big-noise

’meiwurina :nd
set-your-mind-on-it (beware)

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (2), 19 December 1941

234

repeat these two lines then:

"Nukanji “’barnd *bikul’anal *minjuygul
around-and-behind look-back minjungulum
{ Thinking about the noise)
"na :’ramang ’maldawul’11 :1
what-are-they-going-to-do ancestral being

repeat second verse. At end of the song all the men make, in unison, an explo-
sive bo! sound.

A Marntandi (McGrath Flat) clan song, sung in Tanganekald.

This song is generally sung when people are worried and ill-at-ease, or when
anyone is sick. Men and women congregate together near the camp, in the vicinity
of which two rather long and heavy wooden spears have been placed up-right in
the ground. These special spears [parmuri] are made of Callitris wood and
decorated with tufts of emu feathers, Such a spear is in the South Australian
Museum (registered No. A 20696). Men and women then sing this song in
unison. Milerum first heard it when, as a little boy, he sat quietly in camp, while
people congregated and sang it.

The meaning is: “Away in the west he makes it; listen to the great loud
noise; look around about you; what is the maldawuli going to do?”

The [maldawuli] or ancestral being referred to is [’Kulda], who in native
legend is believed to have come out of Ju:kt or the Southern Cross (Joc. cit.,
p. 112). Although we have no knowledge of the origin of this song, there is a
possibility that it might be based on the recollections agjiongst the natives of very
early casual visits to the Australian mainland by European vessels seeking a way
to the China Seas. The appearance of the strange “being” from the south, the
reference to the great noises, and the explosive sounds made at the end of the song,
tend to suggest a sailing ship whose arrival or departure from the coast was
signalled by gun-fire. In the original legend about Kulda, his appearance was
stated to have been followed by sickness and death, and the early smallpox
epidemic which swept through the Murray River districts of South Australia in
the early years of the nineteenth century was also attributed to this evil being.

Sonc or Murray Bripce

Berntein *geitjad *munak’ :alni unakunads ‘jer
“It’s-coming” bridge high-up-one equally-high
(the railway train)
Tarewele’ma :yk ta:’rilen we’reinday Lenteilin
the cliffs opposite wonderfully made like Long Island
Murray Bridge township (a place name)
ta:‘rilen ‘minindjun ‘ditju:ndu
wonderfully strong solid

This may be rendered as: “The train is coming to the great high bridge; as
tall as Tarawalamank; wonderfully made like Long Island; strong and solid like
Lanteilin.”

This song was made between the time of the building of the first Murray
Bridge in 1876 and the laying of the railway line in 1886, It was:one of the last
songs made by the Tanganekald people; its author was an aborigine named
George Spender. Sung at a dance, it contrasts the native crossing with the white
man’s bridge.

232

Sone or NjENGARI [’njeygari]

’Min’arta :ngalau ‘nareilkundayal ‘kundarayalilau "jingarayal
Glad (start dancing) dance make-a-level-place dust rises
‘yeitambara ‘yalau *Watwardok

set-the-nets around ‘Watbardok (a fishing place north of Cape Jervis)
*yandei’ wat ’(h)elda :nji ’wa:wayk "jan’a :win.

tide-rising go-up go-up go-back,

Rejoice, clear the place for dancing; make a level place—see the dust fly!
we set the nets around at Watbardok; the tide rises, we climb the cliffs again.

In former times an ancestral being, now the star called [Njeygari], a great
man of the Kaurna Tribe, assisted by his companions, made a dancing place on
the coast at [’Watbardok]. A relative of [’Tji:rbuki] (vide Tindale and Mount-
ford 1936, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, 500), he was of happy disposition and was so
pleased with the place after it was clear of all bushes and rubbish, that he made
a dance. Today this ancestral place is covered by the sea, and even in recent
aboriginal times it was a famous netting beach. The smooth sand enabled the nets
to be successfully drawn during the first hour of the rising tide. To engage in
fishing one climbed down the cliffs. The fish were taken, and as the tide rose
men climbed the cliffs again or risked being cut off ‘by the rising waters, At
[’Jana:wig] (lit., turn back) people walking along the shore had to detour ; thus
the place obtained its name. [/Watbardok] is on the coast between Sections 60
and 207, Hundred of Yankalilla, close to the so-called cave of ‘Tjirbuki, which
opens on the cliff a little to the north of it.

Dise. No. 2 (22 November 1937).

Storm Sone (loc, cit., 110)

Words spoken, then sung. Milerum was a little uneasy with his voice and
recording was abandoned until 25 November, when this song was repeated much
more successfully.

Mrimikxur or Buttroarer Sone (loc. cit., 111)
This was sung as two rounds. The spoken words were not recorded.

On the reverse side,
TANGANEKALD Dreatu FEAR SonG (loc, cit., 111)

In singing this song, Milerum was uneasy and somewhat uncertain, as was
indicated by his subsequent comment: “TI nearly went out of tune.”

Sone to Force a Winow to RE-MARRyY (loc. cif., 117)
This was sung through and recorded twice, the second time with hand
clapping; the conclusion seems rather uncertain, but Milerum claimed that it was
correctly executed.

TANGANEKALD GrowLinG Sone (loc. cit., 117)
Milerum was well satisfied with his new rendering of this song,

Disc. No, 3—“Clarence Long Series, Coorong, South Australia, 30 Novem-
ber 1937.”
TANGANEKALD SonG About Ncurunperr (loc. cif., 115)
In singing this Milerum used the forms [Toyga’reinar] and [’Tanga’reinar]
for the word previously transcribed as [Thuyareinar ].

236

TaTIARA SONG CONDEMNING TILE TANGANEKALD (loc, cit., 117)

At the conclusion of the mew rendering of this song, accompanied by
boomerang clapping, he shouted vigorously [ne’rokan], t.¢., die!

MEINTANGK ANSWER TO THE TATIARA Sona (loc. cit., 118)
TANGANEKALD SonG wilicH Empitrerep THE QUARREL (loc. cit., 119)

Disc. No. 4—Same series. Songs of the Buandik [’Buyanditj] Tribe, Robe,
South Australia, 2 December 1937,

Sonc oF GUICHEN Bay

‘Endjeligatjun ygarum gamun ‘ga:wun (repeat) *mola’pan
Place-name-at stand-and-look-around (imo :lakinju,
to turn when
walking)
Wingau ‘gaduba “cutjubel.
Place-name moving towards Guichen Bay.

“Standing on the hill (at Watul, swamps on Section 472, Hundred of Water-
house), we see the winding track. To walk around to Wingau we head for
Kutjubei.”

This song of the Post-European period tells of the old road to Guichen Bay
(Kutjubei, as pronounced in this song) and was originated by Patpul, of the
[’Buyanditj| Tribe, whose home was at Robe.

The old native track from Watul to Wingau wandered through the sandhills
and along the beach. White men cut a new road to the Salt Lakes where it
turned west towards Wingau. The construction was authorised in 1865, and this
dates the song as in the Jate ’60’s. [’Wingau] is the old native camp within the
present township site of Robe, beside the fresh water lake. The Tanganekald
called the place Windau. [’Kutjubei] = [’Kutjubeia] (native acceptance of
Baudin’s name, Guichen Bay) was applied by the natives to the vicinity of the
salt lake near Section 299, Hundred of Waterhouse, its former name having been
lost or discarded. Incidentally, [Pa’ram:eja] or [’Purami’ja] was the name for
the Bluff at Robe, the former camp was where the old jail stands.

Sone or BAaupin RocKks

*Tuyuna "pial ‘bial ‘yawurinje
Look-out (from Kripangulu, Place name “big island”
near Mount Benson ) (Baudin Rocks)
‘gari bu:l (h)’edno ’garibi’o : yi *maiha.
a few long steps etenoija and stepping out.
(emu strides ) full of rage (gari = emu)

The meaning of this song, word for word, was obscure to Milerum. It has
only a few words in it but “a great deal of meaning.” It is connected with a
legend of the “Emu and the Native Companion.” The song tells how the emu
people were trapped on Baudin Rocks by a sudden rise of water, supposed to have
been caused by the native companions, who watched from Kripangulu and saw
the enraged male parading about (“stepping out”) in a display of anger at the’
trick played on him by his traditional enemies.

A Buncanpity] Mimikur (oR BULLROARER) SonG FROM Mount GAMBIER
‘Matujeire ‘wat paiju bayara ina: ‘anjay ‘koinja
A woman’s name came home at last

237

‘mor ‘wanunjup ‘je:garam ‘munungcin
they’ve come together woman departs from camp (seen by husband)
’weijan’gori dolamboinja anjenkoinja re peat. Ne’rokan!
weijankar refuses come back to her home Die!

This song has come down from the remote past. It tells of an ancestral
woman, Matujeire, who abandoned her husband and went with another man; it
is a bullroarer-magic-song, sung whenever there is any trouble between man and
wife which may lead to boning and revengeful killings. Matujeire left her hus-
band; she went with another man; her friends said, “Carry on, we will keep vour
husband’s anger away.” A quarrel developed. Other friends said, “Listen to
your husband, you have a good man, don’t heed those bad men friends of yours.”
The incidents of this traditional event were enacted as a dance, made topical by
being applied to new instances, “pieces” being put in to “make it fit.” “Old songs
properly used mean a great deal” and make the new troubles “come right.” In
singing the song Milerum ended it with the appropriate expression of con-
demnation.

As remarked previously, the force of community control was strongly
fortified by the use of song and the power of ridicule in them.

A Buncanpity HuntTer’s Sone rrom MILLICENT

‘Wialpunul ’gurinje ‘galpe’mun “wareindji

Rise-early good hope crawling thighs and knees
full of hope crawling on knees

’buri:n bar’elinje danhalawan

could not get near something follows

(bad spirit or bad will of someone on camp)
’evalajeir.
pick up (weapons, galajera) for a quarrel.

“Early morning, rising full of hope for game, crawling on knees all in vain;
evil wishes are following; pick wp weapons for a quarrel.”

An old song, first heard by Milerun when a youth. It was sung by old men
of Reedy Creek, who obtained it from the Bunganditj people at a gathering at
Millicent. It describes how early in the morning a man goes out hunting full of
hope; he smokes himself over a fire to remove scent and evil influences, prepares
and smokes his weapons also; with sufficient weapons to ensure good fortune,
he sets out in high spirits ; unable to come near game even by crawling, he returns
to his camp in quarrelsome mood. With its staccato and impressionistic record-
ing of the changing moods of a hunter’s day, this native song reveals a mature, if
primitive, style.

This hunting song was followed by an associated dancing song:

BuncAnpiry DANCING SONG From MULLICEN'T

‘Wirayin) ‘’gorta *"Moro’bia Moto:n
What’s wrong? Vl fight him ! come here
(says the wife) (says the man to himself)

‘golen’en *wataware “inama.: *“denmau

man’s name everyone watches comes out

(the other man)

lanenje ’warai ’warai denbula ’wayan ’warai ’warai
rush together what’s the trouble about (they ask)

238

*denbula wananji bulinji.
what’s the trouble dust.
(others come to fight)

“What’s wrong?” asks the wife. “Ul fight him!’ he mutters. “Come here,
Golangolan.” Everyone watches; out they step; they rush together. “What's
the trouble?” they cry. All rush to fight. “What’s the trouble?” Dust flies.

The song describes how the unsuccessful hunter vents his spleen and causes
a general fight among those in camp; some rush into the scrimmage even before
they have learned its origin.

BuncAnpiTJ Emu Sone rrom Mount BENSON

(one of a type called [’Wakan’yadeik] ([menpurunu] of the Tanganekald),
sung and acted, like a staged play).

*Wanaja :ndjelay ‘waiga’ waren ’gal'gol repeat
Early-morning I cannot travel far eggs
(says emu female) (within me)
ligamun yidia ‘gindawiri :y ’gatwen
beware eagle don’t go far away be careful
’warejaindjela ‘waiga’ waren ‘guluir ‘ligamun ‘pidia
early morning not travel far eggs beware eagle
(gol gol)
‘vandawerely] ‘9a twen.
dan’t go far be careful.

This describes incidents in the “Story of the Emu,” an important
myth of the Buandik people. Two emus were walking along the Mount Benson
Range, The female was heavy with eggs.

“We will go to that range and make a nest,” she said. It was a rather open
place with a few mallee trees and bushes. From the next range she saw a place
with bracken ferns [’mol:ari], “That will do.” At the same moment she saw
an eagle’s nest above it in the trees.

“Tle will not harm us,” they said to themselves, and made their nest. One
egg came. The male eagle swooped down and looked at the emu woman. The
other eggs came. She used to feed all day while the male sat on the nest. He
went out at night to feed, returning by devious tracks to the nest at dawn, With
the young ones came trouble; the emus were kept busy defending their young
from the eagle. The song is one of warning. “Women, beware of the ‘eagle’
who comes to look at you.”

Dise No. 5—‘Tanganekald Tribe, Coorong, South Australia, 21 December
1937.”
A Sreconp BuncaANDIT] Emu SONG, CALLED KUPABINA, FROM Biscuit Frat

‘wana “jandjclay ‘waigawaren ’golu:r ain ‘dakinjin
Early-in-the-morning eges look-around-quickly
(hear noise of eagles)
‘jira dumani "girango inj jondinj “banar ’bayar
start-up rush-in fighting jumps determined
(to guard) (eagle)
yawel weir ‘dakinjin ‘jira
return to attack look around start up (take up
(giving no peace ) (as if surprised) position of guard

when surprised )

239

dumanji "nirango:n].
rush in fighting.

This is a short song; sung through once. Sticks were used to beat time. It
ends with the [wi! wo!] flourish common to several other songs.

3oth male and female emu had to share in the defence of their young; the
female broke her rule of staying away and feeding all day, for both birds had to
protect their young ones against the onslaughts (“jumps”) of the eagle. The
emu man who sang it was Patpul’s brother (sociological) who was also a brother
to Wati, the hero of several songs mentioned in Part I of this series.

A Tuirp BuNGANDITJ Emu Sona, CALLED WIRAWIRUK

Bapindj garapun mayin yidi bapindj garapun
mother emu hovering eagle mother emu
warawara garibun moribi yawuru.

legs emu defeated.

(legs fighting)
Sticks were used to beat the time; the tempo slows towards the end and
terminates with the wi! wo! flourish.

When an emu falls down on its back and strikes out with its feet it can hit
with considerable effect. The emu man who made this song watched one in
combat with the eagle and sang this song about the adventure.

“The mother emu and the hovering eagle; the mother emu and her fighting
legs; the emu has defeated it.”

These three emu songs (Discs 4 and 5) form a suite which were sung at an
emu dance. The names applied to them have the following significance and the
same terms are, in general, used for the three recognised types of dancing song:

[’kupabina]—imitative dances in which the performers simulate the movements
of the emu, prancing about, growling and making noises; the song is a
general accompaniment.

[’wakan’nadeik|—the [’menpurumi] of Tanganekald, also called [’yuluyulu-
kana:mb] because each part of the song is enacted. In the present case
they dramatise the behaviour of the emu and the eagle when in opposition.

|’wire’wiruk]—the songs of the true dancing climax; the men stand in one
place with legs outspread, vibrate their legs and give loud grunts as the
chorus of women chant the [’wire’wirtuk].

MarpitjALi TRisE SONG OF WANANGAN, FROM WIRRIGA

’Gumba’wanayg ‘bere ’gumba’ wanayge zbere’il (repeat)
(meaning uncertain )

‘jurupe’na ’wiri’ para *peire’gara (4) ‘wanangan

foralittle while from Wirriga for always man’s name

*Wirl’gara.
from Wirriga.
In the [Kaygarabalak] language. It is sung through twice; the second time
is merely a repeat to fill this disc.
{‘Wanayngan ’Wirigar], a man of Wirriga Siding (ii. Wanangan, of
Wirigar), a place near Bordertown in the Marditjali (Kangarabalak) country,

240

left his home intending to stay for a short while on the Coorong at Woods Well
to try and obtain a wife, eventually marrying a father’s sister of Milerum. He
yas old when Milerum was a boy and never went back to his own country. There
were many quarrels with his people because of his departure and because the
taking of the Tanganekald woman as wife upset arrangements for marriages in
his own country. Many “strong words” were said about him and there was a
“native court case.” The Tanganekald people would not allow their woman to
be taken inland because of the trouble her marriage had aroused.

Wanangan sang this song whenever he was asked why he had left his own
country. From his father’s sister’s husband Milerum learned this and several
other songs. The refrain is probably old, having been sting in the “wild” times
before the Coorong was settled by white people.

Reverse side.

CHALLENGE SONG OF THE PoT-BELLIED Dwarr, BANGUNI

giltji agunum bunun’a :ndu ‘neitje’nampen
No-fear come-on preparing for action
(quivering his body)
‘yeitje nampen ’yorol uru ‘yanin’au
“Look at him! he is clever”

(An onlooker says, “Look at him (dodging those
spears), he is good!)

‘junel ‘gana (in) bitj ‘vamp ’wutinkari ‘ma :k

move on they say daring frog jaw
(taking chances)

*ban’gunul ai ‘ta :wen.

pot-belly it weighs him down.

It belongs to the [’Ponora:rpuli] clan of Milang, one of the clans of the
[Warki] or [Warkend] tribe on the eastern side of Lake Alexandrina, Their
language is scarcely more than a dialect of | Jarilde’kald].

RBanguni, swollen belly, was a dwarf with distended abdomen and heavy
hanging jaw. ‘This song is attributed to Banguni and his brother (“men from the
same fire’). The incident it records happened when Banguni challenged a group
of [’Ra:mindjeri] men, from Goolwa, his [wurek:end], who came to quarrel
with hin because “of woman trouble.” He had married a Ramindjeri woman
named [’Regul’dindjeri] and had severely punished and injured her in a quarrel,
and they wished to retaliate.

Milerum’s explanation was: “I have no fear, I don’t care for them,’ said
Banguni, and prepared for action, “cutting capers” and “rolling himself up,”
ready for a spear-fight. His actions made them frightened; he stood still while
they threw spears at him, never flinching although they came right up to him (“e.,
to within about ten yards). “Look at him, isn’t he good at dodging them,”
shouted the onlookers. His enemies shouted, “Move on!—look out for side
shots!” and tried to trick him by making him glance aside. They shouted in
derision, trying to break his defence. ‘Look at him, the frog-mouthed man with
the pot-belly, it weighs him down.”

Banguni proved that he was a man who could not be caught with spears ;
afterwards he and his brothers made this song about the incident. He lived to
be a very old man and sang the song of his own prowess until his death, about
the year 1915.

241

KEININDJERT ASKS FOR His Broruer’s Winow—aA RAMINDJERI SONG
FROM ENCOUNTER BAy

’Moyein a: wereindey (ai) *nalai’keren
Wondering what is holding her of Nalaikorombar
‘kalde “einayand *meiyjga: "jorol’ jot ‘to Sel
talk says inside me influences
(somone else’s word is persuading
her)
‘yarail’keili (h)iar ‘toil’kolon
those of Ngarailkeili their camp their talking
(A place at or near (persuasion )

Section 191, Hundred

of Waitpinga )

wa’reindelen "tetbangani ‘kuin’ kunj ‘monak’ :alen
holding her (they’ve ({eipak :ani) Bluff high up one.
persuaded her )

A [‘Lononi] clansman, of Goolwa (Ramindjeri tribe), and [’Keinindjeri],
a youth of the [Kangeilindjeri] clan (Tanganckald Tribe), were made ‘red
men,” ie., were initiated and painted with red ochre, together. They were thus
Jwu'rek :udulu| or [wu’rek:udulu] and called each other [we’rek:nd] or
[’wurekend], 1.¢., brothers. ‘The Longoni man received in marriage a Rapid Bay
tribeswoman whose country was west of [’qala’korombar! (West Island) at
[Tarewareq|. ‘This woman’s totem [’naitje] or [’yartjeank| was the
f'yarak:ani] or gummy-shark and her totem place was [yalaikorombar| (also
called |’narailkeili] and [‘yalatkeren] in the song). It was in her right to give
men permission to go to West Island on rafts to kill seals.

It is the privilege of a man’s brother, his [’la:wari], to say whether or not
he will take his brother’s widow as wile. When the Longoni man died she was
Keinindjeri’s by right and it was recognised by her relatives that she should go
up the Coorong to Keinindjeri when her period of mourning was over.

Keinindjeri went to Rapid Bay to fetch her but he had no chance to get near
her and was too frightened to ask, leaving it to the woman to come to him, when
she willed to do so. But she kept away.

So Keinindjeri sang this song at a gathering of people at Goolwa, He wanted
to make her explain why she had mot come to him when he had come to Rapid
Bay to marry her.

The song says:

“T wonder what holds her; holds that woman of Negalaikaran; inside me I
feel that someone is pursuing her; those people of Ngarailkeill hold her in their
camp with their talk. I wait high up on the Bluff Lookout; watching for her.”

In the song he mentions no names, only the woman’s country; everyone knew
for whom it was intended.

‘The widow answered the challenge of this song. She said she was waiting
for another old man, [’Djorok:ori] to claim her; he already had a wife but
wanted the widow as well, She hadn’t told Keinindjeri and now, she complained,
he had made it all public in song.

Keinindjeri then challenged Djorokori, who after a quarrel cleared himself
of any imputation or intention of taking the woman as wife. It had looked rather
bad for him because he had lived with the Rapid Bay people quite often. People
said, ‘“Keinindjeri is the right man.’ So the widow went to Keinindjeri and
lived with him for many years; sometimes together along the Coorong,

242

Milerum first saw this Ramindjeri woman when he was a small boy (about
10 to 12 years of age) ; she was then old and had been married to Keinindjeri for
many years.

The Ramindjeri people along the south coast of Fleurieu Peninsula possessed
different species of shark as totems.

In the song there are several indirect references. For instance [’Kuinkun]]
meaning a “lookout”; in this instance it refers to the Bluff at Encounter Bay; the
Tanganekald word is [’pop:aldi] and along the Coorong this term is applied to
certain high sandhills (such as the one just above Cantara Station Housc) ; the
term there belongs especially to inland sandhills where men kept watch and had
their camps.

SonG OF THE SWALLOW, WATIARI AND THE RING-TAILED Mouse, Lepmpaw!

’Tawa’lanar ’garndindy "ane’pundun ‘csandjalje’arnd
How-far how-much sct-off-again look-back
*’monak’ zal (ai) Watare’ bering
the-high-up-one Mt. Hayfield (whence the ancestral
(anything high up, ¢.g., Mt. Lofty) being Tjirbuki emerged )
"tetjo nda ’malant a ‘wata’jarul
stopped “all-of-us” the-two
“‘tawula’nan ‘nambar ning? leir
distant-noise-away- what's that I wonder
in-the-scrub
"tawul ‘narnamb.
distant noise what is it?

(contrast with tawalan = “how far?)
This song was listed without description (loc. cit., 120).

It belonged to an old man named [’Kaltananuru] who originally came fron:
the Coorong at McGrath Plat. He was a mother’s brother of Milerum (classi-
ficatory, or in informant’s words “near enough,” as her father and his father used
to “sit around the same fire”).

He married a woman from “Cape Jervis, near Yankalilla,” and lived with
her at [’Lat:arng] (Section 19, Hundred of Goolwa). His father died, and his
father-in-law was good to him. Ile asked his son-in-law to go with him to
[’Jankalja’wa:yk] (Yankalilla), where he lived for so many years that he learned
to talk their language better than his own. ‘They were good to him, and kept him.
He liked them. When he was an old man he sang this song in his own language
(Tanganekald). Men who heard him sing it were surprised because they had
thought he only spoke Merildakald. Milerum saw him when he was an old man.
Ile did not return to the Coorong until he was old, when he died there.

The song he kept as a secret for a long time, only singing it publicly when
he was an old man; he made it because he was frightened by his experiences in
a strange country. It may be frecly translated as follows:

“Eow much further must we go? Come on—it’s a long way yet. I look
back to high Watarabering.”

“The clatterings of the departing hunters cease; swallow and ringtail mouse
break the silence. What’s that strange noise? A lonely stranger—left wondering
what the noises mean.”

243

The first part tells of his secret fears as he travels with his new kinsfolk
from [’Latarng] to [’Nibielarnk] (Crozier’s Hill), thence to [’Towara:ygk] (a
hill three miles north of Inman Post Office), passing [’Wata’bareingi] or
{ Watarebcring], Mount Hayfield.

“How much further will they take me?” he cries, and looks back over his
shoulder at the high hill which is his last known landmark, He camped at
[Jankaljawa :yk]. Then his companions took him out to hunt in the wooded
mountain gullies; he was a “‘sandhill-man,” lost in the forest. It seemed that he
kept on walking in the same place. He moved in circles; then he heard strange
noises and became frightened. This is told to us in his song.

Ilis companions found him. “Ah! Next time you had better make a smoke-
fire. The swallows and the ring-tailed-mice have fooled you with their noises.”
His fears became a song which he sang to himself as he learned to hunt in the
forest, returning to his smoke-fire whenever he was in danger of being lost.

It is to the mischievous Watiari and Lepidawi that unaccountable moises in
the scrub are attributed, for it was in their totemic country, [’Watarebering],
that he was wandering.

The Lepidawi and Watiari are together known as [’Watajarul], a word in
the dual form, meaning “the two.” The Jarildekald know them as [’Lepuldawi]
and [’Watiriorn]. They were ancestral men of the forest who were turned into
animals.

AN ENUMERATION OF THE VASCULAR PLANTS OF
KANGAROO ISLAND ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS

By J. B. CLELAND and J. M. BLACK

Summary

In the Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, 51, 1927, we gave an enumeration up
to that date of the vascular plants of Kangaroo Island. Since then a few new species have been
discovered there, many new plants have been recorded for the Island and various changes in
nomenclature have taken place. During the visit of the Tate Society of the University of Adelaide in
January 1940, further additions, were made, and this list in part prepared. The present is an attempt
to bring the list as far as possible up to date.

244

AN ENUMERATION OF THE VASCULAR PLANTS OF KANGAROO ISLAND
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS

By J. B. CLeranp and J. M. Black
| Read 14 August 1941]

In the Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, 51, 1927, we
gave an enumeration up to that date of the vascular plants of Kangaroo Island.
Since then a few new species have been discovered there, many new plants have
been recorded for the Island and various changes in nomenclature have taken place.
During the visit of the Tate Socicty of the University of Adelaide in January
1940, further additions, were made and this list in part prepared. The present is
an attempt to bring the list as iar as possible up to date.

Introduced plants are indicated by *, and a record not appearing in ihe
previous list by +. In our previous list there were 653 native species, of which 8
were doubtful, with 19 varieties in addition, and 72 introduced plants with
1 additional variety, giving a total of 725 species and 20 varicties.

The total now consists of 708 native species, of which 7 are very doubtful,
with 23 additional varieties, and 108 introduced plants with 2 additional varieties.
Three of the 8 previously doubtful species, Gletchenia circinata, Casuarina
Muelleriana and Ranunculus trichophatlus are now recorded.
FinicaLes—tAsplentum flabellifolium Cav., Ravine de Casoars. Gleichenia

circindia Swartz (previously recorded as doubtful), luxuriant (3 ft. high)

at Rocky River, Breakneck River. +Vodea barbara (\..) T. Moore, Rav. de

Casoars (Recorded by Wood, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 54, 1930.
PinaceAE—Callitris tasmanica ( Benth.) Baker et Smith replaces C. Cupressi-

formis var. lasmanica,

PoOTAMOGETONACEAE—TPotamogeton javanicus Hasskarl, Karatta (in Black’s
Flora, (4) ).

GRAMINEAE—TZoysia Matrella (L.) Merrill, not Z. pungens Willd., as recorded
in Black’s Flora; forming a dense sward in damp soil, Rocky River,
Karatta. Stipa tenuiglumis Hughes, Kingscote, near Eleanor Station,
Rocky River, December. f*Orysopsis imiliacea (1..) Aschers et Schweinf.
Many-flowered Millet Grass, Kingscote. tAimphibromus recurvatus J. R.
Swallen, in swamps, Vivonne Bay, December 1934. Danthonia geniculate
J. M. Black (in Black’s Flora (4)—replaces the record of D. carphoides
Pov. M.) 72. semtannularis (Labill.) R. Br. (in Black’s Flora (4) ),
Vivonne Bay. PD. setacea R. Br. (in Black’s Flora (4) ), Rocky River,
Hawk's Nest. {*Koeleria Michelii Cosson, near Eleanor Station, December
1934. +*Bromus madritensis L. +*Bromus scoparius I.., recorded by Black
(1934), Kingscote, November 1933 (coll. A. B. Cashmore). f*Cynedon
dactylon Rich., Cape Borda. }*Hordeuwm maritinian With,

CyprraceaE—tCyperus tenellus LA. Cygnet River (coll. A. B. Cashmore,
recorded by J. M. Black, 1935). {Schoenus foliatus (ook. f.) 5. T. Blake
(= S. avillaris (R. Br.) Poir, in Black’s Flora); Squashy Creek, 27 miles
east of Cape Borda, March 1926, Rocky River. 7S. Carsei Cheeseman
(=Tetraria (Cladium) monocarpum J. M. Black) Breakneck River (in
Black’s Flora), Eleocharis (Heleocharis) acicularig (J..) R. Br. Rocky

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (2), 19 December 1941

245

River (in Black’s Flora). TE. (H.) halmaturina J. M. Black, Rocky River
(in Black’s Flora). FE. (H.) gracilis R. Br. replaces H. multicaulis Sm.
+Scirpus fluitans L. var. terrestris ¥. Muell., swamp at mouth of South-West
River (the type already recorded). 5S. stellatus C. B. Clarke, Rocky River,
November 1924. +S. calocarpus S. T. Blake, Hog Bay River, 17 November
1883 (vide Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 51, No. 11, 1940, 180). S. productus C. B.
Clarke, for S. inundatus (R. M.) Poir; Squashy Creek, 27 miles cast of Cape
Borda, March 1926. +Cladtum rubiginosum (Soland.) Domin, in Black’s
Flora, Breakneck River. *C. Huttonii T, Kirk, forming extensive masses in
swamp near mouth of South-West River (identified by Mr. S, T. Blake).
+C. gracile J. M. Black, in Black’s Flora for Breakneck River. Gahnia
hystrix J. M. Black, already recorded, also on limestone cliffs at the mouth
of Rocky River. {Carex inversa R, Br., Western River (coll. A. B. Cash-
more, recorded by Black, 1935).

RESTIONACEAE—Leptocarpus tenax BR. Br., already recorded, also Bull’s Creek in
Flinders Chase, December 1934. }+Hypolacna lateriflora (R. Br.) Benth. (in
Black’s Flora (4) ). {Restio complanatus R. Br., Bull’s Creek, Flinders
Chase, December 1934,

CENTROLEPIDACEAE—Trithuria submersa Hook. f{., already recorded, Vivonne
Bay, December. Centrolepis polygyna (R. Br.) Hieron, already recorded,
Vivonne Bay., December. $C. glabra (I. v. M.) Hieron (in Black’s Flora,
(4) , Vivonne Bay, December,

XyYRIDACEAE—}Xyris operculata Labill, (in Black’s Flora, (4) ), Rocky River.
LintacEAE—t*Asphodelus fistulosus L., Wild Onion, Kingscote.

OrcHIDACEAE—TOrthoceras strictum R. Br., Vivonne Bay, December. Ptero-
sivlis furcata Lindl., already recorded, also Rocky River (id. by Dr. R. S.
Rogers). +Pterostvlis parviflora R. Br., Emu Bay (‘lepper Herbarium).

CASUARINACEAE—Casuarina striata Macklin for C. sp... C. Muelleriana Mig., pre-
viously recorded as doubtful.

ProrEAckAE—Ifakea vittata R. Br., already recorded, scrub near C. de Couedic
(as shrubs up to 4 ft. high). +Grevillea muricata J. M. Black (1939), a new
species collected between Vivonne Bay and Kingscote, 16 November
1924, and by J. G. O, Tepper at Birchmore Lagoon and near Western Cove
in 1884. +G. lavandulacea Schl. var. sericea Benth., between Kingscote and
American River (coll. A. B. Cashmore, recorded by Black, 1935).

LLORANTHACEAE—}Loranthus miraculosus Mig. var. Melaleucae Tate on Mela-
leuca at MacGillivray, recorded by E. H. Ising (S.A. Naturalist, (14), 1933,
67 and 127).

PoLyconAcEAE—fPolygonum prostratum R. Br., edge of swamp, mouth of
South-West River, December.

CHENOPODIACEAE—}*Beta vulyaris L., Common Beet, Kingscote. Salicornia
Blackiana Ulbrich (== S. pachystachya J. M. Black) apparently, but no ripe
fruits, cliffs near mouth of South-West River, January 1940.

Aizoaceat—Carpobrotus aequilateralis (Haw.) J. M. Black instead of Mesem-
brianthemuim aequilaterale Haw. Disphymacaustrale (Soland) J. M. Black
instead of Mf. australe Soland. 7*Cryophytum erystalinum (L.) N. LE. Br.,
Hog Bay.

CARYOPHYLLACEAE—t* Silene nocturna L., Kingscote.

RANUNCULACEAE—Wanunculus trichephylus Chatx, previously recorded as doubt-
ful, Rocky River.

246

PAPAVERACEAE—FPapaver aciuleatum Thunb., already recorded, also at South-
West River, December 1934. +*Fiumaria muralis Sond., Kingscote.

CrucirERAE—}Cardamine hirsuta L., Rav, de Casoars, December 1934. }*Sisym-
brium orientale L., C. de Couedic. +*Diplotaxis tenuifolia DC., Penneshaw
(coll. IT. Rischbeith, recorded by J. M. Black, 1935). +Lepidium falma~
turinum J. M. Black, a new species discovered at Rav. de Casoars, December
1934, {*Kapistrum rugosum All, }*Cakile maritima Scop. var. pinnatifida
Paoletti, Antechamber Bay (recorded by J. M. Black, 1935—the typical form
already recorded).

LEGUMINOSAE—j}Acacia rhetinodes Schl. var. uncinata J. M. Black, growing
with a few plants of the typical form at the edge of limestone at the mouth
of the South-West River. Gastrolobium elachistum TF. v. M. replaces
Pultenaea cymbifolia J. M. Black (vide J. M. Black, Trans. Roy. Soc.
S. Aust., 1939, 245). Pultenaea scabra R. Br., in opened pod, Breakneck
River, Flinders Chase. (Tas also been found in opened pod in abundance at
Deep Creek, Fleurieu Peninsula, Tate Soc, Exped., December 1938).
t*Trifolium dubium Sibth., C. de Couedic. T*T. lomentosum L., Rocky
River. }*T. glomeratum L., Rocky River.

GERANIACEAE—}*Geranium molle L., Rocky River.

LinaceaE—fLinum marginale A, Cunn., Snug Cove. f*Linuwim gallicum L.,
Kingscote.

RuTACEAE—Zieria veronicea I. v. M., already recorded, Rocky River.

SAPINDACEAE—}Dodonaea attenuata A. Cunn. var. linearis Benth. In Black’s
Flora.

MALyAcEAE—j*Lavatera arborea L., Tree Mallow, Kingscote. *Malva parvi-
flora I.. (for M. rotundifolia L.), Rocky River.

FRANKENIACEAE—Frankenia pauciflora DC. var. fruticulosa Summerhayes
(for F. pauciflora), also mouth of Rocky River.

THYMELAECEAE—Pimiclaca flava R. Br., flowers and bracts yellow, rather
tall upright stems, already recorded, Vivonne Bay, December 1934,
7P. dichotoma Schlechtd. (= P. flava var. diosmifolia Meisn.), flowers
white, plants less tall and more spreading), Rocky River, December 1934.

Myrracear—tBaeckea crassifolia Lindl., Stokes Ray (coll. A. B. Cashmore,
recorded by Black, 1935). +B. crassifolia var. pentamera J. M. Black (a
new variety collected by A. B. Cashmore and. ‘described by J. M. Black in
1935). +Eucalyptus remota Blakely, Mount Taylor and North Coast.

OENOTHERACEAE—*Oenothera odorata Jacq., previously doubtfully recorded
Rocky River.

HALORRHAGIDACEAE—tMyriophyllum integrifolum Hook f., in Black’s Flora;
also Vivonne Bay, December 1934. M. Muelleri Sond., already recorded;
also Rocky River.

UMBELLIFERAE—H ydrocotyle laxiflora DC, already recorded; also Rocky
River, January 1940. H, comocarpa F. v. M., already recorded; also Rav.
de Casoars, in swampy ground, December 1934. H. tripartita R. Br., already
recorded; also Rocky River, March 1929 and January 1940. Lilaeopsis
Brown (L.) A. W. Hill, recorded in Black’s Flora, 440, for Harriet River
is considered further on 694, on Sir A. W. Hill’s authority, to refer here to
L. australica (I. v. M.) A. W. Till. ZL. australica also occurs at Rocky River,
January 1940. }{*Contum maculatiun L., Hemlock, Kingscote.

247

EpACRIDACEAE—+Leucopogon australis R.Br. Rocky River, Ravine de
Casoars. L. costatus F. v. M., already recorded, near Kelly’s Hill Caves and
mouth of South-West River. +Acrotriche affinis DC., Flinders Chase.
Acrotriche fasciculiflora (Regel) Benth., recorded by Tate and Tepper,
appears as a small form 9 inches high, with the fruit clusters less numerous
than in mainland specimens ; on laterite hill tops near Bull’s Creek and Rocky
River, Flinders Chase; it has not yet been found in flower and may be a new
variety. Brachyloma ericoides (Schlechtd.) Sond., already recorded, Rocky
River, December.

GENTIANACEAE—Erythraea australis R. Br., already recorded, also Rocky
River (March, December). Villarsia exaltata (Sims) FP. v. M., already
recorded, appears at Rocky River in a large form and a small one—the latter
perhaps V’. parnassifolia (Labill.) R. Br., but probably from the length of the
corolla V. exaltata.

CONVOLVULACEAE—1}*Convolvulus arvensis J, Lesser Bindweed, Western
River, Wéilsonia rotundifolia Wook., already recorded, Vivonne Bay and near
mouth of South-West River, December.

BorRAGINACEAE—7*Echium plantagineum L., Rocky River, Cape Borda,
Western River,

LAbraTaAE—}* Salvia verbenacea L., Wild Sage, Kingscote.

SotanAceAE—tSolanum fasciculatum F, v. M., Bay of Shoals near Kings-
cote, January. {*Nicotiana glauca Grah., Tobacco Tree, Kingscote.

ScROPHULARTACEAE — 7*Linaria FElatine (L.) Mill. var. Jdasiopoda Vis.,
Pointed Toad-flax, Kingscote. +*Bartsia latifolia (J..) Sibth. et Sm.,
Kingscote.

MyoporacEaE—tEremophila Weldit F. vy. M., near Kingscote (in Black’s
Flora).

PLANTAGINACEAE—}*Plantago Corenopus L., Buck’s-Horn Plantain, Bay of
Shoals (J. G. O. Tepper, November 1886), Kingscote, Cape Borda.

RupracEaAE—Opercularia hispida Spr., doubtfully recorded by J. H. Maiden,
dees not appear in Black’s Flora for South Australia and had better be
deleted. Asperula scoparia Hook. f., already recorded, also Rocky River
(Dec.). A. euryphylla var. tetraphylla Shaw et Turrill replaces A. Guant
Benth. partly. t*Sherardia arvensis L., Field Madder. 7*Galium divari-+
catum Lamk., Vivorme Bay, December 1934. G. australe DC., already
recorded, Kelly’s Hill Caves, December 1934.

CAamMPANULACEAE—Wahlenbergia multicaulis Benth., Ravine de Casoars,
Decermber 1934. This species and the next replace the record of W. gracilts
DC. TW. quadrifida (R. Br. A.DC., Ravine de Casoars, December 1934.

GOovENTACEAE—Scaevola linearis R. Br., should be var. confertifolia J. 'M. Black.

SryiiprAckaAE—fSivlidtum perpusillum Hook. f., in Black’s Flora, Levenhookia
pusilla RK. Br., should be L. dubia R. Br.

ComposiraE—tLagenophora Huegelii Benth., in Black’s Flora. +Brachycome
neglecta J. M. Black, in Black’s Flora. +B. debilis Sond., in Black’s Flora.
Achnophora Tatei F. v. M., already recorded, Vivonne Bay, December.
+*Erigeron crispus Ponnet, Kingscote. Vittadinia triloba (Gaudich.) DC.,
for V. australis Rich. +Olearia lepidophylla (Pers.) Benth., in Black’s Flora.
TO, microdisca J. M. Black, in Black’s Flora, +O. glutinosa (Lindl.) Benth.,
in Black’s Flora, ©, rudis (Benth) F. v. M., should be var. glabriuscula
3enth. +O. ciliala (Benth.) F. v. M., also var. squamifolia Benth., in

248

Black’s Flora, *Achillaea tomentosa L., Kingscote, December 1934,

January 1940. fCentipeda minima (L.) A. Br. et Aschers., in dry swamp,

mouth of South-West River, December, January. {Zrechtites arguta (A.

Rich.) DC., var. dissecta Benth., in Black’s Flora. Cassinia complanata

J. M. Black, in Black’s Flora. Helipterum demissuin (A. Gray) Druce

replaces H. exiguum. Helichrysum decurrens F. v. M. replaces H. retusim

(vide J. M. Black, 1939). +Rutidosis multiflora (Nees) Robin, in Black’s

Flora. +*Carthamus lanatus 1... Woolly Star Thistle, Kingscote.

t*Hedypnois cretica (L.) Willd. Kingscote. 7*Lactuca saligna L., Willow

Lettuce, Kingscote. Sonchus megalocarpus (Hook. f.) J. M. Black for

S. asper var. littoralis, limestone cliffs at mouth of South-West River,

January. 7*Sonchus asper Till.

Doubtful Species—The following seven species, recorded in our previous
list and in our total of 707 native species, should probably be deleted:
Zostera tasmanica, Vallisneria spiralis, Themeda triandra, Schocnus brevtfoltus,
Zygophyllum prismatathecun, Pimelea microcephala and Scaevola humilis.

ALGAE from the mouth of South-West River, Kangaroo Island:
Collected in December 1934 and identified by the late A. H. S. Lucas
Ulva Lactuca L. Caulerpa hypnoides (R. Br.) Ag. Sargassum bracteo-
losuin J. Ag. Cystophora platylobium (Mert) J. Ag. C. uztfera (Ag.) J. Ag.
Pachydiciyon pantculatum (Harv.) J. Ag. Ecklonia radiata (Tursc) J. Ag.
Perithalia inermis (R. Br.) J. Ag. Plocaimium preissianuyt Sond. Ballia calti-
bricha (Ag.) Mont. Nisynienia australis Sond.

THE VARIABILITY OF THE LENGTH OF THE RAINFALL SEASON AND
THE AMOUNT OF INFLUENTIAL RAINFALL IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By D. C. WARK, M.Ag.Sc., Waite Agricultural Research Institute

Summary

The concept of the "rainfall period," as a controlling factor in agriculture was developed by
Trumble (1) (2). who regarded as "influential" all rain falling within that period. Under South
Australian conditions the rainfall period, or "period of influential rainfall" was defined as that
interval of time in which monthly rainfall exceeded one-third the monthly evaporation. The
evaporation was determined from saturation deficiency records, where these were available, or was
interpolated from reference sites. The State was divided into climatic zones, based on mean monthly
figures for rainfall and evaporation, attention being drawn to the need for studies of variability
within each zone.

249

THE VARIABILITY OF THE LENGTH OF THE RAINFALL SEASON AND
THE AMOUNT OF INFLUENTIAL RAINFALL IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By D. C. Wark, M.Ag.Sc., Waite Agricultural Research Institute
[Read 14 August 1941]

The concept of the “rainfall period,” as a controlling factor in agriculture was
developed by Trumble (1) (2), who regarded as “influential” all rain falling
within that period. Under South Australian conditions the rainfall period. or
“period of influential rainfall” was defined as that interval of time in which
monthly rainfall exceeded one-third the monthly evaporation. The evaporation
was determined from saturation deficiency records, where these were available,
or was interpolated from reference sites. The State was divided into climatic
zones, based on mean monthly figures for rainfall and evaporation, attention being
drawn to the need for studies of variability within each zone.

The present paper gives the results of such studies, as applied to stations,
with their locations in Trumble’s edapho-climatic zones (1), as follows:

Mean
Edapho- Rainfall
Climatic Season
Zone Agricultural and Pastoral Use (Months) Stations
1-2 Intensive agriculture, with seeded 9.0 Stirling West,
pastures and livestock husbandry Mount Gambier
3-4 Livestock husbandry with seeded 7.59.0 Robe, Mount Barker,
pasture and some mixed farming Cape Borda, Clare
5-6 Heath —5—; cereal production and 6.0-7.5 Strathalbyn. Port Lincoln,
mixed farming —6-. Waite Institute, Kapunda,
Yongala, Roseworthy
College
7 Cereal production, with sheep 5.0-7.5 Kingscote, Snowtown
and cattle
8 Cereal production with same 5.0-6.0 Streaky Bay, Fowler’s Bay,
livestock Kyancutta
9 Marginal 5.0 Port Pirie, Berri
10 Arid pastoral or desert Farina

Records were examined for fifty years or for the maximum time available.
As few stations record wet and dry bulb temperatures, the choice of centres was
limited. ‘The complete absence of such records from Yorke Peninsula and from
much of the South-Eastern and Murray Mallee districts was especially un-
fortunate.

Individual seasons, were observed to be of several types:

(a) A sharp winter rainfall season as indicated from the mean monthly
values.

(b) A month, in autumin or spring, with rainfall below one-third evaporation,
but with overlap of rainfall from two adjacent months. (A dry period in
autumn or spring is indicated.)

(d) In zones 1-2 there are occasional summers, in which the rainfa'l exceeds
one-third the evaporation for every month (ie., the rainfall is con-
tinuously effective for more than twelve months).

fe) In zones 9-10 there are some years with the rainfall for no month exceed-
ing one-third the evaporation.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S$.A., 65, (2), 19 December 1941

250

The winter rainfall seasons, including the period of overlap under (b) above,
were examined separately and the variability of the rain period and of the effec-
tive rainfall were calculated. '

The percentage distributions of the periods of various length are shown for
ten selected stations in fig. 1. The greater number of these curves approximate
to the curves of normal distribution, and for these the mean and standard devia~
tion were calculated. In some cases, however, it was necessary to transform the
figures to a suitable form before proceeding with this calculation. For example,
in the case of Port Lincoln, the square root was used; in the case of Port Pirie,
the logarithm.

FREQUENCY OF SEASONS ACCORDING TO THE AMOUNT OF

FREQUENCY OF SEASONS ACCORDING TO LENGTH OF
RAINFALL PERIOD INFLUENT AG AMP ACE eunsee tee

: ee INF
RAINFALL PERIOD (MONTHS) ae
worn enanoi® yw rtOorn ong eyo
ve ee ht cn ee 5 raed
ta Ate en oni baneanon om & ed oof ®

WENTIAL RAINFALL (INCHE

ga
34-60

MOUNT GAMBIER MOUNT BARKER ae MOUNT GAMBIER a MOUNT BARKER eb
3030 20
49 ac 40
| so (30 ‘gl
i 200 i 20
‘ NL ir) e 10
i rue | De ‘
clare STRATHALAYN a CLARE STRATHALBYN lee
; 30 $0 50 so |
1 40 40 ac 40 4
4 30) 329 30 > wae
+ < ao I 2c g 20; 204
lwo ow 19 1p wl
[> A - >
fu PORT LINCOLN ' KAP UNOA b 60 POAT LINCOLN KAPUNOA sok
1 O30 | 309 30 30
wae | ady 40 40 |
1030 | ‘ o
} < Sau 209 ca) 0
| £20 | 2a 20 20%
ZO \ 4 OF 10 Oo Zi
u a 4 il / a
v SNOWTOWN STREAKY BAY Y 64 SNOWTOWN STQEAKY BAY so
g qt a |
we day) 30 1 y
Q 40 aoa 4a aod
30 f M30) so |
20 2 20) 20
10 vA 2 19) 1a
PORT DIRE r FARINA es POAT PIRIE FARINA a. 3
30 so er)
40 ao 40 40
30 . neo 20
20 . zo ad) 2204
10 rs 1010 °
L J
wae ner © eon 5
CT Tee Te Se 4 Sessa eeaas TV eSagRaTeas !
ON Sy See = et + ear Cede soared |
RAINFALL PERIOD (MONTHS) SARKIS “Saag ea
pS Dee ages ape i INFLUENTIAL AAINGFALL (INCHES) t
Fig. 1 Fig. 2

The mode, and the values which will probably be exceeded in 20, 10 and 5%
of the seasons have been determined for each centre. To conserve space, ten only
of these centres are included in the Appendix, Table A. Thus, at Mount Gambier,
the majority of years have a rainfall period of the order of 9-3 months, On the
average, one year in five can be expected to have a rainfall period less than 8-1
months, and one year in the same five, a period greater than 10°6 months. In
60% of the years, the rainfall season will probably be between 8-1 and 10-6
months; in 80% between 7:4 and 11-3 months; and in 90% between 6°8 and
11-8 months.

In the case of Farina, the large proportion of years with no effective rainfall
precludes the use of statistical methods employed for the other centres.

The percentage distributions of the influential rainfall, for representative
centres, are shown in fig. 2. Where these differ markedly from the normal dis-
tribution, the rainfall figures were transformed to a suitable value before the
mean and the standard deviation were calculated.

251

The mode, and the values likely to be exceeded in each direction in 20%,
in 10%, and in 5% of the years are shown for ten stations in Appendix,

Table B.

As certain months of the year may be critical for agricultural plants, each
month was next considered separately, and individual wet months were grouped
into (a) those within a period of winter rainfall, and (b) those forming a part of
a short period of effective rainfall outside the winter period. The following
examples (Table I) illustrate that only in occasional years does the rainfall period
extend to the summer months (¢.g., January) in the wettest parts of the State,
such as Mount Gambier.

Taste I

Percentage of years with rainfall for month included .
in rainfall season.

Station Jan. Mar. April July Sept. Oct.

Mt. Gambier gt a 6:0 2-0 94-0 100-0 98-0 86-0
(4-0) (4-0)

Mt. Barker .... We Men eS 28-0 80-0 100-0 100-0 82-0

(2-0) (4-0)

Kapunda nan — ed 4-0 50-0 100-0 86-0 56°0

(2-0) (4-0)

Streaky Bay is ei = 4+] 20-4 100-0 55-1 10-2

(2-0) (2-0)

Farina as wd a ty — 2-0 10-0 — 2-0

The figures in brackets indicate the percentage of seasons, in which the month
is dry, but included in the winter rainfall season by virtue of the overlap effect.

In the agricultural districts, the winter months (e.g., July) are practically
always within the period of effective rainfall. The autumn (¢.g., March and
April) and spring months (¢.g., September and October) show a gradation from
the wetter districts to the drier agricultural districts, in the percentage of years,
in which they are included in the winter rainfall period. The rainfall of the arid
interior is spasmodic, but that which occurs during the winter months is most
likely to be effective, on account of the lower evaporation.

Short periods of effective rainfall, outside the winter rainfall period, may
occur. These are of some importance during the summer months in the higher
rainfall areas. At Mount Gambier, the months December, January and February
have an effective rainfall of this type in 12%, 5% and 8% of the years, whilst
at Robe 16% of Decembers have an effective rainfall of this type.

Prolonged periods of favourable rainfall conditions and prolonged periods
of dry weather greatly influence the production of pastures and agricultural
crops, and the critical periods of the year vary from species to species, The per-
centage of years with the rainfall (a) continuously cffective and (b) continuously
non-effective (i.e., drought conditions) for periods of two, three, four, and five
months commencing with each month of the year, have been determined. The
examples shown in Table II illustrate the trends shown by the tri-monthly periods.

TasLte I]—Tri-Montuty PEriops

(a) Percentage of years with rainfall effective for 3 months.

Station Dee.-Feb. Feb.-Apr. March-May June-Aug. Aug.-Oct. Sept.-Nov.
Mt. Gambier... se 6-0 12-0 38-0 98-0 84-0 46-0
Mt. Barker ahr ann —_ 6-0 24-0 98-0 76-0 36-0
Kapunda fe hiss — -- 2:0 94-0 52:0 10-0
Streaky Bay... te —_ —_ 2-0 87-7 8-2 —

Farina... ets sss an =e _ — us, tuo

252

(b) Percentage of years with continuous drought for 3 months.

Months
Station Dec.-Feb. Feb.-Apr. March-May June-Aug. Aug.-Oct. Sept.Nov.
Mt. Gambier _.... teed 50-0 4-0 — — 2-0 2-0
Mt. Barker ne watt 64-0 10-0 2°+0 —_ 2-0 6-0
Kapunda att is 92-0 40-0 6:0 — 2-0 8-0
Streaky Bay... rape 89-8 73°5 16°3 —_ 2:0 42-8
Farina... ies od 100-0 96-0 84-0 58-0 90-0 96-0

They show that even in the wettest districts in the State only occasionally
are the rainfall conditions favourable to plant growth during the three summer
months, whereas a dry period of three months occurs at this time in one-half the
years, All the agricultural areas are free from a prolonged dry period during the
winter months.

The higher rainfall areas, such as Mount Gambier and Mount Barker, show
a higher percentage of favourable conditions and a lower percentage of drought
conditions at all times of the year than do the wheat-belt areas, including Kapunda
and Streaky Bay.

The trends shown by the five-monthly periods in Table HI are similar. Only
in one-third of the years does a favourable period of five months occur at Streaky
Bay, whereas at Mount Gambier 1914 was the only year in fifty in which a five
month period of favourable rainfall did not occur during the winter months
(May-September).

Table I]]—Five-Monru.y PERtops

(a) Percentage of years with rainfall effective for 5 months.

Months
Station Nov.-Mar. Jan.-May Feb.-June May-Sept. July-Nov. Aug.-Dec.
Mt. Gambier 2-0 4-0 12-0 98-0 46-0 14-0
Mt. Barker ae By —_ — 6-0 92-0 36-0) 6-0
Kapunda _ itt — — — 08-0 8-0 —
Streaky Bay... ths, —_ — — 34-7 — ==
Farina... _ Hus — — — — —
(b) Percentage of years with continuous drought for 5 months.
Months
Station Nov.-Mar. Jan.-May Feh.-June May-Sept. July-Nov. Aug.-Dec.
Mt. Gambier 18-0 — —_ — — 2:0
Mt. Barker ea ae 32-0 2-0 — —_ —_ —
Kapunda J Wer 72-0 6-0 — — — 2-0
Streaky Bay... ee 83:7 14-3 2-0 — —_ 2-0
Farina... i eae 100-0 84-0 54-0 50-0 82-0 90-0

The percentage of years in which the summer drought extends to include the
month of May varies from 0% at Mount Gambier to 14% at Streaky Bay. At
Farina prolonged droughts occur at all times of the year.

The information discussed in this paper is of value in determining the
frequency with which conditions favouring the growth of specific crop and
herbage plants are likely to occur, The data have already furnished information
as to the suitability of areas for spring-sown flax and to indicate the limits of arcas
of use for the raising of fat lambs.

Space permits only a limited number of tables to be included, and those
included give data for only half the stations. However, a set of tables complete
for all stations, and containing information on periods of two and four months, is
available at the Waite Institute and will be supplied on request.

2353

REFERENCES
1937 Trans. Roy. Soc. 5S. Aust., 61, 41

(1) Trumeze, H. C.
1939 Trans. Roy Soc. S, Aust., 63, 36

(2) Trumsiz, H.C.

APPENDIX

TABLE A

Rainfall period, expressed as the mode and the probable extremes in 5, 10 and
20 per cent. of years, together with the percentage occurrence of seasonal types.
Percentages of
Seasonal Types*
(a) Temp. (b) Effect.

dry spell rainfall
Edapho- Rainfall Period during outside
Climatic Record 2005 10% 5% rainfall = winter
Zone Station (years) Moce <j ir < > < > period period
12 Mt. Gambier . 30 9.3 $1 10.6 7.4 11.3 6.8 11.8 16.0 16.0
3-4 § Mt. Barker ... 50 8.5 G5) 2.6 6.9 10.2 6.4 10.7 12.0 22.0
l Clare 50 7.6 6.8 3.6 6.4 9,41 6.0 9.5 22.0 14.0
f Strathalbyn 50 TD 6.4 8.5 549 9.) 5.4 9.6 32.0 20.0
5-6 4 Pt, Lincoln .. 48 7.3 6.4 8.3 6.0 8.8 5.6 9.9 25.1 22.9
[| Kapunda 50 7.0 6.1 7.9 5.6 8.4 5.2 8.3 16.9 18.0
7 Snowtowu 31 6.0 4.8 7.2 4.1 7.8 3.6 8.3 19.1 9.7
8 Streaky Bay wu. 49 5.7 4.9 6.5 4.5 6.9 4.1 A338 14.2 14.3
9 Port Pirie 18 4.0 27 6.0 2.1 7.4 1.8 9.0 27.9 22.2
10 Farina 50 insufficient years with rainfall effective — 8.0

*Tn addition to the Seasonal Types included, 4 per cent. of the years at Mount
Gambier had continuous seasons i.c., there was no summer drought. No continuous
seasons occurred at the other stations. 48 per cent, of the years at Farina had no effective
rainfall. No year of this type occurred at the other stations.

Tarte B

Influential rainfall, expressed as the mode and the probable extremes in
5, 10 and 20 per cent. of years.
Effective Rainfall

20 % 10% 56

Station Mode < > < > < >
Mt. Gambier 26:76 20:88 32-64 17-76 33°76 15:16 38°36
Mt. Barker 28-08 22:65 35-27 19-55 38-14 17°37 41-34
Clare 20-21 15°35 26-01 13-11 29-50 11-27 32-65
Strathalbyn 16-08 12-22 19-94 10-18 21-98 8-47 23-69
Pt. Lincoln 17-37 13°77 21-55 12-69 24-01 10-79 26:20
Kapunda 15-14 10-51 19-77 8-06 22°22 6°01 24:27
Snowtown 10-49 7°00 15-72 5-64 19-51 4°70 23°43
Streaky Bay 11-26 8-44 14-07 6-95 15-56 5-70 16-81
Pt. Pirie 6:00 3-10 %-71 2-27 13-25 1-73 17°35
Farina insufficient years with rainfall effective

ADDITIONAL NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS

By PROF. T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and PATRICIA M. MAWSON,
University of Adelaide

Summary

The nematodes recorded in this paper are mainly from water-birds. Some of the parasites were
collected by Dr. J. B. Cleland, the late Dr. T. L. Bancroft (Eidsvold, Queensland) and the late Dr.
MacGillivray. We are also indebted to Messrs. G. and F. Jaensch and L. Ellis for help in obtaining
material from Tailem Bend, South Australia. The work was assisted by the Commonwealth
Research Grant to the University of Adelaide. Types of new species are deposited in the South
Australian Museum.

254
ADDITIONAL NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS

By Pror. T. Harvey JonNston and Patricia M. Mawson,
University of Adelaide

[Read 14 August 1941]

The nematodes recorded in this paper are mainly from water-birds. Some
of the parasites were collected by Dr. J. B. Cleland, the late Dr. T. L. Bancroft
(Eidsvold, Queensland) and the late Dr. MacGillivray. We are also indebted to
Messrs. G. and F. Jaensch and L. Ellis for help in obtaining material from Tailem
Bend, South Australia. The work was assisted by the Commonwealth Research
Grant to the University of Adelaide. Types of new species are deposited in the
South Australian Museum.

The following is a list of the parasites studied, recorded under their hosts:
Pirra MACKLorr Temm. (North Queensland )—Thelazia pittae n. sp.

CHLIDONIAS LEUCOPAREIA Temm. (Tailem Bend) — Chevreuxia australis n. sp.;
Acuaria (s.1.) sp., larva.

HypRorPROGNE CASPIA STRENUA Gould (Tailem Bend)-—TYrichostrongylus (s.1.)
incertus n.sp.; Acueria (s.1.), sp., larva.

PELAGODROMA MARINA Lath, (Flinders Island, Bass Strait)—Seuratia marina
n. Sp.

‘THRESKIORNIS (CARPHIBIS) SPINICOLLIS Jameson (Eidsvold)—Physaloptera sp.,

immature.

MicrocARBo MELANOoLEUCUS Vieill. (Adelaide; Tailem Bend)—Eustrongylides
phalacrocoracis Ni. sp.

PHaracrocorax cArgzo (Linn.) (Tailem Bend; Adelaide) — Eustrongylides
phalacrocoracis n.sp.; Echinuria squamata Linst.; (Tailem Bend) Cosmo-
cephalus jaenschi n. sp.

ANHINGA NOVAE-HOLLANDIAE Gld. (Burnett River)—Eustrongylides plotinus
nsp.; (Thompson River) Acuaria (Dispharynx) sp..

PovicEPS POLIOCEPHALUS Jardine and Selby (Tailem Bend)—Streptocara recta
(Linst.).

PODICEPS RUFICOLLIS NOVAE-ILOLLANDIAE Stephens (Tailem Bend)—Streptocara
yecta (Linst.).

CHenorpsis aTrATA Lath. (Tailem Bend)—Tetrameres australis n. sp.

ANAS sSUPERCILIOSA Gmel. (New South Wales )—Physaloptera sp.

Biziura Lopata Shaw (Tailem Bend)—Tetrameres bigiurae n. sp.

AFGOTTIELES CRISTATA White (Tailem Bend )—Habronema aegotheles n. sp.

PoMATOSTOMUS SUPERCILIOSUS Vig. and Horsf, (Elwomple,)—Spirura (s.1.) sp.,
larva.

Trichostrongylus (s.l.) incertus n.sp.
(Fig. 1)

From the Caspian tern, Hydroprogne caspia strenua, from Tailem Bend.
One male present, its anterior end missing; part available 2-9 mm. long, -06 mm.
wide. Dorsal lobe of bursa small; right side of bursa rather larger than left, rays
on that side stouter but similar in form. Ventro-ventral rays narrow, straight,
reaching bursal edge, separated from latero-ventrals ; latter tapering at extremities,
bent ventrad, not quite reaching bursal edge; lateral rays not reaching bursal
edge; ventro-lateral blunt-tipped; medio-lateral longest, tapering to narrow tip;
postero-lateral shortest, narrowest, tip bent dorsad; externo-dorsal ray not arising

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (2), 19 December 1941

255

from dorsal, narrow, not reaching edge of bursa; dorsal reaching nearly to bursal
edge, bifurcating near its tip into two short cloven branches. Spicules -12 mm.
long, with alae and ridges giving them a contorted appearance, but ending in a
blunt simple tip. Gubernaculum absent. Prebursal papillae present, The form
of the bursal rays and the shape of the spicules suggest that the species is closest
to Trichostrongylus, although it differs from members of that genus in the absence
of a gubernaculum and in the separation of the externo-dorsal rays from the
dorsal ray. In view of the condition of the material it seems unwise to attempt
to assign it more definitely in the Trichostrongylidae.

Fig. 1, Trichostrongylus (s.1.) tcertus: bursa. Fig. 2-3, Eustrongylides phala-

crocoracts: 2, head; 3, bursa. Fig. 4-5, Hustrongylides plotinus: 4, head; 5, bursa.

tig. 6-7, Thelasia pittae: 6, head; 7, male tail. Fig. 8-10, Tabronema aegotheles:

8, head; 9, lateral, and 10, ventral, views of male tail. Fig. 11-12, Physaloptera sp.,

from Anas: 11, head; 12, male tail. Fig. 13-14, Physaloptera sp. from ibis, sub-

ventral and face views of head. Fig. 1, 9, 10, 13 and 14 to same scale; fig. 2,
4,7 and 11; fig. 3 and 6; fig. 5 and 12.

Eustrongylides phalacrocoracis n. sp.
(Fig. 2-3)

Taken from the subperitoneal tissue of the stomach of Microcarbo melano-
leucus from Tailem Bend (type locality) and Adelaide; and from PAalacrocorax
carbo irom Tailem Bend. Males up to 100 mm. long, -8 mm. wide; female
ranging to 130 mm. long, 1 mm, wide. Papillae around mouth very large and
prominent, those of inner circle distinctly larger than those of outer circle. Six
of inner circle of same size, each bearing anteriorly a short prolongation of the
pulp in form of a spine; six papillae of outer circle not of equal size, the laterals
taller; each papilla with small rounded prolongation of pulp anteriorly. Between
each lateral and submedian papilla of outer ring is a very small rounded projection

250

of hypodermis forming an accessory papilla, Buccal cavity +12--14 mm. long;
oesophagus twisted, terminating 13 mm. trom head, about one-sixth to one-eighth
body length.

Bursa with finely notched edge; slight ventral cleft; cuticle roughened on
inside. Spicule very thin, 10-2 mm. long, 1:10 of body length.

Anus in female terminal. Vulva not observed. Eggs 65 by 40», with
pitted shells.

The species most closely resembles LE. africanus Jaegerskiold, differing in the
size of the papillae, the lengths of the buccal cavity and ocsophagus, and im the
shape of the eggs.

Eustrongylides plotinus n. sp.
(Vig. 4-5)

Irom Anhinga novae-hollandiae, from the Burnett River, Queensland (coll,
Dr. Bancroft). Males only present; the largest whole specimen 81 mm. long,
1 mm. wide. Head papillae resembling those of L. phalacrocoracis in shape and
relative sizes, but all are smaller in relation to size of body, and therefore less
conspicuous. Buccal cavity -08--1 mm. long, sesophagus much twisted, occupy-
ing first sixth of body length.

Bursa with finely notched edge and very deep ventral cleft. Spicule 13 mm.
long in 81 mm. specimen (1:6 of body length), but in a broken worm it reaches
15-4 mm. The species is distinguished from E. phalacrocoracis by the relatively
smaller oral papillae, the more deeply cleft bursa, and longer spicules. The iwo
species are, however, very close, and some of the differences may be due to the
method of preservation in case of L. plotinus. Pending the examination of fresher
material it is considered wiser to erect a new species for ihe specimens from
Anhunga.

Thelazia pittae n.sp.
(Fig. 6-7)

From Pitta mackloti, North Queensland, coll. Dr. MacGillivray. Males
14-16 min. long, -4 mm. wide; females 18-20 mm., by “54 mm. Ilead with six
papillae, Buccal cavity 25 » long and 30 » wide in male, 30 long and 35 » wide
in female, with walls about 10» thick. Oesophagus -95-1 mim. long in both sexes.
Nerve ring ‘46 mm., cervical papillae -56 mm., from head end.

AMfale-—Tail curved ventrad, :18--2 mm. long; single median and seven to
ten pairs preanal papillae, four or five pairs postanal. Spicules -18--2 mm. and
-26 nam. long; the longer very fine, not strongly chitinised; the shorter blunt and
massive.

Female-—Yail -2 mm. long; vulva °75--9 mm. from head end. Lteri con-
taining larvae.

The species is distinguished from others of the genus by the number and
position of the caudal papillae and by the relative lengths of the spicules.

Habronema aegotheles n. sp.
(Fig. 8-10)

Krom the owlct nightjar, Aegotheles cristata, from Tailem Bend. Male
2-5 wm., female 4-8 mm., in length. Lateral lips trilobed, with long dorsal and
ventral processes; interlabia not seen since head viewed only from lateral eleva-
tion, but probably short and simple. Vertical thickened ridges (probably two) on
inside of each lip, projecting anteriorly as teeth. Buccal capsule 27 » long in
male, 33 2 long and 10» wide in female. Anterior part of oesophagus -2 mm.
long in female; -14 mm. in male; posterior part *$1 mm. in male.

Maie—Caudal alae not wide, united posterior to end of body. Spicules
-18 mm. and -7 mm. in length; the shorter with rounded tip; the longer needle-
like. Four pedunculated preanal papillae on same side as shorter spicule, six on

257

other side; one pair small sessile papillae immediately posterior to anus, and a
pair large pedunculated papillae behind these. Male tail bent dorsad. Anus 70»
in front of rounded tip of tail.

Female—Tail -16 mm. long, narrowing suddenly after half length. Position
of vulva not seen. Body filled with thick-shelled eggs, 20» by 45 4, containing
embryos.

The species most closely resembles HY. magnilabiatum Maplestone in the shape
of the lips. The worms are, however, shorter, the lateral lips more deeply lobed;
the spicule lengths, and the ratio between them, are different, and there are more
caudal papillae in the male of H. aegotheles.

PHYSALOPTERA sp.
; (Fig. 11-12)

From Anas superciliosa (New South Wales). One male present, so pre-
served that only lateral views of the head and tail could be obtained. Lips each
bearing two bipartite teeth in dorsal and ventral positions; in median position an
outer single tooth and an inner much smaller one, cither bipartite or quadripartite.
Collar at base of lips, shallow. Exact position of anus and length of spicules not
determined satisfactorily. At least four pairs pedunculate preanal papillae and
three pairs shorter postanal papillae. Spicules at least -3 mm, and -6 mm. long,
the longer very fine and poorly chitinised. It is possible that the worm is not a
normal parasite of ducks. We have refrained from naming it. The presence of
prominent bicuspid teeth in dorsal and ventral positions on lips has not been
deseribed for any species of Physaloptera from birds.

PHYSALOPTERA sp., immature |
(Fig. 13-14)

From the black ibis, Threskiornis spinicollis, from Eidsvold, Queensland,
coll. Dr. Bancroft, Immature specimens up to 15 mm. in length, -52 mm. wide.
Head with very loase “collar” and shallow lips. Each lip with two papillae
externally and three teeth internally, latter in dorsal, ventral and median positions.
Oesophagus 2°24 mm. long. ‘ail conical, -56 mm. long. The arrangement of the
teeth is apparently unique among Physaloptera from birds.

Acuarta (DISPHARYNX) sp,

Three poorly preserved specimens from Anhinga novae-hollandiae, Thomp-
son River, Queensland. Length, 19-23 mm. Cordons about 9-1-5 mm. long,
recurrent end reaching mouth region. Vestibule -25 mm. long, anterior part of
oesophagus -6 mm. long, termination of posterior part not seen, In 19 mm.
specimen, vulva 2'4 mm. from tip of tail; latter -12 mm. long. Recurrent branches.
of cordons apparently longer than in previously described species, but in view of
the condition of the material it is) considered wiser not to erect a new species,

EcHINURTA SQUAMATA Linst.
(Fig, 15-19)

A young male 3°3 mm, long, a young female 4-4 mm. long, a female 20 mm.
long, and the anterior end of another large female, from ‘Phalacrocorax carbo,
Tailem Bend; and a young male from same host species from the Hope Valley
Reservoir, Adelaide. Lips prominent, each with two papillae and an amphid.
Cervical papillae large, tricuspid, -35 mm. from head in male, -4 mm. in young
female, 1-1 mm. in adult female, Cordons prominent, wider posteriorly, not
recurrent, uniting immediately anterior to cervical papillae. Cordons striated
transversely, each stria consisting of a row of about eight posteriorly-directed
spines; spines on dorsal or ventral respective edge of each cordon larger than
others in the row and sometimes bifid. At junction of cordons, spines single and

238

large. Lateral alae extend from immediately posterior to cervical papillae.
Vestibule with striated walls, 140 », 150%, and 480 p, long in male, young female,
aud adult female, respectively. Anterior part of oesophagus 26 mm. long in
young female, ‘25 mm. in male; posterior part slightly wider, 2°35 mm, long in
young female. Nerve ring *16 mm. and +18 mm. from head end in young male
and young female, respectively, Excretory pore ‘27 mm, from head.
Male—Caudal alae wide, ‘28 mm. long, meeting posterior to body, Cloaca
-09 mm. from tip of tail, One median sessile preanal papilla, four pairs preanal
and seven pairs postanal pedunculated papillae (fig. 18). Spicules -45 mm. and

| Ao |
L I

Fig, 15-19, Echinuria squamata: 15, male-head; 16, female, and 17, male anterior

ends; 18, male tail; 19, part of a cordon. Fig. 20-21, Chevrensxia australs, anterior end,

showing, 20, vestibule; 21, cordons. Fig. 22-24, Cosmocephalis gacnschi: 22-23,

anterior end; 24, male tail, Fig, 25-27, Seuratia marina; 25, lateral, and 26 dorsal.

views of head; 27, male tail. Fig, 28-29, Streplocara recta: ventral and lateral views

of head. Fig. 15 and 19 to same scale; fig. 17, 18 and 20; fig. 21, 22, 24,25, 26 and 27;
fig 28 and 29.

O07 mm. in length, shorter spatulated and blunt tipped ; longer tubular in proximal
quarter, remainder needle-like almost to the end which is somewhat broadened.
Female—LBody much wider posteriorly, tapering to head. Anus subterminal.
Vulva -18 mm. from posterior end. Eggs thick-shelled, 33-35 » by 24-25 ps.
The present specimens agree with the limited description of the species given
by Linstow (1883), whose specimens came from Phalacrocorax carbo, from
Central Asia.

259

Chevreuxia australis n. sp.
(Fig. 20-21)

One female 12:3 mm. long, cbtained from a marsh tern, Chlidonias leucopareia,
from Tailem Bend. T'wo large lips cach with anterior projection and two large
papillae. Cuticular “collar” extending backwards from level of cervical papillae,
*34 mm. from head, for -18 mm. Each of the dorsal and ventral cordons joining
laterally on [ree border of this collar, Cuticle over cordons not striated, but some-
what twisted; inter-cordon area markedly striate. Vestibule -17 mm. long, 3 p
wide except near mouth where it widens. Anterior part of oesophagus °61 mm.
long, posterior part obscured by uteri, ‘Tail -36 mm. long, tapering to blunt point.
Vulva 6°3 min, from head end, “e., just posterior to middle of body. Eggs thick-
shelled, 18-19 » by 30-31 p.

‘The species is closely related to C. revoluta (Rud.) from Himantepus, the
distinguishing features of the new species being the unstriated cordons, striated
inter-cordon areas, and the rather longer and less conspicuous “collar,” or cuticular
flap, which characterises the genus. These differences arc, however, small.

Cosmocephalus jaenschi n. sp.
(Fig. 22-24)

from Phalacrocoraxy carbo, ‘Vailem Bend. Two males present, about
10-5 mm. long, Lips shallow, each with prominent anterior projection and iwo
large papillae. Rounded cuticular expansion dorsally and ventrally between
cordons. Cordons voluminous, scalloped on inner edge, forming inmmediately
after origin on lips a postero-lateral narrow loop about 30 » long, then continuing
back to a point *39 mm. from head; front of recurrent loop -9 mm. from head.
Cervical papillae tricuspid, -46 mm. from head end. Vestibule -39 mm. long,
20» wide. Anterior part of oesophagus -9 mm., posterior 3-7 mm., in length;
nerve ring *45 mm. and excretory pore +53 mm. from head end. Spicules -61 mm.
and “15 mm. in length. Catdal alae present, supperting four pairs preanal and
five pairs postanal pedunculated papillae, the final pair being stouter than the
others. Tail +29 mm. long.

The species resembles C. capellae Yamaguti very closcly in general features
but differs in the lengths of the spicules and in the number of postanal papillac.
Tt differs from C. adunews (Creplin) in the length of the cordons; from C. asturis
Y. and M. in the shape of the cordons, length of the vestibule and the position of
the excretory pore; and from C, ebvelata (Creplin) in the length of the vestibule
relative to the cordons and cervical papillae and in the number of postanal papillae
and the relative lengths of the spicules. :

Seuratia marina n. sp.
(Fig. 25-27)

From the stormy petrel, Pelagodroma marina, from Flinders Island, Bass
Strait, coll. Dr. Cleland. Spinous collar and large tricuspid papillae as in
S. shipleyt; collar with about 34 teeth on each side. Upper border of cervical
papillae 130 from head in female, 90 in male, Hooks on body in four sub-
lateral rows, small. Mouth surrounded by six shallow lips, two laterals each with
a prominent papilla. Vestibule in female 180» long, transversely striated; walls
about 5» thick, lumen 9 » wide; in male, 140% long, Anterior part of oesophagus
"62 mn. long in female, posterior part at least 1-6 mm1., its posterior end obscured
by other organs. Nerve ring -23 mm., and excretory pore -31 mm., from head
end in female.

Male—5-5-6 mm, long; tail with narrow alae supporting two pairs preanal
and four pairs postanal papillae. No other caudal papillae observed. Spicules

260

1-4 mm. and 2-4 mm. in length, longer tapering to a point, shorter more massive
with large head and blunt tip.

Female—7-4-8 mm. long, *42 mm. wide. Anus about +1 mm. from rounded
posterior end; vulva ‘4 mm. in front of anus; eggs about 18» by 40 p.

The species differs from S. shipleyi as described and figured by Stossich and
by Seurat, in the relative positions of the posterior end of the vestibule and the
cervical papillae; in the number of preanal papillae in male; in the position of
vulva; and in the absence of a terminal multicuspidate papilla in male.

STREPTOCARA RECTA Linstow
(Fig. 28-29)

‘This species was taken from Podiceps poliocephalus and P. ruficollis novae-
hollandiae, Tailem Bend. Figures are given of the anterior end of a female to
show the vestibule.

Acuarta (s.1.) sp., larvae
(Fig. 30)

(a) From a marsh tern, Chlidonias leucopareia, from Tailem Bend. Anterior
end conical, apparently protected by two cuticular “plates” posterior borders of
which are shaped to uncover four submedian papillae. Long vestibule present;
oesophagus divided into anterior and posterior parts; nerve ring just posterior to
vestibule. Tail tapering, its tip wrinkled and ending bluntly. This larva occurred
in the same host as Chevreusxia australis described above.

(b) From a Caspian tern, Hydroprogne caspia strenua, from Tailem Bend.
Appearance identical with (a).

|
i
|

|
\

\ g

)

Fig, 30, Acuaria (s.1.) larva: from Retropinna, anterior end. Fig. 31-35, ‘Tetrameres

bisiurae: 31, anterior end of male; 32, male tail; 33, tail of larva; 34, young

female; 35, adult female. Fig. 36-38, Tetrameres australis, male: 36, head; 37,

anterior end; 38, tail. Fig. 31, 32, 33, 37 and 38 to same scale; fig. 30 and 36.
a, anus; c, cloaca; g, gubernaculum; v, vulva.

261

The larvae found in terns had probably been ingested with small fish.

(c) From a fresh water fish, Retropinna semoni, Murray Bridge, South Aus-
tralia (fig. 30). Appearance identical with (a) and (b).

Although cordons were not seen on any of these larvae, it is possible that
the worms are young stages of one of the species of Acuariinae found in birds of
the Tailem Bend region. The measurements in mm. of our specimens are given

below.

Host Marshtern Refropinna Caspian tern
Length - - - . 2°65 2°3-2'8 3
Breadth = - 3 ? - 072 096 “104
Vestibule - - - . 15 “11 12
Ocsophagus (anterior part) - 25 23 3
Oesophagus (posterior part) = 1-5 — 1:26
Head to cervical papillae - - 19 15 —
Head to excretory pore - - ‘22 18 —
Tail - - - - 12 ll 12

Spirura (s.1.) sp., larva
From Pomatosiomus superciliosus, Elwomple (near Tailem Bend). Length
5-68 mm., breadth -24 mm.; anterior end rounded, without lips or papillae.
Buceal capsule 80 » long. Tail -48 mm. long, ending in rounded knob.

Tetrameres biziurae n.sp.
(Fig. 31-35)

From the musk duck, Bigiura lobata, from Tailem Bend. Material com-
prises males, females, and fourth stage larvae.

Male—4-2-4-4 mm. long; lateral alae present; in each a long spine bifid
posteriorly, its termination ‘08 mm. from head, a structure apparently similar to
that described by Seurat (1918) for T. fissispina and suggested by him to be a
specific character. Four longitudinal rows of spines beginning at level of tips of
the bifid spines, and extending throughout body length. Cervical papillae at
slightly different levels, -15 and -16 mm. from head end. Four distinct lips.
Buccal capsule 30 long, about 4 wide. Ocsophagus 1 mm. long; nerve ring
-2 mm. from head. Tail -15 mm. long, narrowing suddenly near tip. Four ventral
and three lateral papillae on each side of tail. Spicules *25--26 and :07 mm. in
length.

Lemale—Lips not distinguished; buccal capsule more subglobular than
cylindrical. Young female: body very little swollen; dimensions as follows:
2 mm. long, -2 mm. wide; oesophagus *-8 mm. long; tail -15 mm. long, vulva
*22 nim. from posterior end. Two long ventral spines 60 » from tip of tail, and
two terminal spines. Adult female with following dimensions: body longer than
wide; narrow projecting anterior part ‘6 mm, long, posterior part °15 mm.
Swollen part 1-5 mm. long, 1:2 mm. wide. Buccal capsule 20 » long, 10 » wide
at centre, narrower at top and bottom. Swollen part almost entirely filled by
saccular intestine containing dark granular material. Vulva at posterior end of
swollen part; anus °5 mm. from tip of tail. LEggs not visible.

Larvaec—About 2-4 mm. long; no spines on body except group of five at end
of tail and two prominent, subventral spines 60 » from tip of tail. Buccal capsule
18 » long; oesophagus *73 mm. long; nerve ring at *15 mm., and cervical papillae
at ‘09 mm., from head end.

The species is apparently very close to 7. fisstspina (Diesing), differing in
the length of the bifid spines as described by Seurat, the length of the buccal

202

capsule, the position of the most anterior body spines, the length of spicules
(shorter than observed for T. fissispina by any author), and the size of the female
worm. 7. fissispina has been recorded by Canavan (1931) from the Australian
pied goose, Anscranas semipalmata, from the Zoological Gardens, Philadelphia,
U.S.A.
Tetrameres australis n.sp.
(Fig. 36-38)

From Black Swan, Chenopsis «trata, from Tailem Bend. Male worms col-
lected, 7°8-9 mm. long. Lateral alae from °02 mm. behind head to -15 mm. Two
rows sublateral spines on each side of body; spines closer together and larger
anteriorly, becoming very thin and sparser posteriorly. Spine-like cervical
papillae 170» behind head; body spines beginning 140 from head end. Long
bifid spines in lateral alae (observed by Seurat in T. fissispina) present in this
species, though not so well marked. Jfead bearing six lips; mouth leading into
chitinized buccal cavity 28 long, 10% wide. Several (3-5 pairs) small teeth
on inner side of lateral lips; dorsal and ventral lips with large papillae, others
with smaller. Ocesophagus 1°7 mm. long. Longer spicule needle-like, proximal
end about 30 2 posterior to oesophagus, i.¢., length about 5°8-6°3 mm, Shorter
spicule wider, ‘8 mm. long, with blunt tip. Gubernaculum present, 20 » by 15 p.
Tail -3 mm. long. Body spines anterior to cloaca small and blunt, those posterior
modified into papillae and lying in lateral or subventral lines. Tip of tail bearing
several (probably five or six) small spines, as described for fourth stage larva of
T. fissispina and T. bisiurac, In the relative lengths of the spicule and body, this
species comes closest to T. telrica Travassos 1917. It is, however, much shorter
than that species, and differs also in the number of caudal papillae in the male.

LITERATURE
Cram, ©. B. 1927) Bull. N.S. Nat. Mus., 140
Canavan, W. P. 1931 Parasitol., 23, 196-2265
Ist, H. F. 1932 Peking Nat. Hist. Bull, 7, (2), 99-116
Linstow, ©. Arch. f. Naturg., 49, 274-314

THE SOILS AND VEGETATION OF PORTION OF KANGAROO ISLAND,
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By J. G. BALDWIN and R. L. CROCKER

Summary

This paper deals with the principal vegetation and soil relationships of the Hundreds of Menzies,
Cassini, Duncan, Seddon, Newland and MacGillivray, Kangaroo Island. It is the result of two
reconnaissance surveys; the first carried out by J. G. Baldwin in 1939, and the second by R. L.
Crocker in November, 1940.

263

THE SOILS AND VEGETATION OF PORTION OF KANGAROO ISLAND,
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By J. G. Barowrn and R. L. Crocker
{Read 14 August 1941]
Pirates XIV to XVII

IXTRODUCTION
This paper deals with the principal vegetation and soil relationships of the
TIundreds of Menzies, Cassini, Duncan, Seddon, Newland and MacGillivray,
Kangaroo Island. It is the result of two reconnaissance surveys; the first carried
out by J. G. Baldwin in 1939, and the second by R. L. Crocker in November, 1940,

GEOLOGY AND PHySIoGRAPHY

The dominant physiographic feature of this portion of the island is the low-
level lateritic peneplain. This is the backbone of the island, although it has in
places undergone considerable dissection. This plateau capping of lateritic iron-
stone gravel and laterite overlies altered Precambrian sedimentaries—inicaceous
sandstone, schists and quartzites. Recent calcareous dunes are prominent along
the southern coast, particularly in the neighbourhood of Cape Gantheaume, where
they reach their greatest development. They overlie an older consolidated dune
formation which ts exposed to the north and which gradually gives way to lateritic
ironstone and solonetzic soils. Consolidated dune limestone also occurs widely in
the area surrounding the Bay of Shoals. Limited Upper Tertiary basalt, prin-
cipally on plateau remnants, the Gap Hills, and glacial beds of doubtful Permo-
carboniferous age occurs in the Huncred of Menzies. Polyzoal Miocene limestone,
apparently of erratic occurrence, is found in this area also.

The rocks exposed on the break-away from the peneplain aleng the north
coast, Hundred of Cassini, are largely sandstones, conglomerates and sandy shales,
considered by Wade (4) as of doubtful Cambrian age.

Along the southern coast, west of Vivonne Bay, there are numerous small
outcrops of pegmatite and granite.

CLIMATE

The whole of Kangarco Island has been placed by Davidson (2) in his warm
temperate semi-humid zone with P/E > 0°5 for seven months of the year. One
of the notable features of the climate of the island, however, is its milder winter
and much cooler summer temperatures than adjacent regions on the mainland.
This considerably extends the actual growing period and period of effective
rainfall.

Unfortunately, rainfall records of a reliable nature and extending over a
sufficient length of time are very limited. Great difficulty, therefore, attends the
establishment of any relationship between rainfall and vegetation, but several local
rainshadow effects, as that along the coast near the Middle River Range, are
paralleled by vegetation changes and supported by local rainfail records. The
average annual rainfall at Kingscote is 19.10 inches, but it is very much higher
on the lateritic plateau, and in the area under consideration here reaches its
maximum in the vicinity of the headwaters of Middle River (Starvation Creek),
Hundred of Duncan, where it is probably about 27-28 inches.

Trans. Roy. Soc. §.A., 65, (2), 19 December 1941

264

THE SOILs
The soils of this area can be considered as falling into six large groups:
A. The lateritic soils of the peneplain and the slopes:
(1) elevated peneplain ;
(2) gravelly slopes;
(3) grey sandy slopes with variable lateritic gravel.
Grey and light grey siliceous sands.
Brown soils associated with older sedimentary rocks,
Solonetz soils.
Soils associated with dunes:

HOO

(1) consolidated dunes ;
(2) unconsolidated calcareous duncs.

F Basaltic soils.

A The Lateritic Soils.

Soils characterised by considerable percentages of lateritic gravel are very
widespread and are associated with the old peneplain that forms the backbone of
the island. The southern slope from the old peneplain level is more gradual than
the northern where the old level frequently extends almost to the coast before
dropping away suddenly. The principal soils associated with this area show some
variation in texture and amount of lateritic gravel, while phosphoric acid and
nitrogen levels are of the same order—exceedingly low. This and the constancy
of the associated vegetation indicate quite clearly that most of these variations
are not significant agriculturally, and from the point of view of future develop-
ment can be considered as one general type. (The very shallow soils associated
with dense conglomerate laterite and some of the sandy grey soils of valleys are
excluded from this generalisation.) This general type has a grey-brown loamy
sand to loam surface soil with variable amounts of lateritic gravel, and increases
in texture with depth to a yellow and yellow-grey clay at usually less than
27 inches. The upper clay horizons almost always include much gravel, but this
decreases with depth. The clay frequently shows red-brown inclusions or is
mottled. The analytical data on the profiles sampled within this type are given
in Tables I, II and If. The type is invariably associated with dry sclerophyll
forest or, towards its drier limits, sclerophyll scrub.

Very dense ironstone gravel and laterite, exposed at or very near the surface,
and associated with a rare mallec, Eucalyptus remota, occur in the north-west
portion of the Hundred of Newland and south-west Hundred of Duncan and
become increasingly important in the adjacent western areas.

B Grey and Light Grey Siliceous Sands.

The sandier grey soils associated with slopes and valleys where the lateritic
peneplain is dissected frequently support modificd vegetation associations. These
soils, however, usually contain some ironstone gravel and are very closely related
to the lateritic soils described above. ‘Their phosphoric acid and nitrogen status
is of the same order, though slightly lower.

In the vicinity of Mount Taylor and Mount Stockdale grey, light grey and,
white sands overlie dense cemented ironstone gravel, known locally as “con-
glomerate ironstone.” ‘The overlying sand is of very variable depth but most
frequently about 30 inches. and may include some ironstone gravel. Sometimes
it shows evidence of slight organic staining and the development of an organic
gravel pan above the conglomerate ironstone. These soils are the poorest sampled,
with nutrient levels ranging between 0-002-0-003% phosphoric acid and 0:033%
nitrogen. They support a very depauperate and open stringybark (£. Baxter?)

265

and white mallee (EF, diversifolia) association which, because of the sparseness
and stunted nature of the dominants, often appears heathlike. These ‘grey anid
white siliceous sands are probably re-sorted (aeolian) leached upper horizons of
the consolidated dune limestone to the south. They were first recognised by
Wade (lec. cit.) as “blown sand.”

C Brown Soils Associated with some of the Underlying Sedimentaries.

The rocks underlying the lateritic gravels on the peneplain belong to an older
sedimentary series that has undergone slight metamorphism, For the most part
they are altered shales and sandstones and quartzites. Some of these rocks
produce a brown loamy soil usually overlying brown or even red-brown clay at
a shallow depth. Although varying in profile they are characterised by consider-
ably higher fertility than the ironstone types and are associated with a savannah
dominated by sugar gum (E, cladocalyx). These soils are principally developed
on the Middle River Range and near Stokes Bay. In two very different profiles
sampled, the fertility levels are considerably higher than any of the lateritic types
(see Table 1). There is a remarkable difference in relative proportions of the
replaceable cations in these two profiles (Table II).

D Solonetz Soils.

In much of the Hundred of Menzies solonetz soils carry narrowleaf mallee
(E. cneorifolia) and black mallee (Z, rugosa). The surface is usually a brownish-
grey and yellow-grey sandy loam which overlies a well-structured columnar and
nutty clay usually at less than 10 inches. Sometimes the sandy loam horizon is
lacking, and in this case the soils may show “melon-holey” tendencies. There is
usually evidence of some free lime in the subsoil, and for the most part these soils
are developed over limestone or boulder clay. No laboratory analyses have yet
been made of this type, although analyses have been made of the solonetz soils
associated with narrowleaf mallee and broombush.

Shallow solonetz soils also occur in the flat, fairly low-lying areas between
the Cygnet River (Hundred of Menzies) and the peneplain in the Hundred of
MacGillivray and are associated with stunted narrowleaf mallee (EZ. cneorifolia)
and broombush (Melaleuca uncinata).

On most of the Hawk’s Nest—Birchmore Lagoon area (Hundred of Mac-
Gillivray) there are solonetzic soils with variable admixture of ironstone. But
there is also considerable complexity in this region and it is frequently difficult to
distinguish these intermediate soils from the ironstone gravel soils carrying white
mallee. Every gradation between the two types exists and the delineation on the
accompanying vegetation map should not be interpreted too rigidly.

E Soils Associated with Dunes,

Near the coast in the Hundreds of MacGillivray and Seddon there are extensive
calcareous sand dunes. Thése are fairly well known because of “‘coastiness” in
sheep ussociated with them. Although containing an appreciable percentage of
quartz sand, the dune material is predominantly calcareous, Being principally
composed of marine shell fragments, they are particularly high in phosphates.
These dunes abut against and overlie the older consolidated formation. The dis-
tribution and extent of these dune forniations are shown on the accompanying
vegetation imap.

Some consolidated dune limestone also oceurs in the Hundred of Menzies
near the Bay of Shoals,
I Basaltic Soils.

Limited areas of basaltic soils occur in the Wisanger-Retties Bluff region
(the Gap Hills) Hundred of Menzies and near The Bluff, Bay of Shoals, but
they are relatively unimportant and have not been sampled.

266

TABLE [

Range of Phosphoric Acid, Copper and Nitrogen Content and
pH of Principal Soil Groups

Locality Soil P,0,* Cu N pH pi
(Hundreds) Vegetation Soil Groups Phases % ppm, % Surface Subsoil
Stringybark Lateritic (a) 0.009-0.021 4-14 0.045-0.083 6.1-6.5 5.0-6.2
forest gravel
carat soils (b) 0.030.005 0.51 0.074-0.0775.2-5.9 5,4-5.6
Duncan,
Cassini, .
ial Mallee Lateritic (a) 0.006-0.013 4-12 6.069-0.109 6.4 5.4-6.7
Serub gravel
soils (bh) 0.004—0.005 1-3 0.044 6.8 5.6
Newland Depauperate Aeolian -—- 0.002-0.003 0.31 0.033 5.9 5.8
(Mt. Taylor) stringybark grey
forest siliceous
sands
Menzies Stunted Solonetz — 0.003-0,.905 04-1 0.046 6.6 7 .0-8.4
narrowleaf
mallee and
broom
MacGillivray Narrowleaf Solonetz = 0.003-0.006 0.3-1 0.037 6.4 77-89
mallee and
broom
MacGillivray Black Caleareoust — 0.12--0.09 — 0.02-0.01 8.2 8.6
(South) mallee dune sand
CE. ragesa)
Cassini Sugar gum Brown Soils ro 0.013-0.039 5.8 0.138-0.152 6.3-6.9 4.7-5.2
associations on old
Sedimentaries

(a) Normal phases.

(hb) Phascs admixed with grey

* The P,O, figures range through both surface and subsoil,

+ These analyses of the Cape Gantheaume sand were made by Mr. jy. 38.

LABORATORY EXAMINATION OF THE

siliccous sands.

Hosking.

Sains

Standard methods of analysis were used for the determinations to be briefly
described.

Mechanical Analysis.

Mechanical analyses of 92 samples from 15 profiles show a consistent pre-
dominance of fine sand over coarse sand. The analyses of representative profiles
are given in the appended tables. The high percentage of lateritic gravel is a
feature of most types.

Soil Reaction.

Soil reaction, plI, for surface soils is alkaline in the calcareous dunes but in
all the other types is acid. The highest value recorded is pH 8:2 for the upper
horizons of the calcareous dunes, and the lowest pH 5-2 for siliceous sandy soil
in the lateritic regions. The markedly alkaline subsoils of the solonctz soils is a
noteworthy feature and contrasts strikingly with the other soil types.

Nitrogen.

Total nitrogen determined on a number of surface and subsurface soils is
extremely low. The low figure of 0°033% was recorded for the siliceous
sands in the neighbourhood of Mount Taylor and Mount Stockdale.

The determinations are summarised in Table I.

267

Phosphoric Acid and Potash.
Analyses of hydrochloric acid extracts for phosphoric acid (P,O,) and

potash (K,O) were made on a number of samples. The phosphates (P,O,) are
very low except in the case of the brown, sugar gum soils, where they are low to
moderate, and the calcareous dunes in which they are high for Australian soils.
Potash (KO), as to be expected, shows a general relationship with clay content.
It is lowest in the grey siliceous sands of the Mount Taylor—Mount Stockdale
region, and the mixed grey sandy and lateritic soils. The solonetz soils are also
fairly low in potash. The potash levels in the brown and grey-brown lateritic
soils, and the brown soils associated with sugar gum, however, are moderate to
high. For example, one latcritic gravelly soil analysed, ranged between 0°184%
K,O in the surface horizon to 0°735% in the clay of the B, horizon at 12-14
inches.

Copper.

Spectrochemical analyses for copper were made on the hydrochloric acid
extracts of a number of sampley from 15 profiles. There are two well-marked
levels for copper. The grey-brown and brown lateritic gravel soils, and the brown
soils associated with sugar gum are higher with 4-14 parts per million of copper
over the first foot. The grey and white siliceous sands and the solonetz soils range
between 0-3-1 p.p.m. at the lower level. The copper status of the mixed lateritic
gravel and siliceous sand soils is intermediate between these two. The analyses
are summarised in Table I.

Saluble Salts,

otal soluble salts and chloride content is low and practically negligible. The
highest value recorded was in the deep subsoil of a solonetz soil sampled near
the old MacGillivray Schocl, but even here at a depth of 17-30 inches there was
only 0:272% total soluble gaits and 0:115% chlorides (as C1).

Replaceable Bases,

Representative results of some of the replaceable base analyses are set out
in Table II. Magnesium is the dominant base, although the proportion of calcium
cations is frequently higher in the surface horizons. Potassium is more prominent
than sodium in the ironstone (lateritic) soils and the brown (sugar gum) soils, but
the proportion of replaceable sodium cations is greater in the solonetz types.

Taste II
Replaceabie Bases in Kangaroo Island Soils

| Yotal bases

Soil Depth Clay ‘m.a/100 gm. Percentage of total bases
Soil Type No. Ginches) pH % _ Soil Ca _ Mg Koa
( 6088 0-2 6.1 10.2 | 4.0 55 30 10 5
1 Lareritic Sort: | 6089 2-7 6.2 14.4 3.9 31 51 13 5
(a) Stringybark mi. 4 6990 7-12 61 16.3 3.7 19 6!) 16 5
| 6092 14-18 5.8 58.2 7.0 10 73 11 6
l 6093 19-26 5.0 69.7 5.4 6 78 1 5
(b) E.diversifolia— —_§ 6105 17-22 6.7 52.4} 111 30 36 9 5
mallee oo... ... =| O11 10-14 6.0 62.5 j 8.6 22 58 13
6169 6-12 7.7 58.5 17.5 36 3 15 13
2 SoLoneTz wey De ERO 12-17 8.2 80.4 20.8 29 41 14 16
| 6171 17-30 8.9 85.1 20.6 31 31 18 20
L 6163 11-16 7.4 62.5 15.9 25 42 13 20
3 Brown Sous (sugar § 6174 43 4.6 4.60) 10 20 0 60 20

gum)

t 6178 5-10 6.2 52.6 26.8 29 ol 4 6

268

Tasce III
Mechanical Analysis of Kangaroo Island Soils

a Lateritic gravelly soils : Lateritic gravel soil
Soi eee. (£. Baxteri-E, obliqua) (E. diversifolia-F., cosmophylla)
Locality wae ae {Junct. Border Rd.-Wallis Rd. (Hd. Duncan) Eleanor Stn., Hd. Seddon

Soil Nowa, se 16088 6089 6090 6091 6092 6093 [6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106
Depth Gnches) v.. | O-2 2-7 7-12 12-14 14-18 19-26 [0-2 2-7 7-12 12-17 17-22 22-40

% %% %% % % % |% % Fo Fo Fo %
Gravel a we we [33.3 42.7 70.6 58.6 13.1 28.1 163.4 77.7 77.6 81.0 188 3.6
Coarse sand a. a. | 19.0 17.6 20.3 20.2 7.4 46 |104 111 169 28.7 94 6.6
Fine sand wu. a | 58.0 $5.7 52.0 43,8 22.2 13.5 [47.3 39.6 53.5 47.2 25.1 15.1
Silt 4. a we we | O79) 7070 GB OBL OL 1Z.S 108 GL F778
Clay us na om | 97) 135 «15.5 24.0 50.7 «60.4 «117.2 24.6 18.0 13.2 45.9 55.6

L. on acid treat. .... 1.2 1.2 0.7 02 0.4 0.9 1.3 1.0 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.3
Moisture Peri Ts 1.9 3.9 4.0 5.5 13.4 13.3 $.2 10.4 4.6 3.9 12.3 15.2.
L. on ignition ... 5.5 5.0 4.5 5.1 9.0 11.0 9.7 9.5 4.5 4.9 9.2 104

Total sol. salts... 0.020 0.027 0.023 0.021 0.023 0.060 0.014 0.014 0.006 0.005 0.012 0.011
Chlorides (CI)... 0.008 6.010 0.008 0.008 0.011 0,009 0.040 0.037 0.022 0.020 0.032 0.023

Reaction ph | 61 62 61 58 57 50 | 64 G3 66 69 67 68

Tas_Le III (continued)

Soil Type we e-em Siliceous sand Solonetz
Locality sist at a. |Mt. Stockdale (Hd. Newland? Sect. 3, Hd. MacGillivray
Sail Noo nn en | 154-6158 6186 6157 | 6165 6166 6167 6168 6169 6170 6171

Depth (inches) sake oat 0-4 4-8 8-12 12-18 0-2 2-4 4-6 6-11 11-12 12-17 17-30

% So % % | % % % % Sw % %

Gravel fea a bide = 1.8 37.5 73.4 44.4 49.8 67.0 46.9 3.1 3.4 4.0
Coarse sand aaa ww [29.5 29.7 30.3 31.8 18.7 14.7 13.3 13.7 5.7 2.7 1.6
Fine sand ... dash Ai 65.1 66.3 65.5 61.6 72.1 77,9 79.6 77.6 26.9 12.0 9.1
Silt... fae ve Sits 0.9 1.0 0.8 11 3.4 3.5 3.8 4.8 al 1.8 1.3
Clay bes joke rr 2.3 2.6 5.3 4.9 3.8 3.0 2.9 3.6 50.5 67.6 68.6
L. on acid treat... sect 0.2 0,2 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.4 1.2 1.4 5.3
Moisture eke ate pte 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.5 1.1 0.6 0.6 0.7 ALS 15.1

L. on ignition te pen 1.9 1.2 L2 17 2.4 1.6 1.3 11 6.9 7.9

Total soluble salts saps 0.023 0.029 0.020 0.020 0.922 0.020 0.020 0.022 0.122 0.182
Chlorides (CH) ee 0.014 0.010 0.005 0.004 0.006 0.004 0.004 0.005 0.060 0.086
Reaction pH am | 39) 8B 64. 67 70 73 77 &2_

Tasre IIT (continued)

Soil Type... Brown soil (sugar gum) ; Brown soil (sugar gum)
Loeality Sect. 38, Hd. Duncan Sect. 75, Hd. ¢ i

Soil No. ae nies anne ay 6172 6173 bl74 6175 6176 6177 6178 6178A
Depth Gnches) eae OR L-4 4-13...13-20 | 0-2 2-5) S-20—s0-17

% % % Go Yo Yo Go %

Gravel Bie she 8. agi 39.9 32.1 29.9 12.0 13.6 13.9 13.9 7.1
Course sand teks ai wee 16.4 14.2 11.0 6.4 13.1 15.3 7.9 5.3
Tine sand... bate din ae 47.5 44.4 41.2 44.7 57.8 60.0 28.0 15.7
Silt oo... sett See ake ab 22.4 28.3 30.5 34.8 7.2 7.2 7.1 3.8
Clay... ide eat? ssa ste 6.8 9.0 14.1 14.9 12.6 12,2: 47.5 59.6
Ll. on acid treat. ... Lape we HOLS 1.5 1.1 0.4 1.0 0.9 0.7 1.4
Moisture sett ars dats dade 2.5 2.7 2.6 1.7 4.5 2.8 9.7 14.0
L. on ignition ce bene at 8.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 6.6 3.9 7.3 8.8
Total soluble salts cate wine 0.025 0.024 0.034 0.028 0.025 0.024 0.034 0.028
Chlorides (CI) aude anne sug 0.011 4.010 0.015 0.011 0.011 0.010 0.015 0.011
Reaction pH ay eae Hee OD 3.3 4.6 a7 | 6.3 6.2 6.2 5.5

269

THE VEGETATION

The ecology of Kangaroo Island has always been recognised as a very
complex problem. This has been due to the scarcity of accurate soil and climatic
data and the fact that many of the dominant species have a wide potential edaphic
habitat, though under the prevailing climate and the very poor soil conditions they
frequently border their environmental limits. The principal factors controlling
the distribution of vegetation in the six Hundreds surveyed are undoubtedly
edaphic. Climate is of secondary import and has a more gradual effect as species
reach their edapho-climatic limits. As specics approach these linuts they become
more depauperate and stunted and slowly disappear altogether. If soil changes
were as gradual as climatic progression, their effect on vegetation would doubtless
be similar, but they are usually more clear-cut,

The general ecology of Kangaroo Island has already been included in a paper
by Wood (5). The emphasis, however, was then on climatic control and the soils
were not understood. The paper was of great importance in elucidating the
geographical affinities of the flora and the light it threw on vegetation migrations.
It stressed the very high percentage of endemic species on the island and their
concentration in the central and western regions. A detailed ecological survey
has been made in the very complex area about Hawk’s Nest Station by Cash-
more. Professor J. B. Cleland has also collected very widely in the region.

Unfortunately, very widespread bushfires swept over more than a third of
the area some six months before this survey was conducted and made the estab-
lishment of soil and vegetation relationships exceedingly difficult and the floristics
far from complete.

Eleven important associations are recognised in this central portion of Kan-
garoo Island and are summarised below in Table 1V. Most of them are mapped
on the accompanying vegetation map, but as climatic complexes‘) are involved
the boundaries are in these cases somewhat arbitrary.

Taste IV

The Vegetation Associations
Edaphic complex or

betty this

Association Soil Type climatic complex Formation
. obliqua E, Baxteri—E, cosmophylla Dry sclerophyll
Baxteri—E. cosmophylla | Lateritic soils al climatic complex forest
. diversifolia—E, cosmo- (with some siliceous sand)
phyla | E. Baxrteri—E. casmophylla
. remola (heavy laterite) —f, diversifolia edaphic | Sclerophyllous
Baxteri—E. diversifolia Siliceous sand complex scrub

_ cosmophylla—M. ancinata Cambrian (7?) sedimentaries
. cneorifolia— Melaleuca

uncinata Solonetz FE. cneorifolia—

M. uncinata
. cneorifolia—E, rugosa Solonetzic EF, eneorifoha— Mallee scrub

EE, rugosa
. diversifolia—E, rugosa Consolidated dunes |

_ 2. rugosa—E. diverstfolia Sclerophyllous
. rugosa Calcareous dunes J edaphic complex mallee scrub
. cladocalyx (sugar gum) Brown soils E. cladocalyx Savannah
(old sedimentaries) woodland

@) Cashmore, A. B-——Unpublished Report.

@) The concept of climatic complex is used where soil type remains relatively uniform
and vegetation association changes are an expression of climatic factors. This may be
considered analogous to Wood’s edaphic complex.

270

| CREF
gs1l0}00 7
Ma420k ‘TH

di OMS FOPL LT
xAPDI0 pV)? FT

nsobnd 7

psobns G- DYOfSLeAlp

wsobne if vryofpLoaia
wy “Jy - viyofitous 7
| ppouzoun vonapnjsyy- vy dyouser YT

PIO IL ns

mpAydnusoo ‘fi DYOLISLAAID “FT

| npdydoutsaa TE ~ 2LAIXOS OT

pyofis.<aayo “OF - 24apeg IT

Z
SS

SNOILVIOOSSY NOILVL3AD3IA

OILS OF

3.998 ONL

ise MS ca ¥ cae.

Tyo

GNY1S! CONVONVH 40 NOILYOd TVHLNIO
oN AWA HOLLY LIOIA

271

1 &. Baxteri—E. cosmophyila climatic complex.

This complex is associated with the lateritic and gravel soils and their variants
admixed with grey siliceous sands, on the plateau and plateau slopes. Where
rainfall conditions are high enotigh (24-25), F, obligua becomes a co-dominant
with £. Baxleri and under optimum conditions may replace it altogether, as in the
Starvation Creek area (not mapped separately ).

Over a great part of the plateau region L. Baxteri, LE. obliqua and E. cosmo-
phylla are co-dominants, although frequently stunted. The undershrubs are
typically sclerophyllous. Of the taller undershrubs Casuarina striata (bulloak)
is often abundant and may form a, dense society, varying between three and eight
feet high. Other tall shrubs of wide occurrence are Banksia marginata (honey-
suckle), Banksia ornala (broad-leaved honeysuckle), Hakea rostrata and
NXanthorrhoca Tateana. Although these taller shrubs are frequently conspicuous
and may give the association a particular physiognomy, there is no definite de-
markation into an “upper and lower” shrub stratum, The lower shrubs most
important are Daviesia genistifolia, D. brevifolia, Adenanthos terininalis, Lhotskya
glaberrima, Phyllota pleurandroides, Pultenaca viscidula, Logania ovata, Spyri-
dium sp., Petrophila multisecta, [sopegon ceratophulins, Tetratheca halmaturina,
T. evicifolia, LHibbertia stricta, H, sericea, H, fasciculata, Lepidosperma car-
phoides, Lepidospermus sp. Gompholobtiun minus and Leucepogon CONCHIVIS.

Other plants present, though usually of less abundance, are Melaleuca gibbosa,
Caustis pentandra, Platylobnem obtusangiulum, Spyrtdiiim thymifolinm, Cono-
spermum patens, Leptospernmam marsinoides, [libbertia stricta vat. glabriusculd,
Boronia filifolia, Pimelia octophylla, Pimelia sp., Choretrium spicclum, Adenanthos
sericea, Pultenaca trinervis and Dillwynia floribimnda. ‘This association, with minor
floristic differences (principally the absence of species endemic to Kangaroo
Island}, is the same as that described by Adamson and Osborn on Fleurieu
Peninsula (1).

As has been mentioned earlier, there is a good deal of admixture of gravel
soils with grey siliceous sand in parts of the plateau region. As can be scen from
reference to Table I, the phosphoric acid and copper levels are somewhat lower in
the siliceous types but nitrogen and pil are of the same order. These grey soils
earry an almost identical association—there are, however, changes in the frequency
of species, and the greater importance of Leptospermum myvrsinoides (tea-trec),
Adenanthos sericca and Platylobiian obtusangulim is noticeable, Some new
species like Lypolaena fastigiata, Epacris iampressa and Grevillea quinguenervis
may be present, while Pultenaca viscidula, Logania oveta and Daviesia g mistifolia
are rarely, if ever, mmportant.

Loudonia Behrii is very widespread on the island, particularly following
fire, or some other severe setback to an association, like clearing.

2 FE. Baxteri—l. diversifolia--E. cosmophylla edaphic complex.
E. diversifolia—E. cosmophylla association.

Where the rainfall is too low (probably below 21”) for £. Baxleri (stringy-
bark) dry sclerophyll forest, it gives place to a sclerophyll serub dominated by
Eucalyptus diversifolia (white mallee ) and E. cosmophvla (swamp or cup gum).
Many, indeed most, of the associated undershrubs remain and ihe transition with
gradually decreasing rainfall is very eradual, the £. Baxteri first becoming very
stunted and sometimes mallee-like in habit before disappearing altogether. ‘he
aaracteristics of the soil remain apparently the same, there still being

profile cl
The fertility levels of the soils. as shown

much admixture of ironstone gravel.
in Table 1, are of the same order.

272

The most important and consistently associated plants are Xanthorrhoea
Tateana (yacca), Melaleuca uncinata (broombush), Casuarina striata, Banksia
marginata, Hakea rostrata, Daviesia genistifolia, D. brevifolia, Lhotzkya glaber-
rima, Calythrix tetragona, Adenanthos terminalis, Tetratheca ericifolia, Melaleuca
gibbosa, Petrophila multisecta, Lepidosperma concavum, Hibbertia spp., Spyrt-
dium spp. (principally S. spathulatum), Leucopogon concurvis and Lsopogon
ceratophyllus.

The grasses Stipa semibarbata and Danthonia setacea are usually present very
sparingly, but in the first year following fire may become locally prominent.

Eucalyptus leptophylla (narrowleaf mallee) occasionally occurs as a co-
dominant, but the edaphic variation of which it is indicative is not yet fully under-
stood. £. fasciculosa (pink gum) also occurs occasionally but is usually confined
to slopes where there is a tendency for the older sedimentaries to break through.

Eucalyplus remota association.

On the very shallow soils over dense laterite which occur in north-west
Tlundred of Newland, and which become more extensive further west, is a
sclerophyllous scrub association dominated by the restricted mallee, £. reimota
(bastard mallee). Edaphic conditions, owing to the shallowness of the soil and
the apparent denseness of the laterite, must be too severe for stringybark. The
rainfall is probably between 23-26 inches.

The sclerophyllous undershrubs are largely those common throughout the
sclerophyll association; most prominent are Hakea rostrata, Banksia marginata,
B. ornata, Adenanthos terminalis, Pctrophila multisecta, Phyllota pleurandroides,
Grevillea quinquenervis and Hibbertia spp., Tetratheca spp., Leucopogon spp., etc.
Pultenaea canaliculata var, latifolia and P. viscidula are of somewhat irregular
occurrence. The association is often given a marked physiognomy by the preva-
lence of Banksia ornata.

Eucalyptus Baxteri—E., diversifolia association.

On the grey and grey-white siliceous sands which overlie “conglomerate iron-
stone” in the Mount Stockdale—Mount Taylor region, Hundred of Newland, is a
very open association dominated by dwarfed E. Baxteri, E. diversifolia and
E. cosmophylla, These soils are the poorest: sampled on the Island (see Table I),
and the association is so open and the dominants frequently so depauperate that it
becomes heathlike. Phosphates (P,O,) are as low as 0°002-0-003%. It 1s inter-
esting to note that E. Baxrteri is enabled to grow further south, on this soil type,
which allows it to exploit a lower rainfall, than on the brown lateritic gravel soils.
‘There is further evidence for this on the island. On the spur that extends from
the Middle River Range towards Stokes Bay, and lies within a rain shadow of
the Range, #, Baxteri is associated with E. diversifolia on the grey and grey-white
siliceous sands but docs not grow on the adjacent ironstone (lateritic) gravel soils.

This demonstrates clearly that the edapho-climatic range of a species may
vary considerably, ‘The distribution of an association depends entirely on the
potential edapho-climatic limits of its individual species and the variability of soil
and climate. The E. Baxteri—E. diversifolia association has very definite sclero-
phyll affinities and many plants of the plateau sclerophyll communities occur here.
The chief associated plants are Petrophila multisecta, Xanthorrhoea Tateana,
Hakca rostrata, Banksia ornata, B. marginata, Leptospermum muyrsinoides,
Lhotzkya glaberrima, Hypolaena fastigiata, Caustis pentandra, Casuarina Mueller-
iana, Adenanthos sericea, Calythrix teltragona, Dambiera lanceolata, Lepidosperma
carphoides, Lepidosperma sp. Platylobiwm obtusangulum and Grevillea qutin-
quenervis. This association appears to have definite affinities with the E, Baxteri

273

heathlands of Hundreds of Laffer and Willalooka, South-East, South Australia
(Taylor (3) ).

3 E. cneorifola—Melaleuca uncinata edaphic complex.

E. cneorifolia—M, uncinata association.

Solonetzic soils occur widely in the Hundred of MacGillivray and south of the
lower Cygnet River, Hundred of Menzies. They are associated with an assemblage
of plants dominated by stunted £. cncorifoha and M. uncinata. There are two main
variations within the association—-(@) low-lying solonetz soils south of Cygnet
River, between the river and the plateau, and (b) elevated solonetz soils of the
Birchmore Lagoon—MacGillivray area, very frequently admixed with a little iron-
stone gravel.

(a) The associated plants arc Thryptomene ericaea, Lhotskya glaberrima,
Hakea alicina, Dodonaea hexandra, cidenanthos terminalis, Grevillea ilicifolia,
Petrophila multisecta, Spyridium sp., Melaleuca gibbosa, Brachyloma ericoides,
Calythrix tetragona and Casuarina striata, Stunted E. rugosa occurs very
sparingly.

(b) In the MacGillivray area there is considerable complexity and in places
mutch lateritic gravelly soil with . diversifolia and E. cosmophylla occurring spar-
ingly. The solonetz soils are not as clear-cut as in (@) and there is consequently a
greater number of sclerophyll types associated. The principal species occurring
in addition to the dominants (E. cneorifolia is less stunted here) are Thryptomene
ericaca, Lhotzkya glaberriina, Dodonaea Baueri, Casuarina striata, Xanthorrhoea
Tateana, Hakea rostrata, H. rugosa, Leucopogon rufus, Grevillea ilicifolia,
Adenauthos terminalis, Calythrix tetragona and Lasiopetalum Bauert.

E, cosmophylla—M. wncinata association.

On the slope from the plateau level to the coast adjacent to the Stokes: Bay—
Dashwood Bay region older sedimentaries, sandstones and shales are exposed,
and the soil cover is fairly thin. Here an association occurs which is given a
particular facies by the dominance of dwarfed FE, cosmophylla and M. uncinata.
The associated plants are sclerophyllous undershrubs and shrubs, Casuarina
striata, Xanthorrhoca Tateana, Adenanthos, Petrophila, ctc.). F. fasciculosa is
sparingly present and proceeding back from the coast the association merges

gradually into the EK. Barteri—L. obliqua on the plateau proper.

4 E. encorifolia—E. rugosa edaphic complex.

Over a great portion of the Hundred of Menzies developed over glacial clays
and limestones are soils with well-structured clays and apparently solonetzic. They
all appear to have free lime in the subsoil, Although most of this area has been
cleared for agricultural development, there is sufficient vegetation remaining along
roads to define the association. The soils have not been fully investigated and no
analyses have heen made on the soil samples collected.

This edaphic complex is a typical mallee one dominated by two tall mallees,
E. eneorifolia and E. rugosa (black mallee), both of which frequently grow to
25 feet high.

The principal associated plants are Dodonaca Baueri, Melaleuca acuminata,
Acacia armaia, Choretrum glomeratiun, Dodonaea sp., Thryptomene ericaea,
Acacia acinacea, Acacia sp., Prostanthera spinosa, Eremophila glabra, Goodenia
varia, Helichrysum retusum, Calythrix tetragona, Senecio odoratus, and Mela-
leuca gibbosa. The chief grasses are species of Stipa and Danthonia.

On the old dune limestone that occurs in the North Cape and Bay of Shoals
region this association is replaced by a very mixed mallee association which has

274

closer affinities with the E. diversifelia—E, rugosa association of the consolidated
dunes.

5 £E. rugosa—F, diversifolia edaphic complex.

This complex occurs on the consolidated and unconsolidated dunes of the
southern portions of the Llundreds of Newland, Seddon and MacGillivray and on
consolidated dunes elsewhere.

E. diversifolia—l, rugosa association.

The dominant mallee on consolidated dunes is FA. diversifolia, but E. rugosa
is frequently present. E. oleosa ? is also found very sparingly. Associated with
the mallees are a large number of sclerophyllous shrubs and undershrubs, principal
of which are Grevillea itcifolia, Lhotskva glaberrima, Spyridium halmaturinumn
(var.), S. spathulatum, Hakea ulicina, H, vittata, Templetonia retusa, Beyeria
Leschenaultii, Lasiopetalium Schulzenii, Pultenaea acerosa, P. canaticulata,
Goodenia sp. (near G. varia), Dampiera lanceolata, Leucopogon costatus, Acacia
myrtifolia, Olearia ciliata var. squamifolia, Stylidium Tepperianum, Microcybe
pauciflora, B. marginata, Petrophila multisecta, Daviesia genistifolia, Calythrix
telragona, Xanthorrhoea Tateana (rarely), Prostanthera aspalathoides and
Choretrum glomeratum.

The principal grasses are Danthonia setacea and Stipa sp. (probably
S. eremophila).

In the Bay of Shoals—North Cape region Prostanthera aspalathoides, Ere-
mophila glabra, Dodonaea Baueri and Melaleuca pubescens are prominent.
M. pubescens is also very important on the Woakwine Range, a consolidated dune
range in the lower South-East of South Australia.

£. rugosa association.

This association has only been investigated at two places, but on the uncon-
solidated dunes, where examined, there is a community dominated by £. rugosa,
while E. diversifolia and E, oleosa (?) also occur, though much less prominently.
There is not the wealth of associated species as on the consolidated dunes, and as
one approaches nearer the coast the mallees become very dwarfed and much
sparser and there are increases in the number of purely coastal species,

The major species recorded were Dodonaea humilis, Melaleuca pubescens)
Acacia ligulata, Lasiopetalum discolor, Spyridium phalicoides, Choretrin,
glomeratum, Microcybe pauciflora, Gahnia deusta and Scaevola crassifolia.

6 Eucalyptus cladocalyx (sugar gum) edaphic complex.

E. cladocalyx is prominent both on alluvial soils along creeks and on some
of the soils derived from the old sedimentaries, as on the Middle River Range
and near Stokes Bay. The association along creeks is very variable owing to both
varying fertility and water relationships.

E. cladocalyx association.

The fertility levels of the red-brown and brown soils associated with the
sugar gum are noticeably higher than of the lateritic gravel type of the plateau.
Here E. cladocalyx reaches its highest development in a savannah woodland, which
may at times be almost closed. Undershrubs and shrubs are rare and grasses are
scattered with only a rare tendency to form a continuous ground cover.

Acacia pyenantha, A, obliqua and A. armata are of frequent and usual
occurrence, Other prominent species include Olearia teretifolia, Pultenaea
daphnoides and the low sclerophyllous undershrubs Hibbertia stricta, H. acicularis

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1941 Vol. 65, Plate XIV

Fig. 1 Eucalyptus obliqua association—l mile east of Archway Lagoon,
Hundred of Gosse

Fig. 2) Eucalyptus cneerifola—E, rugosa association, Hundred of Menzies

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

‘ .
Pe ts - ; e
Po
é
i ‘
. a
oe -
- .
3 .
2
&
6
“a se

Fig. 1 Eucalyptus cosmophylla—k,

diverstfolia

Fig. 2

Hundred of MacGillivray

Vol. 65, Plate XV

: ist

association

Eucalyptus cneoritfolia—Melaleuca wuncinata association,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 1941 Vol, 65, Plate XVI

Be Sa Ge.

Fig. 2. Eucalyptus remota association, Hundred of Gosse

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1941 Vol. 65, Plate XVII

a
’
it |
: o
K 4
\ ‘ a

—

1 Eucalyptus cladocalyx association—Middle River Range,
Hundred of Duncan

Fig. 2) Eucalyptus diversifolia—E. rugosa association on consolidated
dune limestone

275

var. sessiliflora, Astroloma conostephioides and Acrotriche depressa. Stipa
eremophila and Danthonia setacea are the most frequent grasses.

In many places, as an expression of varying and probably intermediate
edaphic conditions, certain conspicuous menbers of the sclerophyll communities
may be present; the most noticeable of these are Xanthorrhoca Tateana (yacca),
Casuarina striata (bulloak), Melaleuca gibbosa, Grevillea ilicifolia, Leptospermum
myrsinoides and Lepidosperma concavum,

Vegetation of the Salt Swamp.

In Hundred of Menzies there is a limited amount of salt swamp and tidal salt
marsh unfit for agriculture. The ecology of this area has not been studied closely.
The saltwater tea-tree (Melaleuca halinaturoruwm) is of common occurrence,
together with samphires, principally Arthrocnenwunt halocnemoides var. per-
granuatum and the matlike Wilsenia rotundtfolia,

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

Tt is desired to acknowledge a great deal of help from Mr. T. H. Strong and
Mr. J. K. Taylor, both of the Division of Soils, C.S.LR. Miss C. M. Eardley
assisted with the identifications. The eucalypt identifications were made by Mr.
W. I. Blakely. Mr. A. C. Oertel, Division of Soils, carried out the spectro-
chemical analyses for copper.

REFERENCES CITED
(1) Avamson, R. S., and Osnorn, ‘T. G. B. 1924 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,
48

(2) Davipnson, J. 1936 Jbid, 60
(3) Tayror, J. K. 1933 Bull. 76, CS.LR. (Aust.)
(4) Wane, A. 1915 Bull. 4, Mines Dept. of S. Aust.
(5) Woop, J. G. 1930 Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 54

BATHERS' ITCH (SCHISTOSOME DERMATITIS) IN THE
MURRAY SWAMPS, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, University of Adelaide

Summary

In 1937 was described Cercaria jaenschi from the pond snail, Amerianna pyramidata,” from
Tailem Bend (Johnston and Cleland, 1937).

276

BATHERS’ ITCH (SCHISTOSOME DERMATITIS) IN THE
MURRAY SWAMPS, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By T. Harvey Jounston, University of Adelaide
[Read 11 September 1941]

In 1937 was deseribed Cercaria jaenschi from the pond snail, Amerianna
pyramidata,“) {rom Tailem Bend (Johnston and Cleland, 1937),

It was shown to belong to Miller’s (1923; 1926) Group C. of brevifurcate,
apharyngeate distome cercariae and to be closely related to C. dowthitti Cort (1915)
from North America, This group, together with Group A (which includes the
human schistosomes), Group B (Schistosomuim spindale), Group D (C, ocellata,
C. elvae) and certain others, all belong to the Schistosomatidae. Faust, in 1920,
published his criteria for the differentiation of schistosome larvae. C. douthitti
was re-studied by Miller (1924) and has since been shown by Price (1929; 1931)
to be the larva of Schistosomatium douthitti, which occurs in small North
American rodents. Penver (1939) has carried on further experimental work with
the species. The life history of a related bloodfluke, S. pathlocopticuim was traced
by Tanabe (1923), who obtained the adult stage by experimental infection of mice.
In view of the fact that C, douthitti was reported by Cort (1928 b) to be a causa-
tive agent of bathers’ itch in Michigan, U.S.A., it was suggested by Johnston and
Cleland (1937) that a similar dermatitis might occur in South Australia,

C. jaenschi has been found in Amerianna pyramidata on many occasions
between October and May, 1937 to 1941, since its description was published. An
additional host is A. pectorosa from Robe. We have attempted, without success,
to infect rats and pigeons.

In 1939 was published an account of another South Australian schistosome
cercaria, C. paerecellata from Limnaca lessoni from Swan Reach (Johnston and
Simpson 1939). It was shown to belong to Miller’s Group D, and to be closely
related to C. ocellata from Europe and C. elvae from U.S.A. Attempts to infect
a duck were unsuccessful. C. ocellata has been shown by Brumpt (1931; 1936)
to be the larva of Trichobilharzia ocellata, aud closely related to it is the cercaria
of Bilharsiella polonica, both of these schistosomes occurring in ducks. C, paro-
cellata is probably the larva of a Trichobilharzia, A species of that genus has
been found on a few occasions in the intestinal veins of the black swan, Chenopts
atrata, in the same swamp at Tailem Bend as the cerearia, and will probably prove
to be the adult stage of 7. parocellata. C. parecellata has been recognised only
twice since originally described, having been collected from Limnaea lessont at
Tailem Bend in December 1940 and February 1941. It should be stated that the
host species has been relatively uncommon in the locality during the past few
years, since the Murray Barrage has affected the level (and perhaps the chemical
composition) of the water in the river and swamps. Attempts to infect a duck,
pigeons and rats have not succeeded.

As a result of enquiries made since the publication of the account of
C. jaenschi, it has been ascertained that bathers’ itch occurs at times during
summer and autumn in the swampy areas adjacent to the Murray River at Tailem

C) Cotton and Godfrey (Gastropoda of South and Central Australia, 1938, 36) indicated
that Amerianna Strand 1928 is the correct name for the freshwater gastropod genus Ameria
nom praeoce, The terms Bulinus, Bullinus, Physa, and Isidera have all been applied to this
group of snails in Australia. :

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (2), 19 December 1941

Bend and at Mannum. Mr. G. Jaensch and several members of his family have
from time to time reported to us that they have been subjected to an irritating
itching while wading or bathing in the swamp at Tailem Bend, but not when
bathing in the main river. The itch was at first regarded as due to attacks by
aquatic insects and was recognised as distinct from the effects of bites by the local
leeches such as Limnobdella australis, The condition was more common at times
when the “bubble snail,” Lininaea lessoni, had been blown close to the shore by
winds which had caused the snails to accumulate in certain parts of the swamp.
On one occasion Mr. Jaensch, who was then collecting L. lessoni for our work,
had a large number of them, together with some Amerianna spp., in an open tank
near his home, awaiting our arrival. We observed that his forearms showed the
typical small rounded reddish lesions and pustules just like those figured by
Brumpt (1936, fig. 362 bis) as occurring in Trance as a result of invasion by
C. ocellata; and by Cort (19284) as caused by C. elvae in Michigan. Attempts
by the author and members of his staff to infect their arms in the same tank were
unsuccessful, and subsequent attempts, using C. parecellata from snails brought
back to Adelaide, were also ineffective. The result of cercarial attack has been
stated by American observers to depend on the number of larvae penetrating at
the time, as well as on the individual stsceptibility of the person attacked.

Mr, B. C. Cotton, Conchologist, South Australian Museum, reported that
he and his brother had experienced a pronounced attack in February 1930, while
wading in order to collect mussels (J7yridella australis) in a small billabong
adjacent to the Murray River at Mannum, An intense itching had developed,
then followed red lesions like those caused by biting insects, the urticaria
increased, scratching led to some bleeding, and methylated spirits were applied
to the affected parts (from the waist to the feet) in the hope of relieving the
irritation. The sufferers had been unable to sleep. during the night, but the condi-
tion began to subside next day and disappeared the following day. Mr. Cotton
stated that he had had similar (though less marked) symptoms while collecting
molluscs in the swamps at Tailem Bend. Mr. L. Ellis, of Tailem Bend, informed
us of prickling sensation, followed by pronounced itching, experienced by him
while wading during duck-shooting in the local swamp.

The symptoms seen or described were similar to those reported by Cort
(1928; 1936). Matheson (1930), Taylor and Baylis (1930), Vogel (1930) and
Brumpt (1936). Since the three cercariae especially responsible, as had been
proved experimentally by these authors, in North America and Europe were
C. elvae, C. stagnicola and C, ocellata, we have little doubt that C. parocellata
which is very closely related to them, is the main agent in the Murray swamps.
Tt has been mentioned that Brumpt (1931; 1936) proved that C. ecellata reached
maturity (as a Trichobilharsia) in European ducks. Mathias (1930) succeeded
in infecting fowls as well as ducks with it. We regard the 7richobilharsia
occurring in the local black swans as likely to be the adult stage, though an attempt
to infect Limnaca has not yet succeeded. C, jaenschi is probably able to cause
schistosome dermatitis in view of its close similarity to C. dowthitt#, which is a
minor causative cercaria in U.S.A., Since Schistosomatium douthitti has been
found experimentally and naturally infecting small North American rodents
(H. Price 1929; 1931—Penner 1938; 1939), it seems likely that the adult stage
of C. jaenschi will be found in the Australian water rat, Hydromys leucogaster,
which occurs in the swamps and is the only aquatic rodent in the area. It should
be mentioned that FE. Price (1929) described Paraschistosomatium anhingae from
a darter, Anhinga anhinga, irom Texas, and stated that the genus was closest to
Schistosomatium. Anhinga novachollandiae occurs in the Murray swamps.

The first to investigate schistosome dermatitis seems to have been Cort

(1928 a. b), who proved that C. elvae Miller (1923 ; 1926; 1927) was an important

278

causative agent in Michigan. He described the condition and stated that the larva
entered through the hair follicles. He referred to a similar dermatitis occurring
in Japanese rice fields and known as “Wabure,” which was regarded by some
investigators (Narabayashi 1916; Matsuura 1909) as caused by invading cer-
cariae of Schistosoma japonicum, but other workers (Miyagawa 1913; Faust and
Meleny 1924) did not accept that view. I*iilleborn (1932) regarded it as due io
invasion by uon-human schistosomes. Cort considered the severity of bathers’
iich to be due, at least in part, to reactions of an abnormal host.

Cort (1928 b) proved that C. dowfhitti could, under experimental conditions,
produce lesions similar to those caused by C. elvae, He had already indicated
that C. douthitti could utilise snails belonging to the genera Linmaeca and Physa
(Cort 1918). Christenson and Greene (1928) found C, elzae to be responsible
for bathers’ itch in Minnesota.

Szidat, in 1930, recorded the occurrence of a dermatitis in East Prussia and
suggested that the agent might be the cercaria of Bilharziella polonica, but he sub-
sequently informed Cort (1936) that that larva did not penetrate human skin, this
statement being supported by the experience of Brumpt (1936).

Dermatitis was reported in 1930 as occurring in a small artificial lake at
Cardiff, England, by Matheson (1930) who regarded the organism as C. elvae,
and by Taylor and Baylis 1930 who identified the cercaria as C. ocellata. Vogel
(1930) reported many cases in north-western Germany and proved by means of
sections that C. occllata had penetrated the skin in experimental infections.
Brumpt (1931 a, b) reported the latter cerearia to be the causative agent in France,
and traced its life history. Wesenberg-Lund (1934) referred to earlier records
of dermatitis in Europe and North America and reported an outbreak in Den-
mark in 1931, most probably due to C. ocellata which was known to occur in the
same area,

McLeod (1934) recorded dermatitis as common in paris of Manitoba,
Canada, where over 50% of bathers were at times affected. ‘he agents were
stated to be C. elvae, C. wardlei and C. bajkovi, \.a Rue (1935) discussed the
ecology of the condition in Michigan.

In 1936 Cort and his associates began 1o publish a series of studies on
schistosome dermatitis. In the first contribution Cort (1936a) gave a review of
the literature. Ile pointed out that penctration of the human skin by cercariae of
the three htuman schistosomes seldom produced a significant dermatitis, At least
five non-human schistosome cercarie had been shown experimentally to be able to
produce dermatitis—C. ocellata, C. douthitti, C. elvae, C. physellae and C. stagni-
colue. The cereariae reported by him in 1928 as C. elvae were stated to have been
probably C. physellae and C, stagnicolae, Of the five species mentioned by Cort,
all but C. douthit#i were very similar in structure and had the same flame cell
pattern and number of penetration glands, and possessed fin folds on the tail
furcae. He went on to state that it seemed possible that the penctration of the
human skin and the production of a dermatitis would be found to be a charac-
teristic of all cercariac belonging to that group, and that any new species found
with the same general morphology should be placed under suspicion, He
remarked on the great variation in susceptibility of individuals to invasion. The
character of the skin lesions suggested that the invading cercariae were definitely
walled off by the host reaction (a defensive mechanism) and did not reach the
decper tissues or blood stream. ‘The available evidence suggested that the severity
of the dermatitis was a manifestation of the natural immumity of man to a non-
specific species of parasite, this view being supported by the fact that no com-
parable dermatitis was ordinarily produced by the cercariae of any human
schistosome when they penetrated the skin of man, their natural host.

279

Watarai (1936) discussed the reaction caused by the cercariae of S. japonicum
when applied to the skin of animals, Culbertson and Talbot (1935; 1936), as
well as Tubangui and Masilungan (1936), had drawn attention to an antagonistic
property of normal sera, the cerearicidal action. The production of a histolytic
ferment by certain furcocercariae, permitting their penetration of tissucs, was
studied by Davis (1936 a,b), and Hunter and Hunter (1937) showed that such
a ferment occurred in the cerearia of Cryptocotyle.

Talbot (1936) carried out life-history studies on three of the cereariae
mentioned by Cort (1936 a), C. elvav, C. stuynicolae and C. physellae, the last
two being described by Talbot as new, Attempts to infect ducks, gulls, pigeons
and rats with each of the three kinds of cereariae were unsuccessful, Cort and
Talbot (1936) then gave an account of their observations on the behaviour during
their free life of the three species just referred to, as well as C. douthitti, Swales
(1936) reported C. elvae, C. sp. (determined by Talbot as C. stagnicolae) as caus-
ing dermatitis in Manitoba, and cousidered that Mcleod (1934) was in error
regarding C. wardle: and C. bajkovi as agents, these latter being strigeid larvae.
Further information concerning tke distribution of schistosome dermatitis in
Canada and U.S.A, was given by Cort (19366), who reported that a similar
condition occurred in lowa, North Dakota, Illinois, Texas, Florida and Washing-
ton. Cort also mentioned that Miller had informed him that C. tuckerensis,
deseribed by Miller (1927) as a member of the elvae group, occurring commonly
in Planorbis in the State of Washington, was able to produce dermatitis experi-
mentally.

Brumpt (1936) gave a very prief account of several schistosome larvae
known to be capable of causing human dermatitis, and included C. wardlei and,
C. bajkowt because of McLeod’s statements (1934), In the account of C. elvae
Brumpt was in error in stating that a pharynx occurred in that species, thus con-
stituting a difference between it and C. ocellata,

McLeod (1936) published further notes on cercarial dermatitis in Manitoba,
stating that the condition was common in many parts of Canada, from (Quebec
to the Rocky Mountains. Tle described two new species of Microbilharsia from
ducks (Nyroca), but their life history was unknown, Next vear he gave an
account of two more schistosomics from water birds, Pseudobilharsiclla quer-
quedulae from a teal (Querquedula) and Ornithobilharsia lari from a gull.
Cercariae causing dermatitis were abundant in the same locality as also were their
known molluscan hosts, Limnaea and Stagnicola, and it was suggested that
P. querquedulae might be the adult of one of the Jocal dermatitis-producing
cereariae (Mcl.eod 1937).

Cort, McMullen and Brackett, in 1937, published their ecological studies on
the cercariae occurring in the common beach snail, Stagnicola emarginata, in
Michigan, this snail being the vector for C. stagnicolae which is responsible for
most of the swimmers’ itch in that State. Buckley (1938) reported that the
cercaria Of Schistosoma spindalis of; cattle caused a dermatitis known as Sawah
itch 11 workers in Malayan rice fields. Edwards and Brackett (1938) referred
to swimmers’ itch in Wisconsin as a schistosome dermatitis, and in 1939 Brackett
indicated methods for control. Cort (1939) gave a brief survey of the condition
as a public health problem in. U.S.A., and stated that of the five known causative
agents, C. doulhitt: was the only one whose life history was known. McMullen,
Rezin and Allison (1939), in discussing the distribution and epidemiology of the
dermatitis in Michigan mentioned that C. physellae was the chief agent there.

Brackett (1940 a) described two new schistosome cercuriae, C. gvrauli and
C. elongata, from Wisconsin, The former was stated to be closely related to
C, elvae, C. physellae, C. stagnicolae and C. ocellata; and C. clongata to be neat

280

C. douthitti. He reported that one, perhaps both, of these cercariae were able to
produce dermatitis. Brackett (19400) discussed the prevalence of bathers’ itch
in Wisconsin. Cort (1940), in an address on helminth diseases, referred to
swimmers’ itch in Michigan, and stated that the State Board of Health had
organised a special unit of research workers to study the problem with a view to
formulating control measures against-the dermatitis that had become so common
on certain beaches as to constitute a real menace to the tourist business which was
the second most important industry of that State.

Brackett (1940 c), who was one of the members of the team referred to by
Cort, paid special attention to the behaviour of the cercariae concerned and
reported that a rapid rise in temperature along the bathing beaches caused an
increased emission of cercariae from infected snails. The cercariae were all
positively attracted towards light, and thus reached the surface layers of the
water even from snails living in deeper water. Some of the cercariae were found
to be able to swim a metre in three minutes, and to cover a distance of at least
10 metres, He also referred to C. tuckerensis as a known agent of dermatitis but
its habits were different from the others since it crawled along the floor and
was perhaps not affected by light.

Cort, McMullen, Olivier and Brackett (1940) discussed particularly the
relation of C. physcllae and C. stagnicolae to their respective host species, to their
environment, and to the seasonal incidence of dermatitis on the shores of Lake
Michigan. ‘These same authors (19406) published detailed information regard-
ing the seasonal incidence of C. stagnicolae in relation to the life cycle of its snarl
host, and discussed the epidemiology of the dermatitis caused by that specics of
cercaria which was commonly concentrated in shallow warm water, The species
apparently penetrated when water containing them dried in the human skin—
hence the resulting dermatitis was usually worse in children who played in shallow
water and in adults who entered and left the water repeatedly. The great increase
in prevalence of swimmers’ itch was probably due to the increase in the use of
the beaches for bathing purposes rather than to any increase in infection of the
snails by schistosome cercariac,

Brackett (1940 d) dealt with the life cycle of the snails concerned in Wis-
consin and studied the relation of young and adult molluscs to the occurrence of
swimmers’ itch. The cercaria of Schistosomatium pathlocopticum was not known
to be able to cause dermatitis, and though S, douwthitti larvae could do so, Brackett
thought the latter species was not of importance in connection with the outbreaks,
but that the cercariae of avian schistosomes were responsible for most of the
dermatitis amongst bathers in the Great Lakes region. He brought forward
reasons for suggesting that Pseudobilharziella querquedulae McLeod (1937) from
ducks might be the adult of C. physellae, while C. gyrauli or C. elongata might
belong to an undescribed schistosome from a grebe. The natural host for the
adult of C. elvae was unknown, but was probably a gull; the adult stage (as yet
undescribed) had been obtained experimentally in pigeons.

McLeod (1940) published his further studies on cercarial dermatitis in
Manitoba. Ile drew attention to the differences in human resistance to invasion
by schistosome cercariae. The latter could be distributed amongst four groups,
according to their reaction: (a) those which did not respond positively to the
presence of man in water; (D) those responding positively but unable to penctrate
the human skin; (c) those which responded and penctrated the skin, but owing to
lack of balance between the host and parasite did not enter deeply, the result being
a localised skin reaction; and (d) those which responded positively, penetrated
the skin, and eventually reached the portal vein and its branches to reach sexual
maturity, this group commonly causing no skin reaction, To group (d) belong

281

the human schistosomes, while those causing dermatitis are in group (c). In
addition to the cercariac already mentioned as causative agents, McLeod added
C. pseudo-ocellata Szidat 1933 and C. dermolestes, a new species which he
described from Stagnicola. The latter belonged to the elvae group. He reported
that his C. bajkovi should be suppressed, since it was based on a confusion of two
species; and C. wardlet was a strigeid larva and did not produce dermatitis. Ile
described two new species of Ornithobilharsia (from ducks and gulls re-
spectively.

Consideration of the observations and investigations in America and Europe
leads one to expect that, in addition to C. parocellata, several other closely related
species are likely to be found in Australia capable of causing dermatitis. The chief
transmitters elsewhere are pond snails belonging to the Limnaeidae (Lraunaea,
Stagnicola), but Physidae (Physa, Physella) and Planorbidae (Planorbis, ete.)
are also concerned. The commonest Australian pond snails are Physidae. In the
great Murray watershed Liwnaca and Planorbis are also present, but are much
less frequently met with than are species of Amerianna and related genera of
Physidae. For the present, all pond snails must be considered suspect. Detailed
systematic examination of such molluses for the presence of schistosome or any
other kind of cercariae hag not been carried out anywhere in the Commonwealth
exeept in the one region in South Aust ralia, where our investigations have led to
the incrimination of two (probably three) species—-Lrnnaea lessoni, Amerianna
pyramidata and apparently also A. pectorosa. By far the great majority of furco-
cercariae occurring in our pond snails have proved to belong to the Strigeata whose
larvae are not known to be able to penettate human skin.

In U.S.A, and Canada dermatitis is especially prevalent in the region of the
Great Lakes and the associated rivers. In these areas there are many large centres
of population, the inhabitants using the beaches of the lakes as tourist and bathing
resorts because of the remoteness of ocean beaches, In Australia conditions are
not quile similar, Our population is located mainly in the coastal region and there
are relatively few large centres associated with our huge Murray drainage system,
and the main towns along the Murray, Darling and other tributaries in New South
Wales and Victoria are generally far apart. Except for Lakes Alexandrina, Albert
and Victoria there are no extensive freshwater lakes except such as have resulted
from the water conservation schemes associated more particularly with the Murray
waters, ¢.g., at Barmera, We may then expect to hear occasionally of dermatitis
as a result of bathing, or wading in lakes, billabongs and swamps, provided these
are rather shallow, with plentiful plant life suitable as food for pond snails,
especially if Lintnaea be present.

If the various coastal lakes or lagoons of Eastern Australia be sufficiently
fresh to permit pond snails to flourish in them, dermatitis may be expected there,
too, since Physidac and Planorbis are common in the eastern coastal streams and
pools, though Limnaea lessoni apparently does not occur in them,

Areas of freshwater which afford a suitable habitat for native ducks and
black swans, as well as associated birds (terns, gulls, pelicans, ete.) should be
regarded as possible regions for dermatitis, if used by human beings for bathing
or wading (tnless suitably protected). Anseriform and lariform birds are
probably the main hosts for the adult stages of the dermatitis-producing cercariae
issuing from the appropriate pond snails. E. Price (1929), in his valuable
synopsis of the Schistosomatidae, indicated that five species of bloodflukes, dis-
tributed amongst four genera, were known from ducks, and four species (belong-
ing to three genera) from terns and gulls. To Price’s list fromi ducks and gulls
must be added those described by Mcl.eod. Only one species of native blood-

fluke has been described from Australia, Austrobilharsia terrigalensis 5. J. John-

282

ston, from the common gull, Larus novachollandiae, at Terrigal, New South
Wales. This schistosome has been met with several times in the same host species
on the Adelaide beaches, but not, as yet, in gulls from the swamps and rivers.

We have not yet found Limnaea lessoni in the main stream of the Murray
which is too deep for the favoured food plants, but the snail occurs in the shallow,
slowly moving or still swamps and bywaters where plenty of suitable food is avail-
able for pond snails as well as for bird life. Such waters, because of their
shallowness, beconic very warm under the influence of the bright Australian sun
in summer aud autumn. Such conditions of increased water temperature and
intensity are known to cause a rapid increase in the rate of development of
cercariae and their emission from infected snails, as well as in the activity of such
cercariae while free-swimming. The effect of a suitable wind in wafting shore-
wards /imnaca lessoni which, if detached from the water weeds, readily floats
(hence the popular local name of “bubble snail” for it), is an important factor
in the occurrence of dermatitis.

Cherry (1917), in his article relating to humaty schistosomiasis, mentioned
finding eyeless apharyngeate fork-tailed cercariae in Bulinus ? tenuistriatus near
Melbourne. Bradley (1926) described Cercaria greeri from Bulinus brasicri near
Cooma, New: South Wales, but was unable to give a satisfactory account of its
glands. He believed that a pharynx was absent. In the same paper Bradley
described a new Xiphidioccrearia, C. pellucida, found commonly in Limuaca
brazicri and less frequently in Bulinus brazieri. It was stated to belong to the
Polyadena group and to be near C. brevicaeca Cort, It is probably the Jarva of
a Plagiorchid, Since the specific name had been used previously by Faust (1917)
for a trioculate monostome cercaria from Montana, U.S.A., 3radley’s form is
now renamed C, bradleyi nom. nov., and Limnaea brazieri is considered as its
type host. In a later paper (1933), Bradley referred again to his C. pellucida
and C. greeri, calling the latter a schistosome larva. His figures (1926) indicate
C. greert to be a longifureate cercaria with well-developed subequal suckers and
apparently with small gland cells in preacctabular position, All known schisto-
some cercariae belong to the brevifureate group. The presence of a pharynx is
somtimes detected only with difficulty and may have been overlooked by Bradley.
C. greert seems to be a strigcid larva. The only strigeids known to be devoid of
a pharynx are species of Apharyngostrigea, a genus which occurs in herons in
Australia and elsewhere. If a pharynx be present and the glands be situated in
front of the acetabulum, then the cercaria may belong to a species of Cotylurics,
Ross and Mackay, in 1929, mentioned finding C. greeri and C. pellucida in
Linnaea brasieri in New South Wales.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

Grateful acknowledgment is made to Messrs. G. Jaensch, I.. Ellis and B. C.
Cotton for permission to publish their experiences; and to two of my colleagues,
Mrs. E. R. Simpson and Miss L. M. Angel, for assistance in identifying cercariae.
The investigation has been assisted by the Commonwealth Research Grant to the
University of Adelaide.

SUMMARY

1, ‘The occurrence of bathers’ itch in the swamps of the Lower Murray at

Tailem Bend and Mannum, South Australia, is reported.

2 A review of the recorded occurrences of, and observations on, schistosome
dermatitis and of its relation to pond snails in other parts of the world is given.
3 Vhe probable relation of Cercaria jaenschi from Amerianna pyramidata

and C. parecellata frony Limnaca lessoni to the South Australian occurrences is
discussed,

283

4 It is suggested that these latter cercariae are the larval stages of schistosomes
occurring in birds (probably ducks and black swans) frequenting the swamps.

5 Amerianna pectorosa is recorded as an additional snail host for Cercaria
jaenschi,

6 The presence of the bloodfuke, Austrobilharzsia terrigalensis, in gulls
(Larus novaehollandiae), in St. Vincent Gulf is recorded.

7 Cercaria bradleyi nom. nov., is proposed for C. pellucida Bradley 1926
(nee Faust 1917), probably a Plagiorchid larva, from Linnaca brasieri in New
South Wales.

8 Cercaria greeri Bradley appears to belong to the Strigcata instead of the
schistosonies.

LITERATURE

Bracxerr, S. 1939 Jour. Amer. Med. Assoc., 113, 117-121

Brackerr, S. 1940 a Jour. Parasit., 26, 195-200

Brackerr, S$. 19406 Amer. Jour. Ilyg., 31, D, 49-63

Brackerr, S. 1940 ¢ bid, 31, D, 64-73

Bracwxerr, S. 1940 d sbid, 32, 1, 85-104

Braprey, B. 1926 Med. Jour. Austr., (2), 573-578

Braprey, B. 1933 Ibid, (1), 245-251

Brumpt, E. 1931la@ C. R. Acad. Sci., Paris, 193, 253-255

3rumMpPT, E. 19316 Jbid, Paris, 193, 612

Brumet, E. 1936 Précis de Parasitologie, Paris, 1

Bucxkrey, J. C. 1938 Jour. Ilelm., 16, 117-120

Cuerry, JT. 1917 Pamphlet Commonw. Defence Dept., Melbcurne

Curistenson, R. O., and Greene, W. P. 1928 Minnesota Medicine, 573-575

Corr, W. W. 1915 Ill. Biol. Monogr., 1, (4), 86 pp.

Cort, W. W. 1918 Jour. Parasit.. 14, 171-174

Corr, W. W. 1928a Jour. Amer. Med. Assoc., 90, 1,027-1,029

Cort, W. W. 19286 Science, 68, 388

Corr, W. W. 1936a Amer. Jour. Hyg., 23, 349-371

Cort, W. W. 19366 Ibid, 24, 318-333

Corr, W. W. 1939 Volumen jubilare pro Prof, Sadao Yoshida, 2, 101-107
(Osaka, Japan)

Cort, W. W. 1940 Amer. Jour. Trop. Med., 20, 183-198

Corr, W. W.. McMuttex, D. B., and Brackett, S. 1937 Jour. Parasit.,
23, 504-532

Corr, W. W., McMutren, D. B., Orrrter, L., and Bracxerr, §&. 1940 a
Revista Med. trop. y parasitologia, Habana. Cuba, 6, (2), 55-64

Corr, W. W., McMurren, D. B., Onivier, L., and Brackett, 5S. 1940 b
Amer. Jour. Hyg., 32, D, 33-69

Cort, W. W., and Tarsor, S. B. 1936 /bid, 23, 385-396

Cunpertson, J. T. 1935 Science, N.Y., 82, 526-526

Cuuzertson, J. T., and Tarror, S. B. 1936 Parasit., 22, 111-125

Davis, D. J. 1936 /bid, 22, 108-110

Davis, D. J. 1936b Ibid, 22, 329-337

Epwarps, A. C., and Brackert, $. 1938 Wisconsin Med. Jour., July, 1938

Faust, E. C. 1917 Jour. Parasit., 3, 105-123

Faust, E. C. 1920 Jbid, 6, 192-194

Faust, E. C., and Meveny, H. E. 1924 Amer. Jour. Hyg., Monogr. 3, 1-339

Firrenorn, F. 1932 Handb. d. Haut- u. Geschlechtskrankheiten (pp. 708-800)

Hunter, G. W., and Hunrer, W. S$. 1937 Jour. Parasit., 23, 572

284

Jounston, T. H., and Cieranp, E. R. 1937 Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 61,
202-206

Jounston, T. H., and Simpson, E. R. 1939 bid, 63, 63-68

La Ruz, G 1935 Michigan Public Health, 23, 87-90

McLxop, J. A. 1934 Canad. Jour. Res., 10, 394-403

Mcl.xop, J. A. 1936 Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, Sect. V, Ser. 3, 30, 39-48

McLeop, J. A. 1937 Jour. Parasit., 23, 456-466

McLeop, J. A. 1940 Canad. Jour. Res., 18, D, 1-28

McMttten, D. B., Rezin, P. F., and Atrison, L. 1939 Jour. Parasit., 25,

Suppl. p. 24 (abstract)

Matueson, C. 1930 Trans. Roy. Soc. Trop. Med. Hyg., 23, 421-424

Mareias, P. 1930 Ann. Parasit., 8, 151-160

Marsuura,.U. 1909 [In Japanese] Mitt. Med. Ges., Kyoto, 6, (4)

Mitier, Il. M. 1923 Jour. Parasit., 10, 35-46

Mitter, H. M. 1924 Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc., 43, 145-151

Mitier, H. M. 1926 Ill. Biol. Monogr., 10, (3), 1-103

Mriiter, H. M. 1927 Parasitol., 19, 61-83

Mriyvacawa, Y. 1913 Centr. Bakt., I. Orig., 69, 132-142

Penner, L. R. 1938 Jour. Parasit., 24, Suppl. 26 (abstracts)

Penner, L. R. 1939 Jour. Parasit., 25, Suppl. 8-9 (abstracts )

Price. E. W. 1929 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 75, (18), 1-39

Prick, H, F. 1929 Jour. Parasit., 16, 103

Price, H. F. 1931 Amer. Jour. Hyg., 13, 685-727

Ross, I. C., and Mackay, A. C. 1929 C.S.LR., Commonw. Austr., Bull. 43

Swaces, W. E. 1936 Canad. Jour. Res., 14, D, 6-10

Tarzot, S. B. 1936 Amer. Jour. Hyg., 23, 372-384

Tanane. B. 1923 Jour. Parasit., 9, 183-189

Tayior, E. 1... and Bayuis, I]. A. 1930 Trans, Roy. Soc. Trop. Med. Hysg.,
24, 219-244

RuseNcuy A., and Masituncan, V. A. 1936 Philipp. Jour. Sei., 60, 393-
3

Vocet, H. 1930¢@ Dermatol. Wochenschr., Leipzig, 90, 577-581

Vocet, H. 19306 Klin. Wochenschr., Berlin, 9, 883-886

VocEeL, H. 1932 Arch. f. Schitfs- u. Tropenhyg., 36, 384-399

Wararar 1936 jap. Jour. Exp. Med., Tokyo, 14, 1-18

Wesrxperc-lLunp, €. 1934 Mem. Acad. Roy. Sci., Lett. Danemark, Sect.
Sci., 9, 5, (3), 1-223

LIFE HISTORY OF THE TREMATODE, PETASIGER AUSTRALIS N. SP.

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and L. MADELINE ANGEL, University of Adelaide

Summary

Petasiger australis n. sp. is a minute echinostome occurring in the grebes, Podiceps ruficollis
novaehollandiae Stephens and P. poliocephalus Jardine and the swamps at Tailem Bend, South
Australia. For assistance in collecting this material we are indebted to Messrs. G. and F, Jaensch
and L. Ellis, of Tailem Bend. Our investigation has been assisted by the Commonwealth Research
Grant to the University. Type material deposited in the South Australian Museum.

285
LIFE HISTORY OF THE TREMATODE, PETASIGER AUSTRALIS n. sp.
By T. Harvey Jounston and L. MApELINE ANGEL, University of Adelaide
[Read 11 September 1941]

Petasiger australis n.sp. is a minute echinostome occurring in the grebes,
Podiceps ruficollis novaehollandiae Stephens and P. poliocephalus Jardine and
Selby, in the swamps at Tailem Bend, South Australia. For assistance in collect-
ing this material we are indebted to Messrs. G. and I. Jaensch and L. Ellis, of
Tailem Bend. Our investigation has been assisted hy the Commonwealth Research
Grant to the University. Type material deposited in the South Australian Museum.

The largest parasite measures about -7 mm. long, with its maximum breadth
(+28 mm.) at the midacetabular level. Other dimensions are: width at sex pore,
-2 mm.; at level of ovary, *26; across testicular zone, *2-°25; at narrowest part
of neck, -12; across head collar, -17, The anterior part of the body (except the
head) is rather flattened and minutely spiny, with spinules arranged in closely-set
rows. The posterior region is much thicker and devoid of spines, The reniform
head bears 19 spines, 11 of them evenly spaced in a single unbroken series, and
two pairs in each ventral angle, arranged more or less transversely to the long
axis of the worm. One of each pair is slightly longer than the other, lengths
-054 and -047 mm. respectively, while the remainder are about ‘025 mm. long.

he oral sucker is almost terminal and -045 mm, broad by -05 long. The aceta-
bulum lies mainly in the hind-body, :ts anterior border being just in front of the
midlength of the worm; it measures ‘17 mm. broad by +16 mm. long, the sucker
ratio being about 1:3°7; sex pore near end of first third of body.

The prepharynx is about ‘02 mm. long, the pharynx -04 mm., the oesophagus
about ‘1 mm. and extending almost to the genital pore. The crura at first diverge
widely to skirt the border of the cirrus sac, metraterm and acetabulum, terminat-
ing a short distance behind the level of the posterior testis.

The anterior testis is *11 by ‘07 mm. and obliquely placed on one side of the
worm; the posterior testis is -12 by ‘08 mm., and the two glands are in contact
along part of their inner surfaces. Both testes and ovary are in the posterior third
of the body length. The large cirrus sac, ‘13 mm. in length by “11, occupies, the
region between the crura and the anterior border of the acetabulum on the same
side of the body as the ovary and posterior testis. A considerable part of the sac
is occupied by deeply-staining prostate cells, but a large seminal vesicle lies in its
posterior portion,

The spherical ovary, ‘06 mm. in diameter, lies dorsally between the posterior
testis and the acetabulum. ‘he shell gland is nearly median, beside and partly
above the anterior testis. The uterus has two or three short convolutions. ‘The
inetraterm lies on the opposite side of the acetabulum from the cirrus sac, The
eggs are large (*085-°09 by -05--06 mm.) and few (one to seven, ustially about
four). Yolk glands obscure the intestinal crura and extend from just behind the
level of the sex pore almost to the end of the worm, the opposite vitelline fields,
joining in a narrow zone behind the testes. They lie above and below the crura,
ag well as laterally from them. The transverse yolk duct is just in front of the
posterior testis and above the anterior testis,

The smallest worm measured *48 mm. long; the longest which had not yet
become egg-bearing was °57 mm. The smallest parasites containing each a single
egg were *59 and ‘61 mm. long. Most specimens were -66 mm. long.

Petasiger australis differs from P. exuerelus (Iietz, 1909; Davies, 1934)
and P. variospinosus Odhner 1911 from Phalacrocorax carbo in the number of

Trans. Roy. Soc, S.A., 65, (2), 19 December 1941

286

collar spines (27 in each) and position of the testes. Several species, all, with 19
collar spines, are known from grebes. The nearest known relative of P. australis
is P, nitidus Linton 1928, redescribed by Beaver (1939), from Colymbus auritus
from Massachusetts, but the two differ in the dimensions of the body, organs and
collar spines and in the sucker ratio. Yamaguti (1933) described P. lebatus from
Podiceps ruficollis japonicus, but that species differs from the Australian in the
sucker ratio and especially in the form and arrangement of the testes. he account
of P. novemdectm Lutz 1928 from a Venezuelan Phalacrocorax is not available
tous. P. pungens (Linstow), from Celymbus nigricans in Central Europe, differs
(judging from the summary account given by Lithe 1909) in general form, length
of cesophageal region and the arrangement of the testes,

We have studied a large-tailed species of echinostome cercaria which agrees in
general structure and reactions with that described by Beaver (1939) as, being the
larva of Petasiger nitidus, which, as already mentioned, is a 19-spined form from
a North American grebe. Our cercaria obviously belongs to a species of Petasiger,
closely related to P. nitidus, All known species possessing 19 spines have been
taken from grebes, a group to which Podiceps spp. belong. We have not recog-
nised Petasiger amongst the trematodes found in any other birds so far examined
by us. The adult worms and the cercariac were found at the same time and in
the same swamp. In view of these facts we have little doubt that they belong to,
the same species, though our attempt to infect a canary with metacercarial cysts
in the hope of obtaining adult stages proved unsuccessful. Until actual proof
has been established, we deem it advisable to describe the larval stages (redia,
cercaria and metacercaria) under a distinctive nanie, Cercaria gigantura n. sp.

Cercaria gigantura n. sp.

Of 2,500 Amerianna pyramidata collected in February 1941 from the Murray
swamps at Tailem Bend, 10 were found to be infected with a new type of echino-
stome cercaria. In the following March one of 424 of the snails was infected, in
April none of 148, in May none of 64, and in June one of 27. Thus, from April
1937 (when routine examination of the swamps was commenced), to June 1941,
this cercaria has been found on only three occasions, We have found only 12 out
of 3,163 A. pyramidata infected, t.e., under -4% during the summer and autumn
of 1941, The distinctive feature of the cercaria is the relatively huge tail, which
makes the swimming action clumsy, ‘lhe tail does not appear to propel the body
by the figure of eight movement characteristic of most echinostome cercariae, but
lashes the water with a snake-like movement. The animal frequently hangs
vertically with tail straight and body downwards, in which position it sinks
gradually, though the resting period is not as a rule longer than six seconds. The
cercariae emerge from the snail over-night (probably in the early morning) and
up till midday, and have been observed to live for at least 30 hours. Although eye-
spots are not discermible, the cercariac exhibit positive phototropism,

Probably because of the thickness of the tail, the cercaria does not perform
sucker-to-sucker creeping movements under the compression of a coverslip. A
pressure which will flatten the tail and keep it almost still, will allow a fair range
of movement of the body, while sufficient pressure to enable the body to be studied
in detail results in the loss of the tail. With only slight compression the animal
oscillates about one axis, the tip of the tail describing almost 180°, while the body
has a more limited range, probably a swimming movement limited to one plane.

Repia
The pale orange rediae are closely packed within the liver of the snail, where
the individuals are clearly visible to the naked eye by reason of the black intestine.
They vary in length from 0-8 to 1-4 mm., while the diameter is from 150 to 200 [ln

287

Fach redia generally contains five or six cercariac. The birth pore was not seen,
but a short distance behind the anterior end the collar shows as a definite pro-
tuberance. ‘lhe foot processes are prominent, and behind them is a narrow
terminal part, with somewhat the appearance of a tail. In this region there are
generally a number of fairly large germ balls, and it seems probable that the nearly

FO5amm
O4mm

Saye

Fig. 1-6, Cercaria gigantura: 1, tail; 2, excretory system from living cercaria;

3, 4, formalinised cercariae (in fig. 4 arangement and size of spines probably not

precisely accurate—errors due to difficulty of determination, compression of

cercaria, etc.) ; 5, redia; 6, cyst. Fig. 7, Pelasiger australis: ventral view. Vitel-
laria not indicated. Fig. 1, 5, to same scale. g.b., germ balls.

288

mature cercariae do not remain in this region but migrate anteriorly, which would
explain the smaller diameter of the part. The gut varies from half to seven-
eighths (commonly three-quarters) the length of the redia.

CERCARIA

For measurements, the cercariae were killed by the addition of an equal
volume of boiling 10% formalin to the water containing them, This standard
method resulted in the cercariae being fixed in different positions, from one of
maximum cottraction to one of great extension, In the former case the body
measured 105 by 100», while the most extended specimen was 267 by /0 #4. Actual
range in ten specimens measured 105 to 267 » long by 50 to 100 « wide.

Between the body and the tail proper is a relatively short neck, the diameter
of which is less than that of the body. Most of the central part of the neck is
occupied by an extension of the excretory bladder. The neck region is coloured
by the same orange pigment as is present in the cystogenous cells of the body; it
varies from 50 to 167 » long by 17 to 54 wide. ‘The rest of the tail, the measure-
ments of which are necessarily only approximate because of the distorted positions
in which it is fixed, varies fronv 434 to 584» long by 134 to 200 at the widest
point. There is a definite apical region in the tail, which narrows suddenly, the
tip so formed (which is very obvious in the resting position) ranging, in formalin-
ised specimens, from 83 to 192 » by 33 to 42 p.

The tail has a transparent, glassy appearance, although at the margin, which
is notched at intervals, the cuticle has a greenish tinge. The central third is
occupied by longitudinal muscle fibres which appear to have their origin at the
junction of the tail proper with the neck, and taper off towards the tip. Abundant
myoblasts are associated with these fibres. A) number of fine radial muscle fibres,
arising from just beneath the cuticle, insert in the central longitudinal strand. In
addition to the longitudinal and radial muscles, there is a somewhat complex system
of fibres. [ach unit of this system forms a reticulum which has its mid-point at
one of the marginal notches and ends on c¢ither side about midway between
notches, while centrally the muscle strands attach to the longitudinal fibres. About
half-way down the tail this system: forms a more or less continuous reticulum
(fig. 1). Laterally to the main longitudinal muscles on either side is a very fine
thread which continues throughout the length of the tail nearly to the tip, and is
connected occasionally with the margin as well as with the central muscle strands.

The entire body is beset on both dorsal and ventral surfaces with parallel
rows of spines. ‘There are many cystogenous cells which are filled with long rod-
like crystalline bodies of a bright orange colour, These cystogenous cells, which
are arranged in a series of bands running longitudinally from the post-pharyngeal
region to the posterior end of the body, are even more resistant to the passage of
light than is ordinarily the case in echinostomes, and details of anatomy are con-
sequently difficult to determine. No gland cells can be seen, even with intra-vitam
staining, but what appear to be four very fine ducts are present in the region of
the oral sucker. The collar region is more distinct than in other echinostome
cereariac we have examined. The spines are arranged in a single row, un-
interrupted dorsally; the total number is 19, of which four on each side form a
corner group. There is no obvious differentiation in the size of the spines, the
length of cach being about 13 p.

The acetabulum is slightly larger than the oral sucker, the diameter in formalin-
ised specimens ranging from 28 » across the transverse diameter by 21 » Jength-
ways to 38 by 30 for the acetabulum, and from 21 to 30, for the round oral
sucker. The acetabulum is situated slightly behind the mid-line of the body, the
ratio of length of the body in advance of the acetabulum to that part including the
latter varying from 5:4 to 3:2.

289

The alimentary system is not obvious; there is a short prepharynx, and the
oesophagus and intestinal crura are very marrow and filled with finely granular
material. The crura extend almost to the posterior end of the body.

The excretory system conforms to the plan of the typical echinostome. The
pre-acctabular part of the main excretory tubes is very prominent; each contains
12-14 large round or oval excretory bodies with doubly refractive margins. In
some cases two or three granules, though maintaining their individuality, are
enclosed in a common refractive envelope. In addition, there may be 4-6 smaller
single granules. The anterior part of each main tube does not form a distinct
triangle, as is usually the case in echinostomes, but each tube forms a small loop
as it turns posteriorly, The posterior collecting tube is short and unites with the
anterior tube at the side of the excretory bladder. Examination of the cercaria in
equal parts of horse serum and water enabled us to see a number of flame cells
which were invisible by other means, Even with this help it was not possible to
demonstrate the exact connections of all the flame cells, but we are satisfied that
they are arranged in groups of three, and we think that there are five or six groups
on each side of the body, making a total of 30-36 flame cells. There is an exten-
sion of the bladder in the “neck” of the tail, but we could sce no excretory tube in
the tail itself. The excretory pore probably opens on the dorsal surface at the
junction of the body with the tail.

The genital anlage, which stains deeply with haematoxylin and other perma-
nent stains, is represented by two masses. of tissue, anterior and posterior respec-
tively to the acetabulum and connected by a narrow string of cells.

Cyst AND METACERCARIA

The cercaria was found experimentally to encyst in the following Australian
native fish, Retropinna semoni, Philypnodon grandiceps, Nannoperca australis,
young Tandanus tandanus; and in the aqttarium fish, Phalloceros caudo-maculatus,
Orysias latipes, Carassius auratus and Gaimbusia affnis. Of a large number: of
fish from the River Murray swamps which have been examined, none were found
to be naturally infected with cysts of Cercaria gigantura, Llowever, these cysts
were found in Nannoperca australis from the River Finnis (collected in “March
1941). In all cases the cysts were limited to the wall of the oesophagus and the
pharyngeal region. Negative results followed attempts to infect tadpoles,
Lymnodynastes spp.; the shrimp, Paratya australiensis; a triclad; and the
molluses, Planorbis tsingi, Limnaea lessoni and Corbiculina angasi. A few of the
host snails (Amerianna pyramidata and A, pectorosa) contained a number of cysts
in the liver. Those snails which were examined in the summer contained no cysts,
and we suggest that the occurrence just mentioned may not be a normal event,
but was probably due to the lateness of the season, coupled with the fact that the
snails had been isolated daily for some considerable time in small tubes, when the
cercariae must encyst in the snail from which they had emerged, or perish.

The small, oval, rather flat cysts are remarkably uniform in size, being about
125 by 75 p. They have thick walls through which the pale orange colour and the
large dark excretory granules oi the contained metacercaria show clearly.

In general features, the metacercaria shows no advance on the cercarial stage.
Orange pigment is still present in the body, and cannot, therefore, be associated
only with the cystogenous cells in the cercaria; it appears to be mainly in the hind
end, and relatively scarce anterior to the acetabulum. The metacercaria could
not be expressed from the cyst sufficiently intact to enable us to study it in the
living state, and hence we have obtained no information regarding the excretory
system. The collar spines are more definite than in the cercaria.

290

Cercaria gigantura resembles C. Petasigeri-nitidi Beaver 1939 very closely.
If it should prove (as we anticipate) to be the cercaria of Petasiger australis it
will be evident that here is a type of echinostome life-history in which the struc-
ture of the cercaria, apart from the collar spination, is an indication of the genus
of the adult, the number of spines being a’ specific or group character.

Other characters in which the two cercariae are in gencral agreement are the
following: length of life; resting and swimming action; positive phototropism;
size; collar spination; relative sizes of oral sucker and acetabulum, They differ,
however, in the following features: C. Petasigeri-nitidi colourless, C. gigantura
orange-yellow ; prepharynx long in former, short in latter; three pairs of gland
cells present in former, not visible in latter; 20 to 25 excretory granules in
C. Petasigeri-nitidi, 12 to 14 in C. gigantura; dorsal collar spmes 5 to 6p in
former, 13 y in latter. They also differ in the shape of the bladder and in the
flame cell formula. In C. Petasigeri-nitidi the longitudinal bands of the tail mus-
culature are poorly developed and circulo-diagonal bands well developed, while in
C. gigantura the longitudinal muscle is well developed, and there is no circulo-
diagonal muscle; and there is no dorso-ventral flattening of the tail as in
C. Petasigeri-nitidi,

The two rediac agree in most features; that of C. gigantura is probably
smaller and the collar is not divided into four distinct folds. We confirm Beaver’s
observation that great masses of cercariae consistently were found free in the
tissues, from which Beaver concluded that the cercariae apparently require a
period of maturing in the snail’s tissues, after emerging from the rediae.

For the cysts, Beaver states that, exclusive of host tissues, they vary round
85 by 68»; this makes the ratio of length to breadth 5:4, but his figure shows a
ratio of 5:3, which corresponds with the ratio given by our measurements for
C. gigantura (125 by 75). As with C. gigantura, the cyst of C. Petasigeri-nitidi
is slightly flattened.

Beaver mentioned four other described species of large-tatled echinostome
cercariac, all of which closely resemble C. Petasigeri-mtidi , We have examined:
the accounts of these cercariae—C. magnacauda O’Roke 1917, C, caudadena
Faust 1921, C. cita Miller 1925 (not described till 1929) and C. oscillatoria Brown
1931—and find that C. gigantura differs from each of them. Since Beaver has
listed the features separating them irom C. Petasigeri-nitidi, in many of which
they differ also from C. gigantwra, we do not propose to distinguish between them
specifically. C. cita appears to resemble C. gigantura most closely, but the
description of the former does not include either the number of collar spines or
the fame cell formula, and Miller did not find the cyst. In addition to this,
C, cita is described as having gland cells from the acetabulum to the pharynx, and
this in itself we regard as sufficient to separate it from C. gigantura, in which it
was not possible for us to identify any gland cells,

Szidat (1937) described C, gigantocerca, which he regarded as, belonging to
the Psilostomidae, near Sphaeridiotrema; the body of this cercaria, as figured, was
very similar to that of an echinostome cercaria, but lacked collar and spines. The
tail was huge, and though the figure is lacking in microscopic detail the relative
sizes of the tail and ‘body in C. gigantura and C. gigantocerca Szidat appear to be
comparable, while the absolute sizes are very similar. The close resemblance of
these two forms is further evidence of the relationship between the Echinostomidae
and the Psilostomidae.

In describing C. oscillatoria, Brown stated that he found cysts in the tissues
of the cercarial host snail, and that they appeared to be the encysted stage of

@) O'Roke deserihed Gs magnacauda as a megalurous cercaria, but Miller who examined
a slide of C. magnacauda (in 1929) lent him by O’Roke, identified it as an echinostome.

291

C. oscillatoria, Beaver (1939) thought that Brown probably observed another
species of echinostome—evidently on the grounds that he (Beaver )' did not expect
this type of cercaria to encyst in a snail. However, we have indicated that
C. gigantura will encyst in the snail host. The main point of difference is that
Brown’s cyst was spherical, while the cysts of C. gigantura and C. Petasigeri-nitidi
are of the same oval, partly flattened, type. However, Brown stated that the com-
pound nature of the calcareous concretions in the main collecting tubules was
suggestive of C. escillatoria, and we are inclined to agree that the cyst was the
encysted form of C. oscillatoria,

The occurrence of these cercariae, which have been definitely identified as
echinostome larvae, obviously calls for some modification of the accepted classifi-
cation scheme for echinostome cercariae. Brumpt (1936), following Lthé’s
classification (Luhé 1909), which Brumpt says has been adopted by most authors,
lists echinostome cercariae under Leptocercariac, with tail narrower than the body.
In cercariae of the magnacauda group the tail is greater in length, breadth and
thickness than the body, and these cercariae must be regarded as an aberrant type
which develops into a typical echinostome cyst and adult. Sewell (1922) proposed
three sub-groups for the echinostome cercariae, but this separation appears to us
to be no longer satisfactory in view of the large number of echinostome cercariae
which have been described since then.

In an effort to obtain the adult of C. gigantura experimentally, a canary and
two pigeons were fed with cysts of the cercaria over a number of days, but on
dissection of the birds some fortnight later no trematodes were found,

SUMMARY

1 Petasiger australis n.sp. is described (from hosts Podiceps ruficollis
novachollandiae and (P. poliocephalis) from South Australia,

2 A large-tailed echinostome cercaria, C. gigantura, is recorded (from
Amerianna pyramidata) from the same locality, and is considered to be the larval
form of Petasiger australis,

3. The redia, cercaria, cyst and metacercaria of C. gigantura are described,
and their intermediate hosts recorded.

4 C. gigantura is compared with other known large-tailed echinostome
cercariae,

5 The relationship of the Psilostomidae with the Echinostomidae is further
shown by comparison of C. gigantocerca Szidat and C. gigantura.

LITERATURE
BeAver, P. C. 1939 Jour. Parasit., 25, 268-276
Brown, F. J. 1931 Parasitol., 23, 88-98
Brumet, E. 1936 Précis de Parasitologie, 1. Paris
Davies, E. 1934 PTarsitol., 26, 133-137
Dietz, Ff. 1910 Zool. Jahrb., Suppl.. 12, (3), 265-512
Faust, FE. C, 1921 Jour. Parasit., 8, 11-21
Linton, E, 1928 Pr. U.S. Nat. Mus., 73, 1-36
Lunt, M. 1909 Die Susswasserfauna Deutschlands, 17
Lutz, A. 1928 Estudos de Zoologia y parasitologia venezolanos, Rio d. Janeiro
Mitten, H. M. 1929 Trans. Am. Mier. Soc., 48, 310-313
Opun_er, T. 1911 Res, Swedish Zool. Exped. Egypt and White Nile, (4), 1-166
O’RoxeE, E. C. 1917 Kansas Univ. Sc. Bull., 10, 161-180
SEWELL, R. B.S. 1922 Ind. Jour. Med. Res., 10, Suppl., 1-371
Szipat, L. 1937 Z. £. Parasitenk., 9, 529-542
YAMAGUTI, 5. 1933 Jap. Jour. Zool., 5, (1), 1-134

THE RED-LEGGED EARTH-MITE (ACARINA, PENTHALEIDAE)
OF AUSTRALIA

By H. WOMERSLEY, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., South Australian Museum

Summary

Family PENTHALEIDAE Oudemans 1931
This small family of mites is of considerable economic importance to Australian agriculture, for it
includes at least two species which are major pests of pasture and fodder in this country. It includes
four genera, all of which are represented here by at least one species in each.

292

THE RED-LEGGED EARTH-MITE (ACARINA, PENTHALEIDAE)
OF AUSTRALIA

By If. Womersvey, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., South Australian Museum
[Read 11 September 1941]

Family PENTHALEIDAE Oudemans 1931

This small family of mites is of considerable economic importance to Aus-
tralian agriculture, for it includes at least two species which are major pests of
pasture and fodder in this country. It includes four gencra, all of which are
represented here by at least one species in each.

The earth-mites are small soft-bodied and soft-skinned animals of a black
colour, with or without red dorsal patches, and with bright red legs and mouth-
parts. They are phytophagous in habit, many living in moss, but those of
economic importance occur in immense numbers in pastures and vegetable gardens,
where they become a serious nuisance.

The four genera may be separated by the following key:

1. Cuticle strongly reticulated, punctured or rugose. Body not globose
Gen. Stereotydeus Berl. and Leonardi 1901
incl. Yectopenthalodes Tragdh. 1907

Cuticle smooth or at most faintly hexagonally patterned in punctured lines. Body
more or less globular. 2

Z. Anus dorsal. Cuticle smooth, Gen. Penthaleus Koch 1835
= Notophallus Canest, 1886

Anus ventral. Cuticle sometimes hexagonally patterned, Gen. Penthalodes Murray 1877
= Penthaleus Koch 1835 (in part)

Anus terminal. Cuticle smooth. Gen. Halotydeus Berl. 1903
=: Penthaleus Koch 1835 (in part)

Genus PEntHALEUs Koch 1835 (in part)

In Panzer, Deutschl, Crust., Hft. I, tab. 12, 1835.
= Notophallus, Canest., Atti Ist., Veneto., (6), 4, 697, 704, 1886,

PENTIIALEUS MAJOR (Duges 1934)
Tetranychus major Duges 1834, in Ann, Sci. Nat., (2) 2, Zool., 53.
For further synonymy see Womersley 1935, Bull. Ent. Res., 26, (2), 163.

This is an introduced species, abundant in many agricultural areas in Aus-
tralia, where it is an important pest on pasture and fodder crops. It also occurs
in certain areas in South Africa, Its separation from the following species is
discussed hereunder.

PENTHALEUS MINOR (Canestrini 1886) Fig. A-C
Notophallus minor Canest. 1886 Acarof. ital., 211, tav. 18, fig. 16; Berl. 1892,
A.M.S. ital. rept., fasc. 61, No. 5.
T have known of the occurrence of this second European species in Australia
for some time but have not hitherto recorded it. It is rather smaller than the
preceding and can be distinguished as follows:

1. Movable finger of chelicerae slender and stylet-like for its whole Iength, and with
a right-angled base; basal portion of fixed finger broadly membrancous. Apical
segment of palp as long as penultimate. P. major (Duges 1834)

Zi. Movable finger of chelicerae without right-angled base; basal half uniformly wide
and wider than apical half. Apical segment of palp shorter than penultimate.

P. minor (Canest. 1886)
Localities—South Australia: Morialta Gorge, Adelaide, September 1934
(H. W.). Western Australia: Katanning, June 1940 (K. R. N.).

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (2), 19 Deceenber 1941

293

Genus Hatotypreus Berlese 1891
Berlese, A., A.M.S. ital, rept., fasc, 60, No. 9.

HALotypeus besrructor (Jack 1908)
Jack, R. W. 1908 Cape of Good Hope Agric. Jour., No. 31.
Tucker, R. W. E. 1925 Entom., Mem., No. 3, Dept. Agric, S. Africa.
Womersley, H. 1933 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 57, 108
A common and well-known pest on subterranean clover and vegetables in
most cultivated areas in Australia, as well as in South Africa.

A-C Penthalens minor Canest., A palp, B mandible, C tarsus IV; D-I, [Walotydeus
egregius Berl., D entire, EF palp, F mandible, G tarsus I, H tarsus IV, I dorsal seta;
J-M Penthalodes australicus sp.n. J palp, K Mandible, L tarsus I, M tarsus IV.

HALorypEUs EGREGIUS Berlese 1891 Fig. D-I
Penthaleus cgregius Berlese, A., A.M.S. ital. rept., fase. 60, Nos. 1 and 3.
In fase. 60, No. 3, Berlese (/oc. cit.) does not figure or refer to the position
of the anus, but this is clearly shown as terminal in fig. 5 of fasc. 60,, No. 1, so that

294

there is no doubt but that this species should be placed in this genus. The differ-
ences between this and 1. destructor are to be found in the mandibles, palpi, and
setae of the legs and body, as figured.

I am indebted to Mr. K, R. Norris, of the Division of Economic Entomology,
C.S.&1.R., for the following colour description of the living mites:

“Legs red, basal two segments pale. Mouth parts red. Body black, shining,
but may have pale blotches ventrally near the genital aperture. The lips of the
genital aperture and a small patch surrounding the uropore vary in colour from
red to whitish, In one specimen a pale pinkish streak extended about half-way
along the dorsum from the uropore, whilst ventrally it continued to connect the
uropore and genital aperture.”

The species has been taken by Mr. Norris in the following localities in
Western Australia: Hovea, September 1935, 1936; Pemberton, November 1936;
Katanning, in winters of 1939, 1940 and 1941; Narrogin, July 1937; Cranbrook,
1937; Kalgan River, July 1937; Donnybrook, November 1937, April 1938.

Genus PENTHALopEs Murray 1877
Murray, A. 1877 Econ. Aptera.

This genus differs from the others in the ventral position of the anus as given
in the key, In 1931 Oudemans made a separate family, the Penthalodidae, for it,
and this was recognised by Sig Thor (Das Tierreich 1933) who separated it, in
a key, on the basis of the hexagonal patterning of the cuticle. Vitzthum (Hand-
bucher Zoologie 1931) did not recognise the Penthalodidae but retained Pentha-
lodes in the Penthaleidae.

The cuticular patterning of the genotype of Penthalodes (P. ovatus:
Koch) is, however, very different from that of members of the genus
Stercotydeus, also placed in the Penthaleidae by Vitzthum (loc, cit.). The
description in this paper of a new species of Penthalodes which lacks any
cuticular patterning whatever, further suggests the untenability of the family
Penthalodidae.

Penthalodes australicus n.sp. Fig. J-M

Description—Large species. Colour black with red mouth-parts and legs.
Length 2-25 mm., width 1°36 mm. Legs I 2°89 mm. I] 1-445 mm.,, III
1-645 mm., TV 2°125 mm. Dorsal and leg setae very numercus and mainly
simple; on dorstin 64 long. Mandible 270 long, as figured. Palpi as figured,
ultimate segment less than half the length of penultimate. Tarsi { and IV as
figured. Genital opening with the usual two pairs of discs. Anus ventral.

Locality—Type specimens from moss, Summers’ Park, Acheron Way, Vic-

toria, Jan. 1937 (H. W.); West Tanjil, Victoria, July 1941 (R. T. M, P.).

Genus STEREOTYDEUS Berlese and J.eonardi 1901

Berlese and Leonardi 1901 Zool. Anz., 25
Womersley, H. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 60, 79-82

This genus and the three Australian species have been previously discussed
by the writer (loc, cit.). It was then placed in the Penthalodidac but, as noted
above, this family is not satisfactorily separated from the Penthaleidae.

The Australian species may be distinguished by the following key:

1. Segment IV of palp longer than III. Dorsum with an areolatian of pitted hexagonal
markings. Median lobe of epirostral plate narrower than lateral lobes.
S. arcolatus Womersley 1935

Segment IV of palp equal to or shorter than II. 2
2. Dorsal surface strongly rugose. Legs 5-segmented. S$. occidentale Womersley 1935

Dorsal surface more finely rugose. Legs 6-segmented,
S. australicus Sig Thor 1934

THE WILPENA POUND FORMATION
AND UNDERLYING PROTEROZOIC SEDIMENTS

By D. MAWSON, D.Sc., F.R.S.

Summary

This contribution is a further investigation into the nature and thickness of the sediments
immediately underlying the fossiliferous Cambrian strata of South Australia. Details of the record in
two new areas are given.

295

THE WILPENA POUND FORMATION
AND UNDERLYING PROTEROZOIC SEDIMENTS

By D. Mawson, D.Sc., F.R.S.
[Read 11 September 1941]

This contribution is a further investigation into the nature and thickness of
the sediments immediately underlying the fossiliferous Cambrian strata of South
Australia. Details of the record in two new areas are given,

Tire Succession aT WiLpeena Pounp
The land form so splendidly illustrated by Wilpena Pound is determined by
the existence in that locality of a very thick, arenaceous, basin-shaped, sedimentary
formation, The tectonic structure of the Flinders Range is primarily that of a
folded system of extremely thick sediments of Proterozoic and Cambrian age.
There are represented some remarkable examples of domes and anti-domes.

Wilpena Pound is the most notable example of the anti-domes. It is one of
the remnants left after long continued sub-aerial crosion of the fold system. The
basin of the anti-dome now stands in high relief, ringed all around by a towering
battlemented scarp, The sediments which are horizontally disposed under the
centre of the basin are quaquaversally dipping inwards around its entire margin.
Proceeding outwards in all directions from the Pound, the underlying strata are
presented in descending order of age. The locality is therefore ideal for detailed
study of the sedimentary formations involved, and has been made the locus of
this further study of the late-Proterozoic
sediments of South Australia.

Preliminary field reconnaissance ascertained
rn ; fete | that the sequence of beds is comparatively
3 little disturbed in the region between the
Pound and Appealinna Hill, which latter is a
prominent feature figuring in the structure of
the next dome succeeding to the north-north-
east (fig. 1). This dome we refer to as the

BAPPEALINNA HILL

STMARY.
Une gSLMARYS PEAR

Sy
hare td gass nate BSA
ISS mle

%, “ve /| Oraparinna Dome, since it is mainly comprised

oe * within the area of Oraparinna sheep station.

ate SS Vy Herewith in tabular form, are details of the

5 Auta ue ZY strata encountered along this line of section

y, from a point 17,548 feet stratigraphically

y cette _ below the topmost beds of the Pound Forma-

se tion, It will be observed (fig, 1) that the

r7 art 4 section has been measured in two divisions;

wee .¢ wy, namely, the Pound Formation along the line

ia ar * 6 A--B and the underlying beds along the line

; encountered. The field work was conducted

Fig. 1 with the assistance of advanced students of

Map of the vicinity of Wilpena geology at the University, amongst whom

Pound, indicating the location W. 2B. Dallwitz and R. C. Sprigg were most
of lines of section. helpful.

The formations are numbered from below upwards, and the succession
illustrated begins above the fluvio-glacial shales and greywackes of the waning
Proterozoic ice age.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 65, (2), 19 December 1941

tin Bo Nr

3,195

893

ft.

296

Details of Section North-East from the Pound

. of flaggy, silty shale. Dip 23°, strike N. 30° W.

. Caleareous sandstone.

. of flaggy siltstone. Dip 23°.

. Sandstone, slightly calcareous. Dip 22°, strike N. 30° W.

. Sandy limestone passing upwards into mottled cryptozoonic lime-

stone.

. of soft shales with thin calcareous bands.
. Sandy limestone with some bands of argillaceaus limestone and of

calcareous shale. Near the base of this section curious markings
appear on the weathered face of the sandy limestone. Dip 23°.

. of shale.

. of sandy lhmestone.

. Grey fissile shale. Dip 25°,

. Calearecous sandstone with some grey fissile shale bands near the

base. Towards the upper limit the proportion of sand gradually
diminishes until the upper 8 ft. is of the nature of a sandy lime-
stone. Dip 26°.

. of sandstone. Dip 27°.

. of calcareous shale.

. Shale, only slightly calcareous. Dip 28°.

. (a) Grey, calcareous shale. Thickness, 60 ft.

(b) Argillaceous limestone with impurities showing as traceries
on the weathered surface. Thickness, 10 ft.
(c) Grey, calcareous shale. Thickness, 30 ft.

. of grey shale. Dip 30°, strike N.35° W.

. of sandy limestone. Dip 32°.

. Grey shale. Dip 34°.

. of grey limestone with cryptozoonic traceries.

t, Reddish shale, showing a transition at the base from grey below

to red above.

. Soft, grey shale, showing a transition at the base from red colour

to grey above. Dip 34°, strike N.41° W.

. of hard shale. Dip 35°.

. Hieroglyphic limestone bands in a hard, calcareous shale formation,
. of calcareous beds. Dip 38°,

. (a) Even-grained, bufi-coloured sandstone strongly | cemented.

Thickness, 50 ft.

(b) Hard, reddish sandstone, gritty in places. Dip 40°, strike
N.40° W. Thickness, 178 ft.

. (a} Reddish to chocolate-coloured shale. Dip 43°, strike

N.48°W. Thickness, 2,670 ft.

(b) Sandy, chocolate shale. Dip 42°, strike N.75° W. Thick-
ness, 525 ft.

(a) Grey shale somewhat buckled. The dip of undulations in
these beds ranges between 35° and 48° with an average of
45°. The strike ranges from 70° to 82° W. of N, Thick-
ness, 586 ft.

(b) Shale with some interbedded sandstone flags which make their

appearance in the upper section. Dip 54°, strike N. 68° W.
Thickness, 307 ft.

207

28 598 ft. (a) Flaggy sandstone with interbedded sandy shale. Dip 54°.
Thickness, 318 ft.
(b) Sandstone with some shale bands. Thickness, 187 ft.
(c) Strong quarizite with some intersecting veins of micaceous
haematite. Dip 52° strike N.68° W. ‘Thickness, 51 ft.

(d) Hard sandstone. Clay gall impressions appear at the base
of this section. Dip 45°, strike N.68° W. Thickness, 42 ft.

Tue SeDiMENTARY Succession

AT
WILPENA POUND RANGE
Fi

WILPENA POUND j

INTERIOR
oF
WILPENA POUND

= 55 a ee 31
SECTION A—B

ABC MANGE
QUART ZITE

Sg THESES

POUND ° ,

n 39
PART SECTION C--D

NEAR APPEALINNA HILL
l

if ee 3 Ki We f POST ~GLACIAL
CHOC td, g flR ES zs F, eS = oa pe” GREYWACKES, LAMINATED SLATES ET
AL bbe Eb, A J fe GLEE
260- 125 24+ 23--22-21-4
> PART SECTION C—D
Fig. 2

Cross section of the Wilpena Pound Range and underlying sediments.

298

29 2,277 it. (a) Soft, chocolate shale. Dip 38°. Thickness, 1,290 ft.
(b) Somewhat sandy, chocolate shale. Thickness, 274 ft.
(c) Thin-bedded, moderately indurated chocolate shale. Dip 36°.
Thickness, 713 ft.
30 700 ft. Shale, non-calcareous below to moderately calcareous above.
Dip 36°.
31 1,090 it. (a) Flaggy, calcareous shale in which the calcareous element
increases above. Dip 31°. Thickness, 150 ft.

(b) Thinly laminated, calcareous shales and argillaceous limestone
with “micro-cryptozoon” structure and bands of intraforma-
tional conglomerate. Near the upper limit some reddish,
sandy shale appears. Average dip 25°, strike N.50° W.
Thickness, 940 it.

32 430 ft. Reddish, sandy flags with a little shale, the latter becoming increas-
ingly calcareous below. Dip 20° strike N. 40° W.

33 325 ft. Soft, red flagegy sandstone. Dip 30°, strike 52°.

34 1,225 ft. Red sandstone. Dip 27°.

35 2,556 ft. (a) White sandstone. Dip 25°, strike N.46° W. Thickness,

2,213 ft.
(b) White sandstone. Dip 20°, strike N.50° W. Thickness,
80 ft.

17,548 ft. Total thickness.
Below this thick pile of sediments are several thousands of feet of post-

glacial slates, fluvio-glacial sands and slates as well as the tillite (Sturtian in age)
itself. Some details of these will be published at a later date.

THE Succession at THE Drurp RANGE
The broader tectonic features of the country to the south-east of Wilpena
Pound are displayed in fig. 3, which is a cross-section along the line E—F recorded
on the map (fig. 1). Notable faulting in the area has been observed only where
the beds approach verticality. There is good reason to believe that a fault extends

Rawnsley BLUFF SHACE "RANGE Druid RANGE
1

POUND
FORMATION

= a UY
*| FORMATION

; a
ReTAILED Section
Fig. 3

along and nearly parallel to the north face of the Druid Range. This has probably
truncated the Cambrian beds and may have reduced the apparent thickness of the
quartzite formation of the Druid Range. Evidence of faulting is best seen at
the eastern end of the Chace Range where it cuts in to join the Druid Range. Clear
evidence of such a line of fault was observed on one of our field excursions by’
R. C. Sprigg when viewing the area from the summit of the Chace Range near
Mount Havelock.

Both the Chace Range and the Druid Range are constituted of the Pound
Formation which originally arched over from Wilpena Pound, then dived down

299

almost vertically as the Chace Range. The Pound Formation is again met nearby
to the south as the Druid Range which extends approximately parallel to the
Chace Range over a length of more than 16 miles. The road from Hawker to
Martin’s Well runs along the valley between these two great walls. Where tra-

POST ~ GLACIAL
FLAGGY SLATES

SECTION

SOUTH-EAST FROM THE
DRUID RANGE

SANDSTONE,

WHITE
19

DRUID faa

* POUND | FORMATION

es
a
oe
ee
“a
ze
z Zz
Wl
a 3
a8
ba ww

Fig. 4 Section across the Druid Range and underlying sediments.

300

versed by the line of section (fig. 1) this valley has a width between the quartzite
walls of 2,500 yards, but narrows towards the east-north-east and widens in the
opposite direction, It is occupied by steeply dipping Cambrian limestones and
shales. Massive, grey Archaeocyathinae limestone which flanks the Chace Range
passes upwards into a soft, dark-coloured slate which occupies the central portion
of the valley. Close to the eastern end, where the Chace Range closes in on the
Druid Range, the Cambrian formation is almost entirely climinated.

Strike faulting has played a part in the parallel arrangement of these two out-
crops of the Pound Formation. How much the repetition is also due to the
original folding of the beds is yet uncertain. It is possible that the soft beds
immediately on the south side of the Range are affected by strike faulting, but
as the outcrops are considerably hidden over a wide belt the existence of such was
not established. The general regularity of the outcrops in that locality actually
suggests the absence of faulting.

The country to the south-south east from the more easterly extension of the
Druid Range is but little disturbed, and is thus a region where the order of succes-
sion of the beds is well exhibited and faulting is at a minimum. In that direction
a good section can be obtained, extending from the Pound Formation of the Druid
Range downwards to the Proterozoic glacial beds.

The succession along the line of section E—F, through a thickness of 15,741
feet of strata stratigraphically below the top of the Pound Formation is detailed
herewith (fig. 4). The still lower glacial and post-glacial tillite, fluvio-glacial
beds, greywackes and slates will be dealt with in another publication, In the field
work prosecuted in this area some four years ago, my chief student assistant was
L. W. Parkin.

Details of Section South-East of the Druid Range

1 85 it. Massive sandy limestone.
2 585 ft. (a) Flaggy, calcareous argillite. Thickness, 345 ft.
(b) Resistant flaggy argillite, only slightly calcareous, Thick-
ness, 20 ft.
(c) Flaggy argillite, somewhat calcareous. Thickness, 220 ft.
3 270 it. A strongly developed grey compact limestone. Much of it is

oolitic and some is arenaceous. One zone has a poorly developed
coarse cryptozoonic marking. Dip 72°, to N.; strike 5. 70° W.
4 695 ft. (a) Poor exposures, but underlying rock appears to be a cal-
careous argillite, Thickness, 230 [t.

(b) Grey flags somewhat calcareous. Dip 75°N. Thickness,
465 ft.
6 ft. Oolitic grey limestone.
870 ft. Slates.
. Hard, flaggy slate, chocolate to grey in colour. Dip 80° N,
250 [t. (a) Shales and soit sandstone with interbedded limestone. One
band is 5 feet thick and chocolate-coloured, Thickness,
190 ft.
(b) Caleareous bands alternating with slate and soft sandstone.
Strike $.65° W. Some of the limestone exhibits a poorly
developed hicroglyphic structure. Thickness, 60 ft.
9 570 ft. (a) Red slate and soft red sandstone. Thickness 125 ft.
(b) Soft, very fine-grained, reddish sandstone. Thickness, 45 ft.
(c) Soft, slaty argillite of a general reddish colour, Thickness,
400 ft.

CANT D on
a
ow
o
eh
ot

680 ft.

2,990 it,

780 ft.

580 ft.

1,690 ft.

1,480 it.

450 ft.

480 ft.

1,070 ft.

2,470 ft.

15,741 ft.

301

(a) Resistant grey slates. Thickness, 360 ft.

(b) Grey slate ; somewhat calcareous with a couple of minor bands
(2 ft. wide) of arenaccous limestone, Thickness, 210 ft.

(a) Hard, chocolate-coloured slate. Thickness, 850 ft.

(b) Reddish flaggy slates and siltstones. Dip 86° to N.; strike
S. 54° W. Thickness, 830 ft.

(c) Dark reddish siltstone with some argillaceous element, par-
ticularly near the base. Current bedding is well illustrated at
certain horizons, also concentrations by currents of iron sand
are to be observed. Strike S.61° W. Thickness, 870 ft.

of hard mudstone slate, in places arenaceous, colour grey. These
beds are standing vertically.

(a) Flaggy slate with some bands of hard sandstone. Strike
S.65° W. Thicleness, 340 ft.

(b) Flaggy sandstone with interbedded bands of somewhat argilla-
ceous sandstone, ‘Thickness, 240 ft.

(a) Red shales weathering to chips at the surface. Thickness,
540 ft.

(b) Grey shales standing almost vertical. Thickness, 750 ft.

(a) Calcareous shales with several thin bands of flaggy. argilla-
ceous limestone. Strike S.63° W. Thickness, 880 ft.

(b) Soft beds, apparently argillites; an alluviated valley bottom.
‘Thickness, 600 ft.

of flaggy, argillaceous limestone, calcareous shale and occasional

belts of more massive and purer limestone. “Micro-cryptozoon”

structure appears in this section,

Yellowish to grey shales weathering to chips. Most of the out-

crops obscured by alluviation.

(a) Outcrop almost entirely obscured by alluviation. Some red
sandy shale outcrops in one place. Soft beds probably red
sandy shale and flags. Thickness, 660 it.

(b) Red sandstone with some interbedded red shale. Thick-
ness 74, ft.

(a) Hard quartzite forming a precipitous face. Thickness, 400 ft.

(b) Hard quartzite forming rugged knobs. Dip 90°, strike 64° 5.
Thickness, 180 {t.

(d) Quartzite of slopes on north side of the summit of the Range.
Thickness, 380 ft.

(e) Quartzite of the steep northern face. Dip 80°. Thickness,
370 ft.

(£4) Hard quartzite of the steep face. Dip 75°S. Thickness,
280 ft.

(g) Flaggy sandstone along the foot of the north face of the
Druid Range. Dip 75°S., strike 5,70°W. Thickness,
150 ft.

Total thickness.

302

In the upward succession beyond this horizon there is a further considerable
thickness of softer, arenaceous and argillaceous beds before arriving at the Cam-
brian Archaeocyathinae limestone.

Items (18) and (19) of the above section are evidently equivalents of the
main body of the great Wilpena Pound Formation. Ilere, however, the sand-
stone of the red section of the Pound Formation is poorly represented, but there
is a corresponding increase in argillites. It thus appears that the depositions of
this horizon, in the area where the Druid Range beds were accumulated, were more
argillaceous than their equivalents further to the west nearer to the old Cambrian
shore line.

The general accordance of the sedimentary record at the two localities dealt
with above is obvious and well shown in the following summarized statement.

Pound Druid

The arenaccous Pound Formation - - 4,106 3,740
Thickness between the top of the ABC
Quartzite and the base of the red arena-

ceous stage of the Pound Formation - 4,387 4,100
Thickness of sediments between the thick
oolitic limestone and the top of the ABC

Quartzite - - - - 7,003 7,961

15,496 14,901

COMPARISON WITH DATA FROM OTUER LOCALITIES

In earlier publications there are recorded measurements from other areas in
the Flinders Range (see references 1 to 4) of the same range of sediments as
detailed in the foregoing section at Wilpena Pound and the Druid Range. Con-
sidering the broader stages in this scdimentary series, we can now make some
general comparisons.

The Pound Formation is always presented as two divisions; an upper hard
white sandstone of more uniform thickness and a minor, lower red division which
fluctuates considerably in thickness from locality to locality. The red section, in
some areas, is less arenaceous and correspondingly more argillaceous. In view
of its variability this lower red portion of the Pound Pormation and the under-
lying beds as far down as the calcareous horizon with ‘‘Micro-cryptozoon” need
further investigation.

Where it is well represented the thickness of thd upper, white division is of
the order of 2,500 feet. Actually it is given as 2,556 feet at Wilpena Pound,
2470 feet at the Druid Range, and 2,640 fect at Brachina Creek. At the T’en-
Mile Creek on Oraparinna (Mawson 4) and at Parachilna Gorge (Mawson 1).
the apparent thickness is greatly reduced by faulting and overlap.

The red section of the Pound Formation is also of considerable thickness,
namely, 1,550 feet at the Pound, 1,270 feet at the Druid Range, and 1,010 feet
at Parachilna, At Brachina Creek a fault truncates this red, arenaceous
formation.

Next in descending order are passage beds bridging the gap between the red,
arenaceous beds above and the calcareous formation below. A mean thickness
of about 350 feet is indicated here.

‘The “micro-cryptozoon” limestone formation and underlying grey shales as
far down as the junction of the upper chocolate shales occupies a thickness of
1,790 feet at the Pound, 1,930 feet at the Druid Range, 1,215 feet at Brachina
Creek, and 1,457 feet at the Ten-Mile Creek. A greatly reduced thickness 1s
recorded at Parachilna Gorge, probably a result of faulting.

303

The upper chocolate shales are 2,277 feet thick at the Pound, 1,690 feet at

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, Incorporated"

See other formats